Apeosportv c5575

ApeosPort-V C7775 DocuCentre-V C7775


Administrator Guide

1
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Internet Explorer are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, Reader, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc.
PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.
ThinPrint is a registered trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries.
Unicode is a registered trademark of Unicode, Inc.
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
For information on license, refer to About License in the User Guide.
In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol .
Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.
As the copying machine contains a feature designed to prevent forging of certain documents, there may
be rare instances where copies or scanned images do not achieve the desired results.
The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk. Fuji
Xerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or
computer hacking.
Important
1. This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be
copied or modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.
2. Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
3. We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.
4. Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual.
Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting
from unauthorized operation of the equipment.
An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.
XEROX, the sphere of connectivity design, PDF Bridge, ContentsBridge, Smart WelcomEyes, ApeosWare,
CentreWare, and DocuShare are trademarks or registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the U.S. or Fuji
Xerox Co., Ltd.
DocuWorks is a trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
About the Machine
About the Machine
The machine is the Type 2 (T2) model of ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/

C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275, DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/
C3373/C2275.
The Type 2 (T2) model has the label, which is located on the back side of the front
cover.
Change Overview of the Type 2 (T2) Model

 [Enter Power Saver after Printing Ends] is added in [Power Saver Settings].
 Usability is improved in line selection for Fax/Internet Fax, by changing the line
display from the drop down menu to the button style.
 The filename format to be generated when fax is stored to folder can be specified.

If fax is selected for a targeted job in [Notify Job Completion by E-mail], fax
converted to PDF format can be attached to notification e-mail.

For the easy-to-follow machine operation, the message will be displayed when
you preview a fax or scan job.

The default for [File Format] displayed in the Scan screen is set to [PDF].

You can access to the forwarding destination server using authentication
information registered on CentreWare Internet Services, when you transferring
files with Scan to My Folder.
 Contents to be confirmed before printing is enhanced as follows, if a booklet job
is stored in the machine. The booklet icon will be displayed when you confirm the
stored job, and also the detail of the booklet setting will be displayed on the
preview screen.

In the [Auto Job Promotion] setting, you can specify the period of time until a
bypassed job is deleted automatically.

The DNS server address can be set in [IPv4 - DNS Server Setup] and [IPv6 - DNS
Server Setup] using the control panel.
 [Ping Connection Test] is added in [Protocol Settings].
 AirPrintTM of Apple Inc. is supported. AirPrint is a trademark of Apple Inc.
 Secondary Ethernet Kit is in store as an option. This addition has changed some
items in [Connectivity & Network Setup].
3
4
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About the Machine .............................................................................................................................................. 3

Change Overview of the Type 2 (T2) Model ....................................................................................... 3
1 Before Using the Machine .................................................................................................................. 17

Preface ................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Types of Manuals .............................................................................................................................................. 19
Using This Guide................................................................................................................................................ 20
Organization of This Guide ..................................................................................................................... 20
Conventions................................................................................................................................................... 21
Interface Cables................................................................................................................................................. 23
Using the USB Interface .......................................................................................................................... 23
Using the Parallel Interface.................................................................................................................... 24
Using the Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................................. 25
Power Saver Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 27
Changing the Interval for Entering Power Saver Mode............................................................... 27
Deactivating Smart WelcomEyes ......................................................................................................... 29
Customizing the Control Panel .................................................................................................................... 31
Changing the Screen Default................................................................................................................. 31
Setting the Screen After Auto Clear .................................................................................................... 32
Customizing the Button Layout ............................................................................................................ 33
Assigning Services to the Custom Buttons........................................................................................ 37
Adjusting Screen Brightness ................................................................................................................... 39
Touch Screen ....................................................................................................................................................... 40
Important Security Instructions (Type 2 (T2) Model Only) ............................................................. 42
Entering Text....................................................................................................................................................... 43
2 Paper and Other Media........................................................................................................................ 45

Paper Types ......................................................................................................................................................... 46
Loadable Quantity and Weight ............................................................................................................ 47
Supported Paper.......................................................................................................................................... 50
Loading Paper..................................................................................................................................................... 62
Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 ................................................................................................................ 62
Loading Paper in Tray 3 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed) ...................................... 63
Loading Paper in Tray 4 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed) ...................................... 64
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) .............................................................................................. 65
Loading Paper in Tray 6 (HCF B1) (Optional).................................................................................. 66
Changing the Paper Size................................................................................................................................. 68
Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4.......................................................................................... 68
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 3 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed)................ 69
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 4 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed)................ 70
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 6 (HCF B1) (Optional) ........................................................... 71
Changing the Paper Settings........................................................................................................................ 74
5
3 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................77
Replacing Consumables ..................................................................................................................................78
Replacing Toner Cartridges .....................................................................................................................80
Replacing Waste Toner Container R5 .................................................................................................82
Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4
(for Customers Having a Spot Maintenance Contract)................................................................85
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-A1)....................................................................................89
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-B1) ....................................................................................91
Replacing Staple Cartridge
(for C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker) ......................................................................92
Replacing Booklet Staple Cartridge (for Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1)....................94
Replacing Booklet Staple Cartridge (for C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker) ...........................95
Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container (for Finisher-B1) ...................................................97
Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container
(for C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker) ......................................................................98
Replacing Stamp (for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C).........................................99
Replacing Stamp (for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC) ................................... 101
Cleaning the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 102
Cleaning the Exterior............................................................................................................................... 102
Cleaning the Interior (LED Printheads)............................................................................................ 102
Cleaning the Touch Screen ................................................................................................................... 104
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass
(for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C).......................................................................... 104
Cleaning Document Cover and Document Glass
(for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC) ....................................................................... 105
Cleaning the White Chute and the Constant Velocity Transport Glass
(for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C).......................................................................... 106
Cleaning White Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass
(for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC) ....................................................................... 106
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers ........................................................................................... 108
Executing Calibration .................................................................................................................................... 109
Executing 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration.................................................................................... 112
Printing a Report/List..................................................................................................................................... 114
Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID ........................................................ 115
Setting Restore Tool....................................................................................................................................... 116
4 Machine Status..................................................................................................................................... 117

Overview of Machine Status....................................................................................................................... 118
Machine Information .................................................................................................................................... 119
General Information ............................................................................................................................... 119
Paper Tray Status ..................................................................................................................................... 120
Print Reports ............................................................................................................................................... 120
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists.................................................................................................. 129
Overwrite Hard Disk ................................................................................................................................. 130
Print Mode ................................................................................................................................................... 130
Fax Receiving Mode................................................................................................................................. 133
Faults.................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Supplies ............................................................................................................................................................... 135
6
Table of Contents
Billing Information..........................................................................................................................................136
Billing Information ...................................................................................................................................136
User Account Billing Information.......................................................................................................137
5 Tools..........................................................................................................................................................139
System Settings Procedure..........................................................................................................................140
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode..............................................................................140
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode .......................................140
Step 3 Selecting [Tools] ..........................................................................................................................141
Step 4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen..............................................................141
Step 5 Setting a Feature ........................................................................................................................143
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode.................................................................................143
Tools Menu List ................................................................................................................................................144
Common Service Settings ............................................................................................................................160
Machine Clock/Timers.............................................................................................................................160
Power Saver Settings ...............................................................................................................................163
Audio Tones.................................................................................................................................................164
Screen/Button Settings...........................................................................................................................165
Paper Tray Settings ..................................................................................................................................170
Image Quality Adjustment ...................................................................................................................174
Reports...........................................................................................................................................................176
Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................178
Watermark...................................................................................................................................................181
Secure Watermark ....................................................................................................................................183
Force Annotation ......................................................................................................................................185
Print Universal Unique ID ......................................................................................................................186
Image Log Control (ApeosPort Series Models Only)...................................................................187
Notify Job Completion by E-mail........................................................................................................190
Plug-in Settings ..........................................................................................................................................190
Other Settings.............................................................................................................................................190
Copy Service Settings.....................................................................................................................................205
Copy Tab - Features Allocation ...........................................................................................................205
Preset Buttons ............................................................................................................................................206
Copy Defaults .............................................................................................................................................206
Copy Control ...............................................................................................................................................212
Original Size Defaults ..............................................................................................................................214
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..........................................................................................................................214
Custom Colors.............................................................................................................................................214
Annotations - Create Comments ........................................................................................................214
Connectivity & Network Setup...................................................................................................................215
Port Settings................................................................................................................................................215
Protocol Settings .......................................................................................................................................221
Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name.............................................................................................225
Proxy Server Settings ...............................................................................................................................226
EP Proxy Server Setup..............................................................................................................................227
SIP Settings .................................................................................................................................................228
T.38 Settings ...............................................................................................................................................231
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings..................................................................................................231
7
Remote Authentication/Directory Service...................................................................................... 233
Security Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 238
Other Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 243
Print Service Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 244
Allocate Memory....................................................................................................................................... 244
Delete Form................................................................................................................................................. 245
Other Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 246
Scan Service Settings..................................................................................................................................... 251
Screen Defaults.......................................................................................................................................... 251
Scan Defaults ............................................................................................................................................. 252
Scan to PC Defaults ................................................................................................................................. 255
Original Size Defaults.............................................................................................................................. 255
Output Size Defaults ............................................................................................................................... 256
Reduce/Enlarge Presets .......................................................................................................................... 256
Other Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 256
Fax Service Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 260
Screen Defaults.......................................................................................................................................... 260
Fax Defaults................................................................................................................................................ 261
Fax Control .................................................................................................................................................. 262
Fax Received Options.............................................................................................................................. 268
Reduce/Enlarge Presets .......................................................................................................................... 270
Original Size Defaults.............................................................................................................................. 270
Local Terminal Information ................................................................................................................. 270
Internet Fax Control ................................................................................................................................ 272
E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings....................................................................................................... 275
E-mail Control............................................................................................................................................. 275
Address Book Settings................................................................................................................................... 278
Folder Service Settings.................................................................................................................................. 279
Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)............................................................ 281
Media Print Service Settings....................................................................................................................... 282
Stored File Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 283
Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)............................................... 286
Server Certificate Verification Settings............................................................................................ 286
Server Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 288
Other Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 289
Web Browser Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 290
Setup .................................................................................................................................................................... 292
Create Folder .............................................................................................................................................. 292
Stored Programming ............................................................................................................................... 294
Create Job Flow Sheet ............................................................................................................................ 294
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword ......................................................................................................... 303
Add Address Book Entry......................................................................................................................... 303
Create Fax Group Recipients................................................................................................................ 311
Add Fax Comment ................................................................................................................................... 312
Paper Tray Attributes .............................................................................................................................. 312
Accounting......................................................................................................................................................... 313
8
Table of Contents
Create/View User Accounts...................................................................................................................313

View Accounts ............................................................................................................................................316
Reset User Accounts.................................................................................................................................317
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)....................................................................................318
Accounting Type........................................................................................................................................318
Accounting Login Screen Settings......................................................................................................319
Fax Billing Data..........................................................................................................................................320
Accounting/Billing Device Settings ....................................................................................................320
Authentication/Security Settings..............................................................................................................323
System Administrator Settings............................................................................................................323
Authentication ...........................................................................................................................................324
Allow User to Disable Active Settings ...............................................................................................332
Job Status Default ....................................................................................................................................332
Overwrite Hard Disk..................................................................................................................................333
6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings........................................................................................335

Installation of CentreWare Internet Services ......................................................................................336
Preparations ................................................................................................................................................336
Configuration on the Machine ............................................................................................................336
Starting CentreWare Internet Services...................................................................................................338
Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services .........................................339
7 Printer Environment Settings ..........................................................................................................343

Print Overview ...................................................................................................................................................344
Installation When Using Parallel Port.....................................................................................................346
Step 1 Preparations..................................................................................................................................346
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ..............................................................................................346
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ...........................................................................................347
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items.................................................................................347
Installation When Using USB Port ...........................................................................................................349
Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100) .............................................................................351
Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) ..............................................................354
8 E-mail Environment Settings ...........................................................................................................357

E-mail Overview................................................................................................................................................358
Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................359
9
Installation Procedures................................................................................................................................. 361
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ................................................................................. 361
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment .......................................................................................... 362
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items................................................................................. 363
9 Scanner Environment Settings........................................................................................................365

Scan Service Overview................................................................................................................................... 366
Configuration of Store to Folder............................................................................................................... 368
Step 2 Registering a Folder................................................................................................................... 369
Step 3 Configuring on the Computer ............................................................................................... 369
Configuration of Scan to PC ....................................................................................................................... 370
Step 1 Preparations ................................................................................................................................. 370
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer........................................................................................... 372
Configuration of Store to USB................................................................................................................... 373
Step 1 Available USB Memory Devices............................................................................................ 373
Step 2 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items .................................................................. 373
Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning) ................................................... 374
Step 2 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP ............................................................................... 374
Step 3 Configuring the SNMP Port .................................................................................................... 375
Configuration of Scan to My Folder (ApeosPort Series Models Only) ....................................... 377
Step 2 Enabling SMB Port and Setting up TCP/IP....................................................................... 378
Step 3 Configuring Remote Authentication .................................................................................. 378
Step 4 Configuring Scan to My Folder ............................................................................................. 380
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets ............................................................................................................ 382
Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP ............................................................................... 382
Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port .................................................................................................... 383
Configuration of Store & Send Link ......................................................................................................... 384
Step 1 Configuring E-mail ..................................................................................................................... 384
Step 2 Enabling Authentication.......................................................................................................... 384
Step 3 Other Settings .............................................................................................................................. 384
Step 4 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items .................................................................. 384
Configuration of Store to WSD ................................................................................................................. 386
Step 2 Enabling Port................................................................................................................................ 386
Step 3 Confirmation on the Computer ............................................................................................ 387
10 Using IP Fax (SIP)................................................................................................................................ 389

IP Fax (SIP) Overview .................................................................................................................................... 390
Preparations ...................................................................................................................................................... 390
System Requirements for the Machine ........................................................................................... 390
10
Table of Contents
Settings by System Configuration .....................................................................................................390

Installation Procedures .................................................................................................................................391
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP..................................................................................391
Step 2 Configuring the SIP User Name............................................................................................392
Step 3 Configuring Fax Environment................................................................................................392
Step 4 Configuring the SIP Server......................................................................................................393
Step 5 Registering the VoIP Gateway ..............................................................................................394
11 Using the Internet Fax Service........................................................................................................397

Internet Fax Overview ..................................................................................................................................398
Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................398
System Requirements for the Machine............................................................................................398
E-Mail Environment..................................................................................................................................398
Installation Procedures .................................................................................................................................400
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP..................................................................................400
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment ..........................................................................................401
Step 3 Testing the Internet Fax ..........................................................................................................402
12 Using the Server Fax Service............................................................................................................403

Server Fax Overview ......................................................................................................................................404
Preparations ......................................................................................................................................................404
System Requirements for the Machine............................................................................................404
Installation Procedure ...................................................................................................................................405
Installation Overview...............................................................................................................................405
Step 1 Fax Settings...................................................................................................................................405
Step 2 Setting the Server Fax Feature..............................................................................................406
13 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings .................................................................................409

Encryption and Digital Signature Overview..........................................................................................410
Types of Certificate..................................................................................................................................410
Encryption Features for Communication ........................................................................................410
Encryption and Digital-Signature Features for Scan Files........................................................411
Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption .......................................................................412
Step1 Configuration on the Machine ...............................................................................................412
Step2 Configuration on the Computer.............................................................................................413
Configuration of Encryption using IPsec ...............................................................................................414
Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate........................................................................414
Step2 Configuration on the Machine (Configuration of IPsec).............................................415
Step3 Configuration on the Computer.............................................................................................416
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature .....................................................................417
Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient .............................................................................419
Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature (ApeosPort Series Models Only).............421
11
Step2 Configuration on the Computer ............................................................................................ 423
14 Authentication and Accounting Features...................................................................................425

Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature...................................................................... 426
Types of User.............................................................................................................................................. 426
User Roles and Authorization Groups............................................................................................... 426
Access Control ............................................................................................................................................ 427
Types of Authentication ........................................................................................................................ 428
Types of Account Administration....................................................................................................... 429
Services Controlled by Authentication ................................................................................................... 434
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 434
Combination of Authentication and Account Administration types................................... 434
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders................................................................................ 437
Creating / Using Job Flow Sheet......................................................................................................... 437
Creating / Using Folder........................................................................................................................... 438
Configuration for Authentication............................................................................................................. 440
Installation Overview .............................................................................................................................. 440
Enabling Authentication........................................................................................................................ 440
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings................................................................. 443
Creating an Authorization Group....................................................................................................... 443
Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional) ...................................................................................... 445
Step 2 Logout Method Using the Smart Card .............................................................................. 445
Step 3 Registering Smart Card Information.................................................................................. 446
Configuration for Account Administration........................................................................................... 447
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type............................................................................................... 447
Step 2 Registering User Information................................................................................................ 447
User Authentication Operations ............................................................................................................... 449
Authenticating Login Users .................................................................................................................. 449
Changing Passcode.................................................................................................................................. 450
15 Problem Solving.................................................................................................................................... 451

Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................... 452
Machine Trouble.............................................................................................................................................. 453
Image Quality Trouble.................................................................................................................................. 458
Trouble during Copying................................................................................................................................ 464
Unable to Copy.......................................................................................................................................... 464
The Copy Result is Not What was Expected .................................................................................. 465
Trouble during Printing................................................................................................................................. 468
Unable to Print........................................................................................................................................... 468
The Print Result is Not What was Expected ................................................................................... 469
Trouble during Faxing ................................................................................................................................... 471
Sending Problems ..................................................................................................................................... 471
Receiving Problems .................................................................................................................................. 475
Trouble during Scanning .............................................................................................................................. 479
Unable to Scan with the Machine...................................................................................................... 479
Unable to Import Scanned Documents to the Computer........................................................ 480
12
Table of Contents
Unable to Send a Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB)..................................481

Unable to Send E-mail.............................................................................................................................482
The Image is not What was Expected..............................................................................................482
Network-related Problems ...........................................................................................................................484
When you cannot communicate with other SMB machines ...................................................484
When using TCP/IP...................................................................................................................................484
CentreWare Internet Services Problems..........................................................................................485
E-mail Features Problems ......................................................................................................................486
Internet/Intranet Connection Problems..........................................................................................487
IPv4 and IPv6 Connection Problems.................................................................................................489
Media Print - Text Trouble ...........................................................................................................................492
Media Print - Photos Trouble ......................................................................................................................493
Error Code...........................................................................................................................................................494
Other Errors..................................................................................................................................................593
Paper Jams .........................................................................................................................................................594
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover A ..........................................................................................................595
Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover C...................................................................................................596
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover D ..........................................................................................................596
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 ....................................................................................................................597
Paper Jams in Tray 3 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed) ..........................................598
Paper Jams in Tray 4 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed) ..........................................598
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)...................................................................................................599
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (HCF B1) (Optional)......................................................................................600
Paper Jams in Duplex Module B..........................................................................................................602
Paper Jams in Finisher-A1......................................................................................................................602
Paper Jams in Finisher-B1......................................................................................................................603
Paper Jams in C3 Finisher / C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker...................................................604
Paper Jams in the Folder Unit CD1....................................................................................................611
Document Jams ...............................................................................................................................................615
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C ....................................................................................615
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC (optional).............................................................616
Stapler Faults ....................................................................................................................................................619
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-A1)........................................................................620
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-B1)........................................................................621
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge
(for C3 Finisher and C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)................................................................623
Booklet Staple Jams in Booklet Staple Cartridge
(for C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker).................................................................................................624
16 Appendix .................................................................................................................................................627
Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................628
Printable Area ...................................................................................................................................................653
Standard Printable Area.........................................................................................................................653
Extended Printable Area.........................................................................................................................653
Internal Fonts ...................................................................................................................................................654
Optional Components ...................................................................................................................................656
Fold Position Adjustment .............................................................................................................................659
13
Fold Position Adjustment ...................................................................................................................... 659
Single Fold Position Adjustment......................................................................................................... 660
Booklet Position Adjustment................................................................................................................ 661
C Fold Position Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 663
Z Fold Position Adjustment................................................................................................................... 664
Z Fold Half Sheet Position Adjustment............................................................................................ 665
Adjust Image Transfer.................................................................................................................................. 667
Adjusting the Transfer Output Value ............................................................................................... 667
ESC/P-K Emulation.......................................................................................................................................... 670
Emulation..................................................................................................................................................... 670
Fonts .............................................................................................................................................................. 671
Output Feature .......................................................................................................................................... 671
ESC/P-K Emulation Print Features...................................................................................................... 671
ESC/P-K Emulation Settings.................................................................................................................. 672
Magnification Table ................................................................................................................................ 678
Paper Size and Number of Printable Characters.......................................................................... 683
PDF Direct Print................................................................................................................................................ 685
PDF Direct Print Settings........................................................................................................................ 685
DocuWorks Direct Print................................................................................................................................. 687
DocuWorks Direct Print Settings......................................................................................................... 687
PCL Emulation .................................................................................................................................................. 689
Emulation..................................................................................................................................................... 689
Fonts .............................................................................................................................................................. 690
Output Feature .......................................................................................................................................... 691
PCL Emulation Settings .......................................................................................................................... 691
HP-GL/2 Emulation ......................................................................................................................................... 697
Emulation..................................................................................................................................................... 697
Fonts .............................................................................................................................................................. 697
Output Feature .......................................................................................................................................... 698
Factory Default Settings........................................................................................................................ 698
HP-GL/2 Emulation Settings................................................................................................................. 699
Hard Clip Area ............................................................................................................................................ 705
Printable Area............................................................................................................................................. 706
Auto Layout................................................................................................................................................. 708
Notes and Restrictions .................................................................................................................................. 715
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine .................................................................... 715
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature........................................................... 720
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Print Feature ........................................................... 721
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Scan Features ......................................................... 724
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Fax Feature.............................................................. 730
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the E-mail/Internet Fax Feature ............................. 731
Notes and Restrictions for IP Fax (SIP)............................................................................................ 736
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting with Internet Service Provider ......................... 738
Notes and Restrictions on the Interrupt Mode............................................................................. 740
Notes and Restrictions on Folders...................................................................................................... 742
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting to Internet or Intranet........................................ 742
Notes and Restrictions when Operating from Computers ....................................................... 743
14
Table of Contents
Notes and Restrictions on Job Flows.................................................................................................744

Notes and Restrictions on the Security Features .........................................................................745
Notes and Restrictions on the Authentication and Accounting Features..........................746
Notes and Restrictions for Using SMB..............................................................................................746
Notes and Restrictions for Using TCP/IP.........................................................................................747
Notes and Restriction for Using Secondary Ethernet (Optional)
(Type 2 (T2) Model Only).......................................................................................................................748
Notes and Restrictions for Using Bonjour .......................................................................................749
Notes and Restrictions for IPv6 Connection ..................................................................................749
Notes and Restrictions for Print E-mail.............................................................................................751
Using the Telephone......................................................................................................................................752
Placing a Call...............................................................................................................................................752
Activity Report ..................................................................................................................................................754
EP System ...........................................................................................................................................................758
Glossary ...............................................................................................................................................................759
Index.................................................................................................................................................................761
15
16
1 Before Using the Machine
This chapter describes the organization of this guide and conventions used in this guide.
 Preface ...............................................................................................................................................18

Types of Manuals ..........................................................................................................................19
 Using This Guide............................................................................................................................20
 Interface Cables.............................................................................................................................23

Power Saver Mode.........................................................................................................................27
 Customizing the Control Panel.................................................................................................31

Touch Screen ...................................................................................................................................40
 Important Security Instructions (Type 2 (T2) Model Only) .........................................42
 Entering Text...................................................................................................................................43
Preface
Thank you for selecting the ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/

C2275, DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275 (hereafter
Before Using the Machine
referred to as "the machine").

This guide is intended for system administrators, and provides maintenance information
such as how to replace consumables, how to configure network, and troubleshooting
procedures.
The guide assumes that you are familiar with a personal computer and knowledgeable of
computer networks. When you need additional information, refer to the manuals provided
with the personal computer, operating system, and network products.
After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case
you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.
1 For more information on how to copy, print, scan, and fax, refer to the User Guide. For
information about optional components for the Print feature, refer to the guide provided
with each optional component.
Warning:
The equipment will be inoperable when main power fails.
When you use this machine, we recommend that you change the system administrator's user ID and
passcode immediately after installing the machine.
For more information on changing the user ID and passcode, refer to "System Administrator Settings"
(P.323).
18
Types of Manuals
Types of Manuals
The following guides are provided with the machine.

Accompanying Manuals
 User Guide (Document CD-ROM)

The guide describes all the necessary steps for copy, print, scan, and fax.
 Administrator Guide (this guide) (Document CD-ROM)

The guide is intended for system administrators, and describes how to configure network
and how to solve problems that may occur with the machine. This guide also describes daily
maintenance and the system settings procedures.
 Quick Reference Guide (Booklet) 1

The guide describes the basic operations of the machine, as well as daily management and
maintenance.
 Security Function Supplementary Guide (Document CD-ROM)

The guide is intended for the manager and system administrator of the organization where
the machine is installed, and describes the setup procedures related to security.
 Manual (HTML)
The manual describes installation and configuration procedures for print drivers and the
printer environment. This manual is included in the Driver CD Kit.
 Print Driver Help

The help describes the print features and operations.
 CentreWare Internet Services Help

The help describes how to change various settings of the machine using a web browser, and
how to import scanned data to a computer from the machine.
Important • To display the online help for CentreWare Internet Services, users need to have the environment to
connect to the Internet. The communication fee shall be borne by you.
Guides for Optional Components

Optional components are available for the machine. Some of them come with user guides.
The guides for optional components describe all the necessary steps for using the optional
components and installing the software.
19
Using This Guide
This guide is intended for system administrators, and provides maintenance information
such as how to replace consumables, how to configure network, and troubleshooting
procedures.
Organization of This Guide

This guide consists of the following chapters.
 1 Before Using the Machine

Describes the organization of this guide and conventions.
1  2 Paper and Other Media

Describes the types of paper and other media that you can use on the machine and how to
load media in a tray.
 3 Maintenance
Describes how to replace consumables and to clean the machine.
 4 Machine Status
Describes how to check the faults that occurred on the machine and to print various reports/
lists.
 5 Tools
Describes the procedures to set up the system.
 6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings

Describes how to use CentreWare Internet Services.
 7 Printer Environment Settings

Describes the settings to use the Print feature on the machine.
 8 E-mail Environment Settings

Describes the settings to use various services via e-mail on the machine.
 9 Scanner Environment Settings

Describes the settings to use the Scan services on the machine.
 10 Using IP Fax (SIP)

Describes the settings to use the IP fax (SIP) feature on the machine.
 11 Using the Internet Fax Service

Describes the settings to use the services via the Internet Fax service on the machine.
 12 Using the Server Fax Service

Describes how to use the Server Fax service on the machine.
 13 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

Describes how to configure the machine to use the Encryption and the Digital Signature
features with your communications and documents.
20
Using This Guide
 14 Authentication and Accounting Features

The machine has the Authentication feature to restrict the availability of services for each
feature and the Accounting feature to manage the use of each feature based on the Login
Type selected.

 15 Problem Solving
Describes troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems with the machine.
 16 Appendix
Describes the specifications of the machine, optional accessories, and cautions/restrictions.
Conventions
 The screen shots and illustrations used in this guide vary depending on the machine
configuration and optional components installed. Some of the items in the screen shots 1
may not be displayed or available depending on your machine configuration.
 The procedures in this guide may vary depending on the driver and utility software being
used due to the upgrades.

In this guide, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.

The following terms are used in this guide:
Important : Important information that you should read.
Note : Additional information on operations or features.
 The following symbols are used in this guide:
" " : 
A cross-reference included in this guide.

Names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen messages and
input text.
[ ] :  Folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed on
the touch screen.
 Names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes
displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and menu
names.
< > button : Hardware buttons on the control panel.
< > key : Keys on the keyboard of the computer.
21
> :  Path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel.

For example: When you see the procedure "select [Tools] >
[Setup] > [Create Folder]", this means that you need to select
[Tools], select [Setup], and then select [Create Folder].

Path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.
For example: When you see the procedure "to search for files
and folders, click [Start] > [Search] > [For Files or Folders]", this
means that you need to click [Start], click [Search], and then
click [For Files or Folders] to search for files and folders.
 Cross-reference
For example: "Refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" >
"Audio Tones" in the Administrator Guide."
The sentence above means that it is recommended to refer to
1 the section "Audio Tones" in "Common Service Settings" in
chapter 5 "Tools" of the Administrator Guide.
 Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:
, ,Long Edge Feed (LEF):Loading the document or paper in portrait orientation when
viewed from the front of the machine.
, ,Short Edge Feed (SEF):Loading the document or paper in landscape orientation
when viewed from the front of the machine.
LEF Orientation SEF Orientation
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
22
Interface Cables
Interface Cables
When you connect the machine directly to your computer, use the USB interface or parallel
interface (optional). When you connect the machine to a network, use the Ethernet

interface.
Using the USB Interface

This section describes the installation procedures for the USB interface.
Note • The USB interface of the machine supports USB 2.0.
1 Press the push-button power switch to switch off the power.

2 Make sure that the touch screen is blank and the <Power Saver> button is not lit.
1
3 Open the front cover.
4 Press the main power switch to the [ ] position to switch off the main power.
5 Remove the rear right cover.
6 Connect the USB cable to the USB 2.0 interface

connector.
7 Return the rear right cover to its original

position.
8 Connect the other end of the USB cable to the computer.

9 Press the main power switch to the [ | ] position to switch on the main power.
10 Close the front cover.
11 Press the push-button power switch to switch on the power.
23
12 Restart the computer.

For more information on setting items, refer to "Printer Environment Settings" (P.343).
Using the Parallel Interface

This section describes the installation procedures for the Parallel interface.
Note • To connect your computer using a parallel port, the Parallel Port Kit (optional) is required. For more
information on the optional component, refer to "Optional Components" (P.656).
1 Press the push-button power switch to switch off the power.

1 4 Press the main power switch to the [ ] position to switch off the main power.
6 Connect the converting adapter to the parallel

interface connector of the machine, and then
connect the adapter to the converting
connector of the interface cable and lock the
clasps on both sides.

position.
8 Connect the other end of the cable to the computer.

12 Restart the computer.
24
Interface Cables
Using the Ethernet Interface

This section describes the installation procedures for the Ethernet interface.
The Ethernet interface of the machine supports the following three types.


1000BASE-T (optional)

100BASE-TX
 10BASE-T
Note • 1000BASE-T is not supported for some models. Gigabit Ethernet (optional) or Secondary Ethernet
(optional) is required.
• The machine supports IEEE802.3az (a compliance standard of wired LAN) which reduces the power
consumption of the Ethernet equipments while suspending data transmission. To use this feature,
both of the equipments need to support IEEE802.3az.
This section describes the installation procedures for the Ethernet interface.
1 Press the push-button power switch to switch off the power. 1

4 Press the main power switch to the [ ] position to switch off the main power.
6 Connect the network cable to the Ethernet interface connector.

Note • Always use the correct network cable with your network connection. When you replace the cable,
contact our Customer Support Center.
 When the Secondary Ethernet (optional) is

not installed
Note • To use as 1000BASE-T, the Gigabit Ethernet
(optional) is required.
• To also use as the Gigabit Ethernet interface
connector, install the Gigabit Ethernet
(optional).
 When the Secondary Ethernet (optional) is

installed
Note • Secondary Ethernet can be used as
1000BASE-T.
Furthermore, note that Gigabit Ethernet
(optional) is required to use the conventional*
Ethernet interface connector as 1000BASE-T.
* : When the option is not installed.
25

position.
1
26
Power Saver Mode
Power Saver Mode
The machine is equipped with the Power Saver mode that reduces the power consumption
by saving the electricity to the machine when no copy or print data is received for a specified

time.
The Power Saver has two modes: the Low Power mode and the Sleep mode.
When you do not use the machine for a specified period of time, the machine enters the Low
Power mode.
When it reaches the specified time in the Low Power mode, the machine then enters the
Sleep mode.
Note • The timer to enter the Power Saver mode doesn't work while Smart WelcomEyes detects human
presence.
Changing the Interval for Entering Power Saver Mode 1

You can set the time to elapse until the machine enters the Low Power mode and the Sleep
mode from 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute increments.
Note • If the preset time period is the same for the Low Power mode and the Sleep mode, the machine
directly enters the Sleep mode without entering the Low Power mode first.
• When the machine operates normal printing, Sample Set printing, or printing received fax
documents while the control panel remains lit off and the machine is in the Power Saver mode, only
the output device exits the Power Server mode. In this case, the machine enters the Sleep mode 15
seconds later without following this setting by factory default.
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.
<Log In/Out> button
2 Enter the system administrator's user ID with

the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed
on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and
enter the system administrator's passcode, and
select [Enter].
Note • The default user ID is "11111".
• The default passcode is "x-admin".
3 Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

Note • When the Services Home screen is not
displayed on the touch screen, press the
<Services Home> button.
27
4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service

Settings] > [Power Saver Settings].
5 Select [Power Saver Timers], and then select

[Change Settings].
1
6 Using [ ] and [ ], set the time to elapse until
entering the Power Saver mode, in 1 minute
increments.
 From Last Operation to Low Power Mode

Set the time to elapse from the last operation until the machine enters the Low Power mode.
Note • The default value for [From Last Operation to Low Power Mode] is 1 minute. You cannot disable the
Low Power mode.
• The timer does not start counting until the operator leaves the detectable area of Smart
WelcomEyes. The Access Lamp is lit while the machine detects human presence.
 From Last Operation to Sleep Mode

Set the time to elapse from the last operation until the machine enters the Sleep mode.
Note • The default value for [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] is 1 minute. To make the machine enter
the Low Power mode, set a longer period of time for [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] than for
[From Last Operation to Low Power Mode].
WelcomEyes. The Access Lamp is lit while the machine detects human presence.
7 Select [Save].
8 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
9 Select [Close].
28
Power Saver Mode
Deactivating Smart WelcomEyes

When you do not use Smart WelcomEyes, follow the procedures below.

<Log In/Out> button

1
on the screen, and select [Enter]. Select [Tools]
on the Services Home screen.


Settings] > [Power Saver Settings].
5 Select [Smart WelcomEyes] and then [Change

Settings].
6 Select [Deactivated] and then [Save].
29
Important • To deactivate Smart WelcomEyes, select

[Deactivated]. To save power by using Smart
WelcomEyes, select [Activated]. For details,
refer to "Smart WelcomEyes" (P.164).

Note • When you configure settings under [System Settings] or [Setup] and then press the <Services Home>
button, the screen directly goes back to the Services Home screen.
30
Customizing the Control Panel
You can change the services displayed on the touch screen or the features assigned to the
buttons to make best use of the machine.

This section describes how to change the screen default, the services displayed after Auto
Clear, the services displayed on the Services Home screen, and the services assigned to the
custom buttons, and how to adjust the screen brightness.
For information on how to change the other settings of the control panel, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.165).
Changing the Screen Default

You can change the screen displayed when the machine is turned on or the Power Saver
mode is deactivated.
The Services Home screen is displayed by factory default. 1
<Log In/Out> button

select [Enter].


Settings] > [Screen/Button Settings].
31
5 Select [Screen Default], and then select

[Change Settings].
Note • Select [ ] to display the previous screen or
[ ] to display the next screen.
6 Select a service you want to display.

1
7 Select [Save].
Setting the Screen After Auto Clear

You can select the screen to be displayed after Auto Clear from [Last Selection Screen] or
[Services Home] can be selected.
For information on Auto Clear, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.161).
<Log In/Out> button
2 Enter the system administrator’s user ID with

select [Enter].

32


5 Select [Screen After Auto Clear], and then
select [Change Settings].
1
6 Select [Last Selection Screen] or [Services
Home].
7 Select [Save].
Customizing the Button Layout

You can customize the services and the button layout displayed on the Services Home
screen when you press the <Services Home> button on the control panel.
Note • Services not supported by the machine will
not be displayed on the screen. Grayed out
buttons cannot be used as a result of
malfunctioning.
The following services can be displayed on the
service buttons.
Note • The available services vary depending on the
installed options.
 Copy Service buttons Additional feature
buttons
 Fax/Internet Fax

E-mail
 Simple Copy
 Simple Fax
 Scan to PC
 Store to Folder
* WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

Network Scanning (ApeosPort Series Models
only)
 Store to USB

Send from Folder
33
 Fax Received - Line 1 (Folder NNN)

 Fax Received - SIP (Folder NNN)
Note • The folder number specified in Folder Selector Setup will be displayed instead of "NNN". When the
folder number is not specified, "(Folder Not Set)" will be displayed instead of "NNN".

Stored Programming
Note • This services is displayed when the User Authentication feature is used.

Store & Send Link
Note • This service is displayed when the User Authentication feature is used.
 Job Flow Sheets (ApeosPort Series Models only)
1 

Web Applications (ApeosPort Series Models only)
Media Print - Text

Media Print - Photos

Secure Print
 Sample Set
 Delayed Print

Charge Print
 Private Charge Print
 Store to WSD
Note • WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

Custom Services
Note • [Custom Services] can be displayed when any custom service is installed on the machine. For more
information on the custom services, contact our Customer Support Center.
The following services can be displayed on the additional feature buttons.

 Language
 Screen Brightness
 Setup
 Calibration

Activity Report
 Fax Receiving Mode
 Print Mode

Lockout Printer/Release Printer
Note • [Lockout Printer]/[Release Printer] is not displayed by default. To display this feature, select [Allow
User to Lock Out] in [Printer Lockout] under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings]
> [Machine Clock/Timers], and then assign [Disable Auto Printing] to a button on the [Services Home
- Additional Features] screen.
Services Home
You can select service buttons, which are displayed on the Services Home screen.
If you select [(Not Assigned)], the position of the selected button becomes blank.
34

<Log In/Out> button

enter the system administrator's passcode, and 1
select [Enter].

5 Select [Services Home], and then select

[Change Settings].
6 Select the position where you want to assign a

service.
• The layout of the buttons in this screen
corresponds to the layout of those on the
Services Home screen.
35
7 Select the service to assign to the selected

position.
• You cannot assign the same feature to more
than one button.
8 Select [Save].
9 Select [Save].
Services Home - Additional Features

You can select additional feature buttons, which are displayed on the Services Home screen.
1 If you select [(Not Assigned)], the position of the selected button becomes blank.
You cannot assign [Setup] to [(Not Assigned)]. If you do not want to display the [Setup]
button, select the [Show this in Admin mode] check box.
<Log In/Out> button

select [Enter].


36
5 Select [Services Home - Additional Features],

and then select [Change Settings].

6 Select the position where you want to assign an
additional feature.
• The layout of the buttons in this screen
corresponds to the layout of those on the
1
7 Select a service you want to display on the
• You cannot assign the same feature to more
than one button.
8 Select [Save].
9 Select [Save].
Assigning Services to the Custom Buttons

You can assign services to the <Copy>, <(Not in Use)>, and <Review> buttons on the control
panel.
Assigning a service to a custom button allows you to switch to this service without having to
return to the Services Home screen. If you do not need to assign any service to a custom
button, select [(Not Set)].
By factory default, the following services are assigned to each button: [Copy] for the <Copy>
button, [Fax] for the <(Not in Use)> button (only for the machine with the Fax service), and
[Review] for the <Review> button.
This section describes how to assign [Send from Folder] to the <(Not in Use)> button, as an
example.
Note • After you change the assignment, apply the labels provided with the machine. When you assign a
service for which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down the service name with a
permanent marker. The labels include the services that are not supported by the machine.
• "Fax" is assigned to <Custom Button 2> only when the Fax service is available to the model. Use a
"Fax" label on "Not in Use" on the control panel. If Fax is not available, "Fax" is not assigned to this
button.
37

<Log In/Out> button

1 enter the system administrator's passcode, and
select [Enter].


5 Select [Custom Button 2], and then select

[Change Settings].
6 Select [Send from Folder].

7 Select [Save].
38
Adjusting Screen Brightness

You can adjust the screen brightness of the screen on the Services Home screen.
1 Select [Screen Brightness] on the Services Home screen.

2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the screen brightness.
3 Select [Save].
To adjust the screen brightness from the [Tools] screen, refer to "Screen Brightness" (P.167). 1
39
Touch Screen
On the touch screen of the machine, you can switch pages and scroll a list by the following
operations.
Note • The touch screen of the control panel used in the machine is pressure-sensitive. Adjust the power to
touch the screen. You can also use the touch-pen.
• You can set whether to enable flick and double-tap or not. For more information, refer to "Screen/
Button Settings" (P.165).
 Drag
Slide your finger to the position desired with your finger touched the touch screen.
Drag the touch screen from side to side to switch
pages.
1
Drag the touch screen up and down to scroll a list.

Note • During drag, scrolling stops when you move your
finger away from the touch screen.
 Flick
Slide your finger quickly to the position desired and release it.
Flick the touch screen from side to side or up and
down to switch pages.
Flick the touch screen up and down to scroll a list

Note • During flick, scrolling continues for a while even
after you move your finger away from the touch
screen.
 Tap
Touch the touch screen and move your finger away from the screen quickly. To tap the same
position of the screen twice is called double-tap.
Tap the touch screen to switch the thumbnail bar to be displayed or not.
40
Touch Screen
Note • The operation of pinch in or pinch out (moving two

fingers inward or outward) to zoom in or out is not
supported.

Double-tap a previewed image to enlarge the image.
41
Important Security Instructions (Type 2 (T2) Model Only)
The Security Warning screen is displayed before the Services Home screen when any one of
the following conditions is fulfilled and you enter the System Administration mode.
- The system administrator’s user ID and passcode are default values.

- The SNMP protocol’s community name and authentication password are default values.
- The Global IP Address is used and [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required].
To use the machine more safely, we recommend that you change the settings immediately
after installing the machine.
 Change the system administrator's user ID and passcode, and SNMP protocol's
1 community name and authentication password from the default values.
Changing these settings prevents the machine from the malicious person's attacks
(changing settings or exploitation of information).
Note • Changing the system administrator's user ID and passcode, and SNMP protocol's community name
and authentication password from the default values affects the behavior of cooperative software
or utilities. Check the influence before changing these settings.
 When using the Global IP Address on the machine, set the IP filtering setting to prevent
the machine from illegal access from an external network (browsing job history or
accessing folders).

Set [Login Type] to [Login to Local Accounts] or [Login to Remote Accounts].
Select [Login to Local Accounts] to use the user information registered on the machine to
manage authentication. Only the users who have succeeded in the authentication can
use the machine. When using this method, entering user ID or using a smart card is
required to log in.
Select [Login to Remote Accounts] to use the user information registered on a remote
authentication server to manage authentication.
For information on how to change the system administrator's user ID and passcode, refer to "System Administrator
Settings" (P.323).
For information on how to change the SNMP authentication information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on how to set the IP filtering setting, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on how to set the login type, refer to "Login Type" (P.324). For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
42
Entering Text
Entering Text
During operations, a screen for entering text sometimes appears. The following describes
how to enter text.

You can enter the following characters: numerals, alphabets, and symbols
Item Description 1
Entering alphabets and numerals To enter uppercase letters, select [Shift]. To return to the
lowercase letters, select [Shift] again.
Entering symbols Select [More Characters].
Note • Depending on the keyboard, you can select a symbol
from the pull-up options displayed on the bottom left
of the screen.
Entering a space Select [Space].
Deleting characters Select [Backspace] to delete one character at a time.
Select [Delete Text] to delete all characters.
43
44
2 Paper and Other Media
This chapter describes the paper that can be used with the machine, precautions when
handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.
 Paper Types......................................................................................................................................46

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................62
 Changing the Paper Size.............................................................................................................68
 Changing the Paper Settings....................................................................................................74
Paper Types
This section describes the paper that can be used with this machine.
Use of unrecommended paper may result in paper jams, lower print quality, malfunctions,
or damage to the machine. To achieve optimum performance of the machine, we
recommend that you use only paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.
If you desire to use paper other than the paper recommended by Fuji Xerox, contact our
Paper and Other Media
Customer Support Center.
WARNING
Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or
conductively-coated paper. When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and
eventually a fire accident.
Important • Moisture generated by water, rain, or vapor may cause the printed images to fade. For more
2 information, contact our Customer Support Center.
46
Paper Types
Loadable Quantity and Weight
Loadable
Paper Tray Loadable Paper Loadable Paper
Quantity*
Tray 1 Basis Weight: 52 to 500 sheets Plain (60 - 79 gsm)
Tray 2 to 4 (3 Tray 300 gsm Bond (80 - 105 gsm)
Module) Ream Weight: 44.7 - Recycled (60 - 79 gsm)

258 kg Plain Reload (60 - 79 gsm)
Punched (60 - 105 gsm)
Tray 3 (Tandem Tray) 867 sheets
Letterhead (60 - 105 gsm)
Tray 4 (Tandem Tray) 1,133 sheets Transparency
Lightweight (52 - 59 gsm)
Heavyweight (106 - 169 gsm)
HW Reload (106 - 169 gsm)
Extra-HW (170 - 256 gsm)
X-HW Reload (170- 256 gsm)
X-HW Plus (257 - 300 gsm)
X-HW Plus Reload (257 - 300 2
gsm)
Gloss (106 - 169 gsm)
Gloss Reload (106 - 169 gsm)
Heavyweight Gloss (170 - 256
gsm)
HW Gloss Reload (170 - 256 gsm)
Labels (106 - 169 gsm)
Pre-Printed (60 - 105 gsm)
Custom Paper 1 (60 - 79 gsm)
Other
Heavyweight A (106 - 169 gsm)
Heavyweight B (106 - 169 gsm)
Heavyweight C (106 - 169 gsm)
Heavyweight S (106 - 169 gsm)
HW A Reload (106 - 169 gsm)
HW B Reload (106 - 169 gsm)
HW C Reload (106 - 169 gsm)
HW S Reload (106 - 169 gsm)
Extra-HW A (170 - 256 gsm)
Extra-HW B (170 - 256 gsm)
Extra-HW C (170 - 256 gsm)
Extra-HW D (170 - 256 gsm)
Extra-HW S (170 - 256 gsm)
X-HW A Reload (170 - 256 gsm)
X-HW B Reload (170 - 256 gsm)
X-HW C Reload (170 - 256 gsm)
X-HW D Reload (170 - 256 gsm)
X-HW S Reload (170 - 256 gsm)
47
Loadable
Quantity*
Tray 5 (bypass tray) Basis Weight: 52 to Up to 10 mm Plain (60 - 79 gsm)
300 gsm 90 sheets Bond (80 - 105 gsm)
Ream Weight: 44.7 - Recycled (60 - 79 gsm)

Transparency
X-HW Plus Reload (257 - 300
gsm)
2 Gloss (106 - 169 gsm)
gsm)
Envelope
Other
48
Paper Types
Loadable
Quantity*
Tray 6 (HCF B1) Basis Weight: 52 to 2,030 sheets Plain (60 - 79 gsm)
(optional) 300 gsm Bond (80 - 105 gsm)
Ream Weight: 44.7 - Recycled (60 - 79 gsm)

Transparency
X-HW Plus Reload (257 - 300
gsm)
Gloss (106 - 169 gsm)
2
gsm)
Other
* : When using 80 gsm paper

Important • Printing on paper that differs from the paper type and size selected in the print driver, or printing
from a tray that does not support the loaded paper may result in a paper jam. To ensure correct
printing, select the correct paper size, paper type, and paper tray.
Note • Basis weight is the weight of 1 m2 of a paper sheet.
• Ream weight is the weight of 1,000 sheets of duodecimo size (788 x 1,091 mm) paper.
• When copying on non-standard size paper from Tray 5, you must enter the paper size. Furthermore,
if you frequently copy on non-standard size paper, you can preset the size on the machine. That size
then appears under [Standard Sizes] on the [Tray 5] screen. For more information on the settings,
refer to "Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults" (P.172).
49
• Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type
of paper. For more information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.173).
Supported Paper
Standard Paper
When printing or copying on commonly used paper (plain paper), use paper meeting the
standards described below. To copy or print as clear as possible, we recommend the
following standard paper.
Basis Weight Paper Image

Paper Name Size Notes / Countermeasure
(gsm) Type*1 Quality*2
P A4 64 Plain Plain B -
P A3 64 Plain Plain B -
2 Colotech + A4 90 Bond Plain A  Before copying or printing, fan

the paper well and reload it in
the tray.
Colotech + A3 90 Bond Plain A  Before copying or printing, fan
the paper well and reload it in
the tray.
Colotech Plus A4 90 Bond Plain A -
Colotech Plus A3 90 Bond Plain A -
Premier A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Premier 8.5 80 Bond Plain A -
x
11"
Business A4 80 Bond Plain A  Before copying or printing, fan
the paper well and load it in
the tray.
Business A3 80 Bond Plain A  Before copying or printing, fan
the paper well and load it in
the tray.
A-paper A4 75 Plain Plain B -
A-paper A3 75 Plain Plain B -
A-paper B4 75 Plain Plain B -
A-paper B5 75 Plain Plain B -
A-paper 8.5 75 Plain Plain B -
x
11"
*1 : Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.74).
*2 : Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of paper. For more
information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.173).
50
Paper Types
Semi Standard Paper

In addition to the standard paper, the following paper also can be used.

ASTRO EXTRA A4 70 Plain Plain B -
ASTRO EXTRA A3 70 Plain Plain B -

ASTRO EXTRA A4 80 Bond Plain A -
ASTRO EXTRA A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Business + A4 70 Plain Plain B -
Business + A3 70 Plain Plain B -
Business + A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Business + A3 80 Bond Plain A -
H-paper A4 80 Bond Plain A - 2
H-paper A3 80 Bond Plain A -
H-paper B4 80 Bond Plain A -
H-paper B5 80 Bond Plain A -
LQ-PAPER A4 80 Bond Plain A -
LQ-PAPER A3 80 Bond Plain A -
LQ-PAPER B4 80 Bond Plain A -
LQ-PAPER 8.5 80 Bond Plain A -
x
11"
LQ-PAPER 8.5 80 Bond Plain A -
x
14"
PERFORMER A4 75 Plain Plain B -
PERFORMER A3 75 Plain Plain B -
PERFORMER A4 80 Bond Plain A -
PERFORMER A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Performer + A4 75 Plain Plain B -
Performer + A3 75 Plain Plain B -
Performer + A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Performer + A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Performer Plus A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Performer Plus A3 80 Bond Plain A -
PREMIER FSC A4 75 Plain Plain B -

PREMIER FSC A3 75 Plain Plain B -
PREMIER FSC A4 80 Bond Plain A -
PREMIER FSC A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Professional A4 70 Plain Plain B -
51

Professional A3 70 Plain Plain B -
Professional A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Xceed A4 70 Plain Plain B -
Xceed A3 70 Plain Plain B -

Xceed A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Xceed A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Xcite A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Xcite A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Xplore A4 70 Plain Plain B -
2 Xplore A3 70 Plain Plain B -

Xplore B4 70 Plain Plain B -
Xplore B5 70 Plain Plain B -
Xplore 8k 70 Plain Plain B -
Xplore 16k 70 Plain Plain B -
Xpress A4 70 Plain Plain B -
Xpress A3 70 Plain Plain B -
X’treme Platinum A4 80 Bond Plain A -
X’treme Platinum A3 80 Bond Plain A -
A4 80 Recycled Plain C -
(Green Menber)
A3 80 Recycled Plain C -
(Green Menber)
Star (Package: A4 70 Plain Plain B -
Orange)
Star (Package: A3 70 Plain Plain B -
Orange)
Star (Package: B5 70 Plain Plain B -
Orange)
(P.74).
Usable Paper
In addition to the standard paper, the following paper also can be used.

Attitude A4 70 Plain Plain B -
Attitude A3 70 Plain Plain B -
52
Paper Types

BUSINESS A4 85 Bond Plain A -
CARBON NEUTRAL
BUSINESS A3 85 Bond Plain A -
CARBON NEUTRAL

Colotech + A4 100 Heavyweight Heavyweight A -
A
A
A
A
Colotech + A4 160 Heavyweight
A
Heavyweight A -
2
A
Colotech + A4 220 Extra-HW Extra -
Heavyweight A
Colotech + A3 220 Extra-HW Extra -
Heavyweight A
Color Impression A4 90 Bond Plain A -
Color Impression A3 90 Bond Plain A -
Color Impression A4 250 Extra-HW Extra -
Heavyweight A
Color Impression A3 250 Extra-HW Extra -
Heavyweight A
Diplomat A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Diplomat A3 80 Bond Plain A -
DocuPaper Black A4 70 Plain Plain B -
DocuPaper Blue A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Double A A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Double A A3 80 Bond Plain A -
ECO Enviroguard A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Paper
ECO Enviroguard A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Paper
Green Wrap A4 80 Bond Plain A -
(Recycled)
Green Wrap A3 80 Bond Plain A -
(Recycled)
Horizon A4 70 Plain Plain B -
Horizon A3 70 Plain Plain B -
Horizon B4 70 Plain Plain B -
53

Horizon B5 70 Plain Plain B -
Horizon A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Horizon A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Horizon B4 80 Bond Plain A -
Horizon B5 80 Bond Plain A -

J Paper A4 82 Bond Plain A -
J Paper A3 82 Bond Plain A -
J Paper B4 82 Bond Plain A -
JD Paper A4 98 Bond Plain A -
JD Paper A3 98 Bond Plain A -
2 JD Paper B4 98 Bond Plain A -

K-paper A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Laser card A4 100 Bond Extra-HW A -
Laserprint A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Office A4 70 Plain Plain B -
Office A3 70 Plain Plain B -
Office B4 70 Plain Plain B -
Office B5 70 Plain Plain B -
Office A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Office A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Office B4 80 Bond Plain A -
Office B5 80 Bond Plain A -
Performer A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Performer A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Premier 8.5 80 Bond Plain A -
x
11"
Quality A4 70 Plain Plain B -
Quality A3 70 Plain Plain B -
Quality B4 70 Plain Plain B -
Quality B5 70 Plain Plain B -
Recycled Pure A4 80 Bond Plain A 
100% recycled paper
(Recycled)
Recycled Pure + A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Recycled Pure + A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Recycled Supreme A4 80 Bond Plain A -
54
Paper Types

Recycled Supreme A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Roxy Paper A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Roxy Paper B5 80 Bond Plain A -
Roxy Paper 8.5 80 Bond Plain A -

x
11"
UPM Office A4 70 Plain Plain B -
MULTIFUNCTION
UPM Office A3 70 Plain Plain B -
MULTIFUNCTION
Van Hawk Paper A4 70 Plain Plain B -
Van Hawk Paper A3 70 Plain Plain B -
Van Hawk Paper 8.5 70 Plain Plain B -
2
x
11"
Van Hawk Paper 8.5 70 Plain Plain B -
x
14"
Van Hawk Paper A4 80 Bond Plain A -
Van Hawk Paper A3 80 Bond Plain A -
Van Hawk Paper 8.5 80 Bond Plain A -
x
11"
Van Hawk Paper 8.5 80 Bond Plain A -
x
14"
A4 70 Plain Plain B -
(Gold Flag Ship)
(Gold Flag Ship)
8K 70 Plain Plain B -
(Gold Flag Ship)
(Gold Flag Ship)
(Top Gun)
(Top Gun)
(Classic JetSet)
(Classic JetSet)
(Black)
55

(Black)
(Number One)
(Number One)
(Number One)
(Number One)
(OnHing HuiDong)
2 A3 70 Plain Plain B -
(OnHing HuiDong)
(OnHing HuiDong)
(OnHing HuiDong)
A4 80 Bond Plain A -
(Golden Color)
A3 80 Bond Plain A -
(Golden Color)
(P.74).
Special Media
You can use the following special media such as postcards and envelopes:

3R98204 A4 Unknown Trans- -  Load transparencies with the
parency edge without the white stripe
facing the feeding slot of the
tray.
 Small white dots may appear
on prints due to electric
discharge of paper.
L515 - Unknown Trans- -  Printed transparencies may
parency stick together when they are
delivered.
 Small white dots may appear
on prints due to electric
discharge of paper.
56
Paper Types

P801 A4 Unknown Trans- -  The paper is charged with
parency static electricity after a copy or
print job.
 When using Tray 5, insert
another type of paper at the

bottom of the stack before
loading transparencies.
Universal A4 Unknown Trans- -  If two or more sheets of
Transparency Plain parency transparencies are being fed
115MIC simultaneously (double-feed),
load one sheet at a time.
V510 A4 Unknown Trans- -  Transfer deterioration might
parency be occurred when copying or
printing in color. Also, toner
may spatter on color images in
prints.
2
 When using Tray 5, insert
another type of paper at the
bottom of the stack before
loading transparencies.
(P.74).
Note • For more information on special media such as other heavyweight paper, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Limited Paper
You can use the following paper with limitations:

Colotech + A4 200 Extra-HW Extra-HW A  Load paper with the curl side
up in Tray 5.
Colotech + A3 200 Extra-HW Extra-HW A  Load paper with the curl side
up in Tray 5.
Colotech + A4 250 Extra-HW Extra-HW B  Images may be degraded.
Colotech + A3 250 Extra-HW Extra-HW B  Images may be degraded.

It is recommended to load
paper in portrait orientation. If
it is not possible, use Tray 5.
 If paper jam occurs, use Tray 5.
Colotech + A4 280 X-HW Plus Extra-HW A  It is recommended to load
57

Colotech + A3 300 X-HW Plus Extra-HW A 
It is recommended to load

Colotech + Gloss A4 120 Gloss -  Print one sheet at a time in
Tray 5.
 Paper may be deformed under
High temperature and
humidity conditions.*3
 Images may be degraded.
2 Colotech + Gloss A3 120 Gloss -  Print one sheet at a time in
Tray 5.
 Paper may be deformed under
High temperature and
 Images may be degraded.
Colotech + Gloss A4 140 Gloss -  Print one sheet at a time, using
Tray 5.
Colotech + Gloss A3 140 Gloss - 
Print one sheet at a time, using
Tray 5.
Colotech + Gloss A4 170 Heavyweight -  Print one sheet at a time, using
Gloss Tray 5.
Colotech + Gloss A3 170 Heavyweight - 
Gloss Tray 5.
Gloss Tray 5.
Colotech + Gloss A3 210 Heavyweight - 
Gloss Tray 5.
Gloss Tray 5.
Colotech + Gloss A3 280 X-HW Plus - 
Tray 5.
Colotech + Silk A3 120 Gloss -  Print one sheet at a time, using
Tray 5.
Colotech + Silk A4 140 Gloss - 
Tray 5.
Colotech + Silk A3 140 Gloss -  Print one sheet at a time, using
Tray 5.
Colotech + Silk A3 170 Heavyweight - 
Gloss Tray 5.
Colotech + Silk A3 210 Heavyweight -  Print one sheet at a time, using
Gloss Tray 5.
Colotech + Silk A3 250 Heavyweight -  Print one sheet at a time, using
Gloss Tray 5.
58
Paper Types

Colotech + Silk A3 280 X-HW Plus -  Print one sheet at a time, using
Tray 5.
Colotech Super A4 135 Gloss -  Print one sheet at a time, using
Gloss Tray 5.

Colotech Super A3 160 Gloss -  Print one sheet at a time in
Gloss Tray 5.
 Load paper with the curl side
up.
 Do not use the paper under
high temperature and
Colotech Super A4 210 Heavyweight -  Print one sheet at a time in
Gloss Gloss Tray 5.
Load paper with the curl side
2

up.
Colotech Super A3 210 Heavyweight -  Print one sheet at a time in
Gloss Gloss Tray 5.
 Load paper with the curl side
up.
Colotech Super A4 250 Heavyweight - 
Gloss Gloss Tray 5.
Xerox LABELS A4-1 A4 - Labels - -
CUTS
Xerox LABELS A4-8 A4 - Labels - -
CUTS
Xerox LABELS A4- A4 - Labels - -
16 CUTS
Xerox LABELS A4- A4 - Labels - -
24 CUTS
L/JET PREMIUM A4 - Labels - -
LABELS A4-24
CUTS
(P.74).
*3 : "High temperature and humidity conditions" in the above table means an environment with temperature of 28 °C and
humidity of 85%, and "low temperature and humidity conditions" means an environment with temperature of 10 °C and
humidity of 15%.
59
Inhibited Paper
You are not allowed to use the following paper:

Symphony (Pastel A4 80 - - -
Pink etc.)
Symphony (Pastel A3 80 - - -
Pink etc.)
(P.74).
60
Paper Types
Unusable Paper
Using paper and transparencies not recommended by Fuji Xerox may cause a paper jam or
machine malfunction. Use paper and transparencies recommended by Fuji Xerox.
 Symphony (Pastel Pink etc)
 Damp or wet paper
 Paper pre-printed with other printer or copying machine

 Wrinkled, creased, or ripped paper
 Envelopes that are not flat, or that have clasps or windows
 Color paper with surface treatments

Paper with rough surface, such as pulp paper or fibrous paper

Symphony (Pastel Pink etc.) A4 80 gsm
Storing and Handling Paper
 Please keep the following points in mind when storing paper

2

Store paper inside a cabinet or other dry place. Paper that has absorbed moisture can
result in paper jams and lower image quality.

After opening a package of paper, wrap and store any remaining paper. We recommend
that you store remaining paper in moisture prevention packets.

Store paper on a flat surface to prevent bends or warping.
 Please adhere to the following points when loading paper in a tray


Align the stack of paper neatly before setting it in a tray.

Do not use paper that is creased or wrinkled.
 Do not use warped or curled paper.
 Do not load paper of mixed sizes together into a tray.

Carefully fan transparencies and labels before use. Otherwise, the paper may stick
together, resulting in paper jams, or multiple sheets being fed to the machine
simultaneously.

When continuously outputting on transparencies, transparency sheets may stick
together. After printing 20 or more sheets, remove them from the output tray and fan
them to cool them down.
61
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper.
 Types of paper loaded in trays

The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper in a tray, but
not a paper type. Normally, each tray is set to plain paper. When loading paper other than
plain paper, you must change the paper type setting. You can name paper types and can set
up to five paper types as user-defined paper.
For information on changing the paper type settings, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.74).
 Automatic Tray Selection

If you set paper source on the [Paper/Output] tab to [Paper Tray] in the PCL print driver's
screen when printing, the machine automatically selects the paper tray according to the size
and orientation of the document to be printed. This is called the Automatic Tray Selection.
When copying, selecting [Auto Select] for [Paper Supply] enables automatic tray selection.
2 If the machine detects two or more corresponding trays for the automatic tray selection, the
machine selects the tray with the highest priority specified in [Paper Type Priority] among
the trays set under [Paper Type Settings]. Trays whose [Paper Type Priority] setting is set to
[Auto Paper Off] are ignored in automatic tray selection. Also, if the [Paper Type Priority]
settings are identical, the tray priority is determined by [Paper Tray Priority].
Note • Some trays may not be selected in automatic tray selection depending on the setting of that tray for
[Auto Paper Select]. For more information, refer to "Change Settings" (P.170).
• Tray 5 cannot be selected in automatic tray selection.
• When the paper runs out during copying or printing, select a tray containing the same sized paper
and orientation, and the machine continues copying or printing (Auto Tray Switching feature). The
machine cannot switch to a tray containing a paper type for which [Paper Type Priority] is set to
[Auto Paper Off].
For information about [Paper Type], [Paper Type Priority], and [Paper Tray Priority] settings, and the paper substitute
feature, refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.170). You can also set these settings from CentreWare Internet Services.
 Adding paper
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message appears on the
touch screen. Add paper according to the message instructions. Copying or printing
automatically resumes when paper is added.
Important • Do not add paper while the machine is in the Power Saver mode. Add paper after exiting the Power
Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver> button, and then press the <Machine Status> button.
Note • Carefully fan the paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together, resulting
in paper jams, or multiple sheets being fed to the machine simultaneously.
Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4

The following describes the procedures to load paper in Trays 1 to 4.
in paper jams.
For information on changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4" (P.68).
62
Loading Paper
1 Pull out the tray until it stops.

Important • While the machine is processing a job, do not
pull out the tray that is being used for the job.
• To prevent paper jams or erroneous
detection of loaded paper in a tray by the
machine, do not add paper on top of any
remaining paper in the tray. Remove any
remaining paper from the tray, and then load
that paper on top of the newly loaded paper.

• Do not pull out all the trays at the same time.
Otherwise, the machine gets inclined and
turns over, which may cause injuries.
2
2 Load and align the edge of the paper against
the left edge of the tray, with the side to be
copied or printed on facing up.
Important • Do not load paper above the maximum fill
line ("MAX" in the right figure). It may cause
paper jams or machine malfunction.
• Do not place any paper or objects in the
empty space on the right side of Trays 1 to 4.
It may cause paper jams or machine
malfunction.
Note • When using punched paper, load the
punched paper as shown in the illustration on
the right.
3 Push the tray in gently until it stops.

Important • When inserting the tray, push it gently. Forcibly pushing the tray in may cause machine malfunction.
Loading Paper in Tray 3 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed)

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in Tray 3 when the Tandem Tray
Module is installed.
in paper jams.
For information on changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for Tray 3 (When Tandem
Tray Module is Installed)" (P.69).
63
1 Pull out the tray until it stops.

Important • Make sure to pull out the tray slowly. When
the tray is being pulled out with force, the
tray may possibly hit your knees or other
parts of your body causing injuries.
• While the machine is processing a job, do not

remaining paper in the tray.
2
the right.
Loading Paper in Tray 4 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed)

The following describes the procedure for loading paper in Tray 4 when the Tandem Tray
in paper jams.
For information on changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for Tray 4 (When Tandem
Tray Module is Installed)" (P.70).
1 Pull out Tray 4 until it stops.

Important • Make sure to pull out the tray slowly. When
the tray is being pulled out with force, the
tray may possibly hit your knees or other
parts of your body causing injuries.
• While the machine is processing a job, do not
64
Loading Paper


the right.
2
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)

When printing or copying on a size or type of paper that cannot be set in Trays 1 to 4, use
Tray 5 (bypass tray). The following describes the procedures to load paper in Tray 5. To use
Tray 5 when printing, select Tray 5 and specify the paper type on the [Tray/Output] tab of
the print driver. Also specify the type of paper to be loaded.
Important • To prevent paper jams and erroneous detection of paper loaded in the tray by the machine, do not
take out paper of a package until the tray runs out of paper.
Note • Carefully fan paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together, resulting in
paper jams, or multiple sheets being fed to the machine simultaneously.
1 Open Tray 5.
Note • If necessary, pull out the extension tray. The
extension tray can be extended in two stages.
Pull out the extension tray gently.
2 Load paper with the side to be copied or

printed on facing down, inserting the paper
until its edge lightly touches against the paper
feed entrance.
Important • Do not load mixed paper types into the tray.
• Do not load paper above the maximum fill
line. It may cause paper jams or machine
malfunction.
• Depending on the type of the heavyweight
paper, paper may not be fed to the machine
or image quality may deteriorate.
65

the right.
3 Adjust the paper guides to align the edges of

the paper loaded.
Note • Entering the paper size is needed to use non-
standard size paper for copying using Tray 5.
You can assign the desired paper size to
[Standard Size] on the [Tray 5] screen if you
frequently use non-standard size for copying.
For information on how to assign the paper
2 size, refer to "Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults"
(P.172).
4 Instruct a copy or print job.
Loading Paper in Tray 6 (HCF B1) (Optional)

The following describes the procedure for loading paper into Tray 6 (HCF B1) (optional).
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed on
the touch screen. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying or printing is
automatically resumed when paper is added.
in paper jams.
For information on changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size" (P.68).
CAUTION
Make sure to pull out the tray slowly.
If the tray is pulled out with too much
force, the tray might possibly hit your
knees or other parts of your body and
cause injuries.

• To prevent paper jams or erroneous detection of loaded paper in a tray by the machine, do not add
paper on top of any remaining paper in the tray.
66
Loading Paper

the right edge of the tray with the side to be
copied or printed on facing down.

the right.
2
67
Changing the Paper Size
This section describes how to change the paper size in Trays 1 to 4, and 6.
Note • The types of paper in Trays 1 to 4, and 6 are preset. Normally, Trays 1 to 4 are set to plain paper.
When changing to a different paper type, change the paper quality settings to match the type of
paper to be loaded so that you can maintain high quality printing.
For more information on paper type settings, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.74).
• Non-standard size paper can be loaded in Trays 1 to 4. When loading non-standard size paper, you
must register the paper size. For information on registering paper sizes, refer to "Paper Size" (P.171).
For more information on corresponding paper sizes, refer to "Paper Size Settings" (P.192).
For more information on how to copy on non-standard size paper, refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Paper Supply (Selecting the
Paper for Copying)" in the User Guide. For more information on how to print on non-standard size paper, refer to the help of
the print driver.
Important • Do not load paper of mixed sizes together into a tray.
2 Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4

The following describes how to change paper size in Trays 1 to 4.
Note • The types of paper in Trays 1 to 4 are preset. There are 16 paper types: Plain paper, Bond paper,
Recycled paper, Transparency, Heavyweight paper, Gloss, Labels, Punched, Letterhead, Pre-Print,
Other, and Custom paper 1 to 5, and normally, plain paper is set. When changing to a different
paper type, change the paper quality settings to match the type of paper to be loaded so that you
can maintain high quality printing.
• When loading non-standard size paper, you must register the paper size. For information on
registering paper sizes, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.170).
For more information on how to copy on non-standard size paper, refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Paper Supply (Selecting the
Paper for Copying)" in the User Guide. For more information on how to print on non-standard size paper, refer to the help of
the print driver.
1 Pull out the Tray until it stops.

2 Remove any paper loaded in the tray.

3 While pinching the two paper guides, move
them to the edges of the paper.
68

the left side of the tray, with the side to be
line ("MAX" in the right figure).

Important • When inserting the tray, push it gently. Forcibly pushing the tray in may cause machine malfunction.
Note • Affix the paper size label to the front of the paper tray.
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 3 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed) 2
The following describes how to change paper size in Tray 3 when the Tandem Tray Module
is installed.
CAUTION
Make sure to pull out the tray
slowly. When the tray is being
pulled out with force, the tray
may possibly hit your knees or
other parts of your body
causing injuries.
Important • While the machine is processing a job, do not pull out the tray that is being used for the job.
3 Pinch the paper guide and slide it to the desired
paper size.
69

malfunction.
5 While pinching the paper guide, lightly align the edge to the edge of the paper.
7 Specify the type of loaded paper when you have changed the paper type.
For information on how to set the paper types, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.74).
2
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 4 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed)
The following describes how to change paper size in Tray 4 when the Tandem Tray Module
is installed.
CAUTION
When the tray is being pulled out with
force, the tray may possibly hit your
knees or other parts of your body
causing injuries.
Important • While the machine is processing a job, do not pull out the tray that is being used for the job.

3 Pinch the paper guide and slide it to the desired
paper size.
70

malfunction.

5 While pinching the paper guide, lightly align the edge to the edge of the paper.
7 Specify the type of loaded paper when you have changed the paper type.
For information on how to set the paper types, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.74).
2
Changing the Paper Size for Tray 6 (HCF B1) (Optional)
The following describes how to change paper size in Tray 6 (HCF B1) (optional).
1 Pull out the Tray 6 until it stops.
CAUTION
If the tray is pulled out with too much
force, the tray might possibly hit your
knees or other parts of your body and
cause injuries.

3 Open the end guide (1) and unscrew the screw
(2). And then remove the guide from the tray.
4 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into the holes corresponding to the
paper size (1). Insert the protrusion on the tray into a hole corresponding to the paper size
on the top of the guide, and tighten up the screw (2).
71
5 Unscrew the screw of the front guide and

remove the guide from the tray.
6 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into the holes corresponding to the
paper size (1). Insert the protrusion on the tray into a hole corresponding to the paper size
on the top of the guide, and tighten up the screw (2).
7 Pull up the lever of the end guide (1). Move the

lever along the slot, and set it at the position
corresponding to the paper size (2). And then
press the lever down (3).
Important • Adjust the end guide correctly to the size of
the paper. If the end guide is not adjusted
correctly, the machine cannot feed the paper
properly, resulting in paper jams.
Note • The slot to the left of 8.5" is not used.
8 Open the end guide (1), and load and align the
edge of the paper against the right edge of the
tray with the side to be copied or printed on
facing down (2).
72
9 Close the end guide securely.

73
Changing the Paper Settings
This section describes how to change the paper type for Trays and how to set image quality
processing by the individual paper type.
After loading paper in a tray, specify the type of paper loaded and select image quality for
the paper type. Setting image quality for each paper type enables you to print with the most
suitable image quality for the paper type.
For information on image quality processing for each paper type, refer to "Image Quality" (P.173).
Note • Users can name Custom 1 to Custom 5 displayed in the paper type settings. For information on how
to set names to Custom 1 to Custom 5, refer to "Custom Paper Name/Color" (P.170).
• You can change the paper type setting without entering to the System Administration mode on the
[Setup] screen, which is displayed by selecting [Setup] in the Services Home screen if you configure
the settings in advance. For more information, refer to "Customize Paper Supply Screen" (P.171).
<Log In/Out> button

select [Enter].

Settings] > [Paper Tray Settings].
74
Changing the Paper Settings
5 Select [Paper Tray Attributes].

6 Select a paper tray for changing the paper type
setting under [Items].
7 Select [Change Settings].

2
8 Select [Paper Type], [Paper Size], [Paper Color],

and [Auto Paper Select] respectively.
Note • The paper weight displayed in [Paper Type]
varies depending on the settings in [Image
Quality]. For more information refer to step
10.
9 Select [Cancel], [Save], [Confirm], or [Close] repeatedly until the [Paper Tray Settings]
screen is displayed.
10 Select [Image Quality].
11 Select the paper type for changing the image

quality settings under [Items], and then select
[Change Settings].
75
12 Select the image quality, and then select

[Save].

14 Select [Close].
76
3 Maintenance
This chapter describes how to replace consumables, clean the machine, calibrate colors,
print a report/list, and delete a print job with an invalid user ID.
 Replacing Consumables..............................................................................................................78

Cleaning the Machine...............................................................................................................102
 Executing Calibration................................................................................................................109
 Executing 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration ...............................................................112

Printing a Report/List ................................................................................................................114
 Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID....................................115

Setting Restore Tool ..................................................................................................................116
3 Maintenance
Replacing Consumables
The machine is provided with the following consumables and periodic replacement parts.
We recommend the use of the following consumables as they are manufactured to meet the
specifications of the machine.
Type of Consumables/
Product Code Quantity/Box
Periodic Replacement Parts
Toner cartridge K (Black) CT201370 1 unit/box
CT202105*4
Toner cartridge C (Cyan) CT201371 1 unit/box
CT202106*4
Maintenance
Toner cartridge M (Magenta) CT201372 1 unit/box

CT202107*4
Toner cartridge Y (Yellow) CT201373 1 unit/box
CT202108*4
3 Waste toner container CWAA0751 1 unit/box
Drum cartridge CT350851 1 unit/box
Staple Types XH (3PCS)*1 CWAA0855 3 sets/box
Staple Types XE (2PCS)*2 CWAA0856 2 sets/box
Staple cartridge (Booklet Maker Unit for CWAA0728 4 sets/box

Finisher-B1)*3
Stamp Replacement Kit F451 1 unit/box
*1 : A staple cartridge for C3 Finisher (with optional C3 Finisher Staple Unit 65 Sheets) and C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (with
optional C3 Finisher Staple Unit 65 Sheets)
*2 : A staple cartridge for Finisher-A1, Finisher-B1, C3 Finisher (50 sheets staple), and C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (50 sheets
staple)
*3 : A booklet staple cartridge for Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1
*4 : For Vietnam only
Note • We recommend that you always keep spare consumables/periodic replacement parts.
WARNING
 Never use a vacuum cleaner for spilled toner and residual toner in this product,
toner cartridge or toner bottle. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside a
vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off the
spills. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.

Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the
cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for its disposal.
 Never throw a waste toner bottle into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used waste toner bottle no longer needed, contact your local Fuji
78
CAUTION

Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child
accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and
consult a physician immediately.
 When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the
toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and
mouth as well as inhalation.

If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in the eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least
15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
Maintenance
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth
with water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of
water and consult a physician immediately.
 Handling consumables/periodic replacement parts

3

Do not store boxes of consumables/periodic replacement parts upright.

Do not unpack consumables/periodic replacement parts before use. Avoid storing
consumables/periodic replacement parts in the following locations:
- In high temperature and humid locations
- Near heat-generating devices
- Areas exposed to direct sunlight
- Dusty areas

When using consumables/periodic replacement parts, carefully read precautions for use.
Precautions for use are instructed on their bodies or packages, or a precaution sheet is
included in their packages.
 We recommend always keeping spare consumables/periodic replacement parts in stock.
 When calling our Customer Support Center to order consumables/periodical replacement
parts, have the product codes ready.

The use of consumables/periodic replacement parts not recommended by Fuji Xerox
could impair machine quality and performance. Use only consumables/periodic
replacement parts recommended by Fuji Xerox.
 Checking the status of consumables

You can check the status of consumables on the [Supplies] screen.
For information on consumables, refer to "Supplies" (P.135).
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Replacing Toner Cartridges ......................................................................................................................................................... 80
Replacing Waste Toner Container R5 ....................................................................................................................................... 82
Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4 (for Customers Having a Spot Maintenance Contract) ..................... 85
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-A1) .......................................................................................................................... 89
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-B1)........................................................................................................................... 91
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker) ........................................................... 92
Replacing Booklet Staple Cartridge (for Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1)................................................................ 94
Replacing Booklet Staple Cartridge (for C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)....................................................................... 95
79
3 Maintenance
Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container (for Finisher-B1) .............................................................................................97

Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container (for C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)..............................98
Replacing Stamp (for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C) ....................................................................................99
Replacing Stamp (for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC)............................................................................... 101
Replacing Toner Cartridges

The following messages are displayed on the touch screen depending on the amount of
toner remaining. Replace the toner cartridge according to the message.
Message*1 Remaining Page Yield*2 Solution

Please order a Yellow Toner Black: Approx. 3,500 pages You do not need to replace the
Maintenance
[Y] Cartridge. Other than Black: Approx. 2,500 Toner Cartridge immediately.
pages Order the Toner Cartridge
displayed on the screen.
Yellow Toner [Y] Cartridge Approx. 40 pages Replace the toner cartridge with
needs to be replaced soon. a new one.
3 Yellow Toner [Y] Cartridge

needs to be replaced. -
The machine will stop. Replace
the toner cartridge with a new
one.
*1 : The messages in the above table apply to Yellow Toner. "Yellow Toner [Y]" shown in the messages vary depending on the
color and number of the applicable toner.
*2 : The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is an estimate and varies
depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area coverage), paper size, paper type, copy/print
density, output image type, and the machine operating environment.
WARNING

Never use a vacuum cleaner for spilled toner and residual toner in this product,
representative.
 Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the
cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used
toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative
for its disposal.
Important • When replacing a toner cartridge, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying paper on
the floor beforehand.
• The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only toner cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
• When the remaining amount of toner is low, the machine may stop printing and display a message.
If this occurs, replace the toner cartridge to resume copying or printing.
• Replace toner cartridges while the machine is on.
• Copy or print density may decrease slightly after the message "Please order a XXX Toner Cartridge"
appears on the touch screen.
• If you replace a toner cartridge with a partially used toner cartridge, the number of pages that you
can copy or print after the message "Please order a XXX Toner Cartridge" is displayed may differ
significantly from the values described in the above table.
80
1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and

open the front cover.
2 Put your hand under the dent of the toner

cartridge indicated in the message, and slightly
lift up the cartridge.
Note • "Y", "M", "C", or "K" indicates Yellow, Magenta,
Maintenance
Cyan, and Black, respectively.
3 Pull out the toner cartridge slowly, and slide it out. 3

WARNING
Never throw a toner cartridge into an
open flame. Remaining toner in the
cartridge may catch fire and cause burn
injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no
longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Important • Slide out the toner cartridge gently. Otherwise, toner may spill from the cartridge.
• If you have a used toner cartridge which is no longer needed, contact our Customer Support Center
for its disposal.
4 Take the new toner cartridge of the same color

out of the box, and shake the cartridge up and
down and left and right for ten times.
Important • Do not touch the shutter part.
5 Hold the cartridge with the arrow facing up, and

push the cartridge in slowly until it stops.
81
3 Maintenance

Note • If the front cover is not closed completely, a message appears and the machine will remain paused.
Maintenance
Replacing Waste Toner Container R5

The waste toner container holds used toner. The following messages are displayed on the
touch screen according to the status of the waste toner container. Follow the messages as
necessary.
3 Message Remaining Page Yield* Solution
Please order a Waste Toner Approx. 3,600 pages Order the waste toner container.
Container.
The Waste Toner Container - The machine will stop. Replace
needs to be replaced. the waste toner container with a
new one.
* : The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is an estimate and varies
depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area coverage), paper size, paper type, copy/print
density, output image type, and machine operating environment.
When replacing the waste toner container, clean the LED printhead with the supplied
cleaning bar to prevent inconsistencies in density or color in copies and prints.
WARNING
 Never use a vacuum cleaner for spilled toner and residual toner in this product,
representative.
 Never throw a waste toner bottle into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used waste toner bottle no longer
needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.
Important • Do not touch the five gray-colored sponge parts on the back side of the waste toner container.
Otherwise, your hands may get dirty with toner.
• When replacing the waste toner container, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying
paper on the floor beforehand.
• The proper disposal of used waste toner containers is required. Return the old waste toner container
to our Customer Support Center.
• The use of waste toner containers not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only waste toner containers recommended by Fuji Xerox.
82
1 Make sure that the machine is not operating, and

open the front cover.
2 Pull out the toner cartridge slowly while holding

its left side with one hand.
Maintenance
3 Prepare a new waste toner container out of a box. 3
Waste Toner Container
4 While holding the left side of the waste toner

container, push the bottle in until it clicks.
5 Insert the used waste toner container into the

supplied plastic bag and then seal it firmly with
the zipper.
83
3 Maintenance
6 Carefully place the old waste toner container into

the empty box with both hands.
WARNING
Never throw a waste toner bottle into
an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used waste toner bottle no
longer needed, contact your local Fuji
7 Rotate the release lever of the drum cartridge

Maintenance
cover counterclockwise.
3
8 Lower the cover.
Note • You can now see the drum cartridge.
9 Slowly slide out the cleaning bar housed within

the LED printhead until it stops. The cleaning bars
are located in the cleaning connection just under
the drum cartridges R1, R2, R3, and R4.
Important • Do not remove the cleaning bar from the
housing.
Note • Slide out the cleaning bar until you see "".
10 Slowly slide the cleaning bar back into place.

Note • Clean the four LED printheads R1 to R4 by
sliding the cleaning bar back and forth for two
or three times respectively.
84
11 Return the cover to the original position.

Note • Push the cover until it clicks into place.
12 Rotate the release lever clockwise to lock the

cover.
Maintenance
3
Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4

(for Customers Having a Spot Maintenance Contract)
The machine displays the following messages when a drum cartridge R1, R2, R3 or R4 needs
to be replaced. When the message is displayed, contact our Customer Support Center.
If you have a spot maintenance contract, follow the instructions described below and
replace the drum cartridge.
85
3 Maintenance
If you continue to copy or print without replacing the drum cartridge after the message is
displayed on the touch screen, the machine will stop after copying or printing the number of
pages shown in the following table.
Message Remaining Page yield Solution

Please order a Drum ApeosPort-V C7775, You do not need to
Cartridge RX. DocuCentre-V C7775: replace the Drum
Black: Approx. 6,000 pages Cartridge immediately.
Other than Black: Approx. 5,000 pages Order the Drum
ApeosPort-V C6675, Cartridge displayed on
DocuCentre-V C6675: the screen.
Approx. 5,000 pages
ApeosPort-V C5575,
DocuCentre-V C5575:
Maintenance
Black: Approx. 6,000 pages

Other than Black: Approx. 5,000 pages
ApeosPort-V C4475,
DocuCentre-V C4475:
Approx. 5,000 pages
ApeosPort-V C3375,
3 DocuCentre-V C3375:
Approx. 3,000 pages
ApeosPort-V C3373,
DocuCentre-V C3373:
Approx. 3,000 pages
ApeosPort-V C2275,
DocuCentre-V C2275:
Black: Approx. 4,000 pages
Other than Black: Approx. 3,000 pages
Drum Cartridge needs - Replace the drum
to be replaced. cartridge with a new
one.
If When replacing a drum cartridge, clean the LED printhead with the supplied cleaning bar
to prevent inconsistencies in density or color in copies and prints.
CAUTION
 When replacing drum cartridges (or drum if not a cartridge type) and toner
cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid
contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.

If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in the eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least
15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth
with water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of
water and consult a physician immediately.

Keep drum cartridges (or drum if not a cartridge type) and toner cartridges out
of the reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse
mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician immediately.
Important • The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Note • Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent lighting. Do
not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in unsatisfactory printing.
86
• The remaining page yield is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is an estimate
and varies depending on the conditions such as the paper size, the paper orientation, the number of
pages continuously print, and the machine operating environment.
• Images output from the machine may get dirty after the message "Please order a Drum Cartridge
XXX RX" appears on the touch screen.
1 Make sure that the machine is not operating,

and open the front cover.
Maintenance
3 Lower the cover.

Note • The drum cartridge is unlocked.
4 Grasp the handle of the drum cartridge R1, R2,

R3, or R4 indicated in the message and gently
slide out the cartridge.
Important • When removing the drum cartridge, be
careful not to drop it on the floor.
Note • The illustrations in this section explains how
to replace the drum cartridge R1, as an
example.
5 Hold the bottom of the drum cartridge as

shown in the illustration, and pull it out from
the machine.
Note • Be careful not to touch the toner attached to
the cartridge.
87
3 Maintenance
6 Take the new drum cartridge out of the box, and insert the used drum cartridge into the
supplied plastic bag and place it into the box.
Important • Do not place the new drum cartridge in an upright position.
• Return the old drum cartridge to our Customer Support Center.
7 Insert the front two points of the new drum
cartridge with protective cover in the holes on
the machine.
Note • Insert the two points as shown in the
illustration on the right.
Maintenance
8 Pull out the black paper while holding the

protective cover with one hand. While doing so,
keep the two points inserted in the holes.
9 Grasp the tab on top of the cartridge and slide

it toward the machine while holding the
protective cover with one hand.
10 Slide the tab until it stops.
11 Carefully remove the protective cover.

12 Push the drum cartridge straight in the housing
until it stops.
Note • Place the protective cover into the box.
88

the LED printhead until it stops. The cleaning
bars are located in the cleaning connection just
under the drum cartridges R1, R2, R3, and R4.
housing.
Note • Slide out the cleaning bar until you see
"".

sliding the cleaning bar back and forth for
two or three times respectively.
Maintenance
15 Return the cover to the original position. 3

cover.

Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-A1)

When the Finisher-A1 (optional) is installed and the staple cartridge needs to be replaced, a
message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, load a new staple case
into the staple cartridge.
Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and performance.
Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Note • To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.
89
3 Maintenance

and open the finisher front cover.
2 Pull the staple cartridge out of the finisher.

Maintenance
3 3 After you pull out the staple cartridge, check

inside of the finisher for any remaining staples.
4 Pinch both sides of the empty staple case with

your fingers (1), and remove the staple case
from the cartridge (2).
5 Insert the front side of the new staple case into

the staple cartridge (1), and then push the rear
side into the cartridge (2).
90
6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until

it clicks into place.
7 Close the finisher front cover.

Maintenance
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-B1)
When the Finisher-B1 (optional) is installed and the staple cartridge needs to be replaced, a
message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, load a new staple case
into the staple cartridge.
Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and performance. 3
Note • To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.

and open the finisher front door.
2 With grasping the handle, pull the staple

cartridge holder to the right, towards you.
3 Pull the staple cartridge out of the finisher.

Note • The staple cartridge is firmly inserted. A slight
force is required to pull the cartridge out of
the finisher.
91
3 Maintenance
4 Pinch both sides of the empty staple case with

your fingers (1), and remove the staple case

Maintenance
3 6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until

7 Close the finisher front door.

Note • If the front door is not closed completely, a message appears and the machine will remain paused.
Replacing Staple Cartridge

(for C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)
When the C3 Finisher (optional) or the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed
and the staple cartridge needs to be replaced, a message appears on the touch screen.
When this message appears, load a new staple case into the staple cartridge.
Message Solution
The Staple Cartridge [R1] is running out of Prepare new staples.
staples. Check the Staple Cartridge [R1] and Note • Staples cannot be replaced yet.
order staples.
The Staple Cartridge [R1] is out of staples or not Replace staples with new ones.
fully inserted. Check the Staple Cartridge [R1].
Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and performance.
Note • If the staple cartridge was not replaced properly, the message remains on the touch screen. Follow
the procedure and replace the staple cartridge again.
• To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.
92

2 With grasping the lever [R1] of the staple

cartridge holder, pull the holder to the right,
towards you.
Maintenance
3 With grasping the orange lever, pull out the 3
staple cartridge.
the finisher.
• When the C3 Finisher Staple Unit 65 Sheets is

installed, pull down the orange lever, and pull
out the staple cartridge.
4 Pinch both sides of the empty staple case with 2

your fingers (1), and pull out the staple case
1
Important • The staple case cannot be removed when the
staples are remained in the staple case.
Forcibly removing the staple case may cause
machine malfunction.
1
93
3 Maintenance

2
6 With grasping the orange lever of the staple

cartridge, push the staple cartridge into its
original position until it clicks into place.
Maintenance
3 7 Close the finisher front door.

Replacing Booklet Staple Cartridge (for Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1)
When the Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 (optional) is installed and the booklet staple
cartridges need to be replaced, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message
appears, replace the booklet staple cartridges with new ones.
Important • The use of booklet staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and
performance. Use only booklet staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Note • To order a booklet staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.

and open the finisher side cover.
2 Hold the tabs on both sides of the booklet

staple cartridge and pull it out.
94
3 Hold the tabs on both sides of a new booklet

staple cartridge, and insert it into the finisher
until it clicks.
4 Do the same for the booklet staple cartridge on the other side.
5 Close the finisher side cover.
Note • If the cover is not closed completely, a message appears and the machine will remain paused.
Maintenance
Replacing Booklet Staple Cartridge (for C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)
When the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and the booklet staple
cartridges need to be replaced, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message
appears, replace the booklet staple cartridges with new ones. 3
Message Solution
The Booklet Staple cartridge [R2] is running out Prepare new staples.
of staples. Please order a Booklet Staple Note • Staples cannot be replaced yet.
Cartridge [R2].
The Booklet Staple Cartridge [R2] is out of Replace staples with new ones.
staples or not fully inserted. Check the Staple
Cartridge [R2].
* : The messages above are for the Booklet Staple Cartridge [R2]. For the Booklet Staple Cartridge [R3], [R3] is displayed.
Important • The use of booklet staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and
performance. Use only booklet staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Note • If the booklet staple cartridge was not replaced properly, the message remains on the touch screen.
Follow the procedure and replace the booklet staple cartridge again.
• To order a booklet staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.

95
3 Maintenance
2 Pull out the booklet unit.
3 With grasping the lever of the booklet staple

cartridge, push the booklet staple cartridge
downward. Then, pull out the booklet staple
cartridge upwards.
Maintenance
3 4 Press the orange buttons on the right and left

sides of the booklet staple cartridge (1), and
open the cover (2).
5 Pinch the right and left sides of the empty

staple case (1), and pull out the empty staple
case from the staple cartridge.
Important • The staple case cannot be removed when the
staples are remained in the staple case.
Forcibly removing the staple case may cause
machine malfunction.
6 Insert the new staple case (1), and push the

rear side of the new staple case into the staple
cartridge.
96
7 Close the cover.
8 Return the booklet staple cartridge to its

original position.
Maintenance
9 Slightly push the booklet staple cartridge 3
upwards, and make sure that it clicks into place.
Note • Return the booklet staple cartridge until ( )
of the booklet staple cartridge is fitted in
( ) of the booklet unit.
10 Return the booklet unit to its original position.

Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container (for Finisher-B1)

When the Finisher-B1 (optional) is installed and the hole punch waste container becomes
full, a message appears on the touch screen. When the message appears, empty the hole
punch waste container as instructed.
Make sure to discard all paper chads when emptying the hole punch waste container. Not
doing so will cause the container to fill up before the message telling you to empty the
container appears again, and this can cause machine malfunction.
Important • Empty the hole punch waste container when the machine is on. If you empty the container while the
machine is off, the machine does not recognize that the container has been emptied.
97
3 Maintenance

lift the top transport cover, and then open the
front transport cover of the finisher.
2 Pull out the hole punch waste container.

Maintenance
3 3 Empty the container.
4 Insert the emptied hole punch waste container

into the finisher until it stops.
5 Close the front transport cover, and then close the top transport cover of the finisher.
Note • If the cover is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine remain paused.
Emptying the Hole Punch Waste Container

(for C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)
When the C3 Finisher (optional) or the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed
and the hole punch waste container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen.
When the message appears, empty the hole punch waste container as instructed.
Important • Empty the hole punch waste container when the machine is on. If you empty the container while the
machine is off, the machine does not recognize that the container has been emptied.
• Empty the hole punch waste container after the message appears. Otherwise, the machine cannot
recognize the correct remaining amount of the punch scraps.
98
• Make sure to discard all paper chads when emptying the hole punch waste container. Not doing so
will cause the container to fill up before the message telling you to empty the container appears
again, and this can cause machine malfunction.
• When the machine is in Power Saver mode, exit Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver>
button and the <Machine Status> button on the control panel before you empty the punch waste
container.
• Before emptying the punch waste container, press the <Machine Status> button and check the
current status for the punch waste container even when the control panel is lit.

Maintenance
2 Pull out the hole punch waste container [R4].
3 Empty the container.
4 Insert the emptied hole punch waste container

into its original position until it stops.

Replacing Stamp (for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C)

If the machine offers the Fax service and the Stamp Kit (optional) is installed, replace the
stamp cartridge when stamp impressions start to fade.
99
3 Maintenance
Important • Do not touch the ink pad of the stamp cartridge. If it comes into contact with your skin, wash
immediately.
• Problems caused by using consumables not recommended by Fuji Xerox are not covered by the
maintenance service contract.
• Before using consumables, carefully read instructions and precautions on their packages.
Note • We recommend always keeping spare consumables/periodic replacement parts in stock.
• To order consumables, contact our Customer Support Center.
(Product Name: Stamp Replacement Kit, Product Code: F451)
1 Pull up the knob on the document feeder top

cover, and open the document feeder top cover
completely.
Maintenance
2 Pull up the lever to open the inner cover.

3 Lever
3 Stick the supplied pin into the old stamp

cartridge, and pull it straight out of the
machine.
Note • If only the sponge part of the stamp
cartridge is removed, make sure of removing
the bottom part of the cartridge.
4 Insert the new stamp cartridge.
5 Close the inner cover of the document feeder.

6 Close the left cover of the document feeder until it clicks into place, and confirm that there
is no space between the near or far side of the cover and the document feeder.
100
Replacing Stamp (for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC)

If the machine offers the Fax service and the Stamp Kit SP (optional) is installed, replace the
stamp cartridge when stamp impressions start to fade.
Important • Do not touch the ink pad of the stamp cartridge. If it comes into contact with your skin, wash
immediately.
• Problems caused by using consumables not recommended by Fuji Xerox are not covered by the
maintenance service contract.
• Before using consumables, carefully read instructions and precautions on their packages.
Note • We recommend always keeping spare consumables/periodic replacement parts in stock.
• To order consumables, contact our Customer Support Center.
(Product Name: Stamp Replacement Kit, Product Code: F451)
1 Lift the document feeder gently, and open the
Maintenance
Side 2 scanner.
3
2 Stick the supplied pin into the old stamp
cartridge, and pull it straight out of the
machine.
Note • If only the sponge part of the stamp
cartridge is removed, make sure of removing
the bottom part of the cartridge.
3 Insert the new stamp cartridge.
4 Close the Side 2 scanner, and then close the

document feeder gently.
101
3 Maintenance
Cleaning the Machine
This section describes how to clean the machine such as the machine exterior, document
cover, document feeder, and document glass.
WARNING
 When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to
it. Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product.
Never use aerosol cleaners to avoid catching fire and explosion.
 (ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675, DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675 only)
This product uses 2 power cords. Plug off all the power cords to completely stop
power supply to this product.
Maintenance
CAUTION

When cleaning this product, always switch off the power and then the main
power inside the body front cover, and unplug the product. Access to a live
3 machine interior may cause electric shock.
 When cleaning this product, switch off the product and its switchboard (branch
circuit). Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock.
Cleaning the Exterior

The following describes how to clean the exterior of the machine.
Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile liquids or spray insect repellent on the machine
as they might discolor, deform, or crack covers.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or
damage documents during copying.
1 Wipe the exterior with a firmly wrung soft cloth

moistened with water.
Important • Do not use cleaning agents other than water
or neutral detergent.
Note • If you cannot remove the dirt easily, gently
wipe the machine with a soft cloth moistened
with a small amount of neutral detergent.
2 Wipe off any excess water with a soft cloth.
Cleaning the Interior (LED Printheads)

The following describes how to clean the interior (LED printheads) of the machine.
Normally, clean the LED printheads when you replace the waste toner container. However,
if you have image quality problems such as white or colored stripes appear on copied or
printed outputs, clean the LED printheads.
Important • Clean the LED printheads periodically when you replace the waste toner container.
102

and open the front cover.

Maintenance
3 Lower the cover. 3
Note • You can now see the drum cartridge.

the LED printhead until it stops. The cleaning
bars are located in the cleaning connection just
under the drum cartridges R1, R2, R3, and R4.
Note • Slide out the cleaning bar until you see
"".
housing.

sliding the cleaning bar back and forth for
two or three times respectively.
103
3 Maintenance
6 Return the cover to the original position.


cover.
Maintenance
3 8 Close the front cover.

Cleaning the Touch Screen

This section describes how to clean the touch screen of the machine.
1 Wipe only the LCD area with a soft cloth

moistened with neutral detergent or alcohol.
Important • When you moisten the cloth with neutral
detergent or alcohol, do not allow the excess
liquid to drip down from the cloth. If the cloth
is moistened with the excess liquid, wring the
cloth gently before wiping the LCD area.
• Do not use any volatile liquids on the
machine such as benzene and paint thinner,
or insect repellent as these may discolor,
deform, or crack the machine exterior.
• Cleaning the touch screen with an excessive force may cause the screen to be damaged. Wipe the
screen gently.
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass

(for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C)
If the document cover and document glass become soiled, smudges may appear on copies,
faxes, or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect document sizes.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document cover and the document glass about
once a month.
Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint or
coating on plastic parts.
damage documents during copying, faxing, or scanning.
104
1 Wipe the document cover with a soft cloth

moistened with water to remove any dirt, and
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Note • If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe
the document cover with a soft cloth
moistened with a small amount of neutral
detergent.
2 Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth

Maintenance
the document glass with a soft cloth
detergent.
3
Cleaning Document Cover and Document Glass
(for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC)
If the document cover and document glass become soiled, smudges may appear on copies,
faxes, or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect document sizes.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the
document cover and the document glass about
once a month with the cloth provided in the
document feeder as shown in the illustration.
Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other
organic solvents. Doing so might damage
paint or coating on plastic parts.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive
amount of water may cause the machine to
malfunction or damage documents during
copying, faxing, or scanning.
1 Wipe the document cover with the provided

cloth.
the document cover with a soft cloth
detergent.
105
3 Maintenance
2 Wipe the document glass with the provided

cloth.
the document glass with a soft cloth
detergent.
Cleaning the White Chute and the Constant Velocity Transport Glass
Maintenance
(for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C)

If the white chute or the constant velocity transport glass become soiled, smudges may
appear on copies, faxes, or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect
document sizes.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the white chute and the constant velocity transport
3 glass about once a month.
damage documents during copying, faxing, or scanning.
1 Wipe the white chute with a soft cloth

Important • Do not press the film with an excessive force
as it can be easily damaged.
• Do not use cleaning agents other than water
the white chute with a soft cloth moistened
2 Wipe the constant velocity transport glass with
a soft cloth moistened with water to remove
any dirt, and then wipe it with a soft dry cloth.
the glass with a soft cloth moistened with a
small amount of neutral detergent.
Cleaning White Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass

(for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC)
If the white chute or the constant velocity transport glass become soiled, smudges may
appear on copies, faxes, or scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect
document sizes.
106
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean white

chute, the Side 1 constant velocity transport
glass and the Side 2 constant velocity transport
glass about once a month with the cloth
provided in the document feeder as shown in
the illustration.
Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other
organic solvents. Doing so might damage
paint or coating on plastic parts.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive
amount of water may cause the machine to
malfunction or damage documents during
copying, faxing, or scanning.
1 Lift the document feeder gently, and open the
Maintenance
Side 2 scanner.
3
2 Wipe the white chute with the provided cloth.
the white chute with a soft cloth moistened
Important • Do not press the film with an excessive force
as it can be easily damaged.
• Do not use cleaning agents other than water
3 Wipe the Side 1 constant velocity transport

glass and the Side 2 constant velocity transport
glass with the provided cloth.
the glass with a soft cloth moistened with a
small amount of neutral detergent.
4 Close the Side 2 scanner, and then close the

document feeder gently.
107
3 Maintenance
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers

If the document feeder rollers become soiled, smudges may appear on copies, faxes, or
scanned documents and paper jams may occur.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document feeder roller about once a month.
damage documents during copying, faxing, scanning, or printing.
1 Pull up the handle on the document feeder top

cover, and open the document feeder top cover
completely.
Maintenance
Note • When you fully open the cover, it enters a

fixed position. Open the cover gently.
3 2 While turning the rollers, wipe them with a soft cloth moistened with water.
With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C (optional) With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC (optional)
Important • Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.
• Use a cloth firmly wrung to prevent water drops from falling into the machine. If water gets into the
machine, it may cause the machine to malfunction.
Note • If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the rollers with a soft cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.
3 Close the document feeder left cover until it clicks into place, and confirm that there is no
space between the near or far side of the cover and the document feeder.
108
Executing Calibration
The machine can automatically calibrate colors using the calibration chart when the
reproducibility of density or color in copies and prints deteriorates. The machine can adjust
the gradation for each screen type set in the machine in advance.
The following four types of screen are available.

Copy Job 1
Calibrates the screen for [Text], [Photo & Text], or [Map] of [Original Type].
 Copy Job 2
Calibrates the screen for [Photo] of [Original Type].
Maintenance
 Print Job 1
For PCL print drivers
- Calibrates the screen used for the functions ([Image Quality], [Image Adjustment
Mode], and [Image Types]) set in the [Color Options] tab.
- Calibrates the screen when [Auto Screening], [Fineness], or [Standard] is selected for
[Screen] in the [Advanced] tab. 3
For PostScript® print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [High Quality] or [High Resolution] of [Image Quality] and
[Auto Screening], [Fineness], or [Standard] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is
selected.
- Calibrates the screen when [High Speed] of [Image Quality] and [Fineness] or
[Standard] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.

Print Job 2
For PCL print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [Gradation] is selected for [Screen] in the [Advanced] tab
(except when [High Resolution] is selected for [Image Quality]).
- Calibrates the screen when [Print Page Mode] is selected in the [Advanced] tab (except
when [High Resolution] is selected for [Image Quality]).
For PostScript print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [High Speed] of [Image Quality] and [Auto Screening] or
[Fineness] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.
Note • We recommend executing auto calibration for all four screen types. When the adjustment for one
screen type is complete, specify the next screen type and repeat the procedure.
• If color is not calibrated despite the periodic execution of auto calibration, contact our Customer
Support Center.
• Confirm the settings of the following items under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Copy Service
Settings] > [Copy Defaults] in the System Administration mode before executing auto calibration:
-Lighten/Darken: Normal
-Contrast: Normal
-Sharpness: Normal
-Saturation: Normal
-Color Balance: 0, 0, 0
-Color Shift: Normal
• After finishing the auto calibration, change the settings of [Copy Defaults] if necessary. For
information on [Copy Defaults], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.206).
• During calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs or faxes.
The following describes how to perform calibration.
109
3 Maintenance
1 Select [Calibration] on the Services Home

screen.
If [Calibration] is not displayed, follow the procedure below.
1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.

Maintenance
3
<Log In/Out> button
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID

with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next]
and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

4) Select [System Settings] > [Common Service

Settings] > [Image Quality Adjustment].
2 Select [Calibration].
110
3 Set [Screen Type], [Paper Supply], and [Target].

Note • The following describes calibration
procedures using Copy Job 2, as an example.
• For [Paper Supply], select the paper tray in
which A4 , A3 , 8.5 x 11" , or 11 x 17"
white paper is loaded.
• For Target, select from [Copy & Print Jobs],
[Copy Jobs Only], [Print Jobs Only], and
[None]. When [Copy & Print] is not selected
for [Target], calibration is not valid for the
mode not listed in [Target].
4 Select [Start].
Note • The message "Outputting the Calibration
Chart... - Copy Job 2" appears and the
Maintenance
document for calibration (Calibration Chart)
is printed.
5 Align the magenta patch (squares printed at

3
the top and bottom of the Calibration Chart) of
the printed Calibration Chart against the left
side of the document glass, and load the chart
facing down on the document glass. Magenta
Note • Place the Calibration Chart on the document

glass.
6 Place at least five sheets of white paper on the

Calibration Chart to cover the Chart and close
the document cover.
7 Select [Start].
The message “Calibration in progress. - Copy Job 2” appears and the machine automatically
calibrates the colors. It takes about 10 seconds to complete calibration.
A screen showing the result appears.
8 Select [Confirm].
9 To continue calibration for other screen types, repeat steps 3 to 8.
10 Select [Close] repeatedly until the Services Home screen is displayed.
11 Copy or print to confirm the image quality.
Note • During auto calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs and faxes.
111
3 Maintenance
Executing 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration
This section describes the procedures to adjust scan colors for side 1 and side 2 of the duplex
automatic document feeder.
Important • For the correct output result, execute the calibration in advance. For the calibration, refer to
"Executing Calibration" (P.109).

Maintenance
<Log In/Out> button

3 the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed
enter the system administrator’s passcode, and
select [Enter].

Settings] > [Image Quality Adjustment].
5 Select [2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration].
6 Select [Paper Supply] and set the paper tray. Select [Print Chart] and then [Start].
112
Executing 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration
Note • Selecting [Restore Previous Values] and then [Start] restores the previous settings. To restore factory
default settings, select [Restore Factory Default Values] and then [Start]. In both cases, a message is
displayed on the touch screen when the restoration is completed.
• The message "Outputting the chart for 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration...." appears and the
machine prints a chart for 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration.
7 Align the magenta patch (squares printed at Magenta
the top and bottom of the Chart for 2 Sided
Color Scanning Calibration) of the printed
Chart for 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration
against the left side of the document feeder,
and load the chart facing up on the duplex
Maintenance
8 Select [Start].
The message “Scanning chart...” appears and the machine prints a chart for 2 Sided Color
Scanning Calibration.
9 Align the magenta patch (squares printed at
the top and bottom of the Chart for 2 Sided
Color Scanning Calibration) of the printed
Magenta 3
Chart for 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration
against the left side of the document feeder,
and load the chart facing down on the duplex
10 Select [Start].
The message “Scanning chart and performing color correction...” appears and the machine
automatically calibrates the colors. A screen showing the result appears.
Note • If the calibration fails, a message is displayed on the touch screen. Select [Conform] and perform
the calibration again.
11 Select [Confirm].
13 Copy to confirm the image quality.
Note • During 2-sided color scanning calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs and faxes.
113
3 Maintenance
Printing a Report/List
This section describes how to print a report/ list.

Note • When the <Data> indicator is not lit, you cannot print the Stored Documents List.
For information on the types of report/list, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120).
1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

Maintenance
<Machine Status> button
2 Select [Print Reports].
3 Note • If [Print Reports Button] under [Reports] is set

to [Disabled], the [Print Reports] button
appears only when the [Tools] button is
displayed on the Services Home screen. For
more information on [Reports], refer to
"Reports" (P.176).
• If you want to print [Billing Data List] or
[Auditron Report (Fax Jobs)], insert a card to
the machine before instructing print.
3 Select a report or list to print, and then press
the <Start> button.
Note • The reports or lists displayed on the screen
vary depending on the machine
configuration.
114
Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID
Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID
When the Private Charge Print feature is used, all the print jobs with a user ID, regardless of
its validity, are stored with the Private Charge Print feature. The system administrator can
set the expiration date and can set up the machine to delete the expired jobs automatically,
or manually delete them.
This section describes how to delete documents with an invalid user ID stored with the
Private Charge Print feature.
For more information on the Private Charge Print feature, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs", and
"12 Computer Operations" > "Print" in the User Guide.
For more information on how to set the period of time save jobs, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.283).
Maintenance
select [Enter].
3
3 Press the <Job Status> button.
4 Select the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab.
5 Select [Private Charge Print].

6 Select the user ID to delete, and then select [Job List].
7 Select the job to delete, and then select [Delete].
115
3 Maintenance
Setting Restore Tool
Setting Restore Tool backs up the settings data of the machine to a network-connected
computer to prevent the loss of data resulting from the malfunction of the machine's hard
disk.
The feature is designed to restore data to the machine after the hard disk is replaced.
For more information on Setting Restore Tool, contact our Customer Support Center.
Note • You can back up the setting data of the machine when the hard disk and the Ethernet interface are
installed on the machine.
The following data can be backed up on the computer:
 Address Book
Maintenance
 Folder (except for document files)

 User account list

Job Flow
 Stored Programming
3  Job log
 Error log
 Auditron log

Other information such as user setting data
Users cannot replace the hard disk by themselves. When replacing the hard disk, contact our
116
4 Machine Status
This chapter describes the features for checking the machine status.
 Overview of Machine Status ..................................................................................................118

Machine Information ...............................................................................................................119
 Faults ...............................................................................................................................................134
 Supplies...........................................................................................................................................135

Billing Information.....................................................................................................................136
4 Machine Status
Overview of Machine Status
You can check machine status and the number of printed pages on the screen. You can also
print various reports/lists to check the job history, settings and registered information.

Machine Status
<Machine Status> button
You can check the following information on the [Machine Status] screen:
 Machine Information
You can check the machine configuration, paper tray status, and hard disk overwriting
4 status. You can also change or set print modes, and check the number of pages printed per
meter or per user. You can also print various reports/lists to check the job history, settings
and registered information.
For more information, refer to "Machine Information" (P.119).
 Faults
You can check the information on errors that occurred on the machine.
For more information, refer to "Faults" (P.134).
 Supplies
You can check the status of consumables.
For more information, refer to "Supplies" (P.135).
 Billing Information
You can check the number of pages printed by meter.
For more information, refer to "Billing Information" (P.136).
118
Machine Information
Machine Information
On the [Machine Information] screen, you can check the machine configuration and paper
tray status, print various reports/lists, and change and set print mode settings.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
General Information ...................................................................................................................................................................119
Paper Tray Status.........................................................................................................................................................................120
Print Reports..................................................................................................................................................................................120
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists ........................................................................................................................................129
Overwrite Hard Disk.....................................................................................................................................................................130
Print Mode .....................................................................................................................................................................................130
Fax Receiving Mode.....................................................................................................................................................................133
Machine Status
2 On the [Machine Information] screen
displayed, you can check the machine status.
General Information
On the [General Information] screen, you can check the serial number of the machine,
machine configuration, and software version.
1 Check the general information.
 Website
Tells you whom to contact when making inquiries about maintenance and operation.
 Machine Serial Number

Indicates the serial number of the machine.
 Current System Software

Indicates the current system software.
 IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the machine.
 Machine Configuration
Displays the [Machine Configuration] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Machine Configuration] Screen" (P.120).
 Software Version
Displays the [Software Version] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Software Version] Screen" (P.120).
119
4 Machine Status
[Machine Configuration] Screen

You can check the machine configuration.
1 Select [Machine Configuration].

2 Check the machine configuration on the screen
displayed.
• Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to
switch the screen to be displayed. For
information on how to drag or flick, refer to
"2 Product Overview" > "Touch Screen" in the
User Guide.
[Software Version] Screen

Machine Status
You can check the software version.
1 Select [Software Version].

2 Check the software versions.
Paper Tray Status

You can check the paper trays set on the machine. On the screen, you can check the
following items:
 Status
 % Full (Amount of paper remaining)
 Paper Size
 Paper Type
1 Select [Paper Tray Status].

2 Check the status of the paper trays.
Print Reports
The following describes how to print a report and a list.
120
Machine Information
Note • The items displayed vary depending on the optional features installed.
1 Select [Print Reports].

2 Select the type of a report or a list to print.
Note • The screen as shown on the right appears
when the [Tools] button is displayed on the
Job Status/Activity Report
Machine Status
Select [Job Status/Activity Report].
Note • To display the [Job Status/Activity Report] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then
select [Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job Status/Activity Report].
2 Select a report or a list to print.
3 Press the <Start> button.
 Job History Report

You can check the status or result of each job. Up to 200 latest jobs can be printed. Select a
report to print from [All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Folder Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax
Jobs], [File Transfer Jobs], or [Job Flow & File Transfer Jobs].
Selecting [Include Child Jobs] check box prints each related job on each line. Deselecting this
check box prints the multiple related jobs (such as job flow jobs) on one line.
You can also set up the machine to automatically print a [Job History Report] every 50 jobs.
For information on the auto print of a job history report, refer to "Reports" (P.176). When you set the machine to print a job
history report automatically, the machine prints the results of all jobs.
 Error History Report

You can print information on errors occurred in the machine. The latest 50 errors are printed.
 Activity Report
You can check whether transmissions completed successfully or not. The remote terminal
name and the result and status are recorded by sorting into incoming or outgoing fax.
The following information is not included in the Activity Report.
 Redialed transmissions and pollings.
 Deleted documents that were waiting to be transmitted.
 When the power is shut off, or when a system error occurs during an activity.
You can also set up the machine to automatically print the [Activity Report] every 100
activities.
121
4 Machine Status
Note • The use of ApeosWare Log Management (sold separately) allows you to import the contents of an
Activity Report to a computer. For information on ApeosWare Log Management or ApeosWare
Accounting Service, refer to the manuals provided with the software.
For information on the settings, refer to "Reports" (P.176).
For more information about the Activity Report, refer to "Activity Report" (P.754).
 Stored File List

You can print a list of uncompleted jobs (uncompleted transmissions/receptions or those
stored for polling) stored in folders.
Copy Reports
1 Select [Copy Reports].

Note • To display the [Copy Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Copy Reports].
Machine Status
2 Select [Configuration Report].
4
 Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine.
Note • The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy Reports],
[Printer Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
Printer Reports
1 Select [Printer Reports].

Note • To display the [Printer Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Printer Reports].
2 Select a list to print.
Note • The items displayed vary depending on the
options installed.

You can print the following items when printer related options are installed.
When Adobe® PostScript® 3TM Kit (optional) is installed:

PostScript Logical Printers List 
PostScript Font List
122
Machine Information
 Configuration Report
settings of the machine with the report.
 PCL Settings List

Prints the settings for the PCL printer.
 PCL Macro List

Prints the list of forms registered for PCL.
 PDF Settings List

Prints the settings configured in the PDF printer mode.
Machine Status
 TIFF/JPEG Settings List
Prints the settings configured in the TIFF and JPEG printer mode.
 TIFF/JPEG Logical Printers List

Prints the list of logical printers created in the TIFF and JPEG printer mode.
You can configure the setting for TIFF and JPEG logical printers using CentreWare Internet Services. For more information
on the settings, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
4
 PostScript Logical Printers List

Prints the list of logical printers created in PostScript.
You can configure the setting for PostScript logical printers using CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer
to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
 ESC/P Settings List

Prints the settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode.
 ESC/P Logical Printers List

Prints the programming settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode.
 ESC/P User Defined List

Prints the list of the registered forms, logos, and patterns for ART IV, ESC/P and PC-PR201H.
 HP-GL/2 Settings List

Prints the settings for the HP-GL®, HP-GL/2® and HP-RTL emulation modes.
 HP-GL/2 Logical Printers List

Prints the stored programming settings for the HP-GL®, HP-GL/2®, and HP-RTL emulation
modes.
 HP-GL/2 Palette List

Prints the sample list in 256 colors that can be set with the pen attribute on HP-GL® and HP-
GL/2® emulation modes.
123
4 Machine Status
 KS Settings List
Prints the settings for the KS5843 emulation mode.
 KSSM Settings List

Prints the settings for the KSSM emulation mode.
 KS5895 Settings List

Prints the settings for the KS5895 emulation mode.
 Font List
Prints the list of fonts available on the machine.
Note • Information printed varies depending on the options installed.
 PCL Font List

Machine Status
Prints the fonts available in PCL.
 PostScript Font List

Prints the fonts available in PostScript.
 DocuWorks Printer Settings List

4 Prints the settings for DocuWorks Direct Print.
Scan Reports
1 Select [Scan Reports].

Note • To display the [Scan Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Scan Reports].
 Reports
You can print the Configuration Report, Scan/Fax Configuration Report, and Domain Filter
List. Select a list to print, and then press the <Start> button.
 Configuration Report
 Scan/Fax Configuration
You can check the settings configured for the Scan feature and the Fax feature.

Domain Filter List
You can check the settings configured for the domain which filters data transmissions.
124
Machine Information
 Job Template List (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

You can print the list of settings for the server storing the job templates, which are created
using CentreWare Internet Services.
For more information on the scan service setting tools, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
 Address Book
You can check the settings for the address numbers. When you specify a range of address
numbers, the list of settings for the specified address numbers is printed. Each page contains
the settings information on 50 address numbers.
1 Select [Address Book].

2 Specify a range of address numbers to print.
Machine Status
4
Fax Reports
1 Select [Fax Reports]

Note • To display the [Fax Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Fax Report].
 Reports
You can print the Configuration Report, Scan/Fax Configuration Report, Folder Selector List,
Inbound Fax Spam List, Domain Filter List, and VoIP Gateway List. Select a list to print, and
then press the <Start> button.
 Configuration Report
 Scan/Fax Configuration
You can check the settings configured for the Fax feature and the Scan feature.
125
4 M achine Status
 Folder Selector List

You can check the settings for the Folder Sorting feature.
 Inbound Fax Spam List
You can check the settings for the G3 ID (telephone numbers) for which fax reception is
restricted.
 Domain Filter List
You can check the settings configured for the domain which filters data transmissions.

VoIP Gateway List
You can check the registration for VoIP gateways.
 Address Book
You can check the settings for the address numbers (speed dial), fax group recipients, and
Machine Status
relay stations.
When you specify a range of address numbers, the lists of settings for the specified address
numbers and relay stations are printed. Each page contains the settings information on 50
address numbers.
For information on how to register speed dial and fax group recipients, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.303) and
"Create Fax Group Recipients" (P.311).
4 Selecting [Address Book] displays the screen for

specifying a range of address numbers. Select a
range of numbers, and then press the <Start>
button.

Fax Group Recipients
You can print the list of settings for Fax Group Recipients.
 Select All
You can print the lists of settings for all address numbers, fax group recipients, and relay
stations.
 Fax Comments List

You can check the registered comments to use on fax cover sheets.
 Billing Data List

You can check the registration status of the billing data.
Note • [Billing Data List] is displayed when [Fax/Internet Fax Service] is set to [Enable Accounting] under
[Accounting] > [Accounting Type] > [Local Accounting] > [Auditron Mode].
Selecting [Billing Data List] displays the screen for specifying a range of address numbers.
Select a range of numbers, and then press the <Start> button.

Select All
126
Machine Information
You can print the list of all billing data.
Folder List
Prints the list of folder settings and the procedure for saving files to folders.
Note • [Folder List] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the Services Home screen.
For information on how to create a folder, refer to "Create Folder" (P.292).
1 Select [Folder List].

Note • To display the [Folder List] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports] > [Folder List].
2 Select a range of folder numbers to print.
Machine Status
Job Counter Report 4
Prints the counter report for each job. You can check the breakdown of the number of actual
use of the machine by feature (such as the number of pages printed and the number of
times used) and cumulative time when the machine is used (such as runtime, standby time,
Low Power mode, Sleep mode, and power-off time) by minutes on the Job Counter Report.
Note • [Job Counter Report] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the Services Home screen.
1 Select [Job Counter Report].

Note • To display the [Job Counter Report] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job Counter Report].
2 Select [Job Counter Report].
Auditron Reports
You can print an auditron report by each user. Note that the content on the screen differs
depending on whether the Auditron mode for services is enabled or not.
Note • [Auditron Reports] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the Services Home screen.
• You cannot output the report to a file. To output a report to a file, use ApeosWare Log Management
(sold separately) or ApeosWare Accounting Service (sold separately).
 When [Accounting Type] is set to other than [Local Accounting]

When [Accounting Type] of each service is set to other than [Local Accounting], the
following screen appears, allowing you to print a Meter Report (Print Jobs).
1 Select [Auditron Reports].
127
4 Machine Status
Note • To display the [Auditron Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Auditron Reports].
2 Select [Meter Report (Print Jobs)].
 Meter Report (Print Jobs)

You can check the total number of printed pages and sheets of paper used for each client
Machine Status
(job owner). [Meter Report (Print Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is
initialized.
 When [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting]

When [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting], the [Auditron Reports] screen appears.
4 You can print the auditron report per user for the services of which the Auditron mode is set
to [Enable Accounting].
For information on enabling the Auditron feature for each service, refer to "Accounting" (P.313).
1 Select [Auditron Reports].

Note • To display the [Auditron Reports] screen, select the <Machine Status> button, and then select
[Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Auditron Reports].
2 Select an auditron report to print.
3 Select a range of user numbers to print.

Note • Selecting [Select All] selects all users.
 Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)

You can check the total number of pages copied and printed on the machine. If the limit is
set for the number of pages or colors that can be scanned, you can also check the limit value.
[Auditron Report (Copy Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is initialized.
Note • [No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is registered
under [Accounting] or [Authentication/Security Settings].
 Auditron Report (Print Jobs)

You can check the total number of printed pages and sheets of paper used for each client
(job owner). [Auditron Report (Print Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is
initialized.
128
Machine Information
Important • When [Print Service] is set to [Disable Accounting] in [Auditron Mode] under [Accounting Type],
[Meter Report (Print Jobs)] is displayed instead of [Auditron Report (Print Jobs)]. For more
information on [Meter Report (Print Jobs)], refer to "Meter Report (Print Jobs)" (P.128).
 Auditron Report (Scan Jobs)

You can check the total number of pages scanned with the machine. If the limit is set for the
number of pages that can be scanned, you can also check the limit value. [Auditron Report
(Scan Jobs)] counts pages from the time at which the data is initialized.
 Auditron Report (Fax Jobs)

You can check the total number of fax transmissions/receptions and the total number of
Machine Status
pages transmitted for each user.
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists

Some reports/lists related to the Fax and Scan services can be printed only automatically. 4
The following describes reports/lists that can be printed automatically.
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered

The report is automatically printed when a transmission of scanned data to a computer on
a network or a transmission of scanned data by e-mail fails. When a fax, the IP Fax (SIP), or
the Internet Fax transmission fails, this report is also printed. You can check a thumbnail of
the scanned data and its transmission result.
You can set not to print out the Transmission Report - Undelivered automatically.
For information on setting whether to print the report for e-mails automatically, refer to "Scan File Transfer Report" (P.177).
For information on setting whether to print the report for faxes automatically, refer to "Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered" (P.177).
Transmission Report
The report is automatically printed when a transmission of scanned data to a computer on
a network or a transmission of scanned data by e-mail succeeds. When a fax, the IP Fax
(SIP), or the Internet Fax transmission succeeds, this report is also printed. You can check a
thumbnail of the scanned data and its transmission result.
You can set not to print out the Transmission Report - Undelivered automatically.
For information on setting whether to print the report for e-mails automatically, refer to "Scan File Transfer Report" (P.177).
For information on setting whether to print the report for faxes automatically, refer to "Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered" (P.177).
Folder Report
You can confirm that a document is stored in a folder.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Folder Report" (P.177).
Broadcast Report
You can check the result of a broadcast transmission. The recipients and transmission result/
status are recorded.
129
4 Machine Status
If you set to print this report automatically, it is printed each time a broadcast transmission
is completed.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report" (P.177).
Multi-poll Report
You can check the result of a multi-poll communication (polling from multiple recipients).
The remote terminal name and transmission result/status are recorded.
If you set to print this report automatically, it is printed each time a multi-poll transmission
is completed.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report" (P.177).
File Transfer Report - Fax Server

This report is output after image data scanned by the machine is sent to a Server Fax server
via a network. It contains the scanned document image and the transmission result. To have
Machine Status
the report printed, enter the System Administration mode.

For information on specifying whether or not to have the report printed automatically, refer to "Scan File Transfer Report
(Fax Server)" (P.178).
Job Flow Error Report (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

This report notifies job flow errors. The date and time of the error occurred and the error
4 codes are printed.
You can set not to print out the Job Flow Error Report automatically.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Job Flow Error Report (ApeosPort Series
Models Only)" (P.178).
Overwrite Hard Disk

You can check the overwriting status of the hard disk. "Overwriting" indicates that the
overwriting is in progress. "Standby" indicates that the overwriting is completed.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• [Overwrite Hard Disk] appears when [Overwrite Hard Disk] is enabled under [Authentication/Security
Settings]. For more information, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.333).
1 Select [Overwrite Hard Disk].

2 Check the overwriting status of the hard disk.
Print Mode
You can print the programming settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode and
retrieve the programming.
Note • The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.
130
Machine Information
2 Select [Print Mode].

3 Select [Off-line] or [On-line].
 Off-line
The machine does not accept data from a
computer. Any data being sent is cancelled and
not printed.
 On-line
The printer accepts data from a computer.
4 Select a printer language to set a print mode.

5 Set each item.
Machine Status
Note • The items displayed vary depending on the
printer language.
4
Retrieve Programming
You can retrieve and use settings registered in memory.
1 Select [Retrieve Programming].

2 Select the memory number to use.
 Factory Defaults
You can use the factory default settings.
 Custom Settings
Displays the numbers stored in the memory.
Programming
You can check or change the value set for the print mode item number.
For the item numbers that can be configured in each mode menu, refer to "ESC/P-K Emulation Settings" (P.672), "PDF Direct
Print Settings" (P.685), "PCL Emulation Settings" (P.691), and "HP-GL/2 Emulation Settings" (P.699).
1 Select [Programming].
2 Enter the item number of the feature to set in
[Item Number] with the numeric keypad.
3 Select [Confirm]. The current setting value
appears.
4 Select [Change Value].
131
4 Machine Status
5 Enter [New Value] with the numeric keypad.

6 Select [Save].
Store/Delete Programming
For ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2 emulations, you can register settings in memory.
You can register up to 20 print modes for ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2 emulations.
1 Select [Store/Delete Programming].

Machine Status
2 Select [Store Current Selections] or [Delete].
 Store Current Selections

Stores the current selections. If you select a
number already used, its settings will be
overwritten with the new settings. The
4 overwritten settings cannot be restored.
 Delete
Select this to delete a programming.
Important • Deleted numbers cannot be restored.
3 Select the memory number to store or to delete.
Default Programming
You can start the machine using the settings stored in memory as default settings.
1 Select [Default Programming].

2 Select [Factory Defaults] or [Custom Settings].
 Factory Defaults
You can use the factory default settings.
 Custom Settings
Displays the numbers stored in memory.
3 When you select [Custom Settings], select a memory number to use.

4 Select [Save].
Password
For PDF Direct Print, if a password is set for files, set the password here in advance. PDF files
can only be printed when the passwords assigned and entered are the same.
You can use up to 32 characters for the password.
1 Press [Password].
132
Machine Information
2 Enter a password of up to 32 single-byte

characters with the keyboard displayed, and
select [Save].
Fax Receiving Mode

You can set a mode for receiving faxes.
Note • As for IP fax (SIP), the machine always receives faxes automatically.
Machine Status
For information on auto receive and manual receive, refer to "4 Fax" > "Receiving Faxes" in the User Guide.

2 Select [Fax Receiving Mode].
3 Select a fax receiving mode.
 Manual Receive
4
The machine manually receives faxes from a
remote machine. This mode is convenient to
confirm the sender or use an external telephone
before receiving faxes.
 Auto Receive
The machine automatically receives faxes.
4 Select [Save].
133
4 Machine Status
Faults
This section describes how to check the information on errors that occurred on the machine.
The error history report shows the list of the latest 50 errors. The items printed include the
date and time, error code, and error category.
The following describes how to print the error history report.

2 Select the [Faults] tab.
3 Select [Error History Report].
Machine Status

Note • You can also access [Error History Report] under [Machine Information] > [Print Reports] > [Job
4 Status/Activity Report].
• If [Print Reports Button] under [Reports] is set to [Disabled], the [Error History Report] button does
not appear on the screen. For more information on reports, refer to "Reports" (P.176).
134
Supplies
Supplies
You can check the status of consumables on the [Supplies] screen. The status of
consumables is shown as "OK", "Replace Soon (Order Now)", or "Replace Now".
The following describes the procedure to check the status of consumables.
For information on replacing consumables, refer to "Maintenance" (P.77).

2 Select the [Supplies] tab and confirm the status
of the toners.
Note • Pressing a supply name displays a screen
about the status of the supply.
Machine Status
3 Select [Other Consumables] from the drop-
down menu, and confirm the status of the
consumables.
4
On the [Supplies] screen, you can check the following items:

 Black Toner [K]  Drum Cartridge [R4]

Cyan Toner [C] 
Waste Toner Container [R5]
 Magenta Toner [M]  Staple Cartridge [R1]

Yellow Toner [Y] 
Booklet Staple Cartridge [R2]

Drum Cartridge [R1] 
Booklet Staple Cartridge [R3]
 Drum Cartridge [R2]  Hole Punch Waste Container [R4]
 Drum Cartridge [R3]
Important • If you replace a toner cartridge with a partially used toner cartridge (such as a toner cartridge
removed from another ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275,
DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275), the status displayed may differ
from the actual remaining amount. When replacing toner cartridges, we recommend that you use
new ones.
Note • Pressing a supply name displays a screen about the status of the supply.
• Staple Cartridge: Displays when C3 Finisher is installed.
• Hole Punch Waste Container: Displays when C3 Finisher is installed.
• Booklet Staple Cartridge: Displays when C3 Finisher is installed.
• The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.
• Scroll the list by drag or flick operation to switch the screen to be displayed. For information on how
to drag or flick, refer to "2 Product Overview" > "Touch Screen" in the User Guide.
135
4 Machine Status
Billing Information
On the [Billing Information] screen, you can check the number of pages printed per meter
or user.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
Billing Information...................................................................................................................................................................... 136
User Account Billing Information............................................................................................................................................ 137

2 Select the [Billing Information] tab.
Machine Status
4 Billing Information
You can check the total number of copies and pages printed by individual meters.
1 Select [Billing Information].

2 On the screen, check each meter.
Note • [Previous meter reading] can be displayed
when using EP system. For more information
on EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.758).
 Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the machine.
 Color Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in full color.
 Black Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white, and pages
faxed*1.
 Color Large Impressions

Displays the total number of pages printed in large-size full color*2.
 Total Impressions
Displays the total number of Color Impressions and Black Impressions.
Note • When print data resulting from color conversion using an ICC profile, for example, on the application
is printed at Auto (Color/B/W), even documents that appear in black-and-white on the monitor are
printed in color. In this case, Color Impressions is used for counting the number of prints.
136
Billing Information
The table below shows which billing meter is counted depending on the combination of area
of paper and the output color.
Area of Paper Output Color Meter for Counting Number of Counts

Smaller than 279 x 400 mm Black & White Black Impressions 1
(0.1116 m2)
Full Color Color Impressions 1
279 x 400 mm (0.1116m2) Black & White Black Impressions 1
or larger*1 and smaller than
297 x 420 mm*2 x 1.5
(0.18700m2)
Machine Status
Color Large 1
Impressions
297 x 420 mm*2 x 1.5 Black & White Black Impressions 2
(0.18711 m2) or larger and
297 x 420 mm*2 x 2.0
(0.249480 m2) or smaller
4
Larger than 297 x 420 mm*2 Black & White Black Impressions 3
x 2.0 (0.249480 m2)
*1 : 279 mm or more in the primary scanning direction and 400 mm or more in the secondary scanning direction.
*2 : 297 x 420 mm represents the area of a A3 paper sheet.
User Account Billing Information

You can check the number of pages printed by user.
When the Auditron mode is enabled, you can check the billing meters for the currently
authenticated user ID.
Note • [User Account Billing Information] is displayed when the [Accounting Type] is set to [Local
Accounting].
For more information on the Auditron mode, refer to "Accounting" (P.313).
 To check the billing meter of a currently authenticated user ID

1) Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad
or the keyboard displayed on the screen,
and select [Enter].
When a password is required, select [Next]
and enter the user's passcode, and select
[Enter].
2) Press the <Machine Status> button.
137
4 Machine Status
 To check the system administrator meter

1) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
2) Press the <Machine Status> button.
2 Select the [Billing Information] tab.
3 Select [User Account Billing Information].
Machine Status
4 Select a meter to check.

Note • The meters are displayed only for the
features set to [Enable Accounting] in the
Auditron mode.
4
 Meter (Copy Jobs)
Displays the number of pages copied.
 Meter (Scan Jobs)

Displays the number of pages scanned.
 Meter (Print Jobs)

Displays the number of pages printed.
Note • [Meter (Print Jobs)] is not displayed for the system administrator.
138
5 Tools
Each feature of the machine is set to the factory default (initial) settings, but you can
customize these settings in accordance with your environment. To change or customize
these settings, enter the System Administration mode and make changes in the [Tools]
screen.
This chapter describes the features that can be changed and the procedures to change the
settings.

System Settings Procedure.....................................................................................................140
 Tools Menu List............................................................................................................................144

Common Service Settings .......................................................................................................160
 Copy Service Settings................................................................................................................205
 Connectivity & Network Setup..............................................................................................215

Print Service Settings.................................................................................................................244
 Scan Service Settings ................................................................................................................251

Fax Service Settings...................................................................................................................260
 E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings ..................................................................................275
 Address Book Settings ..............................................................................................................278
 Folder Service Settings .............................................................................................................279
 Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only) .......................................281

Media Print Service Settings ..................................................................................................282
 Stored File Settings....................................................................................................................283

Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only) ..........................286
 Web Browser Setup....................................................................................................................290
 Setup................................................................................................................................................292
 Accounting ....................................................................................................................................313
 Authentication/Security Settings.........................................................................................323
5 Tools
System Settings Procedure
To change or customize the system settings, enter the System Administration mode.
This section describes the basic procedures for system settings. The following shows the
reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode ..................................................................................................................... 140
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode .................................................................................. 140
Step 3 Selecting [Tools].............................................................................................................................................................. 141
Step 4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen....................................................................................................... 141
Step 5 Setting a Feature ............................................................................................................................................................ 143
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ........................................................................................................................ 143
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button or the login

information field on the touch screen.
Tools
5
<Log In/Out> button
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode

To enter the System Administration mode, enter the system administrator’s user ID. If
[Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] is set to [On] under [Tools] > [Authentication/
Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Passcode Policy], you need to enter the passcode.
We recommend that you change the system administrator’s user ID and passcode
immediately after installing the machine.
For more information on how to change the passcode, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.323).

then select [Enter].
• The screen may differ depending on the settings of the machine.
• The <Log In/Out> button is lit when the machine enters the System Administration mode.
140
Step 3 Selecting [Tools]

Step 4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen

On the [Tools] screen, select a setting item to set.
For the settings that can be selected on the [Tools] screen, refer to "Tools Menu List" (P.144).
1 Select a tab to set.
Tools
5
System Settings
You can set or change the default values of each service.
 Common Service Settings

Allows you to configure the general settings of the machine.
For more information, refer to "Common Service Settings" (P.160).
 Copy Service Settings

Allows you to configure the copy service settings such as copy feature defaults, copy
operation control, and button indications.
For more information, refer to "Copy Service Settings" (P.205).
 Connectivity & Network Setup

Allows you to configure the network related settings such as ports and protocols.
For more information, refer to "Connectivity & Network Setup" (P.215).
 Print Service Settings

Allows you to configure the print service settings such as memory settings and print
operation control.
For more information, refer to "Print Service Settings" (P.244).
 Scan Service Settings

Allows you to configure the scan service settings such as scanner defaults and button
indications.
For more information, refer to "Scan Service Settings" (P.251).
141
5 Tools
 Fax Service Settings

Allows you to configure the fax service settings such as setting defaults, fax control and
button settings.
For more information, refer to "Fax Service Settings" (P.260).
 E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings

Allows you to configure the e-mail and Internet fax transmission specifications settings.
For more information, refer to "E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings" (P.275).
 Address Book Settings

Allows you to configure the Address Book settings.
For more information, refer to "Address Book Settings" (P.278).
 Folder Service Settings

Allows you to configure the settings relating to folders.
For more information, refer to "Folder Service Settings" (P.279).
 Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Allows you to configure the settings relating to Job Flow.
Tools
Job flow is a function to execute a series of registered operations.

For more information, refer to "Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.281).
5  Media Print Service Settings

Allows you to configure the settings relating to Media Print (Text and Photo).
For more information, refer to "Media Print Service Settings" (P.282).
 Stored File Settings

Allows you to set how to delete files in a folder and print files stored in the machine.
For more information, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.283).
 Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Allows you to configure a remote access destination server.
For more information, refer to "Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.286).
 Web Browser Setup

Allows you to configure the settings relating to the web browser when accessing a remote
destination server.
For more information, refer to "Web Browser Setup" (P.290).
Setup
You can create and change folders, job flow sheets, and the Address Book (speed dial
numbers).
For more information, refer to "Setup" (P.292).
Accounting
You can register users and configure the settings for account administration.
For more information, refer to "Accounting" (P.313).
Authentication/Security Settings
You can configure the authentication and security settings.
For more information, refer to "Authentication/Security Settings" (P.323).
142
Step 5 Setting a Feature
1 Select any feature.

Note • Select a submenu from the [Group] list, and then select a feature from the [Features] list.
• Select [ ] or [ ] as required.
2 Select an item to set.
3 After setting the feature, select [Save].
Note • If rebooting the machine is required to enable the new settings, when you select [Close] in the
[Tools] screen, a message may be displayed. Follow the message and reboot the machine. After the
machine reboots, it exits from the System Administration mode, and the <Log In/Out> button is
unlit.
• When you configure settings under [System Settings] or [Setup] and then press the <Services Home>
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode
Tools
Note • You can also log out by pressing the login information field on the touch screen, and then selecting
[Logout].
• The <Log In/Out> button is unlit when the machine exits from the System Administration mode. 5
143
5 Tools
Tools Menu List
The following tables list the items that can be set on the [Tools] screen. Note that the some
items may not appear depending on the configuration of the machine.
System Settings
 Common Service Settings
Machine Clock/Timers (P.160) 

Date (P.160)

Time (P.160)
 NTP Time Synchronization (P.161)
 Connection Interval (P.161)
 Time Server Address (P.161)

Auto Clear (P.161)

Auto Job Release (P.161)
 Auto Print (P.161)
 Printer Lockout (P.162)
 Time Zone (P.162)

Daylight Savings (P.162)

Print-On-Demand Duration (P.163)
Tools
Power Saver Settings (P.163)  Power Saver Timers (P.163)


Enter Power Saver after Printing Ends (P.163)
5 

Power Saver Deactivation (P.164)
Smart WelcomEyes (P.164)
Audio Tones (P.164) 
Control Panel Select Tone (P.164)
 Control Panel Alert Tone (P.164)

Base Tone (P.164)

Machine Ready Tone (P.164)

Job Complete Tone 1, 2 (P.164)

Fault Tone (P.164)
 Auto Clear Alert Tone (P.165)

Alert Tone (P.165)

Out of Paper Warning Tone (P.165)

Low Toner Alert Tone (P.165)

Stored Programming Tone (P.165)
 Stored Programming Complete Tone (P.165)

Line Monitor Volume (P.165)
 Ringing Volume (P.165)
144
Tools Menu List
Screen/Button Settings (P.165) 

Screen Default (P.166)
 Screen After Auto Clear (P.166)

Auto Display of Login Screen (P.166)
 Custom Buttons 1 to 3 (P.166)
 One-touch Buttons (P.166)
 Services Home (P.166)

Services Home - Additional Features (P.166)

Job Type on Job Status screen (P.166)
 Default Language (P.167)
 Screen Brightness (P.167)
 Reconfirm E-mail Recipient (P.167)

Reconfirm Fax/Internet Fax Recipient (P.167)

Reconfirm E-mail Recipient Button (P.167)
 Reconfirm Fax / Internet Fax Button (P.168)

Screen After Inserting USB (P.168)

Display Consumables Screen (P.168)
 Keyboard Input Restriction (P.168)

Operation of Up/Down Buttons (P.168)

Flick and Double-tap (P.168)
 Double-Tap Interval (P.170)
 Sys. Admin. Settings Security Warning (Type 2 (T2)
model only) (P.170)
 SNMP Configuration Security Warning (Type 2 (T2)
Tools
model only) (P.170)
 Global IP Address Security Warning (Type 2 (T2)
model only) (P.170)
Paper Tray Settings (P.170)  Custom Paper Name/Color (P.170)
5
 Paper Tray Attributes (P.170)
 Customize Paper Supply Screen (P.171)

Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen (P.171)
 Paper Tray Attributes During Loading (P.172)
 Paper Tray Priority (P.172)
 Paper Type Priority (P.172)
 Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults (P.172)

Auto Tray Switching Control (P.173)
 Image Quality (P.173)
Image Quality Adjustment (P.174)  Image Quality (P.174)
 Calibration (P.176)
 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration (P.176)
Reports (P.176)  Print Reports Button (P.176)
 Job History Report (P.177)
 Activity Report (P.177)
 Transmission Report - Job Undelivered (P.177)
 Transmission Report - Job Deleted (P.177)
 Folder Report (P.177)
 Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report (P.177)

Scan File Transfer Report (P.177)
 Scan File Transfer Report (Fax Server) (P.178)
 2 Sided Report (P.178)
 Activity Report - Recipient (P.178)
 Job Flow Error Report (ApeosPort Series Models
Only) (P.178)
145
5 Tools
Maintenance (P.178) 
EP Diagnostic Request/Repair Request (P.178)
 Check EP Connection (P.178)

EP Registration (P.179)
 Initialize Hard Disk (P.179)
 Delete All Data (P.179)
 Software Options (P.179)

Power on Self Test (P.179)

Check Smart Card Details (P.179)
 Finisher Adjustment (P.179)
 Adjust Image Transfer (P.180)
 Software Upgrade (P.180)

Adjust Paper Registration (P.180)

Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings (P.181)
 Quick Setup Home (P.181)
Watermark (P.181) 
Date Format (P.181)

Default Watermark Effect (P.181)
 Default Watermark (P.181)
 Font Size (P.181)

Background Pattern (P.182)

Font Color (P.182)

Density (P.182)
 Watermark/Background Contrast (P.182)
Tools
 Force Watermark - Copy (P.182)

 Force Watermark - Client Print (P.182)

Force Watermark - Print Stored File (P.182)
5 

Force Watermark - Media Print (P.182)
Custom Watermark 1 to 3 (P.183)
 Print this Sample List (P.183)
Secure Watermark (P.183)  Secure Watermark Control (P.183)
 Digital Codes Settings (P.183)
 Force Secure Watermark (P.184)
 Secure Watermark Defaults (P.184)
 Secure Watermark Effect (P.184)
Force Annotation (P.185) 
Apply Layout Template to Copy/Print Jobs (P.186)
 Delete Layout Template (P.186)
 Create Text String (P.186)
Print Universal Unique ID (P.186)  Print Universal Unique ID (P.187)
 Print Position (P.187)
 Print Position Adjustment (P.187)
 Print Position (Side 2) (P.187)
Image Log Control (ApeosPort Series  Image Log Control (P.189)
Models Only) (P.187)  Image Log Target (P.189)
 Image Log Generation (P.189)
 Transfer Image Log (P.189)
Notify Job Completion by E-mail (P.190)  Targeted Jobs (P.190)

E-mail Addresses 1 to 5 (P.190)

E-mail Message (P.190)
Plug-in Settings (P.190)  Embedded Plug-ins (P.190)
 List of Embedded Plug-ins (P.190)
146
Tools Menu List
Other Settings (P.190) 

Fax Service (P.190)
 Offset Stacking (Center Tray - Lower) (P.191)

Offset Stacking (Right Middle Tray) (P.191)
 Extra Center Tray (P.191)
 Booklet Offset (P.191)
 Auto Job Promotion (P.191)

Default Print Paper Size (P.191)

Odd Page 2 Sided (P.192)
 Paper Size Settings (P.192)
 Millimeters/Inches (P.201)
 Data Encryption (P.201)

Encryption Key for Confidential Data (P.202)

Service Rep. Restricted Operation (P.203)
 Software Download (P.203)

Check Document Guides Position (P.204)

Document Feeder Quiet Mode (P.204)
 Drum Cartridge Conservation Mode (P.204)

Restrict Recipient Selection Method (P.204)

Restrict User to Edit Address Book (P.204)
 Auto Validation of Speed Dial Entry (P.204)
 Data Indicator (P.204)
Tools
 Copy Service Settings
Copy Tab - Features Allocation (P.205) -

Preset Buttons (P.206) 
Paper Supply - Button 2 - 5 (P.206)
5

Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 4 (P.206)
 Front Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3 (P.206)

Back Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3 (P.206)

Transparency Tray - Button 1 - 3 (P.206)

Separator & Handout Tray - Button 1 - 3 (P.206)
147
5 Tools
Copy Defaults (P.206) 

Paper Supply (P.206)
 Reduce/Enlarge (P.206)

Output Color (P.207)
 Output Color (Simple Copy) (P.207)
 Single Color (P.207)
 Dual Color - Source Color (P.207)

Dual Color - Target Area Color (P.207)

Dual Color - Non-target Area Color (P.207)
 Original Type (P.207)
 Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White) (P.207)
 Original Type - Auto (Black & White) (P.207)

Lighten/Darken (P.208)

Contrast (P.208)
 Sharpness (P.208)

Saturation (P.208)

Background Suppression (P.208)
 Color Balance - Yellow / Color Balance - Magenta /
Color Balance - Cyan / Color Balance - Black (P.208)

Color Shift (P.208)
 2 Sided Copying (P.208)
 Mixed Size Originals (P.208)
 Edge Erase - Top Edge (P.208)
 Edge Erase - Bottom Edge (P.209)
Tools
 Edge Erase - Left Edge (P.209)

 Edge Erase - Right Edge (P.209)
 Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase (P.209)
5  Edge Erase - 2 Sided Original - Side 2 (P.209)
 Image Shift - Side 1 (P.209)
 Image Shift - Side 2 (P.209)
 Image Rotation (P.210)
 Image Rotation - Rotation Direction (P.210)
 Original Orientation (P.210)
 Pages per Side (P.210)
 Copy Output (P.210)
 Uncollated - Default Separator Tray (P.210)
 Output Destination (P.210)
 Output Destination (Simple Copy) (P.210)
 Sample Job (P.210)
 Annotations - Stored Comment (P.210)
 Annotations - Comment on Side 1 and Side 2
(P.210)
 Annotations - Comment - Font Size (P.211)
 Annotations - Comment - Font Color (P.211)
 Date - Position on Side 1 and Side 2 (P.211)
 Date - Font Size (P.211)
 Page Numbers - Style (P.211)
 Page Numbers - Position on Side 1 and Side 2
(P.211)

Page Numbers - Font Size (P.211)

Bates Stamp - Number of Digits (P.211)
 Bates Stamp - Position on Side 1 and Side 2 (P.211)
 Bates Stamp - Font Size (P.211)
 Booklet Creation - Default Cover Tray (P.211)

Covers - Default Front Cover Tray, Default Back
Cover Tray (P.211)
 Separators - Default Separator Tray (P.211)
148
Tools Menu List
Copy Control (P.212) 

Memory Full Procedure (P.212)
 Maximum Stored Pages (P.212)

Auto Paper Off (P.212)
 Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy (P.212)
 Fine-tune 100% (P.212)
 ID Card Copy - Reduce/Enlarge (P.212)

Background Suppression (Photo & Text) (P.213)

Background Suppression Level (Text) (P.213)
 Photo & Text /Printed Original (P.213)
 Original Type - See-Through Paper (P.213)
 Annotations - Comment Density (P.213)

Comment Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top
Right, - Left Center, - Center, - Right Center, -
Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and - Bottom Right
(P.213)

Date Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, -
(P.213)

Page Number Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top
Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and - Bottom
Right (P.213)
 Bates Stamp - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, -
Tools
(P.213)
 Quantity Display (P.214)
 Maximum Number of Sets (P.214)
Original Size Defaults (P.214) -
5
Reduce/Enlarge Presets (P.214) -
Custom Colors (P.214) -
Annotations - Create Comments (P.214) -
 Connectivity & Network Setup
Port Settings (P.215)  Parallel (P.216)


USB (P.216)

LPD (P.217)
 SMB Client (P.217)

IPP (P.217)
 Bonjour (P.218)
 Port 9100 (P.218)

SNMP (P.218)
 SIP (P.218)

FTP Client (P.218)
 Receive E-mail (P.219)
 Send E-mail (P.219)
 E-mail Notification Service (P.219)
 UPnP Discovery (P.219)
 WSD (P.219)*1
 Internet Services (HTTP) (P.220)

SOAP (P.220)
 WebDAV (P.220)
 ThinPrint (P.221)
149
5 Tools
Protocol Settings (P.221) 

Ethernet Settings (P.221)
 TCP/IP - Common Settings (P.222)

TCP/IP - Network Settings/ TCP/IP - Network
Settings (Ethernet 1), TCP/IP - Network Settings
(Ethernet 2) (Type 2 (T2) model only) (P.222)
 IPv4 - IP Address (P.223)

IPv4 - Subnet Mask (P.223)

IPv4 - Gateway Address (P.223)
 IPv4 - DNS Server Setup (P.223)
 IPv4 - IP Filter (P.223)
 IPv6 Address Manual Configuration (P.224)

Manually Configured IPv6 Address (P.224)

Manually Configured IPv6 Address Prefix (P.224)
 Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway (P.224)

IPv6 - DNS Server Setup (P.224)

Automatically Configured IPv6 Address (P.224)
 IPv6 - IP Filter (P.224)
Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name  E-mail Address (P.225)
(P.225) 
Machine Name (P.225)

Host Name (P.226)

Domain Name (P.226)
Proxy Server Settings (P.226)  Use Proxy Server (P.226)
Tools
 Proxy Server Setup (P.226)

 Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server (P.226)
 HTTP Proxy Server Name (P.226)
5  HTTP Proxy Server Port Number (P.226)
 HTTP Proxy Server Authentication (P.226)
 HTTP Proxy Server Login Name (P.226)
 HTTP Proxy Server Password (P.226)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Name (P.226)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number (P.226)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication (P.227)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name (P.227)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Password (P.227)
EP Proxy Server Setup (P.227)  Proxy Server Setup (P.227)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Name (P.227)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number (P.227)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication (P.227)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name (P.227)
 HTTPS Proxy Server Password (P.227)
 HTTP Proxy Server Name (P.227)
 HTTP Proxy Server Port Number (P.228)
 HTTP Proxy Server Authentication (P.228)
 HTTP Proxy Server Login Name (P.228)
 HTTP Proxy Server Password (P.228)
SIP Settings (P.228)  SIP User ID (Sign-in Name) (P.228)

SIP Transport Protocol (P.228)

Enable SIP Server (P.228)
 SIP Server IP Address Resolution (P.228)
 SIP Proxy Server Setup (P.229)
 SIP Registrar Server Setup (P.230)

VoIP Gateway Setup (P.230)
150
Tools Menu List
T.38 Settings (P.231) 

T.38 Transport Protocol (P.231)
 UDPTL Listening Port Number (P.231)

TCP Listening Port Number (P.231)
 RTP Listening Port Number (P.231)
 Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet
1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2) (Type 2 (T2)
model only) (P.231)
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings  POP3 Server Settings (P.231)
(P.231) 
SMTP Server Settings (P.232)
Remote Authentication/Directory Service  Authentication System Setup (ApeosPort Series
(P.233) Models Only) (P.233)

Kerberos Server Settings (ApeosPort Series Models
Only) (P.233)

LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings (ApeosPort
Series Models Only) (P.234)
 SMB Server Settings (P.237)
Security Settings (P.238)  SSL/TLS Settings (P.238)

S/MIME Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
(P.239)

PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature Settings (ApeosPort
Series Models Only) (P.240)*2
Tools
 IPsec (P.241)

IEEE 802.1X Settings / IEEE 802.1X Settings
(Ethernet 1), IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 2)
(Type 2 (T2) model only) (P.242) 5

Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings (P.242)
Protocol to Receive E-mail (P.243)

Add Domain Name to User Name (P.243)
 Output Destination for E-mail (P.243)

Domain Filtering (P.243)
*1 : WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

*2 : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
 Print Service Settings
Allocate Memory (P.244)  PostScript Memory (P.244)


ART IV, ESC/P, 201H Form Memory (P.244)
 HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory (P.244)
 Job Ticket Memory (P.244)

Receiving Buffer - Parallel (P.245)
 Receiving Buffer - USB (P.245)
 Receiving Buffer - LPD (P.245)
 Receiving Buffer - IPP (P.245)
 Receiving Buffer - Port 9100 (P.245)
Delete Form (P.245) -
151
5 Tools

Print Area (P.246)
 Substitute Tray (P.246)

Paper Type Mismatch (P.247)
 Unregistered Forms (P.247)
 Resume Job After Print Error (P.247)
 When Paper Jam Occurs (P.247)

Print User ID (P.248)

Banner Sheet (P.248)
 Banner Sheet Offset (P.248)
 Banner Sheet Tray (P.248)
 PostScript Default Color (P.248)

PostScript Paper Supply (P.249)

PostScript Font Absence (P.249)
 PostScript Font Substitution (P.249)
 XPS Print Ticket Processing (P.249)*
 LPD Print Queue (P.249)
 OCR Font Glyphs (0 x 5C) (P.250)
* : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
 Scan Service Settings

Tools
Screen Defaults (P.251)  Email Screen Default (P.251)

 Scan to PC Screen Default (P.251)
 1st Tab - Features Allocation (P.251)
5  Reduce/Enlarge - Buttons 2 to 5 (P.252)
Scan Defaults (P.252) 
Color Scanning (P.252)

Original Type (P.252)

File Format (P.252)

Optimize PDF For Quick Web View (P.252)
 Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail (P.252)

Thumbnail - Scan to PC (P.252)


Contrast (P.252)

Sharpness (P.253)
 Background Suppression (P.253)

Shadow Suppression (P.253)
 Color Space (P.253)
 Original Orientation (P.253)

Resolution (P.253)
 Mixed Size Originals (P.253)

Edge Erase (P.253)
 Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges (P.253)
 Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges (P.253)
 Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase (P.253)

Quality/File Size (P.253)

E-mail Subject (P.254)
 Store & Send Link - E-mail Subject (P.254)
 E-mail Encryption (P.254)
 Searchable Text (P.254)

Language of the Original (P.254)

Searchable - Text Compression (P.254)
 Microsoft® Office Format Settings (P.254)
Scan to PC Defaults (P.255)  Transfer Protocol (P.255)
 Login Credential to Access Destination (P.255)
 User Name for FTP Scan (P.255)
152
Tools Menu List
Output Size Defaults (P.256) -

Other Settings (P.256)  Memory Full Procedure (P.256)
 Saturation (P.257)

Background Suppression Level (P.257)

Shadow Suppression Level (P.257)
 Color Space (P.257)
 TIFF Format (P.257)
 Image Transfer Screen (P.257)

Filename Format (P.257)

Add Date to E-mail Attachment Name (P.258)
 Searchable - Page Orientation (P.258)

URL File Expiration (P.258)

Generation of URL Link (P.258)
 Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size (P.259)

Print Login Name on PDF Files (P.259)
 Fax Service Settings
Screen Defaults (P.260) 

Fax Screen Default (P.260)
Tools

1st Tab - Features Allocation (P.260)

Reduce / Enlarge - Button 3 - 5 (P.260)

Transmission Screen (P.261)
 Display Fax Line Selection (Type 2 (T2) model only) 5
(P.261)
Fax Defaults (P.261)  Resolution (P.261)

Original Type (P.261)


Mixed Size Originals (P.261)

Stamp (P.261)
 Skip Blank Pages (P.261)

Starting Rate (P.262)

Delay Start - Specific Time (P.262)

Transmission Header Text (P.262)

Confirmation Options (P.262)
 Delivery Receipts/Read Receipts (P.262)

Internet Fax Profile (P.262)
 Internet Fax Subject (P.262)
 Internet Fax Encryption (P.262)
153
5 Tools
Fax Control (P.262) 

Re-enter Recipients (P.262)
 Re-enter Broadcast Recipients (P.262)

Re-enter Speed Dial Recipients (P.263)
 Re-enter Group Recipients (P.263)
 Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab (P.263)
 Chain Dial (P.263)

Manual Redial List - Saved Entries (P.263)

Manual Redial List - Dial Mode (P.263)
 Transmission Header Text - Polling (P.264)
 Polled Files - Auto Delete (P.264)
 Rotate 90 degrees (P.264)

G3 Sender ID - Fax (P.264)

G3 Sender ID - IP Fax (SIP) (P.264)
 Save Undelivered Faxes (P.264)

Save Deleted Faxes (P.264)

Saved Faxes - Auto Delete (P.264)
 Transmission Interval (P.264)

Batch Send (P.264)

Manual Send/Receive Default (P.265)
 Fax Receiving Mode (P.265)
 Border Limit (P.265)
 Auto Reduce On Receipt (P.265)
 Receiving Paper Size (P.265)
Tools
 2 Pages Up On Receipt (P.265)

 2 Sided Printing (P.266)
 Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges (P.266)
5  Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges (P.266)
 Reduce 8.5 x 11" Original to A4 (P.266)
 Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode (P.266)
 Folder Selector by G3 ID (P.266)
 Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID
(P.266)
 Folder Selector - Service Priority (P.266)
 Folder Selector Setup (P.266)
 Memory Full Procedure (P.267)
 Mixed Size Originals Scan Mode (P.267)
 Skip Blank Pages (P.267)
 Fax Data in Folder Priority 1 to 3 (P.267)
 Direct Fax (P.267)
 Block Inbound Faxes (P.267)
 Block Unknown Fax Numbers (P.267)
 Filename Format for Store to Folder (Type 2 (T2)
model only) (P.268)
Fax Received Options (P.268)  Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID
(P.268)
 Folder Selector Setup (P.269)

Output Destination Setup (P.269)
154
Tools Menu List
Local Terminal Information (P.270) 

Local Name (P.270)
 Company Logo (P.271)

Machine Password (P.271)
 Line 1 to 3 - Company Logo (P.271)
 G3 Line 1 to 3 - Fax ID (P.271)
 G3 Line 1 to 3 - Dial Type (P.271)

G3 Line 1 to 3 - Line Type (P.271)

SIP Line - Company Logo (P.271)
 G3 SIP Line - ID (P.272)
Internet Fax Control (P.272) 
Internet Fax Path (P.272)

Profile for Broadcast Job (P.272)
 Broadcast Starting Rate (P.272)
 Delivery Confirmation Method (P.273)

Incoming Internet Fax Print Options (P.273)

Internet Fax Output Destination (P.273)

Fax Transfer from Address Book (P.273)
 Transmission Header Text - Fax Transfer (P.273)
 Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size (P.274)
 E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings
Tools
E-mail Control (P.275) 
Maximum Address Entries (P.275)
 Incoming E-mail Print Options (P.275)

Print Error Notification E-mail (P.275)


Response to Read Receipts (P.275)
Read Receipts (P.276)
5

Print Delivery Confirmation Mail (P.276)
 Split Send Method (P.276)

Maximum Data Size per E-mail (P.276)

Maximum Total Data Size (P.276)

Maximum Split Count (P.277)

Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field (P.277)
 Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field (P.277)

Allow to edit From if Search Found (P.277)

Allow to edit From if Search Failed (P.277)

E-mail Sending When Search Failed (P.277)

Add Me to "To" Field (P.277)
 Add Me to "Cc" Field (P.277)

Edit E-mail Recipients (P.277)
 Address Book Settings
Address Book Settings (P.278)  Address Book Type (P.278)

 Directory Service (P.278)
 Address Book Default - Scan (P.278)
 Address Book Default - Fax (P.278)

Search Display Default (P.278)

Fax Speed Dial Default (P.278)
155
5 Tools
 Folder Service Settings
Folder Service Settings (P.279) 

Files Retrieved By Client (P.279)
 File Display Default (P.279)
 Orientation for Stored Print Jobs (P.279)

Print & Delete Confirmation Screen (P.279)

Convert Custom Size to Standard Size (P.279)

Standard Size Threshold Value (P.279)
 Internet Fax to Internet Fax (P.279)
 Internet Fax to E-mail (P.279)

Quality/File Size for Retrieval (P.280)
 Job Flow Service Settings
Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort  Pool Server (P.281)

Series Models Only) (P.281)  Pool Server Login Method (P.281)
 Job Flow Sheet List Default (P.281)

Fax Transfer Resolution (P.281)
 Media Print Settings

Tools
Media Print Service Settings (P.282)  Text - Paper Supply - Button 2 to 5 (P.282)

Photos - Paper Supply - Button 1 to 5 (P.282)
5  Stored File Settings
Stored File Settings (P.283)  Expiration Date for Files in Folder (P.283)
 Stored Job Expiration Date (P.283)
 Display Details of Stored Print Job List (P.284)

Preview Generation (P.284)
 Duration for Preview Generation (P.284)
 Display Default of Stored Print Job List (P.284)
 Print Job Confirmation Screen (P.284)
 Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs (P.284)

Print Order for All Selected Files (P.284)
 Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
Server Certificate Verification Settings  Preparations (P.286)

(P.286)  Setting Procedure (P.286)
Server Setup (P.288)  URL (P.288)

Server Name (P.288)
 Description (P.289)
 Use User ID (P.289)
 User ID (P.289)

Password (P.289)

Machine/Authentication Notification (P.289)
 Notify User Authorization Information (P.289)
 Delete All Settings (P.289)
 Functional Code (P.289)
Other Settings (P.289)  When Sending User Details (P.289)
156
Tools Menu List
 Web Browser Setup
Web Browser Setup (P.290) 

Web Applications Version (P.290)
 Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing (P.290)
 Clear Cache Upon Closing (P.290)

Use Cache (P.290)

Accept Cookies (P.290)

Use TLS1.0 (P.290)
 Use SSL3.0 (P.290)
 When SSL Certificate Verification Fails (P.290)

Enable File Printing (P.291)

Functional Code (P.291)
Setup
Create Folder (P.292)  Folder Name (P.293)


Check Folder Passcode (P.293)

Delete Files After Retrieval (P.293)
 Delete Expired Files (P.293)
 Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder (P.294)
 When the [Delete Folder] Button is Selected
(P.294)
Tools
Stored Programming (P.294) -
Create Job Flow Sheet (P.294)  Restrictions on Using Job Flow (P.295)
 Create New Job Flow Sheet (P.296) 5
 Name (P.297)
 Description (P.297)
 Keyword (P.297)
 Send as Fax (P.297)
 Send as IP Fax (SIP) (P.298)
 Send as Internet Fax (P.298)
 Send as E-mail (P.299)
 Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2) (P.300)
 Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2) (P.301)
 Print (P.301)
 E-mail Notification (P.302)
 Edit/Delete (P.302)
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword (P.303) -
157
5 Tools
Add Address Book Entry (P.303) 

Address Type (P.305)
 E-mail Address (P.305)

Name (P.306)
 Index (P.306)
 Surname (P.306)
 Given Name (P.306)

Custom Item 1 (P.306)

Custom Item 2 (P.306)
 Custom Item 3 (P.306)
 S/MIME Certificate (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
(P.306)

Transfer Protocol (P.307)

Server Name/IP address (P.307)
 Shared Name (SMB Only) (P.307)

Save in (P.307)

User Name (P.307)
 Password (P.307)

Port Number (P.308)

Fax Number (P.308)
 Index (P.308)
 Starting Rate (P.308)
 Resolution (P.308)
 Cover Page (P.308)
Tools
 Maximum Image Size (P.309)

 Delay Start (P.309)
 Remote Folder (P.309)
5  F Code (P.309)
 Relay Broadcast (P.309)
 Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time, Billing -
Midnight (P.310)
 Internet Fax Profile (P.310)
 When the [Delete Entry] Button is Selected (P.311)
Create Fax Group Recipients (P.311) -
Add Fax Comment (P.312) -
Paper Tray Attributes (P.312) -
Accounting
Create/View User Accounts (P.313)  User ID (P.314)


User Name (P.314)
 Passcode (P.314)
 E-mail Address (P.314)
 Device Access (P.314)
 Service Access (P.314)

User Role (P.315)
 Reset User Account (P.316)
 Reset Total Impressions (P.316)
View Accounts (P.316) -
Reset User Accounts (P.317) -
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)
-
(P.318)
158
Tools Menu List
Accounting Type (P.318) 

Accounting Disabled (P.318)
 Local Accounting (P.318)

Network Accounting (P.318)
 Xerox Standard Accounting (P.318)
 Auditron Mode (P.318)
 Verify User Details (P.318)

Customize User Prompts (P.318)
Accounting Login Screen Settings (P.319)  Alternative Name for User ID (P.319)

Mask User ID (***) (P.319)

Alternative Name for Account ID (P.319)

Mask Account ID (***) (P.319)
 Display Billing Information Upon Login (P.320)
Fax Billing Data (P.320) -
Accounting/Billing Device Settings (P.320) 
Connect with Accounting/Billing Device (P.320)

Accounting/Billing Device (P.321)
 Track Print Jobs (P.321)
 Track Scan/Fax Jobs (P.321)

Interrupt Mode (P.321)

Job with Insufficient Credit (P.321)

Charge Print Jobs (P.321)
 Track with Cumulative Device (P.321)
Tools
 Scan Ahead for Copy Job (P.321)
5
System Administrator Settings (P.323)  System Administrator's Login ID (P.323)
 System Administrator's Passcode (P.323)
Authentication (P.324)  Login Type (P.324)
 Access Control (P.325)
 Create/View User Accounts (P.326)
 Reset User Accounts (P.326)
 Create Authorization Groups (P.326)
 User Details Setup (P.327)
 Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator
(P.329)
 Passcode Policy (P.329)
 Charge/Private Print Settings (P.330)
 Receive Control (P.330)
Allow User to Disable Active Settings
-
(P.332)
Job Status Default (P.332)  Active Jobs View (P.332)
 Completed Jobs View (P.333)
Overwrite Hard Disk (P.333)  Number of Overwrites (P.333)
159
5 Tools
Common Service Settings
In [Common Service Settings], you can make settings relating to the machine's common
features. The following shows the reference section for each item.
Machine Clock/Timers ................................................................................................................................................................ 160
Power Saver Settings................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Audio Tones................................................................................................................................................................................... 164
Screen/Button Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 165
Paper Tray Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Image Quality Adjustment........................................................................................................................................................ 174
Reports ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 176
Maintenance................................................................................................................................................................................. 178
Watermark .................................................................................................................................................................................... 181
Secure Watermark....................................................................................................................................................................... 183
Force Annotation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 185
Print Universal Unique ID.......................................................................................................................................................... 186
Image Log Control (ApeosPort Series Models Only) ........................................................................................................... 187
Notify Job Completion by E-mail ............................................................................................................................................. 190
Tools
Plug-in Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................ 190

Other Settings............................................................................................................................................................................... 190
5 1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings].
For information on how to display the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.140).
2 Select an item to set or change.
Machine Clock/Timers
You can set the machine clock or the time intervals of the machine to reset settings.
Date
Set the date in the system clock of the machine. The date set here will be printed on all lists
and reports.
1 Select [Date], and then select [Change Settings].

2 Select a date format.
3 Specify [Year], [Month], and [Day].
4 Select [Save].
Time
Set the time in the system clock of the machine, using 12-hour or 24-hour format.
The time set here will be printed on all lists and reports.
1 Select [Time], and then select [Change Settings].
160
2 Select the time format.

3 When you select [12 Hour Clock], set [AM] or
[PM].
4 Specify [Hours] and [Minutes].
5 Select [Save].
NTP Time Synchronization

You can synchronize the machine clock with a time server (NTP: Network Time Protocol),
receiving time information from the server.
To connect to a time server, select [On] for [NTP Time Synchronization], and set the IP
address of the time server in [Time Server Address].
Connection Interval
Select the time interval to connect to the time server.
You can select from 1 to 500 hours in 1 hour increments.
Tools
Time Server Address
Set the server name or IP address of the time server.
Note • For IPv4, enter the IP address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format, where "xxx" is a value between 0 and 255. 5
• For IPv6, enter the IP address in xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx format, where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal number.
Auto Clear
Specify the time lapsed without any operation until the machine resets the settings
automatically.
When you select [On], specify a value between 10 and 900 seconds in 1 second increments.
When you select [Off], the settings are not reset automatically.
Note • When [Off] is selected, the machine will cancel the standby status and begin processing a document
after one minute has elapsed in anticipation of a job command.
WelcomEyes.
Auto Job Release

Specify the time lapsed until the machine cancels the active job and starts the next job if an
error such as document or paper jams and running out of paper occurs during copying or
scanning. In that case, only those jobs not affected by the error can be processed.
When you select [On], specify a value in 1 minute increments. When you select [Off], the
active job is not canceled automatically.
Auto Print
Set the time period to start the next print job after the operation of the control panel (except
for the <Start> and <Clear All> buttons) after the end time of the Printer Lockout Duration
passed.
When you select [On], specify a value between 1 and 240 seconds in 1 second increments.
When you select [Off], printing starts immediately after the machine is ready.
161
5 Tools
Printer Lockout
You can set the machine to disable printing during the specified time period or to
temporarily disable printing.
Selecting [On] allows you to set [Set Lockout Duration] and/or [Allow User to Lock Out].
When [Allow User to Lock Out] is selected, the [Lock Out Printer] button needs to be
displayed on the right side of the Services Home screen.
For information on how to display the [Lock Out Printer] button on the Services Home screen, refer to "Customizing the
Button Layout" (P.33).
 Set Lockout Duration

Set the time period to disable printing. Specify the start and end time to disable printing in
1 minute increments.
 Allow User to Lock Out

Selecting [Lock Out Printer] on the Services Home screen temporarily disables printing.
[Release Printer] is displayed during the printer lockout duration. Selecting [Release Printer]
enables printing.
Note • A job started before the start time will be printed continuously even after elapsing the start time.
The job will be printed continuously even if you select [Lock Out Printer] while printing. After the job
is completed, the machine enters the printer lockout status.
Tools
• When both [Set Lockout Duration] and [Allow User to Lock Out] are set and the start time comes
while the [Release Printer] button is displayed, the machine automatically enters the printer lockout
status.
5 • When you select [Release Printer] during the printer lockout duration, printing is enabled, and when
you then select [Lock Out Printer], the machine resumes the printer lockout status.
• The printer lockout status is not released automatically even after the end time elapsed. To release
the printer lockout status, the control panel operation is required.
• The printer lockout duration will not be released even when you switch the power off and then on
again, or even when you press the <Power Saver> button while the machine is in the Power Saver
mode (Low Power mode or Sleep mode).
• The machine starts printing in accordance with the setting in [Auto Print] when [Release Printer] is
selected. Thus the printing may not start just after [Release Printer] is selected.
• You can also print during the printer lockout duration by selecting a job in [Active Jobs] on the [Job
Status] screen and then selecting [Promote Job].
• When the [Allow User to Lock Out] check box is deselected, [Disable Auto Printing] in [Services Home
- Additional Features] is displayed as [(Not Assigned)].
Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT between -12 and +12 hours.
Note • GMT stands for Greenwich Mean Time.
Daylight Savings
You can set daylight saving time. During daylight saving time period, the machine moves
the clock forward by one hour.
Select from [Adjust Off], [Adjust by Day, Month & Time], and [Adjust by Month, Week, Day
of Week & Time].
If you select [Adjust by Day, Month & Time], specify the month, day, and time for [Start
Date] and [End Date].
If you select [Adjust by Month, Week, Day of Week & Time], specify the month, week, day
of week, and time for [Start Date] and [End Date].
162
Print-On-Demand Duration
Specify the duration for the machine to receive a print job from web applications. Unless the
machine receives full data of the print job within the specified period of time, the machine
does not process the print job.
Specify the time duration between 0 and 255 minutes in 1 minute increments. If you specify
[0], it means that there is no time limit set on the machine for receiving data.
Note • When you send a print job that contains a large amount of data or a print job whose contents take a
while to be processed, transmission may be timed out before the machine receives the last page of
the print job. If transmission is timed out, the print job will be canceled. Therefore, you should
consider the machine usage when you set the time duration.
Power Saver Settings

You can configure the following settings of Power Saver mode.
Power Saver Timers

The Power Saver mode has two modes: the Low Power and Sleep modes. When a specified
period of time has elapsed, the machine switches to these modes in the following order to
reduce power consumption.
Tools
Last operation on the machine  Low Power mode  Sleep mode
For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Power Saver Mode" (P.27).
Note • You cannot configure the machine not to switch to the Low Power mode or the Sleep mode.
5
 From Last Operation to Low Power Mode
Specify a time period between 1 and 240 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter the Low
Power mode after the last operation.
Note • The timer does not start counting until the operator leaves the detectable area of Smart
WelcomEyes. The Access Lamp lights up while the machine detects human presence.
 From Last Operation to Sleep Mode

Specify a time period between 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute increments to enter the Sleep
mode after the last operation.
Note • Configure the [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] time to be same or longer than the [From Last
Operation to Low Power Mode] time.
• The machine enters Sleep mode without entering Low Power mode when the [From Last Operation
to Low Power Mode] time is same as the [From Last Operation to Sleep Mode] time.
WelcomEyes. The Access Lamp lights up while the machine detects human presence.
Enter Power Saver after Printing Ends

Set when to enter the Power Saver mode after a print job or printing of fax/Internet fax
documents is finished.
 15 seconds after Auto Printing Ends

Enters Sleep mode in 15 seconds.
 According to Power Saver Timer Settings

Enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode according to the period specified in [Power Saver
Timers].
For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Power Saver Mode" (P.27).
163
5 Tools
Power Saver Deactivation

Select whether to disable the Power Saver mode fully or partially when exiting the mode.
 Deactivate All
All devices of the machine exit the Power Saver mode.
 Deactivate Partially As Required

Only the devices necessary for the operation exit the Power Saver mode.
You can select from [Always On] or [When Printing / Job Auto Processing].
Smart WelcomEyes
Set whether or not to activate Smart WelcomEyes. Select from [Activate] or [Deactivate].
 Activate
Select [Enable] or [Disable] for [Recover from Power Saver with Smart WelcomEyes].
 Deactivate
Deactivates Smart WelcomEyes.
Tools
Audio Tones
5 Select whether to sound an alarm when a job ends or a fault occurs.
Control Panel Select Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when a button on the control panel is correctly selected.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Control Panel Alert Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when a button that cannot be selected is selected, or an error
occurs.
Base Tone
Set the volume for the base tone of the toggle button, which changes setting each time it is
pressed. The machine plays this sound when it exits the Interrupt mode.
Machine Ready Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when the machine is ready to copy or print, or powered on.
Job Complete Tone 1, 2

Set the volume to be sounded when a job is completed normally.
You can select the target jobs to play the sound.
Fault Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a job fails.
164
You can select the target jobs to play the sound.
Auto Clear Alert Tone

Set the volume to be sounded at five seconds before automatically returning to the initial
screen when [Auto Clear] is set to [On].
For more information, refer to "Auto Clear" (P.161).
Alert Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a fault such as a paper jam occurs, and the job remains
in failure state.
Out of Paper Warning Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when a job is suspended because there is no paper in a tray.
Low Toner Alert Tone
Tools
Set the volume to be sounded when the toner cartridge needs replacing.
5
Stored Programming Tone
Set the volume to be sounded while a stored program is being registered.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud].
This tone cannot be disabled.
Stored Programming Complete Tone

Set the volume to be sounded when the call of a stored programming registered is
completed.
Line Monitor Volume

When sending a fax, you can relay the sound on the telephone line until the connection is
made through the speakers on the machine. This is convenient for Fax Information Services
without using the telephone receiver.
You can select a volume level from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select
[Off].
Ringing Volume
Set the volume to be sounded when the machine receives a fax.
Screen/Button Settings
Set screens and buttons.
165
5 Tools
Screen Default
Set the screen displayed after powering on the machine or canceling the Power Saver mode.
For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Customizing the Control Panel" (P.31).
Screen After Auto Clear

Set the screen displayed after Auto Clear.
For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Setting the Screen After Auto Clear" (P.32).
Auto Display of Login Screen

When the Authentication feature is enabled on the machine, set whether or not to
automatically display the login screen after turning on the machine or canceling the Power
Saver mode.
Custom Buttons 1 to 3
You can assign services such as Copy and Send from Folder to the custom buttons on the
control panel: Custom Button 1 to Custom Button 3.
To leave a feature unassigned, select [(Not Set)].
Note • By factory default, the following services are assigned to each button: [Copy] for the Custom Button
1, [Fax] for the Custom Button 2, and [Review] for the Custom Button 3.
Tools
For more information, refer to "Assigning Services to the Custom Buttons" (P.37).
One-touch Buttons
5
Set the number of address numbers that are assigned to the one-touch buttons.
 Type 1
Assigns the one-touch buttons 1 to 70 to the address numbers 0001 to 0070, and buttons
M01 and M02 to the stored programming jobs 1 and 2.
 Type 2
Assigns the one-touch buttons 1 to 60 to the address numbers 0001 to 0060, and buttons
61 to 70, M01, and M02 to the stored programming jobs 1 and 12.
Note • [Type 1] is selected by factory default.
Services Home
Set the layout of service buttons that appear on the Services Home screen.
For more information on how to set the buttons, refer to "Customizing the Button Layout" (P.33).
Services Home - Additional Features

Set the layout of additional feature buttons that appear on the Services Home screen.
Note • If you do not want to display [Setup] as an additional feature button, select the [Show this in Admin
mode] check box. You can set or change settings with the machine only when it is in the System
Administration mode.
For more information on how to set the buttons, refer to "Customizing the Button Layout" (P.33).
Job Type on Job Status screen

Select the job types to be shown on the [Completed Jobs] screen under the [Job Status]
screen that is displayed when the <Job Status> button on the control panel is pressed.
Select from [All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Folder Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], or
[Job Flow & File Transfer Jobs].
166
Default Language
You can select the language displayed on the machine.
There are two ways of selecting the language: set in the System Administration mode and
set by local users.

Setting in the System Administration mode
The language set here is the standard language that is retained even when the machine
is powered off and on.
 Setting in the local user mode
The language setting in [Language] in the Services Home screen is lost when the machine
is powered off.
Important • When [English] is selected, only ASCII characters can be used.
• When you set [Language] to [English] on the Services Home screen and an address book entry or
contents of [Details] of Job Flow Sheets is entered in double-byte characters, the characters may not
be displayed properly.
• When you use CentreWare Internet Services to import a CSV file* including double-byte characters
other than a selected language, the characters in the file may be garbled or the import may fail.
* : CSV (Comma Separated Values) is a file format that is often used for saving data by spreadsheets and
database programs.
Tools
Screen Brightness
You can adjust the screen brightness of the control panel between -16 and +16.
Reconfirm E-mail Recipient 5

Select whether or not to display the screen to confirm e-mail recipients when sending e-
mails.
Select from [Confirmation Not Required], [Always Reconfirm Recipient], and [Reconfirm if
Multiple Recipients].
Reconfirm Fax/Internet Fax Recipient

Set whether or not to display a screen to confirm fax/Internet fax recipients when sending
faxes / Internet faxes.
 First Tab - Reconfirm Recipients

Select from [Off], [Always Reconfirm Recipient], and [Reconfirm if Multiple Recipients].
 Start Job at Other Tabs

Select from [Disabled] and [Enabled].
Note • When you select [Start Disabled], you cannot confirm the e-mail recipients in other Tabs.
 Reconfirm Recipient at Other Tabs

Select from [Off], [Always Reconfirm Recipient], and [Reconfirm if Multiple Recipients].
Note • This item is not displayed when you select [Disabled] for [Start Job at Other Tabs].
• [Off] cannot be selected when you select [Reconfirm if Multiple Recipients] for [First Tab - Reconfirm
Recipients]. And [Off] and [Reconfirm if Multiple Recipients] cannot be selected when you select
[Always Reconfirm Recipient] for [First Tab - Reconfirm Recipients].
Reconfirm E-mail Recipient Button

Set whether or not to display a screen to check available memory when sending e-mails.
Select from [Disabled (Show Memory)] and [Enabled].
167
5 Tools
Reconfirm Fax / Internet Fax Button

Set whether or not to display a screen to check available memory when sending faxes /
Internet faxes.
Select from [Disabled (Show Memory)] and [Enabled].
Screen After Inserting USB

Select whether or not to display the screen when the machine detects USB memory device
insertion, and also select the screen type at the time.
Select from [Off], [Store to USB], [Media Print - Text], [Media Print - Photos], and [Service
Selection Screen].
Note • If you select [Service Selection Screen], the [USB Device Detected] screen is displayed when a USB
memory device is inserted. You can select [Store to USB], [Media Print - Text], or [Media Print -
Photos].
• If a USB memory device is inserted when the machine is switched off, and then you switch on, the
Services Home screen is displayed.
• When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory slot during the Power Saver mode, the
touch screen does not light up. After exiting the Power Saver mode by pressing the <Power Saver>
button, insert the USB memory device again or select the feature to be used on the Services Home
screen.
• If a commercially available Memory Card Reader is used and it is left inserted all the time, the screen
Tools
is not switched to the selected screen even when a medium is inserted into the slot of the Memory
Card Reader.
5 Display Consumables Screen

Allows you to select whether or not to display the consumables status when a replacement
is required.
 Off
Does not display the consumables status screen.
 When power is switched on

Displays the consumables status screen at startup.
 When Auto Clear is activated

Displays the consumables status screen when Auto Clear is executed.
Keyboard Input Restriction

Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard of the
machine. To prevent characters from being garbled when switching character sets, you can
limit input to ASCII characters. If you select [On (ASCII Only)], the keyboard displayed
shows ASCII characters only.
Operation of Up/Down Buttons

Allows you to whether or not to enable continuous scrolling when pressing the scroll buttons.
Flick and Double-tap

Set whether or not to operate the machine by flicking and double-tapping. Select from
[Disabled] or [Enabled].
Besides the operation method, the design of Services Home Screen and the display effect of
the screens vary depending on this setting.
168
Icon Style Button Style
Operation/
Screen Enabled Disabled
Display Effect
Menu Design Icon Style Button Style
Scroll Direction Horizontal Vertical
Flick to switch pages O -
Drag to switch pages O -
Preview Thumbnail View Tap to display the entire O O
view
Flick to switch pages O -
Tools
Drag to switch pages O O
Entire View Flick to switch pages O -
Tap the previous/next O O
5
previewed images to
switch pages
Tap to switch whether O -
to display the page
switching buttons or
the thumbnail bar
Double-tap to move O -
to enlarged view
Enlarged View Flick the enlarged O -
image to move the
position to be
displayed
Drag the enlarged O O
image to move the
position to be
displayed
Drag the slider to O O
enlarge/reduce the
image size
Double-tap to O -
enlarge/ reduce the
image size
Tap to switch whether O -
to display the slider or
the thumbnail bar
Drag to switch pages O -
O : Available
- : Not available
169
5 Tools
Double-Tap Interval
You can set the interval between two taps to be recognized as a double-tap by the machine.
Select from [Shorter], [Default], or [Longer].
Sys. Admin. Settings Security Warning (Type 2 (T2) model only)

Set whether or not to display the security warning screen when the default values of system
administrator's user ID and passcode are used. The warning screen is displayed when
entering the System Administration mode on the control panel or on the CentreWare
Internet Services.
Select [Do Not Display Warning Screen] or [Display Warning Screen].
SNMP Configuration Security Warning (Type 2 (T2) model only)

Set whether or not to display the security warning screen when the default values of SNMP
protocol's community name and authentication password are used. The warning screen is
displayed when entering the System Administration mode on the control panel or on the
CentreWare Internet Services.
Note • You can set the SNMP protocol settings on CentreWare Internet Services. For more information,
refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
Tools
5 Global IP Address Security Warning (Type 2 (T2) model only)

Set whether or not to display the security warning screen when the Global IP Address is used
and [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required]. The warning screen is displayed when
entering the System Administration mode on the control panel or on the CentreWare
Internet Services.
Paper Tray Settings

Set the items related to the paper and trays, including the type of paper and tray priority.
Custom Paper Name/Color

You can name Custom Paper Types 1 to 5 which you can select in [Paper Type] and Custom
Paper Colors 1 to 5 which you can select in [Paper Color] of [Paper Tray Attributes].
You can use letters, numerals, and symbols of up to 24 characters for each name and color.
For example, you can use a name showing its usage, such as "Color" for colored paper, and
"Covers" for bond paper.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.43).
Paper Tray Attributes

You can set the size and type of paper loaded in trays.
For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.74).
 Change Settings
Select this button, if you change the paper size for the tray or the setting of auto paper
selection.
When you load non-standard size paper in a tray, select [Custom Size], and specify the width
and length. When you load standard size paper in a tray, select [Auto Detect].
170
Important • Align the paper guides against the paper to prevent paper jams or errors. If the machine cannot
detect a tray, use Tray 5.
 Paper Type
Select the type of paper to load in the trays.
For information about paper types available on the machine, refer to "Loadable Quantity and Weight" (P.47).
 Paper Size
When the Three Tray Module is installed, you can load both standard size paper and non-
standard size paper for Trays 1 to 4. When you load non-standard size paper, select
[Custom Size], and then set the size in the X (width) direction and in the Y (length)
direction. For Tray 1, set the size in X (width) direction between 182 and 432 mm and the
Y (length) direction between 140 and 297 mm in 1 mm increments. For Trays 2 to 4, set
the X (width) direction between 182 to 457 mm and the Y (length) direction between 140
to 320 mm in 1 mm increments.
When the Tandem Tray Module is installed, you can load both standard size paper and
non-standard size paper for Tray 1 and 2. When you load non-standard size paper, select
[Custom Size], and then set the size in the X (width) direction and in the Y (length)
direction. For Tray 1, set the size in X (width) direction between 182 and 432 mm and the
Y (length) direction between 140 and 297 mm in 1 mm increments. For Tray 2, set the X
(width) direction between 182 to 457 mm and the Y (length) direction between 140 to
Tools
320 mm in 1 mm increments. For Trays 3 and 4, you can load standard size paper only.
For Tray 6 (HCF B1) (optional), you can load standard size paper only.
Select [Auto Detect] to use the standard size paper.
For more information, refer to "Supported Paper" (P.50).
5
 Paper Color
Set the color of paper. The paper color selected here is displayed as the paper color on the
[Paper Supply] screen.

Auto Paper Select
Set the condition for Auto Paper selection. When the color mode selected is used, Auto
Paper selection is enabled. Select from [All Colors], [Color], and [Black & White].
Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is
automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.
Customize Paper Supply Screen

Select whether or not the setting items specified in [Paper Size] or [Auto Paper Select] under
[Paper Tray Attributes] are to be displayed on the [Paper Supply] screen.
 Disabled
Does not display the items specified in [Paper Size].
 Size Detection
Displays the setting in [Paper Size].
 Usage (Auto Paper Select)

Displays the setting in [Auto Paper Select].
Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen

Select whether or not to display [Paper Tray Attributes] in the [Setup] screen.
This setting allows you to select the size and type of paper without entering the System
171
5 Tools
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading

Select whether or not to display the [Paper Tray Attributes] screen after the tray is pulled out
or inserted in.
This setting applies to Trays 1 to 4, and 6 (optional). You cannot apply this setting to Tray 5.
Paper Tray Priority

Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is
set in the multiple trays or print data does not include the paper tray information for
automatic tray selection.
Auto Paper selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
selected by the machine for copying or printing.
This setting applies to Trays 1 to 4, 6 (optional). You cannot set this setting to Tray 5.
Note • When a logical printer is used and if you specify the paper tray with the print driver, this setting will
be ignored.
Paper Type Priority

Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is
set in the multiple trays for automatic tray selection.
Auto Paper selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
Tools
selected by the machine for copying or printing.

You can set Bond paper, Plain paper, Recycled paper, Plain Reload paper, Heavyweight (HW)
5 paper, Gloss paper, Heavyweight (HW) A paper, Heavyweight (HW) B paper, Heavyweight
(HW) C paper, Heavyweight (HW) S paper, and Custom Paper 1 to 5.
The paper type setting is prioritized over the paper tray priority settings.
If, however, different paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper is
determined by paper tray priority sequence. The tray containing paper type set to [Auto
Paper Off] is not selected by automatic tray selection.
For more information about the tray priority sequence, refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.172).
Tray 5 - Paper Size Defaults

Select the paper sizes displayed in the [Tray 5] screen in [Paper Tray Attributes] when
copying with Tray 5.
You can assign the paper size selected here to the buttons for [Standard Size] in the [Tray
5] screen.
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for copying, assigning the paper sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time. For your convenience, set the
commonly used paper sizes in the upper level.
 A/B Series Size

You can select a paper size from A and B series sizes.
 Inch Size
You can select a paper size from inch series sizes.
 Others
You can select a paper size from other sizes.
 Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the X width between 98 and 483 mm, and the Y length between
89 and 320 mm in 1 mm increments.
Note • For envelopes, enter the size with the flap size excluded.
172
Auto Tray Switching Control

Set the alternative tray or paper when running out of paper loaded in the tray selected.
 Auto Tray Switching

You can select from [Always Enable], [Enable during Auto Select], and [Enable for Same
Paper Type/Color].
When [Enable during Auto Select] is selected, the machine switches the tray when [Auto
Select] is selected in the [Copy] screen or [Paper Select] of the print driver.
Note • The machine does not switch the tray automatically in the following cases:
- Tray 5 is selected.
- The tray set as [Auto Paper Off] is selected in [Paper Type Priority].
 Targeted Paper Type (Copy Jobs)

You can select paper types.
When [According to Priority Assigned] is selected, the paper type is determined according to
the settings in [Paper Type Priority]. When selecting [Selected Paper Type Only], you can
specify the paper type.
 Targeted Paper Color (Copy Jobs)
Tools
You can target all paper colors or only one paper color.
Image Quality
You can specify the image quality processing method for each of bond paper, plain paper, 5
recycled paper, plain reload paper, heavyweight paper, heavyweight reload paper, extra
heavyweight paper, extra heavyweight reload paper, custom paper 1 to 5, and punched
paper.
When copying or printing a document, the machine controls the image quality according to
the type of paper set in [Image Quality] and the image quality processing method specified
for that type of paper.
The following table shows available settings.
For information about paper characteristics and notes, refer to "Loadable Quantity and Weight" (P.47).
Setting values Meaning

Plain A (80-105 gsm) Default setting for bond paper. The image quality is suitable for
color printing. Paper having ream weight of 80 - 105 gsm.
Plain B (60-79 gsm) Default setting for plain paper. The image quality is suitable for
general office use. Paper having ream weight of
60 - 79 gsm.
Plain C (60-79 gsm) Default setting for recycled paper. The image quality is suitable
for the recycled paper that contains 70% or more recycled pulp.
Paper having ream weight of 60 - 79 gsm.
Plain D (60-79 gsm) Normally, do not select this value.
Plain E (60-65 gsm) Normally, do not select this value.
Plain F (60-65 gsm) Normally, do not select this value.
Plain G (80-105 gsm) Normally, do not select this value.
Plain S (60-105 gsm) This is for custom settings.
Heavyweight (HW) A (106-169 Default setting for heavyweight 1 paper. The image quality is
gsm) suitable for the bond paper and eco-friendly paper that is made
of 100% of farmed trees. Paper having ream weight of 106 -
169 gsm.
173
5 Tools
Setting values Meaning

Heavyweight (HW) B (106-169 The image quality is suitable for water-resistant paper.
gsm)
Heavyweight (HW) C (106-169 The image quality is suitable for white films.
gsm)
Heavyweight (HW) S (106-169 Normally, do not select this value.
gsm)
Heavyweight A Reload (106- Default setting for Heavyweight Reload paper. The image
169 gsm) quality is suitable for side 2 of the Heavyweight A paper.
Heavyweight B Reload (106- The image quality is suitable for side 2 of the Heavyweight B
169 gsm) paper.
Heavyweight C Reload (106- The image quality is suitable for side 2 of the Heavyweight C
169 gsm) paper.
Heavyweight S Reload (106- Normally, do not select this value.
169 gsm)
Extra Heavyweight (X-HW) A The image quality is suitable for the bond paper, eco-friendly
(170-256 gsm) paper which is made of 100% of farmed trees, postcards, and
envelopes. Paper having ream weight of 170 - 256 gsm.
Tools
Extra Heavyweight (X-HW) B The image quality is suitable for the heavyweight paper
(170-256 gsm) equivalent to name cards.
5 Extra Heavyweight (X-HW) C

(170-256 gsm)
The image quality is suitable for the heavyweight paper
equivalent to name cards.
Extra Heavyweight (X-HW) D The image quality is suitable for film label and water-resistant
(170-256 gsm) film coated paper.
Extra Heavyweight (X-HW) S Normally, do not select this value.
(170-256 gsm)
X-HW A Reload (170-256 gsm) Default setting for Extra Heavyweight Reload paper. The image
quality is suitable for side 2 of the Extra Heavyweight A paper.
X-HW B Reload (170-256 gsm) The image quality is suitable for side 2 of the Extra Heavyweight
B paper.
X-HW C Reload (170-256 gsm) The image quality is suitable for side 2 of the Extra Heavyweight
C paper.
X-HW D Reload (170-256 gsm) The image quality is suitable for side 2 of the Extra Heavyweight
D paper.
X-HW S Reload (170-256 gsm) Normally, do not select this value.
* : ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475 and DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475 models support up to 280 gsm

ream weight paper depending on a paper type.
Image Quality Adjustment

You can set the image quality and calibration settings.
Image Quality
You can select the image quality processing method when the machine scans a document.
174
 Photo & Text Recognition

Allows you to change a level with which the machine determines a document as text or
photos. This setting is used when you select [Photo & Text] for [Original Type] on the [Image
Quality] screen.
Selecting [More Text] enables the machine to easily recognize very fine print as text.
Selecting [More Photo] enables the machine to easily recognize halftone images from
newspapers and advertisements as photos.
 Output Color Recognition

Allows you to change a level from the five levels with which the machine determines a
document as monochrome or color. This setting is used when you select [Auto Detect] for
[Output Color] on the [Copy] screen.
Selecting [More Black & White] enables the machine to easily recognize monochrome
documents.
Selecting [More Color] enables the machine to easily recognize color documents.
 Photo Reproduction Level

When copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Photo & Text], you
can adjust the color reproduction level in the areas determined by the machine as photos.
Tools
Selecting [More Text] yields a bold copy effect, emphasizing the dense parts of an image.
Selecting [More Photo] soften the image gradation of the photo aspects of an image,
enhancing the reproducibility of subtle colors.
5
 Photo Image Quality
[Photo Image Quality] is valid when [Photo] is selected for [Original Type] on the [Image
Quality] screen.
Selecting [High Speed] copies a document without reducing the processing speed. Selecting
[High Quality] creates a near-quality reproduction of the document.
Note • Selecting [High Quality] may reduce the copy speed.
 Background Suppression (Color Copy)

Set the method of background suppression to be used when making color copies.
Background suppression is the function to detect the density of colors and suppress the scan
of background colors when a document has background colors on colored paper.
Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the document and detect the background color.
Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.
Important • When you select [High Quality], and [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] with a ratio of 60% or
less is specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], a part of the image may not be printed or blank paper may be
output.
 Background Suppression (Black Copy)

Set the method of background suppression to be used when making monochrome copies.
Background suppression is the function to detect the density of colors and suppress the scan
of background colors when a document has background colors on colored paper.
background color.
Important • When you select [High Quality], and [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] with a ratio of 60% or
less is specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], a part of the image may not be printed or blank paper may be
output.
175
5 Tools
 Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)

Set the method of background suppression to be used for scan operations.
Set how the machine detects density and deletes the background color.
background color.
 Image Enhancement
Allows you to select whether or not to carry out image enhancement. If you select [On], the
machine gives the image a smoother appearance when printed.
Calibration
When color gradation of a printed image shifts, you can calibrate the color of the image to
maintain the image quality of the machine at a certain level.
For more information, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.109).
Note • If you cannot calibrate the machine to adjust for a shift in color gradation despite the periodic
calibration, contact our Customer Support Center.
 Screen Type
Tools
Select from [Copy Job 1], [Copy Job 2], [Print Job 1], and [Print Job 2].
For more information about screen type, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.109).
5  Paper Supply
Select a tray.
 Target
Select from [Copy & Print Jobs], [Copy Jobs Only], [Print Jobs Only], and [None].
2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration

When the image is color scanned by the duplex automatic document feeder, you can
calibrate the color of the image on 2 sided side 1 and side 2.When you select [Print Chart]
and then [Start], the machine prints a Calibration Chart. You can perform the color
calibration by loading the printed chart with printed side facing up and then facing down on
the duplex automatic document feeder. When you select [Restore Previous Values] and then
[Start], the previous settings are restored. When you select [Restore Factory Default Values]
and then [Start], the settings are restored to the factory defaults.
For more information, refer to "Executing 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration" (P.112).
 Paper Supply
Select a tray.
Reports
You can configure settings related to printing reports.
Print Reports Button

Set the display method of [Print Reports] under the [Machine Information] screen and [Error
History Report] under the [Faults] screen displayed by pressing the <Machine Status>
button.
176
If you select [Disabled], the [Print Reports] button under [Machine Status] > [Machine
Information] and the [Error History Report] button under [Faults] are displayed only in the
System Administration mode.
For information on Print Reports, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120).
For information on Error History Reports, refer to "Faults" (P.134).
Job History Report

Select whether or not to automatically print a Job History Report when a total of 50 jobs
have been processed. All jobs are automatically listed on the printed report.
For information on how to print a Job History Report manually, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120).
Activity Report
Select whether or not to automatically print an Activity Report when a total of 100
communication results have been accumulated.
For information on an Activity Report, refer to "Activity Report" (P.754).
For information on how to print an Activity Report manually, refer to "Job Status/Activity Report" (P.121).
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered

Select whether or not to automatically print a Transmission Report - Job Undelivered.
Tools
Transmission Report - Job Deleted
Select whether or not to automatically print a Transmission Report - Job Deleted for a
cancelled document. 5
Folder Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Folder Report.
Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Broadcast Report and a Multi-Poll Report.
 Off
Does not print a report regardless of the data transmission result.
 On
Automatically prints a report regardless of the data transmission result.
 Print only when communication error

Prints a report only when a communication error occurs. Select [All communications] or
[Communication with error only] for report contents.
Scan File Transfer Report

Select whether or not to print the report for data transmission results when the scanned
data is transferred to the computer on the network or is sent via e-mail.
 Off
Does not print a report regardless of whether data transmission is successfully completed or
not.
 On
Automatically prints a Transmission Report when data is sent successfully and a
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered when data transmission failed.
177
5 Tools
 Print when delivery fails

Prints a Transmission Report - Job Undelivered when the data transmission failed.
Scan File Transfer Report (Fax Server)

Set whether or not to print a Transmission Report after scanned data is sent using the Server
Fax feature.
 Off
Does not print a report regardless of the completion of the data transmission.
 On
Automatically prints a Transmission Report for a successful transmission and a Transmission
Report (undelivered) for a transmission failure.

Prints a Transmission Report (undelivered) for a transmission failure.
2 Sided Report
Tools
Select whether or not to print a report on one side of the paper or both sides when printing
a report/list.
5 Activity Report - Recipient
Select how the information on recipients is shown when printing an Activity Report: the first
40 characters or the last 40 characters.
Job Flow Error Report (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Select whether or not to automatically print a Job Flow Error Report.
Maintenance
You can initialize or delete data from the hard disk of the machine.
EP Diagnostic Request/Repair Request

When the EP system via the Internet is used, the machine contacts our Customer Support
Center if a check or maintenance is required. Our service representative visits your place as
required.
Note • The EP system is not available in some region. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
For more information on the EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.758).
Check EP Connection
This feature is used to check whether or not the communications between the machine and
our Customer Support Center function normally when the EP system via the Internet is used.
Note • The EP system is not available in some region. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
178
EP Registration
 BB Registration
Select [BB Registration] and then select [Start] to register the machine in EP system.
 EPA Server Registration

After the BB registration, [EPA Server Registration] is automatically selected in accordance
with your environment. When this feature is selected, enter the destination server IP of your
EPA server and then select [Start] to register the machine in the EPA server.
Initialize Hard Disk

Initializes the hard disk.
Data deleted by initialization includes supplementary fonts, ESC/P, and HP-GL/2 forms.
Note • The secure print documents and logs are not erased.
Delete All Data

This feature is designed to prevent the leakage of confidential information of a customer
when the machine is returned to Fuji Xerox. All data stored on the machine will be deleted.
Before executing the operation, make sure that the operation is absolutely necessary.
Tools
Note • It takes several minutes to several hours to delete all data. (The time taken depends on the machine
configuration or the hard disk capacity.)
Software Options 5
This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Power on Self Test

Set whether or not to perform self test when the machine is turned on and started up.
If any abnormal condition such as intentional program modification is found during the
program diagnosis, the machine stops starting up and records the information in the audit
log.
Note • The information may not be recorded in the audit log depending on the status of program
malfunction.
• If the machine does not start, contact our Customer Support Center.
Check Smart Card Details

When you select [Check Smart Card Details] and touch your smart card to the smart card
reader, the information of the smart card appears on the touch screen.
Note • You can register the authentication information using CentreWare Internet Services. For more
information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
Finisher Adjustment
This feature is available when the Finisher-B1/Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 is installed
with a hole punch kit or C3 Finisher/C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed with a punch
unit.
 Hole Punch Tool

Specify either [2/4 Hole Punch] or [2/3 Hole Punch (US Specification)].
179
5 Tools
 Adjust Booklet Fold Position

Set the booklet fold position for paper smaller or larger than B4.
 Adjust Fold Position

You can adjust the fold position for each paper type and can set up to 10 adjustment type.
Also, you can assign the type to each tray.

Fold Position Type Setup
Adjust the position for Single Fold, Booklet, C Fold, Z Fold, and Z Fold Half Sheet.
For more information on setting procedures, refer to "Fold Position Adjustment" (P.659).
 Trays 1 to 4, and 6
Assign an adjustment type to each tray.
 Fold Assisting Crease

Set the number of additional folding lines between the specified fold line to prevent the
output of the folded booklet from opening.
Select from [1 Crease per Side], [2 Creases per Side], [3 Creases per Side], and [No Crease].
Note • The fewer the folding lines, the stronger the formation of creases. The more the folding lines, the
slower the booklet creation speed.
Tools
• Even with the folding lines, the booklet may be open depending on the paper size or paper type.
Adjust Image Transfer

5 You can specify the transfer output value for each paper type. This is useful when the toner
image does not transfer to the paper properly.
For more information, refer to "Adjust Image Transfer" (P.667).
Software Upgrade
When EP system via the Internet is used, this feature is used to upgrade the software for EP
system when the version upgrade is required.
You can specify when to start the software upgrade.
Important • After the downloading is finished, the machine automatically restarts and upgrades the software.
After the machine restarts again and the Services Home screen is displayed, the software upgrade is
completed.
Note • EP system may not be available in your region. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
• To use this feature, a dedicated contract is needed in addition to a use of the EP system service. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For information on EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.758).
1 Select [Software Upgrade].
 Start Upgrade
Starts a version upgrade soon.
 Schedule Upgrade
Select [On] and specify the date and time to start a version upgrade.
Adjust Paper Registration

Allows you to adjust the print image position vertically and horizontally. You can enter from
-2.0 to + 2.0, and select [Adjust] after entering the values. When you enter the amount in
[Number of Sheets] and select [Sample Printout], the machine prints the sample that the
values changed are reflected.
180
Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings

Deletes all certificates stored in the machine and initializes the security settings associated
with certificates. This feature is designed to use when you cannot use a certificate data in
the machine because of an abnormality of certificate file even when the certificate is set to
enabled for [SSL/TLS Settings] under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network
Setup] > [Security Settings].
Quick Setup Home

Displays Install Wizard which requires configuring the items necessary when installing the
machine.
You can configure Screen/Button Settings, IP Address Settings, and Fax Settings.
For more information on setting items, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.165), "Connectivity & Network Setup" (P.215),
and "Fax Service Settings" (P.260).
Watermark
Watermark is the function to print text or background pattern on the whole page to inhibit
the replication of documents.
You can configure Watermark settings such as date or text, background pattern, and
Tools
watermark to embed.
Date Format
Set the format for printing dates. This setting is common to Annotation, Watermark, and
5
Force Annotation.
Three formats are available: "YYYY/MM/DD", "MM/DD/YYYY", and "DD/MM/YYYY".
Default Watermark Effect

Set the default type of text effect for Watermark.
 Off
A text effect is not applied.
 Embossed
When you re-copy a copied document with watermark, the text hidden in the background is
printed as embossed text.
 Outline
When you re-copy a copied document with watermark, the text hidden in the background is
printed as white cutout.
Default Watermark
Set watermark text.
You can select text from [Copy Prohibited], [Copy], [Duplicate], and the strings assigned to
Custom Watermark 1 to 3.
For more information about custom text, refer to "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" (P.183).
Font Size
Set the size of the text to be printed as the Watermark.
You can set the font size from 24 to 80 points in 1 point increments.
181
5 Tools
Background Pattern
Set the background pattern to embed the text for the Watermark effect.
You can select from eight patterns: [Wave], [Circle], [Stripe], [Chain], [Beam], [Rhombic],
[Sunflower], and [Fan].
Font Color
Select the text density of the Watermark.
You can select from [Black], [Magenta], and [Cyan].
Note • The hidden text color in fax transmission is black, regardless of the font color.
Density
Select the text density of the Watermark.
You can select from [Lighten], [Normal], and [Darken].
Watermark/Background Contrast
Set a contrast level for text and background for the Watermark.
You can select a level from 1 to 9. Select a contrast level, referring to the printed samples by
selecting [Print this Sample List].
Tools
Force Watermark - Copy
5 Set whether or not to forcibly use the Watermark feature when copying a document. When
you select [On], the setting of [Watermark] in the [Output Format] screen is fixed to [On] and
you cannot change the setting.
The user control number, machine ID, and date and time are printed.
Note • You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel the force watermark printing. For more information,
refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.426).
• The user control number may not be printed depending on the Login mode configuration.
Force Watermark - Client Print

Set whether or not to forcibly use the Watermark feature when printing from a computer.
To prioritize the settings in the machine, select [Allow Device Settings to Override], and to
prioritize the settings of the software such as TrustMarkingBasic (sold separately) or the
print server, select [Allow Client Settings to Override].
When you [Allow Device Settings to Override] is selected, the user Details or the user control
number, machine ID, and date and time are printed.
Note • The setting method applies to both the Watermark and Secure Watermark features.
Force Watermark - Print Stored File

Set whether or not to forcibly use the Watermark feature when printing from a folder.
Note • You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel force watermark printing. For more information, refer
to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.426).
Force Watermark - Media Print

Set whether or not to use the Watermark feature when printing for Media Print - Text and
Photos.
182
Custom Watermark 1 to 3
Register text to be printed as the Watermark. You can enter up to 32 single-byte characters.
The registered text is displayed at [Default Watermark].
Print this Sample List

Prints hidden text samples of various densities. Select [Watermark/Background Contrast],
referring to the printed samples.
Secure Watermark
You can set whether or not to detect embedded digital codes in the document. When you
select this feature enabled, the machine forcibly cancels printing when it scans the
document with the protection code embedded.
Important • When [On] is selected, a document without a restriction code may be selected as a document with a
Tools
restriction code. If you have this problems a lot, you can change the setting of the authentication
group in which the user belong to a mode that stops scanning and allows you to select whether to
continue scanning when a restriction code is detected. A system administrator always use the
machine in this mode. For more information about the setting of authorization group, refer to "User
Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.426). 5
• Copy protection using the Secure Watermark feature is not guaranteed to always operate properly.
The feature may not operate properly depending on a document or conditions. For more
• Please note that Fuji Xerox is not liable for any damages caused by the use or without the use of the
Secure Watermark feature.
Note • An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
• This feature is only available for a Fuji Xerox manufactured machine installed with the Secure
Watermark feature.
Secure Watermark Control

Set whether or not to detect a protection code embedded in a document.
 Secure Watermark Detection

When you set [On] and copy or scan a document with a protection code embedded, the copy
or scan job is canceled.
Digital Codes Settings

Set the passcode of the digital code and the text to embed in a document. Analyzing the
digital code enables you to verify "when", "by whom", and "from which machine" the
document was output. This prevents leakage of confidential information.
 Decoding Passcode
You can assign a decoding passcode (4 to 12 characters) to a digital code to be embedded
in a document. Assigning a decoding passcode allows you to restrict access to a digital code
analysis application.
Important • If you forget the decoding passcode or your passcode entry does not match that registered on
PaperSecurity Analyzer, you will not be able to analyze the digital code on PaperSecurity Analyzer.
Be sure to place strict controls on the decoding passcode.
183
5 Tools
Note • To analyze digital codes, PaperSecurity Analyzer (sold separately) is required. For information on
how to operate PaperSecurity Analyzer, refer to the manual provided with the application.
• To set no password, leave the password blank, and select [Save].
 Custom Digital Watermark

Specify a digital code string to embed in a document. You can enter up to 32 single-byte
characters.
Force Secure Watermark

You can set whether or not to forcibly use the Force Watermark feature by jobs.
 Copy
Set whether or not to use the Force Secure Watermark feature when copying a document.
When you select [On], the setting of [Secure Watermark] is fixed to [On] in the [Output
Format] screen of the Copy feature.
 Client Print
Tools
Set whether or not to forcibly use the Force Secure Watermark feature when printing from
a client computer.
To prioritize the settings in the machine, select [Allow Device Settings to Override], and to
5 prioritize the settings of the software such as TrustMarkingBasic (sold separately) or the
print server, select [Allow Client Settings to Override].
Note • The setting method applies to both the Watermark and Secure Watermark features.
 Print Stored File

Set whether or not to forcibly use the Force Secure Watermark feature when printing a
document in a folder.
 Media Print
Set whether or not to forcibly use the Force Secure Watermark feature when printing for
Media Print - Text and Photos.
 Print Fax
document received by fax.
 Report
report/list.
Secure Watermark Defaults

You can set the default value of the Secure Watermark feature.
 Protection Code
Set whether or not to embed a protection code in a document.
Secure Watermark Effect

Setting the Secure Watermark Effect enables you to embed hidden text in a copied/printed
document. When the document containing the embedded hidden text is copied, the hidden
text appears as white cutout.
184
 Default Secure Watermark

Specify hidden text for the Secure Watermark feature.
You can select text from [Copy Prohibited], [Copy], [Duplicate], and the strings registered on
Custom Secure Watermark 1 to 3.
 Background Pattern
Set the background pattern of a hidden text to use for the Secure Watermark feature.
You can select from nine patterns: [None], [Wave], [Circle], [Stripe], [Chain], [Beam],
[Rhombic], [Sunflower], and [Fan].
 Font Color
Specify a hidden text color used for the Secure Watermark feature.
You can select from [Black] and [Magenta].
Note • The hidden text color in fax transmission is black, regardless of the font color.
 Secure Watermark/Background Contrast

Set a contrast level for hidden text and background for the Secure Watermark.
You can select a level from 1 to 9. Select a contrast level, referring to the printed samples by
selecting [Print this Sample List].
Tools
Important • The hidden text/background contrast can be adjusted by changing the hidden text density. The
background density cannot be adjusted.
 Custom Secure Watermark 1 to 3 5

Register hidden text strings for the Secure Watermark feature. You can enter up to 32 single-
byte characters.
 Print this Sample List

Prints hidden text samples of various densities. Select [Watermark/Background Contrast],
referring to the printed samples.
Force Annotation
The string such as a user name and a date (Annotation) is forcibly printed out according to
the layout template associated with each job type.
Note • When a watermark, a secure watermark, and/or a print universal unique ID is specified to a
document, force annotation is overlapped.
The layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, are provided with the machine. The printed items
with the templates as follows:
 Preset 1 and Preset 2
The string registered on [Create Text String 1] is printed as watermark at an angle in the
center of paper.
The following items are printed at the bottom right for Preset 1 or bottom left for Preset
2 of paper.
- First line: file name and the IP address of the computer that send a print job
- Second line: user name, user ID, card ID, and date and time
 Preset 3 and Preset 4
The string registered on [Create Text String 1] is printed as watermark at an angle in the
center of paper.
185
5 Tools
The following items are printed at the bottom right for Preset 3 or bottom left for Preset
4 of paper.
- User ID and date and time
DocName-192.0.2.1 DocName-192.0.2.1
UserName-CardID-UserID-2011/03/01 13:08 UserName-CardID-UserID-2011/03/01 13:08 UserID-2011/03/01 13:08 UserID-2011/03/01 13:08
Preset1 Preset2 Preset3 Preset4
Note • Some items may not be printed depending on the job type and performance conditions.
• Force annotation is not printed on blank paper generated by the machine.
• When the Force Annotation is enabled, you cannot select [Auto Size Detect] for [Tray 5].
• A time printed as a watermark using the Force Annotation feature may differ from the time the print
job is submitted depending on the status and settings of the machine and the contents of the print
job. In this case, the print job start time is printed as a watermark.
Tools
Apply Layout Template to Copy/Print Jobs

5 Set the association between jobs and layout templates. You can associate layout templates
with the following jobs.

Copy
 Client Print

Print Stored File
 Media Print
 Print Fax

Print E-mail

Report
Note • You can associate a layout template with Client Print when a print job is sent from a computer.
• You can associate a layout template with Print Stored File when printing a file in a folder.
Delete Layout Template

Deletes a layout template.
Important • The provided layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, cannot be deleted.
Create Text String

Register text strings for the Force Annotation feature. You can register up to eight types of
strings in [Create Text String 1] to [Create Text String 8]. You can enter up to 64 single-byte
characters.
Important • The available text for the provided layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, is the text strings
registered in [Create Text String 1].
Print Universal Unique ID

You can print UUIDs (Universal Unique IDs) for each print job to identify each job.
186
The printed UUIDs can be used as a search key to retrieve print job logs using an application,
such as ApeosWare Log Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Accounting Service
(sold separately). Retrieving the image log with the UUID enables you to verify "when", "by
whom", and "with what service" the document was processed. This prevents leakage of
confidential information.
• If a layout template is specified in [Apply Layout Template to Copy/Print Jobs] under [Force
Annotation], UUIDs are overlapped with the text on the layout template.
For details on image logs, refer to "Image Log Control (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.187).
For details on Force Annotation, refer to "Force Annotation" (P.185).
Print Universal Unique ID

Select whether or not to print Universal Unique IDs.
Important • If [Print Universal Unique ID] is set to [Yes], you cannot select [Auto Detect] for [Tray 5].
Print Position
Select a print position from six positions: [Top Left], [Bottom Left], [Top Center], [Bottom
Center], [Top Right], or [Bottom Right].
Tools
Print Position Adjustment
Adjust print positions vertically and horizontally from 0 to 100 mm and from 0 to 200 mm
respectively, in 0.5 mm increments.
Note • 0 mm is at the edge of paper. Increasing the value moves the print position toward the center of the
5
paper. However, for [Top Center] or [Bottom Center], the horizontal value for the center of paper is
set to 100 mm. Therefore, when you select [Top Center] or [Bottom Center], set the value to 100 mm
and then specify desired value.
Print Position (Side 2)

Select the position to print the UUID on Side 2 from [Same as Side 1] or [Mirror Side 1] when
making 2 sided copies.
Image Log Control (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

The Image Log Control is a feature that creates image data of documents processed on the
machine and stores the image data with other information such as the user of the job, time,
and sets as logs. This feature can manage jobs and track down the problem such as leakage
of confidential documents.
Important • If you set [Assurance Level] of [Image Log Generation] or [Transfer Image Log] to [High], jobs will be
printed after generating or transferring image logs, and it may take considerable time to print.
• The Image Log Control feature is processed on a priority basis depending on the document image
of a job, the data size, the processing of multiple jobs other than the Image Log Control feature, the
[Assurance Level] setting, or the [Transfer Image Log - Assurance Level] setting.
• The Image Log Control feature is designed to supplement the security feature for documents;
therefore, creating image logs or job processing other than the feature may take long.
• From a security perspective, the machine cannot abort (forcibly terminate) image log creation to
give priority to store data.
• Searching for images and print job logs allows the system administrator to grasp the identification
information of the user who instructed the job. Note that Fuji Xerox is not responsible for a privacy
issue of the user caused by using the Image Log Control feature.
• In the event of forced power failure such as a blackout or a hard disk failure, it is not guaranteed the
image logs are securely created and/or transferred.
• Only the jobs performed after the start of the Image Log Control feature will be covered by the
Image Log Control feature.
187
5 Tools
• Because the images to be controlled are created based on the input images, the images will not
always be the same as the output images. The following information is added or edited during
output; thus, the images will not be reflected.
 Layout change  Secure Watermark  Image composing such as

during output repeating images (Copy)

Separator 
Banner 
Booklet Creation (Copy)

Annotation 
Cover Page (Fax) 
Form Overlay (Print)

Watermark
• For PDF files created as images, the [PDF Security] feature and the [PDF Signature] feature cannot
be used.
• Images with higher resolution than the input image cannot be created regardless of the setting of
[Resolution] under [Image Log Generation]. If the resolution of the input image is lower than the
setting of [Resolution] under [Image Log Generation], the machine creates an image with the same
resolution of the input image.
• For jobs of fax transmissions, the machine always operates as [Low] is set to [Assurance Level]
regardless of the settings of the machine.
• Up to 8191 pages of images can be created. If more than 8191 pages of images are input into the
machine, even if [All Pages] is selected for [Page Range] under [Image Log Generation], not more
than 8191 pages can be created.
Tools
• If the machine runs out of hard disk space for storing images, the machine operates in accordance
with the setting of [Image Log Generation] > [Assurance Level] as follows.
- [High]: A job is cancelled.
5 - [Low]: A job is executed. However, the warning will be displayed at the end of the job and notifies
the user that the image creation failed.
• When an error occurs during generating an image log, the machine operates in accordance with the
setting of [Image Log Generation] > [Assurance Level] as follows.
- [High]: Replaces the image to an error image (1x1 pixels) and indicates a system error. In this
case, turn off the machine and confirm that the control panel is lit off, and then turn on the
machine again.
- [Low]: Replaces the image to an error image (1x1 pixels) and records the error information after
finishing the job.
• Up to 2000 image logs can be stored in the machine.
• The text size of image logs differs depending on the setting of [Resolution] under [Image Log
Generation]. Refer to the following table when you set the resolution.
Size for Size for B&W

Resolution Remarks
Color Jobs Jobs
200 dpi 6 pt 6 pt Adequate level for normal
document
100 dpi 10 pt 14 pt Large size characters are legible.
72 dpi (default) 12 pt 18 pt Title size characters are legible.
50 dpi 16 pt 24 pt Characters are illegible. Suitable
for Preview
25 dpi 24 pt 32 pt Characters are illegible. Suitable
for Thumbnail view
• If you set [Service Rep. Restricted Operation] to [On], our service representatives cannot change the
[Image Log Control] settings. For more information on Service Rep. Restricted Operation, refer to
"Service Rep. Restricted Operation" (P.203).
188
Image Log Control

Set whether or not to use the Image Log Control feature.
Image Log Target

Set whether or not to create image logs per job type such as copy, print, scan, and fax.
Image Log Generation

Set the image data to manage as an image log. One image log file (PDF format) is created
per one job.
 Assurance Level
Allows you to select an assurance level, which affects whether to surely create an image log,
from [Low] or [High].
Note • If you select [Low], image logs may not be created depending on the conditions.
 Resolution
Select the resolution of document images from [25dpi], [50dpi], [72dpi], [100dpi], or
[200dpi].
 Page Range
Tools
Select the page range of document images from [First Page Only], [First 2 Pages], [First 3
Pages], [First 4 Pages], [First 5 Pages], or [All Pages].
5
Transfer Image Log
Image logs created on the machine can be transferred to a log management server for
storage and management. [Transfer Image Log] allows you to set how and when to transfer
image logs.
 Log Transfer
Set whether or not to transfer an image log to a log management server with the Log
Transfer feature.
Select from [Disabled] and [Enabled].
 Assurance Level
Allows you to select an assurance level, which affects whether an image log is surely
transferred to a log management server, from [High] or [Low]. When [High] is set and if a
image log transfer fails, up to 2000 logs are saved in the machine as untransferred log.
When the number of untransferred logs saved in the machine exceeds 2000, the next job
will not be executed. While [Low] is set, the next job is executed and if the number of image
logs untransferred exceeds 2000, the logs are deleted in chronological order.
 Logs To Transfer
Set whether or not to automatically transfer image logs to a log management server.
Select from [Pause], [Transfer Per Job Basis], or [Accumulate & Transfer]. If you select
[Accumulate & Transfer], you can also select the timing of transferring in [Transfer Timing].
 Transfer Timing
Displays when [Accumulate & Transfer] is selected for [Logs to Transfer].
Specifies when to transfer image logs to a log management server.
Select from [Schedule Transfer], [At the end of the job], [At the end of selections], [At power
On], and [When maximum is reached].
189
5 Tools
Notify Job Completion by E-mail

You can receive the results of jobs performed by an e-mail notification.
Targeted Jobs
Select the service whose job result you want to receive by an e-mail notification. When the
target job is already selected, [Selected] is displayed.
You can select more than one target job from [Copy], [Fax], [Scan], [Print], or [Report].
Select the notification timing from [Notify at the End of Job] or [Notify when Error Only].
When [Fax] is selected as one of the targeted jobs, [Attach Faxed Images] setting becomes
available. The specified pages of faxed images converted to PDF format will be attached to
notification e-mail. Select [First Page Only], [First 2 Pages], [All Pages], or [Do Not Attach].
(Type 2 (T2) model only)
E-mail Addresses 1 to 5
Specify the e-mail addresses to notify the result of the jobs.
Note • When you select [Save] to exit this screen without specifying an e-mail address, the setting of
[Targeted Jobs] or [E-mail Message] is deleted.
E-mail Message
Tools
Enter a comment attached to the e-mail.
5
Plug-in Settings
You can browse list of available Plug-ins when you use the custom authentication and set to
switch Plug-ins.
Note • This item appears only when the Extensible Customization Kit (optional) is installed.
Embedded Plug-ins
Set whether or not to use the embedded plug-ins.
Select [Enabled] or [Disabled].
List of Embedded Plug-ins

Display the embedded plug-in name and status on the list.
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the machine.
Fax Service
Switches between the Fax feature and the Server Fax feature.
• The Fax and Server Fax features cannot be enabled at the same time.
 Scan to Fax
Allows you to use the Fax feature on the machine.
 Scan to Fax Server

Allows you to use the Server Fax feature on the machine.
190
Offset Stacking (Center Tray - Lower)

Offsetting means that each set of copies is delivered to the center tray and shifted slightly
to separate it from the previous job. When a set of copies is delivered to the front of the tray,
the next set is delivered to the rear of the tray. Set the offset function for the Center Tray -
Lower. Select from [No Offset], [Offset per Set], and [Offset per Job]. When [Offset per Set]
or [Offset per Job] is selected, the machine slightly shifts the output position per set or per
job (print job) respectively.
Offset Stacking (Right Middle Tray)

Offsetting means that each set of copies is delivered to the center tray and shifted slightly
to separate it from the previous job. When a set of copies is delivered to the front of the tray,
the next set is delivered to the rear of the tray. Set the offset function for the Right Middle
Tray. Select from [No Offset], [Offset per Set], and [Offset per Job]. When [Offset per Set] or
[Offset per Job] is selected, the machine slightly shifts the output position per set or per job
(print job) respectively.
Tools
Extra Center Tray
Allows you to select whether or not to use the Extra Center Tray.
Select from [Not Installed] and [Installed]. 5
Booklet Offset
When [Offset Stacking (Center Tray)] or [Offset Stacking (Right Middle Tray)] is set to
[Offset per Set], the paper is output to the tray by being slightly displaced by set. If, however,
[Fold & Staple] is selected for booklet settings, the paper is not output by set.
Auto Job Promotion

You can select whether or not to allow another job to automatically bypass the current job
when the machine is unable to start an operation for any reason, (for example, running out
of paper in a tray when starting copying or printing).
Select [Disabled] or [Enabled]. When [Enabled] is selected, you can select whether or not to
delete the bypassed jobs automatically. Select [Yes] to specify the period of time until a
bypassed job is deleted between 1 minute and 120 hours. (Type 2 (T2) model only)
Note • Stored documents such as Secure Print and Sample Set documents cannot be used with the Auto
Job Promotion feature.
• When [Enabled] is selected and there is a job bypassed because of paper out, a message stating the
reason of the job promotion appears. The job bypassed can be processed after you take proper
measures by following the instruction of the message. Or, you can cancel the job by pressing the
<Clear All> button. When multiple jobs are bypassed, a screen that lists the bypassed jobs appears.
This screen allows you to display the details screen and to delete the jobs.
• When you have specified the time period to disable print jobs, the jobs received during the specified
time period is not deleted automatically even when you have selected [Yes] for [Automatically
Delete Held Jobs].
For more information on the setting to disable print jobs, refer to "Printer Lockout" (P.162).
Default Print Paper Size

You can set the paper size, A4 or 8.5 x 11" to print reports and/or lists.
191
5 Tools
Odd Page 2 Sided

You can specify whether or not to add a blank page when a document containing an odd
number of pages is printed in 2-sided.
Paper Size Settings

You can specify the size of paper to be automatically detected when you use standard sizes
of a document or the machine is set to detect sizes of a document.
You can select from the following tables: [A/B Series (8 x 13")], [A/B Series], [A/B Series (8K/
16K)], [A/B Series (8 x 13"/8 x 14")], and [Inch Series].
Refer to the following tables for a combination of sizes that can be detected automatically.
Tools
192
Paper size group AB series (8 × 13") AB series
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Trays 3 and 4 (When using TTM)
Tray 5
Tray 6 (HCF B1) (optional)
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
A6 O X X X X X X O X X X X X X
A5 O O O O X O X O O O O X O X
A5 O X X X X X X O O X X X O X
Tools
A4 O O O O X X X O O O O X O X
A4 O O O O O X O O O O O O O O
A3 O O O O X X X O O O O X O X 5
B6 O X X X X O X O X X X X X X
B6 X X X X X X X X X X X X O X
B5 O X O O X O X O O O O X O X
B5 O O X X X X X O O O O O O O
B4 O O O O X X X O O O O X O X
5.5 × 8.5" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5.5 × 8.5" O O X X X O X X X X X X X X
7.25 × 10.5" X O O O O X O X X X X X X X
8 × 10" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8.5 × 11" O O O O X O X X O O O X X X
8.5 × 11" O O O O O O O X O O O O X O
8.5 × 13" X O O O X O X X X O O X X X
8.5 × 14" X X O O X O X X X O O X X X
11 × 17" O O O O X O X X O O O X X X
12 × 18" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SRA3 X X X O X X X X X X O X X X
16 K (Taiwan) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
16 K (Taiwan) X X X X X X X X O O O X X X
193
5 Tools
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
8K (Taiwan) X X X X X X X X O O O X X X
16 K (mainland X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
China)
16 K (mainland X X X X X X X X O O O X X X
China)
Tools
8K (mainland X X X X X X X X O O O X X X
China)
5 Postcard X X X X X X X X X X X X O X
Envelope (120 x 235 X X X X X X X X X X X X O X

mm)
Envelope (90 x 205 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
Envelope (235x 120 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
Commercial #10 X X X X X O X X X X X X X X
envelopes
Monarch 7.3/4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
envelopes
DL envelopes X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
C4 envelopes X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
194
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
Postcard (4 × 6") X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Photograph 2L (5 × X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7")
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Tools
Postcard (6 × 9")
O : Available
X : Not available 5
195
5 Tools
AB series AB series
Paper size group
(8 K / 16 K) (8 × 13" / 8 × 14")
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
A6 O X X X X X X O X X X X X X
A5 O O O O X O X O O O O X O X
A5 O O X X X O X O X X X X X X
Tools
A4 O O O O X O X O O O O X X X
5 A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O X O
A3 O O O O X O X O O O O X X X
B6 O X X X X X X O X X X X O X
B6 X X X X X O X X X X X X X X
B5 O O O O X O X O X O O X O X
B5 O O O O O O O O O X X X X X
B4 O O O O X O X O O O O X X X
5.5 × 8.5" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5.5 × 8.5" X X X X X X X O O X X X O X
7.25 × 10.5" X X X X X X X X O O O O X O
8.5 × 11" X O O O X X X O O O O X O X
8.5 × 11" O O O O O X O O O O O O O O
8.5 × 13" X X O O X X X X O O O X O X
8.5 × 14" X X O O X X X X X O O X O X
11 × 17" O O O O X X X O O O O X O X
12 × 18" X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SRA3 X X X O X X X X X X O X X X
16 K (Taiwan) O X X X X X X X X X X X X X
196
AB series AB series
Paper size group
(8 K / 16 K) (8 × 13" / 8 × 14")
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
16 K (Taiwan) O O O O X X X X X X X X X X
8K (Taiwan) O O O O X X X X X X X X X X
16 K (mainland O X X X X X X X X X X X X X
China)
Tools
16 K (mainland O O O O X X X X X X X X X X
China)
8K (mainland O O O O X X X X X X X X X X 5
China)
Postcard X X X X X O X X X X X X X X
Envelope (120 x 235 X X X X X O X X X X X X X X

mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
Commercial #10 X X X X X X X X X X X X O X
envelopes
Monarch 7.3/4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
envelopes
197
5 Tools
AB series AB series
Paper size group
(8 K / 16 K) (8 × 13" / 8 × 14")
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
DL envelopes X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Tools
Postcard (4 × 6")
Photo 2L (5 × 7") X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5 Postcard (6 × 9") X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
O : Available
X : Not available
198
Paper size group Inch series
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
A6 O X X X X X X
A5 O X X X X X X
A5 O X X X X X X
Tools
A4 O O O O X X X
A4 O O O O O X X
A3 O O O O X X X 5
B6 O X X X X X X
B6 X X X X X X X
B5 O X O O X X X
B5 O O X X X X X
B4 O O O O X X X
5.5 × 8.5" X O O O X X X
5.5 × 8.5" O O X X X O X
7.25 × 10.5" X O O O O X O
8 × 10" X X X X X X X
8 × 10" X X X X X X X
8.5 × 11" O O O O X O X
8.5 × 11" O O O O O O O
8.5 × 13" X X O O X O X
8.5 × 14" X O O O X O X
11 × 17" O O O O X O X
12 × 18" X X X O X X X
SRA3 X X X X X X X
16 K (Taiwan) X X X X X X X
16 K (Taiwan) X X X X X X X
199
5 Tools
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
8K (Taiwan) X X X X X X X
16 K (mainland X X X X X X X
China)
16 K (mainland X X X X X X X
China)
Tools
8K (mainland X X X X X X X
China)
5 Postcard X X X X X X X
Envelope (120 x 235 X X X X X X X

mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
Commercial #10 X X X X X O X
envelopes
Monarch 7.3/4 X X X X X O X
envelopes
DL envelopes X X X X X X X
C4 envelopes X X X X X X X
200
Document glass
Document feeder
Tray 1
Trays 2 to 4
Tray 5
Loading
Position
Size /
Orientation
C5 envelopes X X X X X X X
Postcard (4 × 6") X X X X X O X
Photo 2L (5 × 7") X X X X X O X
Postcard (6 × 9") X X X X X O X
Tools
O : Available
X : Not available
5
Millimeters/Inches
Allows you to select unit of measurement displayed on the screen from [Millimeters] or
[Inches].
Data Encryption
Allows you to select whether or not to encrypt data recorded on the hard disk of the
machine.
When you enable data encryption, the machine encrypts automatically copy, scan, or print
data written to the hard disk. You cannot select whether or not to encrypt by feature. This
prevents unauthorized access to the stored data. To activate this feature, set an encryption
key.
Support Center.
1 Select [Data Encryption], and then [Change Settings].

2 Select [On].
3 Select [New Encryption Key], and enter an encryption key of 1 to 12 single-byte characters,
and then select [Save].
4 Select [Re-enter Encryption Key], enter the same encryption key, and then select [Save].
5 Select [Save].
201
5 Tools
 Data Restoration
The encrypted data cannot be restored in the following cases:
 When a problem occurs with the hard disk.
 When you have forgotten the encryption key.

When you have forgotten the system administrator's user ID and a passcode when [On]
is selected in [Service Rep. Restricted Operation].
 Starting the Data Encryption and Changing Settings

When you select/deselect data encryption or change the encryption key, you must restart
the machine. When the machine reboots, the machine initializes part of the disk area. The
previous data is not secured.
The disk area stores the following data.
- Spooled print data
- Print data including Secure Print and Sample Set
- Forms for the Form Overlay feature
- Folder and job flow sheet settings (folder name, passcode, etc.)
- Files in folders
- Address book data
Tools
- Digital certificate
Important • Be sure to save all necessary settings and files before using data encryption or changing any
settings.
5 • Make sure that the hard disk and encryption settings match. Otherwise, an error will occur. For
information on error messages and their remedies, refer to "Other Errors" (P.593).
• The following procedure is recommended for changing the encryption settings while a large amount
of data (100 jobs or more) is stored in a folder, and [Number of Overwrites] is set to [1 Overwrite] or
[3 Overwrites] under [Overwrite Hard Disk].
1. Select [Tools] > [Setup] > [Create Folder] to display the [Create Folder] screen.
2. Select the folder, and then select [Delete Folder].
3. Select [Close].
4. Press the <Machine Status> button, and confirm that [Standby] in [Overwrite Hard Disk] is
displayed.
5. Enter the system administration mode, and change the data encryption settings.
For information on how to enter the system administration mode, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.140).
• Our service representative cannot restore the encryption key.
• When our service representative replaces the electrical circuit board, the encryption key is initialized.
Do not lose the encrypted information.
Encryption Key for Confidential Data

Allows you to set an encryption key to encrypt confidential information such as the
passcode of the system administrator and a folder. Encrypting confidential information
prevents a network hacking and an unauthorized access to the information.
Enter an encryption key of 4 to 12 single-byte characters using alphanumeric characters.
Important • If you change the existing encryption key, you may not restore confidential information from a
backup.
Note • The factory default encryption key is "x-admin".
1 Select [Encryption Key for Confidential Data], and then [Change Settings].
2 Select [New Encryption Key], and enter an encryption key, and then select [Save].
3 Select [Re-enter Encryption Key], enter the same encryption key, and then select [Save].
202
4 Select [Save] to display a confirmation screen. Select [Yes] on the screen to save the
setting.
Service Rep. Restricted Operation

Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the operation by our service representative to
protect the security settings from being altered by someone impersonating our service
representative.
 Off
The operation by our service representative is not restricted.
 On
Our service representative cannot change the following settings:
 "Delete All Data" (P.179)
 "Secure Watermark" (P.183)
 "Image Log Control (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.187)
 "Print Universal Unique ID" (P.186)

"Data Encryption" (P.201)
Tools

"Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.202)

"Service Rep. Restricted Operation" (P.203)

"SSL/TLS Settings" (P.238)
5
 "S/MIME Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.239)
 "IPsec Settings" (P.241)

"System Administrator Settings" (P.323)

"Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator" (P.329)

"Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.333)
 Creating/Changing Users with System Administrator Rights
 Changing SNMP v3 Setting
When [On] is set, you can set a maintenance passcode of 4 to 12 digits in the [Maintenance
Passcode] screen.
Entering the passcode is required when our service representative performs maintenance.
Important • When [On] is set, note the followings:
- If you lose the System Administrator's user ID and passcode, the items restricted to the service
representative cannot be changed.
- If you lose the passcode, our service representative cannot perform maintenance in the case
when an error occurs in the machine.
• To change the restricted items or perform maintenance, the electric circuit board of the machine
must be replaced.
You will be charged for the electrical circuit board and handling cost.
Be sure not to lose the System Administrator's user ID and passcode.
Support Center.
For information on the system administrator permissions, refer to "User Roles" (P.426).
Software Download
You can select whether or not to permit software downloading. This feature is for service
representative use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
203
5 Tools
Check Document Guides Position

Set whether or not to display the confirmation screen when you set the guide position of the
document feeder to 8.5" and start loading. Select from [No] or [Yes].
Document Feeder Quiet Mode

When you use the duplex automatic document feeder B1-PC, allows you to specify whether
or not to reduce the noise of loading a document. You can specify the setting each for
[Copy], [Scan], and [Fax].
When the server fax feature is enabled, [Scan/Fax] is displayed instead of [Scan] and [Fax].
To reduce the noise of the document feeder, select [Enabled].
Drum Cartridge Conservation Mode

Specifies the operation when [Auto Detect] is selected for [Output Color]. Select either [On]
or [Off].
If the machine is set to automatically switch the type of a document (color/monochrome),
select [On], If not, select [Off]. Selecting [Off] outputs in color.
Restrict Recipient Selection Method

Allows you to select whether or not to restrict a fax/Internet fax or an e-mail transmissions
Tools
to addresses not registered on the Address Book.

Selecting [Only From Address Book] disables address entry using the keyboard or numeric
5 keypad, and permits only transmission to addresses registered on the Address Book.
Note • You can also give users authority to deactivate [Restrict Recipient Selection Method]. For more
information, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.426).
Restrict User to Edit Address Book

Specify whether or not to permit local users to add and edit recipients in the Address Book.
When you select [Yes], local users cannot add or edit the Address Book.
Note • You can also give users authority to deactivate [Restrict User to Edit Address Book]. For more
information, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.426).
Auto Validation of Speed Dial Entry

Allows you to select whether the machine automatically validate the number when you use
speed dial. When you select [Validate entry after a fixed time], you can select the time to
auto-validation from [Shorter], [Default], or [Longer].
Note • This feature does not appear for some models.
Data Indicator
Allows you to set the lighting pattern of the <Data> indicator.
 Pattern 1
Lights up when a document is stored in the hard disk (optional) of the machine.
 Pattern 2
Lights up when a fax document is in a print queue or a fax received with the Store Fax - Local
Folder feature is stored in the folder.
 Pattern 3
Lights up for 30 seconds after a job in the print queue is printed.
204
Copy Service Settings
In [Copy Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Copy feature. The
following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Copy Tab - Features Allocation.................................................................................................................................................205
Preset Buttons...............................................................................................................................................................................206
Copy Defaults................................................................................................................................................................................206
Copy Control..................................................................................................................................................................................212
Original Size Defaults ..................................................................................................................................................................214
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..............................................................................................................................................................214
Custom Colors ...............................................................................................................................................................................214
Annotations - Create Comments..............................................................................................................................................214
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Copy Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.140).
Tools
Copy Tab - Features Allocation
You can customize the features displayed on the [Copy] screen. Setting the most frequently 5
used features enables you to avoid extra operations such as selecting tabs.
1 Select the number of features displayed on the

[Copy] screen.
 5 Features
The following five features are shown on the screen: [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge],
[Paper Supply], [2 Sided Copying], and [Copy Output]. Features and positions displayed
cannot be changed.
 7 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the [Copy] screen.
Note • [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.
 10 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the third and fourth columns from the left of the
[Copy] screen.
Note • [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge] and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.
2 From [Frequently Used Features] on the right of the screen, select a button and the
position of the button where you want to allocate a feature.
Note • The position of each button on the right side corresponds to the position on the [Copy] screen.
205
5 Tools
3 Select a feature to display, and select [Save].

Note • Select [ ] to display the previous screen or [ ] to display the next screen.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.
5 Select [Save].
Preset Buttons
Paper Supply - Button 2 - 5

Select the paper tray displayed in the second to fifth buttons in [Paper Supply] on the [Copy]
screen.
Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3 - 4
Select the magnification ratio displayed in the third and fourth buttons in [Reduce/Enlarge]
on the [Copy] screen.
Select the ratio from the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons registered.
Front Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3

Tools
Set the default value of the tray displayed in [Paper Supply] when an option that printed on
Front Cover is selected for [Front Cover] under [Output Format] > [Covers].
5 Back Cover Tray - Button 1 - 3
Set the default value of the tray displayed in [Paper Supply] when an option that printed on
Back Cover is selected for [Back Cover] under [Output Format] > [Covers].
Transparency Tray - Button 1 - 3

Set the default value of the transparency tray displayed in [Transparency Options] on the
[Output Format] screen.
Separator & Handout Tray - Button 1 - 3

Set the default value of the separator & handout tray displayed in [Transparency Options]
on the [Output Format] screen.
Copy Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Copy feature. When the machine is turned on, or the
machine exits the Power Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the machine
resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used features and values as the
defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
For more information on each setting item, refer to "3 Copy" in the User Guide.
Paper Supply
Set the default value for [Paper Supply] in the [Copy] screen.
When the default value of [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], [Auto Select] cannot be
selected for [Paper Supply].
Reduce/Enlarge
Set the default value for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Copy] screen.
206
Select the ratio from [100%], [Auto %], and the buttons registered as Reduce/Enlarge
Preset buttons.
When the default value of [Paper Supply] is set to [Auto Select], [Auto %] cannot be selected
for [Reduce/Enlarge].
For information on the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.214).
Output Color
Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
When [No Default] is selected, select the output color in the [Copy] screen before making
copies.
Output Color (Simple Copy)

Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Simple Copy] screen. You can select from
[Auto], [Color], and [Black & White].
Single Color
Set the default value for [Single Color] in [More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You
can select a color from six preset colors and six custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.214).
Tools
Dual Color - Source Color
Set the default value for [Source Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected for
[More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. 5
Selecting [Color] enables you to select a color from six colors.
Dual Color - Target Area Color

Set the default value for [Target Area Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected for
[More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You can select a color from seven preset
colors and six custom colors.
Dual Color - Non-target Area Color

Set the default value for [Non-target Area Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected
for [More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You can select a color from seven preset
colors and six custom colors.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White)

Set the default value for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when a color other than [Black & White] is selected for [Output Color] in the
[Copy] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Black & White)

Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when [Black & White] is selected for [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
207
5 Tools
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Saturation
Set the default value for [Saturation] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Background Suppression
This feature allows you to suppress the background color of documents.
Set the default value for [Suppress Background] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
[Background Suppression] is valid when [Original Type] is set to [Photo & Text], [Text], or
[Maps].
Tools
Color Balance - Yellow / Color Balance - Magenta / Color Balance - Cyan /

Color Balance - Black
5 Set the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.
You can set density levels of each color for each of the [Highlights], [Midtones], and
[Shadows].
Note • Depending on the density level settings, [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set as
follows:
- When the density levels of all colors are set to [0, 0, 0], [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality]
screen is set to [Normal].
- When the same value is set to all levels for each color (for example: [0, 0, 0,] or [1, 1, 1]), [Color
Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set to [Basic Color].
- When the settings other than the ones described above are applied, [Color Balance] in the [Image
Quality] screen is set to [Advanced Color].
Color Shift
Set the default value for [Color Shift] in the [Image Quality] screen.
2 Sided Copying
Set the default value for [2 Sided Copying] in the [Copy], [Layout Adjustment], and [Output
Format] screens.
Mixed Size Originals

Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Edge Erase - Top Edge

When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the
edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. This feature
allows you to erase such shadows on the top edge.
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the top directions
in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
208
Note • You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Top Edge]. For the printable area,
refer to "Printable Area" (P.653).
Edge Erase - Bottom Edge

allows you to erase such shadows on the bottom edge.
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the bottom
directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm
in 1 mm increments.
Note • You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Bottom Edge]. For the printable
area, refer to "Printable Area" (P.653).
Edge Erase - Left Edge

allows you to erase such shadows on the left edge.
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the left directions
increments.
Tools
Note • You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Left Edge]. For the printable area,
refer to "Printable Area" (P.653).
Edge Erase - Right Edge 5

allows you to erase such shadows on the right edge.
Set the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the right directions
increments.
Note • You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Edge Erase - Right Edge]. For the printable
area, refer to "Printable Area" (P.653).
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase

allows you to erase such shadows on the center of facing pages of a bound document or a
booklet.
Set the default value for [Center] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the
value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Note • You cannot copy the whole area even if you set [0] to [Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase]. For the
printable area, refer to "Printable Area" (P.653).
Edge Erase - 2 Sided Original - Side 2

This feature allows you to set whether the edge erase value of Side 1 and Side 2 are to be
same or to be symmetrical.
Image Shift - Side 1

Set the default value for [Side 1] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Shift - Side 2

Set the default value for [Side 2] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
209
5 Tools
Image Rotation
Set the default value for [Image Rotation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Image Rotation - Rotation Direction

Set the default value for [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] of [Image Rotation] in the
[Layout Adjustment] screen.
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Pages per Side

Set the default value for [Pages per Side] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.
Copy Output
This feature allows you to set the finishing options to output multiple copies. Select [Auto],
[Collated], [Uncollated], or [Uncollated with Separators].
Set the default value for [Copy Output] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.
Note • To use the [Collated] feature, an optional component is required for some models. If the optional
component is not installed, the machine behaves as [Uncollated] is selected.
Tools
Uncollated - Default Separator Tray

5 Set the default value for [Separators Tray] under [Copy Output] > [Uncollated with
Separators] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.
Output Destination
Set the default value for [Output/Offset] under [Copy Output] in the [Copy] and [Output
Format] screens.
Output Destination (Simple Copy)

Set the output destination when you start copying from the [Simple Copy] screen.
Note • If paper cannot be output to the tray you set, the destination may be changed automatically.
• When the [Simple Copy] screen is displayed, you can confirm the output destination on the [Review]
screen, which can be displayed by pressing the <Review> button. For information on the <Review>
button, refer to "2 Product Overview" > "Control Panel" in the User Guide.
Sample Job
Set the default value for [Sample Job] in the [Job Assembly] screen.
Annotations - Stored Comment

Set the default value for [Stored Comments] displayed when [Comment] is selected for
[Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.
You can select a comment type from eight preset types and custom text registered.
For information about how to set custom text, refer to "Annotations - Create Comments" (P.214).
Annotations - Comment on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Comment] is selected for [Annotations]
in the [Output Format] screen.
210
Annotations - Comment - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Format & Style] displayed when [Comment] is
selected for [Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen.
Annotations - Comment - Font Color

Set the default value for [Font Color] under [Format & Style] displayed when [Comment] is
Date - Position on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Date Stamp] is selected for
Date - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Font Size] displayed when [Date Stamp] is
Page Numbers - Style

Set the default value for [Style] displayed when [Page Numbers] is selected for
Tools
Page Numbers - Position on Side 1 and Side 2
Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Page Numbers] is selected for
[Annotations] in the [Output Format] screen. 5
Page Numbers - Font Size
Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Font Size] displayed when [Page Numbers] is
Bates Stamp - Number of Digits

Set the default value for [Number of Digits] displayed when [Bates Stamp] is selected for
Bates Stamp - Position on Side 1 and Side 2

Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Bates Stamp] is selected for
Bates Stamp - Font Size

Set the default value for [Font Size] under [Font Size] displayed when [Bates Stamp] is
Booklet Creation - Default Cover Tray

Set the default value for [Covers] which is displayed when you select a Cover page option in
the [Booklet Creation] screen.
Covers - Default Front Cover Tray, Default Back Cover Tray

Set the default value for [Front Cover] and [Back Cover] which are displayed when you select
a Front Cover and Back Cover options in the [Covers] screen.
Separators - Default Separator Tray

Set the default value for [Segment Separator Tray] under [Segment Separators] which is
displayed when you set [Build Job] to [On] in the [Job Assembly] screen.
211
5 Tools
Copy Control
You can configure settings related to copy operation control.
Memory Full Procedure

If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears
asking you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a certain
time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to "Auto Job Release" (P.161).
 Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.
 Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start copying the document partially stored.
Maximum Stored Pages

Set the maximum number of pages stored for a copy document. You can set from 1 to 999
pages.
Tools
Auto Paper Off

5 Select the tray used when [Auto Select] of [Paper Supply] in the [Copy] screen is cancelled.
[Auto Select] of [Paper Supply] is cancelled when [Auto %], [Auto X-Y %] for [Independent
X-Y %], or [Slight Reduction (Improves Fit)] is selected.
Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy

Specify paper to copy side 2 of a document: in 2 sided copying, if the size of side 1 and side
2 of a document is different, and the machine detects different paper size for sides 1 and 2.
Important • When the side 1 and side 2 are different sizes and if the side 2 is copied on the sheet on which the
side 1 has been printed, a part of the image may be missing.
 Copy to new sheet

Side 2 is copied as side 1 on a new sheet of paper.
 Copy to Side 2
Side 2 is copied on the reverse side of side 1 without changing paper size.
Fine-tune 100%
You can fine-tune magnification when copying at 100% (actual size). The set value is
applied to [100%] in the [Copy] screen is set to 100%.
Set the value in the X/Y direction between 98 and 102% in 0.1% increments.
Important • This feature is applied only when a copy is made using the document glass. This setting is not
reflected in the magnification (100%) under [Independent X-Y%] or [Calculator %].
Note • A magnification displays [100%] even if [Fine-tune 100%] is selected.
ID Card Copy - Reduce/Enlarge

Set the copy magnification ratio when to copy ID cards. Selecting [Allow to Change] allows
you to specify the ratio between 25 to 400 % in 1 % increments.
Note • The machine may copy an ID card in a different orientation from the original orientation depending
on the magnification ratio you specified.
212
Background Suppression (Photo & Text)

Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Photo &
Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
Background Suppression Level (Text)

Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text] is
selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
Photo & Text /Printed Original

Set the type of document when [Printed Original] of [Photo & Text] is selected for [Original
Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
 Normal
Copies with standard image quality.
 Inkjet Originals
Select [Inkjet Originals] when copying a document printed with an inkjet printer. This
Tools
improves the recognition of inkjet colors.
 Highlighted Originals
Select [Highlighted Originals] when copying an original marked with a highlight pen. This 5
improves the recognition of the colors of highlight pen.
Original Type - See-Through Paper

When [Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen, set whether to
display [Text on See-Through Paper].
Annotations - Comment Density

Set the translucency of the comment printed as annotation.
You can select a translucency value from [Darken], [Normal], and [Lighten]. Darken
represents no translucency.
Note • If a stamp set to [Darken] density is printed over text, the text may be unreadable.
Comment Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Left Center, - Center, - Right Center,
- Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a comment finely.
Date Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and -
Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a date stamp finely.
Page Number Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center,
and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a page number finely.
Bates Stamp - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and -
Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a bates stamp finely.
213
5 Tools
Quantity Display
You can select how you want to display the counter in the Copy service.
Select from [Quantity], [Quantity and Memory], and [Quantity and Original Count].
Maximum Number of Sets

Set the maximum number of allowed sets to copy between 1 and 999. Users will not be able
to specify a larger number of sets to copy than the value set here.
Original Size Defaults

Set the original sizes displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign original sizes to the buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently make copies of non-standard size document, setting non-standard size as
the default can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
 A/B Series Size

You can select a size from A and B series sizes.
 Inch Size
Tools
You can select a size from inch series sizes.
5  Others
You can select a size from other sizes.
 Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed when [Proportional %]
is selected under [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Copy] screen.
You can assign any magnification to the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons other than [100%]
and [Auto %].
Custom Colors
Set the custom colors used for [Single Color] and [Dual Color] in the [Output Color] screen.
You can assign custom colors with yellow (0 to 100%), magenta (0 to 100%), and cyan (0
to 100%) to each custom color buttons 1 to 6.
Note • Adjust so that the total of yellow, magenta, and cyan does not exceed 240%.
Annotations - Create Comments

Register text to print with [Comment] under [Annotations]. You can enter up to 64 single-
byte characters.
For information about how to enter characters, "Entering Text" (P.43).
214
Connectivity & Network Setup
In [Connectivity & Network Setup], you can configure settings related to the Connectivity &
Network feature.
For information on Connectivity and Network Settings, refer to "Printer Environment Settings" (P.343) or "E-mail
Environment Settings" (P.357).
If you use CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more information, refer to "CentreWare
Internet Services Settings" (P.335).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.

Port Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................................215
Protocol Settings ..........................................................................................................................................................................221
Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name ...................................................................................................................................225
Proxy Server Settings...................................................................................................................................................................226
EP Proxy Server Setup..................................................................................................................................................................227
SIP Settings....................................................................................................................................................................................228
T.38 Settings .................................................................................................................................................................................231
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings........................................................................................................................................231
Tools
Remote Authentication/Directory Service..............................................................................................................................233
Security Settings...........................................................................................................................................................................238
Other Settings ...............................................................................................................................................................................243
5
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network Setup].
Port Settings
Set the interface of the machine connected to a client. In [Port Settings], you can configure
the following settings.
Important • For LPD, Port9100, HTTP-SSL/TLS, and SIP, do not use a number that is the same as a port number of
another port.
For a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Service (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP, WebDAV, and Web
Services on Devices (WSD)), do not use a number that is the same as a port number of LPD,
Port9100, and HTTP-SSL/TLS.
Furthermore, if any of the above are set to one of the port numbers indicated below, operation may
no longer be performed properly depending on the setting conditions of the port:
25, 139, 427, 445, 631, 15000
• Only LPD, Port9100, SNMP and Internet Services (HTTP) ports are available for Ethernet 2 when two
Ethernet interfaces are used. (Type 2 (T2) model only)
• Secondary Ethernet (optional) does not support IPP and Google Cloud Print ports. Print submission
of AirPrint and Google Cloud Print via Ethernet 2 is not available.
For information on HTTP-SSL/TLS port, refer to "HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number" (P.238).
You can configure the Google Cloud Print port settings in CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the
help of CentreWare Internet Services. (Type 2 (T2) model only)
215
5 Tools
Parallel
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use a parallel interface.
 Print Mode
Select the printer language use on the machine. Selecting [Auto] enables the machine to
automatically determine and use the most suitable language to print data received from
the host device.
 PJL
PJL (Printer Job Language) is a job control language and a PJL command is data prepended
to the top of the print jobs. Usually select [Enabled].
 Auto Eject Time

Configure the time that the data so far received by the machine will automatically be
printed since data is no longer sent to the printer.
You can enter a time between 5 and 1275 seconds in 5 seconds increments.
 Adobe Communication Protocol

Tools
 Standard
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the ASCII format.
5 
Binary
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the BCP format.
 TBCP
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the TBCP format.
 Bi-directional Communication
Specifies whether or not to allow bi-directional communications.
USB
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use a USB interface.
 Print Mode
Select the printer language use on the machine. Selecting [Auto] enables the machine to
automatically determine and use the most suitable language to print data received from
the host device.
 PJL
PJL (Printer Job Language) is a job control language and a PJL command is data prepended
to the top of the print jobs. Usually select [Enabled].
 Auto Eject Time

Configure the time that the data so far received by the machine will automatically be
printed since data is no longer sent to the printer.
You can enter a time between 5 and 1275 seconds in 5 seconds increments.
216
 Adobe Communication Protocol

 Standard
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the ASCII format.
 Binary
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the BCP format.

TBCP
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the TBCP format.

RAW
Select this when the output protocol of the print driver is in the ASCII or binary format.
The data is printed without being controlled by the Adobe communication protocol.
 PostScript Wait Timeout

The machine automatically terminates a connection when the machine does not receive
data for a certain period of time. When data is being printed with [RAW] is selected for
[Adobe Communication Protocol], select [Disabled] if you want to use the time period set in
[Auto Eject Time] or select [Enabled] if you want to use the timeout period of PostScript.
Tools
LPD
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use LPD. 5
 Port Number
Enter a port number for LPD from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 515.
Important • Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
 Maximum Number of Sessions

Enter the maximum number of client sessions using LPD. You can enter a number from 1 to
10 in 1 session increments.
SMB Client
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use SMB when you use the Scan to PC (SMB) service or SMB
authentication service.
IPP
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use IPP.
Set this when you want to use IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) to print via the Internet.
 Added Port Number

Select [Disabled] when you want to set the machine does not accept IPP from other than
the standard port number, or select [Enabled] when accepts all port numbers.
Enter a port number for IPP other than the standard port number from 1 to 65535.
217
5 Tools
Important • Do not use a number that is the same as a port number of another port. However, you can use the
same port number for a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Services (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP,
WebDAV, and Web Services on Devices (WSD)).
Note • [Added Port Number] cannot be configured if [Port Status] is set to [Disabled].
To configure [Added Port Number], enable port status and reboot the machine, and then configure
[Added Port Number].
Bonjour
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use Bonjour®.
Note • To print from a printer detected by [Bonjour], the LPD port must be activated in advance.
Port 9100
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use Port9100®.
Select this option when the communication protocol is in the RAW format for Windows
Standard TCP/IP port monitor.
 Port Number
Tools
Enter a port number for Port9100 from 1 to 65535.

5 Important • Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
SNMP
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use SNMP, when you use any web applications manufactured by Fuji
Xerox to control the machine on the network.
SIP
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use SIP, when you use IP fax (SIP) transmission.
 Port Number
Enter a port number to use IP fax (SIP).
Important • Do not use any numbers assigned to other ports.
Note • IP fax (SIP) is not available for some models.
FTP Client
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use the Scan to PC service with FTP transmission.
Note • Select a communication mode to send data scanned via FTP from [Passive Mode] and [Active
Mode]. [Passive Mode] is selected by factory default. You can change the setting from CentreWare
Internet Services.
218
Receive E-mail
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you receive e-mails or Internet faxes.
Send E-mail
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you send e-mails or Internet faxes.
E-mail Notification Service
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use the E-mail Notification Service. The E-mail Notification
Service notifies you of the machine status or the completion of a print job and a direct fax
job by e-mail.
Note • [Consumables Status], [Parts Status], [Paper Tray Status], [Output Tray Status], [Jam Status],
[Interlock Status], and [Fault Notice] are notified as the machine status.
• You can configure the E-mail Notification Service in CentreWare Internet Services. For more
Tools
UPnP Discovery 5
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use UPnP.
 Port Number
Enter a port number for UPnP communication from 1 to 65535.
WSD
 WSD Print - Port Status

Select [Enabled] to use WSD Print.
Set this when you search a device on a network from Windows Vista® and Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server® 2012, and Windows Server 2012 R2.
 WSD Scan - Port Status

Select [Enabled] to use WSD Scan.
Set this when you search a device on a network from Windows Vista and Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2012, and Windows Server 2012 R2.
 Port Number
Enter a port number from 1 to 65535.
219
5 Tools
Internet Services (HTTP)
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use CentreWare Internet Services.
For more information about CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.335).
 Port Number
Enter a port number for the Internet Services from 1 to 65535.
Note • You cannot select [Port Number], if HTTP port is disabled.
To configure [Port Number], enable port status and reboot the machine, and then configure [Port
Number].
SOAP
Tools
 Port Status
5 Select [Enabled] when you use an application program such as Device Setup.
 Port Number
Enter a port number for SOAP from 1 to 65535.
WebDAV
 Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use an application program such as Network Scanner Utility 3 to
access folders in the machine.
We recommend you to enable [HTTP - SSL / TLS Communication] under [SSL / TLS Settings]
when you use WebDAV. This is an effectual way to avoid password leaking.
Note • You cannot select [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out], if WebDAV port is disabled.
To configure [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out], enable port status and reboot the machine,
and then configure [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out].
 Port Number
Enter a port number for WebDAV from 1 to 65535.
 Operation Time-Out
You can enter an operation time-out period between 1 and 65535 seconds in 1 second
increments.
220
ThinPrint
 Port Status
You can use the machine for print in the ThinPrint® .print environment. The machine
decompresses and prints the compressed print data sent from the print server.
Select [Enabled] when you use ThinPrint.
 Port Number
Enter a port number for ThinPrint from 1 to 65535.
Important • Do not use any number s assigned to the other ports.
Note • ThinPrint is available when the communication protocol uses IPv4.
• The maximum of three connections are possible at a time.
Protocol Settings
Set the parameters required for communications. In [Protocol Settings], you can set the
following items.
Tools
Also on [Ping Connection Test], you can check whether or not the machine can be properly
connected to a network with the configured condition. (Type 2 (T2) model only)
Ethernet Settings 5
Configure the Ethernet settings.
 Ethernet1 - Network Name, Ethernet 2 - Network Name (Type 2 (T2) model only)
When two Ethernet interfaces are used, specify the names respectively.
Note • This item is displayed only when Secondary Ethernet (optional) is installed on the machine.
 Ethernet - Rated Speed / Ethernet 1 - Rated Speed, Ethernet 2 - Rated Speed (Type 2
(T2) model only)
Set the communication speed for the Ethernet interface.
Note • The title of this setting item differs depending on the Ethernet interface configuration: When single
Ethernet interface is used, [Ethernet - Rated Speed] is displayed. When two Ethernet interfaces are
used, [Ethernet 1 - Rated Speed] and [Ethernet 2 - Rated Speed] are displayed.
 Auto
Select this to detect the Ethernet transmission rate automatically.

100 Mbps Full-Duplex
Select this to set 100BASE-TX (Full Duplex) as the default value.
 100 Mbps Half-Duplex
Select this to set 100BASE-TX (Half Duplex) as the default value.
 10 Mbps Full-Duplex
Select this to set 10BASE-T (Full Duplex) as the default value.

10 Mbps Half-Duplex
Select this to set 10BASE-T (Half Duplex) as the default value.

1000 Mbps
Select this to set 1000BASE-T as the default value.
Note • 1000BASE-T is not available for some models. An optional component is required.
221
5 Tools
TCP/IP - Common Settings

Configure common settings to use TCP/IP.
 Primary Network (Type 2 (T2) model only)

When two Ethernet interfaces are used, the name of interface which works as the primary
network is displayed.
Note • The primary network is "Ethernet 1". You cannot set "Ethernet 2" as the primary network.
• This item is displayed only when Secondary Ethernet (optional) is installed on the machine.
You cannot edit the setting from here.
 IP Mode
Allows you to select the TCP/IP operation mode.
Displays current IP mode.

IPv4 Mode
Select this option for IPv4.
 IPv6 Mode
Select this option for IPv6.
 Dual Stack
Tools
Select this option for an environment using both IPv4 and IPv6.
5 TCP/IP - Network Settings/ TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1), TCP/IP - Network
Settings (Ethernet 2) (Type 2 (T2) model only)
Configure network settings other than common settings to use TCP/IP.
Important • Configuring same IP address for [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [TCP/IP - Network
Settings (Ethernet 2)] is prohibited. When setting the same IP address to each Ethernet, contact our
• Only LPD, Port9100, and SNMP ports are available for [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)]. The
applications using any other ports such as Network Scanner Utility 3 may not work with the [TCP/IP -
Network Settings (Ethernet 2)] setting.
Note • We recommend you to specify different IP addresses between [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet
1)] and [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)].
• The title of this setting item differs depending on the Ethernet interface configuration: When single
Ethernet interface is used, [TCP/IP - Network Settings] is displayed. When two Ethernet interfaces
are used, [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)] are
displayed.
• For [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)], same
setting items as [TCP/IP - Network Settings] are displayed. You can configure individual settings for
each Ethernet interface.
• When any interface names are specified in [Ethernet1 - Network Name] and [Ethernet2 - Network
Name], the specified names are displayed instead of "Ethernet1" and "Ethernet2" of [TCP/IP -
Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)] respectively.
 IPv4 - IP Address Resolution

Allows you to select a method for obtaining the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway
address.
 DHCP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via DHCP.
 BOOTP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via BOOTP.
222
 RARP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via RARP.
 DHCP/AutoIP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via DHCP/
AutoIP. If the machine fails to communicate with the DHCP server, the AutoIP function is
automatically enabled and an IP address (169.254.xxx.xxx) is assigned to the machine.
When communication between the machine and the DHCP server recovers, the machine
obtains an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address by the DHCP server.

STATIC
Allows you to manually specify an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Note • To configure a subnet mask and a gateway address, an IP Address must be set first.
 IPv4 - IP Address
Enter the IP address using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when selecting
[STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
Note • Enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from of 0 to 255.
• Specify an IP address using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on the
screen, select [Backspace] to delete the character.
Tools
 IPv4 - Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when selecting
[STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution]. 5
• Specify a subnet mask using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on the
 IPv4 - Gateway Address

Enter the gateway address using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when
selecting [STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
• Specify a gateway address using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on the
 IPv4 - DNS Server Setup

Set the DNS server.
 Get IP Address from DHCP
Set whether or not to automatically obtain the address of the DNS server from the DHCP
server.
 Preferred DNS Server IP Address, Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address, Alternate DNS Server
2 IP Address (Type 2 (T2) model only)
When [Get IP Address from DHCP] is set to [Disabled], manually set the DNS server
address.
Specify alternate DNS server addresses for [Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address] and
[Alternate DNS Server 2 IP Address].
 IPv4 - IP Filter
Select whether or not to limit the IPv4 addresses that can access the machine.
Note • [IPv4 - IP Filter] applies to all features using TCP/IP, such as Print and Store to Folder.
223
5 Tools
• To set the IPv4 IP addresses that the machine accepts connection from, use [IP Filtering] in
CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet
Services or refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.335).
• When [IP Filtering] is enabled, make sure to switch the FTP transfer mode to [Active Mode] to
transfer the scanned image from the machine via FTP. You can switch the FTP transfer mode from
 IPv6 Address Manual Configuration

Allows you to select whether or not to configure the IPv6-address settings manually.
 Manually Configured IPv6 Address

This setting is configurable when [IPv6 Address Manual Configuration] is set to [Enable].
Specify an IPv6 address.
Note • Enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
• Specify an address using alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, and A to F) and colons (:). If you mistyped
a character on the screen, select [Backspace] to delete the character.
 Manually Configured IPv6 Address Prefix

This setting is configurable when [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] is set. Specify a prefix
length from 0 to 128.
Tools
 Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway

This setting is configurable when [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] is set. Specify a
5 gateway address.
Note • Enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
 IPv6 - DNS Server Setup

Set the DNS server for IPv6.
 Get IP Address from DHCP
Set whether or not to automatically obtain the address of the DNS server from the DHCP
server.
 Preferred DNS Server IP Address, Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address, Alternate DNS Server
2 IP Address (Type 2 (T2) model only)
When [Get IP Address from DHCP] is set to [Disabled], manually set the DNS server
address.
Specify alternate DNS server addresses for [Alternate DNS Server 1 IP Address] and
[Alternate DNS Server 2 IP Address].
 Automatically Configured IPv6 Address

Displays the following addresses, which are automatically assigned.

Link-local address
 Auto Stateless Address 1 and Prefix Length
 Auto Stateless Address 2 and Prefix Length

Auto Stateless Address 3 and Prefix Length
 Auto Gateway Address

IPv6 - IP Filter
Select whether or not to limit the IPv6 addresses that can access the machine.
224
Note • [IPv6 - IP Filter] applies to all features using TCP/IP, such as Print, Store to Folder, Web Applications
services (ApeosPort Series Models only), and CentreWare Internet Services.
• To set the IPv6 addresses that the machine accepts connection from, use [IP Filtering] in
CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet
Services or refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.335).
• When [IP Filtering] is enabled, make sure to switch the FTP transfer mode to [Active Mode] to
transfer the scanned image from the machine via FTP. You can switch the FTP transfer mode from
Ping Connection Test (Type 2 (T2) model only)

Allows you to confirm whether the machine connects your computer properly or not with the
configured condition. Set the following setting and then select the [Start] button to start
Ping connection test.
 Network Interface
Select [Ethernet 1] or [Ethernet 2] according to the protocol settings.
Note • This item is displayed only when Secondary Ethernet (optional) is installed on the machine.
 Protocol
Tools
Select [IPv4] or [IPv6] according to the protocol settings.
 IP Address or Host Name

Enter the IP address or host name. When using IP address, enter the IPv4 address or IPv6
5
address. When using host name, enter the host name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name

Set the e-mail address, host name, and domain name of the machine.
E-mail Address
Enter the E-mail address of the machine with up to 128 single-byte characters.
 When receiving E-mail via SMTP

You can set any name for the account (on the left side of @). Set the address section (on the
right side of @), with the combination of the host name and domain name. An alias cannot
be set.
Example: [email protected]
 Account name: mymail
 Host name: myhost
 Domain Name: example.com
 When receiving E-mails via POP3

Enter the POP user name (on the left side of @) and incoming POP3 mail server name in the
address section (on the right side of @). You can set an alias, such as [email protected].
Example: [email protected]
 Account name: mymail
Machine Name
Enter the machine name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
225
5 Tools
Host Name
Enter the host name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Important • When you use SMB, enter the first 15 letters of the host name.
The host name must be up to 15 single-byte characters to identify the machine properly.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name with up to 64 single-byte characters.
Proxy Server Settings

Configure the settings for a proxy server.
Configure a proxy server when using inbound/outbound access.
Important • Do not set this item unless you use services requiring proxy server settings.
Use Proxy Server

Select whether or not to use a proxy server.
Proxy Server Setup

Tools
Select the proxy server specification from [Same Proxy for All Protocols] or [Different Proxy
for Each Protocol].
5 Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server

Enter addresses not using the proxy server. You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address,
IPv6 address, and FQDN. You can use wildcards "*" for specifying the addresses.
HTTP Proxy Server Name

Enter the server name or IP address of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 255 characters are
allowed. You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.
HTTP Proxy Server Port Number

Set the HTTP proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
HTTP Proxy Server Authentication

Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTP proxy server.
HTTP Proxy Server Login Name

Enter a login name of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
HTTP Proxy Server Password

Enter a password of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
HTTPS Proxy Server Name

Enter the HTTPS proxy server name or the IP address. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You
can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.
HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number

Set the HTTPS proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
226

HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication

Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTPS proxy server.
HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name

Enter a login name of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
HTTPS Proxy Server Password

Enter a password of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
EP Proxy Server Setup

Configure the settings for a proxy server for EP connection when the EP system via the
Internet is used.
Important • Configure the settings when the EP system via the Internet is used.
For information on EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.758).
Tools
Proxy Server Setup
Select the proxy server specification from [Same Proxy for All Protocols] or [Different Proxy
for Each Protocol]. When [Different Proxy for Each Protocol] is selected, you can configure 5
the HTTPS proxy server and HTTP proxy server, respectively. When [Same Proxy for All
Protocols] is selected, the settings for the HTTPS proxy server are copied to those of the
HTTP proxy server.
HTTPS Proxy Server Name

Enter the HTTPS proxy server name or the IP address. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You
can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.
HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number

Set the HTTPS proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication

Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTPS proxy server.
HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name

Enter a login name of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
HTTPS Proxy Server Password

Enter a password of the HTTPS proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
HTTP Proxy Server Name

Enter the server name or IP address of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 255 characters are
allowed. You can specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.
227
5 Tools
HTTP Proxy Server Port Number

Set the HTTP proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
HTTP Proxy Server Authentication

Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTP proxy server.
HTTP Proxy Server Login Name

Enter a login name of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
HTTP Proxy Server Password

Enter a password of the HTTP proxy server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
SIP Settings
Configure the settings for a SIP user ID, SIP server to go through, and VoIP gateway.
Tools
In [SIP Settings], you can set the following items.
SIP User ID (Sign-in Name)

5 Enter the SIP user name of the machine.
For example: [email protected]
The left side of @ (111 in this example) is called the SIP user name.
Note • If you do not use a SIP server, specify the IP address of the machine on the right side of "@".
• When you use a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc. for [SIP User Name] of the machine,
you can use only IPv4 address strings of the SIP server on the right side of "@". You cannot use IPv6
address strings, FQDN strings, and SIP domain name strings.
SIP Transport Protocol

Select the SIP transport protocol from [UDP] or [TCP].
Note • Select [UDP] when you use a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Enable SIP Server

Select whether or not to enable a SIP server.
SIP Server IP Address Resolution

Specify a method for obtaining the IP address for the SIP proxy server and the SIP registrar
server.
Note • Even when IP addresses can be resolved automatically using [DHCP] or [DHCP v6], port number,
login user name, login password, and server type cannot be resolved automatically. Configure these
items manually.
• When you select [DHCP] to automatically obtain the IP address, select [DHCP] or [DHCP/AutoIP] for
[IPv4 - IP Address Resolution] of the TCP/IP settings of the machine.
• If an IP address is resolved automatically, the same IP address is assigned to both a proxy server and
a registrar server. If you use different IP addresses for the proxy server and the registrar server,
configure the IP addresses manually.
If multiple IP addresses are resolved automatically, assign the first IP address to a primary proxy/
registrar server and the second to a secondary proxy/registrar server. The third and subsequent
addresses are not used.
• Even when the IP address is resolved automatically, the port number, login user name, login
password, and server type cannot be automatically obtained. Set these manually.
228
 DHCP
The SIP proxy server IP address and the SIP registrar server IP address will be automatically
retrieved from DHCP.
 DHCP v6
The IPv6 address for the SIP proxy server and the IPv6 address for the SIP registrar server
will be automatically retrieved from the DHCPv6 server.
 STATIC
Allows you to manually enter the IP addresses for the SIP proxy server and the SIP registrar
server.
SIP Proxy Server Setup

Configure SIP proxy server settings. You can set a primary server and a secondary server.
Note • You can use up to two SIP proxy servers.
• Select [Cisco] for a server type.
 Primary Server - IP Address

Enter the IP address of the primary server. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You can specify
the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.
Tools
 Primary Server - Port Number
Set the primary server port number from 1 to 65535. 5
 Primary Server - Login User Name

Enter the login user name of the primary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
 Primary Server - Login Password

Enter the login password of the primary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
 Primary Server Type

Select the type of primary server from [Standard] or [Cisco].
 Secondary Server - IP Address

Enter the IP address of the secondary server. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You can
specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.
 Secondary Server - Port Number

Set the secondary server port number from 1 to 65535.
 Secondary Server - Login User Name

Enter the login user name of the secondary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
 Secondary Server - Login Password

Enter the login password of the secondary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
 Secondary Server Type

Select the type of secondary server from [Standard] or [Cisco].
229
5 Tools
SIP Registrar Server Setup

Configure SIP registrar server settings. You can set a primary server and a secondary server.
Note • You can use up to two SIP registrar servers.
• Select [Cisco] for a server type.
 Primary Server IP Address

Enter the IP address of the primary server. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You can specify
the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

Set the primary server port number from 1 to 65535.
 Primary Server - Login User Name

Enter the login user name of the primary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
 Primary Server - Login Password

Enter the login password of the primary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
 Primary Server Type

Tools
Select the type of primary server from [Standard] or [Cisco].
5  Secondary Server IP Address

Enter the IP address of the secondary server. Up to 255 characters are allowed. You can
specify the addresses by IPv4 address, IPv6 address, and FQDN.

 Secondary Server - Login User Name

Enter the login user name of the secondary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
Secondary Server - Login Password
 Secondary Server - Login Password

Enter the login password of the secondary server. Up to 31 characters are allowed.
 Secondary Server Type

Select the type of secondary server from [Standard] or [Cisco].
VoIP Gateway Setup

You can configure the following settings for VoIP Gateway 1 to 50.
You can also configure different VoIP gateways by a recipient’s telephone number.
Note • To use a fixed VoIP gateway, do not register the ID, and specify only the IP address for VoIP
Gateway 1.
• You cannot use a VoIP gateway in an IPv6 network.
 ID
Specify a number to identify the recipients’ telephone numbers.
If you specify "03", this VoIP gateway is used for the telephone numbers beginning with "03"
such as "0312345678" and "0312345679".
230
Note • If you specify a specific telephone number, specify the entire telephone number such as
"0312345678".
 Gateway Address
Enter the IP address of the VoIP gateway.
T.38 Settings
Configure the settings for T.38.
T.38 Transport Protocol

Select T.38 transport protocol from [TCP] or [UDP].
Note • When you use VoIP gateway manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., select [UDP].
UDPTL Listening Port Number

Set the UDPTL listening port number from 1 to 65535.
TCP Listening Port Number
Tools
Set the TCP listening port number from 1 to 65535.
5
RTP Listening Port Number
Set the RTP listening port number from 1 to 65535.
Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1), Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)

(Type 2 (T2) model only)
Set the priority of IP packet transmission from 0 to 255.
Note • The value set varies depending on your environment. Consult your network administrator.
• Set the value already specified by the network side. If you set other values, the priority does not
change.
(For most of Cisco® routers, speech traffic is set to 184(ef). If you change the value, consult your
network administrator.)
Ethernet interface is used, [Prioritize IP Packets] is displayed. When two Ethernet interfaces are used,
[Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1)] and [Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)] are displayed.
Name], the specified names are displayed instead of "Ethernet1" and "Ethernet2" of [Prioritize IP
Packets (Ethernet 1)] and [Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2)] respectively.
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings

Set e-mail transmission and reception settings.
POP3 Server Settings

Set the POP3 server. In [POP3 Server Settings], you can set the following items:
Note • For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to
255.
• For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a
hexadecimal value.
231
5 Tools
• When you make an entry mistake, press the <C> (Clear) button and enter again.
 Server Name/IP Address

Enter a server name or IP address with up to 128 characters, and then select [Save].
 Port Number
Enter a port number from 1 to 65535.
 Polling Interval
Set the interval for checking the e-mail on the POP3 server from 1 to 120 minutes in 1
minute increments.
 Login Name
Enter the name to login to the POP3 server with up to 64 characters.
 Password
Enter a password for the POP3 server with up to 64 characters.
Tools
Enter the same password in [New Password] and [Retype Password] using the numeric
keypad displayed by selecting [Keyboard]. If you do not set the password, leave the text
boxes blank and select [Save].
5  POP Password Encryption
Select [On (APOP)] to encrypt the password.
SMTP Server Settings

Set the SMTP server. In [SMTP Server Settings], you can set the following items:
255.
hexadecimal value.
• When you make an entry mistake, press the <C> (Clear) button and enter again.
 SMTP Server Name/IP Address

Enter a server name or IP address, and then select [Save]. Up to 128 characters are allowed.
 SMTP Server Port Number

Enter a port number in the range from 1 to 65535.
 E-mail Send Authentication

Select one from [Off], [POP before SMTP], or [SMTP AUTH].
Note • If [POP before SMTP] is selected, the POP3 settings must be set.
• AUTH GSSAPI (only for Kerberos), AUTH NTLMv2, AUTH NTLMv1, AUTH PLAIN, AUTH-LOGIN, or
AUTH CRAM-MD5 can be used as an authentication method.
 Login Credentials for E-mail Send

Select the login user name when sending e-mails from [Remotely Authenticated User] and
[System]. When [Remotely Authenticated User] is selected and if the machine tries
authenticating the remote server before a job startup, the machine performs verification at
232
the time of transmission with the remotely authenticated user name and password. You can
also select the post-failure behavior of the machine from [Cancel E-mail Send] and [Relogin
using System Data]. If you do not set remote authentication, the machine uses the user ID
and passcode of the machine for authentication.
 SMTP AUTH Login Name

Enter the user name for verification purposes at the SMTP server with up to 64 characters.
 SMTP AUTH Password

Enter the password for verification purposes at the SMTP server. Up to 64 single-byte
characters are allowed.
Note • If you do not set the password, leave the text boxes blank and select [Save].
Remote Authentication/Directory Service

You can make the settings for the remote authentication server and directory service.
Note • DocuCentre series models can only support the services associated with searches for Address Book
of "LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.234).
Authentication System Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
Tools
 Authentication System
Allows you to select the authentication system from [Kerberos (Windows 2000)], [Kerberos
(Solaris)], [LDAP], [SMB], and [Authentication Agent].
5
After you change the authentication system, folders and job flow sheets used with the
previous authentication system are not deleted automatically. If these folders or job flow
sheets are no longer needed, delete them from the machine. If the same user IDs are also
used on the new authentication system, folders and job flow sheets can be used by the same
users.
 Server Response Time-Out

Set the server time-out response between 1 and 75 seconds in 1 second increments.
 Search Time-Out
Set the user information search time-out between 1 and 120 seconds in 1 second
increments.
Kerberos Server Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Configure the Kerberos Servers 1 to 5.
The settings in [Kerberos Server 1 (Default)] will be the default settings for authentication.
 Primary Server Name/Address

Enter the primary server name or IP address.
255.
hexadecimal value.

Set the primary server port number from 1 to 65535.
233
5 Tools
 Secondary Server Name/Address

Enter the secondary server name or IP address.
255.
hexadecimal value.

Set the secondary server port number in the range from 1 to 65535.
 Domain Name
When you use Active Directory of Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server® 2003, Windows
Server 2008, or Windows Server 2012 as server, specify the domain name of Active Directory
in [Domain Name]. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
Important • Enter a realm name in uppercase characters. Otherwise, an authentication error occurs.
 Server Certificate Verification

Tools
Select whether or not to verify a server certificate.
LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

5 Configure the directory server, authentication method, and search attributes and ranges for
LDAP authentication and the Address Book search by LDAP.
 Primary Server Name/Address

Enter the primary server name or IP address.
255.
hexadecimal value.

Set the Primary server port number from 1 to 65535.
 Secondary Server Name/Address

Enter the secondary server name or IP address.
Note • For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value 0 to 255.
hexadecimal value.

 Authentication Method
Select a method to perform LDAP authentication from [Direct Authentication] and
[Authentication of User Attributes].
234
 Direct Authentication
User ID and password entered by a user are used for LDAP authentication.

Authentication of User Attributes
The user ID entered is used as an attribute specified in [Attribute of Typed User Name] to
perform a search on the LDAP server. [Attribute of Login User Name] of a user found
through the search is used as the user ID of a job and the owner of a job flow sheet and
a folder.
 Attribute of Typed User Name

When [Authentication of User Attributes] is used for LDAP authentication, set the attribute
of the user ID entered. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Set the attribute of the User Attribute information registered on the LDAP server that
corresponds to the value to be entered as the user name from the control panel. For
example, when you want a user to enter the mail address, set "mail."
 Attribute of Login User Name

Enter an attribute to be used for LDAP authentication using User Attribute information
registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
 Use Added Text String
Tools
Select whether or not to automatically add text strings in [Text String Added to User Name]
when you enter the authentication information from the control panel.
 Text String Added to User Name 5

Enter text strings for [Text String Added to User Name] when you use additional text strings.
Up to 64 characters are allowed.
When [Use Added Text String] is set to [Enabled], enter the corresponding fixed text string.
For Example:
When "mail" is set for [Attribute of Typed User Name] and the information registered for the
target user is "[email protected]," you will need to enter
"[email protected]".
However, if [Use Added Text String] is set to [Enabled] and "@myhost.example.com" is
specified for [Text String Added to User Name], you will only need to enter "mail" from the
control panel because the machine adds "@myhost.example.com" to the end of the string.
 Attribute of Smart Card (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

When a smart card is used for LDAP authentication, set the attribute of the card ID to
perform a search on the LDAP server to authenticate the user who has the card. Up to 32
characters are allowed.
Note • This item is displayed when [Passcode Entry for Smart Card Login] under [Tools] > [Authentication/
Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Passcode Policy] is set to [Off].
 Network User ID Attribute (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

When a smart card is used for LDAP authentication, set the attribute of the user name to be
used for a smart card ID search. The user name is given to the remote service as the
authentication information. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Note • This item is displayed when [Smart Card Link Mode] under [Tools] > [Authentication/Security
Settings] > [Authentication] > [User Details Setup] is set to [No Passcode Required].
 Login Credentials to Search Entries

Select which users are allowed to search the Address Book.
You can select from [Remotely Authenticated User] and [System].
235
5 Tools
 Login Name
Set a user name for the Address Book search and access to the directory server using
[Authentication of User Attributes] method for LDAP authentication. Set this item only
when authentication is required for the search for the directory service. Up to 255 characters
are allowed.
 Password
Set a login password for the user specified in [Login Name]. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
 Search Directory Root

Enter a search root character string with up to 255 characters.
 Scope of Search from Root Entry

Select the search range from the root entry.

Root entry only
- Searches the root level only.
 One level below root entry only
- Searches from the root level to one level below the root level.
 All levels below root entry
Tools
- Searches from the root level to all lower levels below the root level.
5  Object Class of Search Target

Enter the object class to search with up to 32 characters.
 LDAP Referrals
Specify whether or not to re-establish connection to another LDAP server if a currently
connected LDAP server requests to do so.
 LDAP Referral Hop Limit

When using the Referral feature, specify how many times that a user is allowed to hop
servers within 1 to 5 times.
 LDAP Server
Select the software used by the directory server from [Microsoft Active Directory], [Microsoft
Exchange], [IBM Lotus Domino 6.*], and [Other Applications].
 Search Entries by Common Name

Set whether or not to use [Attribute Type of Name] as a search entry when a name is used
as a search key.
 Search Entries by Surname

Set whether or not to use [Attribute Type of Surname] when a name is used as a search key.
 Search Entries by Given Name

Set whether or not to use [Attribute Type of Given Name] when a name is used as a search
key.
 Attribute Type of Name

Set the recipient name attribute type. Enter a field attribute name to be used as a recipient
name from user information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
For Windows, enter "cn" for an attribute name used as a recipient name.
236
 Attribute Type of Surname

Set the sender's family name attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
 Attribute Type of Given Name

Set the sender's first name attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
 Attribute Type of E-mail Address

Set the e-mail address attribute type. Enter a field attribute name to be used as e-mail
information from the user information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters
are allowed. For Windows, enter "mail" for an attribute name used as e-mail information.
 Attribute Type of Fax Number

Set the fax number attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
 Attribute Type of IP Fax (SIP) Number

Set a field attribute name that is used as IP fax (SIP) number information from the user
information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
 Attribute Type of E-mail (Internet Fax)

Set the Internet fax address attribute type. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Tools
 Attribute Type of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3
Set the LDAP attribute type of custom items 1 to 3. In addition to [Attribute Type of Name]
and [Attribute Type of E-mail Address], you can assign user attributes registered on the 5
LDAP server for a search. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
 Attribute Name of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3

Set the attribute names assigned to custom items 1 to 3. Up to 16 single-byte characters are
allowed.
 Attribute Type of Certificate

Set the certificate attribute type. Select and enter the field name to use as a certificate from
among the user information registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 single-byte characters
are allowed.
For Windows, enter "userCertificate;binary" for an attribute name used as certificate
information. The information is used as an S/MIME certificate when you specify an address
using the directory service to encrypt e-mail transmission by S/MIME.
Note • To encrypt communications using this feature, a trusted root certificate authority and all
intermediate certificate authorities that are registered in the path of a certificate to use must be
registered.
 Maximum Number of Search Results

Set a maximum number of address to display from search results from 5 to 100. If the
search results exceed the maximum, the search stops at the maximum number set. The
default value is 50.
 Search Time-Out
Select whether or not to set a search time-out. Set the value from 5 to 120 seconds in 1
second increments.
SMB Server Settings

Set the following items to use SMB server as a remote authentication server.
237
5 Tools
 SMB Server Setup

Select the server specification method from [By Domain Name] and [By Domain & Server
Names/IP Address].
According to the option you selected here, set [Domain Name] and [Server Name/IP
Address] for SMB servers 1 to 5 respectively. The setting for SMB server 1 is used as the
default setting for authentication.
 Domain Name
Enter the domain name of the server. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
This setting is mandatory regardless of the SMB server specification method selected for
[SMB Server Setup].
Important • Use the NetBIOS or Active Directory domain name for the domain name.
 Server Name/IP Address

Enter the server name or IP address.
This setting is valid when [SMB Server Setup] is set to [By Domain & Server Names/IP
Address].
Important • Use the NetBIOS computer name or full computer name with DNS suffix for the server name.
• For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to
Tools
255.
5 Security Settings
Set the security settings.
SSL/TLS Settings
Configure the SSL/TLS settings to encrypt the communication between the server or the
client computer and the machine.
Enabling SSL/TLS protects the communication from an unauthorized access and prevents
information leakage or data falsification.
 Device Certificate - Server

Select a certificate for HTTP SSL/TLS communications.
 HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication

Select whether or not to enable HTTP SSL/TLS communications.
 HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number

Set the port number used for HTTP SSL/TLS communication from 1 to 65535.
 LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication

Set whether or not to enable the SSL/TLS communications for authentication and searches.
If you enable the LDAP SSL/TLS communications, you must set [Primary Server - Port
Number] and [Secondary Server - Port Number] under [LDAP Server/Directory Service
Settings].
The port number for SSL/TLS communications of the LDAP directory server is normally set
to 636.
238
 SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication
Configure the SSL/TLS communications.
 Disabled
The machine does not communicate in SSL/TLS.
 STARTTLS (If Available)
The machine verifies the certificate and communicates in SSL/TLS. If the verification fails,
the machine does not communicate in SSL/TLS.
 STARTTLS
The machine verifies the certificate and communicates in SSL/TLS. If the verification fails,
the machine cannot perform communication.
 SSL/TLS
The machine communicates in SSL/TLS.
Note • The Internet Fax Direct (P2P) feature does not support SMTP-SSL/TLS communication.
 ThinPrint-SSL/TLS Communication
Select whether or not to enable the SSL/TLS communications.
Tools
 Device Certificate - Client
Select a certificate for HTTP SSL/TLS communications.
 Verify Remote Server Certificate 5

When the machine is operated as an SSL client, select whether or not to verify the certificate
of the remote server.
S/MIME Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Configure the S/MIME settings to use encryption or signature option on the transmission of
e-mail or fax.
 Device Certificate - S/MIME

Select a certificate for S/MIME communications.
For more information on the certificate, refer to "Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" (P.409).
 S/MIME Communication
Select whether or not to enable S/MIME communications.
 Receive Untrusted E-mail

If you select [No], the machine does not receive the following e-mail:
 E-mails other than e-mail sent by S/MIME when [S/MIME Communication] is set to
[Enabled].
 E-mails that fail to attach a signature or verification.
 E-mails that are attached with an expired certificate.
 Receive Untrusted Internet Fax

If you select [No], the machine does not receive the following Internet fax:
 Internet faxes other than the Internet fax sent by S/MIME when [S/MIME
Communication] is set to [Enabled].

Internet faxes that fail to attach a signature or verification.
239
5 Tools
 Internet faxes that are attached with an expired certificate.
 Message Digest Algorithm

Select a message digest algorithm. Select from [SHA-1], [MD5] and [SHA-256].
 Message Encryption Method

Set the encryption method for mail contents. Select from [3DES], [RC2-40], [RC2-64], [RC2-
128], [AES-128], [AES-192], and [AES-256].
 Split Encrypted E-mail

Select whether or not to split an outgoing encrypted e-mail for each recipient.
 Split Encrypted Internet Fax

Select whether or not to split an outgoing encrypted Internet fax for each recipient.
 Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail

Select whether or not to always add a digital signature to outgoing e-mails. You can also
select the setting in which the machine asks to add a digital signature to the e-mail
whenever you send.
Tools
 Signing Certificate for E-mail Attachment

Select the certificate to use for attaching a signature to e-mails.
5  Digital Signature - Outgoing Internet Fax

Select whether or not to always add a digital signature to outgoing Internet faxes. You can
also select the setting in which the machine asks to add a digital signature to the Internet
fax whenever you send.
 Certificate Auto Store

Select whether or not to automatically store an S/MIME certificate attached with the e-mail
when receiving e-mail from an address registered on the Address Book.
PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Configure signature settings of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS documents.
Note • XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
 Device Certificate
Select a certificate to use for the signature.
For more information on the certificate, refer to "Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" (P.409).
 PDF Signature
Select the setting for PDF signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add visible
signature], [Always add invisible signature], or [Select during send].
 PDF Signature Hash Algorithm

Select the setting for PDF Signature Hash Algorithm from [SHA-1] or [SHA-256].
 DocuWorks Signature
Select the setting for DocuWorks signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add
signature], or [Select during send].
Important • The DocuWorks documents with DocuWorks signature are available on the following versions of
DocuWorks software.
- When [SHA-1] is selected: DocuWorks 5.0 or later
240
 XPS Signature
Select the setting for XPS Signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add invisible
IPsec
Note • This item is not displayed when Secondary Ethernet (optional) is installed on the machine. (Type 2
(T2) model only)
 IPsec Settings
Configure the IPsec settings to use encryption or signature option on the transmission of e-
mail or fax.
Note • For [IKE Authentication Method], [Preshared Key], [DH Group], and [PFS Settings], consult your
network administrator.
 IKE Authentication Method
Set the IKE authentication method. Select from [Authenticate by Preshared Key] or
[Authenticate by Digital Signature].
 Preshared Key
Tools
Enter a preshared key. This setting is valid when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to
[Authenticate by Preshared Key].

Device Certificate
5
Select a certificate for IPsec communications.
Select a certificate when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital
Signature]. A self-signed certificate created by CentreWare Internet Services cannot be
used.
For more information on a certificate, refer to "Types of Certificate" (P.410).
 IPsec Communication
Select whether or not to enable IPsec communications.

IKE SA Life Time
Specify IKE SA lifetime from 5 to 28800 minutes in 1 minute increments.
Note • The value must be greater than the value set in [IPsec SA Life Time].
 IPsec SA Life Time
Specify IPsec SA lifetime from 300 to 172800 seconds in 1 second increments.
Note • The value must be smaller than the value set in [IKE SA Life Time].

DH Group
Set DH group. Select from [G1] or [G2].

PFS Settings
Select whether or not to enable PFS.
 Destination IPv4 Address
Set the IPv4 address of the destination.
When entering an IP address, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where
"xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to 255.

Destination IPv6 Address
Set the IPv6 address of the destination.
241
5 Tools
When entering an IP address, enter the address in the format

"xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where "xxxx" is a hexadecimal value.

Communicate with Non-IPsec Devices
Select whether or not to communicate with non-IPSec devices.
IEEE 802.1X Settings / IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 1), IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet
2) (Type 2 (T2) model only)
Note • When both of the [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 1)] setting and the [TCP/IP - Network
Settings (Ethernet 2)] setting are configured, you can configure individual IEEE802.1X settings for
each Ethernet interface.
Ethernet interface is used, [IEEE 802.1X Settings] is displayed. When two Ethernet interfaces are
used, [IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 2)] are displayed.
Name], the specified names are displayed instead of "Ethernet1" and "Ethernet2" of [IEEE 802.1X
Settings (Ethernet 1)] and [IEEE 802.1X Settings (Ethernet 2)] respectively.
 IEEE 802.1X Settings

Configure the IEEE 802.1X settings.

IEEE 802.1X
Tools
Set whether or not to use IEEE 802.1X authentication.

 Authentication Method
5 Select from [EAP-MD5], [EAP-MS-CHAPv2], [PEAP/MS-CHAPv2], or [EAP-TLS].

Login User Name
Enter the login user name with up to 128 characters.
 Login Password
Enter the login password with up to 128 characters.

Server Certificate Verification
Select whether or not to verify a server certificate when [PEAP/MS-CHAPv2] is selected in
[Authentication Method].
Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings

Configure the settings for certificate revocation retrieval.
 Level of Certificate Verification

Select a level of certificate verification from [Low], [Medium], or [High].
Selecting [Low] does not verify the validity of certificates.
Selecting [Medium] verifies the validity of certificates. If a certificate cannot be verified
because of a network error or any other problems, the certificate is determined as valid.
Selecting [High] verifies the validity of certificates, and determines only certificates that
have not been revoked as valid.
 Retrieval of Certificate Status

Select the method to verify the validity of certificates. Select [By Retrieving CRL] if the
machine retrieves a CRL (Certificate Revocation List) from the validation authority to verify
the revocation status of the certificate. Select [By OSCP] if the machine uses OSCP (Online
Certificate Status Protocol), which can verify the validity revocation status of the certificate,
to have the certificate authority or validation authority check the revocation status.
242
 Auto Retrieval of CRL

Select whether or not to automatically retrieve a CRL.
 CRL Retrieval Time-Out

Specify a time-out value to retrieve a CRL from 5 to 60 seconds in 1 second increments.
 Send Query to OCSP Responder With

Select how to access an OCSP responder from [URL as Specified in Certificate] or [URL as
Specified by Administrator].
 URL of OCSP Responder

Enter the URL of an OCSP responder when [URL as Specified by Administrator] has been
selected for [Send Query to OCSP Responder With]. Up to 255 characters are allowed.
 OCSP Communication Time-Out

Specify a time-out value for OCSP communication from 5 to 60 seconds in 1 second
increments.
Other Settings
Tools
You can set the following network related items:
Protocol to Receive E-mail 5

Select from [SMTP] and [POP3] depending on your environment.
Add Domain Name to User Name

Select whether or not to add domain names to user names.
Output Destination for E-mail

Specify an output destination for e-mail print. Selecting [Auto] enables the machine to
select the output destination, which is set as the default output destination.
Domain Filtering
Set the domain filtering settings for the E-mail, Internet Fax, and IP fax (SIP) features.
 Domain Filtering
When [Allow Domains] is selected, you can specify domains to permit transmissions. When
[Block Domains] is selected, you can specify domains to prohibit transmissions.
 Domains 1 to 50
When [Domain Filtering] is set to [Allow Domains] or [Block Domains], you can specify up to
50 domains to allow or block transmissions.
Selecting [Change Settings] allows you to enter the domain name using a keyboard
displayed with up to 64 characters.
243
5 Tools
Print Service Settings
In [Print Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Print feature.
Using CentreWare Internet Services, you can make more detailed settings.
For more information, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.335).

Allocate Memory.......................................................................................................................................................................... 244
Delete Form................................................................................................................................................................................... 245
Other Settings............................................................................................................................................................................... 246
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Print Service Settings].
Allocate Memory
Tools
For each interface, set the memory capacity of the receiving buffer (temporary storage for
data sent from the client).
5 You can change the receiving buffer capacity according to its use and purpose. Increasing
the receiving buffer capacity may allow a client to be released sooner from an interface.
Important • If you change the capacity memory, the memory is reset, thus all data stored in memory area is
erased.
• You cannot allocate more memory beyond its memory capacity. When you turn the machine on,
and the size set exceeds the total memory size, the system automatically adjusts the memory size.
Note • When a port is set to [Disabled], the corresponding items to the port do not appear.
• Depending on the amount of data sent from the client, increasing the memory capacity may not
change the time taken to release the client.
PostScript Memory
Specify a value for the PostScript memory capacity in 0.25 MB increments.
• The maximum amount of memory you can allocate varies according to the amount of free space
available in memory.
ART IV, ESC/P, 201H Form Memory

Displays where to save forms for use with ESC/P-K.
HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory

Set the working memory area when HP-GL/2 auto layout memory is used. When the hard
disk is installed, the area is fixed to the hard disk. When the hard disk is not installed, specify
the area for working memory.
Job Ticket Memory

Specify the amount of memory to use for job tickets from 0.25 to 8.00 MB in 0.25 MB
increments.
244
Note • The maximum amount of memory you can allocate varies according to the amount of free space
available in memory.
Receiving Buffer - Parallel

Set the receiving buffer for parallel.
You can specify a value from 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments.
Receiving Buffer - USB

Set the receiving buffer for USB.
You can specify a value from 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments.
Receiving Buffer - LPD

Note • You may not be able to change the [Receiving Buffer - LPD] setting because of the setting of [LPD
Print Queue].
For more information on LPD Print Queue, refer to "LPD Print Queue" (P.249).
 No Spooling
Does not use spooling. While LPD printing is performed for one client, data cannot be
received over the same interface from another client.
Tools
Specify a value for the dedicated LPD receiving buffer memory capacity from 1024 to 2048
KB in 32 KB increments.
 Spool to Memory
Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this setting is
5
selected, specify the memory capacity of a receiving buffer for spooling from 0.50 MB to
32.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments.
Note that print data exceeding the memory capacity set is not accepted. In such cases,
select [Spool to Hard Disk] or [No Spooling].
 Spool to Hard Disk

Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.
Receiving Buffer - IPP
 No Spooling
Does not use spooling. While IPP printing is performed for one client, data cannot be
received over the same interface from another client.
Specify a value for the dedicated IPP receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1024 KB
in 32 KB increments.
 Spool to Hard Disk

Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.
Receiving Buffer - Port 9100

Set the Port9100 receiving buffer.
Specify a value from 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments.
Delete Form
You can delete registered ESC/P-K forms.
1 Select [Delete Form].
245
5 Tools
2 Select the print mode to delete forms.

3 Enter the form number with the numeric
keypad, and select [Confirm].
 ESC/P
Deletes ESC/P-K emulation forms.
 Form Number
When you select an item to delete, you can
enter the form number.
 Form Name
After you enter the form number and select [Confirm], the form name matching the form
number entered appears.
4 Check the form name, and then select [Delete Data].
Other Settings
Tools
You can configure other settings related to the paper used in the printer.
5 Print Area
Set whether or not to expand the print area.
For more information about the printable area, refer to "Printable Area" (P.653).
Substitute Tray
When there is no tray containing the paper size selected by the Auto Paper selection, select
whether or not to print with paper loaded in another paper tray. In the event of using a
substitute tray, select the paper size from [Use Larger Size], [Use Closest Size], or [Select Tray
5].
Note • When documents are printed using emulation such as ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2, the substitute tray
setting is not valid and a message prompting you to load paper displayed on the screen.
 Display Message
Does not use a substitute tray, but displays a paper loading message.
 Use Larger Size

Switches to the next larger size of paper than previously selected and prints at the same
magnification.
 Use Closest Size

Switches to the closest size of paper to previously selected and prints. If necessary, the
image is automatically reduced in size on the paper.
Note • If there is a client specification, the client specification is prioritized.
 Select Tray 5
Prints using the paper loaded in Tray 5.
246
Paper Type Mismatch

Set an action to take when the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match the
paper type specified when a print job is submitted.
 Print
Prints using the paper loaded in the tray.
 Display Confirmation Screen

A confirmation screen appears to ask whether or not to print the job.
If a paper type mismatch occurs during printing, the machine ignores the paper type
specified and prints the job in accordance with [Paper Tray Priority], [Paper Size], or
[Substitute Tray].
For more information, refer to "Automatic Tray Selection" (P.62).
 Display Paper Supply Screen

Load another type of paper in the selected tray by following the message displayed on the
touch screen, and then select the [Start] button. The machine changes the paper type
setting for the tray and prints the job.
Note • The machine keeps the changed paper type setting after the printing.
• Even if you select the [Start] button without loading another type of paper in the selected tray, the
Tools
machine considers the paper type has been changed and prints the job. Consequently, the print
quality cannot be guaranteed because the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match the
paper type specified.
5
Unregistered Forms
Set whether or not to print a job if a form specified for printing in a form data file (overlay
printing) is not registered on the machine. If you specify [Print], only the data is printed
because the specified form is not present.
Resume Job After Print Error

Set whether or not to automatically cancel a print job when the print job was suspended
because of an error.
Note • The machine will enter the off-line state to restrict subsequent print jobs.
 Job Resumes Automatically

Automatically cancels the print job to print subsequent jobs.
 Resume by User
Displays a confirmation screen before cancelling the print job. After the confirmation, the
machine cancels the print job to print the subsequent jobs.
Important • When [Resume by User] is selected, pressing <interrupt> button to suspend printing temporarily will
not work.
When Paper Jam Occurs

Specify how the machine handles print jobs after a paper jam is cleared.
 Resume Job after Jam Clearance

When a paper jam is cleared, the machine automatically resumes printing from the next
page of the page which was output correctly.
 Delete Job
The machine cancels printing and removes the print job.
247
5 Tools
Note • For print files stored in a folder such as Charge Print, Private Charge Print, Secure Print, and Sample
Print, the machine resumes printing after the paper jam is cleared.
Print User ID
When printing using a print driver, specify whether or not to print user ID set in the print
driver on paper. The first 64 letters of the user ID are printed.
Select a position to print from [Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left], and [Bottom Right].
Note • To use the Print user ID feature, the user ID must be set in the print driver beforehand. For more
information, refer to the help of the print driver.
• When user ID set in the print driver is not available, "Unknown User" is printed.
Banner Sheet
You can output a banner sheet to separate different jobs by users not to be mixed the
outputs. The machine outputs the banner sheet before or after the job.
A date, time, user name, and file name are printed on the banner sheet.
Note • Even if stapling is selected, banner sheets are not stapled.
• When a document is printed from a Macintosh, the document name is not printed on the banner
sheet.
• When printed, banner sheets are counted by meter.
Tools
 Off
Does not print banner sheets.
5  Start Sheet
Prints a banner sheet before a print job.
 End Sheet
Prints a banner sheet after a print job.
 Start Sheet & End Sheet

Prints a banner sheet before and after a print job.
 Allow Print Driver to Override

Select the check box to print a banner sheet according to the banner sheet print settings of
the print driver.
Banner Sheet Offset

Set whether or not to offset when banner sheets are output.
Banner Sheet Tray

Select a paper tray used for banner sheets.
This setting applies to Trays 1 to 4 and 6 (optional). You cannot apply this setting to Tray 5.
PostScript Default Color

Set the default value for Post Script output color.
248
PostScript Paper Supply

Select whether the PostScript Deferred Media Selection feature is enabled or disabled when
the paper tray is selected. Select [Auto Select] to enable the PostScript Deferred Media
Selection feature, or [Select Paper Tray] to disable the feature.
When PostScript data generated by other than the print driver is printed, the tray is not
selected as intended depending on the description method of the PostScript data. In this
case, select [Select Paper Tray].
Note • Even when you select [Auto Select], the setting is automatically changed to [Select Paper Tray] when
[Use Larger Size] or [Use Closest Size] is selected for [Substitute Tray] and print PostScript data.
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
PostScript Font Absence

Set an action to take when a PostScript font specified in a job is not present.
 Cancel Printing
Cancels printing.
Tools
 Substitute Font and Print
Prints using a substitute font. Courier is used as the substitute font.
PostScript Font Substitution 5

Set whether or not to use ATCx as a substitute if a PostScript font specified in a job is not
present.
XPS Print Ticket Processing

Set how the machine processes the print tickets written in XPS documents.
 Off
Does not process print tickets.
 Standard Mode
Uses the standard mode to process print tickets.
 Compatible Mode
Uses the Microsoft®-compliant mode to process print tickets.
LPD Print Queue

Set the LPD print sequence.
Note • If you change the [LPD Print Queue] setting, the [Receiving Buffer - LPD] setting may automatically
be changed. For more information on Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool, refer to "Receiving Buffer - LPD"
(P.245).
 Data Processing Order

Prints jobs in the order of becoming print-ready status after receiving the jobs.
249
5 Tools
If you instruct the machine to print jobs of multiple documents continuously, the machine
may preferentially print a job which was sent later depending on the time for data
processing.
 Job Submission Order

Prints jobs in the order of lpr print submission.
Important • This setting is valid only when [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [Spool to Hard Disk]. When any other
setting, printing is performed in [Data Processing Order].
OCR Font Glyphs (0 x 5C)

Allows you to select [Backslash] or [Japanese Yen Sign] to print 0x5C character when the
OCR fonts are used.
Tools
250
Scan Service Settings
In [Scan Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Scan services.
• When [Scan to Fax Server] is selected in the System Settings, [Scan Service Settings] is replaced with
[Scan/Fax Service Settings].
For information on scanner environment settings, refer to "Scanner Environment Settings" (P.365).

Screen Defaults.............................................................................................................................................................................251
Scan Defaults ................................................................................................................................................................................252
Scan to PC Defaults .....................................................................................................................................................................255
Original Size Defaults ..................................................................................................................................................................255
Output Size Defaults....................................................................................................................................................................256
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..............................................................................................................................................................256
Other Settings ...............................................................................................................................................................................256
Tools
On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Scan Service Settings].

5
Screen Defaults
You can set the items that appear in the First Tab screen. The First Tab means the screen
displayed when you select the following tabs in the [E-mail], [Store to Folder], [Network
Scanning], [Scan to PC], [Store & Send Link], and [Store to USB] screens.
 The [E-mail] tab of the E-mail service

The [Store to Folder] tab of the Store to Folder service
 The [Network Scanning] tab of the Network Scanning service
 The [Scan to PC] tab of the Scan to PC service

The [Store & Send Link] tab of the Store & Send Link service

The [Store to USB] tab of the Store to USB service
Email Screen Default

Set the default screen that appears when [E-mail] on the Services Home screen is selected.
Select from [Scan Tab] and [Address Book].
Scan to PC Screen Default

Set the default screen that appears when [Scan to PC] on the Services Home screen is
selected. Select from [Scan Tab] and [Address Book].
1st Tab - Features Allocation

You can set the features that appear in the second to the fourth column of the lower part in
the First Tab screen.
251
5 Tools
Select a column by choosing from [Feature in 1st Column] to [Feature in 4th Column]. And
set the item to be displayed from [Not Selected], [Color Scanning], [2 Sided Scanning],
[Original Type], [File Format], [Resolution], [Lighten / Darken], [Reduce / Enlarge], [Mixed
Size Originals], and [Original Orientation].
Reduce/Enlarge - Buttons 2 to 5
This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected for one of the features that appear
in the second to the fourth column in [1st Tab - Features Allocation].
Select the magnification ratio displayed in [Reduce/Enlarge] from the Reduce/Enlarge
Presets registered.
For information about the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.256).
Scan Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Scan services. When the machine is turned on, or the
machine exits the Power Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the machine
resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used features and values as the
defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
The values set here become valid after the machine turned off and then on.
For more information on each setting item, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
Tools
Color Scanning
5 Set the default value for [Color Scanning] in the First Tab.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the First Tab.
File Format
Set the default value for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Optimize PDF For Quick Web View

Set the default value for [Optimize For Quick Web View] of [File Format] in the First Tab.
Thumbnail - Outgoing E-mail

For the E-mail feature, set the default value for [Add Thumbnail] when [DocuWorks] or [XPS]
is selected for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Thumbnail - Scan to PC
For the Scan to PC feature, set the default value for [Add Thumbnail] when [DocuWorks] or
[XPS] in selected for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings]
screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Advanced Settings]
screen. The contrast setting is valid when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].
252
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Background Suppression
This feature allows you to suppress the background color of documents.
Set the default value for [Background Suppression] of [Image Enhancement] in the
[Advanced Settings] screen.
Shadow Suppression
Set the default value for [Shadow Suppression] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Color Space
Set the default value for [Color Space] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Important • When [Device Color Space] is selected as default and "Color Space" (P.257) is set to [Disabled], [Auto
Detect] of [Color Scanning] in the First Tab, and [MRC High Compression] and [Specific Color] under
[File Format] do not appear.
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Tools
Resolution
Set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. 5
You can select from [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], and [600 dpi].

Edge Erase
Set the default value for [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can select from
[All Edges] and [Parallel Edges].
Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges

Set the default value for [Top & Bottom] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges

Set the default value for [Left & Right] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase

Set the default value for [Center] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Specify
a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Quality/File Size
Set the default value for [Quality/File Size] in the [Filling Options] screen.
Select from [Quality: Normal/File Size: Small], [Quality: Higher +1/File Size: Larger +1],
[Quality: Higher +2/File Size: Larger +2], [Quality: Higher +3/File Size: Larger +3], and
[Quality: Maximum/File Size: Largest].
253
5 Tools
E-mail Subject
Set the default value for the e-mail subject. Up to 128 characters can be entered for the
subject.
Store & Send Link - E-mail Subject

Set the default value for the subject used when sending an e-mail to an authenticated user
to notify the URL of the location to retrieve the scanned data. Up to 128 characters can be
entered for the subject.
For more information on the Store & Send Link feature, refer to "5 Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" > "Step 2 Selecting the
Features" in the User Guide.
E-mail Encryption
Set the default value for [Encryption] in the [E-mail Options] in the [E-mail] screen.
Note • This feature appears only when the root certificate for a remote server for remote authentication
(except for ApeosWare Authentication Management or Authentication Agent) is set.
Searchable Text
Set the default value for [Searchable Text] in the [File Format] screen under the First Tab.
Tools
Language of the Original

5 Set the default language to identify the text on a document.
Searchable - Text Compression

Set whether or not to compress searchable text when using the OCR feature.
Microsoft® Office Format Settings

Set the default value for [Page Orientation], [Image Area Format], and [Searchable Text
Font] when you store scanned documents in Microsoft® Office format.
 Page Orientation
Set whether or not to handle the character orientation to be upright when the machine
scans a document. Select from [According to Original Orientation] and [Auto Upright
Orientation].
 Image Area Format

Set the format of images in the scanned documents. Select from [AutoShapes] and [Picture
Object].
 Searchable Text Font

Set the default fonts for each languages (Japanese, Korean, Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, and English), which are used in the scanned documents.
254
Scan to PC Defaults
Transfer Protocol
Set the default value for the transfer protocol used for transfer from [FTP], [SMB], or [SMB
(UNC Format)].
Login Credential to Access Destination

Set whether or not to use a user authenticated by the remote server when the user logs in to
the destination computer for the Scan to PC service. This setting is effective for remote
authentication.
 None
Does not use the remotely authenticated user.
 Remotely Authenticated User

Uses the user name and the password of the remotely authenticated user for login.
User Name for FTP Scan

When the remotely authenticated user name is used as a login user name for FTP transfers
Tools
for the Scan to PC service, specify whether or not to include the domain part of the
credentials.
 User Name Only 5

Uses only the user name part (before "@") of the login credential for the login name. The
domain part is not used.
 Add Domain Name

Uses the full login credential name, including the domain name (after "@"), for the user
name.
Original Size Defaults

Set the document size displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You
can assign a document size to each of the 17 buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for scanning, assigning the paper sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time.
 A/B Series Size

You can select a size from A and B series sizes such as A4 and B5.
 Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11" and 11 x 17".
 Others
You can select a size from other sizes than the above series such as photo and postcard sizes.
 Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.
255
5 Tools
Output Size Defaults

Set the sizes to display in [Output Size] when selecting [Enter Output Size] for scanning
documents at [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign any output size to output size buttons. Assigning the output sizes to the
buttons will save your time to specify the size each time.
 A/B Series Size

 Inch Size
 Others
You can select a size from other sizes than the above series such as photo and postcard sizes.
Set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed when [Proportional %]
Tools
is selected under [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

You can assign any magnification to the Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons other than [100%].
5  Preset %
Select a ratio from standard magnification ratios.
 Variable %
You can specify a magnification from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the Scan services specifications.

 Delete Job
 Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and starts sending the document partially stored.

Set the maximum number of pages stored for a scan document. You can specify from 1 to
999 pages.
256
Saturation
Set the saturation when scanning a full color document. When a document is scanned,
saturation is automatically adjusted according to the value set here.
Background Suppression Level

Set the background suppression level. This is valid when [Background Suppression] is set to
[Auto Suppression].
The larger the value is, the stronger the effect of suppressing the background becomes.
Shadow Suppression Level

Set the shadow suppression level. This is valid when [Shadow Suppression] is set to [Auto
Suppression].
Color Space
Set whether or not to display the Color Space feature.
When you select [Enabled], the [Color Space] button is displayed on the [Advanced Settings]
screen for the [E-mail], [Store to Folder], [Scan to PC], and [Job Template].
Important • When [Disabled] is selected as default and [Color Space] under [Scan Defaults] is set to [Device Color
Space], [Auto Detect] of [Color Scanning] in the First Tab ([E-mail]/[Store to Folder]/[Network
Tools
Scanning]/[Scan to PC]), and [MRC High Compression] and [Specific Color] under [File Format] do
not appear. For more information on Color Space, refer to "Color Space" (P.253).
TIFF Format 5
Set the TIFF format for scanned data. You can select either [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
Image Transfer Screen

Select whether or not to display a message when the scan of a document completes.
 Disabled
Does not display a scan completion message.
 Display Message at End of Scanning

Displays a scan completion message.
 Display Scan & Transfer Screens

Displays the transfer screen after scan completion. The scan completion message is not
displayed.
 Display Message at End of Transfer

Displays a transfer completion message.
Filename Format
For the Store to Folder, Store to USB, Scan to PC, and Store & Send Link services, you can
select the file name format.
You can select [DDMMYYYYHHMMSS] or [img-MDDHHMMSS].
Note • When you select [DDMMYYYYHHMMSS], the order depends on the setting of [Date Format] in
[System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Machine Clock/Timers] > [Date].
• When you select [img-MDDHHMMSS], October, November, and December are represented by X, Y,
and Z respectively.
257
5 Tools
Add Date to E-mail Attachment Name

Set whether or not to add dates and page number after file names when E-mail is selected.
The file name depends on the setting of [Filename Format] and whether or not the file
name is automatically generated. The followings are examples of the file names:
 Enabled
 When a file name is automatically generated:
20121002023309-0001.tif or img-X02023309-0001.tif
 When a file name is specified:
Report-20121002023309-0001.tif or Report-X02023309-0001.tif
 Disabled
 When a file name is automatically generated:
20121002023309-0001.tif or img.tif

When a file name is specified:
Note • This setting is also applied to the file names of the Internet Fax service.
• When you select [DDMMYYYYHHMMSS] for [Filename Format], even if you select [Disabled], the
date is added to the file names.
Tools
Searchable - Page Orientation

5 Set whether or not to handle the character orientation to be upright when the machine
scans a document with OCR (Optical Character Recognition).
 Auto Upright Orientation

Handles the character orientation upright regardless of the document orientation.
 According to Original Orientation

Handles the character orientation depending on the document orientation.
• When you select [DDMMYYYYHHMMSS] for [Filename Format], even if you select [Disabled], the
date is added to the file names.
URL File Expiration

Set the retention period for files stored with the Store & Send Link feature. You can specify
a value from 1 to 168 hours in 1 hour increments. The default value is 3 hours.
Generation of URL Link

Set the format of URLs generated with the Store & Send Link feature. Select either [Use IP
Address] or [Use FQDN].
The following are examples of URLs:
 If [Use IP Address] is selected:

http://192.0.2.1/scanUrl/doc1/get.htm
 If [Use FQDN] is selected:

http://pc1.mycompany.co.jp/scanUrl/doc1/get.htm
258
Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size

Set the maximum data size of files that can be stored for the Store & Send Link feature. You
can specify the value from 1 to 200 MB in 1 MB increments. The default value is 200 MB.
Print Login Name on PDF Files

If scanning a document in PDF format when local machine authentication or remote
authentication is enabled, you can set whether or not to add an authentication user name
as the Author in the document properties of the PDF document.
Tools
5
259
5 Tools
Fax Service Settings
In [Fax Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Fax service.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. The items
displayed on the screen vary depending on the optional components installed. For more
• You can register new address book entries in [Add Address Book Entry] under [Setup]. For more
information, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.303).

Screen Defaults ............................................................................................................................................................................ 260
Fax Defaults .................................................................................................................................................................................. 261
Fax Control .................................................................................................................................................................................... 262
Fax Received Options.................................................................................................................................................................. 268
Reduce/Enlarge Presets.............................................................................................................................................................. 270
Original Size Defaults.................................................................................................................................................................. 270
Local Terminal Information ...................................................................................................................................................... 270
Internet Fax Control.................................................................................................................................................................... 272
Tools
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Fax Service Settings].
5
Screen Defaults
You can set items displayed on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
Fax Screen Default

Set the default screen that appears when the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen is selected in the
Select from [Fax Tab] or [Address Book].
1st Tab - Features Allocation

Set the features that appear on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
 Feature in 2nd to 4th Column

You can set the features that appear in the second to the fourth column of the lower part
on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
Select the item to be displayed from [Not Selected], [2 Sided Faxing], [Original Type],
[Resolution], [Confirmation Options], [Starting Rate], [Transmission Header], [Mixed Size
Originals], and [Reduce / Enlarge].
Reduce / Enlarge - Button 3 - 5

This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd to 4th Column].
You can set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed under [Reduce/
Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can assign any magnification to the Reduce
/ Enlarge - Button 3 - 5.
260
Transmission Screen
Set whether or not to display transmission status during transmission.
Display Fax Line Selection (Type 2 (T2) model only)

Set whether or not to enable you to select a fax line (port) on the [Fax / Internet Fax] screen.
 Display Fax Line Selection

Specify whether or not to display the [Line Selection] option on the [Fax / Internet Fax]
screen.
 Fax Line 1 - Name to Fax Line 3 - Name

Specify the names for each fax line.
Note • The number of lines displayed on the screen depends on the options installed on the machine.
Fax Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Fax services. When the machine is turned on, or the
Tools
machine exits from the Power Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the
machine resets to the default values specified under this menu. By setting frequently used
features and values as the defaults, you can simplify operations.
For more information on each setting item, refer to "4 Fax" in the User Guide.
5
Resolution
Set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.

Stamp
Set the default value for [Stamp] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Skip Blank Pages

Set the default value for [2 Sided Scanning] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] and [Layout
Adjustment] screens to [2 Sided (First Page 1 Sided)].
Note • This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
261
5 Tools
Starting Rate
Set the default value for [Starting Rate] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.
Delay Start - Specific Time

Set the default value for [Specific Time] of [Priority Send/Delay Start] in the [Fax/Internet
Fax Options] screen when [Specific Time] is selected for [Delay Start].
Transmission Header Text

Set the default value for [Transmission Header Text] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options]
screen.
Confirmation Options
Set the default value for [Confirmation Options] of [Acknowledgement Report] in the [Fax/
Internet Fax Options] screen.
Note • You can select Delivery Receipts or Read Receipts in [Delivery Confirmation Method]. For more
information on the delivery confirmation method, refer to "Delivery Confirmation Method" (P.273).
Delivery Receipts/Read Receipts

Set the default value for [Read Receipts] or [Delivery Receipt] of [Acknowledgement Report]
Tools
in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

Note • You can select Delivery Receipts or Read Receipts in [Delivery Confirmation Method]. For more
information on the delivery confirmation method, refer to "Delivery Confirmation Method" (P.273).
5
Internet Fax Profile
Set the default value for [Internet Fax Profile] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.
Internet Fax Subject

Set the default value for [Internet Fax Subject] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. Up
to 128 single-byte characters can be entered for the subject.
Internet Fax Encryption

Set the default value for [Encryption] in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.
Note • This feature appears only when the root certificate for a remote server for remote authentication
(except for ApeosWare Authentication Management or Authentication Agent) is set.
Fax Control
You can configure the settings related to fax control.
Re-enter Recipients
Set whether to re-enter the recipient after once specifying the recipient, to reduce the risk of
sending a fax, an IP fax, or an Internet fax to the wrong address. When Re-enter Recipients
is set to [Enter Twice], if you specify the recipient by entering the phone number, or by
selecting from the Address Book, the screen prompting you to re-enter the recipient appears.
If the same recipient has been entered, the transmission process will start.
Re-enter Broadcast Recipients

This setting is required when you selected [Enter Twice] for [Re-enter Recipients]. Set
whether or not to allow the Broadcast Send.
262
 Enter Once Only

Allows the Broadcast Send. No need to re-enter the recipient.
 Enter Twice
Allows the Broadcast Send. Re-entering the recipient is required.

Broadcast Disabled
No Broadcast Send is allowed.
Re-enter Speed Dial Recipients

This setting is required when you selected [Enter Twice] for [Re-enter Recipients]. Select how
to re-enter a recipient after the first entry.
 Enter Once Only
No need to re-enter the recipient.
 Enter Twice
Use the Speed Dial feature to re-enter the recipient.

Re-enter Fax Number or E-mail
You cannot enter the speed dial when you re-enter the number or address. Use the fax
Tools
number, SIP user ID (Sign-in Name), phone number or SIP user name for IP fax, or e-mail
address to enter the recipient.
Re-enter Group Recipients 5

Specifies whether you need to re-enter group addresses after entering a group address.
 Group Send Disabled
No group recipient is allowed.

Enter Once Only
No need to re-enter the group recipient.
 Enter Twice
Re-entering the group recipient is required.
Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab

Specify whether or not to show the [Enable Broadcast] checkbox in the [Fax/Internet Fax]
screen to explicitly express broadcast directions.
Chain Dial
Allows you to combine the fax numbers registered in one-touch button, speed dial, and
address book respectively and the numbers entered using the numeric keypad to specify as
one recipient. You can select from [No] or [Yes].
Note • This item is available when [Type 1] is set for [Address Book Type] under [Tools] > [Address Book
Settings].
Manual Redial List - Saved Entries

Specify the number of redial destinations saved.
Manual Redial List - Dial Mode

Specify the destination type saved as a redial destination number.
When you deselect all the check boxes, the Redial feature becomes disabled.
263
5 Tools
Transmission Header Text - Polling

Set whether or not to attach a transmission header to a polling file.
A "polling file" means that a document is stored in the machine's public folder for polling,
and can then be sent by an operation from the other party.
Polled Files - Auto Delete

Set whether or not to automatically delete a polling file after transmission.
Rotate 90 degrees
Set whether or not to automatically rotate a document if its image must be reduced in size
unless it is rotated.
Note • If an arbitrary magnification is specified in [Reduce/Enlarge], the Rotate 90 Degrees feature does
not function.
G3 Sender ID - Fax
When using G3 communications, you can select whether to notify G3 ID to recipients for
fax.
G3 Sender ID - IP Fax (SIP)

Tools
When using G3 communications, you can select whether to notify G3 ID to recipients for IP
Fax (SIP).
5 Save Undelivered Faxes
Set whether or not to save a fax document if a fax transmission fails. When [Yes] is selected,
the [Undelivered Faxes] button appears on the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab of the [Job
Status] screen. Select this button to send the fax document again.
For details on Undelivered Faxes, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" > "Undelivered Faxes" in the
User Guide.
Save Deleted Faxes

When [Yes] is selected for [Save Undelivered Faxes], set whether or not to save cancelled
faxes.
Saved Faxes - Auto Delete

When [Yes] is selected for [Save Undelivered Faxes], set whether or not to automatically
delete saved faxes in 24 hours.
Transmission Interval
Specify a value for the interval between the end of one transmission and the beginning of
the next, from 3 to 255 seconds in 1 second increments.
A longer transmission interval increases the total time to send a broadcast transmission, but
allows calls to be received during the standby time.
Batch Send
When the machine stores multiple faxes addressed to a destination, enabling the Batch
Send feature allows you to send them all at the same time in a single fax transmission. By
using this feature, you can reduce your communication costs.
Select whether or not to enable the Batch Send feature.
Note that a batch send is not available for manual transmissions, broadcasts, relay
broadcasts, remote folder, and delayed start transmission with a specified time before the
specified time. When a redial, resend, delayed start transmission job, or the Authentication
feature is used and different users send to the same address, a batch send is not possible.
264
Manual Send/Receive Default

When on-hook or off-hook is used when sending a fax, select either [Manual Receive] or
[Manual Send].
Note • This setting is not valid for IP fax (SIP) because the IP Fax feature does not offer the Manual Send/
Receive feature option.
Fax Receiving Mode

Set the default value for [Fax Receiving Mode] in the [Machine Information] screen
displayed by pressing the <Machine Status> button. Select whether or not to receive a fax
automatically or manually.
Note • As for IP fax (SIP), the machine always receives faxes automatically.
Border Limit
Set the length to make a page break that will be applied when the length of a received fax
document is longer than the paper length. You can specify a value from 0 to 127 mm in 1
mm increments.
This setting can conveniently be used together with the following Auto Reduce on Receipt
feature.
Auto Reduce On Receipt
Tools
When the length of a received fax document exceeds the paper length but is within the page
break threshold value, select whether or not to automatically reduce the image to fit the
page. 5
This setting can conveniently be used together with the Border Limit feature. If you select
[No], the part of the image beyond the paper length is ignored.
Receiving Paper Size

Set the method of notifying the paper size on which the received fax document will be
printed, from the receiver to the sender.
 Tray Mode
Specify the paper tray for printing the received fax document. Only the specified paper tray
will be used for printing the received document. Multiple paper trays can be specified except
for Tray 5. If the fax document cannot be printed on the paper loaded in the specified paper
trays, the machine displays a message stating that it will be printed on the paper loaded in
Tray 5. Load paper in Tray 5 and press the <Start> button to print the document. To cancel
printing, press the <Clear All> button.
 User Mode
Specify the paper sizes to use for printing received fax documents. Regardless of whether
the paper is loaded in the trays, only the specified size paper is used for printing. When you
select [User Mode], select paper sizes from [A3 ], [A4 ], [A4 ], [A5 ], [B4 ], [B5 ], [8.5
x 11" ], and [Select All]. You can select one or more paper sizes.
2 Pages Up On Receipt
Set whether or not to print two pages of a fax document on one side of a sheet. This is
convenient for saving paper.
For example, when two A5 pages are received, they are printed on a single A4 sheet.
However, if paper of the same paper size as the received document is specified in [Receiving
Paper Size], it is printed on the specified size of paper. Depending on the sizes of the received
document, two pages of the document may not be printed on one sheet of paper.
265
5 Tools
2 Sided Printing
Set whether or not to print received fax documents (including the Internet fax received
documents) as 2 sided. This is convenient for saving paper.
Note • Even if you select [On], depending on the data, 2 sided printing may not always be possible.
Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges

Specify the amount of edges erased from the document in the top and bottom directions.
Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges

Specify the amount of edges erased from the document in the left and right directions.
Reduce 8.5 x 11" Original to A4

When [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen is set to [Auto %], you can set
whether or not to reduce 8.5 x 11" size document to A4 , while scanning the document.
Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode

You can select a gradation expression mode. Selecting this mode enables the machine to
Tools
change the processing method for gray part (halftone) to achieve near-photo quality. Select
either [Error Diffusion] or [Dither].
Changing this setting also changes the photo gradation mode for Color Scanning (Black &
5 White).
Folder Selector by G3 ID
Set whether or not to use the Folder Selector by G3 ID feature.
The Folder Selector by G3 ID feature allows you to classify received documents according to
sender's G3ID and store them to specified.
Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID

Set whether or not to use the Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID feature.
This feature allows you to classify received documents according to sender's telephone
number (Caller ID), G3 ID, or recipient's telephone number (Dial-In) and store them to
specified folders.
Note • This screen is displayed as [Folder Selector by G3 ID] when the IP Fax (SIP) Kit is not installed on the
machine. In this case, classifying only by G3 ID is available.
Folder Selector - Service Priority

When using the Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID feature, specify the priority
for the methods of classifying received documents: by sender's telephone number (Caller
ID), G3 ID, or recipient's number (Dial-In). Select priority from [First Priority], [Second
Priority], or [Third Priority] for each method.
Note • This feature is available only when the IP Fax (SIP) kit is installed on the machine.
Folder Selector Setup

Select whether or not to use the Folder Selector Setup feature.
The Folder Selector Setup feature allows you to classify received faxes by line type and store
them in folders specified.
266

 Delete Job
 Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start scanning the document partially stored.

Set the maximum number of pages stored for a fax document. You can specify from 1 to
999 pages.
Mixed Size Originals Scan Mode

Set the scan mode when the machine scans documents of various sizes simultaneously with
Tools
the document feeder. If only documents of standard sizes are to be scanned, we
recommend that you select [Standard Size Mode].
Note • When [Standard Size Mode] is selected, image loss may occur if the following types of documents
are scanned: 5
- Non-standard size documents
- B4 size documents with the inch series setting in [Paper Size Settings].
Skip Blank Pages

Set whether or not to detect blank pages while scanning 2 sided documents and transmits
only pages that are not blank.
Note • This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Fax Data in Folder Priority 1 to 3

Set the priority to display the fax information received using folders. For instance, when
using Network Scanner Utility 3, the fax information is displayed in the [Recipient] section
of the file list screen.
There are priority levels from 1 to 3. All priority can be set, however, if you want to display
only one priority level, make the settings of all priority levels the same.
Direct Fax
Set whether or not to receive a fax, which is instructed using a fax driver from a computer.
When you select [Disabled], the Direct Fax feature becomes unavailable.
Block Inbound Faxes

Set a G3 ID (fax number) from which you want to reject a fax reception. You can specify up
to 50 G3 IDs.
You can find the G3 ID of the sender that you want to reject in "Remote Station" column of
an Activity Report or "Input Source" column of a Job History Report.
Block Unknown Fax Numbers

Set whether or not to receive faxes from unknown G3 ID fax numbers. When [Yes] is
selected, the machine does not receive faxes from unknown fax numbers.
267
5 Tools
Filename Format for Store to Folder (Type 2 (T2) model only)

Set the format for the filename to be generated when fax is stored to folder. When
[YYYYMMDDHHMMSS] is selected, the files will be named in the order of year, month, day,
hour, minute, and second. When [img-MDDHHMMSS] is selected, the files will be named in
the order of month, day, hour, minute, and second after a fixed string "img-".
Note • When you select [YYYYMMDDHHMMSS], the order depends on the setting of [Date Format] in
[System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Machine Clock / Timers] > [Date].
• When you select [img-MDDHHMMSS], October, November, and December are represented by X, Y,
and Z respectively.
Fax Received Options

Fax Received Options allows you to specify a method for classifying received fax documents
into specified folders.
There are following two methods for classifying received documents.
 Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID
 Folder Selector Setup
Note • When you enable both features, classifying by [Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID] takes
precedence.
Tools
Folder Selector by Telephone Number / G3 ID

5 The machine classifies the received documents by sender's telephone number (Caller ID),
G3 ID, or recipient's telephone number (Dial-In) and stores them in specified folders. You
can register up to 500 settings.
Note • This screen is displayed as [Folder Selector by G3 ID] when the IP Fax (SIP) Kit is not installed on the
machine. In this case, classifying only by G3 ID is available.
1 Select [Folder Selector by Telephone Number /

G3 ID].
2 Select a folder selector number to register and

then select [Create/Delete].
• Entering a 3-digit folder selector number with
the numeric keypad displays the specified
folder selector at the top of the column.
3 Select a setting item and then select [Change Settings].
 Service
Specify the priority of classifying method when [Dial-In], [Caller ID], and [G3ID] are
informed at the same time. [Dial-In] is set as the factory default value.
 Telephone Number / G3 ID
Enter a telephone number to be classified up to 20 digits with the numeric keypad. When
you use * (wild card), the machine checks the telephone number from the first digit. For
268
example, when you enter "03*", the documents sent from the telephone numbers beginning
with "03" are stored to the specified folder.
When you do not use * (wild card), the machine checks the G3 ID and telephone number
from the last digit. For example, when you enter "1234", the documents sent from the
telephone numbers of which last four digits are "1234" are stored to the specified folder.
Important • * (wild card) cannot be entered as the first digit.
Note • The machine checks the folder selector in ascending order. So we recommend you to register
specific telephone number on smaller folder selector numbers to have intended result of the
classifying.
 Folder Number
Enter a 3 digits folder number with the numeric keypad. The documents are stored to the
specified folder.
4 Edit settings and select [Save].
5 Repeat step 3 to 4 as necessary.
6 Select [Save].
Folder Selector Setup

If you set the classification by line type, the machine classifies the received documents by
Tools
line type and store them in the folders specified.
Note • You can assign folders specified to each line to the service buttons on the Services Home screen. The
number of documents in the folder is displayed on the assigned service button. Pressing the button
allows you to confirm the documents in the folder. For more information, refer to "Customizing the 5
Button Layout" (P.33).
1 Select [Folder Selector Setup].

2 Select the line to register, and then select
[Change Settings].
Note • The displayed items may vary depending on
the options installed.
3 Select [On].
4 Enter the folder number (three digits) where you want to store the faxes with the numeric
keypad.
5 Select [Save].
Output Destination Setup

In [Output Destination Setup], you can set the output destination for each receiving line.
• The displayed items may vary depending on the options installed.
269
5 Tools
 Fax Received - Line 1 to 3

Specify output tray for each line.
 Fax Received - SIP

Specify output tray for IP fax (SIP).
 Public Folder Printed Files

Specifies output tray for public folder for polling.
You can set the magnifications displayed as [Preset %] which are displayed under [Reduce/
Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can assign any magnification to the
Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons other than [100%] and [Auto %].
 Preset %
You can select a ratio from preset ratios.
 Variable %
Tools
You can specify a magnification from 50 to 400% in 1% increments.
5 Original Size Defaults

You can set the original sizes displayed in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can assign original sizes to the buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently use non-standard size paper for scanning, setting non-standard size as the
default will save your time to specify the size each time.
 A/B Series Size

 Inch Size
 Others
You can select a size from other sizes such as photo and postcard.
Local Terminal Information

You can set the local terminal information, including a local name and company logo.
Note • The displayed items may vary depending on the options installed.
• There are a maximum of three lines that can be used for G3 communications: line 1, line 2, and line
3.
• You can set a company logo, G3 ID (fax number), G3 dial type, and G3 line type.
Local Name
Register the name of the local terminal as the local name.
The local name is shown in the recipient's touch screen or Activity Report. Depending on the
recipient's device, however, it may not be displayed.
270
Specify a local name with up to 20 single-byte characters using the keyboard displayed or
the numeric keypad.
Company Logo
Register the sender name (company logo). The company logo is printed in the Transmission
Header Text or Cover Page. Specify a company logo with up to 60 single-byte characters
using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.
Note • If [Line 1 to 3 - Company Logo] or [Company Logo for SIP Line] is not registered, the company logo
is used.
Machine Password
Set the machine password when you want to limit the other parties that can send faxes.
When the machine password is set, only a party that sends the correct machine password
by F code is allowed to send or poll. Note that this means that faxes cannot be accepted
from a fax without the F Code feature.
Line 1 to 3 - Company Logo

Register the sender names for lines 1 to 3. The sender name is printed in the Transmission
Header Text or Cover Page. Enter up to 60 single-byte characters using the keyboard
displayed or the numeric keypad.
Tools
G3 Line 1 to 3 - Fax ID
When using G3 communications, register the G3 ID. The G3 ID is normally set to the local
terminal fax number.
5
Specify a G3 ID with up to 20 digits using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.
Note • A G3 ID (fax number) can consist of not more than 20 digits, including 0 to 9, +, and space.
G3 Line 1 to 3 - Dial Type

Set the dial type.
 Tone
Tone dialing line.
 10pps
Pulse dialing line.
G3 Line 1 to 3 - Line Type

Set the line type.
 PSTN
Subscriber telephone line.
 PBX
Private branch exchange.
SIP Line - Company Logo

Register the sender names for IP fax (SIP). The sender name is printed in the Transmission
Header Text or Cover Page. Enter up to 60 characters using the keyboard displayed or the
numeric keypad.
271
5 Tools
G3 SIP Line - ID
When using G3 communications, register the G3 ID for IP fax (SIP).
Specify a G3 ID with up to 20 digits using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.
Internet Fax Control

You can configure the settings related to the Internet fax control.
Internet Fax Path

Set the Internet fax communication path.
 Via E-mail Server

Sends e-mail via an SMTP server.
 Direct (P2P)
Directly sends to the machine with the Internet Fax feature, without going through an SMTP
server.
You can specify the following two types of e-mail address for the Internet Fax feature:
Tools
 Specifying a host name

@ must be followed by FQDN.
5 Example: [email protected]
 Specifying an IP address
@ must be followed by an IP address with brackets.
Example: local-part@[192.0.2.1]
Profile for Broadcast Job

Set the default value for an Internet fax profile when performing an Internet fax broadcast
send.
A profile is specified to restrict attribute information such as image resolution and paper size
for transmissions between Internet Fax-enabled machines.
Important • The supported TIFF-file profiles vary depending on the destination Internet Fax-enabled machine.
Before specifying a profile, check the profile that the destination machine supports.
 TIFF-S
The Internet fax standard profile. For documents larger than A4, the size is automatically
reduced to A4 when transmission.
 TIFF-F
Select this profile when you specify [Superfine] for [Resolution] or when you send A3 or B4
documents.
 TIFF-J
Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG.
Broadcast Starting Rate

Set the default value for the communications mode for the broadcasting for the Internet
fax.
272
Delivery Confirmation Method

Set the default value for the method of confirming that an Internet fax sent has arrived or
not.
To print a transmission result, set [Print Delivery Confirmation Mail] to [On] under [E-mail/
Internet Fax Service Settings] > [E-mail Control].
Note • You can select [Delivery Receipts] when the destination machine supports the DSN feature. You can
use [Read Receipts] when the destination machine supports the MDN feature.
 Delivery Receipts
You can confirm whether the Internet fax you sent is delivered to the recipient's folder
successfully.
 Read Receipts
You can confirm whether the Internet fax including attachments you sent is processed
properly at the recipient.
Incoming Internet Fax Print Options

When an e-mail sent from an Internet fax compatible machine to the e-mail address of the
machine is received, you can select the print operation.
Tools
 Print Attachment Only
Only prints the attached documents.
 Attachment, Full Headers & Message 5

Prints the e-mail header and body of e-mails.
 Attachment, Basic Headers & Message

Prints the part of headers (From/To/Subject/Date) and the contents of e-mails.
When you select [Do not print if no message], the machine prints only e-mail that has
contents.
Internet Fax Output Destination

Set the output tray to use for printed Internet fax documents.
Fax Transfer from Address Book

Set whether to permit forwarding of Internet fax data received by e-mail via SMTP when the
forwarding destination is not registered on the Address Book.
 Off
Permits forwarding.
 On
Checks whether the forwarding fax number is listed in the Address Book, and if not, rejects
receiving the e-mail and deletes it.
Transmission Header Text - Fax Transfer

When forwarding received e-mail from Internet fax to fax, select whether or not to add a
Transmission Header Text (start time, company logo, recipient name, G3 ID, and number of
pages).
273
5 Tools
Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size

When forwarding a received e-mail from Internet fax to fax, set the maximum data size.
 No Limit
No limit on data size.
 Limit Size
Specify a value from 1 to 65535 KB in 1 KB increments. If a data size exceeds the specified
value, the data is deleted.
Tools
274
E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings
In [E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the e-mail
and the Internet Fax service.
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings].
E-mail Control
You can configure the settings for e-mail and Internet fax transmissions.
Maximum Address Entries

Set the maximum number of addresses that can be specified when sending an e-mail.
Tools
The number of addresses is the total number of To:/Cc:/Bcc:.
You can set the maximum number of addresses from 1 to 100. If the maximum number of
addresses exceeds, the e-mail transmission is aborted.
Important • This option is not applicable to the Internet Fax service.
5
Incoming E-mail Print Options
When an e-mail sent to the e-mail address of the machine is received, you can select the
print operation.
 Print Attachment Only

Only prints the attached documents.
 Attachment, Full Headers & Message

Prints the e-mail headers and body of e-mails.
When you select [Attachment, Full Headers & Message (with S/MIME Info)], S/MIME
Information is also printed.
 Attachment, Basic Headers & Message

Prints the part of headers (From/To/Subject/Date) and the contents of e-mails.
When you select [Do not print if no message], the machine prints only e-mail that has
contents.
Print Error Notification E-mail

Select whether the error e-mail because of an incorrect address or transmission error should
be automatically printed.
Note • The job for printing error e-mail is displayed as an error on the [Job Status] screen and a Job History
Report even when the job has been complete successfully.
Response to Read Receipts

Set whether or not to respond when a read receipt (MDN) is requested.
275
5 Tools
 Off
Does not respond.
 On
Automatically notifies the sender that the e-mail has been processed.
Read Receipts
When an e-mail is sent from the machine, select whether or not to use the Read Receipts
feature.
 Off
The Read Receipts feature is disabled.
 On
Uses the Read Receipts feature.
Note • For the Internet fax read receipts setting, select either [Delivery Receipts] or [Read Receipts] in
[Delivery Confirmation Method] under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Fax Service Settings] > [Internet
Fax Control].
Print Delivery Confirmation Mail

Tools
Select whether or not to automatically print transmission result e-mails (DSN response/MDN
response).
5  Off
Does not print transmission result e-mails.
 On
Transmission result e-mails are automatically printed regardless of success or failure of the
transmission.

Prints only when the transmission failed.
Split Send Method

Set the default value for the mail split method.
 Split into Pages

Splits into pages.
 Split by Data Size

Splits by the data size set in [Maximum Data Size per E-mail].
Maximum Data Size per E-mail

Set the upper limit of the data size for splitting mail.
Specify a value from 512 to 20480 KB in 1 KB increments. The default value is 10240 KB.
Maximum Total Data Size

Set the upper limit of the data size of mail.
Specify a value from 512 to 200000 KB in 1 KB increments. The default value is 200000 KB.
276
Maximum Split Count

Set the split upper limit for splitting mail.
Specify not to split mail or a value from 2 to 500.
Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field

Set whether or not to protect e-mail addresses from being changed by unregistered users
under [From] on the [E-mail] tab.
Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field

Set whether or not to protect e-mail addresses from being changed by guest users under
[From] on the [E-mail] tab.
Allow to edit From if Search Found

Set whether or not to protect e-mail addresses from being changed under [From] on the [E-
mail] tab when a login user retrieves an e-mail address.
Allow to edit From if Search Failed

Set whether to protect e-mail addresses from being changed under [From] on the [E-mail]
tab when a login user fails to retrieve an e-mail address.
Tools
E-mail Sending When Search Failed
Set whether or not to disable the [E-mail] service when a login user fails to retrieve an e-mail
address.
5
Add Me to "To" Field
Set whether or not to automatically add the sender's address to the To field.
Add Me to "Cc" Field

Set whether or not to automatically add the sender's address to the CC field.
Edit E-mail Recipients

Set whether or not to permit to edit e-mail recipients (To, CC, BCC). Selecting [No] prevents
e-mails from being sent to unintended destinations.
Important • If you set [Edit E-mail Recipients] to [No], set [Add Me to "To" Field] to [Yes].
277
5 Tools
Address Book Settings
In [Address Book Settings], you can configure settings related to the e-mail and the address
book.
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Address Book Settings].
Address Book Type

Select the type of the Address Book from [Type 1] or [Type 2].
Directory Service
Select whether or not to use an address book stored on the directory server.
Even when [Enabled] is selected, the address book of the directory server will not be started
unless the following conditions are satisfied.

The IP address of the machine must be set.
Tools
 The IP address or Internet address of the directory server (primary) must be set.
 The port numbers used for LDAP communication must be set on the directory server and
the machine.
5
Address Book Default - Scan
Select from [Public Entries] or [Network Entries].
Note • This item can be set when [Directory Service] is set to [Enabled].
Address Book Default - Fax

Select from [Public Entries] or [Network Entries].
Note • This item can be set when [Directory Service] is set to [Enabled].
Search Display Default

Select from [Simple Search] or [Advanced Search].
Note • This item can be set when [Address Book Type] is set to [Type 1].
Fax Speed Dial Default

Specify the default speed dial to display at the top of the [Fax Address Book] screen.
Set the number from 1 to 2000.
Note • Available numbers to assign to speed dials are different depending on your machine configuration .
For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
278
Folder Service Settings
Folder Service Settings
In [Folder Service Settings], you can configure settings to handle files stored in folders.
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Folder Service Settings].
Files Retrieved By Client

Set whether or not to delete a file stored in a folder when a client retrieves it.
 Delete according to Folder settings

Operates following the settings for individual folder.
For more information about setting folders, refer to "Delete Files After Retrieval" (P.293).
 Force Delete
Ignores the settings for individual folder, and when a file is retrieved by a client, the retrieved
Tools
file is forcibly deleted.
File Display Default

Set the display method of the file list screen. Select from [List] or [Thumbnail]. 5
Orientation for Stored Print Jobs
Set the orientation of non-standard size documents to be stored in a folder. Select [Portrait]
or [Landscape].
Even when [Portrait] is selected, a print job whose orientation is not available for the paper
tray will be stored in [Landscape] orientation.
Print & Delete Confirmation Screen

Set whether or not to display a confirmation screen for automatically deleting files after
printing the files stored in a folder.
Convert Custom Size to Standard Size

Set whether or not to convert custom size to standard size when transferring a fax/Internet
fax received or a file for Secure Polling in the folder.
Standard Size Threshold Value

Specify a threshold value for converting custom size to standard size when [Convert Custom
Size to Standard Size] is set to [Yes (Fax & Internet Fax files only)].
Specify the value from 0 to 10 mm in 1 mm increments.
Internet Fax to Internet Fax

Select whether or not to permit Internet fax forwarding of files received in a folder.
Internet Fax to E-mail

Select whether or not to permit e-mail forwarding of files received in a folder.
279
5 Tools
Quality/File Size for Retrieval

Select a quality and size for files highly compressed and retrieved from folders. Select from
[Quality: Normal, File Size: Small], [Quality: Higher, File Size: Larger], and [Quality: Maximum,
File Size: Largest].
Tools
280
Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
In [Job Flow Service Settings], you can configure the settings related to the Job Flow. The
Job Flow is a function to perform a series of jobs registered.
Also, in [Job Flow Service Settings], you can configure a pool server. As for [Pool Server], [Pool
Server Login Method], and [Job Flow Sheet List Default], however, leave the default settings
unchanged because a pool server is not available for the machine.
You can select a resolution in [Fax Transfer Resolution] when you transfer a scanned
document as a fax.
Pool Server
Leave the default setting unchanged.
Pool Server Login Method

Leave the default setting unchanged.
Job Flow Sheet List Default

Set the default values for [Save in], [Owner], and [Target] of Job flow sheets which are
Tools
displayed when you select [Job Flow Sheets] on the Services Home screen.
 Save in
Leave the default setting unchanged. 5
 Owner
Select the owner of job flow sheets from administrator and non-system administrator to
filter.
Note • When the machine is in the Authentication mode, select the owner from Shared or Personal.
 Target
Select the target of job flow sheets from Scan Jobs, External Application, and Copy to filter.
Fax Transfer Resolution

Select the resolution setting when you send a color document as a fax using the Job Flow
feature.
 Same Resolution (High Quality)

Converts color images to black and white images on a document with the same resolution
when the document is transferred as a fax. Conversion of high resolution color images will
take longer.
 200 dpi (High Speed)

Converts color images to black and white images of 200 dpi on a document when the
document is transferred as a fax.
Reduces the time when converting color images of 300 dpi or higher to black and white
images. 200 dpi is equivalent to [Fine] in fax transmission.
281
5 Tools
Media Print Service Settings
In [Media Print Service Settings], you can select the paper trays displayed for [Paper Supply]
in the [Media Print - Text] and [Media Print - Photos] screens.
When the USB Memory Kit (optional) is installed in the machine, you can import and print
image data (DCF1.0 (Exif 2.0 - 2.2 compliant JPEG/TIFF files)) from supported storage
media and document files (PDF, TIFF, XPS (MSXPS format and OpenXPS format), XDW, XBD,
or JPEG (JFIF)). This feature is called the Media Print feature.
• XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Media Print Service Settings].
Text - Paper Supply - Button 2 to 5

Select the paper tray displayed in the second to fifth columns for [Paper Supply] on the
Tools
[Media Print - Text] screen.
5 Photos - Paper Supply - Button 1 to 5

Select the paper tray displayed in the first to fifth columns for [Paper Supply] on the [Media
Print - Photos] screen.
282
Stored File Settings
In [Stored File Settings], you can select whether to automatically delete files stored on the
folder or the machine. Set the expiration date and the time of deletion.
You can also set whether or not to delete the stored file by file type.
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Stored File Settings].
Expiration Date for Files in Folder

You can set expiration date for the file in a folder. To delete stored files automatically,
specify an expiration date and deletion time. The settings apply to all folders.
 Off
Does not automatically delete the print files stored in the machine.
 On
Tools
Allows you to set the file retention period and the expiration date. The stored files will be
deleted after the time specified in [Files deleted at] passed.
 Files kept for

5
Set the file retention period from 1 to 14 days.
 Files deleted at
Set the deletion time for the expired files from 1 to 12 hours for AM or PM and 0 to 59
minutes.
Note • When you select [24 Hour Clock] in [Common Service Settings] > [Machine Clock/Timers] > [Time],
set the deletion time from 0 to 23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes.
To automatically delete files at the time specified here, you need to set [Delete Expired Files] to [Yes]. For more information,
refer to "Delete Expired Files" (P.293).
Stored Job Expiration Date

You can set whether or not to automatically delete print files (Charge Print, Private Charge
Print, Secure Print, or Sample Print) stored in the machine.
 Options
Set the retention period for stored jobs.
Select from [Off], [On], and [Same Date as Files in Folder]. When [On] is selected, set the
value for [Files kept for] from 1 to 23 hours in 1 hour increments. If the time elapses, print
files stored in the machine are deleted. When [Same Date as Files in Folder] is selected, print
files stored in the machine are deleted in accordance with the setting in [Expiration Date for
Files in Folder].
 Power Off Deletes Jobs

Allows you to set whether or not to delete print files stored when the machine is turned off
and then on. When you select [Yes], all stored print files are deleted. When you select [No],
the machine deletes only the expired stored print files.
Important • If you select [Yes], all print files stored will be deleted regardless of the setting in [Options].
283
5 Tools
Display Details of Stored Print Job List

Set whether or not to display detailed information such as output color and 2 sided in the
stored job list of print files (Charge Print, Secure Print, Sample Print, or Delayed Print). When
you select [On], detailed information is displayed in the list. When you select [Off], you can
see more jobs at a time since detailed information is not displayed.
Preview Generation
Set whether or not to generate preview images when displaying the list of stored print files
(Charge Print, Secure Print, Sample Print, or Delayed Print).
Selecting [On] generates the preview images of stored print files when they are stored in the
machine. Selecting [Off] generates no preview image and displays the list of stored print
files.
This setting can also be set from the printer driver. When the two settings between the driver
and the machine are different, the setting of the printer driver will take precedence.
Duration for Preview Generation

Set whether or not to restrict time to generate a preview image of the print files. When you
select [No Limit], preview images are generated with no time restriction.
When you select [Limited], only the preview images generated within the specified time
limit are displayed. In the case of exceeding the time limit, no preview image will be
Tools
generated. Specify the time limit between 10 and 900 seconds in 1 second increments.
5 Display Default of Stored Print Job List

Set the default of displaying the list of stored print files (Charge Print, Secure Print, Sample
Print, or Delayed Print). Select [List] or [Thumbnail].
When you select [List], the list of stored print files is shown as default.
When you select [Thumbnail], the preview images of stored print files are shown as default.
Print Job Confirmation Screen

Set whether or not to display a print confirmation screen for deletion of the print files stored
in the machine after printing. When [Enabled] is selected, the confirmation message
appears. You can change the number of print sets if the print settings are permitted to be
modified. When [Disabled] is selected, print files stored in the machine are automatically
deleted after printing.
Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs

Set the minimum number of allowed passcode digits between 0 and 12 digits. A passcode
is required when Secure Print or Private Charge Print files are to be stored or printed.
A passcode must be a string consisting of the number of digits that is equal to or larger than
the value specified here.
Note • Specify "0" if you do not set passcodes or the minimum number of digits.
Print Order for All Selected Files

Specify the printing order when you select to print all print files stored.
 Date & Time: Oldest First

Prints files in chronological order.
 Date & Time: Newest First

Prints files in reverse chronological order.
284
 File Name: Ascending

Prints files in ascending order by file name.
 File Name: Descending

Prints files in descending order by file name.
Tools
5
285
5 Tools
Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
In [Web Applications Service Setup], you can specify the remote access destination.
Remote access allows you to view web application services, which are compatible with the
machine, directly on the touch screen, to upload a document that has been scanned on the
machine to the web applications, and to directly select and print a document that is stored
in the remote server. It also allows you to directly upload and print a file without going
through another computer.
Note • To use this feature, the External Access Kit (optional) and any Fuji Xerox manufactured web
applications (sold separately) are required. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Web Applications Service Setup].
Server Certificate Verification Settings

Tools
When the machine is connected to a remote server (ASP) that is located in the Internet zone,
server certificate verification is available to prevent phishing attempts as with a Windows
web browser. Configure the following settings.
5 Preparations
Download a root certificate (CA certificate) of the root certification authority, which issues
the server certificate for the remote server to be connected, to a computer connected to
The CA certificate formats that can be used are as follows:

 DER encoded binary X.509 (.CER)

Base64 encoded X.509 (.CER)
 Cryptographic Message Syntax Standard - PKCS #7 Certificates (.P7B)
Setting Procedure
1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.

For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.338).
2 Generate a certificate.
If you use an approved device certificate, proceed to step 3.
1) Click the [Properties] tab.
2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].
4) Click the [Create New Self Signed Certificate] button.
5) Set [Public Key Size] and [Issuer], and then click [Apply].
After a short while, [Settings have been changed.] is displayed.
3 Enable SSL/TLS communication.
1) Click [SSL/TLS Settings].
286
2) Select the [Enabled] check box for [HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication].

3) Select the [Enabled] check box for [Verify Remote Server Certificate].
4) Click [Apply].
5) When the right frame on the web browser will change to the machine reboot display,
click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the setting values are enabled.
4 Import the root certificate of the remote server.
1) Refresh the web browser to reload CentreWare Internet Services.
Note • An address beginning with "https" instead of "http" is displayed in the address box in the web
browser.
5) Click [Upload Signed Certificate].
6) Enter a file name you want to import, or select a file to be imported from a dialog box
displayed by clicking the [Browse] button.
7) Click the [Import] button.
Tools
8) Refresh the web browser to reload CentreWare Internet Services.
5 Confirm that the certificate has been imported.
Otherwise, proceed to step 6. 5
1) Click [Certificate Management].
2) Select [Trusted Certificate Authorities] for [Category], and then click the [Display the
list] button.
3) Select the check box next to the certificate you want to confirm.
4) Click the [Certificate Details] button.
6 Configure connection settings for the remote server.
2) Click [General Setup] to display the items in the folder.
3) Click [Internet Services Settings].
4) Configure connection settings for the remote server.
5) Click [Edit].
Configure connection settings for the remote server again.
Important • Enter an address beginning with "https" instead of "http" into the address box in the web browser.
6) Click [Apply].
287
5 Tools
Server Setup
This section describes how to register a server on access web applications.
Note • If there are one or more servers to register, it is helpful to assign the servers to the buttons displayed
on the Services Home screen. For information on changing the buttons on the Services Home screen,
refer to "Customizing the Control Panel" (P.31).
1 Select [Server Setup].

2 Select an access destination you want to register, and then select [Change Settings].
3 Enter the URL of the access destination, if you register an access destination in a new entry.
 URL
Enter the URL of the access destination with up to 256 single-byte characters, and select
[Save]. URL must begin with the type of the protocol used.
Use the version of a web application that is set [Web Applications Version] in "Web Browser
Setup" (P.290).
For example:
 http://www.example.com
Tools

http://192.0.2.1 (IPv4)

http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
5 
https://www.example.com
 https://192.0.2.1 (IPv4)
 https://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
When you connect the server specifying the version of the web application to be used, enter
the version after the protocol type. The setting made here takes precedence of the setting
made in [Web Applications Version].
For example:
 When specified with V2
- http-v2://www.example.com
- http-v2://192.0.2.1 (IPv4)
- http-v2://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)

When specified with V4
- http-v4://192.0.2.1 (IPv4)
- http-v4://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
 When specified with V5
- http-v5://192.0.2.1 (IPv4)
- http-v5://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
Note • When the URL is specified with V3, V4 is used for connection.
• Begin with "https" for a protocol with an encryption feature.
4 Configure other settings as necessary.
 Server Name
Enter the access destination name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
288
 Description
Enter the description of the access destination with up to 128 single-byte characters.
 Use User ID
 No
- When [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts]:
The machine accesses the remote service using the user information authenticated on
the machine.
- When [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required] or [Login to Local Accounts]:
The machine prompts the user to input user ID and password to access Web
applications.

Yes
Allows you to enter a user ID and password into [User ID] and [Password] respectively,
which are used when the machine accesses the remote service.
 User ID
Enter the user ID to access the remote service with up to 128 characters.
Important • Depending on the settings on the remote service, the entry for [User ID] may be invalid. Check the
settings on the remote service.
Tools
Note • Along with [User ID], set also [Password]. [User ID] will be invalid unless [Password] is set.
• All the specified settings are ignored if the remote service to be connected requires other than a user
ID and its password for authentication.
5
 Password
Enter the password for the user ID with up to 128 characters.
 Machine/Authentication Notification
Set whether or not to notify the remote server of machine information and user
authentication information every time the machine connects to the remote service.
Note • The remote service determines whether to use the information. No need to configure settings on the
control panel.
 Notify User Authorization Information

Set whether or not to notify the remote service of user authorization information every time
the machine connects to the remote service.
 Delete All Settings

Deletes all settings registered.
 Functional Code
Set the functional code as necessary when you use a service which works in ApeosPort.
Specify the value between 0 and 65535.
Other Settings
When Sending User Details

Set whether or not to display a confirmation screen when the machine send user
authorization information (authorized user ID, password, e-mail address, and the services
restricted) to the remote server.
Note • Even when you select [No Confirmation Required], if there is a flaw in the authentication
information, a confirmation screen is displayed.
289
5 Tools
Web Browser Setup
In [Web Browser Setup], you can configure the settings for the web browser to be used when
the machine accesses a web application using the Web Applications feature.
Remote access allows you to view web application services, which are compatible with the
machine, directly on the touch screen, to upload a document that has been scanned on the
machine to the web applications, and to directly select and print a document that is stored
in the remote server. It also allows you to directly upload and print a file without going
through another computer.
Important • Configure [Web Applications Version] as required when a service which works in ApeosPort is used.
Note • To use this feature, a Fuji Xerox manufactured web application (sold separately) is required. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [System Settings] > [Web Browser Setup].
Web Applications Version

Tools
Select a version of the Web applications service from [V2], [V4], and [V5].
Important • If [V2] is selected, the following settings become invalid: [Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing],
5 [Clear Cache Upon Closing], [Use Cache], [Accept Cookies], [Use TLS1.0], [Use SSL3.0], [When SSL
Certificate Verification Fails], and [Enable File Printing].
Note • When you use V3 of the web application version, select [V4].
Delete Persistent Cookie Upon Closing

Set whether or not to delete persistent cookie when connection to a Web application ends.
Clear Cache Upon Closing

Set whether or not to delete cache when connection to a Web application ends.
Use Cache
Set whether or not to use cache.
Accept Cookies
Set whether or not to accept cookies.
Select from [No], [Yes], and [Warn user when cookie is offered].
When you select [Warn user when cookie is offered], the machine behaves as when you
select [Yes].
Use TLS1.0
Set whether or not to use TLS 1.0.
Use SSL3.0
Set whether or not to use SSL 3.0.
When SSL Certificate Verification Fails

Set whether or not to stop accessing the site or to display a confirmation screen for access
if SSL certificate verification fails.
290
Web Browser Setup
Enable File Printing

Specify whether or not to use the File Printing feature.
The File Printing feature allows you to directly print the printable files obtained from the
remote Web server.
Functional Code
Set the functional code as necessary when you use a service which works in ApeosPort.
Specify the value between 0 and 65535.
Tools
5
291
5 Tools
Setup
In [Setup], you can create or update folders, job flows, and the Address Book.
Create Folder ................................................................................................................................................................................ 292
Stored Programming .................................................................................................................................................................. 294
Create Job Flow Sheet ................................................................................................................................................................ 294
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword ............................................................................................................................................... 303
Add Address Book Entry ............................................................................................................................................................. 303
Create Fax Group Recipients..................................................................................................................................................... 311
Add Fax Comment....................................................................................................................................................................... 312
Paper Tray Attributes.................................................................................................................................................................. 312
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Setup].

Tools
5 Create Folder
Using the Folder function enables you to store scanned documents using the machine, fax
received documents, or print documents sent from a computer in the machine.
You can also send a file stored in a folder via e-mail or retrieve a file stored in a computer on
a network.
You can create a private folder and a public folder in the machine and use them separately
depending on your purpose.
You can create up to 200 folders.
You can check the current folders in a Folder List. For more information, refer to "Folder List" (P.127).
1 Select [Create Folder].

2 Select the folder to create.
• Entering a 3-digit folder number with the
numeric keypad displays the specified folder
at the top of the column.
3 When you create a folder, the [New Folder -

Passcode] screen appears. Select items, and
then select [Save].
Note • When you select a folder already created, the
[Folder XXX - Create/Delete] screen appears.
For more information on assigning a passcode, refer to "Check
Folder Passcode" (P.293).
292
Setup
4 Select items and set the required settings.

5 When you finish required settings, select [Save].
Folder Name
Set the folder name. Enter up to 20 single-byte characters using the keyboard displayed or
the numeric keypad.
Check Folder Passcode

Set an access restriction to permit operations for specified users only.
 Check Folder Passcode

Set whether or not to set a passcode.
 Off
Does not set an access restriction.

On
Set a passcode for access restriction.
Tools
 Folder Passcode
To use the Check Folder Passcode feature, enter a passcode. You can enter a passcode of up
to 20 numeric digits (0 to 9). 5
 Target Operation
Set the operations to be restricted.

Always (All Operations)
A passcode entry is required when a folder is selected or a file in a folder is printed or
deleted.

Save (Write)
A passcode entry is required when a folder is selected.
 Print/Delete (Read)
A passcode entry is required when printing or deleting the file in the folder.
Delete Files After Retrieval

When a file stored in a folder is printed or is retrieved from a remote server, set whether the
file should be deleted.
 No
The file is left stored.
 Yes
After the file is printed, or is retrieved by an external source, it is automatically deleted.
Note • If you select [Yes], a file is not deleted when retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services.
Delete Expired Files

Specify whether or not to enable the operation to delete files stored in a folder at a specified
time after a retention period has elapsed.
293
5 Tools
 No
Even when the retention period has elapsed, files are not deleted.
 Yes
Deletes expired files at the specified time. If, however, the expiration date has not been
specified, files are not deleted even when [Yes] is selected.
Note • When the machine is off at the deletion time of an expired file, the file is deleted next time the
deletion time comes after the machine is turned on.
For information on setting the file retention period, refer to "Expiration Date for Files in Folder" (P.283).
Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder

You can link a job flow sheet to a folder. Linking a job flow in which a series of actions is
recorded to a folder enables you to set the processing method for files stored in a folder.
For information on how to register a job flow, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.294).
 Cut Link
Cancels the link between a folder and a linked job flow sheet.
 Create/Change Link
Tools
A screen to link a job flow sheet appears. You can select the existing job flow sheets or create
a new job flow sheet.
For more information about the operation, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.294).
5  Auto Start
If you select the [Auto Start] check box, when a file is stored in a folder, the procedures
registered on the job flow linked automatically starts.
When the [Delete Folder] Button is Selected

Selecting this button deletes the selected folder. Any files stored in the folder are also
deleted.
If [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required], all the job flow sheets, including a local user
created on the [Create Folder] screen or job flow sheets created on the [Send from Folder]
screen, are deleted as well.
Important • Once files or job flow sheets are deleted, they cannot be restored.
Stored Programming
The Stored Programming feature enables you to register frequently used settings and
record a series of operations.
For more information on operation, refer to "8 Stored Programming" > "Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs"
in the User Guide.
Create Job Flow Sheet

Job flow is a feature to execute a series of registered actions. Up to 1000 job flow sheets can
be created.
The target of a job flow is files stored in a folder. A job flow can be executed by using one of
the following three methods:

by automatically starting a job flow when a file is stored in a folder
 by selecting a file stored in a folder to manually execute the associated job flow
294
Setup
 by selecting a file stored in a folder to select a job flow and execute manually
To start a job flow automatically, you must link the job flow to a folder. When a file is stored
in the folder, it is automatically processed in accordance with the job flow sheet linked.
Note • To link a folder with a job flow sheet created with [Create Job Flow Sheet], start from [Send from
Folder] or [Create Folder]. For more information, refer to "6 Send from Folder" in the User Guide and
"Create Folder" (P.292).
Features that can be registered are listed below.

 Forward to (FTP, SMB, e-mail, fax, IP fax, and Internet fax)

Print
Depending on the method of storing in the folder, there are restrictions on the combination
of features.
Output Internet
IP Fax
Print Fax Mail FTP SMB
Input
(SIP) Fax *1
Fax Documents for

O O O O O O O
Tools
Secure Polling
Scanning O O O O O O O
Fax to Folder O*2 O O O O O O
5
Internet Fax
O O O   O O
Received
Print Stored X X X X X X X
O : Available
X : Not available
 : Available depending on the System Administration mode settings
*1 : Load an A4 document in landscape orientation when TIFF-S has been selected for the Internet fax forwarding profile.
Loading the document in portrait orientation will reduce the size of the Internet fax image.
*2 : If the fax USB cable is disconnected while a received fax file in a folder is being printed, the file is not deleted after printing,
even if the delete after printing setting is enabled in the folder settings.
Restrictions on Using Job Flow

A job flow can be used by single or multiple users, or can be used by linking to a specific
folder. The Authentication feature restricts the use of the job flows.
For information on the available Job Flow features and restrictions on use, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and
Folders" (P.437).
1 Select [Create Job Flow Sheet].

2 Carry out the job flow operation in accordance
with your purpose.
295
5 Tools
 Sheet Filtering
You can filter the job flow sheets to display.
Select the filtering conditions, and then select
[Save].
Note • The screen displayed varies depending on the
Login Type selected.
 Owner
Filters job flow sheets by owner type.
 Target (ApeosPort Series Models only)
Filters job flow sheets by target, such as scan jobs and folders.
 Create
Displays the [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen.
Refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.296).
 Edit/Delete
Tools
Displays the [Details] screen.

Refer to "Edit/Delete" (P.302).
5  Search by Name
Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow
names that were registered upon each job flow creation. You can enter up to 128 single-byte
characters.
 Search by Keyword
Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords
that were registered upon each job flow creation.
 Select Keyword
Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword registered in the System Settings to
search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine
searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation.
For information on the keyword registry, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.303).
Create New Job Flow Sheet

Create a new job flow.
1 Select an item to set, and then select [Edit].
296
Setup
 Delete
Deletes all setting values of the selected item.
 Edit
Confirm or change the settings of the selected item.
 Close Menu
Deselect the selected item.
Name
Set the name for the job flow sheet with up to 128 single-byte characters.
Description
Set the description of the job flow sheet with up to 256 single-byte characters.
Keyword
Enter a keyword with up to 12 single-byte characters for job flow search. You can also use
the keywords that are registered for [Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword].
For information on the job flow keyword search, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.303).
Tools
Send as Fax
Specify destinations for fax transmission. You can specify a total of 100 destinations, either
by selecting from the Address Book or by direct input.
5
Important • You cannot use wildcards or group dial numbers.
Note • This item is not displayed when the Server Fax feature is enabled.
 Speed Dial
Specify an address with a speed dial. Enter the speed dial with the numeric keypad, and
select [Save]. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send Fax] screen.
 New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send
Fax] screen.
 Name/Fax Number
Displays the recipient name or fax number specified.
 Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.
 Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
selected.
For more information on the [Edit Recipient] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
 Cancel
297
5 Tools
Send as IP Fax (SIP)
 Speed Dial
select [Save]. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send as IP Fax
(SIP)] screen.
 New Recipient
Specify a new address. Select an item to change, and select [Change Settings]. The address
specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send as IP Fax (SIP)] screen.
 Name/Fax Number
Displays the name and fax number specified.
 Remove
 Edit
selected.
Tools
Send as Internet Fax

5 Specify destinations for fax transmission. You can specify a total of 100 destinations, either
by selecting from the Address Book or by direct input.
Important • You cannot use wildcards or group dial numbers.
Note • This item is not displayed when the Server Fax feature is enabled.
 Speed Dial
select [Save]. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail Address] in the [Send Internet
Fax] screen.
 New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail Address] in the [Send
Internet Fax] screen.
 Name/E-mail Address
Displays the recipient name or address specified.
 Edit
selected.
 Close Menu
 Message
Enter body message of an Internet fax with the keyboard displayed.
298
Setup
 Internet Fax Profile

Select an Internet fax profile.
 Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval.

Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
 Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.
 Transmission Header Text

Set whether or not to add a Transmission Header Text to an Internet fax.
Send as E-mail
Specify the recipients for e-mail transmission.
Tools
You can specify a total of 100 addresses, either by selecting from the Address Book or by
direct input.
If [Encryption] is set to [On], you cannot specify a recipient by selecting [New Recipient]. 5
 Address Book
You can specify the recipients from the Address Book. The address specified appears in
[Name/E-mail] in the [Send E-mail] screen.
 New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail] in the [Send E-mail]
screen.
Displays the recipient name or e-mail address specified.
 Subject
Enter a subject using the keyboard displayed.
Deletes all information for the selected recipient information.
 Edit
selected.
 File Format
Select an output file format.
For more information on the [File Format] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
 Resend Attempts
299
5 Tools
 Resend Attempts
 Resend Interval
 Encryption
Set whether or not to encrypt the e-mail transmission.
Note • To encrypt e-mail transmission, the configuration of S/MIME is required.
• To encrypt e-mail transmission, a certificate is required.
• To enable encryption, select [On] before specifying an address. [On] will be disabled after an address
is specified.
 Digital Signature
Select whether or not to add digital signature.
Note • To add digital signature, the configuration of S/MIME is required.
• To add digital signature, a certificate is required.
Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)

Tools
Specify where FTP forwarding is to be stored.

[Transfer via FTP (2)] will be displayed when [Transfer via FTP (1)] is configured.
5  Address Book
When the server address is registered on the Address Book, you can specify the address from
the Address Book. The specified address appears in the [Transfer via FTP (1)] or [Transfer via
FTP (2)] screen.
For more information on the Address Book, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.303).
 File Format
Specify an output file format.
 Resend Attempts
 Resend Attempts
 Resend Interval
 Name, Server, Save in, User Name, and Password

Select [Name], [Server], [Save in], [User Name], or [Password] to display an input screen.
The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:
 Name: Up to 18 single-byte characters
 Server: Up to 64 single-byte characters

Save in: Up to 128 single-byte characters

User Name: Up to 97 single-byte characters

Password: Up to 32 single-byte characters
300
Setup
Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2)

Specify where SMB forwarding is to be stored.
[Transfer via SMB (2)] will be displayed when [Transfer via SMB (1)] is configured.
 Address Book
When the server address is registered on the Address Book, you can specify the address from
the Address Book. The specified address appears in the [Transfer via SMB (1)] or [Transfer
via SMB (2)] screen.
For more information on the Address Book, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.303).
 File Format
Specify an output file format.
 Resend Attempts

Resend Attempts
Tools

Resend Interval
5
 Name, Server, Shared Name, Save in, User Name, and Password
Select [Name], [Server], [Shared Name], [Save in], [User Name], or [Password] to display an
input screen.
The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:

Name: Up to 18 single-byte characters
 Server: Up to 64 single-byte characters
 Shared Name: Up to 64 single-byte characters
 Save in: Up to 128 single-byte characters

User Name:
For domain users: up to 97 characters with the format of "user name@domain name" or
"domain name\user name"
(user name and domain name must be up to 32 and 64 single-byte characters,
respectively)
For local users: up to 32 single-byte characters

Password: Up to 32 single-byte characters
Print
Configure print settings. When [On] is selected, you can configure the settings for the Print
feature.
 Print Quantity
Set the number of copy sets from 1 to 999 in 1 set increments.
 Paper Supply
Select a paper tray for printing. When [Auto Select] is selected, the same paper size as the
document size is used.
301
5 Tools
 Auto Select
A suitable paper tray is automatically selected.
 Trays 1 to 4 and 6 (optional)
Select paper from five trays.

Bypass
Prints on paper loaded in Tray 5.
 2 Sided Printing
Set the 2 sided printing option.
 Output
Configure the stapling, hole punch, and output destination settings.
 Staple
Set the position for stapling.

Hole Punch
Set the position for punching.
Tools
 Output Destination
Set the output destination.
5 E-mail Notification
You can receive an e-mail notification when a file is saved in a folder or a job flow ends.
Set the recipient of the e-mail notification.
 Message
Enter a message that is displayed in the e-mail message body.
 When to Notify
Select the e-mail notification timing from [When file is stored] and [At the end of Job Flow].
 Edit
Allows you to check or change the recipient selected.
 Close Menu
Deselects the selected item.
Edit/Delete
You can check the content of a job flow sheet, and edit, copy, or delete it.
Note • Some operations may be restricted according to types of job flow owners, authentication settings,
and user types. For more information, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders"
(P.437).
302
Setup
 Delete
Deletes the selected job flow sheet.
 Copy
Creates a duplicate of the selected job flow sheet. You can create a new job flow sheet based
on the duplicate.
The procedure of creation is the same as creation of a new job flow sheet. For more information, refer to "Create New Job
Flow Sheet" (P.296).
 Edit
You can edit the selected job flow sheet.
The procedure of change is the same as creation of a new job flow sheet. For more information, refer to "Create New Job
Flow Sheet" (P.296).
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword

You can register job flow search keywords. The registered keywords are displayed under
[Select Keyword] and allows you to use for job flow sheet search. The keywords are also
available from a list under [Keyword] that is displayed when you create a new job flow sheet.
Tools
Up to 12 single-byte characters are allowed for a job flow search keyword.
Add Address Book Entry 5

You can register frequently used addresses on the Address Book. Select an address type
from Fax, IP Fax (SIP), Internet Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/SMB).
When an address is registered, you can search for it with [Address Book] on the [Fax], [IP Fax
(SIP)], [Internet Fax], and [E-mail] screens.
You can store a total of 2000 addresses for Fax, IP Fax (SIP), Internet Fax, E-mail, and Server
(FTP/SMB).
Important • The following address types can be selected when you add an address to Address Book: Fax, IP Fax
(SIP), Internet Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/SMB)
When you register an address on the Address Book, select an address type in accordance with the
service. The address book entry registered with the wrong address type cannot be selected from the
original service.
Note • The address numbers correspond to the one-touch buttons. The one-touch buttons are available for
fax, IP Fax (SIP), Internet Fax, E-mail, and Scan to PC. For more information on the relationship
between the address numbers and the one-touch buttons, refer to "One-touch Buttons" (P.166).
• To specify an e-mail or server (FTP/SMB) address (for insertion in the Address Book), it is not possible
to use a speed dial specified with the numeric keypad, one-touch dialing, or a group dial number.
• To specify an e-mail address or a server address for the Scan services, use the Address Book. The
speed dial with the numeric keypad, the one-touch buttons, and the group address created using the
Group Recipients feature cannot be used to specify such addresses.
• You can register, edit, delete, or view the Address Book from CentreWare Internet Services. For more
1 Select [Add Address Book Entry].

Note • To display the [Add Address Book Entry] screen, press the <Log In/Out> button and enter the system
administrator's user ID, and then select [Tools] > [Setup] > [Add Address Book Entry]. If [Setup] is
displayed on the Services Home screen, select [Setup] > [Add Address Book Entry].
303
5 Tools
2 Press a speed dial to register.

• Entering a speed dial number with the
numeric keypad displays the specified
number at the top of the column.
3 Select [Address Type].
4 Select the address type, and then select [Save].

Tools
5
5 Select an item to set and set.
6 When the settings are completed, select [Save].
 When selecting [E-mail] as the address type

The following items appear:
 Address Type  Given Name

E-mail Address 
Custom Item 1 (Telephone Number*)
 Name  Custom Item 2 (Office*)
 Index 
Custom Item 3 (Department*)
 Surname  S/MIME Certificate (ApeosPort Series Models only)
* : Factory default setting
 When selecting [Server] as the address type

 Address Type  Save in
304
Setup
 Name  User Name

 Index  Password

Transfer Protocol 
Port Number
 Server Name/IP Address  Shared Name (SMB Only)
 When selecting [Fax] as the address type

 Address Type  Delay Start
 Fax Number  Remote Folder

Name 
F Code

Index 
Relay Broadcast
 Starting Rate  Billing - Day Time
 Resolution  Billing - Night Time

Cover Page 
Billing - Midnight

Maximum Image Size
Tools
 When selecting [IP Fax (SIP)] as the address type
 Address Type  Delay Start 5

Recipient (Fax Number) 
Remote Folder

Name 
F Code

Index 
Relay Broadcast

Starting Rate 
Billing - Day Time
 Resolution  Billing - Night Time

Cover Page 
Billing - Midnight

Maximum Image Size
 When selecting [Internet Fax] as the address type

 Address Type  Starting Rate
 E-mail Address  Resolution
 Name  Maximum Image Size

Index 

S/MIME Certificate (ApeosPort Series Models only)
Address Type
Allows you to change an address type.
E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address with up to 128 single-byte characters.
305
5 Tools
Name
Enter a recipient name with up to 18 single-byte characters.
Index
You can register a single alphanumeric index character for use as a keyword when listening
the registered recipients in alphabetical order.
Surname
Enter a recipient surname with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Given Name
Enter a recipient given name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Custom Item 1
Tools
The attribute name set as [Attribute Name of Custom Item 1] is shown as the item name.
By factory default, the item name is set to "Telephone Number".
5 You can input any information as an auxiliary item. Up to 20 single-byte characters are
allowed. This item is suitable for information represented by a shorter character string, such
as telephone number and employee number.
For more information on the item name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1, 2, and 3" (P.237).
Custom Item 2
You can input any information as an auxiliary item. Up to 40 single-byte characters can be
used. This item is suitable for information represented by a longer character string, such as
company name and department name.
Custom Item 3
You can input any information as an auxiliary item. Up to 60 single-byte characters can be
used. This item is suitable for information represented by a much longer character string,
such as company division name and company address.
S/MIME Certificate (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Allows you to link an S/MIME certificate. The S/MIME certificate must be registered in
advance.
To link a certificate, select [Attach/Change Link] and select a certificate in a screen
displayed. To remove a link, select [Remove Certificate].
Important • If a certificate linked to an S/MIME certificate in the Address Book is deleted by some reasons such
as hard disk initialization and the deletion of the certificate, the certificate linked to the S/MIME
certificate will be invalid. Even if you re-register the S/MIME certificate, you have to manually link it
again.
306
Setup
Note • If many certificates are registered on the machine, it may take a long time to link a certificate.
For more information on the certificate, refer to ""Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" (P.409).
Transfer Protocol
Set the transfer protocol. You can select either [FTP] or [SMB].
Server Name/IP address

Enter a name or an IP address of a forwarding destination server.
Shared Name (SMB Only)

Enter the shared name set for the SMB folder.
Important • If the "/" mark is used at the top of a shared name, a job flow cannot read the shared name correctly.
Do not use the "/" mark at the top of a shared name.
Save in
Enter the directory for storing files. When SMB is selected, use a UNC format.

Transferring via FTP
For example: aaa/bbb
Tools
When you save files in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in the root directory.

Transferring via SMB
For example: aaa\bbb 5
When you save files in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in a specified volume.
User Name
Set the user name when a user name is required to be input by the forwarding destination
server.
When [FTP] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], up to 97 characters are allowed.
When [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], use one of the following formats:

For Active Directory:
User name@Domain name (User name: up to 32 characters / Domain name: up to 64
characters)
For example: [email protected] ("fuji" is a user name and "example.com" is a domain
name)
 For Windows NT® domains:
Domain name\User name (Domain name: up to 64 characters / User name: up to 32
characters)
For example: example\fuji ("example" is a domain name and "fuji" is a user name)
 For workgroups:
Local user (up to 32 characters)
For example: Fuji-Taro
Password
Set a password when the forwarding destination server prompts a password entry. You can
enter up to 32 single-byte characters for a password.
307
5 Tools
Port Number
Set the forwarding destination port number. Specify a number from 1 to 65535.
Fax Number
Enter a fax number with up to 128 digits.
Index
You can register a single alphanumeric index character for use as a keyword to search with
the Address Book.
Starting Rate
Set a communications mode. You can select from [G3 Auto], [Forced 4800 bps], and [G4
Auto].
When the destination is specified by a speed dial number with the communications mode
set, you cannot change the communications mode in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
Note • [G4 Auto] is displayed only when internet fax addresses are selected.
Tools
Resolution
Set image quality for transmission.
5 Select from [Panel] (image quality selected on the control panel), [Standard (200x100 dpi)],
[Fine (200 dpi)], [Superfine (400 dpi)], and [Superfine (600 dpi)].
Cover Page
Select whether or not to send a fax or an Internet fax with a cover note attached. If
attached, specify comments on the sender and a recipient to be printed in the cover pages.
Comments must be registered in advance.
For information on comment registration, refer to "Add Fax Comment" (P.312).
1 Select [Print Cover Page].

2 Select [Comments].
3 Select any comment from the list of comments

displayed under [Recipient's Comment] and
[Sender's Comment].
4 Select [Save]. The image of the Fax Cover Page
is displayed.
5 Select [Save].
308
Setup
Maximum Image Size

Select the maximum image size from [A3], [B4], or [A4] to match the recipient's paper size
or available profile.
Delay Start
Set whether or not to use a delayed start transmission.
If the machine's system clock is set to the 24-hour display, [AM] and [PM] do not appear. For information on the system
clock, refer to "Time" (P.160).
Remote Folder
Select whether or not to send a fax or an Internet fax to a recipient's folder. To use folder
communications, you must obtain the recipient's folder number and passcode in advance.
1 Select [On].
2 Enter a recipient's folder number with the
numeric keypad.
3 If a passcode is set, enter the passcode with the
numeric keypad.
Tools
Note • If no passcode is set, leave the text boxes
blank and select [Save].
F Code 5
Select whether or not to use F code communications.
F Code is the transmission procedure set by the Communications and Information Network
Association of Japan and is the T.30 (communication protocol) method for using sub-
addresses that are standardized by the ITU-T.
For F code (sub address) and password, you can use up to 20 digits 0 to 9, *, and #.
1 Select [On].
2 Enter the F code with the numeric keypad.
Note • The F code consists of "0" + folder number.
For example, if the folder number is 123, the
F code will be "0123".
3 Enter the password as required with the
numeric keypad, and then select [Save].
Note • You can enter up to 20 digits for the
password.
Relay Broadcast
Set the instruction given to a relay station, which is used when the machine is a base station
and the registered speed dial is a relay station for relay broadcast.
When selecting [On], set [Relay Station ID], [Print at Relay Station], and [Broadcast
Recipients].
309
5 Tools
1 Select [On].
2 Enter a 2-digit relay station ID with the
numeric keypad.
Note • The relay station ID is the address number
for the base station (the machine) already
registered on the relay station.
3 Select [Speed Dial 001<->099].
4 Enter a speed dial number of broadcast
destination (001 to 099) or group number (#01 to #09) registered on the relay station with
the numeric keypad, and then select [Add].
Note • If there are more than one broadcast destinations, repeat step 4.
5 To print a document also at the relay station, under select [On] for [Print at Relay Station].
6 Select [Save].
Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time, Billing - Midnight

Set the connection time for one unit charge in each of the time bands (daytime/night/
midnight).
Tools
You can set a value from 0.1 to 255.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
This item is displayed when [Accounting] > [Accounting Type] is set to [Local Accounting] and [Fax/Internet Fax Service] is
5 set to [Enable Accounting] under [Auditron Mode]. For information on how to enable the feature, refer to "Auditron Mode"
(P.318).
The information registered can be confirmed by printing a Billing Data List. For information about how to print, refer to
"Billing Data List" (P.126).
1 Select one of [Billing - Day Time], [Billing - Night Time], and [Billing - Midnight].
2 Select [Billing].
3 Enter the time for one unit charge from 0.1 to
255.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments with
the numeric keypad.
4 Select [Save].

Set the format of the Internet fax profile.
 TIFF-S
The Internet fax standard profile. For documents larger than A4, the size is automatically
reduced to A4 when transmission.
 TIFF-F
Select this profile when you specify [Superfine] for [Resolution] or when you send A3 or B4
documents.
 TIFF-J
Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG.
310
Setup
When the [Delete Entry] Button is Selected

Selecting this button deletes all the information registered for the address selected. To
delete all information registered, select [Delete].
Important • Deleted information cannot be restored.
Create Fax Group Recipients

You can register addresses for broadcast transmission as a group. Each group can include up
to 20 address numbers. The maximum number of groups that can be registered is 50.
Note that recipients to be added to a group must be registered in the speed dials on the
Address Book.
Note • Even when the speed dial number of fax recipients (address book entries) are included in a group,
the machine does not send faxes to the recipients if their address types are set to [E-mail] or [Server].
• You cannot include a group in another group.
• You can use wildcards for specifying the numbers in the last one or two digits as shown in the
following example:
- 001*:Specifies the 10 addresses with address numbers 010 to 019.
- ****:Specifies all address numbers.
Tools
Select [Create Fax Group Recipients].
2 Select a group number to register.
5
3 Select [Group Name] and enter a group name

to register, and then select [Save].
4 Enter a speed dial number (four digits) to

register with the numeric keypad, and then
select [Add to this Group].
5 Repeat step 4 to register the address numbers.

6 Select [Save].
 Delete this group

Deletes all information registered on a group.
 Delete from this group

Deletes a registered address. Select the speed dial or enter the speed dial number to delete
with the numeric keypad, and then select [Delete from this group].
311
5 Tools
Add Fax Comment

You can register comments to be printed on cover sheets. A maximum of 50 comments can
be registered, each of which can be up to 36 single-byte characters.
Paper Tray Attributes

Set a paper size and a paper type load in each tray.
Refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.170).
Tools
312
Accounting
Accounting
In [Accounting], you can register the users that will use the machine, and set the operation
settings of the Accounting feature.
For more information about this feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.425).
Create/View User Accounts .......................................................................................................................................................313
View Accounts...............................................................................................................................................................................316
Reset User Accounts ....................................................................................................................................................................317
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs) ...........................................................................................................................318
Accounting Type...........................................................................................................................................................................318
Accounting Login Screen Settings............................................................................................................................................319
Fax Billing Data ............................................................................................................................................................................320
Accounting/Billing Device Settings..........................................................................................................................................320
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Accounting].

Tools
Create/View User Accounts

5
To enable the Accounting feature, register user IDs and user names to authenticate
registered users.
You can set a limit on the number of pages for each user of the machine. You can also check
the cumulative number of pages for each user registered. Up to 1,000 user data can be
registered. The settings described here are identical with [Create/View User Accounts] under
[Authentication] of [Authentication/Security Settings].
Important • Before registering users, refer to "Accounting Type" (P.318) and set the Accounting Type you use.
Note • This item does not appear when [Network Accounting] is selected in "Accounting Type" (P.318).
1 Select [Create/View User Accounts].

2 Select a [User ID] for which you want to
register a user, and then select [Create/Delete].
Note • A 4-digit number displayed on the left of
each user ID is a user control number.
• Selecting a line displayed as [<Available>]
displays a screen to enter user ID. Enter a user
ID, and then select [Save].
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen or
• Entering a 4-digit user ID number with the numeric keypad displays the specified number at the top
of the column.
313
5 Tools
3 Select any item, and set it.

4 Select [Close].
User ID
Enter a user ID to use the machine. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.
User Name
Set a user name. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.
Passcode
Set a passcode. Setting a passcode is strongly recommended for security. Set a passcode
from 4 to 12 digits.
Tools
Note • When [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] is set to [On], a passcode entry is required upon user
authentication.
5 For information on how to change your passcode later, refer to "Changing Passcode" (P.450).
E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address with up to 128 characters. The address set here will be set as [From]
under [E-mail].
Device Access
Set whether to allow the machine use.
 Enabled
Allows the machine use. When the smart card reader is connected, you can select the
settings for each Login Type.
 Disabled
Prohibits the machine use.
Service Access
You can place restrictions on the use and the maximum number of allowed pages for each
of the Copy, Fax, Scan, and Print services.
1 Select [Service Access].
314
Accounting
2 Select a feature to restrict.
3 To set account limits, select [Change Account Limit], and then enter the maximum number
of pages with the numeric keypad.
 Feature Access
Set access restrictions on features.
 Free Access
The feature is not restricted.

No Access to Copy/Fax/Scan/Print Service
Allows you to restrict the use of the Copy, Fax, Scan, or Print service.
Tools
 Change Account Limit
Set the maximum number of pages for copying, scanning, or printing.
You can specify a number from 1 to 9,999,999 (7 digits) pages in 1 page increments.
5
 The following limits can be placed on the Copy service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to Copy
Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
Maximum number of black-and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999

The following limits can be placed on the Fax service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access] or [No Access to Fax Service]
 The following limits can be placed on the Scan service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to Scan
Service]
 The following limits can be placed on the Print service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], or [No Access to Print Service]
User Role
 User Role
Allows you to select a user role for a user.

User
No special authority is given to this user role.

System Administrator
The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following operation:
- Operate folders
- Operate job flow sheets
315
5 Tools
- Change the passcode of the system administrator

 Account Administrator
The following authorities are given:
- Create, delete, change (except for passcode), and view (unavailable depending on
some settings) user information
- Create, delete, change, and view accounting
- Change an Alternative Name for Account ID or Mask Account ID
- Print an Auditron Report for each user
 Add This User to Authorization Group

Allows you to select an authorization group for a user.
Reset User Account

Deletes all registered information for a selected user.
 Reset
Deletes the registered user data. Once deleted, the data cannot be restored.
Important • All job flow sheets, folders, and files within folders belonging to the user are deleted. If the user is
Tools
owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of files is left remaining within a folder
for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.
 Cancel
5 Cancels the deletion of the user data.
Reset Total Impressions

Resets the current cumulative number of pages for a selected user, returning it to zero.
 Reset
Resets the current cumulative number of pages for users. Once reset, the previous count
cannot be restored.
 Cancel
Cancels resetting the cumulative number of pages.
View Accounts
Selecting [Xerox Standard Accounting] on the [Accounting Type] screen allows you to check
the following for each registered user or group: (1) the maximum number of times that the
account can be used for each service, and (2) how many times the account has been used
for each service.
Note • You can register users and groups on CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to
the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
1 Click [View Accounts].

2 Select [User Account] or [Group Account]. If you select [User Account], select also the user
ID to check.
3 Click [Account Details].
316
Accounting
Reset User Accounts

You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation, or
reset the auditron data. It is also available to print contents for confirmation before
resetting. The settings described here are identical with [Reset User Accounts] under
[Authentication] of [Authentication/Security Settings].
Note • This item does not appear when [Network Accounting] or [Xerox Standard Accounting] is selected in
[Accounting Type].
 All User Accounts

Deletes all information registered for each user. It also deletes all data including the
maximum number of pages, cumulative number of pages, and printer auditron data.
Important • All job flow sheets, folders, and documents within folders belonging to the user are deleted. If the
user is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of files is left remaining within a
folder for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.
 All Feature Access Settings

Resets the feature access limit for all users.
 All Account Limits

Resets the maximum number of pages for all users to the default (9999999 pages).
Tools
 Total Impressions
Resets all accounting data for all users including the system administrator. The number of
pages is also reset to 0.
5
 All Authorization Groups
Delinks users from authorization groups, and links those users to the default authorization
group.
 Meter (Print Jobs)

Resets all printer auditron, and deletes automatically registered job owner names. The
number of pages printed is also reset to 0.
Note • [Meter (Print Jobs)] is displayed when [Disable Accounting] is selected for [Print Service] in the
[Auditron Mode] screen under [Accounting Type].
 Print the Meter Report

Prints a meter report, which is helpful when you check counters before you reset or delete
them.
Note • [Meter (Print Jobs)] is displayed when [Disable Accounting] is selected for [Print Service] in the
[Auditron Mode] screen under [Accounting Type].
 Print the Auditron Report

Prints a report including contents registered information to reset or a report including
contents administration data to reset.
The report is available for confirmation before resetting.
 Reset
Deletes or resets the data for the selected item.
317
5 Tools
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)

You can check or reset the total impression copied using the System Administration mode
on the screen.
The total impressions are counted up to 9,999,999 pages.
Note • This item does not appear when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
Accounting Type
You can select whether or not to use the Accounting feature.
Accounting Disabled
Does not perform accounting.
Local Accounting
Performs accounting.
Network Accounting
Performs accounting based on the user information managed on a remote service. User
Tools
information is registered on the remote service.

Note • When [Network Accounting] is selected, users are prompted to enter their Account ID on the [Login]
5 screen that is displayed when attempting to use services required for accounting.
For more information on Network Accounting, refer to "Types of Account Administration" (P.429).
Xerox Standard Accounting

Accounting is carried out based on the user information and account information pre-
registered on the machine.
Auditron Mode
Allows you to set whether or not to enable the Auditron feature for the following services:

Copy 
Fax/Internet Fax 
Store to Folder

E-mail 
Network Scanning 
Scan to PC

Store to USB 
Store & Send Link 
Store to WSD
 Media Print - Text  Media Print - Photos  Print

• The services displayed on the screen vary depending on the machine configuration.
• When [Enable Accounting] is selected for a service, [ ] is displayed on the button of the applicable
service on the Services Home screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at the lower left of the
Services Home screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
• Print jobs may be canceled depending on the settings in "Receive Control" (P.330).
Verify User Details

Allows you to set whether or not to verify user information.
Selecting [Yes] also allows you to select [For printer/Direct Fax Jobs].
Customize User Prompts

Allows you to set the type of user information used for authentication.
Note • Account ID is used for accounting.
318
Accounting
 Display User ID & Account ID Prompts

Prompts users to enter both their user ID and Account ID.
 Display User ID Prompt Only
Prompts users to enter their user ID only.

Display Account ID Prompt Only
Prompts users to enter their Account ID only.

Display No Prompts
Does not prompt users to enter their user ID or Account ID.
Accounting Login Screen Settings

You can configure Accounting settings.
Alternative Name for User ID

If required, you can change the indication "UserID" on the [Login] screen that appears when
the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel or the login information area on the touch
screen is pressed to another name such as "User Name" or "Number". The alias can be set to
Tools
1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note • The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.
Mask User ID (***) 5

You can set how an entered user ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
security as required.
 Show
As you enter the user ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.
 Hide
As you enter the user ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).
Alternative Name for Account ID

If required, you can change the indication "Account ID" on the [Login] screen that appears
when the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel or the login information area on the
touch screen is pressed to another name such as "Account Name" or "Number". The alias can
be set to 1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note • This item is displayed when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
• The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.
Mask Account ID (***)

You can set how an entered Account ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
Note • This item is displayed when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
 Show
As you enter the Account ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.
 Hide
As you enter the Account ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).
319
5 Tools
Display Billing Information Upon Login

You can set whether to display billing information per user when a user logs in.
If you select [Enabled], users can check their billing information: [Impressions], [Account
Limit], and [Balance] for each of the services (copying, printing, and scanning).
Note • This item is displayed when [Login to Local Accounts] is selected in [Login Type] and [Local
Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
• Only the billing information for the services that the user is allowed to use will be displayed.
• When a user logs in as the system administrator, billing information will not be displayed.
Fax Billing Data

You can configure fax billing settings.
Important • To register the billing data, enable the Auditron feature for fax/Internet fax under Accounting in
advance. For details on how to enable the Auditron feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.318).
Note • Set the connection time for one unit charge in each of the time bands (daytime/night/midnight) in
[Billing]. For more information on how to set [Billing], refer to "Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time,
Billing - Midnight" (P.310).
• The registered details can be confirmed by printing the Billing Data List. For information on how to
print, refer to "Billing Data List" (P.126).
Tools
1 Select [Fax Billing Data].

2 Select [Charge Rate per Unit].
5
 Charge Rate per Unit
This is a communication charge per unit. You
can set a value from 0.1 to 255.9 seconds in 0.1
second increments.
3 Select [Change Settings].

4 Enter an amount with the keyboard displayed
on the screen or the numeric keypad.
5 Select [Save].
Accounting/Billing Device Settings

You can configure the accounting or billing device settings.
Important • When an accounting or a billing device is connected to the machine, be sure to set a password and
that users other than the system administrator do not disconnect the device by mistake.
• The features described in this section may not appear for some models. Optional components or
related products provided by Fuji Xerox are required to use the features. For more information,
Connect with Accounting/Billing Device

Allows you to select whether or not to use the connected accounting or billing device from
[None] or [Connected].
320
Accounting
Note • While a device for maintenance is connected, you cannot change the setting.
Accounting/Billing Device
Select the type of the accounting/billing device connected to the machine.
Important • If a device connected does not match the device selected in [Accounting/Billing Device], an error
occurs. Jobs related to the accounting/billing device cannot be performed until the error is resolved.
For information on how to resolve the error, refer to "Error Code" (P.494).
Track Print Jobs

This feature is effective for the Print service.
Select whether or not to track billing information for the print jobs. Select from [No Tracking]
and [Track with Accounting/Billing Device].
This feature is available for all accounting/billing devices.
Track Scan/Fax Jobs

This feature is effective for the Scan, Fax, Internet Fax, and Server Fax services.
Select whether or not to track billing information for the scan, fax, Internet fax, and server
fax jobs. Select from [No Tracking] and [Track with Accounting/Billing Device].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Coin Kit and Dispenser.
Tools
Interrupt Mode
This feature is effective for the Copy service. 5
Select whether or not to enable the Interrupt mode. Select from [Disabled] and [Enabled].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Card Activated -
Cumulative and Smart Card Reader.
Job with Insufficient Credit

This feature is effective for the Copy, Print, and Scan services.
Select the operation of the machine when the amount remaining in the accounting/billing
device becomes insufficient. Select from [Delete Job Immediately] and [Hold Job].
This feature is available for accounting/billing devices other than Card Activated -
Cumulative and Smart Card Reader.
Charge Print Jobs

This feature is effective for the Print service.
Select how the print job performed is charged. Select from [Charge by Card Number] and
[Do not Charge by Card Number].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative and Card Activated - Subtractive.
Track with Cumulative Device

This feature is effective for the Copy and Print services.
Select the timing that the amount for copy or print job is charged. Select from [Track with
Accounting Device] and [High Speed Printing].
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative.
Scan Ahead for Copy Job

This feature is effective for the Copy service.
Select whether or not to enable the Scan Ahead feature for copy jobs. Select from [Disabled]
and [Enabled].
321
5 Tools
This feature is available for Card Activated - Cumulative, and Card Activated - Subtractive.
Important • Some of the products listed above may not be available for this feature depending on the types and
settings. For information on the products available for this feature and on how to change the
settings, contact our Customer Support Center.
Tools
322
In [Authentication/Security Settings], you can configure the registration and authentication

of a user and security settings.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.425).
System Administrator Settings .................................................................................................................................................323
Authentication..............................................................................................................................................................................324
Allow User to Disable Active Settings......................................................................................................................................332
Job Status Default........................................................................................................................................................................332
Overwrite Hard Disk.....................................................................................................................................................................333
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Authentication/Security Settings].

Tools
System Administrator Settings
In [System Administrator Settings], you can set the system administrator ID and passcode.
We recommend setting the system administrator ID and passcode to prevent unauthorized 5
setting changes and ensure security.
System Administrator's Login ID

Set the system administrator's user ID. Enter the ID from 1 to 32 single-byte characters.
Note • The default of the system administrator's user ID is "11111".
1 Select [System Administrator's Login ID].

2 Select [On].
3 Select [Keyboard].
4 Enter the system administrator's ID with up to
32 characters, and then select [Save].
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to re-enter the same
system administrator's ID in [Re-enter System
Administrator's Login ID].
6 Select [Save].
7 A confirmation window appears. Select [Yes] to confirm your entry.
System Administrator's Passcode

Set the passcode for the system administrator.
Setting a passcode is strongly recommended to enhance security.
Note • The default of the system administrator's passcode is "x-admin".
The system administrator's passcode set here is used when [Passcode Entry for Control
Panel Login] is set to [On] under [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] >
[Passcode Policy].
323
5 Tools
Set the passcode after setting the system administrator's user ID. You can set the passcode
from 4 to 12 characters.
For more information about [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login], refer to "Passcode Policy" (P.329).
1 Select [System Administrator's Passcode].

2 Select [New Passcode].
3 Enter a new passcode (4 to 12 digits) using the
keyboard displayed, and then select [Save].
Note • If no passcode is set, leave the text boxes
blank and select [Save].
4 Select [Retype Passcode], enter the same
passcode, and then select [Save].
5 Select [Save].
6 A confirmation window appears. Select [Yes] to confirm your entry.
Authentication
Tools
In [Authentication], you can set the following items.

5 Login Type ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 324
Access Control............................................................................................................................................................................... 325
Create/View User Accounts....................................................................................................................................................... 326
Reset User Accounts.................................................................................................................................................................... 326
Create Authorization Groups .................................................................................................................................................... 326
User Details Setup ....................................................................................................................................................................... 327
Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator.......................................................................................................... 329
Passcode Policy............................................................................................................................................................................. 329
Charge/Private Print Settings ................................................................................................................................................... 330
Receive Control............................................................................................................................................................................. 330
Login Type
Allows you to select a type of authentication.
 No Login Required
Does not use the Authentication feature.
 Login to Local Accounts

Authenticates users based on the user information registered on the machine.
Note • When [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, the machine enters the Login mode and [Login] is
displayed at the lower left of the Services Home screen.
 Login to Remote Accounts (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Authenticates users based on the user information registered on a remote authentication
server.
Note • When [Login to Remote Accounts] is selected, the machine enters the Login mode and [Login] is
displayed at the lower left of the Services Home screen.
324
Access Control
Allows you to restrict access to the machine or each service. Once the access control is
enabled, user authentication is required to use the machine or the services.
Important • When a user is authenticated by a remote authentication server (except ApeosWare Authentication
Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent), the authenticated user can access the services
through the control panel based on the permission information obtained from the remote server.
• When a guest user is permitted to use the machine, access restriction for each service cannot be
specified for the guest user. If you want to restrict a guest user to use the machine, refer to "Guest
User" (P.328).
 Device Access
Allows you to set whether or not to restrict buttons operation on the control panel of the
machine.
Select [Unlocked] or [Locked].
 Service Access
Allows you to set whether or not to restrict access to each of the following services.
Note • When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service, [ ] is displayed on the button of the applicable
service on the Services Home screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at the lower left of the
Services Home screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
Tools
• When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service, the applicable service is not displayed on the
Services Home screen. The services are displayed after authentication.
For more information on how to set the login type, refer to "Login Type" (P.324).
 Copy 5
Restricts access to the Copy service on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Copy service, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.

Fax/Internet Fax
Restricts access to the Fax / IP Fax (SIP) / Internet Fax / Direct Fax service on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Fax / IP Fax (SIP) / Internet Fax service,
the use of the store programming is also restricted.
 Scan
Restricts access to the E-mail, Store to Folder, Scan to PC, Store to USB, Store & Send Link,
Store to WSD, and Network Scanning services and features on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Scan services, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.

Media Print - Text
Restricts access to the Media Print - Text service on the machine.

Media Print - Photos
Restricts access to the Media Print - Photos service on the machine.
 Send from Folder
Restricts access to the Send from Folder service on the machine.
 Stored Programming
Restricts access to the Stored Programming service on the machine.
 Job Flow Sheets
Restricts access to the Job Flow Sheets service on the machine.
325
5 Tools
 Web Applications (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Restricts access to the Web Applications service on the machine.
 Custom Services
Restricts access to custom services on the machine.
Note • This feature is available when any custom service is installed on the machine. For more information
on the custom services, contact our Customer Support Center.
 Print
Restricts users to print jobs stored on the machine, such as the Secure Print and Sample
Set jobs.
This feature also restricts the submission of print jobs from a computer via a network.
To use the Authentication feature, authentication information such as a user ID and
passcode needs to be entered in a print driver.
If authentication fails, the print data sent to the machine is saved in the machine or
deleted according to the Charge Print settings.
For information on how to select an authentication type, refer to "Login Type" (P.324).
For information on Charge Print, refer to the manuals contained in the DVD provided with the Print Server.
 Feature Access
Tools
Set [Color Copying], [Print Files from Folder], and [Retrieve Files from Folder].
5 Create/View User Accounts

To enable the Accounting feature, register user IDs and user names to authenticate
registered users.
You can set a limit on the number of pages for each user of the machine. You can also check
the cumulative number of pages for each user registered. Up to 1,000 user data can be
registered. The settings described here are identical with [Create/View User Accounts] under
[Accounting].
Refer to "Create/View User Accounts" (P.313).
Reset User Accounts

You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation, or
reset the auditron data. It is also available to print contents for confirmation before
resetting. The settings described here are identical with [Reset User Accounts] under
[Accounting].
Refer to "Reset User Accounts" (P.317).
Create Authorization Groups

System administrators can give login users authority to use some features that are restricted
for login users. The login users can be divided into different authorization groups.
Note • Up to 20 groups can be registered.
1 Select [Create Authorization Groups].

2 Select a [Group Name], and then select
[Create/Delete].
3 Select and set any item.
326
 Group Name
Enter a group name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
 Restrict Recipient Selection Method

When [Only From Address Book] is selected for [Restrict Recipient Selection Method] under
[Tools] > [Common Service Settings] > [Other Settings], a transmission to a recipient who is
not registered on the Address Book is restricted for the Fax / Internet Fax or E-mail Service.
Set whether or not to cancel the restriction.
 Restrict User to Edit Address Book

When [Yes] is selected for [Restrict User to Edit Address Book] under [Tools] > [Common
Service Settings] > [Other Settings], local user cannot register / edit the Address Book. Set
whether or not to cancel the restriction.
Note • When [Only From Address Book] is selected for [Restrict Recipient Selection Method] under [Tools] >
[Common Service Settings] > [Other Settings], select [No Restriction] to enable local user to register /
edit the Address Book.
 Allow User to Disable Active Settings

Select whether or not to permit the group members to temporarily disable the forcible
printing features, such as the Force Watermark, Force Secure Watermark, Print Universal
Unique ID, and Force Annotation features, and to allow the machine to process a job.
Tools
 When Protection Code is Detected 5

Select whether or not to temporarily allow the machine to process a job even if the machine
detects a protection code embedded in a document.
User Details Setup

Set the information required when carrying out authentication.
 Alternative Name for User ID

If required, you can change the indication "UserID" on the [Login] screen that appears when
the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel is pressed to another name such as "User
Name" or "Number". The alias can be set to 1 to 15 single-byte characters.
Note • The name changed is also printed in a report or a list.
 Mask User ID (***)

You can set how an entered user ID is shown on the screen. Use this feature to enhance
When you select [Show], the characters you enter are echoed on the screen in the normal
way as you enter the user ID. When you select [Hide], the characters you enter is hidden as
a row of asterisks (*****) as you enter the user ID.
 Failed Access Log

Set the failure count to detect unauthorized access. An error is logged if authentication fails
the number of times specified here within a predetermined time (10 minutes).
 Logout Confirmation Screen

Set whether or not to display a logout confirmation screen every time a user session ends.
327
5 Tools
 User ID for Login

Set whether or not to make the user ID entry field on the user login screen case-sensitive.
When you select [Case Sensitive], authentication is performed using the User ID as
registered (including upper and lower cases). When you select [Non-Case Sensitive],
authentication is performed with case ignored even if the user ID has both upper and lower
cases.
Important • Do not change the setting while a file is stored for the Private Charge Print. Otherwise, you may
encounter problems, such as being unable to print. Change the setting after the machine prints all
the files stored.
• Do not select [Case Sensitive] when the machine stores user IDs such as “ABC” and “abc” which are
regarded as the same ID under the setting. If you select [Case Sensitive], it may cause the problem
and those IDs may not be displayed. Before you select the setting, correct those user IDs to
distinguish them.
 When Smart Card Reader is Connected

Set whether or not to enable user ID authentication when [Login to Local Accounts] is
selected and the smart card reader is connected.
When [Smart Card Login] is selected, user ID authentication cannot be used. When [Smart
Card or Control Panel Login] is selected, both smart card authentication and user ID
authentication can be used.
Tools
 Account Auto Setup for Card Login

Set whether or not to register new user information when [Login to Local Accounts] is
5 selected and an unregistered user holds a card over the smart card reader.
When [Disabled] is selected, the machine does not register the user. When [Enabled] is
selected, the machine registers the user automatically.
Note • When [Enabled] is selected, [User Name], [Service Access], and [Add User To Authorization Group]
will be displayed.
• Set the user name by selecting [User Name].
• When [Service Access] is selected, [Copy], [Fax], [Scan], and [Print] will be displayed.
You can set [Feature Access] and [Change Account Limit] for each item.
• When [Add User To Authorization Group] is selected, you can select a user role and an authorization
group for the user.
• When [Passcode Entry for Smart Card Login] under [Tools] > [Authentication/Security Settings] >
[Authentication] > [Passcode Policy] is set to [On], you need to enter the passcode twice for the auto
assign.
 Guest User
Set whether or not to permit a guest user when [Login to Remote Accounts] is selected. Set
the guest user passcode from 4 to 12 digits.
Note • Access restriction for each service cannot be specified for the guest user.
 Use of Smart Card

Set whether or not to use smart card authentication.
 Smart Card Link Mode

Set whether or not to require a passcode for smart card authentication when [Login to
Remote Accounts] is selected.
 Smart Card Certificate Verification

Set whether or not to verify the smart cart certificate when a user uses the smart card.
When [Enabled] is selected, the owner of the smart card is verified not only by PIN code
verification but by certification verification of the smart card and private key match. In this
case, the upper level CA certificate of the smart card certification must be registered on the
machine.
328
When [Disabled] is selected, the owner of the smart card is verified by PIN code verification.
Note • This item is displayed when the optional Extensible Customization Kit is installed.
 Kerberos Server Certificate Verification

Set whether or not to verify the Kerberos server certificate when a user uses the Kerberos
server as a remote authentication server.
Note • This item is displayed when the optional Extensible Customization Kit is installed.
 Smart Card Logout Timing

Select the logout method for smart card authentication when a contactless smart card is
used for authentication.
When [Log Out when Card is Removed] is selected, you can logout from the machine by
removing the smart card from the smart card reader. When [Log Out from Control Panel] is
selected, you can logout by operating the touch screen or control panel.
 Save remote accounts in this machine

Select whether or not to save the user information used for remote authentication. While
the user information is saved in the machine, the machine can authenticate the user using
the information saved in the machine even when the remote server is off.
Note • This setting applies only to a user who is authenticated by smart cards.
Tools
 Delete Remote Accounts
Select whether or not to delete the user information saved in the machine for remote
authentication. Select from [Do Not Delete], [Weekly], and [Monthly]. 5
For [Weekly], you can set the day and time. For [Monthly], set the date and time.
Note • This setting applies only to a user who is authenticated by smart cards.
Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator

This feature protects the settings from being changed by someone impersonating your
system administrator. If authentication for a system administrator's ID fails more than
specified times continuously, access is denied.
You can specify a login attempt count from 1 to 10.
Note • The failure count is reset when the machine is restarted.
• To cancel the access rejection state, restart the machine by switching off and on the power.
Passcode Policy
 Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login

You can set whether a passcode is required when the system administrator or a user uses the
machine. Selecting [On] enables [System Administrator's Passcode] setting and [Passcode]
setting for [Create/View User Accounts].
Selecting [Off] does not require the passcode, even if a passcode is set in the above settings.
Important • The setting of [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] is used for authentication on the machine. A
passcode must always be entered when accessing from remote devices using CentreWare Internet
Services or the like, regardless of the use of passcode setting. Depending on authentication
procedures, a passcode may be required for other processes as well.
Note • The system administrator's passcode is also required when you change settings from CentreWare
Internet Services.
 Passcode Entry for Smart Card Login

You can set whether a passcode is required for smart card authentication when [Login to
Local Accounts] is selected.
329
5 Tools
 Minimum Passcode Length

Set this item when you specify the minimum number of digits allowed for a passcode.
Set a value from 4 to 12 in 1 digit increments.
Note • This is only applicable to login users (not applicable to the system administrator and guests).
• Registered users can be authenticated with a passcode less than the minimum number of digits.
Charge/Private Print Settings

You can set how received print jobs should be handled.
You can directly print jobs and temporarily store print jobs to Charge Print or Private Charge
Print for stored files.
The Charge Print feature prints the print jobs of authenticated users. But, using this feature,
you can also temporarily store print jobs and print them later by operating the machine. If
[Save as Charge Print Job] is selected, print jobs received are saved by a user ID for storage
set in a print driver.
The Private Charge Print feature stores jobs to the machine, using the login user ID or Sub
user ID at print instruction. You can print the jobs later by operating the machine. Only the
files of the login user and sub users linked are displayed on the touch screen, therefore, it can
help ensure privacy protection as well as prevent output from being left in the tray.
Note • For more information on the Charge Print and Private Charge Print features, refer to "11 Job Status"
Tools
> "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" and "12 Computer Operations" > "Print" in the User Guide.
To use Charge Print or Private Charge Print, [Receive Control] must be set. For more information, refer to "Receive Control"
(P.330).
5
Receive Control
You can set how received print jobs should be handled.
For information about printing from a print driver, refer to "12 Computer Operations" in the User Guide.
For information about printing or deleting the print job saved, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs"
> "Private Charge Print" in the User Guide, and about deleting a Private Charge Print job with an invalid user ID, refer to
"Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID" (P.115).
1 Select [Receive Control], and then select [Change Settings].

2 Select any item.
3 According to the selected item, set the
processing to apply to jobs.
4 Select [Save] after the setting is completed.
 According to Print Auditron

Specifies how print jobs should be handled when the Authentication and Accounting
features are enabled and [Print] under [Service Access] is set to [Locked].
Note • When the Authentication and Accounting features are disabled and [Print] under [Service Access] is
set to [Unlocked], the settings specified in the print driver are applied.
When [According to Print Auditron] is selected, [Job Login Success], [Job Login Failure], and
[Job without User ID] are displayed.
330
 Job Login Success

Set the processing to apply to successfully authenticated jobs.
- To print jobs, select [Print Job].
- To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Private Charge Print Job].
Note • When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in Remote
Folder, and Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
 Job Login Failure
Set the processing to apply to jobs authentication failed (whose information such as the
user ID and passcode has been incorrectly registered on the print driver).
- To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
- To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
 Job without User ID
Set the processing to apply to jobs with no authentication user ID attached (such as print
jobs sent from CentreWare Internet Services or e-mail print).
- To save jobs as Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
Tools
Note • [Job without User ID] is automatically changed to [Print Job] on the machine when you select as
follows on CentreWare Internet Services: [Properties] > [Security] > [Authentication Configuration] >
[Non-Account Print]. When [Job without User ID] is set to [Save as Charge Print Job] or [Delete Job],
the [Non-account Print] check box on CentreWare Internet Services is deselected automatically. 5
 Save as Private Charge Print Job
Regardless of whether the Authentication feature is being used or not, all jobs that have a
user ID are saved as Private Charge Print. You can also specify how to handle the job that
does not have a user ID or a PJL command.
Important • When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, all the print jobs that have user IDs are saved
regardless of whether or not being successfully authenticated. To minimize the unnecessary print
jobs, specify an expiration date, so that they can be automatically deleted after a specified period of
time. Or the system administrator can manually delete them. For details on how to specify an
expiration date, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.283). For details on how to delete the print jobs
manually, refer to "Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID" (P.115).
Note • When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in Remote
Folder, and Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, [Job without User ID] and [Non-PJL
Command Job(s)] are displayed.
 Job without User ID
Set how to process jobs with no user ID attached.
- To save jobs as Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
Note • [Job without User ID] is automatically changed to [Print Job] on the machine when you select as
follows on CentreWare Internet Services: [Properties] > [Security] > [Authentication Configuration] >
[Non-Account Print]. When [Job without User ID] is set to [Save as Charge Print Job] or [Delete Job],
the [Non-account Print] check box on CentreWare Internet Services is deselected automatically.
 Non-PJL Command Job(s)
Set how to handle the job that does not have a PJL command. The job will be
distinguished by the existence of the user ID, and will be handled according to the
following settings.
331
5 Tools
- Select [Do Not Use At All] to apply the [Job without User ID] setting regardless of
whether the job has a user ID.
- Select [Use When Available] to specify how to handle the job that has a user ID.
To print jobs, select [Print Job].

To save jobs as Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].


To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Private Charge Print Job].

To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].


 Save as Charge Print Job

Regardless of whether the Authentication feature is being used or not, all received jobs are
saved as Charge Print.
Important • When using [Save as Charge Print Job], all the print jobs are saved regardless of whether or not being
successfully authenticated. To minimize the unnecessary print jobs, specify an expiration date, so
that they can be automatically deleted after a specified period of time. Or the system administrator
can manually delete them. For details on how to specify an expiration date, refer to "Stored File
Settings" (P.283). For details on how to delete the print jobs manually, refer to "11 Job Status" >
"Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" > "Charge Print" in the User Guide.
Note • When [Save as Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in Remote Folder,
and Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
Tools
Allow User to Disable Active Settings
5 Use this feature when you want to use active settings for most jobs but not for specific jobs.
You can temporarily disable active settings such as Force Watermark, Force Secure
Watermark, Print Universal Unique ID, and Force Annotation features that have been
enabled.
This feature is applicable to Copy, Print from Folder, Print Stored File, Media Print - Text, and
Media Print - Photos jobs when [Enable Active Settings] is selected (for jobs such as Fax,
Client Print, and Report, you cannot disable active settings).
This option is displayed when [Enable Active Settings] is selected for [Allow User to Disable
Active Settings] for the authorization group where the login user belongs.
Note • If this setting is set to [Enable Active Settings] while a job is in progress, the setting is not effective
for the job.
• You can disable active settings even when you select a file in a folder using the Job Flow feature and
manually execute a job.
• Users with system administrator role can configure this feature regardless of authorization group.
• The Watermark feature and the Secure Watermark feature specified by user using
TrustMarkingBasic (sold separately) or copy are not disabled.
For more information about Force Watermark, refer to "Watermark" (P.181).
For more information about Force Secure Watermark, refer to "Secure Watermark" (P.183).
For more information about Print Universal Unique ID, refer to "Print Universal Unique ID" (P.186).
For settings of authorization group, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.425).
Job Status Default

You can hide active jobs, completed jobs, and job logs from unauthenticated users or non-
job owners, to protect privacy and prevent leakage of confidential information.
Note • If you set to hide job details, you cannot stop or delete jobs you instructed. Therefore, you cannot
cancel jobs in the case of operational error of copies or wrong transmission of faxes.
Active Jobs View

Select whether or not to hide active jobs from local users.
332
Completed Jobs View

Select from [All Job Viewing at All Times], [Require Login to View Jobs], and [No Job
Viewing].
 Access To
This feature is displayed when [Require Login to View Jobs] is selected.
Select either [All Jobs] or [Jobs Run By Login User Only].
 Hide Job Details

This feature is displayed when [Allow Job Viewing at All Times] or [Require Login to View
Jobs] is selected.
Select either [No] or [Yes].
Overwrite Hard Disk

Select whether or not to conduct hard disk overwriting.
When copy, fax, scan, or print processing is completed, the data is deleted from the hard disk
and the area on which the deleted data was stored is automatically overwritten with blank
data. This feature prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the data recorded on the
Tools
hard disk. It also applies to copy document and other information stored temporarily by the
system.
The following option can be configured.
Note • To perform the Overwrite Hard Disk feature, an optional component is required. For more
5
Number of Overwrites
You can set the number of overwrites.
Important • If the machine is turned off during the overwriting, unfinished files may remain on the hard disk. The
overwriting will resume if you turn the machine on again with the unfinished files remaining on the
hard disk.
• Overwriting once erases the data, but overwriting three times makes it even more definite that the
data cannot be restored. It does, however, take longer.
• During overwriting, normal operations may be slowed down.
Support Center.
For more information on how to check the status during overwriting, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.130).
 Prerequisite for Using the Data Security Feature

The system administrator must follow the instructions below:

To protect the data deleted from or stored on the hard disk, the following settings are
required:
- Number of Overwrites: [1 Overwrite] or [3 Overwrites]
- Data Encryption: [On]: an encryption key of 12 digits
- Service Representative Restricted Operation: [Yes]
 Change the system administrator's factory default passcode (x-admin). Register a new
passcode of 7 characters or more (maximum 12 characters). Be careful not to register a
passcode that can be easily assumed and not to store the registered passcode on a
location that is easily accessible to other persons.
Important • If the system administrator's user ID and passcode are forgotten, the machine configuration will
not be able to recover in case of malfunction.
333
5 Tools
 Set [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] to [On].

 Set [Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator] to 5 times.
 Note that the hard disk security will not be warranted if you do not correctly follow the
above setting instructions.
For more information on how to set data encryption, refer to "Data Encryption" (P.201).
For more information on how to set service representative restricted operation, refer to "Service Rep. Restricted Operation"
(P.203).
For more information on how to set [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login], refer to "Passcode Policy" (P.329).
For more information on how to set the system administrator's user ID, refer to "System Administrator's Login ID" (P.323).
The manager (of the organization that this machine is used for) must follow the
instructions below:
 Assign an appropriate person as a system administrator and manage and train the
person properly.
 When turning off the machine, make sure no operation is running. Train the users to turn
off the machine after an active operation completes, if any.
 Note that the Data Security feature is used to protect deleted document data from being
recovered; it does not protect files stored in folders in the hard disk.
Tools
 Install an anti-bugging device on the internal network that the machine with the Data
Security Kit is located on, and perform the network settings properly to protect the
machine from interceptions.
5  To block unauthorized access, install a firewall device between the external network and
the internal network that the machine is located on.

Set the passcode and encryption key according to the following rules:
- Do not use easily assured character string
- Use both characters and numerics
For more information on encryption key, refer to "Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.202).
334
6 CentreWare Internet Services
Settings
This chapter describes how to set up CentreWare Internet Services.

 Installation of CentreWare Internet Services .................................................................336

Starting CentreWare Internet Services..............................................................................338
 Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services ....................339
6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings
Installation of CentreWare Internet Services
CentreWare Internet Services provides services such as displaying the status of the machine
and jobs, and altering configurations using a web browser in a TCP/IP environment.
Preparations
Prepare a computer supporting the TCP/IP protocol and a Web browser such as Internet
Explorer® or Safari to use CentreWare Internet Services.
CentreWare Internet Services Settings
Refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Problems" (P.485) when any troubles occur during the configuration.
Configuration on the Machine

The following describes the configuration procedure for using CentreWare Internet Services
on the machine.
1 Display the [Tools] screen.

passcode, and then select [Enter].
6 Note • The default user ID is "11111".
2 Enable the Internet Services (HTTP) port on the machine.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [Internet Services (HTTP)], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
3 Set an IP address.
If an IP address is already set, you can skip this step. For an environment with DHCP or
BOOTP, configure the method for obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be
obtained automatically or manual configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an IP
address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.221).
4 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen appears.
5 Select [Close].
Note • Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message displayed on
the screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
6 After the machine reboots, you can print out a configuration report to confirm that the port
for CentreWare Internet Services is enabled and TCP/IP is set up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120).
336
Installation of CentreWare Internet Services
7 Start CentreWare Internet Services to confirm whether the service is available or not.

6
337
Starting CentreWare Internet Services
To use CentreWare Internet Services, perform the following procedure on your computer.
When Login Type is selected on the machine, authentication is required to access the
machine via a web browser.
1 Start a web browser.

2 Enter the machine's IP address or the Internet address in the address box on the web
browser, and press the <Enter> key.

Example of the IP address entry
http://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
 Example of the Internet address entry (when the machine's Internet address is
myhost.example.com)
http://myhost.example.com/
6 Note • If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered on the
domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address combining the host
name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is
"example.com" then the Internet address is "myhost.example.com".
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.
• If using the Authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode in the [User
Name] and [Password] fields. If you are not sure about the user ID and passcode, consult your
system administrator.
The features you can operate vary depending on the system administrator's authority that was
given to a user.
• If communications are encrypted; when the [Enabled] check box is selected under [Security] > [SSL/
TLS Settings] > [HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication] on the [Properties] tab, you must specify an address
that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
https://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
https://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
Example of the Internet address entry
https://myhost.example.com/
If CentreWare Internet Services is not displayed, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Problems" (P.485).
338
Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services
CentreWare Internet Services enables you to change various settings on the machine from
a computer.
Note • Confirm that the port in use is enabled in [Properties] tab > [Connectivity] > [Port Settings] of
CentreWare Internet Services when an item that you want to set is not displayed.
• You cannot change settings from CentreWare Internet Services while Smart WelcomEyes is
detecting human presence or the control panel is being used. You can change settings after the
machine resets the settings automatically (Auto Clear). For information about Auto Clear, refer to
"Auto Clear" (P.161).
• You may be prompted to enter your user name and passcode when you attempt to change settings

on CentreWare Internet Services. In that case, enter the system administrator's user ID and
passcode into the [User Name] and [Password] fields. The default user ID is "11111" and passcode is
"x-admin".
You can configure the following settings with CentreWare Internet Services:
Note • For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet
Services screen to see help.
Item How to Select Overview/Reference

Usage Counters Select from [Status] tab Displays the total number of pages printed
> [Counters] for each service.
Total Runtime Select from [Status] tab Displays the cumulative time of runtime
(printing or scanning), standby time, Sleep
mode time, warm-up time, and power-off
6
time of the machine by minutes.
Job Templates Select from [Scan] tab Allows you to create, edit, copy, or delete
job templates.
Folder Refer to "Create Folder" (P.292).
Job Flow Sheets Refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.294).
Add New Name Select from [Address Refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.303).
Book] tab
Job Management Select from [Properties] Allows you to configure the delete method
tab > [General Setup] of jobs.
Paper Tray Attributes Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.74).
Paper Settings Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings"
(P.74).
Power Saver Settings Refer to "Changing the Interval for
Entering Power Saver Mode" (P.27).
Stored Job Settings Refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.283).
Memory Settings Refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.244).
Web Browser Setup Refer to "Web Browser Setup" (P.290).
Internet Services Allows you to configure the auto refresh
Settings interval and the display language of the
CentreWare Internet Services settings.
339

Pool Server Settings Select from [Properties] Leave the default settings unchanged
tab > [General Setup] because a pool server is not available for
the machine.
Refer to "Job Flow Service Settings
(ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.281).
Web Applications Service Refer to "Web Applications Service Setup
Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.286).
Cloning Allows you to save the settings of the
machine in a file, and copy the file to the
other machine of the same model but not

to the other models.
Notify Job Completion Select from [Properties] Refer to "Notify Job Completion by E-mail"
by E-mail tab > [General Setup] > (P.190).
[Alert Notification]
E-mail Notification for Allows you to configure the recipient of the
Machine Status notification and a status of which to be
notified.
Port Settings Select from [Properties] Refer to "Port Settings" (P.215).
tab > [Connectivity]
Physical Connections Refer to "Port Settings" (P.215).
Protocols Refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.221).
Language Emulations Select from [Properties] Refer to "Print Mode" (P.130).
6 tab > [Services] >
[Printing]
Scan Service - Common Select from [Properties] Allows you to specify the file name when
Settings tab > [Services] sending or storing the scanned document.
E-mail Refer to "E-mail/Internet Fax Service
Settings" (P.275).
Internet Fax Refer to ""E-mail/Internet Fax Service
Settings" (P.275).
Fax Refer to "Fax Service Settings" (P.260).
Scan to PC Refer to "Configuration of Scan to PC"
(P.370).
Scan to My Folder Refer to "Configuration of Scan to My
Folder (ApeosPort Series Models Only)"
(P.377).
Network Scanning Refer to "Configuration of Network
Scanning (Job Template Scanning)"
(P.374).
Store & Send Link Refer to "Configuration of Store & Send
Link" (P.384).
Store to USB Refer to "Store to USB" (P.366).
Custom Services Allows you to configure the Validation
Options settings. Sends the user name with
the validation request if the user is
authenticated on the machine.
Media Print Allows you to enable and disable the
Media Print - Text and Media Print - Photos
services.
340

USB Select from [Properties] Allows you to enable and disable Store to
tab > [Services] USB, Media Print - Text, and Media Print -
Photo settings.
EP Service Configures the EP system with an active
internet connection. For information on
the EP System, contact our Customer
Support Center or Sales Agency.
Accounting Select from [Properties] Refer to "Accounting" (P.313).
tab

Authentication Select from [Properties] Refer to "Authentication" (P.324) .
Configuration tab > [Security]
User Details Setup Refer to "User Details Setup" (P.327) .
Create Authorization Refer to "Create Authorization Groups"
Groups (P.326).
Remote Authentication Refer to "Remote Authentication/Directory
Servers Service" (P.233).
IP Filtering Allows you to configure the IPs to permit
access, for IPv4 and IPv6 respectively.
Unbounded Port Allows you to set unbounded port numbers.
Audit Log Allows you to enable the Audit Log feature
that logs the operation on the machine,
and retrieve the audit log.
Machine Digital Allows you to create a self-signed
6
Certificate Management certificate and import a certificate to the
machine.
IPsec Refer to "Configuration of Encryption using
IPsec" (P.414).
Certificate Management Displays the certificates registered on the
machine. Also allows you to select, delete,
and export of the certificate.
Certificate Revocation Refer to "Certificate Revocation Retrieval
Retrieval Settings Settings" (P.242).
IEEE 802.1x Refer to "IEEE 802.1X Settings / IEEE
802.1X Settings (Ethernet 1), IEEE 802.1X
Settings (Ethernet 2) (Type 2 (T2) model
only)" (P.242).
SSL/TLS Settings Refer to "SSL/TLS Settings" (P.238).
S/MIME Settings Refer to "S/MIME Settings (ApeosPort
Series Models Only)" (P.239).
PDF/DocuWorks/XPS* Refer to "PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature

Signature Settings Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)"
(P.240).
Watermark Refer to "Watermark" (P.181)
Force Annotation Refer to "Force Annotation" (P.185).
Job Status Default Allows you to configure the display/hide
settings for completed and active jobs.
Plug-in / Custom Services Refer to "Plug-in Settings" (P.190).
Settings
341

On Demand Overwrite Select from [Properties] Refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.333).
tab > [Security]
Service Representative Allows you to restrict the operation of
Restricted Operation service representatives. Prevents the
machine from being altered by someone
impersonating our service representative.
System Administrator Refer to "System Administrator Settings"
Settings (P.323).
Smart Card Settings Allows you to configure the smart card
settings and back up the settings.
* : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
342
7 Printer Environment Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use the Print feature on the machine.
 Print Overview ..............................................................................................................................344

Installation When Using Parallel Port................................................................................346
 Installation When Using USB Port ......................................................................................349
 Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100) ........................................................351

Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) .........................................354
Print Overview
This machine can be set up as a local printer by directly connecting the machine to a
computer using a USB interface cable or a parallel interface cable. Similarly, it can be set up
as a network printer by connecting the machine to a network.
Enable the necessary port using the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.
Via Internet
IPP Local connection
Parallel/USB
Network connection
LPD/SMB/Port9100
Printer Environment Settings
Server
Note • The print drivers are contained in the Driver CD Kit. For information on the driver installation
procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
• You can download the latest print driver from our web site.
7
Using the Machine as a Local Printer
 Parallel
Use a parallel interface cable to directly connect the machine to a computer. The Parallel
Port Kit (optional) is required.
For more information on how to set up the machine using parallel connection, refer to "Installation When Using Parallel
Port" (P.346).
 USB
Use a USB interface cable to directly connect the machine to a computer.
For more information on how to set up the machine using USB connection, refer to "Installation When Using USB Port"
(P.349).
Using the Machine as a Network Printer

To set up the machine as a network printer, the following protocols are available to connect
the machine.
 LPD
Use LPD when direct communication between the machine and a computer via TCP/IP is
available.
For more information on how to set up the machine using LPD, refer to "Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)"
(P.351).
 IPP
Use IPP to print via the Internet.
344
Print Overview
For more information on how to set up the machine using IPP, refer to "Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol
(IPP)" (P.354).
 Port 9100
Use Port9100 when the machine uses Port 9100.
For more information on how to set up the machine using Port 9100, refer to "Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port
9100)" (P.351).
Supported Operating Systems
Connection
Local connection Network connection
method
USB Port *3 Bon-

Port Parallel *1 LPD IPP
9100 WSD
2.0*2 jour
TCP/ TCP/ TCP/ Bon-

Protocol - -
IP IP IP WSD*3 jour
OS Windows XP O O O O O
Windows
O O O O O
Server 2003
Windows
O O O O O
Server 2008
Windows
O O O O O O
Vista
Windows 7 O O O O O O
Windows
O O O O O
7
Server 2012
Windows
Server 2012 O O O O O O
R2
Windows 8 O O O O O O
Windows
O O O O O O
8.1
UNIX O*4
Mac OS O*4 O*5 *6
O*7 O
O : Available
Blank : Not available
*1 : The Parallel Port Kit (optional) is required. And a parallel port is required on a computer to connect.
*2 : A USB 2.0 port is required on a computer to connect.
*3 : WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
*4 : The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) and a Unix filter are required to print PostScript data.
*5 : Supports Mac OS 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and OS X 10.9 Mavericks.
*6 : Supports Mac OS X 10.7 Lion.
*7 : Supports Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and OS X 10.9 Mavericks. You can use the port without
the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) if you install the print driver for Mac OS X contained in the CD-ROM provided with the
Driver CD Kit.
Note • The print driver supplied with the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) supports only English operating
systems.
For information on network environments, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
345
Installation When Using Parallel Port
This section describes how to install the machine using a parallel interface.
Step 1 Preparations..................................................................................................................................................................... 346
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 346
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer.................................................................................................................................. 347
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items ........................................................................................................................ 347
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to connect the machine to a computer via a parallel
interface.
 The Parallel Port Kit (optional)
 Parallel interface cable


The Driver CD Kit (provided with the machine)
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine

The following describes the configuration procedures to use a parallel interface on the
machine.
Note • You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet
7 Services" (P.339).
1 Connect a parallel interface cable to the parallel interface connector on the machine.
3 Enable the parallel port on the machine.
3) Select [Parallel], and then select [Change Settings].
4 Configure the following settings if required.

Print Mode
Configure the printer language on the machine to that of the received data.
346
Installation When Using Parallel Port
 PJL
Enable this setting to accept a job with PJL commands.
The PJL commands are independent of any printer languages. A printer language used in
the data received next can be set independently of the current printer language.
 Auto Eject Time
Set the time that the data so far received by the machine is automatically printed since
data is no longer sent to the printer.
 Adobe Communication Protocol
Set the protocol defining the communications method between PostScript printers and a
host.
 Bi-directional Communication
Configure the parallel port for either half duplex transmission or full duplex transmission.
Note • Adobe Communication Protocol can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is
installed.

• Do not change the default settings for normal use. You may, however, need to change some settings
depending on the operating system of your computer.
6 Select [Close].
7 Print a configuration report to confirm that the parallel port is enabled.
8 Turn off the computer to be connected to the machine.
9 Connect a parallel interface cable to the parallel interface on the computer. 7
For information on how to connect a parallel interface cable, refer to "Using the Parallel Interface" (P.24).
10 Start the computer.
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer

The following describes the configuration procedures for the computer.
To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
For information on the supported operating systems, refer to "Supported Operating Systems" (P.345).
For information on the driver installation procedure, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items

You can configure the following setting items using CentreWare Internet Services:
For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.

Receiving buffer size for the parallel interface
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [Parallel])

Port Settings
 Bi-directional Communication
347
 Auto Eject Time

 Adobe Communication Protocol
Note • The Adobe Communication Protocol can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional)
is installed.
348
Installation When Using USB Port
Installation When Using USB Port
This section describes how to install the machine using a USB interface.
Step 1 Preparations .....................................................................................................................................................................349
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine.....................................................................................................................................349
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ..................................................................................................................................350
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items.........................................................................................................................350
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to connect the machine to a computer via a USB interface.
 USB cable

 The Driver CD Kit (provided with the machine)

The following describes the configuration procedures to use a USB interface on the
machine.
Note • To print binary data using a USB interface, set [Adobe Communication Protocol] to [RAW]. For more
information, refer to "USB" (P.216).
• You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For items that can be configured
using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.350).

7
2 Enable the USB port on the machine.
3) Select [USB], and then select [Change Settings].
3 Configure [Print Mode] or [Auto Eject Time] as necessary.
For information on the setting items, refer to "USB" (P.216)

5 Select [Close].
349
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the USB port is enabled.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Printer Reports" (P.122).

For information on the driver installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
Note • For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, and OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
you can use USB without the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) if you install the print driver for Mac
OS X contained in the CD-ROM provided with the driver.


Receiving buffer size for the USB interface
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [USB])
 Port Settings
7  Bi-directional Communication

Auto Eject Time

Adobe Communication Protocol
Note • The Adobe Communication Protocol can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional)
is installed.
 PostScript Wait Timeout
Note • The PostScript Wait Timeout can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is
installed.
350
Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)
This section describes how to install the machine using TCP/IP.

Step 2 Configuration on the Machine.....................................................................................................................................351
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to use the machine via TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100).
 TCP/IP network environment

Note • LPD port is supported on Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and OS
X 10.9 Mavericks.
• For Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and OS X 10.9 Mavericks, you can
use the Port9100 port.

The following describes the configuration procedures to use TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100) on the
machine. Enable the LPD Port or the Port9100 port, and then configure TCP/IP settings.
Note • You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services or the Driver CD Kit. 7
For the items that can be configured using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting
Items" (P.352). For information on how to configure the setting using the Driver CD Kit, refer to the manual contained in the
Driver CD Kit.

2 Enable the LPD port or Port9100 port as appropriate.
In this example, the LPD port is enabled.
3) Select [LPD], and then select [Change Settings].
351
3 Set an IP address and the other addresses.

Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for obtaining the
address. The configuration of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address is not
required.
4 If the operating system on the client is Mac OS X 10.5 or later, enable the Bonjour port, and
the Discovery feature that automatically detects printers on the IP network can be
enabled.
Note • To print from a printer detected by Bonjour, the LPD port must be enabled in advance.
3) Select [Bonjour], and then select [Change Settings].

6 Select [Close].
7 Print a configuration report to confirm that the LPD port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
8 Configure other LPD or Port9100 settings as necessary.
7 For information on how to set up the LPD port or Port9100, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.352).

You can print via TCP/IP (LPD) from a Macintosh computer for Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain
Lion, and OS X 10.9 Mavericks. For information on the installation procedures of the print driver for Mac OS X, refer to the
manual contained in the CD-ROM provided with the driver.
For information on the installation procedures of Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional), refer to the manual contained in the CD-
ROM provided with the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional).

 Spool Destination for Jobs
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [LPD])
Note • The spool destination can be configured when the LPD port is enabled.
352
 Receiving buffer size for Port9100

([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [Port 9100])

Port Settings

IP Mode
 Host Name
 IPv4
- IP Address Resolution
- Port Settings
- IP Address
- Subnet Mask
- Gateway Address

IPv6
- Enable Manual Address
- IP Address

- Link-Local Address
- Gateway Address

Domain Name

DNS Configuration
- IPv4
- IPv6
 DHCP/DDNS
 WINS Server
 Port Number 7
 TBCP Filter
Note • The TBCP filter can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is installed.
 Connection Time-Out
 Maximum Number of Sessions
Note • The Maximum Number of Sessions can be configured when the LPD port is enabled.
 TCP-MSS Mode

IPv4 Subnet Mask when TCP-MSS Mode is enabled

IP Filtering
- IPv4 Filtering
- IPv6 Filtering
353
Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
This section describes how to install the machine using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP).
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 354
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items ........................................................................................................................ 355
Note • If the size of print data sent via IPP is larger than the value set in the proxy server, the machine
cannot receive the data. In this case, set a larger value in the proxy server or change your browser
setting not to use the proxy server.
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to set up the machine to use Internet Printing Protocol
(IPP).

TCP/IP network environment

The following describes the configuration procedures to use Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
on the machine. Enable the IPP port, and then configure TCP/IP settings.
7 Note • You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services or the Driver CD Kit.
For the items that can be configured using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting
Items" (P.355). For information on how to configure the setting using the Driver CD Kit, refer to the manual contained in the
Driver CD Kit.

2 Enable the IPP port.
3) Select [IPP], and then select [Change Settings].
354
Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
address. The configuration of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address is not
required.
5 Select [Close].
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the IPP port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
7 Configure other IPP settings as necessary.
Refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.355).


7
 Spool Destination for Jobs
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [IPP])

Port Settings

Add Port Number
 TBCP Filter
Note • The TBCP filter can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is installed.
 Administrator Mode
 DNS
 Connection Time-Out
355
356
8 E-mail Environment Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use various services via e-mail on the machine.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. For such models, an optional component is required.
 E-mail Overview...........................................................................................................................358
 Preparations..................................................................................................................................359

Installation Procedures ............................................................................................................361
E-mail Overview
The machine can send and receive e-mails.

The following services and features are available using e-mail:

E-mail

Store & Send Link
 Internet Fax Service
 Print E-mail
 E-mail Notification (Status notifications such as consumables)
 Job Completion Notice
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required to use this
feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
 E-mail
Scanned documents can be converted into electronic form and transmitted via e-mail.
E-mail Environment Settings
 Store & Send Link

The machine can convert a document, scanned by a user authenticated by the machine into
electronic form, store it in the hard disk, and send a URL that indicates the location of the
document.
 Internet Fax Service

Unlike the normal fax transmissions via telephone lines, faxed data is transmitted via a
corporate intranet or the Internet as an e-mail attachment.
The message body of e-mail is processed according to the settings in [Incoming Internet Fax
8 Print Options] of CentreWare Internet Services.
 Print E-mail
You can send and transfer e-mails with files attached from computers. File formats that can
be attached to the e-mails are TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), XDW (DocuWorks documents), XBD
(DocuWorks binders), and XPS (Microsoft XPS Format, Open XPS format).
The message body of e-mail is processed according to the settings in [Incoming E-mail Print
Options] of CentreWare Internet Services.
 E-mail Notification (Status notifications such as consumables)

The machine can notify the status information such as consumable status, parts status, and
paper tray status that is set in [E-mail Notification for Machine Status] of CentreWare
Internet Services to a specified recipient. By receiving the statuses of consumables
periodically or when they need to be replaced soon, you can properly determine when to
replace the toner and drum cartridges.
It is recommended that you register the address of the system administrator or a shared
address as the recipient of the e-mail.
 Job Completion Notice

The following methods can be used to notify the completion of the jobs. Register the
address of the network administrator or a shared address as necessary.
358
Preparations
 Notify the Completion of Jobs by E-mail

When a computer submitted a print job or a Direct Fax job to the machine, its completion
can be notified by e-mail. For more information, refer to the help of the print driver.

Notify Job Completion by E-mail
You can receive the result of the jobs performed by e-mail. For more information, refer to
"Notify Job Completion by E-mail" (P.190).

E-mail Notification
You can receive an e-mail notification when a file is saved in a folder or a job flow ends.
For more information, refer to "E-mail Notification" (P.302).
Preparations
The following items must be set to use the E-mail feature.

For more information on the preparations to use the Internet Fax feature, refer to "Preparations" (P.398).
 Configuration on the Machine

Store & Print E-mail Job
E-mail
Item Description E-mail Send via via Completion
Notification
Link SMTP POP3 Notice
TCP/IP The TCP/IP address for

address the machine.
O O O O O O
E-mails are sent via TCP/
IP.
Subnet Required when the
mask network is divided into Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ 8
subnets.
Gateway Required when multiple
address networks are connected Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ
by gateways.
Machine Set the E-mail address of
e-mail the machine. O O O O O O
address
DNS server Required when the
address addresses for a POP3
server and an SMTP
server are set with a
domain name format Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ
instead of their IP
addresses.
You can also acquire this
from DHCP.
SMTP server The machine uses an
address SMTP server to send e-
mails. The SMTP server O O O Δ O O
can also be used for
receiving e-mails.
359

E-mail
Notification
SMTP AUTH If an SMTP server

login name requires authentication,
and specify an
password authentication user Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ
name.
Also specify a password
as required.
POP3 server Set the POP3 server
Δ Δ - O Δ Δ
address.
POP login Set the POP receiving
name and user name.
Δ Δ - O Δ Δ
password Also specify a password
as required.
S/MIME Set the S/MIME
Δ X Δ Δ X X
settings* information.
O : Required to be set
Δ : Set as required
- : Not required to be set
X : Not supported
* : Available on the ApeosPort series models only.
Note • To transmit e-mails encrypted by S/MIME or with digital signatures attached, a certificate must be
ready in advance. For more information on a certificate, refer to "Configuration of E-mail
Encryption/Digital Signature" (P.417).
8  Configuration on the Server

Note • Information on server settings, contact your system administrator.

E-mail
Notification
Machine When using the E-mail

e-mail feature on the machine,
address an e-mail account of the
O O O O O O
machine must be
registered on a mail
server in advance.
Host name Set the host name and Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ
domain name of the
Domain
machine along with the
name
TCP/IP address for the Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ Δ
machine on the DNS
server.
O : Required to be set
360
Installation Procedures
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the E-mail service.
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP .........................................................................................................................361
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment .................................................................................................................................362
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP

Enable the E-mail port, and set the IP address.
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.335).



2 Enable ports to use for the E-mail feature.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup]. 8
3) Select [Send E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].
6) Select [Close].
7) Select [Enabled] on the [Receive E-mail - Port Status] screen under [Receive E-mail] as
described above to use the Print E-mail feature.
8) Select [Enabled] on the [E-mail Notification - Port Status] screen under [E-mail
Notification Service] as described above to use the E-mail Notification or the Job
Completion Notification feature.
address. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual configuration is
preferred, confirm the settings of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.

5 Select [Close].
361
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set up
correctly.
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment

The following describes the configuration procedures to use the E-mail features.
You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For the items that can be configured using CentreWare
Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.363).


2 Set up the e-mail address of the machine.
2) Select [Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name], and then configure items.
8 For information on how to set an e-mail address, refer to "Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.225).

3 Set up the protocol to receive e-mails.
2) Select [Other Settings].
3) Select [Protocol to Receive E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select either [SMTP] or [POP3] as appropriate for your environment.
5) Select [Save].
4 Configure the server settings for receiving e-mails.
2) Select [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].
 When [SMTP] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]

Configure the SMTP server.
For information on how to configure the SMTP server, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.232).
For information on how to set the machine's e-mail address when you receive e-mails via SMTP, refer to "Machine's E-mail
Address/Host Name" (P.225)
362
 When [POP3] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]

Configure the POP3 server.
For information on how to configure the POP3 server, refer to "POP3 Server Settings" (P.231).
For information on how to set the machine's e-mail address when you receive e-mails via POP3, refer to "Machine's E-mail
Note • When you enable POP over SSL in the POP3 Server Setting, receiving e-mail will be encrypted. POP
over SSL can be set using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on the setting procedure,
refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.339).
5 Configure the server settings for sending e-mails.

Note • To send e-mails, SMTP server settings are required. When [POP3] is selected in [Protocol to Receive E-
mail], configure the SMTP server in [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].
For information on how to configure the e-mail transmission, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.232).

7 Configure the domain filtering for receiving e-mails as necessary.
For information on how to configure the domain filtering, refer to "Domain Filtering" (P.243).
8 Set up the S/MIME information.

2) Select [Security Settings].
3) Select [S/MIME Settings], and then set the items.
For more information on how to configure S/MIME, refer to "S/MIME Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.239).
8
10 Select [Close].
11 Print a configuration report to confirm that the settings of each item.

 Machine's E-mail Address

Setup E-mail Notification
 Port Settings
 SMTP Server Settings
 POP3 Server Settings
363
 Receiving Protocol
 Domain Filtering
 S/MIME Settings
364
9 Scanner Environment Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use the Scan services on the machine.
• WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

Scan Service Overview ..............................................................................................................366
 Configuration of Store to Folder ..........................................................................................368

Configuration of Scan to PC ..................................................................................................370
 Configuration of Store to USB ..............................................................................................373
 Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)...............................374

Configuration of Scan to My Folder (ApeosPort Series Models Only) ..................377
 Configuration of Job Flow Sheets........................................................................................382

Configuration of Store & Send Link ....................................................................................384
 Configuration of Store to WSD.............................................................................................386
Scan Service Overview
The machine is equipped with scanning capabilities.

The following scan services are available on the machine:

E-mail

Store to Folder
 Scan to PC
 Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning) (ApeosPort Series Models only)
 Store to USB
 Job Flow Scanning (ApeosPort Series Models only)
 Scan to My Folder (ApeosPort Series Models only)
 Store & Send Link

Store to WSD
Scanner Environment Settings
 E-mail
Scanned documents can be converted into electronic data and sent via e-mail.
For information on e-mail environment settings, refer to "E-mail Environment Settings" (P.357).
 Store to Folder
You can scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data, and store it in a folder. The
document can be accessed later from any computers on the network.
For information on the Store to Folder service, refer to "Configuration of Store to Folder" (P.368).
 Scan to PC
When the machine is connected to a network, you can store the scanned data on network
9 computers using the FTP or SMB protocol.
You can scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data, and store it on a computer
connected to a network.
For information on the Scan to PC service, refer to "Configuration of Scan to PC" (P.370).
 Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)

A file defined with scanning conditions is called a job template. You can apply a job
template to a document scanned on the machine. The scanned document is saved on the
machine as a file and sent automatically to the computer (server).
For information on how to configure a job template, refer to "Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)"
(P.374).
 Store to USB
You can store the scanned data to a USB memory device when you insert the USB 2.0
memory device into the USB memory slot of the control panel of the machine. You can also
select data stored in the USB memory device and print the data directly.
For information on the Store to USB service settings, refer to "Configuration of Store to USB" (P.373).
 Job Flow Scanning

You can execute a scan job using the job flow sheets for the scan documents.
Create the job flow sheets using the Device Setup tool on the network.
For information on how to configure job flow scanning, refer to "Configuration of Job Flow Sheets" (P.382).
366
Scan Service Overview
 Scan to My Folder
When you select [Login to Remote Accounts] for [Login Type] and select [Enabled] for [Scan
to My Folder] using CentreWare Internet Services, you can forward scanned documents to
different recipients that corresponds to the login user.
For more information on configuration procedures, refer to "Configuration of Scan to My Folder (ApeosPort Series Models
Only)" (P.377).
 Store & Send Link

The machine can convert a scanned document into electronic form, store it in the hard disk,
and send a URL that indicates the location of the document.
Note • To use the Store & Send Link feature, you need to configure the authentication settings.
For information on the Store & Send Link service, refer to "Configuration of Store & Send Link" (P.384).
 Store to WSD
You can remotely scan the document and store the image by operating on the computer.
Using the control panel of the machine, you can also select a destination computer on a
network to store the scanned data.
For more information on the Store to WSD service, refer to "Configuration of Store to WSD" (P.386).

9
367
Configuration of Store to Folder
This section describes configuration procedures to use the Store to Folder service on the
machine.
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP......................................................................................................................... 368
Step 2 Registering a Folder ....................................................................................................................................................... 369
Step 3 Configuring on the Computer...................................................................................................................................... 369

Using Network Scanner Utility 3 (Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3), which supports
WebDAV protocol, and Device Setup Tool, enable the SNMP,SOAP, and WebDAV ports and
set up an IP address.
Important • We recommend you to enable [HTTP - SSL / TLS Communication] under [SSL / TLS Settings] when
you use WebDAV. This is an effectual way to avoid password leaking.
Services" (P.339).

9 3) Select [Tools] on the Services Home screen.

2 Enable the ports.
3) Select [SNMP], and then select [Change Settings].
6) Select [Close].
7) Select [SOAP], and then select [Change Settings].
10) Select [Close].
11) Select [WebDAV], and then select [Change Settings].
368
Configuration of Store to Folder


5 Select [Close].
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the WebDAV port is enabled and that TCP/IP is
set up correctly.
Step 2 Registering a Folder

Register a folder to store scanned data.

For information on registering a folder, refer to "Create Folder" (P.292).
Step 3 Configuring on the Computer

To use Network Scanner Utility 3, install Network Scanner Utility 3 on a computer.
Network Scanner Utility 3 is included in the Driver CD Kit provided with the machine. For information on how to install the
Network Scanner Utility 3, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
For information on the usage of the Network Scanner Utility 3, refer to "12 Computer Operations" in the User Guide.
369
Configuration of Scan to PC
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Scan to PC service.
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to use the Scan to PC feature.
 Using FTP
To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP server
(login name and password) are required.

Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Microsoft Windows
Server 2008 R2, Microsoft Windows Server 2012, Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2,
Microsoft Windows Vista, Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows 8, or Microsoft
Windows 8.1
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 6.0

Microsoft Windows 2000 Server, Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, or Microsoft
Windows XP
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0 or later
 Mac OS X
FTP service of Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and OS
X 10.9 Mavericks.
For information on how to configure the FTP service, refer to the manual provided with the software.
9 For information on how to configure the settings on Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and OS X 10.9 Mavericks,
consult the official website of Apple Inc.
 Using SMB
To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following operating
systems that includes folder sharing.
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.
 Microsoft Windows Server 2003
 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2

Microsoft Windows XP
 Microsoft Windows Vista
 Microsoft Windows 7
 Microsoft Windows 8.1

Mac OS X 10.5 Leopard
370
Configuration of Scan to PC
 Mac OS X 10.6 Snow Leopard

 Mac OS X 10.7 Lion
 OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion
 OS X 10.9 Mavericks

To use Scan to PC service, enable the port (SMB or FTP client) and set the IP address. The
following describes the configuration procedures on the machine.
Services" (P.339).



2 Enable the port.
 Using SMB
Enable the SMB port.
2) Select [Port Settings]. 9
3) Select [SMB Client], and then select [Change Settings].
 Using FTP
Enable the FTP port.
3) Select [FTP Client], and then select [Change Settings].
3 Set the IP address of the machine and the other addresses.
371

5 Select [Close].
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the SMB Client port or FTP client is enabled and
that TCP/IP is set up correctly.

Create a destination folder on your computer.

Using FTP
Create a destination folder on the server where you login and set write rights on the
folder.

Using SMB
Create a shared folder on your computer and set the write rights on the shared folder.
Note • To use SMB on Mac OS X, set [File Sharing] to [On] in the [Service] tab of [Sharing] under [System
Preferences].
372
Configuration of Store to USB
Configuration of Store to USB
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store to USB service.
Step 1 Available USB Memory Devices ...................................................................................................................................373
Step 2 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items............................................................................................................373
Step 1 Available USB Memory Devices

The Store to USB service allows you to directly save the scanned data to a USB 2.0 memory
device which is inserted into the USB memory slot on the control panel of the machine.
 USB 2.0 memory devices
 USB memory devices with the capacity of up to 128 GB
 USB memory devices that support FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT (long name)
Note • USB memory devices that are encrypted with software cannot be used with the machine.

Step 2 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items
You can enable/disable the Store to USB service using CentreWare Internet Services. When
you disable the service, the Store to USB button is not displayed on the Services Home
screen, and you cannot use the service.
The Store to USB service is set to enabled by factory default.
For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.
373
Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Network Scanning service.
Step 2 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP ....................................................................................................................... 374
Step 3 Configuring the SNMP Port .......................................................................................................................................... 375
Step 1 Preparations
The following environment is required to use the Network Scanning feature on the machine.
 To use SMB forwarding, your computer must run on one of the following operating
systems that supports folder sharing.
- Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
- Microsoft Windows 2000
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003

- Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
- Microsoft Windows XP
- Microsoft Windows Vista
- Microsoft Windows 8.1
9
Step 2 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP
To use Network Scanning service, enable the port and set the IP address. The following
describes the configuration procedures on the machine.
Services" (P.339).


2 Enable the SNMP port.
374
Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)

4) Select [Port Status], and select [Change Settings].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Port Settings] screen is displayed.
7) Enable [Port Status] on the [SMB] or [FTP Client] screen, and enable [Internet Services
(HTTP)] on the [Internet Services - Port Status] screen as described above.
3 Set the IP address and the other addresses.
addresses. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual configuration is

5 Select [Close].

correctly.
Step 3 Configuring the SNMP Port

Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port using CentreWare Internet Services.
1 Start CentreWare Internet Services. 9

2 Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port.

2) Click [ ] on the left of [Connectivity].
3) Click [Port Settings].
4) Select the [UDP] check box under [SNMP].
5) Click [Apply].
6) Enter the system administrator's user ID and passcode into [User Name] and
[Password] respectively, and click [OK].
Note • The default user ID is "11111" and the default passcode is "x-admin".
7) The right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display.
8) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.

375
376
Configuration of Scan to My Folder (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Scan to My Folder service.
Step 2 Enabling SMB Port and Setting up TCP/IP................................................................................................................378
Step 3 Configuring Remote Authentication ..........................................................................................................................378
Step 4 Configuring Scan to My Folder ....................................................................................................................................380
Step 1 Preparations
The Scan to My Folder service allows you to forward scanned files to recipients which vary
depending on a login user when [Login to Remote Accounts] is selected for [Login Type].
The following items are required to use the Scan to My Folder feature.
 Remote Authentication System

To use the Scan to My Folder service, a remote authentication system is required.
For more information about a remote authentication system, refer to "Authentication System" (P.233).
 Destination Computer
The following operation system must be installed on a destination computer.
For Mac OS X, a sharing user account is required on the Mac OS X.

Microsoft Windows 2000

Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
9

Microsoft Windows Server 2012
 Microsoft Windows XP

Microsoft Windows Vista

Microsoft Windows 7
 Microsoft Windows 8.1
 Mac OS X 10.4.11 Tiger

Mac OS X 10.5 Leopard
 Mac OS X 10.6 Snow Leopard
 Mac OS X 10.7 Lion
 OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion
377
Step 2 Enabling SMB Port and Setting up TCP/IP

To use Scan to My Folder service, enable the SMB port and set the IP address. The following
describes the configuration procedures on the machine.
Services" (P.339).


2 Enable the SMB port.

3) Select [SMB Client], and then select [Change Settings].
3 Set the IP address and the other addresses.
9 address. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual configuration is

5 Select [Close].
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the SMB Client port is enabled and that TCP/IP
is set up correctly.
Step 3 Configuring Remote Authentication

Set the Login Type to Login to Remote Accounts.
Services" (P.339).
378


2 Set the Login Type to Login to Remote Accounts.
1) Select [Authentication/Security Settings].
2) Select [Authentication].
3) Select [Login Type].
4) Select [Login to Remote Accounts], and then select [Save].
5) Select [Close].
3 Configure a remote authentication server to use.

You can select from [Kerberos (Windows 2000)], [Kerberos (Solaris)], [LDAP], [SMB], or
[Authentication Agent].
For information on the remote authentication server settings, refer to "Authentication System Setup (ApeosPort Series
1) Select [System Settings].

3) Select [Remote Authentication/Directory Service].
4) Select [Authentication System Setup].
5) Select [Authentication System], and then select [Change Settings]. 9
6) Select the remote authentication system to use, and then select [Save].
7) Select [Close].
Note • If an authentication setting is not configured on a remote authentication server selected, configure
settings under [Remote Authentication/Directory Service]. For [LDAP Server/Directory Service
Settings], a configuration is required regardless of a remote authentication server selected.
- For information on Kerberos Server Settings, refer to "Kerberos Server Settings (ApeosPort Series
- For information on LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings, refer to "LDAP Server/Directory Service
Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.234).
- For information on SMB Server Settings, refer to "SMB Server Settings" (P.237).
5 Select [Close].
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the SMB port is enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
379
Step 4 Configuring Scan to My Folder

Configure the Scan to My Folder settings using CentreWare Internet Services.

2 Enable the feature of the Scan to My Folder

2) Click [Services].
3) Click [Scan to My Folder].
4) Click [General].
5) Select the [Enabled] check box under [Status].
6) Check the [Enabled] checkbox of [Allow User to Change File Storage Location] to allow
users to change the storage location.
Note • Checking this checkbox allows users to change the storage location on the control panel when
performing the Scan to My Folder service.
When you do not check this checkbox, the storage location specified in the next procedure cannot
be changed.
3 Specify the storage location (directory).
 Transferring files to a directory specified by a login user using LDAP (directory

service) information
1) Select the [LDAP Query] check box for [Determine Home Directory].
The folder specified for [homeDirectory] of a user profile which is registered with the
LDAP (user information management) server is defined as a storage location by default.
Note • To change a storage location, select [LDAP Mapping for Home Directory] and enter the property
name, which a storage location is set, in [Home], and then select [Apply].
• The [LDAP User Mappings] screen which is displayed by clicking [LDAP Mapping for Home Directory]
9 is identical with the screen displayed by selecting [Properties] > [Connectivity] > [Protocols] > [LDAP]
> [LDAP User Mappings].
 Transferring files to a directory specified by CentreWare Internet Services without

using LDAP (directory service) information
1) Select the [No LDAP Query] check box for [Determine Home Directory].
2) Enter a directory name of the storage location in [Network Home Path].
Specify a folder name using UNC format (for example: \\server name\shared
name\folder name\folder name2).
4 To specify a subdirectory under the directory specified in step 3, perform the following
procedure:
1) Select [Automatically Create Subdirectory] check box, and enter a subdirectory name in
[Subdirectory] to specify a subdirectory.
2) When you use the login user name as a subdirectory name, select [Append "User Name"
to Path] check box.
3) If you select the [Append "User Name" to Path] check box, selecting the [Automatically
Create "User Name" directory if one does not exist] check box creates a subdirectory
with a user name automatically when the user name directory does not exist.
4) When you select both the [Automatically Create Subdirectory] and [Append "User
Name" to Path] check boxes, specify which directory, subdirectory or subdirectory with a
user name, becomes a subdirectory in [Directory Structure].
380
5 To add a domain name to a login user name, select the [Enabled] check box for [Use
Domain for Authenticated User]. (When the machine is the first model.)
6 Specify the authentication information for accessing the destination computer. (When the
machine is the Type 2 (T2) model.)
 Accessing the destination computer both by the user authentication and by the
domain information used when logged in to the machine
1) Select the [Authenticated User and Domain] check box for [Login Credentials to Access
the Destination].
 Accessing the destination computer only by the user authentication information

used when logged in to the machine
1) Select the [Authenticated User] check box for [Login Credentials to Access the
Destination].
 Accessing the destination computer by the authentication information registered

with the machine on CentreWare Internet Services
1) Select the [System] check box for [Login Credentials to Access the Destination].
2) Configure the authentication information such as [Login Name] and [Passcode].

Enter a login name in [Login Name] with up to 97 single-byte characters.
Enter a passcode in [Passcode] with up to 32 single-byte characters.
Re-enter the passcode in [Retype Passcode] for confirmation.
7 Click [Apply].

Create a destination folder on your computer and set it as a shared folder, and then set write
rights on the folder.
Note • To use SMB on Mac OS X, set [File Sharing] to [On] in the [Service] tab of [Sharing] under [System
Preferences]. 9
381
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Job Flow Sheets service.
Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP ....................................................................................................................... 382
Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port .......................................................................................................................................... 383
Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP

To use the Job Flow Sheets service, enable the SOAP, SNMP, and Internet Services (HTTP)
ports, and set an IP address and other addresses. The following describes the configuration
procedures on the machine.
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.335).


2 Enable the SOAP port.
9 1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].

3) Select [SOAP], and then select [Change Settings].
3 Enable the SNMP port.
2) Select [Port Status], and select [Change Settings].
5) Enable the Internet Services (HTTP) port as described above.
addresses. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual configuration is
382
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets

6 Select [Close].
7 Print a configuration report to confirm that the SOAP, SNMP, and Internet Services (HTTP)
ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set up correctly.
Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port

Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port using CentreWare Internet Services.

2 Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port.

2) Click [Connectivity].
3) Click [Port Settings].
4) Select the [UDP] check box under [SNMP].
5) Click [Apply].
6) The right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display.
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer 9

Create job flows using Device Setup Tool to use for scanned documents.
Note • Device Setup Tool is included in ApeosWare Management Suite, which you can download from our
web site. For information on creating job flows, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
383
Configuration of Store & Send Link
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store & Send Link service.
Important • When a user is notified by e-mail of a URL location to retrieve scanned data, the e-mail message is
not encrypted, which enables the user to retrieve the data without password authentication. Thus, in
case the URL information is leaked on the e-mail transmission path due to any attempts, other
parties to whom the information is leaked cannot be tracked. To prevent others from viewing
scanned data, select [PDF] or [DocuWorks] in [File Format] and set a password in [PDF Security] or
[DocuWorks Security] before scanning a document.
Note • To use the Store & Send Link service, the configuration for authentication is required.
Step 1 Configuring E-mail.......................................................................................................................................................... 384
Step 2 Enabling Authentication............................................................................................................................................... 384
Step 3 Other Settings.................................................................................................................................................................. 384
Step 4 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items ........................................................................................................... 384
Step 1 Configuring E-mail

Configure the e-mail settings on the machine.

For information on how to configure e-mail settings, refer to "E-mail Environment Settings" (P.357).
Step 2 Enabling Authentication

Configure the authentication settings on the machine.
For information on how to configure e-mail settings, refer to "Configuration for Authentication" (P.440).
Step 3 Other Settings

9 Configure the following items if necessary.
 URL File Expiration
 Generation of URL Link
 Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size

Print Login Name on PDF Files
For information about URL File Expiration, refer to "URL File Expiration" (P.258).
For information about Generation of URL Link, refer to "Generation of URL Link" (P.258).
For information about Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size, refer to "Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size" (P.259).
For information about Print Logon Name on PDF Files, refer to "Print Login Name on PDF Files" (P.259).
Step 4 CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items

You can configure the following items using CentreWare Internet Services:
 URL File Expiration
 Generation of URL Link

Maximum File Size
 Subject
384
Configuration of Store & Send Link
 Message
 Attachment
 Device Information
 Signature

9
385
Configuration of Store to WSD
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store to WSD service.
Step 2 Enabling Port ................................................................................................................................................................... 386
Step 3 Confirmation on the Computer................................................................................................................................... 387
Step 1 Preparations
The following environment is required to use the Store to WSD feature on the machine.
 The following operation system must be installed on a destination computer.
- Microsoft Windows 8.1
- Microsoft Windows Vista Service Pack 2

Step 2 Enabling Port

To use the Store to WSD service, enable the WSD scan port. The following describes the
configuration procedures on the machine.
9 Services" (P.339).
• WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

displayed on the screen, and select [Enter]. When a passcode is required, select [Next]
and enter the system administrator's passcode, and select [Enter].
2 Enable the port.
3) Select [WSD], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [WSD Scan - Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
3 Select [Close].
386
Configuration of Store to WSD
4 Print a configuration report to confirm that the WSD port is set up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120) .
Step 3 Confirmation on the Computer

Confirm that the machine name is displayed on the computer as a network device.
On Windows Vista, select [Control Panel] > [Hardware and Sound] > [Scanners and Cameras]
(on Windows 7, select [Control Panel] > [Devices and Printers] / on Windows 8 and Windows
8.1, select [Control Panel] > [Hardware and Sound] > [Device and Printers] / on Windows
Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2, select [Control Panel] > [Hardware] > [Devices
and Printers]), and confirm the machine name on the screen.
It is convenient to configure the settings such as the color format, file type, and resolution
in [Scan Profiles] and save them in advance.
For more information, refer to Windows Help.
Note • On Windows Vista Home Basic or Home Premium, scanning with [Windows Fax and Scan] is not
supported. Use other features such as [From scanner or camera] in [Microsoft Paint] for scanning.

9
387
388
10 Using IP Fax (SIP)
This chapter describes the settings to use the services via IP fax (SIP) on the machine.
 IP Fax (SIP) Overview................................................................................................................390
 Preparations..................................................................................................................................390

IP Fax (SIP) Overview
IP Fax (SIP) is a fax feature that sends and receives document data via the IP network of a
corporation (the intranet). The IP Fax (SIP) complies with ITU-T Resolution T.38.
Because the IP Fax (SIP) uses the existing IP network for communications, you can reduce
the telecommunications costs compared to a conventional G3 fax machine that uses the
public telephone line.
Note • The communication between IP Fax (SIP) devices is available for our compatible machines in a
corporate intranet. (Able 1407 λ is not available.) For information on the compatible machines,
Preparations
This section describes the prerequisites to use the IP fax (SIP) feature on the machine.
System Requirements for the Machine


IP Fax (SIP) Kit (optional)

The machine is connected to the intranet.
The following equipment can also be used but not required.

SIP server

VoIP gateway (to communicate with a G3 fax machine connected to the public phone
Using IP Fax (SIP)
line)
Note • For more information about the SIP server and VoIP gateway, contact your system administrator.
• Another optional component is required to use the IP Fax (SIP) feature for some models.
Settings by System Configuration

10 To use the IP Fax (SIP) feature, configure the following settings.
Settings
Enabling port Configuring
Configuring Configuring Registering
and setting up Fax
SIP User ID SIP server VoIP gateway
TCP/IP environment
Systems
IP Fax (SIP)
O O O X X
machine only
SIP server only O O O O X
VoIP gateway only O O O X O
SIP server and
O O O O O
VoIP gateway
O : Available
X : Not available
390
This section describes the configuration procedures to use the IP Fax (SIP) feature on the
machine.
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP .........................................................................................................................391
Step 2 Configuring the SIP User Name...................................................................................................................................392
Step 3 Configuring Fax Environment ......................................................................................................................................392
Step 4 Configuring the SIP Server............................................................................................................................................393
Step 5 Registering the VoIP Gateway .....................................................................................................................................394

To use the IP Fax (SIP) feature on the machine, enable the port and set the IP addresses.
The following shows the configuration procedures on the machine.
You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to use CentreWare Internet
Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.339).

2) Enter the system administrator’s user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
Using IP Fax (SIP)

2 Enable the SIP port.
2) Select [Port Settings]. 10
3) Select [SIP], and then select [Change Settings].
address. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically, or if manual configuration is
5 Select [Close].
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the port is enabled and TCP/IP setting is set up
correctly.
391
Step 2 Configuring the SIP User Name

This section describes the configuration procedures of the SIP user name on the machine.
Services" (P.339) .

2 Set SIP user ID.
2) Select [SIP settings].
3) Select [SIP User ID (Sign-in Name)], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Enter a SIP user ID and select [Save].
Using IP Fax (SIP)
For information on SIP user ID, refer to "SIP Settings" (P.228).

4 Select [Close].
5 Print a configuration report to confirm that the port is enabled and TCP/IP setting is set up
10 correctly.
For information on how to print a settings list, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120).
Step 3 Configuring Fax Environment

This section describes the configuration procedures of the Fax feature related to IP fax (SIP)
on the machine.

392

2 Set items displayed on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
1) Select [Fax Service Settings].
2) Select [Screen Defaults].
3) Configure the required settings, and then select [Save].
For information on the screen default, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.260).
3 Set the default settings of the Fax feature.
1) Select [Fax Defaults].
For information on the fax default, refer to "Fax Defaults" (P.261).
4 Configure the settings related to fax control.
1) Select [Fax Control].
For information on the fax control, refer to "Fax Control" (P.262).
5 Configure the local terminal information.
1) Select [Local Terminal Information].
For information on the local terminal information, refer to "Local Terminal Information" (P.270).
7 Select [Close].
Using IP Fax (SIP)

8 Print a configuration report to confirm the fax settings.
Step 4 Configuring the SIP Server

This section describes the configuration procedures to set the IP address, login user name,
10
and password of a SIP server to go through.
Configure a SIP server when you use the IP fax (SIP) feature via a SIP server.

2 Configure SIP server settings.
For more information on SIP server settings, refer to "SIP Settings" (P.228).
393
2) Select [SIP settings].

3) Select [Enable SIP Server], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Yes], and then select [Save].
5) Select [SIP Server IP Address Resolution], and then select [Change Settings].
6) Select a method to obtain SIP server IP address, and then select [Save].
7) Select [SIP Proxy Server Setup], and then select [Change Settings].
8) Set the IP address, port number, login user name, login password, and server type.
Note • The settings of port number, login user name, login password, and server type are required even
when [SIP Server IP Address Resolution] is set to [DHCP] or [DHCP v6].
9) Select [SIP Registrar Server Setup], and then select [Change Settings].
10) Set the IP address, port number, login user name, login password, and server type.
Note • The settings of the port number, login user name, login password, and server type are required even
when [SIP Server IP Address Resolution] is set to [DHCP] or [DHCP v6].
11) Select [Close].

4 Select [Close].
5 Print a configuration report to confirm the SIP server settings.
Using IP Fax (SIP)
Step 5 Registering the VoIP Gateway

This section describes the configuration procedures to register a VoIP gateway to go
through.
Configure a VoIP gateway when you transmit IP fax (SIP) to a G3 fax machine that is
connected to the public phone line.
10 You can configure up to 50 VoIP gateways.

2 Configure VoIP gateway settings.
For more information on VoIP gateway registration, refer to "VoIP Gateway Setup" (P.230).
2) Select [SIP Settings].
3) Select [VoIP Gateway Setup], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select a VoIP gateway to register, and then select [Change Settings].
394
5) Select [ID], and then select [Change Settings].

6) Specify an ID, and then select [Save].
7) Select [Gateway Address], and then select [Change Settings].
8) Specify the IP address of the VoIP gateway, and then select [Save].
9) Select [Save].
10) To configure another VoIP gateway, repeat steps 4 to 9.
11) Select [Close].
4 Select [Close].
5 Print a configuration report to confirm the VoIP gateway settings.
Using IP Fax (SIP)

10
395
Using IP Fax (SIP)
10
396
11 Using the Internet Fax Service
This chapter describes the settings to use services via the Internet Fax on the machine.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. For such models, an optional component is required
to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
 Internet Fax Overview ..............................................................................................................398
 Preparations..................................................................................................................................398

Internet Fax Overview
When the Fax feature is available, the machine can transmit scanned data as an e-mail
attachment using a corporate intranet or the Internet, unlike conventional fax machines
which use public phone lines. Also, the machine can receive e-mails transmitted from the
Internet Fax-enabled machines.
For details of the Internet Fax, refer to "4 Fax" > "About Internet Fax" in the User Guide.
Preparations
This section describes the prerequisites to use the Internet Fax on the machine.

 The machine is connected to a network via TCP/IP.
 The environment is prepared for e-mail transmissions.
E-Mail Environment
To use the Internet Fax feature, configure the following settings for your e-mail
Using the Internet Fax Service
environment.
Internet
Internet Fax Fax
Item Description Direct*1
via via via

SMTP POP3 SMTP
TCP/IP address TCP/IP address of the machine.
O O O
TCP/IP protocol is used for e-mail transmissions.
Subnet mask The subnet mask is required when a network is divided
11 into subnetworks.
Δ Δ Δ
Gateway address The gateway address is required when multiple networks

Δ Δ Δ
are used via gateways.
The machine's Set the machine's e-mail address.
O O O
e-mail address
DNS server address The address is required when the address of POP3 or
SMTP server is set not using an IP address but a domain Δ Δ Δ
name. The address can be obtained by DHCP.
SMTP server address SMTP server is used for sending e-mails from the machine.
O O X
The SMTP server can also be used for receiving e-mails.
SMTP AUTH login When a certification-required SMTP server is used,
name, password configure a user name for authentication. Set the Δ Δ X
password as necessary.
POP3 server Set the POP3 server address. X O X
POP user name Configure the user name for POP receiving. Set the
X O X
password as necessary.
398
Preparations
Internet
Internet Fax Fax
Item Description Direct*1
via via via

SMTP POP3 SMTP
S/MIME settings*2 Configure S/MIME. Δ Δ Δ
O : Required
X : Not supported
*1 : When you use the Internet Fax Direct feature, set [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Fax Service Settings] > [Internet Fax Control]
> [Internet Fax Path] to [Direct (P2P)].
*2 : ApeosPort Series models only.
Note • To transmit e-mails encrypted by S/MIME or with digital signatures attached, a certificate must be
ready in advance. For more information on a certificate, refer to "Configuration of E-mail
Encryption/Digital Signature" (P.417).

11
399
This section describes the configuration procedures to use the Internet Fax feature on the
machine.
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment................................................................................................................................. 401
Step 3 Testing the Internet Fax ............................................................................................................................................... 402

To use the Internet Fax feature on the machine, enable the ports for the E-mail feature, and
set the IP address. The following shows the configuration procedures on the machine.
Note • You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare
Internet Services" (P.339).


2 Enable ports to use for the E-mail feature.
3) Select [Receive E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].
11 4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
6) Select [Close].
7) Select [Enabled] for [Send E-mail - Port Status] on the [Send E-mail] screen as described
above.
address. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically, or if manual configuration is

5 Select [Close].
400
correctly.
For information on how to print a Configuration Report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120).
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment

The following describes the configuration procedures to use the E-mail features.
You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. For the items that can be configured using CentreWare
Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.363).


2 Set up the e-mail address of the machine.
2) Select [Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name], and then set the items.
For information on how to set an e-mail address, refer to "Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name" (P.225).

3 Set up the protocol to receive e-mails.
2) Select [Other Settings]. 11
3) Select [Protocol to Receive E-mail], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select either [SMTP] or [POP3] as appropriate for your environment.
5) Select [Save].
4 Configure the server settings for receiving e-mails.
2) Select [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].
 When [SMTP] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]

Configure the SMTP server.
For information on how to configure the SMTP server, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.232).
Address/Host Name" (P.225).
401
 When [POP3] is selected for [Protocol to Receive E-mail]

Configure the POP3 server.
For information on how to configure the POP3 server, refer to "POP3 Server Settings" (P.231).
For information on how to set the machine's e-mail address when you receive e-mails via POP3, refer to "Machine's E-mail
Address/Host Name" (P.225).
Important • When you enable POP over SSL in the POP3 Server Setting, receiving e-mail will be encrypted. POP
over SSL can be set using CentreWare Internet Services. For information on the setting procedure,
refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.339).
3) Select [Close].
5 Configure the server settings for sending e-mails.
Note • To send e-mails, SMTP server settings are required. When [POP3] is selected in [Protocol to Receive E-
mail], configure the SMTP server in [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings].
For information on how to configure the e-mail transmission, refer to "SMTP Server Settings" (P.232).
6 Configure the domain filtering for sending and receiving e-mails as necessary.
For information on how to configure the domain filtering, refer to "Domain Filtering" (P.243).
7 Set up the S/MIME information.
2) Select [Security Settings].
3) Select [S/MIME Settings], and then set the items.
For more information on how to configure S/MIME settings, refer to "S/MIME Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)"
(P.239).
9 Select [Close].
10 After the machine reboots, you can print a configuration report to confirm the settings of
each item.
Step 3 Testing the Internet Fax

11 Test the Internet fax transmission from the machine.
1 Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the Services Home screen to display the [Fax/Internet Fax]
screen.
2 Select [Internet Fax] from the drop-down menu.
3 Enter a destination address.
4 Press the <Start> button to transmit.
5 Check whether the computer received the e-mail.
If the computer cannot receive the e-mail, refer to "Problem Solving" (P.451).
402
12 Using the Server Fax Service
This chapter describes how to use the Server Fax service on the machine.
 Server Fax Overview ..................................................................................................................404
 Preparations..................................................................................................................................404

Installation Procedure ..............................................................................................................405
Server Fax Overview
If your machine supports the Scan feature, installing the Server Fax Kit (optional) allows you
to use the Fax feature of a Server Fax server.
With the Server Fax feature, you can transfer image data received by the machine to the
Server Fax server, and can transfer image data received by the Server Fax server to the
machine via a network based on the settings you made.
Important • While the Fax Server feature is enabled, the Fax feature is detected as "not installed" even if the Fax
Kit 2 (optional) is installed on the machine. During that time, therefore, fax transmission and
reception are disabled and printed reports show that the machine does not support the Fax feature.
Note • The Server Fax service cannot be used together with a fax, the IP Fax (SIP), or the Internet Fax
service.
Preparations
The following describes the conditions necessary to use Server Fax on the machine.

 Scanner Kit (optional) needs to be installed on the machine.
 Server Fax Kit (optional) needs to be installed on the machine.
 The machine needs to be connected to a network and needs to support TCP/IP
communication.
Using the Server Fax Service

Server Fax server needs to be installed on the network.
12
404
Installation Procedure
Installation Overview
This section describes the configuration procedure to use the Server Fax feature on the
machine.
The following shows the reference section for the configuration procedures.
Step 1 Fax Settings ......................................................................................................................................................................405
Step 2 Setting the Server Fax Feature.....................................................................................................................................406
Step 1 Fax Settings

If your machine does not support the Fax feature and supports the Server Fax feature only,
the Server Fax feature will be enabled automatically.
If your machine supports both the Fax and Server Fax features, manually switch to the
Server Fax feature.
The following procedure explains how to switch to the Server Fax feature on CentreWare
Internet Services.
For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare
Internet Services" (P.339).
Note • You can switch to the Server Fax feature also on the machine's control panel.

2 Enter the machine's IP address or the internet address into the address box on the browser,

and then press the <Enter> key.

http://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
 Example of the Internet address entry
Note • When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number to the end of the Internet address.
3 Click the [Properties] tab.

12
4 Click [Services] to display the items in the folder.
5 Click [Fax] to display the items in the folder.
6 Click [Fax Settings].
7 On the [Fax Settings] screen, select [Scan to Fax Server] under [Fax Service].
8 Set the values as the machine's setting values.
1) Click [Apply].
2) The right frame on the web browser will change to the machine reboot display.
3) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the setting values are enabled.
405
Step 2 Setting the Server Fax Feature

Enable the Server Fax feature and set the file destination. The following procedure explains
how to set them on CentreWare Internet Services.
For more information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using
CentreWare Internet Services" (P.339).

2 Enter the machine's IP address or the internet address to the address box on the browser,
and then press the <Enter> key.
 Example of the IP address entry
http://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
 Example of the internet address entry

Note • When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number to the end of the Internet address.

4 Click [Services] to display the items in the folder.
5 Click [Fax] to display the items in the folder.
6 On the tree in the left frame, click [Defaults].
7
On the [General] screen, set [Scan File Transfer Report] under [Fax].
8 Set Optional Information under [Job Log].
9 Click [Apply] to enable the settings.
10 On the tree in the left frame, click [Fax Repository Setup].
11 On the [Fax Repository Setup] screen, set the items under [Fax Destination].
12 Select a protocol.
Note • When [FTP] or [SMB] is selected, faxes will be sent to the destination specified under [File
Destination]. When [SMTP] is selected, faxes will be sent to the destination specified in the E-mail
12 settings.
For more information on this setting, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
 When [FTP] or [SMB] is selected

Set the repository server that is to be used for the Server Fax feature.
 IP Address/Host Name and Port (If the port number is blank, the default port number
(FTP:21 or SMB:139) will be used.)
 Share (SMB only)
 Document Path

Login Name
 Password
 Retype Password
406
 When [SMTP] is selected

The SMTP server settings are the same as the E-mail settings.
For more information on the SMTP server settings, refer to "Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment" (P.362).
The following settings are additionally required for the SMTP server.
 Domain Name
 E-mail Address Display Format
13 Click [Apply] to enable the settings.
For more information on how to print a settings list, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120).

12
407
12
408
13 Encryption and Digital
Signature Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use the Encryption feature and the Digital Signature
feature on the machine.
 Encryption and Digital Signature Overview.....................................................................410

Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption ..................................................412
 Configuration of Encryption using IPsec ..........................................................................414
 Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature ................................................417

Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature (ApeosPort Series Models Only)...421
13 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
Encryption and Digital Signature Overview
Types of Certificate
To use the Encryption feature and the Signature feature on the machine, a certificate is
required.
The following two types of device certificate can be used on the machine:
 A self-signed certificate created by CentreWare Internet Services (The valid period can be
specified from1 to 9,999 days.)
 A certificate issued by another CA
When you use a certificate issued by another CA, import the certificate using CentreWare
Internet Services.
For more information on how to import a certificate, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
Types of Certificate Certificate

Self-Signed
/ Issued by
Certificate
Types of Encryption Another CA
Encrypting HTTP communications
from a client to the machine O O
(SSL/TLS server)
Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
Encrypting HTTP communications

from the machine to a remote server X O
(SSL/TLS client)
Encryption using IPsec X Δ*1
E-mail encryption/digital signature X O
PDF signature/DocuWorks signature/
O O
XPS*2 signature
O : Available
Δ : Set as necessary
X : Not available
*1 : Available when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital Signature].
*2 : XPS stands for XML Paper Specification.
13
Encryption Features for Communication
The data sent between the machine and computers on a network can be encrypted.
 Encrypting HTTP Communications from a Client to the Machine

(SSL/TLS Server)
The SOAP, Internet Services (HTTP), IPP, and WebDAV ports use the HTTP server of the
machine.
The SSL/TLS protocol is used to encrypt the HTTP communications between a client and the
machine.
To encrypt communications, either one of the device certificate is required: a self-signed
certificate or a certificate issued by another CA.
410
Encryption and Digital Signature Overview
Note • By encrypting HTTP communications, communications data can be encrypted at the time of
printing using IPP (SSL encrypted communications).
 Encrypting HTTP Communications from the Machine to a Remote Server

(SSL/TLS Client)
The SSL/TLS protocol is used to encrypt the HTTP communications between a remote server
and the machine.
No certificate is required in general. However; if a remote server is set to require an SSL client
certificate, you can use a certificate issued by another CA.
When verification of server certificates is enabled to verify the SSL/TLS certificate of a
remote server, import a certificate issued by another CA using CentreWare Internet Services
to the machine.
 Encryption using IPsec

IPsec enables IP-level (not application-level) encrypted communications with remote
devices.
If you select [Authenticate by Digital Signature] for [IKE Authentication Method], a
certificate issued by another CA is required.
If you select [Authenticate by Preshared Key], no device certificate is required.
Note • If the certificate for IPsec contains the V3 extension (keyUsage), "digitalSignature" bit must be
asserted.
For information on IKE authentication methods, refer to "IPsec Settings" (P.241).
To verify the certificate of the remote device, you must register a root certificate created by
a CA of the remote device on the machine.

Note • To use certificates that have already been created, import them with CentreWare Internet Services.
 E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature

S/MIME is used for E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature. To use S/MIME on the machine, S/
MIME certificates are used.
For an S/MIME certificate, you can use a certificate issued by another CA.
The personal certificates or the device certificates of destinations are required for encrypted
communications.
Note • If the certificate for S/MIME contains an "email Address" or a V3 extension (keyUsage),
"digitalSignature" and "keyEncipherment" must be asserted. If the certificate contains v3 extension
(extendedKeyUsage), "emailProtection" must be set.
Encryption and Digital-Signature Features for Scan Files
 Encrypting PDF/DocuWorks Documents 13

PDF and DocuWorks documents can be encrypted and protected by a password.
For information on how to encrypt PDF and DocuWorks documents, refer to "5 Scan" > "E-mail" > "File Format (Selecting a
File Format for Output Data)" in the User Guide.
 Encryption/Digital Signature of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Documents (ApeosPort Series

Models Only)
Digital signatures are available for PDF, DocuWorks, and XPS documents.
To use the digital signature, a device certificate is required.
For a device certificate, you can use any registered certificates.
411
Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption
This section describes the settings to encrypt HTTP communications.

Installation Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. 412
Step1 Configuration on the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 412
Step2 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................................................................... 413
To encrypt HTTP communications, configure the machine and your computer as follows:

Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by
factory default. Configure certificates for an SSL server as needed.

Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services
The following two methods are available depending on types of certificates.
- Create a self-signed certificate on the machine, and then enable HTTPS.
- Enable HTTPS, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to the machine.
 Configuration on the Computer

To encrypt communications between a web browser and the machine, enter an address
beginning with "https" instead of "http" into the address box of the web browser.
Step1 Configuration on the Machine

Configure a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered to the machine by factory
default. Configure certificates for an SSL server as needed.
The following describes the procedures to set up a certificate by CentreWare Internet
Services.
Setting up a Certificate using CentreWare Internet Services

To set up a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, you can have the machine create
a self-signed certificate for SSL server or can import any registered certificate (issued by
another CA) to the machine.
13 For information on how to import a registered certificate, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet
• When performing SSL communications using a self-signed certificate created on the machine, or a
certificate with which the character code is encoded with UTF-8, you will not be able to connect with
SSL if Internet Explorer is used with Mac OS X 10.2 or later.
This is because the operating system cannot recognize the character code (UTF-8) of the certificate.
Use Netscape 7 in the above-mentioned OS environments.
• You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or [Others]. Delete
the registered certificate before importing.

For more information on how to start CentreWare Internet Service, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services" (P.338).
2 Create a certificate.
412
Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption

4) Click the [Create New Self Signed Certificate] button.
5) Set [Digital Signature Algorithm] as necessary.
6) Set [Public Key Size] as necessary.
7) Set [Issuer] as necessary.
8) Set [Days of Validity] as necessary.
9) Click [Apply].
10) Refresh the web browser.
3 Set up the SSL/TLS information.
3) Select the [Enabled] check box for [HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication].
4) Set up [HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication Port Number].
Note • Do not use the numbers of any other ports.
5) Click [Apply].
6) When the right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display, click
[Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.

Step2 Configuration on the Computer
To encrypt communications between a web browser and the machine, enter an address
beginning with "https" instead of "http" in the address box of the web browser.

Example of IP address entry:
https://192.0.2.1/ (IPv4)
https://[2001:DB8::1234]/ (IPv6)

Example of Internet address entry:
https://myhost.example.com/
When encrypting IPP communications (Internet printing) and adding a printer from [Add
Printer], enter an address beginning with "https" instead of "http" as the URL of the printer.
For information on the settings, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit. 13
413
Configuration of Encryption using IPsec
This section describes how to encrypt communications using IPsec.

When the IKE authentication method is set to [Authenticate by Preshared Key], skip step 1
"Import and Configuration of a Certificate" and go to step 2 "Configuration on the Machine
(Configuration of IPsec)".
For IKE authentication methods, refer to "IPsec Settings" (P.241).

Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate ................................................................................................................ 414
Step2 Configuration on the Machine (Configuration of IPsec) ....................................................................................... 415
Step3 Configuration on the Computer................................................................................................................................... 416
To encrypt communications using IPsec, configure the machine and your computer as
follows:

When [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital Signature], configure
a certificate on the machine. No certificate is registered on the machine by factory default.
After importing a certificate, configure IPsec.
Configure the following setting to set up a certificate on the machine.

 Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services
- Enable HTTPS, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to the machine.
Note • If a certificate to be imported as an IPsec certificate contains V3 extension "KeyUsage",
"digitalSignature" bit must be asserted.

Configure the following settings to encrypt communications between a computer and the
machine.
 Create an IP security policy
 Assign the IP security policy
Step1 Import and Configuration of a Certificate

13
The following describes configuration procedures to set up a certificate with CentreWare
Internet Services.
To configure a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, configure the encryption
settings for HTTP communications, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to
use it for the IPsec certificate.
Note • You cannot use a self-signed certificate created with CentreWare Internet Services for IPsec.
• The machine supports to import RSA® public key (up to 4096 bits).
For details on how to configure the encryption settings for HTTP communication, refer to "Configuration of HTTP
Communications Encryption" (P.412).

2 Import a certificate.
414
Configuration of Encryption using IPsec
Important • You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or [Others]. Delete
• If the certificate to be imported contains the V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" must be
asserted.

5) Enter [Password].
6) Enter [Retype Password].
7) Enter a file name you want to import or select a file to import from a dialog box
displayed by clicking the [Browse] button, and then select [Save].
3 Configure the certificate.
1) Click [Security].
3) Select [Local Device] for [Category] and [IPsec] for [Certificate Purpose], and then click
the [Display the list] button.
4) Select the check box next to the certificate to set.

6) Click the [Use this certificate] button.
Step2 Configuration on the Machine (Configuration of IPsec)

The following describes configuration procedures to set up IPsec on the machine.

2 Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's passcode,
and select [Enter].
13

4 Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
5 Select [Security Settings].
6 Select [IPsec Settings].
7 Configure the required settings.
For details on the settings, refer to "IPsec Settings" (P.241).
8 Select [Close].
415

The following describes the configuration procedures on the computer.
Configure the following settings on the computer.

Create an IP security policy

Assign the IP security policy
For details on the settings, refer to the help of the computer.
13
416
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature
This section describes how to encrypt e-mails and how to attach a digital signature to e-
mails.
Installation Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................417
Step1 Configuration on the Machine......................................................................................................................................417
Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient .....................................................................................................................419
To encrypt e-mails and attach a digital signature, configure the machine and your computer
as follows:
Note • To encrypt e-mails and attach a digital signature to e-mails between the machine and a computer, a
personal or device certificate for S/MIME of a recipient and the device certificate of the machine
must be set on the computer. Configure the following settings to the certificates:
- "e-mail address"
- If the certificate contains V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" and "keyEncipherment"
must be asserted.
- If the certificate contains V3 extension "extendedKeyUsage", "emailProtection" must be set.
• Up to 100 addresses can be encrypted with S/MIME.

factory default.
Configure the following settings to set up a certificate on the machine.

Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services
- Set up HTTPS communications encryption settings, and then configure a certificate on
the machine.
 Configuration on Sender and Recipient

To transmit e-mails encrypted by S/MIME and with digital signatures attached, register the
required certificate on equipment of a sender and a recipient.

This section describes configuration procedures to set up a certificate with CentreWare
Internet Services.
13
Note • You cannot use a self-signed certificate created with CentreWare Internet Services for S/MIME.
• The machine supports to import RSA public key (up to 4096 bits).

enable S/MIME.

417

2) Confirm that [Machine's E-mail Address] of [Description] is entered.
7) Enter [Retype Password].
Note • Skip this step for DocuCentre series models.

3) Select [Local Device] for [Category] and [S/MIME] for [Certificate Purpose], and then
click the [Display the list] button.
4 Enable [S/MIME Communication].
3) Select the [Enabled] check box for [S/MIME Communication].
4) Click [Apply].
13 5) When the right frame on the web browser changes to the machine reboot display, click
[Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.
5 Configure the settings for S/MIME.
Note • Skip this step for DocuCentre series models.

3) Click [S/MIME Settings] and configure the following settings.

Message Digest Algorithm
Select a message digest algorithm from [SHA-1], [MD5] or [SHA-256].
418
 Message Encryption Method

Select an encryption method for the e-mail message body from [3DES], [RC2-40], [RC2-
64], [RC2-128], [AES-128], [AES-192], or [AES-256] when you send an e-mail from the
machine.
 Certificate Auto Store
Select whether to automatically store the certificate when receiving an e-mail with an
S/MIME certificate attached from an address registered in the Address Book.
 Receive Untrusted E-mail
Set whether or not to receive untrusted e-mails such as an e-mail with expired certificate
attached or no certificate attached.

Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail
Set whether to always attach a digital signature to an outgoing e-mail or to select a
digital signature when sending e-mail from the machine.

Receive Untrusted Internet Fax
Set whether or not to receive untrusted Internet faxes such as an e-mail with expired
certificate attached or with no certificate attached.

Digital Signature - Outgoing Internet Fax
Set whether to always attach a digital signature to an outgoing Internet fax or to select
a digital signature when sending Internet fax from the machine.
4) Click [Apply].

Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient
To transmit e-mails encrypted or with digital signature attached, a device certificate and a
personal certificate must be registered with each machine.
This section describes certificates required for destination and source, and registration
procedures.
Note • Required certificates include a trusted root certificate authority and all intermediate certificate
authorities that are registered in the path of a certificate to use.
 When source is the machine and destination is a computer

The personal certificate of a computer must be registered on the machine. And the device
certificate of the machine must be registered on a computer.
To register the computer's personal certificate, use CentreWare Internet Services.
There are two methods to register the machine's device certificate to a computer:
13
 Send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature to a computer from the machine and
register it to the certificate store of an e-mail application in the computer.
To send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature, select [Always add signature] or [Select
during send] for [Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail] under [Tools] > [System Settings] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Security Settings] > [S/MIME Settings] in advance.
 Export the certificate of the machine to a computer using CentreWare Internet Services,
and register it to the certificate store of an e-mail application in the computer.
For information on how to import and export a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Importing/exporting
a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.420) or the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on how to register a certificate to the certificate store of an e-mail application, refer to the manual of your
e-mail software.
419
 When source is the machine and destination is another multifunctional machine

The device certificate of another multifunctional machine must be registered on the
machine. And the device certificate of the machine must be registered on another
multifunctional machine.
To register the device certificate of another multifunctional machine, start CentreWare
Internet Services of another multifunctional machine from a computer and export the
certificate to the computer. And then, start CentreWare Internet Services of the machine
and import the certificate.
To register the device certificate of the machine, perform the same procedure as described
above.
 When source is a computer and destination is the machine

The device certificate of the machine must be registered on a computer. The registration of
the personal certificate of a computer to the machine is not required.
There are two methods to register the machine's device certificate to a computer:

Send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature to a computer from the machine (or
another multifunctional machine) and register it to the certificate store of an e-mail
application in the computer.
To send an e-mail with S/MIME digital signature, select [Always add signature] or [Select
during send] for [Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail] under [Tools] > [System Settings] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Security Settings] > [S/MIME Settings] in advance.

Export the certificate of the machine to a computer using CentreWare Internet Services,
and register it to the certificate store of an e-mail application in the computer.
For information on how to register a certificate to the certificate store of e-mail software, refer to the manual of your e-mail
application.
The following e-mail applications can transmit e-mails between the machine and a
computer:

Windows® XP: Microsoft® Outlook® Express 6

Windows Vista®, Windows® 7: Microsoft® Outlook® 2007, Microsoft® Outlook® 2010
13 
Windows® 8: Microsoft® Outlook® 2010
 Mac OS X: Mail 2.1.1
 Importing/exporting a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services

To import a certificate, select the [Properties] tab > [Security] > [Machine Digital Certificate
Management] > [Upload Signed Certificate].
To export a certificate, select the [Properties] tab > [Security] > [Certificate Management]
and select a certificate to export, and then click the [Export this certificate] button.
For information on how to import and export a certificate, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
420
Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature (ApeosPort Series

Models Only)
This section describes the settings to send scanned documents in PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS
format with a digital signature (PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS) attached.
Installation Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................421
Step1 Configuration on the Machine......................................................................................................................................421
Step2 Configuration on the Computer ...................................................................................................................................423
To attach a signature (PDF signature/DocuWorks signature/XPS signature) to a scanned
document to send as a PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS document, configure the machine and your
computer as follows:

factory default.
Configure the following setting to set up a certificate on the machine.

 Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services
Set up HTTPS communications encryption settings, and then configure a certificate on
the machine.

 Sending a DocuWorks security certificate file from the machine to a computer
You must register a personal certificate as the destination on the machine, and then
register the certificate on the Address Book. When you register a personal certificate on
the machine, include the root certificate in the personal certificate.
For information on how to import a certificate, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet Services
screen to see help.
 Sending a PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS signature file from the machine to a computer 13
Make sure that the root certificate of the certificate to be used for the scan file signature
of the machine is registered on the recipient's computer.

This section describes configuration procedures to set up a certificate with CentreWare
Internet Services.

enable S/MIME.
421

For more information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.338).
6) Enter [Retype Password]
1) Click [Security].

3) Select [Local Device] for [Category] and [Scan File] for [Certificate Purpose], and then
click the [Display the list] button.
4 Configure the settings for PDF Signature/DocuWorks Signature/XPS Signature.
3) Click [PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Security Settings] and configure the following settings.
13 Important • The DocuWorks documents with DocuWorks signature are available on the following versions of
DocuWorks software.
 PDF Signature
Select the setting for PDF signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add visible
signature], [Always add invisible signature], or [Select during send].

PDF Signature Hash Algorithm
Select the setting of the hash algorithm when using PDF signature from [SHA-1] or [SHA-
256].
422
Configuration of PDF/DocuWorks/XPS Signature (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
 DocuWorks Signature
Select the setting for DocuWorks signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add

DocuWorks Signature Hash Algorithm
Select the setting of the hash algorithm when using DocuWorks signature from [SHA-1]
or [SHA-256].

XPS Signature
Select the setting for XPS signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add signature],
or [Select during send].
4) Click [Apply].

 Sending a DocuWorks security certificate file from the machine to a computer
You must register a personal certificate as the destination on the machine, and then
register the certificate on the Address Book. When you register a personal certificate on
the machine, include the root certificate in the personal certificate.
For information on how to register (import) a certificate, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet

 Sending a PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS signature file from the machine to a computer
Make sure that the root certificate of the certificate to be used for the scan file signature
of the machine is registered on the recipient's computer.
13
423
13
424
14 Authentication and Accounting
Features
The machine provides the Authentication feature to restrict the availability of services for
each feature and the Accounting feature to manage the use of each feature based on the
Login Type selected.
This chapter describes the settings to restrict the availability of services and to manage
account usage on the machine.
Note • The Remote Access feature is available on the ApeosPort series models only.
 Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature.................................................426

Services Controlled by Authentication...............................................................................434
 Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders ...........................................................437

Configuration for Authentication ........................................................................................440
 Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional)..................................................................445
 Configuration for Account Administration ......................................................................447
 User Authentication Operations...........................................................................................449
14 Authentication and Accounting Features
Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature
This section overviews the Authentication feature and the Accounting feature.
Using authentication feature allows you to restrict the access to the machine, restrict the
use of each service, and count the use of services per user.
Types of User ................................................................................................................................................................................ 426
User Roles and Authorization Groups..................................................................................................................................... 426
Access Control............................................................................................................................................................................... 427
Types of Authentication............................................................................................................................................................. 428
Types of Account Administration............................................................................................................................................. 429
Types of User
When the Authentication feature is enabled, users are classified into the following three
types.
Note • When the Authentication feature is disabled, users are classified as either system administrator or
local user.
 System Administrator
The system administrator can register and change system settings to adapt to the
environment to be used.
A system administrator uses a specific user ID called a system administrator's user ID.
 Login User
Authentication and Accounting Features
A Login User is a user registered on the machine or a remote server.

To use restricted services, enter the user ID and passcode on the screen.
A user ID of a login user can be associated with some sub users in accordance with the
intended use.
Note • An optional component is required to use the sub user feature. For more information, contact our
 Unregistered User
An unregistered User is a user not registered on the machine.
An unregistered user cannot use restricted services.
User Roles and Authorization Groups

You can select a user role and an authorization group for each user.
14 For a user registered on a remote server, these settings are effective only when ApeosWare
Authentication Management, ApeosWare Authentication Agent, or LDAP is used.
When using LDAP, configure the settings on CentreWare Internet Services.
Important • When [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts], and [Accounting Type] is set to [Network
Accounting], an authorization group cannot be assigned to a user. Therefore, the features
configured for the authorization group, such as the feature to temporarily disable forcible printing,
are not available.
User Roles
Set the scope of administration authority for each login user. The authority of system
administrator or account administrator can be given to a specified login user.
426
 System Administrator
The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following operations:
 Operate folders
 Operate job flows sheets

Change the passcode of the system administrator
 Account Administrator
The following authorities are given:
 Create, delete, change (except for passcode), and view (unavailable depending on some
settings) user information
 Create, delete, change, and view accounting

Change Alternative Name for Account ID or Mask Account ID
 Print an Auditron Report for each user
Authorization Groups
Create groups according to the operation authority of the following restrictions and assign
login users to them. The login users assigned to the authorization groups can operate the
machine in the same way as system administrator.
For details on authorization groups, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.326).
 Restrict Recipient Selection Method

Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to specify recipients when
[Restrict Recipient Selection Method] is set to [Only From Address Book].
For details on the Restrict Recipient Selection Method setting, refer to "Restrict Recipient Selection Method" (P.204).

 Restrict User to Edit Address Book
Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to edit the Address Book in
the machine when editing the Address Book is prohibited.
For details on the Restrict User to Edit Address Book setting, refer to "Restrict User to Edit Address Book" (P.204).
 Allow User to Disable Active Settings

Allows you to set whether or not to permit the group members to disable active settings,
such as Force Watermark, Force Secure Watermark, and Print Universal Unique ID, and
perform a job. This setting enables users belonging to an authorization group to disable
active settings from [Tools] on the Services Home screen.
For details on the Watermark, Secure Watermark, and UUID settings, refer to "Watermark" (P.181), "Secure Watermark"
(P.183), and "Print Universal Unique ID" (P.186).
For information on how to temporarily disable active settings, refer to "Allow User to Disable Active Settings" (P.332).
 When Protection Code Is Detected 14

Allows you to set whether or not to temporarily allow the machine to process a job even if
the machine detects a protection code on the original document.
For details on the Secure Watermark setting, refer to "Secure Watermark" (P.183).
Access Control
Allows you to restrict the operation of the machine.
427
Account Limit for All User

When using authentication mode, you can restrict the access to the machine and the use of
each service. User authentication is needed to use this feature.
For more information, refer to "Access Control" (P.325).
 Device Access
Allows you to prohibit the operation of buttons on the control panel.
 Service Access
Allows you to configure whether or not to restrict the use of each service such as Copy, Fax,
and Scan.
 Feature Access
Allows you to restrict making color copies, and printing and retrieving files stored in folders.
Account Limit for Each User


Allows you to restrict access to each service and to set the maximum number of pages
allowed for the service per user.
 Allows you to restrict creating, editing, and using job flow sheets and folders per user.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Services Controlled by Authentication" (P.434) and "Authentication for Job
Flow Sheets and Folders" (P.437).
Types of Authentication
The following describes the types of authentication (Login Type) available on the machine.
Authentication is performed using user information registered on the machine or a remote

server.
Types of Authentication

Login to Local Accounts uses the user information registered on the machine to manage
authentication.
Note • A print job directly sent to the machine from a computer can be received on the machine after being
authenticated through cross-checking the authentication information configured on the client's
printer driver with the information registered on the machine. In this case, depending on the remote
authentication system, the domain name needs to be set. Set the domain name from the printer
driver.
For information on printer driver settings, refer to the help of the driver.
14  Login to Remote Accounts (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Authentication is performed for a remote server. User information is not registered on the
machine.
Login to Remote Accounts uses the user information registered on a remote authentication
server (LDAP, Kerberos, SMB, ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare
Authentication Agent server) to perform authentication.
Important • When a user is authenticated by a remote authentication server (except ApeosWare Authentication
Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent), the authenticated user can access the services
through the control panel based on the permission information obtained from the remote server.
• When you change Login Type to or from [Login to Remote Accounts], user information, private
folders, and Personal Sheets registered on the machine will be deleted.
428
• When you register user information on a remote authentication server, use up to 32 single-byte
characters for a user ID and up to 128 single-byte characters for a password. Note, however, that up
to 32 single-byte characters are allowed for an SMB authentication password.
Note • The user information used for Login to Remote Accounts can be stored on the machine. For more
information, refer to "Save remote accounts in this machine" (P.329) and "Delete Remote Accounts"
(P.329).
Authentication Methods
 User ID Authentication
Authentication is performed using user information registered on the machine or a remote
server in advance. The users are required to enter their user IDs and passcodes with the
numeric keypad or the touch screen of the machine.
 Smart Card Authentication

Authentication is performed using the card number or user information registered on the
smart card. Register such information on the machine or a remote server in advance and use
the smart card for authentication.
Note • Authentication is performed using the smart card, IC Card Reader (optional), IC Card Gate (sold
separately). When you connect IC Card Gate to the machine, contact our customer support center.
For information about using IC Card Gate, refer to the manual for IC Card Gate.
• For information about setting procedure of authentication with IC Card Reader, refer to
"Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional)" (P.445).
• User ID is registered on the smart card used with IC Card Gate in advance.
 Combined Use of Smart Card Authentication and User ID Authentication

You can use smart card authentication in combination with user ID authentication.
However, when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts], you need to enable user ID

authentication.
To enable user ID authentication, refer to "When Smart Card Reader is Connected" (P.328).
Types of Account Administration

The following describes the types of account administration (Accounting Type) available on
the machine.
Important • When [Login to Remote Accounts] is set for [Login Type] and [Authentication Agent] is set for
[Authentication System], ApeosWare Authentication Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare
Authentication Agent (sold separately) automatically becomes an accounting/authentication
server.
Note • Some Accounting Types may be grayed out and not selectable depending on the Login Type
selected. For more information, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Relationship" (P.430).
The Account Administration feature is classified into the following four types:
 Local Accounting 14
Local Accounting performs account administration on the machine.
In Local Accounting, account administration is performed for each user using the login users’
information registered on the machine.
Note • Auditron reports can be printed when the login user is a system administrator, a user set to have
system administration authority, or a user set to have account administration authority. For printing
procedure of the report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120).
For information on the types of jobs that can be monitored, "Jobs Manageable by Account Administration" (P.431).
429
 Network Accounting
Network Accounting performs account administration using user information managed by
a remote service.
In Network Accounting, the remote server collects job data stored on the machine and
counts up the numbers of pages processed for each user.
Note • User information managed by the remote service is sent to be registered on the machine. When the
user information on the remote service is updated, the updated information must be sent from the
remote service to the machine.
• The remote services supported by the machine include Device Setup Tool (free software).
 Accounting using Authentication Server (ApeosPort Series Models Only)

Account administration is performed using a remote authentication server.
In this accounting, the remote server collects job data stored on the machine and counts up
the numbers of pages processed for each user.
Note • The authentication server manages the user's information and obtains accounting information
from a remote server.
• Authentication servers supported by the machine include ApeosWare Authentication Management
(sold separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent (sold separately).
 Xerox Standard Accounting

Account administration is performed using the user information and account information
registered on the machine. Also, accounting information is counted using various counters
automatically created for each user. Auditron reports are created in CSV format using
For information on driver settings, refer to the help of the driver.
For information on the user information settings, account information settings, and how to create a report, refer to the help
of CentreWare Internet Services.
When setting the user information or account information for another machine, we recommend that
you use the Cloning feature of CentreWare Internet Services.
Authentication and Accounting Relationship

You can individually select Login and Accounting Types, and can combine them as described
in the following table.
Accounting Types
Authenti- Xerox
Accounting Local Network
cation Standard
Disabled Accounting Accounting
Server Accounting
Login Types No Login
14 Required
O X O X O
Login to
Local X O O X O
Accounts
Login to
Remote O*1 X X O*2 X
Accounts
O : Available
- : Not available
430
*1 : When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts] and [Authentication System] is not set to [Authentication Agent],
[Accounting Type] is automatically set to [Accounting Disabled]. Accounting, however, can be performed with ApeosWare
Log Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Accounting Service (sold separately).
*2 : When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts] and [Authentication System] is set to [Authentication Agent], [Accounting
Type] is automatically set to [Authentication Server]. Accounting can be performed with ApeosWare Log Management (sold
separately) or ApeosWare Accounting Service (sold separately).
Jobs Manageable by Account Administration

This section describes the information that can be managed for the jobs for each service.
 Print
The following table shows the print jobs and the information that can be managed for each
print job.
Services (Jobs) Target User Managed Items

Normal Print Printing via the Print Login User Pages/sheets
Server
Machine’s print driver Login user
Other than machine’s Unregistered user
print driver
Secure Print Print Files Login User
Sample Set
Print Stored File
Delayed Print
Charge Print
Private Charge Print

Print E-mail* Unregistered User
* : Printing is available only when [Non-account Print] is set to [Enabled] in CentreWare Internet Services.
 Scan
The following table shows the scan jobs and the information that can be managed for each
scan job.

E-mail Login user Scanned pages, mail transmission
pages
Store to Folder Scanned pages
Scan to PC Scanned pages, file transfer pages
Store & Send Link Scanned pages 14
Network Scanning Scanned pages, file transfer pages
Store to USB Scanned pages
431
 Fax
The following table shows the fax jobs and the information that can be managed for each
fax job.

Send as Fax Automatic Send Login user Transmissions/pages, charging
units
Manual Send (Call-
in, Call-out)
Receive Fax/Print Automatic Receptions/pages, charging
Fax Reception/Print -*1 units, printed pages/number of
sheets
Manual Reception/
Print (Call-in, Call-
out)
Store Fax - Local Automatic Receptions/pages, charging
Folder Reception to Folder -*1 units
Print Folder- Login user*5 Printed pages/number of
received Fax sheets
Fax Polling Automatic Send (to Unregistered user Transmissions/pages
Folder)
Automatic Login user Polls/pages, charging units,
Reception/Print printed pages/number of
sheets
Polling File Sample Login user*5 Pages/number of sheets
Printout (Folders,
Polling Folders)
Fax Relay Relay Broadcasting, Relay Broadcast*2 Transmissions/pages, charging
Broadcast Printing units, printed pages/number of
sheets
Direct Fax Login user Transmissions/pages, charging
Transmission units
Send as Internet Login user Transmissions/pages
Fax
Receive Internet Automatic Receptions/pages, printed
Fax/Print Internet Reception/Print *3 pages/number of sheets
-
Fax
Automatic Receptions/pages
Reception to Folder
14 Print Folder- Login user*5 Pages/number of sheets
received Fax
Fax Polling Automatic Transmissions/pages, charging
Transmission -*4 units
(Transfer)
*1 : The machine counts jobs as Receive Fax.

*2 : The machine counts jobs as Relay Broadcast.
*3 : The machine counts jobs as Receive Internet Fax.
*4 : The machine counts jobs as Internet fax Transfer.
*5 : When you enable folder operation on the setting of authentication feature under System Administration mode, the machine
counts jobs as unregistered user’s jobs.
432
 Restriction on Using the Accounting feature on Fax Jobs:

Note the following conditions when you use the Accounting feature on fax jobs.
- Sending files from different user accounts to the same destination is not counted as a
batch send.
- The number of charging units is calculated using the machine's built-in timer.
Therefore, the communications charges calculated from the number of charging units
may slightly differ from the charges invoiced by the telecommunications company.
- When fax-received pages are split for printing, the number of pages counted will be
those received, not those printed.
- The number of charging units is not counted for the following communications:
When dialing a fax number using the numeric keypad or the On-hook/Off-hook
feature.

When using an address number in which the billing data is not registered.

When a phone conversation took place, including the one before a transmission.

Billing for Fax Jobs
Fax jobs are not billed for the following communications:
- When dialing a fax number using the numeric keypad or the On-hook/Off-hook feature.
- When using an address number in which the billing data is not registered.
- Manual Receive, Manual Send, or Manual Polling is used.
- When a phone conversation took place, including the one before a transmission.
14
433
Services Controlled by Authentication
This section describes the features that are controlled by the Authentication feature.
The restricted features vary depending on how the machine is used.
For information on the folder and job flow sheet restrictions when the Authentication feature is enabled, refer to
"Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders" (P.437).
Overview......................................................................................................................................................................................... 434
Combination of Authentication and Account Administration types .............................................................................. 434
Overview
Some restrictions can be set for each user, and other restrictions can be set for the machine
as a whole.
When the authentication feature is used, specified service to be used for each user and the
available number of pages can be restricted.
For information on the restrictions that can be set for each user, refer to "Service Access" (P.314), and for information on the
restrictions that can be set for the machine as a whole, refer to "Service Access" (P.325).
Combination of Authentication and Account Administration types

The following shows the services that can be restricted in use and accounted according to
the combination of the authentication and accounting administration types.
For authentication procedure, refer to "Configuration for Authentication" (P.440).
Note • To use the combination of user ID authentication and smart card authentication when [Login Type]
is set to [Login to Local Accounts], you need to enable user ID authentication. For the setting
procedure, refer to "When Smart Card Reader is Connected" (P.328).
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Local
Accounting]
Restrictions per user

Per-user
Services Feature * Usage Count
Account Limit
restrictions *
Copy O O O
Print O O O
14 Scan O O O
Fax, Internet Fax O - O
O : Available
- : Not available
* : For information of available setting for each user, refer to "Service Access" (P.314).
434
Services Controlled by Authentication
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Network
Accounting]

Per-user Usage
Services Feature
Account Limit Count*2
restrictions *1
Copy O - -
Print O - -
Scan O - -
Fax, Internet Fax O - -
O : Available
- : Not available
*1 : The restriction is available with ApeosWare Device Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Portal Service (sold
separately).
*2 : The accounting is available with ApeosWare Device Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Portal Service (sold
separately).
When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts]

Per-user Usage
Services Feature Account Count*2
restrictions *1 Limit*1

Copy O - -
Print O - -
Scan O - -
Fax, Internet Fax O - -
O : Available
- : Not available
*1 : When ApeosWare Authentication Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Portal Service (sold separately) is used as an
authentication system, you can select features to restrict.
*2 : The accounting is available with ApeosWare Device Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Portal Service (sold
separately).
Important • Note the following conditions when you use ApeosWare Log Management (sold separately) or
ApeosWare Accounting Service (sold separately) to perform account administration per user:
- When users are registered in multiple domains, each user ID must be unique.
- Before a user sends a job from a computer (print and fax), the user needs to log in from the
computer to the remote server to have the server confirm the user ID.
14
435
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Xerox Standard
Accounting]

Per-user Usage
Services Feature * Count
Account Limit
restrictions *
Copy O O O
Print O O O
Scan O O O
Fax, Internet Fax O O O
O : Available
- : Not available
* : You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
14
436
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
This section describes the restrictions of job flows, and folders.

Creating / Using Job Flow Sheet...............................................................................................................................................437
Creating / Using Folder...............................................................................................................................................................438
Creating / Using Job Flow Sheet

You can create the job flow sheets for the documents stored in folders.
The restrictions of the two job flow sheets created when the authentication feature is used
and when that is not used, are different. Also, the restrictions of the job flow sheets created
on the [Create Folder], [Send from Folder], or [Create Job Flow Sheet] screen are different.
Important • When you switch the Login to Local Accounts feature from [enable] to [disable] or vice versa, all the
job flow sheets used till then become unavailable besides for the system administrator. In this case,
delete all the job flow sheets and create new ones.
• When you change [Login Type] to [Login to Remote Accounts] or to another login type from [Login
to Remote Accounts], the job flow sheets that was used before the change will be deleted.
• When a job flow sheet which becomes unavailable due to the change of the login type is associated
with a folder, the job flow sheet is available, but cannot be edited or copied. However, when the
association is invalid, the job flow sheet will not be displayed.
• A job flow sheet created on the [Create Folder] screen or the [Send from Folder] screen can only be
used for the folder on which the job flow sheet is created. The job flow sheet cannot be used for any
other folders.
• The job flow sheets created on the network cannot be edited or copied on the machine.
Note • When using Device Setup Tool, the job flow sheets for the documents stored in the folders and the
scan documents can be created on the network. Device Setup Tool is downloaded from ApeosWare

Management Suite on our website.
For information on the job flow sheets which can be created on the machine, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet" (P.294).
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled

Note • When the Authentication feature is enabled, the following users can use the job flow sheets.
- A login user and a system administrator when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts].
- A login user besides guest user when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts].
- A login user when [Verify User Details] is set to [Yes] in [Network Accounting] and [Customize User
Prompts] is set to [Display User ID & Account ID Prompts] or [Display User ID Prompt Only].
 Creating Job Flow Sheet on the [Create Folder] screen / [Send from Folder] screen
The following shows the creator of job flow sheet, manageable user, and available
operations.
Creator of Job Flow Sheet Manageable User Available Operations

Login User Edit, Display, Copy, Delete,
14
Creator / System Administrator
Select, Run, Link to Folder
System Administrator All Login User / System Edit*, Display, Copy, Delete*,
Administrator Select, Run, Link to Folder
* : Only the system administrator can operate.

Note • A user copies a job flow sheet becomes the creator of the copied job flow sheet.
437
 Creating Job Flow Sheet on the [Create Job Flow Sheet] screen
operations

Login User Edit, Display, Copy, Delete,
Select, Run
System Administrator All Login User / System Edit*, Display, Copy, Delete*,
Administrator Select, Run

When the Authentication Feature is Disabled
 Creating Job Flow Sheet on the [Create Folder] screen / [Send from Folder] screen
operations.

Local User All Local User / System Edit, Display, Copy, Delete,
System Administrator All Local User / System Edit*, Display, Copy, Delete*,

 Creating Job Flow Sheet on the [Create Job Flow Sheet] screen
operations.

Local User All Local User / System Edit, Display, Copy, Delete,
System Administrator All Local User / System Edit*, Display, Copy, Delete*,
14 Note • A user copies a job flow sheet becomes the creator of the copied job flow sheet.
Creating / Using Folder

The folders created when the authentication feature is used and is not used are different in
use.
Important • When you switch the Login to Local Accounts feature from [enable] to [disable] or vice versa, all the
job flow sheets used till then become unavailable besides for the system administrator. In this case,
delete all the job flow sheets and create new ones.
• When you change [Login type] to [Login to Remote Accounts] or to another login type from [Login
to Remote Accounts], the job flow sheets that was used before the change will be deleted.
438
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled

Note • When the Authentication feature is enabled, the following users can use the folders.
- A login user and a system administrator when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts].
- A login user besides guest user when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts].
- A login user when [Verify User Details] is set to [Yes] in [Network Accounting] and [Customize User
Prompts] is set to [Display User ID & Account ID Prompts] or [Display User ID Prompt Only].
The following shows the relationship between the creator of a folder and the user who can
manage the folder.
Creator of Folder Manageable User Available Operations

Login User Display, Delete, Change
Settings, Display File, Delete
File, Register File, Output File,
Display Job Flow Sheet, Link
Job Flow Sheet, Run Job Flow
Sheet
System Administrator Display, Delete*1, Change
Settings*1, Display File, Delete
All Unregistered User*2 /
All Login User /
System Administrator
Job Flow Sheet*1, Run Job Flow
Sheet
*1 : Only the system administrator can operate.

*2 : Available when you enable folder operation on the setting of authentication feature in the System Administration mode.
When the Authentication Feature is Disabled

The following shows the relationship between the creator of a folder and the user who can
manage the folder.
Creator of Folder Manageable User Available Operations

Login User Display, Delete, Change
Settings, Display File, Delete
Job Flow Sheet, Run Job Flow
Sheet
System Administrator Display, Delete*, Change
Settings*, Display File, Delete
All Login User / File, Register File, Output File,
System Administrator Display Job Flow Sheet, Link
Job Flow Sheet*, Run Job Flow
Sheet
14
Note • Registering and outputting files using Network Scanner Utility 3 is not supported as the
authenticated operation.
439
Configuration for Authentication
This section describes the settings to use the Authentication feature on the machine.
Enabling Authentication............................................................................................................................................................ 440
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings.......................................................................................................... 443
Creating an Authorization Group ............................................................................................................................................ 443
To use the Authentication feature, configure the following settings.
Important • If job flow sheets, which are no longer available for use because of a change in the Login Type, are
linked to folders, they cannot be edited or copied, but still can be used. If you cancel the links,
however, the job flow sheets will no longer be displayed and will be unavailable.

Specify the Login Type and access control, and then create a user.
 Login to Remote Accounts

Specify the Login Type, access control, and remote authentication server.
Change the default authorization group settings and add an authorization group, as
necessary.
Enabling Authentication
This section describes the procedures for [Login to Local Accounts] and [Login to Remote
Accounts] respectively.
When [Login to Local Accounts] is Selected

Perform the following procedures to use local authentication.

and select [Enter].
14 Note • The default user ID is "11111".

4 Select [Authentication/Security Settings].
5 Select [Authentication].
6 Select [Login Type].
7 Select [Login to Local Accounts], and then select [Save].
For more information on the authentication method, refer to "Login Type" (P.324).
440
8 Select [Access Control].

10 Select [Unlocked] for the required services to permit users unlimited access, and then select
[Save].
11 After you finish settings for each feature, select [Close].
12 To disable button operations on the control panel, select [Device Access] and select
[Locked], and then select [Save] and then [Close].
13 Select [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login] under [Passcode Policy].
Select [On] to prompt users to enter their passcode, or select [Off] if the passcode entry is
not required, and then select [Save] and then [Close].
15 Select a user displayed as [<Available>], and then select [Create/Delete].
16 Enter a user ID and select [Save].
17 Select [Account Limit].
18 Configure the [Account Limit] and [Feature Access] settings for each service, and then
select [Close].
19 If necessary, select a user role and an authorization group for the user under [User Role]
and [Add This User To Authorization Group] respectively, and then select [Save].
21 Select [Close].

• The machine enters the Login mode, and [Login] is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home
screen.
• When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access], [ ] is displayed on the
button of the applicable service on the Services Home screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed
at the lower left of the Services Home screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after
authentication.
• When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access] the applicable service is
not displayed on the Services Home screen. The services is displayed after authentication.
When [Login to Remote Accounts] is Selected

Perform the following procedures to use remote authentication.

2 Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard 14
and select [Enter].
6 Select [Login Type].
441
7 Select [Login to Remote Accounts], and then select [Save].

For more information on the authentication method, refer to "Login Type" (P.324).
8 Select [Yes].
9 Select [Access Control].
11 Select [Unlocked] for the required services to permit users unlimited access, and then select
[Save].
13 Select [System Settings].
14 Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
15 Select [Remote Authentication/Directory Service].
16 Select [Authentication System Setup] > [Authentication System], and then select a remote
authentication server.
For more information, refer to "Remote Authentication/Directory Service" (P.233)
Note • The available options are [Kerberos (Windows 2000)], [Kerberos (Solaris)], [LDAP], [SMB], and
[Authentication Agent].
• To use ApeosWare Authentication Management as a remote server, select [Authentication Agent].
17 Configure the settings for the remote authentication server.
For more information on the Authentication feature, refer to "Kerberos Server Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)"
(P.233), "LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.234), and "SMB Server Settings" (P.237).
18
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.

19 Select [Close].
• The machine enters the Login mode, and [Login] is displayed at the lower left of the Services Home
screen.
• When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access], [ ] is displayed on the
button of the applicable service on the Services Home screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed
at the lower left of the Services Home screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed after
authentication.
• When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access] the applicable service is
not displayed on the Services Home screen. The services is displayed after authentication.
 When an LDAP server is used as a remote authentication server

Set the user authorization on the LDAP server using the following steps.
14 1 Start CentreWare Internet Services.
3 Click [Connectivity] > [Protocols] > [LDAP] > [LDAP Authorization Access].
4 Set attributes in [System Administrator Access] and [Accounting Administrator Access].
Setting example:
System Administrator Access: CN=SA, CN=Users, DC=secEQ, DC=local
Accounting Administrator Access: CN=AA, CN=Users, DC=secEQ, DC=local
5 Click [Apply].
442
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings

Perform the following procedures to change the settings of the default authentication
group.
The settings changed here will be used as the default value of the authorization group for a
created user.

and select [Enter].

7 Select the group displayed as [DefaultGroup (Default)], and then select [Create/Delete].
8 Set each item.
For more information on the change of the authorization group, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.326).

10 Select [Close].
Creating an Authorization Group

Perform the following procedures to add authorization groups, if necessary.

and select [Enter].
14
7 Select a group displayed as [(No Name)], and then select [Create/Delete].
8 Enter a group name into [Group Name].
9 Set the other items.
443
For more information on the authorization group settings, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.326).
11 Select [Close].
14
444
Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional)
Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional)
You can use a smart card for authentication by comparing the information registered on the
smart card and the user information on the machine. You can also restrict the machine use
and perform accounting of the jobs using the information registered on the smart card.
This section describes the supported smart cards and how to register a smart card to use at
the machine.
Support Center.
The following shows the reference section for card information and each procedure.
Step 2 Logout Method Using the Smart Card.......................................................................................................................445
Step 3 Registering Smart Card Information..........................................................................................................................446
Step 1 Preparations
Two types of IC Card Reader are supported by the machine. Each IC Card Reader supports
following smart card types.
 When using IC Card Reader

 MIFARE® (Type A)
- Fuji Xerox IC Card (Type A)
- Other MIFARE compatible smart cards*
 eLWISE/ELWISE (Type B)

- eLWISE
- ELWISE
 FeliCa®
- Fuji Xerox IC Card
- IC Card compatible with SSFC® version 1.0 format
- Other FeliCa compatible smart cards*
* : The embedded IC Card Reader of the machine may not support some smart cards.
 When using IC Card Reader (supports HID)


HID-PROX*
* : The embedded IC Card Reader of the machine may not support some smart cards.
Note • When you confirm which IC Card Reader you use, contact our Customer Support Center.
Step 2 Logout Method Using the Smart Card

14
Perform the following steps to set how to logout authentication using the smart card.

and select [Enter].
445

6 Select [User Details Setup].
7 Select [Smart Card Logout Timing], and then select [Change Settings].
8 Select the authentication logout method, and then select [Save].
9 Select [Close].
Step 3 Registering Smart Card Information

The system administrator can register smart cards using CentreWare Internet Services.
Note • The smart card information can be set from CentreWare Internet Services. For more information,
refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
• The information used for authentication can also be set from CentreWare Internet Services. For
more information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
14
446
Configuration for Account Administration
Configuration for Account Administration
This section describes the settings to use the Accounting feature on the machine.
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type......................................................................................................................................447
Step 2 Registering User Information ......................................................................................................................................447
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type

The following describes the configuration procedures to use the Accounting feature.
Note • For information on relationships between the Authentication and Accounting modes, refer to
"Authentication and Accounting Relationship" (P.430).

and select [Enter].

4 Select [Accounting].

5 Select [Accounting Type].
6 Select an accounting type, and then select [Save].
Note • You can select the accounting type from [Local Accounting], [Network Accounting], and [Xerox
Standard Accounting].
For information on the accounting types, refer to "Accounting Type" (P.318).

8 Select [Close].
Step 2 Registering User Information

14
and select [Enter].

4 Select [Accounting].
447
6 Select [<Available>], and then select [Create/Delete].

7 Enter a user ID and select [Save].
9 Configure the [Service Access] and [Feature Access] settings for each service, and then
select [Save].
For more information on the service access, refer to "Service Access" (P.314).
10 If necessary, select a user role and an authorization group for the user under [User Role],
and then select [Save].
Note • [User Role] is displayed only when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts].
For more information on the user role, refer to "User Role" (P.315).

12 Select [Close].
14
448
User Authentication Operations
User Authentication Operations
The machine has the Authentication feature to restrict the services available.
This section describes the authentication method to use the restricted services.
Authenticating Login Users .......................................................................................................................................................449
Changing Passcode......................................................................................................................................................................450
Authenticating Login Users

There are two methods to authenticate login users: using the control panel of the machine
and touching the smart card to the built-in IC Card Reader (optional).
To authenticate the login users using the operator panel, the user must enter the user ID. In
addition, the passcode entry is also required when [Passcode Entry for Control Panel Login]
is set to [On] under [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Passcode
Policy].
For more information on the passcode policy, refer to "Passcode Policy" (P.329).
For more information on user registration from the touch screen, refer to "Create/View User Accounts" (P.326).
Support Center.
Log In/Log Out from the Operator Panel
 User Authentication

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button or the login information field on the touch screen.
2 Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen, and
select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the passcode, and select [Enter].
Important • Finish user authentication before you cancel the Interrupt mode.
Note • When you select the service restricted, the [Log In] screen may appear. Enter the user ID and/or the
passcode to use the service.
• When the user is authenticated, the <Log In/Out> button is lit.
 Logging Out of User Authentication

Note • You can also log out by pressing the login information field on the touch screen, and then select
[Logout].
• When the user is logged out, the <Log In/Out> button light goes out. 14
Log In/Log Out by Touching the IC Card Reader (Optional)
 User Authentication
1 Touch the smart card to the IC Card Reader.

Important • Be sure to touch the smart card to the IC Card Reader.
• A passcode may be required depending on the settings. If you enter the wrong passcode, press the
<Log In/Out> button to exit the Authentication mode. Then, touch the smart card to the IC Card
Reader again.
449
 Logging Out of User Authentication

The logging out method vary depending on the Smart Card Logout Timing setting.
For more information, refer to "Kerberos Server Certificate Verification" (P.329).

When you select [Log Out when Card is Removed], the user is authenticated while the
smart card is being touched to the IC Card Reader.

When you select [Log Out from Control Panel], the user can log out by using the same log
out method as using the operator panel.
Changing Passcode
You can change the passcode to use for user authentication. Change the passcode by
following the steps in this section.
Changing Passcode by User

When a user is authenticated, the user can change his/her own passcode.
1 Select [Setup] on the Services Home screen.

2 Select [User Details Setup].
3 Select [Change Passcode].
4 Enter the current passcode, and then select [Next].
5 Select [New Passcode] and enter a new passcode, and then select [Save].
6 Select [Retype Passcode] and re-enter the new passcode, and then select [Save].
7 Select [Close].
Setting or Changing Passcode by System Administrator

The system administrator can set or change passcodes using CentreWare Internet Services.
For more information on setting or changing passcodes from the touch screen, refer to "Create/View User Accounts" (P.326).


3 Click [Security], and then click [Authentication Configuration].
4 Click [Next].
14 5 Enter the account number of the user to set or change in [Account Number], and then click
[Edit].
6 Enter a new passcode in [Password].
7 Re-enter the new passcode in [Retype Password].
8 Click [Apply].
450
15 Problem Solving
This chapter describes solutions to various problems you may have with the machine.
 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................452

Machine Trouble.........................................................................................................................453
 Image Quality Trouble .............................................................................................................458
 Trouble during Copying ...........................................................................................................464

Trouble during Printing ............................................................................................................468
 Trouble during Faxing...............................................................................................................471

Trouble during Scanning .........................................................................................................479
 Network-related Problems ......................................................................................................484
 Media Print - Text Trouble ......................................................................................................492
 Media Print - Photos Trouble .................................................................................................493
 Error Code ......................................................................................................................................494

Paper Jams ....................................................................................................................................594
 Document Jams ..........................................................................................................................615

Stapler Faults ...............................................................................................................................619
15 Problem Solving
Troubleshooting
This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.
Follow the troubleshooting procedure below to solve the problems.
The machine does not work Action Refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.453) .
properly. Yes
No
A message is displayed. Cause Has a paper or document jam occurred?
No Yes Action For information on paper jams, refer to "Paper Jams" (P.594).
For information on document jams, refer to "Document Jams"
(P.615).
No
Cause Is an error code displayed?
Action Refer to "Error Code" (P.494).
The image quality is poor. Action Refer to "Image Quality Trouble" (P.458).
No Yes
Trouble during copying Action Refer to "Trouble during Copying" (P.464).
No Yes
Trouble during printing Action Refer to "Trouble during Printing" (P.468).
No Yes
Trouble during faxing Action Refer to "Trouble during Faxing" (P.471).
No Yes
Trouble during scanning Action Refer to "Trouble during Scanning" (P.479).
No Yes
Network-related Problems Action Refer to "Network-related Problems" (P.484).
No Yes
Media Print - Text-related Action Refer to "Media Print - Text Trouble" (P.492).
Problems
Problem Solving
No Yes
Media Print - Photo-related Action Refer to "Media Print - Photos Trouble" (P.493).
Problems
Yes
If the error is not resolved even after following the above procedure, contact our Customer
15 Support Center.
When the EP system is available and a check or maintenance is required, the machine sends
a check or maintenance request to our Customer Support Center. A service representative
visits you as required. Requesting a check or maintenance should be performed by a system
administrator.
Note • The EP system may not be available in your region. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
For more information on the check or maintenance procedure of the EP system via the internet, refer to "EP Diagnostic
Request/Repair Request" (P.178) and "Check EP Connection" (P.178).
452
Machine Trouble
Machine Trouble
Before you conclude that the machine is defective, check the machine status again.
Symptom Cause Remedy

The machine is Is the main power and power Switch the main power and power on.
not powered on. switched on? Refer to "2 Product Overview" in the User Guide.
Is the power cord plugged Switch the main power and power off, and
into the power outlet? then firmly plug the power cord into the
connector of the machine and power outlet.
Is the power cord
Then switch the main power and power on.
disconnected from the
machine? Refer to "2 Product Overview" in the User Guide.
Does the AC outlet supply Connect another appliance to the outlet to

power properly? verify the power supply.
Refer to "1 Before Using the Machine" in the User Guide.
The <Error> The system of the machine or Switch the main power and power off and
indicator is the components installed then on. If the error still is not resolved,
blinking. may have a trouble. contact our Customer Support Center.
The <Error> Is paper or a document Remove the jammed paper or document.
indicator is lit. jammed? If paper is jammed, refer to "Paper Jams" (P.594), and a
document is jammed, refer to "Document Jams"
(P.615).
Is the front cover or top cover Solve the problem by following the message
open? displayed.
Is a message displayed on the Replace the consumables indicated in the
touch screen prompting you message.
to replace the consumables? Refer to "Replacing Consumables" (P.78).
Is a message displayed in the Check the message and solve the problem.
upper part of the touch If an error code such as "016-450" is
screen? displayed, check the error code list and solve
the problem.
Refer to "Error Code" (P.494).
The touch screen Is the <Power Saver> button The machine is in the Power Saver mode.
is too dark. lit? Press the <Power Saver> button on the Problem Solving
control panel to exit the Power Saver mode.
Refer to "2 Product Overview" in the User Guide.
Is the screen brightness too Adjust the screen brightness on the [Screen
low? Brightness] screen.
Refer to "Adjusting Screen Brightness" (P.39).
Unable to print, or Is a message displayed on the Follow the instructions displayed to resolve
unable to copy. touch screen? the problem. 15
If the machine and a The setting of bi-directional communication
computer are connected with is enabled by the factory default. If you
a parallel interface cable, the connect the machine to a computer which
computer does not support bi- does not support bi-directional
directional communication. communication, you cannot print. In this
case, disable bi-directional communication
on the control panel, and then print again.
Refer to "Bi-directional Communication" (P.216).
453
15 Problem Solving

Unable to print, or Is the memory capacity Perform one of the following:
unable to copy. insufficient? 
Set [Image Quality] to [Standard] in the
print driver, or try printing again by setting
[Print Page Mode] to [On].
 Set the status of the unused ports to
[Disabled].

Add memory by installing add-on memory
(only for the machine with the optional
add-on memory).
Is the print mode [Off-line]? Press the <Machine Status> button to check
the [Print Mode] on the [Machine Status]
screen. If [Print Mode] is set to [Off-line],
select [On-line].
Is the power cord Switch the main power and power off, and
disconnected from the then firmly plug the power cord into the
machine? connector of the machine and power outlet.
Then switch the main power and power on.
Refer to "2 Product Overview" > "Power Source" in the
User Guide.
The <Data> Is the interface cable Check the interface cable connection.
indicator does not connected? Refer to "Interface Cables" (P.23).
light even though
you instructed the Is the computer's Check the computer environment such as
machine to print. environment correctly set? print driver settings.
Is the required port status set Check the status of the port to use, and then
to [Enabled]? set the port status to [Enabled].
Refer to "Port Settings" (P.215).
Paper is not fed Is the specified size paper Follow the instructions displayed to load
from Tray 5. loaded in the tray? paper of correct size, and then try again.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)" (P.65).
Although you Did you turn on the machine Press the <Job Status> button to cancel the
have not sent a after you turned on the client print job.
print job, machine? Note • When you turn on the machine, make
"Printing" is sure that the computer is turned on.
displayed (when
Refer to "11 Job Status" > "Checking Current/Pending
parallel interface
Jobs" in the User Guide.
is used).
Problem Solving
Unsatisfactory A probable cause is an image Resolve the problem by referring to "Image

print quality. defect. Quality Trouble".
Refer to "Image Quality Trouble" (P.458).
Unable to print Non-standard fonts are used Check the application or print driver settings.
text correctly. for printing. If PostScript (optional) is being used,
(Text is garbled.) download the required fonts.
15 Unable to insert Did you open a cover or turn Do not forcibly insert or remove the paper
or remove a paper the machine off during tray. Switch off the power. In a few seconds,
tray. printing? switch on the power. When the machine is
ready to receive data, insert or remove the
paper tray.
454
Machine Trouble

Unable to copy Is the document glass or the Clean the document glass and the document
with the specified document cover dirty? cover.
size. Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
Glass (for Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C)"
(P.104).
Is the document a Place the document on the document glass,
transparent type such as a and place a white sheet on top of the
transparency film? document when copying.
Is the document in the correct Load the document correctly.
position? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Is the document loaded Guide.
correctly?
Are the document guides on Adjust the document guide positions.
the document feeder set in Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
the correct positions? Guide.
Is the document folded? Unfold and correctly load the document.
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Is the document a non- Specify the document size.
standard size? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Problem Solving
15
455
15 Problem Solving

Paper is often Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly.
jammed or in the tray? Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
wrinkled.
Is the paper tray inserted Firmly push in the paper tray until it stops to
correctly? insert it correctly.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new one.
Is the paper curled? Turn over the paper in the tray, or replace the
paper with new one.
Are the paper and paper tray Correctly set the paper and paper trays to
settings correct? correspond to the paper.
Refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.74).
Are any torn pieces of paper Open the cover of the machine or slide out
remaining or is there a the paper tray to remove the torn pieces or
foreign object in the the foreign object.
machine? Refer to ""Paper Jams" (P.594) or "Loading Paper"
(P.62).
Is non-standard paper loaded Replace with paper that meets machine
in the tray? specifications.
Refer to "Paper Types" (P.46) or "Loading Paper" (P.62).
Is paper exceeding the Load paper in the paper tray so that it does
maximum fill line in the tray? not exceed the maximum fill line.
Are the paper guides set Load the paper correctly, and align the paper
correctly? guides to the paper.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62) or "Changing the Paper
Size" (P.68).
Is the image nearly the same Increase the edge erase widths.
size as the paper? For more information, refer to "3 Copy" in the User
Guide when you copying, or to the help of the print
driver when printing.
Is the paper finely cut out? Some types of paper may not be cut out
Problem Solving
finely. Load the paper after fanning it well.

A document is not Is the document small? The minimum size of the document that can
fed into the be loaded on the document feeder is 125 x
document feeder. 85 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ).
Guide.
15 An error message Check the positions of the Adjust the paper guides to the correct
appears after paper guides of Tray 5. positions.
paper is loaded in Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)" (P.65).
Tray 5 and the
<Start> button is
pressed.
456
Machine Trouble

Documents are Are suitable types of Correctly load documents suitable for the
often jammed. documents being used? document feeder.
Are you trying to use irregular Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
shaped documents, business Guide.
cards, transparencies, or thin
documents?
Are you trying to use Remove sticky tags, paper clips or adhesive
documents with sticky tags, tape from the document before copying.
paper clips or adhesive tape?
Are the document guides set Adjust the document guide positions.
in the correct positions? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Is a piece of torn paper Open the document feeder cover and check
remaining in the document inside.
feeder? Refer to "Document Jams" (P.615).
Is the [Mixed Size Originals] Set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].
setting set to [Off] when you Refer to "3 Copy" > "Layout Adjustment" > "Mixed Size
copy originals of different Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
sizes? Simultaneously)" in the User Guide.
Is an A5 document loaded in Load the A5 document in portrait orientation
landscape orientation ( ) on ( ).
the document feeder when
[Mixed Size Originals] is set to
[On]?
An edge of the Is the document curled? Flatten the curl and load the document
document is again.
folded.
Cannot copy in Is [Output Color] set to [Black Set [Output Color] to [Color].
color. & White]? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Output Color (Selecting
the Color for Copying)" in the User Guide.
Is a message displayed on the Replace the toner cartridge of the color
touch screen prompting you indicated in the message.
to replace the toner Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.80).
cartridge?
Problem Solving
Is a message displayed on the Replace the drum cartridge indicated in the
touch screen prompting you message.
to replace the drum Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4
cartridge? (for Customers Having a Spot Maintenance Contract)"
(P.85).
Cannot staple Is staple jam occurred in the Remove the staple jammed in the cartridge.
properly staple cartridge? Refer to "Stapler Faults" (P.619).
15
Is the print driver set Check the [Staple] setting in [Print Setup] in
correctly? the print driver when you send a print job
from the computer.
457
15 Problem Solving
Image Quality Trouble
If the image quality of printed documents is poor, identify the symptom in the following
table to perform the remedy.
If image quality does not improve even after performing the remedy, contact our Customer
Support Center.

The copy is dirty. Is the document glass or the Clean the document glass and the document
document cover dirty? cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
(P.104).
Is the document a If the document is transparent, dirt on the
transparent type such as a document cover will be copied. Place a white
transparency film? sheet of paper on top of the document when
copying.
Is the document colored, Adjust the copy density or image quality.
rough, or a blueprint? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
Is the document glossy Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
printing paper? document glass, and shadows are sometimes
copied, soiling the image. Place a
transparency film under the document when
copying.
The copy has Is the constant velocity Clean the constant velocity transport glass.
black lines. transport glass on the Refer to "Cleaning the White Chute and the Constant
document feeder dirty? Velocity Transport Glass (for Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder B1-C)" (P.106) or "Cleaning White
Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass (for
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC)" (P.106).
The copy is too Is the copy density set to Adjust the copy density.
dark. [Darken]? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
The copy is too Is the document faint?
light.
Is the copy density set to
[Lighten]?
Problem Solving
The copy is Are the paper edges aligned Align the paper edges, adjust them to the
slightly and the leading edge tray's top corners, and reload the paper.
misaligned. adjusted to the tray corners? Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
15
458

The copy is Is the document loaded Load the document correctly.
misaligned or correctly? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
skewed. Guide.
Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly.
in the tray? Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
Are the paper guides of Tray Load the paper correctly and align the
5 correctly aligned to the document guides to the document edges.
paper? Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)" (P.65).
Are the document guides on Load the document correctly, and align the
the document feeder set in document guides to the document edges.
the correct positions? Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
Is the paper tray inserted Firmly push in the tray until it stops to insert
correctly? it properly.
Part of the image Is the paper damp? If the paper is damp, the copy image may be
is missing on the partially missing or unclear. Replace the
copy. paper with new one.
Is folded or wrinkled paper Remove the unsuitable paper or replace all of
included in the tray? the paper with new one.
Is the document pasted or The pasted or folded section may not be
folded? laying flat on the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on top of the document
to flatten the document against the
document glass.
The copy has a Is the enlargement ratio too Vertical stripes may be printed on the copies
stripe pattern. large? depending on the ratio. Adjust the ratio to
eliminate the stripes.
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Reduce/Enlarge (Making
Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" in the User Guide.
Color shift of color Is the color calibration Execute auto calibration.
copies is poor, incorrect? Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.109) and "Executing
Problem Solving
resulting in 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration" (P.112).
unsatisfactory
image quality. Is the machine set where it is If the document glass is exposed to strong
exposed to direct sunlight? light when you turn the machine on or cancel
the Power Saver mode, color shift may occur.
Close the document cover and turn the
machine on, and when the machine becomes
ready to copy or print, turn the machine off
and then on one more time.
15
459
15 Problem Solving

Printing is faint. The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new one.
(smudged, Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
unclear)
The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
deteriorated or is damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4
(for Customers Having a Spot Maintenance Contract)"
(P.85).
There is no toner left in the Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
toner cartridge. Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.80).
Black dots are The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
printed. deteriorated or is damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4
(P.85).
Black or colored The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
lines are printed. deteriorated or is damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4
(P.85).
The machine interior (LED Clean the machine interior.
printhead) is dirty. Refer to "Cleaning the Interior (LED Printheads)"
(P.102).
The constant velocity Clean the constant velocity transport glass.
transport glass on the Refer to "Cleaning the White Chute and the Constant
document feeder is dirty. Velocity Transport Glass (for Duplex Automatic
Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass (for
Problem Solving
Dirt appears at The paper path is dirty. Print a few pages to remove the dirt.
equal intervals.
15 (P.85).
Paper feed
direction
460

White dots The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.
appear in black Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
filled areas.
(P.85).
Printed toner The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new one.
smudges when Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
rubbed with your
finger. The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.
Toner is not fused. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
The paper is soiled
with toner.
The entire paper The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
area is printed deteriorated or is damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4
black. (for Customers Having a Spot Maintenance Contract)"
(P.85).
High-voltage power supply Contact our Customer Support Center.
may have malfunctioned.
Problem Solving
Nothing is printed. Two or more sheets of paper Fan the paper well and load it again.
are being fed simultaneously Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
(double-feed).
No toner remains in the toner Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
cartridge. Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.80).
Power supply or high-voltage Contact our Customer Support Center.
power supply may have 15
malfunctioned.
461
15 Problem Solving

White areas or The machine interior (LED Clean the interior.
white or colored printheads) may be soiled. Refer to "Cleaning the Interior (LED Printheads)"
stripes appear. (P.102).
The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new one.
The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.
The entire output When Tray 5 is used, the size Load paper of the correct type and size into
is faint. and type of the loaded paper Tray 5.
are different from the Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)" (P.65).
settings on the print driver.
Two or more sheets may be Fan the paper well and load it again.
fed simultaneously. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
Paper becomes The paper is unsuitable. Replace the paper with new one.
wrinkled. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
Paper has been added to the
paper loaded.
The paper is damp.
Text is blurred. The paper is unsuitable. Replace the paper with new one.
Paper has been added to the Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
paper loaded.
The paper is damp.
Problem Solving
15
462

White or color The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
patches appear deteriorated or is damaged. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4
vertically. (for Customers Having a Spot Maintenance Contract)"
(P.85).
No toner remains in the toner Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
cartridge. Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.80).
The machine interior (LED Clean the interior.
printheads) may be soiled. Refer to "Cleaning the Interior (LED Printheads)"
(P.102).
Paper feed
direction
Text or images The paper guides in the paper Adjust the horizontal and vertical paper
are printed at an tray are not set in the correct guides to the correct positions.
angle. positions. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
Problem Solving
15
463
15 Problem Solving
Trouble during Copying
This section describes how to resolve copy problems.
Unable to Copy
If you cannot copy a document, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.

The document is The document is too small. The minimum size of document that can be
not correctly fed loaded on the document feeder is 125 x 85
from the mm (A5, A5 ).
document feeder.
Guide.
The document type is The document feeder does not feed irregular
unsuitable. sized documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin documents.
In addition, the document feeder does not
feed documents with sticky tags, paper clips,
or adhesive tape.
Guide.
The document guides are set Adjust the document guides to the
in incorrect positions. document.
Guide.
A piece of torn paper remains Open the document feeder cover, and
in the document feeder. remove the piece.
Refer to "Document Jams" (P.615).
Documents of mixed sizes are When loading documents of mixed sizes, be
loaded. sure to set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].
Otherwise, a paper jam will occur.
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Layout Adjustment" > "Mixed Size
Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
Problem Solving
Simultaneously)" in the User Guide.
15
464
The Copy Result is Not What was Expected

If the copy result is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table to
perform the remedy.

The copy is dirty. The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
document cover is soiled. cover.
(P.104).
The document is a If the document is transparent, dirt on the
transparent type such as a document cover may be copied. Place a white
transparency film. sheet of paper on top of the document when
copying.
The document is colored, The paper's background color is copied.
rough, or a blueprint. Adjust the copy density or image quality, or
specify [Suppress Background].
The document is glossy Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
printing paper. document glass, and shadows are sometimes
copied, soiling the image. Place a
copying.
The copy is too The copy density is set to Adjust the copy density.
dark or light. [Darken] or [Lighten]. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
The document density is too Adjust the copy density.
light. Refer to "3 Copy" in the User Guide.
The setting for [Original Type] Copy black text. If the printout is too light,
is inappropriate for the select [Text] for [Original Type].
document. Refer to "3 Copy"> "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
The color of the Is the color calibration Execute auto calibration.
document and of incorrect? Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.109) and "Executing
the copy differ. 2 Sided Color Scanning Calibration" (P.112).
The document type selected Set the suitable value for [Original Type].
is not suitable. Refer to "3 Copy"> "Image Quality" > "Original Type
(Selecting the Document Type)" in the User Guide. Problem Solving
The image quality selected is Copy black text. If the printout is too light,
unsuitable for the document. select [Text] for [Original Type].
Refer to "3 Copy"> "Image Quality" in the User Guide.
The copy is Paper is misaligned in the Align the paper edges, and adjust them to
slightly tray. the tray's top corners to reload the paper.
misaligned. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
15
465
15 Problem Solving

Part of the image The paper is damp. If the paper is damp, the copy image may be
is missing on the partially missing or unclear. Replace the
copy. paper with new one.
Folded or wrinkled paper is Remove the unsuitable paper or replace all of
included in the tray. the paper with new one.
The document is pasted or The pasted or folded section may not be
folded. laying flat on the document glass. Place a
document glass.
The copy has a The document enlargement Vertical stripes may be printed on the copies
stripe pattern. ratio is too large. depending on the ratio. Adjust the ratio to
eliminate the stripes.
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Reduce/Enlarge (Making
Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" in the User Guide.
The copy is The document is not loaded Load the document correctly.
misaligned or correctly. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
skewed. Guide.
The document guides on the Load the document correctly, and align the
document feeder are not set document guides to the document.
in the correct positions. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The paper tray is not inserted Firmly push in the tray until it stops to set it
correctly. properly.
The paper guides in Tray 5 Load the paper correctly, and align the paper
are not set in the correct guides to the paper edges.
positions. Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)" (P.65).
Problem Solving
15
466

Unable to copy The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
with the specified document cover is dirty. cover.
size. Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
(P.104).
The document is a Place a white sheet of paper on top of the
transparent type such as a document when copying.
transparency film.
The document is misaligned. Load the document correctly.
Guide.
in the correct positions. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document is a non- Specify the document size, and then copy.
standard size. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copying Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document is folded. Flatten the curl and load the document
again.
Guide.
Unable to copy in [Output Color] is set to [Black Set [Output Color] to [Auto Detect] or [Color].
color. & White]. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Output Color (Selecting
the Color for Copying)" in the User Guide.
The document The document is larger than Adjust [Reduce/Enlarge] to copy the
edges are missing the printable area. document smaller.
on the copy.
Outputs are not The Finisher is not attached. The Finisher is required to staple. Install the
stapled. Finisher, or change the print option settings
to cancel stapling.
The number of pages to be Reduce papers to be less than the maximum
stapled exceeds the number for stapling.
maximum number for The maximum number of pages for stapling varies Problem Solving
stapling. depending on the used finisher. For more information,
refer to "Finisher-A1 (optional)*" (P.646), "Finisher-B1
(optional)*1" (P.647), "C3 Finisher (optional)" (P.648),
or "C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional)" (P.650).
15
467
15 Problem Solving
Trouble during Printing
This section describes how to resolve print problems.
Unable to Print
If you cannot print a document, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.

Data remains in The machine is not powered Switch the main power and power on.
the printer icon. on.
The network cable is Connect the network cable to the computer.
computer.
The network cable is Connect the network cable to the machine.
disconnected from the Refer to "Interface Cables" (P.23).
machine.
The print mode is [Off-line] on Press the <Machine Status> button to check
the machine. the [Print Mode] on the [Machine Status]
screen. If [Print Mode] is set to [Off-line],
select [On-line].
An error occurred in the Check the error details and take an
machine. appropriate action.
The IP address or SMB Set the correct IP address or SMB network
network path is not correctly path.
set. Refer to "Printer Environment Settings" (P.343).
The network between the Check with your network administrator.
computer and machine is
abnormal.
The port is not enabled. Enable the port.
Refer to "Port Settings" (P.215).
The hard disk space of the Delete unnecessary data such as stored
machine is insufficient. documents (Charge Print, Private Charge
Problem Solving
Print, and Secure Print) in folders to increase

free space.
The machine is connected to Wait for a while, and then try printing again.
multiple computers.
Nonsensical A printer driver provided by Use the appropriate printer driver. Check the
characters other company is used. property screen of the printer driver to
15 (symbols) are
printed in large
confirm that your machine’s name is
displayed for the driver name on the
numbers. [Advanced] tab.
468
Trouble during Printing

The data has The machine is out of paper. Load paper in the machine.
been sent to the
No paper is loaded for the Load paper of the size specified.
machine.
specified paper size. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.62).
Printing is interrupted by a Cancel the interrupting operation.
copy operation.
An error occurred in the Check the error details and take an
machine. appropriate action.
The Print Result is Not What was Expected

If the print result is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table to
perform the remedy.

Cannot print in [Output Color] is set to [Black Set [Output Color] to [Auto Detect] or [Color].
color. and White].
Outputs are not The Finisher is not installed. The Finisher is required to staple. Install the
stapled. Finisher, or change the print option settings
to cancel stapling.
The number of pages to be Reduce papers to be less than the maximum
stapled exceeds the number for stapling.
maximum number for The maximum number of pages for stapling varies
stapling. depending on the used finisher. For more information,
refer to "Finisher-A1 (optional)*" (P.646), "Finisher-B1
(optional)*1" (P.647), "C3 Finisher (optional)" (P.648),
or "C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional)" (P.650).
The 2-sided The print page buffer is Set [Image Quality] to [Standard] using the
printing is not insufficient. print driver. Also, set the port that is not used
available. to [Disable]. (Only for the machine with the
optional add-on memory.)
Paper is not The Folder Unit is not Check the optional components installed on
folded. installed. the machine, and reconfigure the printer
configuration.
Problem Solving
The document is The document size is different Change the size of paper in the tray, or
printed on a from the paper size loaded in change the print option to specify a tray that
different paper the specified tray. contains the correct sized paper.
size than
specified.
The image on the The image is larger than the Expand the printable area of the machine, or
document edges printable area. reduce the image size on the printout.
is missing on the
output.
15
The printed font Font replacement is set on Check the font replacement table.
differs from the the print driver.
font specified on
the computer.
The printout is not The machine does not offer To output offset, the Offset Stacking Module
offset. the Offset feature. or the Finisher is required.
469
15 Problem Solving

Printing is slow. [High Resolution] is selected When image data, such as photos, is printed
for [Image Quality]. with the high resolution, the print speed
becomes slow. Select [Standard] for [Image
Quality].
The specified The print driver for another Install the print driver for the model.
print options are model is used.
not enabled.
The required optional kit is Check the optional components installed on
not installed on the machine. the machine, and set [Installable Options]
under [Configuration] in the print driver
again.
The document The image is larger than the Expand the printable area of the machine, or
edges are missing printable area. reduce the image size on the printout.
on the printout.
The output color This is because the print path To closer match the color of Secure Print and
differs between is different. The output color files in folder, select [On] in [Image Options]
Secure Print and of Print Stored File is > [Print Page Mode] on the [Advanced] tab of
Print Stored File. reproduced by the presence the print driver settings.
or absence of dots, as with
copying or faxing. On the
other hand, the output color
of Secure Print is reproduced
using density by default, as
with printing.
The print color The color calibration is Execute auto calibration.
differs from incorrect. Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.109).
before.
Black lines are A print driver for another Install the print driver for your machine.
printed. machine is used.
Problem Solving
15
470
Trouble during Faxing
This section describes how to resolve fax problems.

Note • For troubles during Internet faxing, refer to "E-mail Features Problems" (P.486).
• The Fax features are not available for some models. An optional component is required. For more
Sending Problems
If you cannot send a fax, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the remedy.

A Transmission The fax was not sent because Check the Transmission Results in the
Report - Job of an error. Transmission Report - Job Undelivered. If an
Undelivered is error code is displayed, refer to "Error Code"
output. (P.494).
Unable to The phone line is not The machine is equipped with connectors to
communicate connected correctly. which to connect phone lines.
(general fax) Communication is enabled only when the
phone line is connected to the correct
connector.
When the cable connection is correct, the On-
hook feature allows you to call via general
lines.
The phone dialing method is Specify the same dialing method as the one
not available. (Tone/10pps) subscribed for the machine.
An error occurred with the Use a telephone near the machine to check
phone line. whether you can make a phone call. If the
phone call is disabled, the problem is in the
phone line, not in the machine.
The destination machine is The data cannot be sent if the machine of
abnormal. the recipient is turned off, is set to "manual"
receiving mode, or does not support G3
reception.
Call the recipient to confirm the machine
condition. Problem Solving
An incorrect fax number is Check the fax number and try sending again.
used.
The number is not for fax If no peep sound is heard from the receiver
number. when you call the number, the number is not
for a fax number.
You forgot the external When calling from an extension line, the
access number. external access number is required. 15
When dialing, dial the external access
number such as "0", and then dial the fax
number.
When the switchboard is changed and you
cannot send faxes, try the external access
number "0*" instead of "0".
471
15 Problem Solving

Unable to When calling from an When calling from an abbreviated telephone
communicate abbreviated telephone number to an external line, an external
(general fax) number, an external access access number such as "0" may be registered
number is appended. for the abbreviated telephone number.
Confirm the telephone number of the
receiver on the Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered.
You are using a feature such Confirm whether the destination fax supports
as the Polling feature that is the feature.
not supported by the
destination fax.
The Authentication/ When the Authentication/Accounting feature
Accounting feature is being is used and you send a fax directly from the
used and the fax is being sent computer, you must set the user ID and
directly from the computer. passcode registered on the machine to the
fax driver.
For details on the Authentication/Accounting feature,
refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features"
(P.425) . For details on how to directly send a fax from
the computer, refer to "12 Computer Operations" >
"Sending Fax" in the User Guide.
Unable to The IP address is incorrect. Set a correct IP address, subnet mask, and
communicate (IP gateway address on the machine.
fax (SIP))
The SIP user name is Set a correct SIP user name in the machine.
incorrect.
The correct IP address of a Set a correct IP address of the SIP server on
SIP server is not set in the the machine.
machine.
The specified SIP server in a Consult your network administrator on the
network is not active. SIP server condition.
Registration of the machine Turn the machine off and then on.
information to a SIP server
failed.
The IP fax (SIP) machine of The data cannot be sent if the IP fax (SIP)
the recipient is abnormal. machine of the recipient is turned off. Call
the recipient to confirm the machine
Problem Solving
condition.
The method for specifying Specify the following recipient information:
the recipient is incorrect.  Neither a SIP server nor a VoIP gateway is
used. Specify "SIP user name@IP address"

for [Recipient].

Only a SIP server is used. Specify "SIP user
name" or "telephone number" in
15 [Recipient].
 Only VoIP gateway is used. Specify
"telephone number" in [Recipient].


Both SIP server and VoIP gateway are
used. Specify "SIP user name" or "telephone
number" in [Recipient].
You are using a feature such Confirm whether the destination fax supports
as the polling feature that is the feature.
not supported by the
destination fax.
472

Unable to The Authentication/ When the Authentication/Accounting feature
communicate (IP Accounting feature is being is used and you send a fax directly from the
fax (SIP)) used and the fax is being sent computer, you must set the user ID and
directly from the computer. passcode registered on the machine to the
fax driver.
For details on the Authentication/Accounting feature,
refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features"
(P.425). For details on how to directly send a fax from
the computer, refer to "13 Computer Operations" >
"Sending Fax" in the User Guide.
IP fax (SIP) is being received. The number of simultaneous connections for
IP fax (SIP) is one. The machine cannot send
and receive an IP fax (SIP) at the same time.
Wait until the receiving completes, and then
try sending again.
The network relay device such Enable the port for IP fax (SIP) of the
as a switch, router, and network relay device.
firewall cannot go through
the port of the machine.
The IP filter setting of the Add the IP address of the SIP server to the
machine is incorrect. permitted IP address of the machine in the
environment where the SIP server is used. Set
[IP Filtering] under [Properties] tab >
[Security] using CentreWare Internet
Services.
The Ethernet cable has been When Register recovery on the SIP server is
unplugged for more than one completed, the registration succeeds. No
minute. measure is required.
Unable to The registration of VoIP is Register the correct VoIP gateway on the
communicate (IP incorrect. machine.
fax (SIP) via VoIP
The specified VoIP gateway Consult your network administrator on the
gateway)
in a network is not active. VoIP gateway condition
The settings on the VoIP Consult your network administrator on the
gateway are incorrect. VoIP gateway settings.
The destination G3 fax The data cannot be sent if the G3 fax
machine is abnormal. machine of the recipient is turned off. Call Problem Solving
the recipient to confirm the machine
condition.
IP fax (SIP) The priority of the IP packet, Increase the value for [Prioritize IP Packets]
transmission which is sent from the according to your network environment.
takes long time. machine, on the network For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets], refer to
relay device (such as a switch "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1),
and router) is low because the
QoS setting of the machine is
Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2) (Type 2 (T2) model
only)" (P.231).
15
invalid.
A large amount of Set an appropriate parameter on the network
communication data loss relay device for your network environment.
occurs because the queue
(buffer) assigned to each QoS
of the network relay device
(such as a switch and router)
is low.
473
15 Problem Solving

IP fax (SIP) A large amount of Use the same communication speed within
transmission communication data loss the network.
takes long time. occurs because the
communication rates (10M/
100M/1000M) differ on two
sides of the network relay
device (such as a switch and
router).
A large amount of Set appropriate communication parameters
communication data loss on the VoIP gateway for your environment.
occurs because the
communication parameters
(such as input gain, output
attenuation, echo setting) of
the VoIP gateway are
inappropriate for the network
environment.
IP fax (SIP) machine is Configure the QoS setting for the entire
connected to the data network environment and control traffic. Set
network where the telephone [Prioritize IP Packets] for QoS of the machine.
and data networks are For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets], refer to
operated separately. "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1),
only)" (P.231).
Communications The priority of IP packet, Decrease the value for [Prioritize IP Packets]
other than IP fax which is sent from the according to your network environment.
(SIP) become slow machine, on the network For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets], refer to
while IP fax (SIP) relay device (such as a switch "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1),
transmission is and router) becomes higher Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2) (Type 2 (T2) model
executed. than necessary because the only)" (P.231).
invalid or a large amount of
buffer space is occupied.
IP fax (SIP) machine is Configure QoS setting for the entire network
connected to the telephone environment and control traffic. Set
Problem Solving

only)" (P.231).
The image quality The document glass is dirty. Clean the document glass.
is poor. Refer to "Cleaning the White Chute and the Constant
Velocity Transport Glass (for Duplex Automatic
15 Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass (for
The fax density is Adjust the fax density.
inappropriate. Refer to "4 Fax" > "Fax/Internet Fax" in the User Guide.
The sender's machine has a Confirm with the sender.
problem. Note • Image quality may be affected by a
problem of the sender's machine, not
just by a problem of the machine.
474
Receiving Problems
If you cannot receive a fax, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.

Unable to The phone line is not The machine is equipped with connectors to
communicate connected correctly. which to connect phone lines.
(general fax) Communication is enabled only when the
phone line is connected to the correct
connector. When the cable connection is
correct, the On-hook feature allows you to
call via general lines.
An error occurred with the Use a telephone near the machine to check
phone line. whether you can make a phone call. If the
phone call is disabled, the problem is in the
phone line, not in the machine.
The machine is turned off. The machine cannot receive a fax when
turned off. Switch the main power and power
on.
No paper is set. Load paper in the machine to receive faxes.
Paper is jammed. Follow the instructions displayed on the
control panel to remove the jammed paper.
Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.594).
The machine is in the System The machine cannot receive a fax in the
Administration mode. System Administration mode. Exit the System
A machine password has When a machine password has been set, the
been set. machine accepts only data or polling fax sent
with the correct machine password in F code.
The machine is in manual Receive the fax manually, or set [Fax
receive mode. Receiving Mode] to [Auto Receive].
Refer to "Fax Receiving Mode" (P.133).
The machine is in manual To use Fax information service, set the
send mode. reception mode to [Manual Send] on the on-
hook screen, enter an information code, and
press the <Start> button. Problem Solving
The document is not correctly Check with the sender.
loaded on the sender's Note • Image quality may be affected by a
machine. problem of the sender's machine, not
Unable to The IP address is incorrect. Set a correct IP address, subnet mask, and
communicate (IP gateway address on the machine.
fax (SIP))
The correct IP address of a Set a correct IP address of the SIP server in 15
SIP server is not set in the the machine.
machine.
The specified SIP server in a Consult your network administrator on the
network is not active. SIP server condition.
Registration of the machine Turn the machine off and then on.
information to a SIP server
failed.
475
15 Problem Solving

Unable to The machine is turned off. The machine cannot receive a fax when
communicate (IP turned off. Turn the machine on.
fax (SIP))
The machine is in the System The machine cannot receive a fax in the
Administration mode. System Administration mode. Exit the System
A wrong machine password When a machine password has been set, the
has been set. machine accepts only data or polling fax sent
with the correct machine password in F code.
IP fax (SIP) is being sent. The number of simultaneous connection for
IP fax (SIP) is one. The machine cannot send
and receive an IP fax (SIP) at the same time.
Wait until the sending completes, and then
ask the sender to send again.
The network relay device such Enable the port for IP fax (SIP) of the
as a switch, router, and network relay device.
firewall cannot go through
the port of the machine.
The IP filter setting of the Add the IP address of the SIP server to the
machine is incorrect. permitted IP address of the machine in the
environment where the SIP server is used. Set
[IP Filtering] under [Properties] tab >
[Security] using CentreWare Internet
Services.
The Ethernet cable has been When Register recovery on the SIP server is
unplugged for more than one completed, the registration succeeds. No
minute. measure is required.
Unable to The registration of VoIP is Register the correct VoIP gateway on the
communicate (IP incorrect. machine.
fax (SIP) via a
The specified VoIP gateway Consult your network administrator on the
VoIP gateway)
in a network is not active. VoIP gateway condition.
The settings on the VoIP Consult your network administrator on the
gateway are incorrect. VoIP gateway settings.
IP fax (SIP) The priority of the IP packet, Increase the value for [Prioritize IP Packets]
transmission which is sent from the according to your network environment.
takes long time. machine, on the network For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets], refer to
Problem Solving
relay device (such as a switch "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1),
and router) is low because the Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2) (Type 2 (T2) model
QoS setting of the machine is only)" (P.231).
invalid.
A large amount of Set an appropriate parameter on the network
communication data loss relay device for your network environment.
occurs because the queue
15 (buffer) assigned to each QoS
of the network relay device
(such as a switch and router)
is low.
476

IP fax (SIP) A large amount of Use the same communication speed within
transmission communication data loss the network.
takes long time. occurs because the
communication rates (10M/
100M/1000M) differ on two
sides of the network relay
device (such as a switch and
router).
A large amount of Set appropriate communication parameters
communication data loss on the VoIP gateway for your environment.
occurs because the
communication parameters
(such as input gain, output
attenuation, echo setting) of
the VoIP gateway are
inappropriate for the network
environment.
IP fax (SIP) machine is Configure the QoS setting for the entire
connected to the data network environment and control traffic. Set
only)" (P.231).
Communications The priority of IP packet, Decrease the value for [Prioritize IP Packets]
other than IP fax which is sent from the according to your network environment.
(SIP) become slow machine, on the network For more information on [Prioritize IP Packets], refer to
while IP fax (SIP) relay device (such as a switch "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1),
transmission is and router) becomes higher Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 2) (Type 2 (T2) model
executed. than necessary because the only)" (P.231).
invalid or a large amount of
buffer space is occupied.
IP fax (SIP) machine is Configure QoS setting for the entire network
connected to the telephone environment and control traffic. Set
operated separately. "Prioritize IP Packets / Prioritize IP Packets (Ethernet 1), Problem Solving
only)" (P.231).
The image quality The drum cartridge is Copy a document. If the image quality is
is poor. damaged. poor, replace the drum cartridge with a new
one.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4
(P.85).
15
The document glass of the Check with the sender.
sender's machine is dirty. Note • Image quality may be affected by a
The resolution setting on the Check with the sender.
sender's machine is too low. Note • Image quality may be affected by a
477
15 Problem Solving

The one-page When scanned on the You can set the machine to process such a
document is sender's machine, the document by using the Auto Reduce on
received split into document was enlarged for Receipt feature and a border limit value for
multiple pages. some reason. page splitting. According to the setting
combination specified, the received
document is printed as follows:
Auto Reduce Auto Reduce

on Receipt on Receipt
ON OFF
Automatically Trims the
reduces portion
Within image size exceeding
border limit and prints it standard
on one page. size and
then prints.
Splits data at
Exceeding
equal ratio -
border limit
and prints.
Refer to "Border Limit" (P.265), or "Auto Reduce On

Receipt" (P.265).
Although the An unregistered folder is When using the Folder Selector feature,
Folder Selector specified on the Folder specify a registered folder. If an unregistered
feature is set, Selector feature. folder is selected, the received document
however, the cannot be stored in the folder, and will be
received automatically printed.
document is For information on how to register the folder, refer to
printed, and "Create Folder" (P.292). For information on the setting
cannot be stored of the Folder Selector, refer to "Fax Received Options"
in the folder. (P.268).
Problem Solving
15
478
Trouble during Scanning
This section describes how to resolve scan problems.

Note • The Scan features are not available for some models. An optional component is required. For more
Unable to Scan with the Machine

If you cannot scan with the machine, identify the symptom in the following table to perform
the remedy.

The document is The document is too small. The minimum size of the document that can
not correctly fed be loaded on the document feeder is 125 x
from the 85 mm (Standard size: A5, A5 ).
document feeder.
Refer to "5 Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document type is The document feeder does not feed irregular
unsuitable. sized documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin documents.
In addition, the document feeder does not
feed documents with sticky tags, paper clips,
or adhesive tape.
Guide.
The document guides are set Adjust the document guides to the
in incorrect positions. document.
Guide.
A piece of torn paper remains Open the document feeder cover, and
in the document feeder. remove the piece.
Refer to "Document Jams" (P.615).
Documents of mixed sizes are When loading documents of mixed sizes, be
loaded. sure to set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].
Otherwise, a paper jam will occur. Problem Solving
Refer to "5 Scan" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User
Guide.
15
479
15 Problem Solving
Unable to Import Scanned Documents to the Computer

If you cannot import scanned documents to the computer, identify the symptom in the
following table to perform the remedy.

Unable to find the The machine is not turned on. Switch the main power and power on.
scanner.
The network cable is Connect the network cable to the computer.
computer.
The network cable is Connect the network cable to the machine.
disconnected from the Refer to "Interface Cables" (P.23).
machine.
The network between the Check with your network administrator.
computer and machine is
abnormal.
Unable to open a The folder is unregistered. Register the folder.
folder. Refer to "Create Folder" (P.292).
The folder passcode has been The passcode cannot be retrieved. Set the
forgotten. passcode to [Off], and then set the passcode
again.
Refer to "Create Folder" (P.292).
Unable to import The scan driver is not Install the scan driver.
data from the installed.
scanner because
of a TWAIN
transmission error.
Operation The file size is too large. Lower the resolution, and import again.
terminates during Refer to "5 Scan" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User
scanning. Guide.
Problem Solving
15
480
Unable to Send a Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB)

If you cannot send a scanned document over the network, identify the symptom in the
following table to perform the remedy.

A Transmission Unable to transmit because Check the Transmission Results in the
Report - Job of the error. Transmission Report - Job Undelivered. If an
output. (P.494).
Unable to send The server is not correctly Correctly specify the server.
data over the specified.
network.
The save destination is not Correctly specify the save destination.
correctly specified.
When SMB is selected, the Correctly specify the shared name.
shared name is not correctly
specified.
When SMB (UNC Format) is Correctly specify the save destination.
selected, the save destination
is not correctly specified.
The login name is not entered Correctly enter the login name.
correctly.
The password is not correctly Correctly enter the password.
entered.
The time set on the machine Synchronize the time settings of the machine
does not agree with that of and Windows.
Windows, when SMB
transmission is performed to
Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2012 R2,
Windows 8, or Windows 8.1.
On Windows Server 2003, Follow the steps below to change the settings
Windows Server 2008, of network access:
Windows Server 2012, 1. Start Windows, and select [Control Panel]
Windows Server 2012 R2, > [Administrative Tools] > [Local Security Problem Solving
Windows XP, Windows 8, or Policy].
Windows 8.1 users who do 2. Select [Security Settings] > [Local Policies]
not set a password cannot > [Security Options].
use SMB transmission.
3. Change [Account: Limit local account use
of blank passwords to console logon only]
to [Disabled].
Is the root of the DFS name Specify a DFS name space with a root
space (\\Domain comprised of less than four characters. 15
name\Shared name)
specified with more than
three characters?
The access right to the Set the access right to the specified storage
specified storage location is location correctly so that you can read and
not set correctly. write the files and folders.
481
15 Problem Solving

Unable to send The SMB port number is Check the destination server, the router
data over the blocked. between the machine and the server, virus
network. scanning software on the destination server,
and firewall to confirm whether the SMB port
is blocked or not.
Unable to Send E-mail

If you cannot send a scanned document using the E-mail feature, identify the symptom in
the following table to perform the remedy.

A Transmission Unable to transmit because Check the Transmission Results in the
Report - Job of an error. Transmission Report - Job Undelivered. If the
output. (P.494).
Unable to send e- The mail address is incorrect. Enter the correct mail address.
mail.
The data size exceeded the Change the maximum e-mail size, or lower
maximum e-mail size. the resolution.
Refer to "Maximum Total Data Size" (P.276), or "5 Scan"
> "Layout Adjustment" in the User Guide.
The Image is not What was Expected

If the image is not what was expected, identify the symptom in the following table to
perform the remedy.

The image is dirty. The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
document cover is soiled. cover.
(P.104).
Problem Solving
The document is a If the document is transparent, dirt on the

transparent type such as a document cover may be copied on the image.
transparency film. Place a white sheet of paper on top of the
document when scanning.
The document is colored, Adjust the copy density or image quality
rough, or a blueprint. when scanning.
15 The document is glossy

printing paper.
Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
document glass, and shadows are sometimes
scanned, soiling the image. Place a
scanning.
482

The image is too The scan density is set to Adjust the scan density.
dark, or too light. [Darken] or [Lighten]. Refer to "5 Scan" > "Advanced Settings" in the User
Guide.
The setting for [Original Type] Select the image quality appropriate for the
is inappropriate for the document.
document. Refer to "5 Scan" > "Advanced Settings" in the User
Guide.
Part of the image The document is pasted or The pasted or folded section may not be
is missing. folded. laying flat on the document glass. Place a
document glass.
The image is not The document glass or the Clean the document glass or the document
the desired size. document cover is dirty. cover.
(P.104).
The document is a Place a white sheet of paper on top of the
transparent type such as a document when scanning.
transparency film.
The document is misaligned. Load the document correctly.
Guide.
in the correct positions. Refer to "5 Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document is a non- Specify the document size.
standard size. Refer to "5 Scan" > "Scanning Procedure" in the User
Guide.
The document is folded. Flatten the curl and load the document
again.
Guide.
Problem Solving
The image is not [Color Scanning] is set to Set [Color Scanning] to [Color].
scanned in color. [Black & White], or Refer to "5 Scan" > "E-mail" in the User Guide.
[Grayscale].
The image is The resolution is too low. Set the resolution higher.
coarse. Refer to "5 Scan" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User
Guide.
Image is saved with high Select a lower compression ratio in [Quality/ 15
compression. File Size].
Refer to "5 Scan" > "E-mail Options/Filing Options" in
the User Guide.
Black-and-white [Black & White] is selected for Set [Color Scanning] to [Grayscale].
gradation is not [Color Scanning]. Refer to "5 Scan" > "E-mail" in the User Guide.
reproduced
properly.
483
15 Problem Solving
Network-related Problems
This section describes how to resolve network related problems.
When you cannot communicate with other SMB machines
Cause Check point Remedy

If [Auto Master Mode] of SMB The machine or other SMB Confirm the setting of
is set to [On], the number of machines cannot be searched [AutoMaster Mode] of SMB. If
machines whose information from the Network Computers the setting is enabled, change
can be stored is limited. The icon. it to [Off].
number depends on the
network environment.
When using TCP/IP

The possible causes, check points, and remedies when using TCP/IP (LPD) are as follows.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, or Windows Server
2012 R2.
 When you cannot print

The IP address is incorrect. Request your network Set a correct IP address on the
administrator to check the machine.
machine's IP address.
The volume of the print data Confirm the memory amount If the one file of print data
sent in an instruction from a for the LPD spool and the exceeds the memory amount,
computer exceeded the volume of the print data divide the file not to exceed the
maximum receivable volume transmitted by an instruction. amount.
when the LPD spool is set to
If the print data is divided into
Problem Solving
memory spool.
multiple files and exceeds the
memory amount, decrease the
number of files not to exceed
the amount.
An unrecoverable error Confirm whether any error Restart the machine. Wait until
occurred during the printing messages are displayed on the the screen completely goes out
15 process. control panel. to switch on the machine
power.
The machine is not set to the Confirm the transport protocol Select the transport protocol
transport protocol selected on the machine. corresponding to the computer.
corresponding to the computer.
The machine is trying to Set not to output Ctrl-D.
process a data format that
does not match the data -
format of the print data
transmitted from a computer.
484
 When print result is not what was expected

Selected printer language on Confirm the selected printer Select the printer language on
the machine does not match language on the machine and the machine to match the print
the printer language of the the printer language of the data.
print data. print data.
The computer is not using the Confirm whether the print On the computer, select the
print driver supplied with the driver on the computer is the print driver supplied with the
machine (is using another one supplied with the machine. machine. If the print driver is
company's print driver). not listed for selection, install
the print driver and then select
it. Operation is not guaranteed
if another company's print
driver is used.
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and OS X 10.9 Mavericks
 When you cannot print

The LPD port is not activated. Confirm whether the LPD port When printing with a printer
is activated. detected by using Bonjour,
Select the [Enabled] check box
of [LPD] to activate the port.
CentreWare Internet Services Problems

The possible symptoms and remedies for problems when using CentreWare Internet
Services are as follows:
Symptom Remedy
Cannot connect to CentreWare Is the machine working properly?
Internet Services. Check whether the machine is turned on.
Is the Internet Services (HTTP) port activated?
Problem Solving
Print a Configuration Report to confirm.
Is the Internet address correctly entered?
Confirm the Internet address again. If the problem persists,
enter an IP address to connect to CentreWare Internet Services.
Is a proxy server being used?
Depending on the proxy server, connections may not be
possible. Set the browser to [Not using proxy server] or set that
particular address to [Not using a proxy server]. 15
The [Please wait] message is Wait for a while as instructed.
continuously displayed. If the status does not change, click the [Refresh] button.
If this does not impart any effect, confirm whether the machine
is operating correctly.
The [Refresh] button is not Are you using a specified browser?
functioning. Refer to "Installation of CentreWare Internet Services" (P.336) to confirm
whether your browser is supported.
485
15 Problem Solving
Symptom Remedy
Selecting the menu on the left Are you using a specified browser?
frame does not update the
right frame contents.
The screen display is distorted. Change the window size for the browser.
The latest information is not Click the [Refresh] button.
displayed.
Characters are not correctly Use Western European language command.
displayed.
Pressing [Apply] does not apply Are the entered values correct?
the new settings. If a value outside of the permitted range is entered, the update
will automatically be made within the range.
This may occur when the control panel is being operated or the
operation has just been completed.
When the automatic reset function is set, any setting configure
with CentreWare Internet Services is not applied until setting
the time set for automatic reset. Wait until then.
The machine is in the Sleep mode. Press the <Power Saver>
button on the control panel of the machine to exit the Power
Saver mode.
When you click [Apply], a Is the password correct?
message such as "The server The entries for Password and Confirm Password do not match.
has returned ineffective or Enter the correct password.
unrecognizable response" or
"No data" is displayed on the
browser.
Restart the machine.
Cannot delete jobs. Wait for a while, and click [Refresh].
E-mail Features Problems

The possible symptoms and remedies for problems when using E-mail Notification Service,
the Print E-mail feature, the E-mail service, and Internet Fax service as follows:
Symptom Remedy
Problem Solving
Cannot receive e-mail (Print E- Is the e-mail address for the machine configured?
mail, and Internet Fax).
Is [Receive E-mail] set to [Enabled]?
Are settings such as the IP addresses for the SMTP server and
POP3 server (if POP3 is selected as the incoming mail protocol)
configured correctly?
15 Are the POP3 user name and password entered correctly?
Is [Domain Filtering] set?
Confirm whether your own domain is set to [Allow Domains], on
Are the SMTP server and/or POP server operating properly?
Consult your network administrator.
486
Symptom Remedy
Cannot transmit e-mail (E-mail Is the E-mail address for the machine configured?
Notification Service, Internet
Is [E-mail Notification Service] set to [Enabled]? (For E-mail
Fax, and E-mail).
Notification Service).
Is [Send E-mail] set to [Enabled]?
Is the IP address for the SMTP server configured correctly?
Are the settings for notification of transmission configured
correctly? (for E-mail Notification Service)
Confirm the settings on the [Properties] tab of CentreWare
Internet Services.
Is the destination address entered correctly?
Is the SMTP server operating properly?
Consult your network administrator.
Internet/Intranet Connection Problems

The possible causes and remedies for problems when connecting to the Internet or intranet
are as follows:
When connection to the Internet/Intranet fails
Cause Remedy
The Authentication feature Only Basic Authentication is supported by the machine. The
used on the remote server is machine does not support NTLM/digest.
not supported by the machine. For security purposes, change to the Authentication feature
using SSL.
The remote linkage services Purchase products/models/accessories supported by the remote
used does not support the linkage services.
model or accessories of the
machine.
The IP address is incorrect. Confirm the IP address. If the IP address is incorrect, either set a
static IP address or resolve the IP address using DHCP or AutoIP.
The IP gateway address is Set the correct IP gateway address when connecting to the
Problem Solving
incorrect. proxy server, or to a Web server via the IP gateway.
The subnet mask is incorrect. Set the correct subnet mask corresponding to your environment.
The DNS server address is Confirm the DNS server address.
incorrect.
The DNS server selected Select a DNS server that can resolve the address.
cannot resolve the address.  When connecting via the proxy server
Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the

address of the proxy server.
15
 When not connecting via the proxy server
Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the

destination address.
487
15 Problem Solving
Cause Remedy
The address of the address Confirm whether only addresses that do not use a proxy server
that does not use a proxy are set. Even if addresses not through a proxy server are
server is incorrect. specified using the FQDN, if a server is directly accessed using its
IP address, the registered server is not excluded. Set the address
not to use a proxy server.
Likewise, even if you directly specify an address that does not
use a proxy server, if a server is accessed with the FQDN, the
registered server is not excluded. Set an IP address with the
FQDN not to use a proxy server.
The desired server, or the proxy Confirm whether the desired server or the proxy server is
server is down. operating correctly.
The network cable is not Confirm whether the network cable is correctly connected. We
connected, or broken. recommend using a spanning-tree configuration, with which
network disconnection rarely occurs.
Cannot communicate because Wait for a while and try accessing again.
of overloading of the server
application.
An error occurs that is not Even though an error occurs during background processing, no
displayed on the control panel. message appears on the control panel. Display the [Job Status]
screen or print the Job History Report to confirm the result.
Cannot access the proxy server, The following types of access control are used. Confirm the
firewall, or Web server as a configured access control.
result of access control. 
Address (port) restriction
 SSL restriction

User access restriction (including access right levels)

Content block

Scheme restriction (cannot use HTTP etc.)

Transfer data size restriction
 Method restriction (cannot use POST etc.)

HTTP header restriction (only accepting specified browsers
etc.)

Time restriction (only available during a specific period of time
etc.)
When connection to a desired Web server fails
Cause Remedy
Problem Solving
The setting to use the proxy In the environment using the proxy server, you must configure
server is not configured. the machine to use the proxy server to connect to a desired Web
server. Make sure that you configure the settings to use the
proxy server.
The setting to use a proxy In an environment that does not use a proxy server, such as
server is configured even when connecting to an intranet, do not make the settings to use
15 though the environment does the proxy server.
not use a proxy server.
The proxy server address is When the settings to use a proxy server are configured, you
incorrect. cannot connect to a desired Web server only if the IP address of
the proxy server is correct. Set the correct IP address of the proxy
server.
488
Cause Remedy
When the proxy server access Set the user name and password on the machine that allow
requires authentication, you connection to the proxy server.
cannot connect to the server
because the user name or
password is incorrect.
IPv4 and IPv6 Connection Problems

The possible causes and remedies for problems when using an IPv4 or IPv6 address are as
follows:
Unable to connect using an IPv4 address
Symptom Remedy
When 0 (zero) is prepended to Do not prepend 0 (zero) to each value of an IPv4 address.
the head of a value for the
IPv4 address (for example:
192.0.2.010), connection fails.
Unable to connect using an IPv6 address
Symptom Remedy
You cannot connect to the When you specify the machine's link-local address, a scope ID
machine with the link-local must be appended to the address.
address. For example, when you use Internet Explorer 7 on Windows
Vista to access the address "fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010", you
must append the Ethernet adapter local area connection
number (for example, 8) for Windows Vista to the address as
follows: fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010%8
The machine cannot connect Assign a static IPv6 address to the computer running Windows
to a computer running OS that supports IPv6.
Windows OS that supports Then, register the IPv6 address on the machine as host address
IPv6. to allow communication.
A device outside the router When searching for a device outside the router via SMB, directly Problem Solving
cannot be searched. specify the address. Multicasting is supported only within a local
link (FF02::1).
The Secure Watermark feature Use an IPv4 network for the Secure Watermark feature. The
does not function correctly Secure Watermark feature does not function on an IPv6
when you submit a print job via network.
an IPv6 network.
When SSL is enabled on
CentreWare Internet Services,
When SSL is enabled, directly specify "https://[IPv6 address]".
15
even if you specify "http://[IPv6
address]", you are not
redirected to "https://[IPv6
address]".
489
15 Problem Solving
Unable to print using an IPv6 address
Symptom Remedy
On an IPv6 network without a Register the computer name of the machine on the "hosts" file
DNS server, a computer stored on the computer running Windows OS that supports IPv6.
running Windows OS that For example, register in the following file:
supports IPv6 cannot be C:\Windows\system32\driver\etc\hosts
connected to a Windows
shared printer.
Unable to scan using an IPv6 address
Symptom Remedy
When the machine is Assign a global address to the machine.
configured with only a link-
local address, file transfer fails.
When you specify the Scan data cannot be transferred with SMB if a destination
computer name on a storage server is specified using the computer name. Use the IPv6
destination server of the Scan format to specify the server.
to PC (SMB) service in an IPv6
environment without a DNS
server, scan data cannot be
transferred.
The machine does not operate In an IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify a
correctly if the Internet Fax destination using a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
direct destination is specified in
IPv6 address literal format.
Example:
csw@[ipv6:2001:db8::1]
The machine does not operate In an IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify an e-mail
correctly if the mail address for address using the FQDN.
the E-mail service is specified in
IPv6 address literal format.
Example:
csw@[ipv6:2001:db8::1]
Other problems on IPv6 addresses

Problem Solving
Symptom Remedy
Unable to search devices with In an IPv6 environment, use Function Discovery of Web Services
IPv6 addresses in UPnP. on Devices (WSD).
In an IPv6 network with no Directly specify the IPv6 address to specify the computer name
15 DNS server installed,

authentication fails if an SMB
of an authentication server.
authentication server is
specified using the computer
name.
490
Symptom Remedy
When the Web Applications In an IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify a remote
service such as DocuShare is service's destination URL using the FQDN.
used, you cannot correctly
specify the destination URL
using the IPv6 address.
Example:
http://[ipv6:2001:db8::1]
IPv6 addresses are not Use an IPv4 network for correct logging.
correctly recorded on output
job logs.
Problem Solving
15
491
15 Problem Solving
Media Print - Text Trouble
The possible symptoms, causes, and remedies for problems when using Media Print - Text
are as follows.

[Media Print - The optional software, USB Properly set the software option or
Text] is not Memory Kit (optional) is not disconnect the USB cable, and then securely
displayed on the recognized by the machine. insert the USB cable into the connector.
Services Home
[Media Print] in CentreWare Check [Media Print] in CentreWare Internet
screen.
Internet Services is not Services to enable the service.
checked.
Problem Solving
15
492
Media Print - Photos Trouble
Media Print - Photos Trouble
The possible symptoms, causes, and remedies for problems when using Media Print - Photos
are as follows:

[Media Print - The USB Memory Kit Properly set the software options or
Photos] is not (optional) is not recognized disconnect the USB cable, and then securely
displayed on the by the machine. insert the USB cable into the connector.
Services Home
screen.
A blank sheet of Files that cannot be printed Files that cannot be printed (image files in
paper is output. (image files in other than other than DCF1.0 format) are not printed
DCF1.0 format) are included with index printing. Specify printing again,
among the files specified for excluding the images not displayed for index
printing. printing.
Note • Editing or saving DCF 1.0-format
image files on a computer makes
those files' format other than DCF1.0.
Problem Solving
15
493
15 Problem Solving
Error Code
This section describes error codes.

An error message and error code (***-***) are displayed on the touch screen if printing
terminated abnormally because of an error, or a malfunction occurred in the machine.
For faxing, an error code is also displayed on an Activity Report and a Transmission Report -
Job Undelivered.
Refer to the error codes in the following table to resolve problems.
Important • If an error code is displayed, any print data remaining in the machine and information stored in the
machine's memory is not secured.
If an error code is displayed that is not listed in the following table, or if you cannot resolve
an error despite following the instructions described in the table, contact our Customer
Support Center. The contact number is printed on the label or card attached to the machine.
Error Code Cause and Remedy

003-311 [Cause] An error occurred.
003-318 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
003-319 on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact our Customer
003-320 Support Center.
003-321
003-322
003-323
003-324
003-325
003-326
003-327
003-328
003-329
003-330
003-331
003-332
003-333
Problem Solving
003-334
003-335
003-336
003-337
003-338
003-339
003-340
15 003-341
003-342
003-343
003-344
003-345
003-346
003-700 [Cause] Too many documents are set in the document feeder after clearing the paper jam.
[Remedy] Check the output, and then replace the documents that have not been copied yet.
494
Error Code

003-701 [Cause] A digital code is embedded in the document to restrict duplication.
[Remedy] Use a document in which no digital code is embedded.
003-702 [Cause] You tried to copy sides 1 and 2 of a document simultaneously specifying different
Reduce/Enlarge ratio for each side.
[Remedy] Specify the same Reduce/Enlarge ratio for both sides.
003-703 [Cause] The Calibration Chart is not detected correctly.
[Remedy] Place the Calibration Chart properly.
003-704 [Cause] An error is found in the calibration pattern read, and the machine may be out of order.
[Remedy] Execute the calibration again. If the error is not still resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
003-705 [Cause] Copying is started before the machine exits the Power Saver mode and detects the
change for the tray size, when the paper size set in the tray that has been changed
during the Power Saver mode.
[Remedy] Cancel copying, and perform the operation for copying again.
003-750 [Cause] Unable to store any documents using the 2 Sided Book Copying feature.
[Remedy] Check the 2 Sided Book Copying settings.
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Layout Adjustment" in the User Guide.
003-751 [Cause] Unable to process the document because the specified scan area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase the resolution or scan area.
003-752 [Cause] A mix sized document was to be scanned at 600 dpi in Color/2 sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [400dpi] or lower, and try scanning again.
003-753 [Cause] A mix sized document was to be scanned at high resolution, 2 sided.
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [200dpi], and scan the document again.
003-754 [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.
003-755 [Remedy] Execute the job again.
003-756 [Cause] The faxed document is completely blank.
[Remedy] Check whether the document is blank or whether the side of the document to be faxed
is loaded correctly.
003-757 [Cause] A mix sized document was to be scanned at high resolution, 2 sided. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Set [Resolution] to [300dpi] or lower, and scan the document again.
003-760 [Cause] An incompatible combination of feature is specified for document scan conditions.
[Remedy] Confirm the selected options.
003-761 [Cause] The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray differs from the paper size of the tray
selected for Auto Paper selection.
[Remedy] Change the paper size for the tray, or change the [Paper Type Priority] settings. 15
003-763 [Cause] An error occurred when reading the Calibration Chart.
[Remedy] Place the Calibration Chart correctly on the document glass.
Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.109).
003-780 [Cause] Failed to compress the scanned document.
[Remedy] Reduce the resolution or the ratio for [Reduce/Enlarge] to decrease the data size, or split
the data to send it separately.
495
15 Problem Solving

003-795 [Cause] When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the paper size specified, the
reduction/enlargement ratio exceeds the allowed range.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:

Manually enter a reduction/enlargement ratio.
 Change the paper size.

005-500 on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
010-330 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
010-363
010-364
010-367
010-368
010-369
010-370 <ApeosPort-V C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275, DocuCentre-V C5575/C4475/C3375/
C3373/C2275>
[Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact our Customer
Support Center.
<ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675, DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675>

[Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Confirm the following.
 Two power codes are connected to the outlets.

Two power codes are connected to the machine.

Circuit breakers of the machine are ON.

Breakers on switchboards are not tripped.
After confirming the above items, switch off the machine power, make sure that the
Problem Solving
touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same message is
displayed again, contact our Customer Support Center.
15 010-375
010-376
010-377
010-378
010-379
010-380
010-381
010-382
010-398
496
Error Code

Support Center.
012-210 [Cause] Finisher malfunction
012-213 Center.
012-221
012-223
012-224
012-227
012-228
012-231
012-232
012-233
012-234
012-243
012-246 [Cause] The Booklet Maker is not fully inserted completely into the Finisher.
[Remedy] Completely insert the Booklet Maker into the Finisher, and turn the machine off and
then on.
012-247 [Cause] Finisher malfunction
012-260 Center.
012-263
012-265
012-266
012-268
012-269
012-280
012-282
012-283 Problem Solving
012-284
012-291 [Cause] The finisher front cover is open.
012-292 [Remedy] Close the finisher front cover. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
012-296
012-297
012-298 15
Support Center.
012-402 [Cause] The hole punch waste container of the finisher is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the hole punch waste container. When the same message is displayed even after
you install the hole punch waste container, remove the container, and then install it
again.
497
15 Problem Solving

012-500 [Cause] An error occurred in the finisher.
Support Center.
013-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the Booklet Unit.
013-213 Center.
013-220
016-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the software.
016-213 Center.
016-214
016-215
016-216
016-217
016-218
016-219
016-220
016-221
016-222
016-223
016-224
016-225
016-226
016-227
016-228
016-229
016-230
016-231 [Cause] The Image Extension Kit may be damaged, or may not be installed correctly.
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Problem Solving
Center.
016-232 [Cause] An error occurred during initialization of the high compression board. Otherwise, the
high compression board is not supported on your machine.
Center.
15 016-233 [Cause] An error occurred in the software.

Center.
498
Error Code

016-234 [Cause] An error occurred in the Authentication feature of the machine.
016-237 Center.
016-238
016-239
Center.
Center.
016-314
016-315
016-316
016-317
016-318
016-319
016-320
016-321
016-322
016-323
016-325
016-326
016-327
016-330
016-331
Problem Solving
016-332
016-335
016-336
016-337
016-338
016-339
016-340
016-341 15
016-342
499
15 Problem Solving

016-351
016-360
016-362
016-363
016-364
016-365
016-366
016-367
016-368
016-369
016-370
016-371
016-372
016-373
016-374
016-375
016-376
016-377
016-378
016-379
016-380
016-381
016-382
016-400 [Cause] The user name or password for 802.1x authentication does not match in the setting of
Ethernet1.
[Remedy] Confirm and correctly enter the user name or password in the setting of Ethernet1. If
the error still is not resolved, check whether the network environment is set correctly.
016-401 [Cause] The 802.1x authentication method cannot be processed in the setting of Ethernet1.
[Remedy] Set the authentication method of the machine to the same method as set for the
authentication server in the setting of Ethernet1.
Problem Solving
016-402 [Cause] The authentication connection of Ethernet1 timed out.

[Remedy] Confirm the network connection of Ethernet1 and switch setting of the authentication
device physically connected to the machine via a network, and check whether it is
connected to the machine correctly.
016-403 [Cause] The root certificate of Ethernet1 did not match.
15 016-404 [Remedy] Confirm the authentication server and store the root certificate of the server certificate
of the authentication server into the machine.
If you cannot acquire the root certificate of the server certificate, set [Server Certificate
Verification] of [IEEE 802.1X Settings] for Ethernet1 to [Disabled] on the touch screen.
016-405 [Cause] An error occurred in the certificate stored in the machine.
[Remedy] Initialize the certificate.
For more information on initializing certificates, refer to "Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings" (P.181).
500
Error Code

016-406 [Cause] An error occurred in the SSL client certificate.
1)Store an SSL client certificate in the machine, and set it as the SSL client certificate.
2)If an SSL client certificate cannot be set on the machine, select an option other than
[EAP-TLS] in [Authentication Method].
016-407 [Cause] After automatically obtained the IP address, the machine failed to retrieve proxy server
016-408 settings from the DHCP server.
016-409 [Remedy] Modify the customized program and install it again.
016-410
016-411
016-412
016-427 [Cause] The user name or password for 802.1x authentication did not match in the setting of
Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Confirm and correctly enter the user name or password in the setting of Ethernet2.
If the error still is not resolved, check whether the network environment is set correctly.
016-428 [Cause] The 802.1x authentication method cannot be processed in the setting of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Set the authentication method of the machine to the same method as set for the
authentication server in the setting of Ethernet2.
016-429 [Cause] The authentication connection of Ethernet2 timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the network connection of Ethernet2 and switch setting of the authentication
device physically connected to the machine via a network, and check whether it is
connected to the machine correctly.
016-431 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
016-432 [Cause] An error occurred in the SSL client certificate of Ethernet2.

Store an SSL client certificate in the machine to set the SSL client certificate.

If an SSL client certificate cannot be set on the machine, select an option other than
[EAP-TLS] in [Authentication Method].
016-450 [Cause] The SMB host name already exists.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Change the host name.
Refer to "Host Name" (P.226).
016-453 [Cause] Updating of the IPv6 address and host name for the DNS server failed.
[Remedy] Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is set correctly.
016-454 [Cause] Unable to retrieve the IP address from DNS.
[Remedy] Confirm the DNS configuration and IP address retrieve setting. 15
Refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.221).
016-455 [Cause] Connection to the SNTP server timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the network cable connection and the IP address of the SNTP server are correct.
Refer to "Machine Clock/Timers" (P.160).
501
15 Problem Solving

016-456 [Cause] Received a message from the SNTP server stating that the server is not synchronized
with the standard time source.
[Remedy] Confirm the SNTP server settings.
Refer to "Machine Clock/Timers" (P.160).
016-461 [Cause] When [Assurance Level] under the [Transfer Image Log] is set to [High], you may not be
able to create a new job because of a restriction resulting from the congestion of un-
forwarded image logs.
[Remedy] Confirm the status of the server managing the image logs and the network status, and
eliminate the source obstructing image log forwarding to the image log server. Take one
of the following measures:

Confirm the forwarding settings, and then forward all un-forwarded logs.

Change the [Assurance Level] to [Low]. In this case, the image logs may not be
forwarded and may be deleted successively.
When using the Image Log Kit (PostScript), and you switch the machine power off and
then on, or when the machine restarts automatically, switch off the machine power,
make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power.
Support Center.
016-503 [Cause] Unable to resolve the SMTP server name when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Check on CentreWare Internet Services whether the SMTP server settings are correct.
Also, confirm whether the DNS server settings are correct.
016-504 [Cause] Unable to resolve the POP3 server name when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Check on CentreWare Internet Services whether the POP3 server settings are correct.
Also, confirm whether the DNS server settings are correct.
016-505 [Cause] Unable to log into the POP3 server when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Check on CentreWare Internet Services whether the user name and password used on
the POP3 server are correct.
016-506 [Cause] Unable to write the image log because the image log storage space is insufficient on the
machine.
[Remedy] Execute the job again. If the error still is not resolved, take one of the following
measures:
Problem Solving

Delete unnecessary image logs

Change the [Assurance Level] for image logs to [Low]
In this case, the contents of the logs are not secured.
016-507 [Cause] When using the Image Log Control feature, failed to forward the image log to the
server.
15 [Remedy] Either set the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the machine, or set
[Transfer Image Log] to [Disabled].
016-508 [Cause] When using the Image Log Control feature, failed to forward the image log to the
server.
[Remedy] Set the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the machine.
502
Error Code

016-509 [Cause] When using the Image Log Control feature, failed to forward the image log to the server
because the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the machine has not been
set.
[Remedy] Either set the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the machine, or set
[Transfer Image Log] to [Disabled].
because the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the machine has not been
set.
[Remedy] Set the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the machine.
016-512 because the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the machine has not been
set correctly.
[Remedy] Confirm the forwarding rule for image logs from the server to the machine.
016-513 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the SMTP server. Probable causes are as follows:
1)The SMTP server or network may be overloaded.
2)The source port number for SMTP is incorrect.
[Remedy] For 1), wait for a while, and then execute the operation again.
For 2), confirm whether the source port number for SMTP is correct.
016-514 [Cause] An error occurred during processing of an XPS document.
[Remedy] If an error occurred while printing from a driver which supports XPS, print from the
application using another print driver (PCL, etc.).
If an error occurred while direct printing an XPS document (such as ContentsBridge
Utility, E-mail, and Media Print - Text), print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from XPS
Document Viewer.
016-515 [Cause] There was insufficient memory during processing of an XPS document.
 Set [Image Quality] to [Standard]

Increase the amount of memory

Print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from XPS Document Viewer.
For more information on [Image Options], refer to the help of the print driver. Problem Solving
016-516 [Cause] The Print Ticket included in the XPS document includes an invalid description or a print
setting not supported by the machine.
[Remedy] Check whether there is a problem with the method of using the application that sent the
print job, or with the content of the print instruction.
If your application usage and print instruction are correct, check with the application
manufacturer that sent the print job for operations of the application, not with Fuji
Xerox.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. 15
016-517 [Cause] There is an error in the content described in the PostScript file.
[Remedy] Print with the PostScript driver. Furthermore, modify ProcessColorModel described in the
PostScript file so that the color mode does not change.
016-518 [Cause] With the PostScript driver, booklet and Watermark were specified at the same time.
[Remedy] With the PostScript driver, specifying a combination of booklet and Watermark/UUID is
not possible. Cancel one of them.
503
15 Problem Solving

016-519 [Cause] The number of pages reached the maximum number of pages specified, and the print
job is terminated.
[Remedy] Have your system administrator change the maximum limit of printable pages.
016-520 [Cause] An error occurred in the high compression hardware.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. Also change the output file format and color mode.
If the problem is not resolved, switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch
screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. And then perform the above
operation again.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-521 [Cause] The IC Card Reader (optional) is disconnected from the machine while scanning the
data with digital signature.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power and connect the IC Card Reader, and then switch on the
machine power.
016-522 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. Unable to acquire an SSL client certificate.
[Remedy] The LDAP server is requesting an SSL client certificate. Set an SSL client certificate on
the machine.
016-523 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate data is incorrect.
[Remedy] The machine cannot trust the SSL certificate of the LDAP server. Register the root
certificate for the LDAP server's SSL certificate to the machine.
016-524 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate will expire soon.
[Remedy] Change the SSL certificate of the LDAP server to a valid one. You can clear this error by
selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication] under [SSL/TLS Settings] on
the machine; however, note that selecting this option does not ensure the validity of the
LDAP server.
016-525 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate has expired.
[Remedy] Change the SSL certificate of the LDAP server to a valid one. You can clear this error by
selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication] under [SSL/TLS Settings] on
the machine; however, note that selecting this option does not ensure the validity of the
LDAP server.
016-526 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server name does not match the certificate.
[Remedy] Set the same LDAP server address to the machine and to the SSL certificate of the LDAP
server. You can clear this error by selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL/TLS
Communication] under [SSL/TLS Settings] on the machine; however, note that selecting
Problem Solving
this option does not ensure the validity of the LDAP server.
016-527 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. This is an SSL authentication internal error.
[Remedy] An error occurred in the software. Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-528 [Cause] You are logged out of the smart card authentication mode while scanning the data with
a digital signature.
15 [Remedy] Log in to the machine with the smart card, and then execute the operation again.
016-529 [Cause] An error occurred when connecting to the Remote Download server. There was no
response from the server within the specified time (45 seconds).
[Remedy] Confirm the network connection. Check whether the Remote Download server is
correctly set on the network.
504
Error Code

016-533 [Cause] Kerberos server authentication protocol error
[Remedy] The time difference between the machine and the Kerberos server exceeded the clock
skew limit value set on the Kerberos server. Check whether the clocks on the machine
and Kerberos server are correctly set. Also check whether the summer time and the time
zone are correctly set on the machine and Kerberos server.
[Remedy] The domain set on the machine does not exist on the Kerberos server, or the Kerberos
server address set on the machine is invalid for connection. Check whether the domain
name and the server address have been correctly set on the machine. For connection to
Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Server, specify the domain name in uppercase.
016-535 [Cause] The specified file does not exist on the Remote Download server.
[Remedy] Confirm the file.
016-536 [Cause] An error occurred when accessing the DNS prior to connecting to the Remote Download
server.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection with the DNS. Also check whether the Remote Download server
name is registered to the DNS.
016-537 [Cause] Could not connect to the Remote Download server. The port of the destination Remote
Download server is not open.
[Remedy] Confirm the port in the network settings.
016-538 [Cause] An error occurred when writing the remote download file to the hard disk. The file
obtained from the Remote Download server could not be written to the hard disk.
[Remedy] Confirm the amount of available space, and delete files that are no longer required.
Alternatively, replace the hard disk.
[Remedy] An error occurred in the software. Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-543 [Cause] The specified domain was deleted from ApeosWare Authentication Management (sold
separately) and ApeosWare Authentication Agent (sold separately).
[Remedy] Select [Refresh] on the [Domain] screen, and update the domain information, or add
the domain to ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication
Agent.
016-545 [Cause] The specified domain was deleted from ApeosWare Authentication Management (sold
separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent (sold separately). Problem Solving
[Remedy] Adjust the times of the computer of the active directory and the computer on which
ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent is
installed. Also, if the Windows Time Service of the computer on which Authentication
Agent is installed has stopped, start the service.
For more information on the process, refer to the manual for the Authentication Agent.
016-546 [Cause] A Local User tried to obtain the information of another user.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. 15
016-548 [Cause] The machine is not registered in the ApeosWare Authentication Management or
ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
[Remedy] Register the machine in the ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare
Authentication Agent.
For more information on the process, refer to the manual for ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare
505
15 Problem Solving

016-553 [Cause] ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent does not
support the interface version of the machine.
[Remedy] You must upgrade ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare
Authentication Agent's version. Check whether the machine supports ApeosWare
Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent to being upgraded.
016-554 [Cause] The login name and password used for domain user authentication of ApeosWare
Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent is invalid.
[Remedy] Correctly set the login name and password used for domain user authentication of
ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
016-555 [Cause] Connection to ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication
Agent to the database or the active directory timed out.
[Remedy] Check whether you can connect from ApeosWare Authentication Management or
ApeosWare Authentication Agent to the database or the active directory.
016-556 [Cause] Connection to ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication
Agent to the database timed out because of an overload.
[Remedy] Because the service is overloaded, wait for a while, and then execute authentication
again.
If the error still is not resolved, check ApeosWare Authentication Management or
ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
016-557 [Cause] Authentication Agent internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Check ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
016-558 [Cause] The machine received an unknown error from ApeosWare Authentication Management
or ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-559 [Cause] A remote download parameter error occurred. An invalid value is set for essential system
data.
[Remedy] Confirm the settings for essential system data.
Problem Solving
016-560 [Cause] A communications error occurred between the machine and ApeosWare Authentication
Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent (sold separately).
[Remedy] Check whether the network cable is connected, and confirm the settings of ApeosWare
Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent. Also, print a
Configuration Report, and if the DNS address of the server is set to "Server Name / IP
Address" for "Authentication Agent", check whether DNS is enabled.
15 016-562 [Cause] Multiple entries containing the same smart card information were found in the guest
database of Active Directory, ApeosWare Authentication Management or ApeosWare
[Remedy] Correct the guest database entries of Active Directory, or ApeosWare Authentication
Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent so that they do not contain the
same smart card information.
506
Error Code

016-563 [Cause] The job cannot continue because there is insufficient memory for the Image Extension
Kit.
[Remedy] Select Standard for the image quality. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
016-564 [Cause] Failed to authenticate the Remote Download server.
[Remedy] Confirm the login name and password to access the Remote Download server. If the
error still is not resolved, contact the Customer Support Center.
016-569 [Cause] Authentication Agent error
016-574 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the host
or server name of the FTP server could not be resolved when accessing the DNS server.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the DNS server. Check whether the FTP server name is
registered correctly on the DNS server.
016-575 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the
DNS server address was not registered on the machine.
[Remedy] Specify the correct DNS server address. Or, specify the destination FTP server by using
its IP address.
016-576 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because it could
not connect to the FTP server.
[Remedy] Ensure that both the destination FTP server and the machine are available for network
communications, by checking the following conditions:
 The IP address of the server is set correctly.

The network cables are plugged in securely.
016-577 [Cause] Unable to connect to the FTP service of the destination server.

Check whether the FTP service of the server is activated.
 Check whether the FTP port number of the server is correctly registered on the
machine.
016-578 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because of
unsuccessful login to the FTP server.
[Remedy] Check whether the login name (user name) and password are correct.
Problem Solving
scanned image could not be saved in the FTP server after connection.
[Remedy] Check whether the FTP server's save location is correct.
016-580 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the file
or folder name on the FTP server could not be retrieved after connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server.
016-581 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because the 15
suffix of the name of the file or folder exceeded the limit value when the machine was
connected to the server and the name of a file or folder on the server was determined.
[Remedy] Change the file name or forwarding destination folder of the scan server. Also try
moving or deleting the files within the forwarding destination folder.
507
15 Problem Solving

016-582 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because files
could not be created on the FTP server after connection.

Check whether the specified file name can be used in the save location.
 Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
016-583 [Cause] Failed to create the lock directory in the FTP server while transferring data using FTP of
the Scan to PC service.

If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it manually, and then
execute the operation again.
 Check whether the specified name is available in the save location.
 Confirm that the specified name is not duplicated in the save location.

Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
016-584 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because folders
could not created on the FTP server after connection.

Check whether the specified folder name can be used in the save location.
 Check whether the same folder name exists in the save location.

Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
016-585 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because files
could not be deleted on the FTP server after connection.
016-586 [Cause] The machine failed to delete the lock directory while transferring data using FTP of the
Scan to PC service.
 Confirm the access privilege for the server.
 If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it manually, and then

016-587 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because folders
could not be deleted on the FTP server after connection.
Problem Solving
data could not be written on the FTP server after connection.

[Remedy] Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
data could not be read from the FTP server after connection.
15 016-590 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because there
are duplicate file names.
[Remedy] Set [Do Not Save] for the action for file name conflict.
016-591 [Cause] The machine failed to perform the additional processing for the file name conflict using
FTP of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] If [Add to Existing Folder] is set for the additional processing for file name conflict,
confirm that the file format is not multi-page.
508
Error Code

016-592 [Cause] The machine failed to access the NEXTNAME.DAT file using FTP of the Scan to PC
service.
[Remedy] When [Add to Existing Folder] is set as the process to be executed in case of a file name
duplication, check the NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct.
016-593 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because an
internal error occurred after connection to the FTP server.
Support Center.
016-594 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC service because a
016-595 network error occurred.
Support Center.
network error occurred.
Support Center.
network error occurred.
[Remedy] Stop all accesses from the other devices, and then execute the operation again. If the
error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-598 [Cause] The size of an e-mail page exceeds the maximum message size because of page
016-599 splitting.
 Reduce the file size for [Quality/File Size].

Increase the value for [Maximum Split Count].
For more information on [Quality/File Size], refer to "5 Scan" > "E-mail Options/Filing Options" > "Quality/File Size
(Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning)" in the User Guide.
For more information on [Maximum Split Count], refer to "Maximum Split Count" (P.277).
016-700 [Cause] The job was suspended because the number of the digits for the Secure Print or Charge
Print passcode set on the print driver was less than the value specified in [Minimum
Passcode Length for Stored Job] on the machine.
[Remedy] On the print driver, set the passcode string equal to or longer than the value specified in
[Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Job]. Problem Solving
016-701 [Cause] Unable to process print data because of insufficient memory.

[Remedy] Stop unnecessary ports or delete unnecessary data to increase memory.
016-702 [Cause] Unable to process print data because of insufficient print page buffer.
 Set [Image Quality] to [Standard].

Increase the print page buffer size. 15
 Add memory.
For more information on the [Image Quality], refer to the help of the print driver. For more information about memory,
refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.244).
509
15 Problem Solving

016-703 [Cause] The machine received an e-mail specified with an invalid folder number.
[Remedy] For errors occurring during fax or Internet fax transmission:
Contact our Customer Support Center.
For errors occurring during e-mail/fax/Internet fax reception:
Take one of the following measures:
 Register the specified folder number, and request the sender to send the e-mail/fax/
Internet fax again.

 Request the sender to send to an available folder.
016-704 [Cause] The folder is full, and hard disk capacity is insufficient.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files from the folder, and save the file.
Refer to "6 Send from Folder" > "Checking/Operating Files in a Folder" in the User Guide.
016-705 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1)You have specified the machine for the folder registry for the scanned document.
However, the Scanner Kit (optional) is not installed.
2)You have not used the print driver for the machine.
3)The machine received a Secure Print, Print Stored File, Charge Print, or Private Charge
Print job with no hard disk installed.
[Remedy] For 1), press the <Services Home> button, and check whether [Scan to PC] is displayed.
If [Scan to PC] is displayed, then check whether the scanned document can be stored in
a folder. If unable to store it in the folder, install the Scanner Kit (optional).
For 2), use the print driver appropriate for the machine.
For 3), check whether the hard disk is installed on the machine.
If the hard disk is not installed:
 If you do not need to use the feature, select [Not Installed] under [Hard Disk] on the
[Options] tab of the print driver.

 If you need to use the feature, install the hard disk.
If the hard disk is installed:


Select [Installed] under [Hard Disk] on the [Options] tab of the print driver.
016-706 [Cause] The hard disk space is insufficient because the number of Secure Print users exceeded
the maximum limit.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files from the machine, and delete unnecessary Secure Print users.
For more information on deleting users for Secure Print files, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored
Jobs", and on folders, refer to "6 Send from Folder" > "Checking/Operating Files in a Folder" in the User Guide.
016-707 [Cause] Unable to print with the Sample Set feature because the hard disk is not installed.
[Remedy] To use the Sample Set feature, the hard disk must be installed. Contact our Customer
15 Support Center.
016-708 [Cause] Unable to annotate because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space.
016-709 [Cause] An error occurred during print processing.
016-710 [Cause] Unable to register the Delayed Print document because the hard disk is not installed.
[Remedy] To use the Delayed Print feature, the hard disk must be installed.
510
Error Code

016-711 [Cause] The upper limit for the e-mail size has been exceeded.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures, and then try sending the mail again.

Reduce the number of pages of the document.
 Lower the resolution with [Resolution].

Reduce the magnification with [Reduce/Enlarge].
 Ask your system administrator to increase the value set for [Maximum Total Data
Size].
 For color scanning, set [MRC High Compression] to [On] under [File Format].
016-712 [Cause] Unable to process the document because the specified scan area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase the resolution or scan area.
016-713 [Cause] The passcode entered does not match the passcode set on the folder.
[Remedy] Enter the correct passcode.
016-714 [Cause] The specified folder does not exist.
[Remedy] Create a new folder or specify an existing folder.
016-715 [Cause] The machine failed to access the ESCP form because the password of the ESCP form
does not match.
[Remedy] Enter the correct password of the ESCP form.
016-716 [Cause] Unable to spool TIFF file because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files and users from the machine, or install the hard disk. For
information on installing the hard disk, contact our Customer Support Center.
Refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" in the User Guide.
016-717 [Cause] Unable to create a Transmission Report - Job Undelivered or a Transmission Report
because the transmission result information required for creating the report is not
stored in the machine's memory.

Execute the jobs for large size Internet fax documents (about 2GB) by splitting each
document to minimize memory or HDD usage.
 If many scan or Internet fax documents are being processed, wait until the jobs are
completed to execute a new job.


After completing the job that you want to confirm in a report, do not execute 200 or
more jobs before printing the report.
016-718 [Cause] Unable to process the PCL print data because of insufficient memory.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Reduce the resolution, or cancel 2 sided printing or N up feature, and then print again.
016-719 [Cause] Unable to process the PCL print data because of insufficient print page buffer.
[Remedy] Increase the size of the print page buffer.
016-720 [Cause] An invalid command is included in PCL print data.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data and try printing again.
15
016-721 [Cause] An error occurred during print processing. Probable causes are as follows:
1)Printing was instructed by the Auto Paper selection when [Paper Type Priority] is set
to [Auto Paper Off] for all paper in the [Common Service Settings].
2)ESC/P-K command error occurred.
[Remedy] For 1), when printing by the Auto Paper selection, set one of the paper types to other
than [Auto Paper Off] in [Paper Type Priority].
For 2), confirm the print data.
Refer to "Paper Type Priority" (P.172).
511
15 Problem Solving

016-722 [Cause] The specified staple position is not supported by the machine, or the paper size specified
is not supported by the finisher.
[Remedy] Confirm the staple position and the paper size, and try printing again.
016-723 [Cause] The specified punch position is not supported by the machine, or the paper size
specified is not supported by the finisher.
[Remedy] Confirm the punch position and the paper size, and try printing again.
016-724 [Cause] The specified staple and punch position combination is unsupported.
[Remedy] Specify the staple and punch positions on the same side, and try printing again.
016-725 [Cause] A scanned document stored in a folder was to be sent by fax using the Job Flow feature,
but the file in the folder could not be converted to fax data.
[Remedy] Do not use the Job Flow feature. Simply scan the document from the machine's [Fax]
screen to send it by fax.
016-726 [Cause] Unable to automatically select a printer language because PostScript data was sent
with no Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) installed.
[Remedy] The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) must be installed.
016-727 [Cause] A print job was cancelled without storing a file into a folder because the file was
determined as not containing any pages.
[Remedy] The file could not be stored into the folder because the machine determined the print
file as not containing any pages. Disable [Skip Blank Pages] on the [Advanced] tab on
the print driver, or add text to the file if the file is blank.
016-728 [Cause] An unsupported tag is included in the TIFF file.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data.
016-729 [Cause] Unable to print because the number of colors or the resolution of the TIFF file exceeds
the allowed range.
[Remedy] Change the number of colors or resolution for the TIFF file, and execute the operation
again.
016-731 [Cause] Unable to print TIFF data because it was interrupted.
[Remedy] Retry printing.
016-732 [Cause] The form specified by emulation has not been registered at the host side.
[Remedy] Resend the form data.
Problem Solving

1)Unable to obtain the IP address (the string after "@" in the destination e-mail address)
when e-mail is sent.
2)DNS server was unable to resolve the Internet address (the string after "@") by the
DNS server when e-mail is sent.
[Remedy] For 1), confirm the e-mail address.
15 For 2), confirm the DNS server address.

016-735 [Cause] Attempted to print [Job Template List] while updating the job template.
[Remedy] Retry printing after waiting for a while.
016-738 [Cause] Unsupported paper size was specified when specifying booklet creation with PostScript
(optional).
[Remedy] Specify a paper size supported for booklet creation, and try printing again.
512
Error Code

016-739 [Cause] Used an unsupported combination of document size and paper size when specifying
booklet creation with PostScript (optional).
[Remedy] Specify a combination of document size and paper size supported for booklet creation,
and try printing again.
016-740 [Cause] Used an unsupported paper tray when specifying booklet creation with PostScript
(optional).
[Remedy] Specify a paper tray supported for booklet creation, and try printing again.
016-741 [Cause] An error occurred during the update process of the machine.
016-744 Center.
016-745
016-746 [Cause] An unsupported feature is included in the received PDF.
[Remedy] Print using a print driver.
016-747 [Cause] The memory became insufficient when using the Repeat Image feature and the
Annotations features simultaneously.

Increase the annotation image size.
 Reduce the usage of Repeat Image.

Increase memory (only for the machine with the optional add-on memory).
016-748 [Cause] Unable to print because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of print pages by dividing the print data or by printing one copy at
a time when printing multiple copies.
For a print job:
1) The printer language received from the print driver is unsupported by this machine.
For printing of a document received by Internet Fax:
2) The printer language of the document received from the remote machine is
unsupported by this machine.
[Remedy] For 1), use the machine's print driver for printing. If the error still is not resolved, contact
our Customer Support Center. Problem Solving
For 2), request the sender to send Internet fax documents using a printer language
supported by the machine.
Note • An optional component must be installed for some printer languages such as PostScript. For more
016-750 [Cause] The machine received a printing job ticket with a PDF, an XPS from an application (such
as ContentsBridge) that allows direct transmissions of files, but the printing job ticket
data had a grammar or print instruction unsupported by the machine. 15
[Remedy] Check whether you are correctly using the application (such as ContentsBridge) and
whether the print instruction was correct.
If your application usage and print instruction are correct, check with the application
manufacturer that sent the print job for operations of the application.
If the error still is not resolved, have the Configuration Report, the Job History Report,
and the print data with the printing job ticket ready, and contact our Customer Support
Center.
513
15 Problem Solving

1)During the PDF Bridge processing, a syntax or parameter error occurred, an undefined
command was used, and a PDF file was damaged.
2)When [Print Processing Mode [408])] for the PDF Direct Print feature has been set to
[PS([1])], memory is insufficient.
3)When [Print Processing Mode [408])] for the PDF Direct Print feature has been set to
[PS([1])], a PDF file including OpenType fonts is processed.
[Remedy] For 1), use the print driver to print the document.
For 2), take one of the following measures:
 Use the print driver to print the document.
 Increase PostScript memory.
For 3), create a PDF file in which OpenType fonts are not included.
For more information on the memory, refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.244).
016-752 [Cause] Unable to process for PDF Bridge because of insufficient memory space.
[Remedy] Change the [Image Quality] setting from [High Resolution] to [High Quality], or from
[High Quality] to [Standard]. Or, add memory.
016-753 [Cause] The password entered does not match that of the PDF file.
[Remedy] Set the correct password on ContentsBridge.
016-755 [Cause] Attempted to process a print-protected PDF file.
[Remedy] Cancel the print protection using Acrobat® Reader®, and try printing again.
016-756 [Cause] Do not have permission to use the service.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator.
016-757 [Cause] The passcode is incorrect.
[Remedy] Enter the correct passcode.
016-758 [Cause] The division does not have permission to use the service.
016-759 [Cause] The number of pages reached the maximum number of pages for this service.
016-760 [Cause] An error occurred during PostScript (optional) processing.
Problem Solving


Set [Image Quality] to [High Speed].
 Increase PostScript memory.
For more information on [Image Quality], refer to the help of the print driver. For more information on memory, refer to
"Allocate Memory" (P.244).
016-761 [Cause] An error occurred during image processing.
15 [Remedy] Set [Image Quality] to [Standard] and execute the operation again. If the error still is
not resolved, set [Print Page Mode] to [On].
016-762 [Cause] The specified printer language is not installed on the machine.
[Remedy] For [Parallel] and [USB] in [Print Mode] under [Port Settings], specify correct printer
language.
016-763 [Cause] Unable to connect to the POP server.
[Remedy] Confirm the POP server IP address set on the machine.
514
Error Code

016-764 [Cause] Unable to connect to the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Consult the SMTP server administrator.
016-765 [Cause] Unable to send the e-mail because the hard disk on the SMTP server is full.
016-766 [Cause] An error occurred on the SMTP server.
016-767 [Cause] Unable to send the e-mail because the address is not correct.
[Remedy] Confirm the address, and try sending again.
016-768 [Cause] Unable to connect to the SMTP server because the machine's mail address is incorrect.
[Remedy] Confirm the machine's mail address.
016-769 [Cause] The SMTP server does not support delivery receipts (DSN).
[Remedy] Send e-mail without setting delivery receipts (DSN).
016-770 [Cause] Direct Fax is restricted.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator whether Direct Fax is available. If it is available,
016-772 [Cause] The DNS server address is not set.
[Remedy] Set the DNS server address.
016-774 [Cause] Unable to process compression conversion because of insufficient hard disk space.
016-775 [Cause] Unable to process image conversion because of insufficient hard disk space.
016-776 [Cause] An error occurred during image conversion processing.
[Remedy] For errors occurring when forwarding with Store to Folder or Internet Fax: The image
conversion processing for the part of the data may be completed. Retrieve each
converted page from the folder using CentreWare Internet Services.
For more information, refer to "Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.339).
For errors occurring after instructing encryption or signature using a certificate:
Take one of the following measures:

Check whether the certificate is valid. Problem Solving

Set the correct date and time on the machine.
For errors occurring when [Microsoft® Word] or [Microsoft® Excel®] is selected for [File
Format]: There are too many images in the document. Select [Single File for Each Page]
for [File Format], or select [Picture Object] for [Image Area Format].
016-777 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during image processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk, contact our Customer Support
Center.
15
016-778 [Cause] The conversion processing of the scanned image was interrupted because of
insufficient disk space.
016-779 [Cause] An error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
[Remedy] Retry scanning. If using large-size paper such as A3 with [Resolution] set to [600 dpi],
specify [Resolution] to [400 dpi] or lower in [Layout Adjustment]. If the error still is not
resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
515
15 Problem Solving

016-780 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk, contact our Customer Support
Center.
1)The mail server cannot be found during e-mail sending (TCP/IP session establishment
failed).
2)The machine received an SMTP server error from the mail server during e-mail
sending.
[Remedy] 1)Take one of the following measures:
- Check whether the network cables are plugged in securely.
- Check whether the IP address of the SMTP server when an IP address is used for
server specification.
2)Enter the host name using ASCII characters.
Available ASCII characters are follows:
- alphabets
- numerals
Check whether or not ASCII characters are used in [Tools] > [Connectivity & Network
Setup] > [Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name].
016-786 [Cause] When using the Scan feature, the machine could not write the file to the hard disk.
 Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power.


Load paper on the paper tray as necessary.

If the error occurs when sending an e-mail, take one of the following measures:
- Lower the resolution.
- Reduce the size.
- Reduce the number of pages, and divide the job into several e-mails to send.
- Send the job by setting [Color Scanning] to [Black & White].
016-788 [Cause] Failed to retrieve a file from the Web browser.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures, and then execute the operation again:

Reload the browser page.

Restart the browser.
 Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then

Problem Solving
016-790 [Cause] Unable to send an e-mail with Split Send because of exceeding the maximum number
of splits allowed.
 Reduce the file size for [Quality/File Size].
 Increase the value for [Maximum Split Count].
15 For more information on [Quality/File Size], refer to "5 Scan" > "E-mail Options/Filing Options" > "Quality/File Size
(Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning)" in the User Guide. For more information on [Maximum Split
Count], refer to "Maximum Split Count" (P.277).
016-792 [Cause] Failed to acquire the specified job history when printing a Job Report.
[Remedy] The specified job history does not exist.
016-794 [Cause] Media is not inserted correctly.
[Remedy] Check whether the media is inserted correctly.
516
Error Code

016-795 [Cause] An error occurred when reading the data on the media.
016-796 [Remedy] On a computer, confirm the content recorded on the media.
016-797
016-798 [Cause] Unable to print a document because the hard disk is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the hard disk, and try printing again.
Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-799 [Cause] An invalid print parameter is included in the print data of the application, or the print
data and the Print Setup settings may not match.
[Remedy] Check the print data of the application and the Print Setup settings, and try printing
again.
017-700 [Cause] ThinPrint.Engine connection timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the ThinPrint.Engine.
017-701 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to ThinPrint.Engine.
017-702 [Cause] The data sent to ThinPrint.Engine is invalid.
017-703 [Cause] The print data sent from ThinPrint.Engine exceeded the maximum size of the machine.
[Remedy] Split the job, and try printing again.
on the machine power. Send the job again.
017-705 [Cause] ThinPrint.Engine SSL authentication error.
017-706 [Remedy] Check the server certificate information (expiry date and address) that is registered to
017-707 ThinPrint.Engine.
017-708
017-709 [Cause] An SSL communication error occurred between ThinPrint.Engine and the machine.
[Remedy] Check the settings of the machine.
017-713 [Cause] The SMTP server does not support STARTTLS.
[Remedy] Change SSL/TLS communication setting to other than [STARTTLS]. Problem Solving
017-714 [Cause] SSL connection to the SMTP server failed.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the SMTP server supports SSL connection. If the server supports it,
check the port number of the SMTP server. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
017-715 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. The server certificate is invalid.
[Remedy] Use the valid SSL server certificate of the SMTP server. You can avoid this error by
setting [SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication] in [SSL/TLS Settings] to [Disabled], however
15
the validity of the server cannot be warranted.
017-716 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. It is before the valid period of the server
certificate.
517
15 Problem Solving

017-717 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. The server certificate expired.
setting [SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication] under [SSL/TLS Settings] to [Disabled],
however the validity of the server cannot be warranted.
017-718 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. The server name and certificate do not
match.
017-719 [Cause] SMTP server SSL server authentication error. SSL authentication internal error.
Support Center.
017-723 [Cause] Character strings the DocuWorks Direct Print feature does not support are used.
[Remedy] Print the file from DocuWorks Viewer via the PCL print driver.
017-724 [Cause] An error occurred while receiving a print job from Denshi-Pen.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the machine is compatible with Denshi-Pen. When it is compatible,
execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
017-725 [Cause] An error occurred while receiving a print job when the Force Annotation is enabled.
[Remedy] Incorrect name is set for the template of the Force Annotation. Confirm the name of the
template registered in the machine.
017-729 [Cause] When the machine is used as a print job storage device, print job sending was stopped
temporarily because the number of jobs in the machine exceeded the maximum
receivable volume or the space for spool data was insufficient.
 Set to spool data to the hard disk from the setting of the storage destination machine.

Set [IPP] under [Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] to [Spool to Hard
Disk] by CentreWare Internet Services.

Wait for a while and send the job again.
017-730 [Cause] When the machine is used as a print job storage device, the computer failed to send a
job to the machine because a network error occurred.
[Remedy] Confirm the followings:
Problem Solving

The network cable is connected properly.
 The storage destination machine is powered on.
 The IPP port of the storage destination machine is enabled.
017-731 [Cause] Unable to connect to the POP server.
15 [Remedy] Confirm the followings:


The IP address of the POP server is set on the machine.
 The network cable is connected properly.
017-732 [Cause] When the machine is used as a print job storage device, the computer failed to send a
job because the machine is off-line.
[Remedy] Press the <Machine Status> button of the storage destination machine, and set [Print
Mode] to [On-line] on the [Machine Information] screen. If the error still is not resolved,
518
Error Code

017-733 [Cause] When the machine is used as a print job storage device, an internal error in the software
is occurred while the job sending to the machine.
Support Center.
017-734 [Cause] An internal error occurred during processing the AirPrint data.
[Remedy] Send the print job again by using the printer driver or software other than AirPrint. If the
error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
017-735 [Cause] Device usage is prohibited.
Support Center.
017-737 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to memory capacity shortage.
[Remedy] Have your system administrator stop or delete the unnecessary plug-ins. If the error still
is not resolved, switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank,
and then switch on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, contact
our Customer Support Center.
017-738 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to an internal error.
Support Center.
017-740 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to a plug-in activation failure.
Support Center.
017-741 [Cause] The job flow cannot be activated.
 Install the latest plug-in.

Confirm the job flow settings.
017-742 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the forwarding server.
[Remedy] Check the network connection and the address of the forwarding server.
017-743 [Cause] Cannot login to the forwarding server.
[Remedy] Confirm the user ID and the password. Problem Solving
017-744 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the forwarding server.
[Remedy] Confirm the followings:
You can access to the same path using a computer. There is enough memory capacity
left in the storage destination.
017-745 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to the lack of hard disk memory capacity.
 Send with lower resolution.
15
 Send in smaller size.
 Send with fewer pages by dividing the job.
 Send with [Black & White] set as the [Output Color].
017-746 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred.

Support Center.
519
15 Problem Solving

017-747 [Cause] Connection to ApeosWare Authentication Agent to the database timed out because of
an overload.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again. If the same message is
displayed again, contact our Customer Support Center.
017-748 [Cause] Data could not be sent due to the incorrect machine setting.
[Remedy] Confirm the network setting of the machine.
[Remedy] Confirm the job flow settings.
017-750 [Cause] A plug-in error occurred.
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, reinstall the plug-in.
017-751 [Cause] A plug-in error occurred.
[Remedy] Confirm the detail from [Transmission Report - Job Undelivered].
017-755 [Cause] Cannot download a software.
 Confirm that [Enabled] is checked in CentreWare Internet Services under [Properties]
> [Services] > [Machine Software]> [Upgrades].


Download the software through USB connection.
Center.
017-759 [Cause] An error occurred during firmware update in the machine.
017-760 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the POP3 server. Probable causes are follows.
1. When connecting to the POP3 server by the TLS communication, the port number is
incorrect.
2. When connecting to the POP3 server by the SSL communication, an internal error
occurred.
[Remedy] For 1, set the correct port number for the POP3 server.
Problem Solving
For 2, switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
017-761 [Cause] A SSL server authentication error occurred because the server certificate for the POP3
server is invalid.
[Remedy] Use the valid server certificate for the POP3 server.
15 017-762 [Cause] The server certificate for the POP3 server is before the valid period.
[Remedy] Be sure to match the time set on the POP3 server and the machine. If the time matches,
use the valid server certificate.
017-763 [Cause] The server certificate for the POP3 server is expired.
017-764 [Cause] The server addresses of the POP3 server and the server certificate are not same.
[Remedy] Use the valid server certificate in which the correct server address is written.
520
Error Code

017-765 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the POP3 server.
Support Center.
017-766 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the POP3 server. Probable causes are follows.
1)When connecting to the POP3 server by the TLS communication, the port number is
incorrect.
2)When connecting to the POP3 server by the SSL communication, an internal error
occurred.
[Remedy] For 1, set the correct port number for the POP3 server.
For 2, switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
017-767 [Cause] A SSL server authentication error occurred because the server certificate for the POP3
server is invalid.
[Remedy] Use the valid server certificate for the POP3 server.
017-768 [Cause] The server certificate for the POP3 server is before the valid period.
017-769 [Cause] The server addresses of the POP3 server and the server certificate are not same.
[Remedy] Use the valid server certificate in which the correct server address is written.
017-770 [Cause] An error occurred in connecting to the POP3 server.
Support Center.
Support Center.
017-772 [Cause] The scanned documents is completely blank.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures.

Check whether the document is blank or whether the side of the document to be
scanned is loaded correctly.
 Select [Image option] in the [Advanced Settings] screen and set the scan density to
Problem Solving
be [Darken].
017-780 [Cause] When [Enabled] is set to [Auto Job Promotion], a bypassed job is automatically deleted
after a certain period of time.
[Remedy] No measure is required.
Note • If necessary, change the setting by set [Disabled] or specify the period of time until a bypassed
job is deleted between 1 minute and 120 hours. 15
017-782 [Cause] An internal error occurred during image processing.
Support Center.
017-783 [Cause] The memory became insufficient during image processing.

Transmit data with lower resolution.
 Transmit data in the setting [Output Color] to [Black & White].
521
15 Problem Solving

017-784 [Cause] An internal error occurred during image processing.
017-785 [Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
018-400 [Cause] Although IPsec is enabled, the IPsec settings are inconsistent.
 Although [Authenticated by Preshared Key] is set in [IKE Authentication Method], a
passcode is not set.

 Although [Authenticated by Digital Signature] is set in [IKE Authentication Method],
an IPsec certificate is not set.

[Remedy] Remove the inconsistency of the IPsec settings, and enable IPsec again.

When [Authenticated by Preshared Key] is set in [IKE Authentication Method], set the
passcode.
 When [Authenticated by Digital Signature] is set in [IKE Authentication Method], set
an IPsec certificate.
018-405 [Cause] An error occurred during LDAP authentication.
[Remedy] The account is disabled in the active directory of the authentication server, or the access
is set to disabled. Consult your network administrator.
018-406 [Cause] The machine detects the identical IPv4 addresses when Ethernet1 and Ethernet2 are
018-407 connected to different network and the setting of identical addresses is prohibited.
[Remedy] Set different IP addresses to each Ethernet. When setting the same IP address to each
Ethernet, contact our Customer Support Center.
018-408 [Cause] The IPv4 address already exists in the network of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Change the IPv4 address of Ethernet2.
[Remedy] Change the IPv6 address of the network in which the address already exists.
018-410 [Cause] Updating of the IPv4 address and host name for the DNS server failed on the network
of Ethernet2.
018-411 [Cause] Updating of the IPv6 address and host name for the DNS server failed on the network
of Ethernet2.
Problem Solving
018-413 [Remedy] Change the IPv6 address of the network in which the address already exists.
018-414 [Cause] IP address for IPv6 set manually in Ethernet2 is incorrect.
[Remedy] Set the IP address correctly.
018-415 [Cause] IP address for IPv6 set manually in Ethernet2 is incorrect.
[Remedy] Change the [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] on the machine, or the IP address of
15 IPv6 on the network device, to remove the duplication of addresses.
[Remedy] Change the IPv6 address of the network in which the address already exists.
018-500 [Cause] The certificate does not exist in the authentication server.
[Remedy] Configure the server certificate. Or, cancel authentication.
018-501 [Cause] Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
[Remedy] Check the network connection and the address of the CA server.
522
Error Code

018-502 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because
computers allowed to login are restricted.
[Remedy] Confirm the property information for the specified user, and check whether the
computers allowed to login to the server are restricted.
018-504 [Remedy] Execute the authentication operation again.
018-505 [Cause] Failed to log into the destination computer while transferring data using SMB of the
Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Check whether the user name and password of the SMTP server registered in the
machine is correct.
Important • The password cannot be confirmed. If you have forgotten the password, reset the password.
Consult your system administrator for the password reset procedure.
• When using Windows Server 2003, be sure to match the time set on the SMB server and the
machine.
• When the destination computer is Macintosh, you need to change the account settings of the
shared folder so that file sharing with Windows users becomes available. For information about
necessary accounting settings, consult your system administrator.
• The following is an example of a procedure for Mac OS X 10.6.
Note • It is recommended that users create a dedicated account for data transfer. You can create and
set the account on the dialog box that appears by choosing Apple menu > [System Preferences]
and then clicking [Accounts] icon.
1. From Apple menu, choose [System Preferences], and then click [Sharing].
2. Make sure that [File Sharing] check box is selected, and then click [Options].
3. Select [Share files and folders using SMB].
4. Check the user accounts to enable for file sharing. Enter the user's password, then
click [OK].
5. Click [Done].
Note • For information on how to change the account settings on other version of Mac OS, consult your
system administrator or the official website of Apple Inc.
[Remedy] Execute the authentication operation again.
018-507 [Cause] The authentication failed because the user name or password entered is not correct. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Enter the correct user name or password.
018-508 [Cause] A server error occurred during authentication.
[Remedy] Check the status of the authentication server.
15
523
15 Problem Solving

1)The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because the
specified shared name does not exist.
2)The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because
Invalid characters are used in the specified shared name.
3)The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because
access privilege does not set on the specified shared name when the server is
Macintosh.
[Remedy] 1)Confirm that the specified shared name exits in the destination PC.
2)Take one of the following measures:
- Check whether the following invalid characters are included in the shared name
set in the machine: " / : | < > ; , * ? \ [ ] + =
- Check whether a space character is included at the top or end of the shared name
set in the machine.
- Check whether the shared name set in the machine is specified only by a period.
3)When the destination computer is Macintosh, you need to change the access
privileges for the user for shared folder. For information about necessary accounting
settings, consult your system administrator.
The following is an example of a procedure for Mac OS X 10.6.
Note • It is recommended to create a dedicated account for data transfer. You can create and set the
account on the dialog box that appears by choosing Apple menu > [System Preferences] and then
clicking [Accounts] icon.
1. From Apple menu, choose [System Preferences], and then click [Sharing].
2. Make sure that [File Sharing] check box is selected.
3. Select the folder being shared from folders listed in the [Shared Folders] filed.
4. Choose [Read & Write] as privilege option for the user listed in the [Users] field.
• For information on how to change the access privilege settings on other version of Mac OS,
consult your system administrator or the official website of Apple Inc.
018-547 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because the
number of users logging into the SMB server exceeded the limit when logging in to the
SMB server.
 Confirm how many users can access the shared folder.
 Check whether the number of login users have exceeded the limit.
Problem Solving
018-556 [Cause] Received the "XRXERROR" error detection code from the HTTP server.
[Remedy] 1)Check whether the specified drive and directory is available on the destination HTTP
server for the scanned document.
2)Perform the same operation again. If the problem persists, contact our Customer
Support Center.
018-557 [Cause] The specified file name contains invalid characters.
15 [Remedy] Modify the file name. Make sure that invalid characters are not contained in the
destination file name for the scanned document.
018-558 [Cause] Received an error code from HTTP server.
[Remedy] 1)Check whether the specified directory exists on the destination HTTP server for the
scanned document.
2)Check whether the specified file exists on the HTTP server.
018-559 [Cause] The same file name already exists.
[Do Not Save] is selected when duplicate file name exists.
[Remedy] Select any option other than [Do Not Save] in [File Name Conflict].
524
Error Code

018-560 [Cause] A user authentication error occurred. (Received HTTP Status 401).
[Remedy] Check the followings:

The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by PC.
 Login name

Login password
 The HTTP server name
 The HTTP server path name
018-561 [Cause] The hostname or the script storage location is not correct. (Received HTTP Status 404).
 The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by PC.

The HTTP server name
018-562 [Cause] A client-side error occurred. (Received HTTP Status 4xx other than 401 and 404).

 The server settings
018-563 [Cause] A server-side error occurred. (Received HTTP Status 5xx).

 The server settings
018-564 [Cause] DNS resolution for the specified hostname failed.

 The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is registered on the DNS
server.
 The machine is connected to the DNS server.

The address of the DNS server is set on the machine.
018-565 [Cause] DNS resolution for the proxy server name set on the machine failed.

The proxy server name set on the machine is registered on the DNS server.

The machine is connected to the DNS server.

The address of the DNS server is set on the machine.
Problem Solving
018-566 [Cause] Unable to connect to the HTTP server.

The network cable connection on the machine
018-567 [Cause] The followings may be the cause:

 The communication is disconnected while reading or writing due to some reason.

Close process of the file failed due to some reason 15
[Remedy] Check whether the destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by
PC.
525
15 Problem Solving

018-568 [Cause] An SSL/TLS connection error occurred.

 SSL settings for the HTTP server is correct.

The HTTP server name
018-569 [Cause] The SSL server certificate may have a problem.

[Remedy] 1)Check whether the destination HTTP server for the scanned document is accessible by
PC.
2)Check whether the SSL server certificate is registered on the HTTP server.
3)Check whether the SSL server certificate is valid.
Check the followings:
- the certificate is unexpired
- the time set on the machine is correct
- the certificate is not on the discard list
4)Check the certificate path to the SSL server certificate, and import the required CA
certificate.
5)If the SSL server certificated is not registered on the HTTP server, disable the [Verify
Remote Server Certificate] setting.
018-570 [Cause] A client certificate authentication error occurred on the HTTP server.
 The SSL client certificate is registered on the machine.
 The device certificate is correctly registered on the HTTP server.

[Remedy] Perform the same operation again. If the problem persists, contact our Customer
Support Center.
018-572 [Cause] The specified context name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified context name is correct.
018-573 [Cause] The specified connection name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified connection name is correct.
018-574 [Cause] The specified volume name contains invalid characters.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Check whether the specified volume name is correct.

018-575 [Cause] The specified user name or password contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified user name or password is correct.
018-576 [Cause] The specified path name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified path name is correct.
15 018-577 [Cause] The specified file name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified file name is correct.
018-578 [Cause] The specified server or tree name does not exist.
 The network cable connection on the machine
 The NetWare server is accessible by PC

The NetWare server or tree name
Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
526
Error Code

018-579 [Cause] The hard disk on the NetWare server may be full.

The NetWare server is accessible by PC
 The free space of the server to store data

018-580 [Cause] The specified volume name does not exist on the NetWare server.

The NetWare server is accessible by PC
 The volume name

018-581 [Cause] The specified directory path does not exist on the NetWare server.

The directory path name
The login user does not have Open rights to the file.

The login user does not have Create rights to create a file.

The login user does not have Access rights to the directory.

The login user does not have Read rights to the file.
 The login user does not have Write rights to the file.
 The login user does not have Delete rights of the directory or file.
 Made a delete request to the directories or files but all of them are read-only.

Made a delete request to the directories or files but some of them are read-only.
[Remedy] 1)Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
2)Check the user has the following rights.
- Open rights to the file
- Create rights to a file
- Access rights to the directory
- Read rights to the file
- Write rights to the file
- Delete rights to the directory or file Problem Solving
3)Run DSREPAIR at the server console on the NetWare server.
018-583 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred on the NetWare server.
[Remedy] 1)Check the status of the HDD on the NetWare server.
2)Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
The communication is disconnected while reading or writing due to some reason
15

Close process of the file failed due to some reason
527
15 Problem Solving


The specified folder or file is in use by another user
 Made a delete request to the directories or files though some of them are in use by
another user

Made a delete request to the directories or files though all of them are in use by
another user
2)Check the status of use of the other users.
018-586 [Cause] Login to the NetWare server was denied.
 Login user name
 Login password

Volume name
 Server or tree name

Context name
018-587 [Cause] There are duplicate file names.
[Do Not Save] is set as a handling method when names are duplicated for scanned files.
[Remedy] Set the process to be executed in case of a file name duplication to other than [Do Not
Save].
018-588 [Cause] Detected an incorrect filing policy (when add was selected) after connecting to the
server.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed in case of a file name
duplication, confirm that the file format is not multi-page.
018-589 [Cause] Failed to access the NEXTNAME.DAT file.
018-590 [Cause] A file or folder of the same name was detected on the server.
1)Execute the operation again by not accessing the same folder or the same server from
multiple machines.
Problem Solving
2)If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
018-591 [Cause] When the machine was connected to the server and the name of a file or folder on the
server was determined, the suffix of the name of the file or folder exceeded the limit
value.
[Remedy] Change the file name or forwarding destination folder of the scan server. Also try
moving or deleting the files within the forwarding destination folder.
15 018-592 [Cause] Failed to delete a scan lock folder.
1)If an existing lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the forwarding destination, delete it
manually, and then execute the job again.
2)Confirm that there is a folder with the name specified.
018-593 [Cause] Failed to create the scan lock folder.
[Remedy] If an existing lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the forwarding destination, delete it
manually, and then execute the job again.
528
Error Code

018-595 [Cause] Multiple entries containing the same smart card information were detected in the
database of the LDAP server.
[Remedy] Correct the temporary user entries of the LDAP server so that they do not contain the
same smart card information.
018-596 [Cause] An error occurred during LDAP server authentication.
Support Center.
018-700 [Cause] The network for Web Applications is being initialized.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again.
018-701 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation. The
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "1" (operations error) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] Check whether [LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings] under [Remote Authentication/
Directory Service] has been set correctly. Or, the server may have a problem. Consult
your network administrator.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "2" (protocol error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server settings, and execute the
operation again.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "3" (time limit exceeded) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] Change the search conditions/start position to narrow the search range, and execute
the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, consult your network administrator.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "4" (size limit exceeded) for Address Book
query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "5" (compare false) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] The result may differ from the specified content. Have your network administrator Problem Solving
confirm the LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "6" (compare true) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The desired result has been achieved. No problem occurred.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "7" (specified authentication method not
supported) for Address Book query.
15
[Remedy] The LDAP server does not support the specified authentication method. Change the
authentication method. Consult your system administrator for another method.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "8" (strong authentication required) for
Address Book query.
[Remedy] Check whether the authentication settings are correct. Consult your system
administrator about the authentication, and execute the operation again.
529
15 Problem Solving

018-709 [Cause] An error occurred for external access (Web Applications).
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures depending on the setting:
For IPv4 environment
 Check the IPv4 address of the machine.
 Confirm whether the network cable is connected correctly.
 Check the address of the DHCP server.
For IPv6 environment


Confirm whether the global address distributed from an IPv6 router is assigned to the
IPv6 address of the machine.
 Confirm whether the network cable is connected correctly.

Confirm whether the IPv6 router is set correctly.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "10" (referral) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] No registered items were found in the specified retrieval range. Have your network
administrator confirm the authentication settings.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "11" (admin limit exceeded) for Address
Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the operational status of the server.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "12" (unavailable extension) for Address
Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "13" (confidentiality required) for Address
Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "14" (SASL bind in progress) for Address
Book query.
[Remedy] Retry after waiting for a while. If the error still is not resolved, consult your network
administrator.
Problem Solving
018-715 [Cause] Kerberos server authentication protocol error. There is no authentication method which
supports both the machine authentication and Kerberos server authentication.
 Set the appropriate authentication method in the Kerberos server.
 Disable the FIPS140 validation mode of the machine.
15 018-716 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation. The
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "16" (no such attribute) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an attribute problem. Have your network administrator confirm the
LDAP server status.
530
Error Code

server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "17" (undefined type) for Address Book
query.
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "18" (inappropriate matching) for Address
Book query.
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "19" (constraint violation) for Address Book
query.
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "20" (attribute exists) for Address Book
query.
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "21" (invalid syntax) for Address Book
query.
LDAP server status.
018-722 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of a network error.
[Remedy] Check that the network cable is connected properly. Also check that the environmental
settings are adequate.
018-723 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of a certificate error.
[Remedy] Check that the root CA certificate registered to the machine and the certificate
verification settings are correct.
018-724 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of an SSL communication
error. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Check the SSL settings.
018-725 [Cause] The user password set in the Kerberos server expired.
[Remedy] Extend the expiration date of the password.
018-726 [Cause] The root (or intermediate) CA certificate on the smart card is not registered on the
machine.
[Remedy] Register the root (or intermediate) CA certificate on the smart card on the machine. 15
018-727 [Cause] Authentication by the Kerberos server failed.
[Remedy] Check the certificate on the smart card, and then update the certificate if it is invalid or
revoked. Also, check whether the certificate is enabled in the server.
531
15 Problem Solving

018-728 [Cause] Authentication by the Kerberos server failed.

When the root CA certificate of the KDC certificate is not registered, register the root
CA certificate.
 When the KDC certificate is revoked, update the KDC certificate of the server.

Confirm that the address of the Kerberos server set in the machine and the address
on the KDC certificate of the server match.
018-729 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of a time out error.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the procedure again. If the problem still exists even
after the remedy, check that the network cable is connected properly. Also check that
the environmental settings are adequate.
settings are adequate. If the problem still remains even when there is nothing wrong,
018-731 [Cause] The printing job was canceled due to insufficient memory capacity for the hard disk.
[Remedy] Check the hard disk capacity, and delete unnecessary data.
Complete all the active jobs, and then execute the operation again.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "32" (no such object) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] The specified e-mail address does not exist. Confirm the e-mail address you entered or
the e-mail address registered on the LDAP server.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "33" (incorrect alias) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a name problem. Have your network administrator confirm the
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "34" (invalid DN syntax) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a name problem. Confirm the user name and password to cancel
an incorrect password. If the error still is not resolved, have your network administrator
Problem Solving
confirm the authentication settings and status of the LDAP server.

server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "35" (object is leaf) for Address Book query.
LDAP server status.
15 018-736 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation. The
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "36" (alias differencing problem) for
Address Book query.
LDAP server status.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the problem still exists even after the remedy, contact
532
Error Code

settings are adequate.
018-740 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of a certificate error.
[Remedy] Check that the root CA certificate registered to the machine and the certificate
verification settings are correct.
018-743 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of a proxy connection
error.
[Remedy] Check that the proxy server settings are adequate.
018-744 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because DNS failed to resolve the
name.
[Remedy] Check that the DNS settings are adequate.
018-745 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because of a proxy connection
error.
[Remedy] Check that the proxy server settings are adequate.
018-746 [Cause] The machine cannot connect to Google Cloud Print, because DNS failed to resolve the
name.
[Remedy] Check that the DNS settings are adequate.
018-747 [Cause] The SMB server of the destination computer cannot be found while transferring data
using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
 Confirm the connection of the network cable.
 Check whether the IP address is correct when an IP address is used for the transferring
destination address.

For communications over subnet, confirm the WINS server settings, and check Problem Solving
whether the server address can be resolved correctly.

Confirm the file Sharing service (communicating via port 137(UDP), port 138 (UDP),
and port 139 (TCP)) is authorized for the transferring destination server, router
between the machine and server, and virus security software or firewall software on
the forwarding destination server.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "48" (inappropriate authentication) for
Address Book query. 15
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a security problem. Have your network administrator confirm the
authentication settings on the LDAP server.
533
15 Problem Solving

server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "49" (invalid credentials) for Address Book
query. The address search was performed with an incorrect authentication user name
and password.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a security problem. Confirm your authentication user name and
password to cancel an incorrect login name. If the error still is not resolved, have your
network administrator confirm the authentication settings on the LDAP server.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "50" (insufficient access) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a security problem. Have your network administrator confirm the
access rights for the LDAP server.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "51" (busy) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The service has a problem. Retry after waiting for a while. If the error still is not resolved,
consult your network administrator.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "52" (unavailable) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a service problem. Retry after waiting for a while. If the error still is
not resolved, consult your network administrator.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "53" (unwilling to perform) for Address
Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a service problem. Retry after waiting for a while. If the error still is
not resolved, consult your network administrator.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "54" (loop detected) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a service problem. Have your network administrator confirm the
operational status of the service on the LDAP server.
018-755 [Cause] The SMB server specified as the destination does not respond to the machine while
transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Confirm the file Sharing service (communicating via port 139 (TCP), and port 445 (TCP))
is authorized for the transferring destination server, router between the machine and
Problem Solving
server, and virus security software or firewall software on the forwarding destination
server.
018-756 [Cause] A response from the server are not received within the specified time while transferring
data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] When the transferring destination server belongs to the ActiveDirectory domain, check
whether the communication between the destination server and domain controller is
15 delayed or not by accessing the destination server from the PC client. If it takes time,
consult your System Administrator.
018-757 [Cause] Failed to name resolution of the SMB server specified as destination to transfer data
 Confirm the DNS server address is correctly set.
 If the connection with the DNS server is appropriate, confirm the transferring
destination server name is registered to the DNS server.
534
Error Code

018-758 [Cause] The save location or file name of a scanned image has a problem while transferring
data using SMB of the Scan to PC service. Probable cause is that the specified save
location does not exist on the server.

Check whether the save location is correct.
 Check whether the specified folder name can be used in the SMB server.
018-759 [Cause] Invalid characters are used for the save location or file name of a scanned image while
[Remedy] Check the followings for the save location or file name of a scanned image set to the
machine.

Confirm the save location name does not include the following 10 invalid characters:“
/ : | < > ; , * ?.
 Confirm the file name does not include the following 11 invalid characters: “ / : | < > ;
, * ? \.
 Confirm there is no space in the head and end of a string of characters.

Confirm there is no period in the head and end of a string of characters.
018-760 [Cause] Because the specified save location has the Distributed File System (DFS) settings, it is
linked to another shared folder while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service
[Remedy] 1)Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] > [Distributed File System] on the
SMB server.
2)Select the specified save location from the left side frame of the [Distributed File
System] window, and then confirm the target information displayed on the right side
frame of the window.
3)Specify the SMB server, shared name, and save location based on the information you
confirmed in step 2.
018-761 [Cause] The memory stored in the saving destination PC is insufficient while transferring data
[Remedy] Check the usage condition of the memory. If the remaining capacity of the machine's
memory is low, exit out of the applications which are not used.
018-762 [Cause] A time out error occurred because it takes time to receive a response from the saving
destination PC while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Check whether the virus security software is working on the saving destination PC. Some
software takes time to receive a response from the PC.
If the software is working, reduce the number of document pages to scale down the file Problem Solving
size.
018-763 [Cause] The character code conversion is failed in the machine while transferring data using
SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Confirm the server name, share name, and pass name does not include the letters
unique to the machine model. If the letters are included, change the name not to
include the letters.
15
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "64" (naming violation) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an update problem. Have your network administrator confirm the
LDAP server status.
535
15 Problem Solving

server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "65" (object class violation) for Address
Book query.
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "66" (not allowed on nonleaf) for Address
Book query.
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "67" (not allowed on RDN) for Address
Book query.
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "68" (already exists) for Address Book
query.
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "69" (no object class modifications) for
Address Book query.
LDAP server status.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "70" (results too large) for Address Book
query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "71" (affecting multiple DSAs) for Address
Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
Problem Solving
018-772 [Cause] Failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because the specified shared
name does not exist.
[Remedy] Confirm that the specified shared name exits in the destination PC.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "71" (affecting multiple DSAs) for Address
15 Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "80" (unknown error) for Address Book
query.
536
Error Code

018-781 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the Address Book operation.
Connection to the server cannot be established for the Address Book query.

Confirm the network cable connection.
 If the network cable connection has no problem, confirm the active status of the
target server.

Check whether the server name has been correctly set for [LDAP Server/Directory
Service Settings] under [Remote Authentication/Directory Service].
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "82" (program error or SASL authentication
error) for Address Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "83" (encoding error) for Address Book
query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "84" (decoding error) for Address Book
query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "85" (timeout) for Address Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "86" (unknown authentication method) for
Address Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "87" (search filter error) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] Confirm the search conditions set on Address Book. If the error still is not resolved,
consult your network administrator. Problem Solving
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "88" (user cancelled operation) for Address
Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "89" (incorrect parameter) for Address
Book query. 15
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "90" (no memory) for Address Book query.
537
15 Problem Solving

server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "91" (server connection error) for Address
Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "92" (unsupported feature) for Address
Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "93" (no results returned) for Address Book
query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "94" (no more results) for Address Book
query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "95" (results remaining) for Address Book
query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "96" (client loop detected) for Address
Book query.
server returned RFC2251 Result Message No "97" (referral limit exceeded) for Address
Book query.
021-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the IC Card Reader (optional).
021-211 [Remedy] Check the connection between the IC Card Reader and the machine. Switch off the
021-212 machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the
machine power. If the error still is not resolved, the IC Card Reader may be defective.
Connect an unbroken IC Card Reader and execute the operation again.
Problem Solving
021-213 [Cause] There is a problem with the unit price table settings for the related product.
[Remedy] The system administrator should exports the unit price table and modify it using
CentreWare Internet Services. Set a number from 1 to 9,999,999 and import the table
modified to the machine.
021-214 [Cause] An error occurred during encrypted communication between the machine and the USB
15 memory device.
on the machine power. Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
021-215 [Cause] The accounting/billing device connected does not match the device set on the machine.
[Remedy] Change the setting on the machine or connect the correct accounting/billing device,
and switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then
538
Error Code

Support Center.
021-401 [Cause] The number of authentication devices such as IC Card Reader (optional) connected
exceeds the setting value.
[Remedy] Disconnect the authentication device connected.
021-402 [Cause] The address of the proxy server name is incorrect.

LAN cable connection
 DNS server address setting

The default gateway setting
 The subnet mask setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings, there may be a network
failure or the proxy server settings may be changed or failed. Consult your system
administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
021-403 [Cause] Failed to resolve the address of the EP center of Fuji Xerox or EP communication
aggregate server.
 LAN cable connection

DNS server address setting
 The default gateway setting

The subnet mask setting
administrator.
Support Center.
021-404 [Cause] Failed to connect the server or the proxy server. One of the probable cause is that the
power of these servers is switched off.
[Remedy] Check the followings: Problem Solving

DNS server address setting
 EP proxy server setting (For BB-Direct configuration)
administrator.
15
Support Center.
Also, when FQDN of the EP communication aggregate server is changed for the EP
communication aggregate server configuration, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-405 [Cause] An error occurred in the SSL communication with the external server.
Center.
539
15 Problem Solving

021-406 [Cause] The SSL certificate of the external server is not correct.
Center.
021-407 [Cause] Failed to authorize the proxy server while connecting to the EP system via the
Internet.(Receiving HTTP status code 407)

The login user of the EP proxy server
 The password of the EP proxy server
administrator.
Support Center.
021-408 [Cause] A time out error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the Internet.




EP proxy server setting (For BB-Direct configuration)
administrator.
Support Center.
Also, when FQDN of the EP communication aggregate server is changed for the EP
communication aggregate server configuration, contact our Customer Support Center.
Center.
021-410 [Cause] A communication error occurred while connecting (acquiring the EP certificate) to CA
Problem Solving
021-411 via the Internet.

15  EP proxy server setting (For BB-Direct configuration)
administrator.
Support Center.
540
Error Code

021-412 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the Internet. There is a problem
with the address of the EP proxy server name.

The LAN cable connection
 The DNS server address settings

 The EP proxy server URL setting
failure. Consult your system administrator.
Support Center.
021-413 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the Internet.
021-416 [Remedy] Check the followings:

Support Center.

 The EP proxy server setting
Support Center.
Problem Solving
021-415 [Cause] An error occurred while the SSL/TLS communication to the EP system via the Internet.
 The LAN cable connection

The EP proxy server setting 15
Support Center.
541
15 Problem Solving

021-417 [Cause] Failed to authorize the proxy server while connecting to the EP system via the Internet.

The EP proxy server URL setting
 The login user of the EP proxy server

The password of the EP proxy server
administrator. If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved, contact
021-418 [Cause] There is a problem with the format of the proxy setting file.
021-419 [Remedy] The format of the proxy setting file registered in the HTTP server may be incorrect.
Consult your system administrator.
If the proxy setting file works normally but the error still is not resolved, contact our
021-420 [Cause] A time out error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the Internet
Failed to obtain the proxy setting.



The EP proxy server setting screen on CentreWare Internet Services
 The working condition of the HTTP proxy server in which the proxy setting file is
registered
Support Center.
021-421 [Cause] A time out error occurred while connecting to the EP system via the Internet
Failed to obtain the proxy setting.

Problem Solving

The EP proxy server setting screen on CentreWare Internet Services

The working condition of the HTTP proxy server in which the proxy setting file is
registered
15 If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
021-422 [Cause] The proxy setting file is not found while connecting to the EP system via the Internet.
[Remedy] Check the EP proxy server setting screen on CentreWare Internet Services.
If the error still is not resolved after checking the setting, the proxy setting file may not
be registered. Consult your system administrator.
542
Error Code

021-423 [Cause] The size of the proxy setting file is too large. Failed to obtain the proxy setting file.
If the error still is not resolved after checking the setting, check the proxy setting file size.
When the size exceeds 64 KB, keep the file size down.
021-424 [Cause] The URL of the proxy setting file to connect with the proxy server is incorrect while
connecting to the EP system via the Internet.
If the error still is not resolved after checking the setting, consult your system
administrator about the URL of the proxy setting file.
Otherwise, check the URL of proxy setting file of the DHCP or DNS server as follows:
 The DHCP option is "252".
 The SRV record of the host "wpad.(domain name)" is correct.
021-425 [Cause] A time out error occurred while connecting to the DHCP or DNS server via the Internet
to obtain the URL (CURL) of the proxy setting file.


The EP proxy server setting (CURL)
 The working condition of the DHCP or DNS server in which the proxy setting file is
registered
Support Center.
021-426 [Cause] The URL (CURL) of the proxy setting file is not found on the DHCP or DNS server while
connecting to the EP system via the Internet to obtain the URL (CURL) of the proxy
setting file.
[Remedy] Check the followings: Problem Solving
 The EP proxy server setting

The URL of the proxy setting file is registered on the DHCP or DNS server correctly
021-500 [Cause] The following operation is performed when the Auditron mode for the Fax service is
enabled.

While a Send Fax job is processing, another job that the Auditron mode is enabled
starts.
 While another job that the Auditron mode is enabled is processing, a Send Fax job
starts.
15
[Remedy] Wait for the active job finishes, and start the next job.
021-501 [Cause] The communication with the EP system via the internet failed.
Center.
543
15 Problem Solving



administrator.
Support Center.

administrator.
Support Center.
021-505 [Cause] The SSL/TLS communication with the EP server failed.
Center.
021-506 [Cause] The SSL Certificate for the EP server is incorrect.
Problem Solving
15  The login user of the EP proxy server

The password of the EP proxy server
administrator.
Support Center.
544
Error Code



administrator.
Support Center.
021-509 [Cause] An error occurred while communicating with the EP server.
Center.
021-510 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to EP system via the Internet.
021-511 [Cause] The machine has already been specified with the EP server.
021-513 on the machine power. Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
021-514 contact our Customer Support Center.
021-515 [Cause] The settings of the machine on the EP server are incorrect.
021-518 [Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
021-519 contact our Customer Support Center.
021-521 [Remedy] Check the followings: Problem Solving
021-522  LAN cable connection

Check the following for BB-Direct configuration:
EP proxy server setting
15
failure or the DNS server failure. Consult your system administrator. If the network
works normally but the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
[Remedy] Enable the SOAP port, switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact
545
15 Problem Solving

021-528
021-529 [Cause] The machine attempted to upgrade the software of EP system via the Internet, but the
latest software version is already installed.
021-530 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to EP system via the Internet.
021-531 [Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
021-532 [Cause] The machine attempted to upgrade the software of EP system via the Internet, but the
021-533 software upgrade failed.
021-534 [Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
021-535
021-536 [Cause] The latest software version is not installed.
[Remedy] Reboot the machine and update the software to the latest version. (The machine
automatically reboots again.) Then, execute the operation again.
021-537 [Cause] The software upgrade from the control panel was canceled since another reserved
upgrade was in progress.
[Remedy] Wait for the active upgrade to finish, and then execute the operation again.
021-538 [Cause] The software upgrade was canceled since the machine was in use at the reserved time.
[Remedy] Check with your system administrators. If the system administrators have not reserved
the update, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-539 [Cause] The software upgrade was canceled since the machine power was off at the reserved
time.
[Remedy] Check with your system administrators. If the system administrators have not reserved
the update, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-540 [Cause] The SW upgrade was canceled since the machine power was turned off while
downloading the update file.
[Remedy] If necessary, execute the operation again.
Problem Solving
021-541 [Cause] The SW upgrade cannot be started since an incorrect setting is done to the machine.
[Remedy] If necessary, execute the operation again.
15 Center.
[Remedy] Confirm the contract period of the EP system. When the error is displayed during the
contract period, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-700 [Cause] The USB cable is unplugged or the USB interface may be out of order.
[Remedy] Confirm that the USB cable is connected and switch off the machine power, make sure
that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
546
Error Code

021-701 [Cause] The USB interface error occurred.
[Remedy] Retry after waiting for a while or confirm that the USB cable is connected and switch off
the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the
machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-731 [Cause] While using the related product, you attempted to make color copies when the use of
color is restricted.
021-732 [Cause] The card has come off, or its charge (including e-money) or message rate is insufficient.
Otherwise, you are not authenticated.
[Remedy] Insert or charge the card (e-money) sufficiently. Otherwise, log in to the machine (ex.
using the smart card or control panel).
021-733 [Cause] The use of color is restricted or the number of color pages reached the maximum.
021-750 [Cause] Check whether the phone line is connected correctly and wait for a while, and then
021-751 execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
021-770
021-771 [Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center by telephone.
021-772
Problem Solving
15
547
15 Problem Solving

024-345
024-346
024-347
024-348
024-349
024-350
024-351
024-352
024-353
024-354
024-355
024-356
024-357
024-358
024-359
024-360
024-361
024-362
024-363
024-364
024-365
024-366
024-367
024-368
024-370
024-371
024-372
024-373
024-375
024-376
Problem Solving
024-700 [Cause] The memory capacity or hard disk required to use the optional feature is not installed.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, and then switch it on again after the touch screen goes
out. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
024-701 [Cause] The specified paper type is not compatible with the Face Up/Down Output setting
selected.
[Remedy] Specify a paper type that is compatible with the Face Up/Down setting.
15 024-702 [Cause] Paper jam occurred while [When Paper Jam Occurs] is set to [Delete Job] in [Print Service
Settings].
[Remedy] Remove the jammed paper, and then try printing again.
024-704 [Cause] An error occurred while receiving a print job from Denshi-Pen.
Support Center.
548
Error Code

024-705 [Cause] The template of the specified force annotation was not found in the machine.
[Remedy] Delete the document in the folder of the machine, and then select [Store to Folder]
again from the print driver to store the document.
024-706 [Cause] A print job from Denshi-Pen is sent when [Force Watermark - Client Print] or [Force
Secure Watermark] > [Client Print] is set to [On].
[Remedy] Set [Allow User to Disable Active Settings] to [Disable Active Settings] under [Tools]
>[Authentication / Security Settings].
024-742 [Cause] Booklet printing was specified for printer properties, but the number of print pages for
the job exceeded the maximum number allowed for booklet creation.
[Remedy] Change the printer properties setting to split the pages appropriately to create separate
volumes, or to cancel the booklet creation setting.
024-746 [Cause] The specified paper type is not compatible with the specified paper size, paper tray,
output tray, or 2 sided printing.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data.
024-747 [Cause] Incompatible print parameters are used. The combination of the specified features such
as Document Size, Paper Size, Paper Tray, 2 sided printing, and Output Tray is
incompatible.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data, and try printing again.
024-748 [Cause] The number of digits specified in [Bates Stamp - Number of Digits] screen does not
match the value specified in [Starting Number].
[Remedy] Set [Bates Stamp - Number of Digits] to the value specified in [Starting Number] or to
[Auto Assign].
024-775 [Cause] Booklet printing was specified for printer properties, but the number of print pages for
the job exceeded the maximum number allowed for booklet creation.
[Remedy] Change the printer properties setting to split the pages appropriately to create separate
volumes, or to cancel the booklet creation setting.
025-596 [Cause] An error occurred with the hard disk.
025-597 [Remedy] Replace the hard disk.
026-400 [Cause] More than two devices are connected to the USB host port.
[Remedy] Disconnect the third or more devices so that the number of connected devices becomes
two. If the error still is not resolved, switch off the machine power, make sure that the
touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. Problem Solving
026-401 [Cause] The image may be misaligned during processing the print job.
on the machine power. When the misalignment is large, contact our Customer Support
Center.
026-700 [Cause] By Address Book operation, the machine received an unsupported protocol from the
LDAP server.
15
Support Center.
026-701 [Cause] The number of queries submitted to the Address Book exceeded the machine's
processing capability.
[Remedy] Wait for a while and execute the operation again. If the only one query is being
submitted to the Address Book, the machine's software may be defective. Contact our
549
15 Problem Solving

026-702 [Cause] The number of accesses from the LDAP server to the machine by Address Book
operation exceeded the machine's processing capability.
[Remedy] Wait for a while and execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact
026-703 [Cause] Authentication is canceled when adding documents during faxing or scanning.
[Remedy] Authenticate when adding documents.
026-704 [Cause] An error occurred during processing DocuWorks documents.
[Remedy] Print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from DocuWorks Viewer.
026-705 [Cause] Unable to process for DocuWorks documents because of insufficient memory space.
[Remedy] Change the [Image Quality] setting from [High Resolution] to [High Quality], or from
[High Quality] to [Standard]. Or, add memory. If the error still is not resolved, increase
memory. If the problem persists even after adding memory to the maximum capacity,
print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from DocuWorks Viewer.
026-706 [Cause] Attempted to print a DocuWorks document of which printing is prohibited.
[Remedy] Release the print prohibited settings using DocuWorks Viewer, and then execute the
operation again.
026-707 [Cause] When processing password-protected DocuWorks documents, the password entered
does not match that of the DocuWorks document.
[Remedy] Set the correct password on ContentsBridge.
026-708 [Cause] Exceeded the maximum limit for the scan data size that can be stored for one job with
Store & Send Link.
1)Reduce the resolution (scan quality) of the scan parameters and execute the
operation again.
2)Reduce the image with magnification of the scan parameters (such as A3 > A4) and
then execute the operation again.
3)If [Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size] is set to a small value, increase the value.
026-709 [Cause] The capacity of the hard disk that can be used to store scan data with Store & Send Link
is insufficient.
[Remedy] Wait around one day, and when capacity becomes available as a result of the
automatic deletion of files, execute the operation again.
026-710 [Cause] The machine has received and e-mail encrypted by S/MIME, but does not support the
Problem Solving
encryption method.

Ask the sender to send the e-mail encrypted by 3DES.
 Disable the FIPS140 validation mode of the machine.
026-711 [Cause] Exceeded the maximum size allowed for a multi-page file when scanning.
15 [Remedy] Take one of the following measures:

1)Reduce the resolution (scan quality) of the scan parameters and execute the
operation again.
2)Reduce the number of document pages and then execute the operation again.
The maximum size is 2 GB for TIFF, XPS, and PDF, and 1 GB for XDW.
026-712 [Cause] An error occurred while operating from CentreWare Internet Services.
[Remedy] Retry after waiting for a while.
550
Error Code

026-718 [Cause] Incompatible print parameters are used. The combination of the specified features such
as Document Size, Paper Size, Paper Tray, 2 sided printing, and Output Tray is
incompatible.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data, and try printing again.
026-719 [Cause] An error occurred while operating the Store to USB service.
[Remedy] Wait for a while and execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact
026-720 [Cause] The capacity of the USB memory device of the recipient is insufficient while performing
the Store to USB service.
[Remedy] Confirm the amount of available space.
026-721 [Cause] An error occurred while operating the Store to USB service.
[Remedy] Check the following conditions:
 The USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory slot.
 The USB memory device is accessible from your computer.

The unencrypted USB memory device is used.
026-722 [Cause] The USB memory device is not initialized.
[Remedy] Initialize the USB memory device on a computer with the following file format, and then
 Supported file formats: FAT12, FAT16 (FAT), FAT32
Note • NTFS is not supported.

• A software-encrypted USB memory device is not supported.
026-723 [Cause] The machine failed to access to the medium.
[Remedy] 1)Check that the medium is not inserted or removed, or the other medium is not
inserted, while the machine is referencing the medium.
2)Check that the file in the medium can be accessed via a computer.
026-726 [Cause] The machine configuration information at a print job specification does not match the
actual machine configuration.
[Remedy] Modify the machine configuration information in the print driver screen to match the Problem Solving
actual machine configuration.
1)Unusable characters are included in the path name of the file location.
2)The length of the path name of the file location (including extension) exceeds the
number of characters available.
1)Change the path name of the file location. 15
2)Set the path in the range of 1 to 255 bytes.
026-730 [Cause] The size of paper loaded in the specified tray is unknown.
[Remedy] Check whether the paper guides are correctly positioned in the tray, and then try again.
026-736 [Cause] An internal error occurred while sending the scanned document to the HTTP server.
Support Center.
551
15 Problem Solving

026-737 [Cause] Unable to send the scanned document to the HTTP server because a network error
occurred.
[Remedy] Consult your network administrator whether the network or the server have any
problem.
026-738 [Cause] The machine failed to send scanned document data to the HTTP server because Web
application is closed during it.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again.
026-739 [Cause] When authentication succeeds, all jobs are canceled because there is a pending job.
027-400 [Cause] Communications with the machine failed.
[Remedy] If other messages are displayed, confirm their content. If the control panel is being
operated, terminate the operation. If remote access is being executed, wait until it
completes. If the error still is not resolved, switch off the machine power, make sure that
the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power.
If the problem persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
027-442 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 already network exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Auto Stateless Address 1] for IPv6 on the machine, or the IP address of
IPv6 on the network device, to remove the duplication of addresses.
027-443 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 already exists.
027-444 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 already exists.
027-445 [Cause] IP address for IPv6 set manually is incorrect.
[Remedy] Set the IP address correctly.
027-446 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 set manually already exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Manually Configured IPv6 Address] on the machine, or the IP address of
027-447 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 network already exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Link-local Address] for IPv6 on the machine, or the IP address of IPv6 on
Problem Solving
the network device, to remove the duplication of addresses.

027-452 [Cause] IP address of IPv4 already exists.
[Remedy] Change the IP address of IPv4 set on the machine or the IP address of IPv46 on the
network device.
027-500 [Cause] Unable to connect to the SMTP server.
15 [Remedy] Specify the SMTP server name correctly or specify the server by using its IP address.
027-501 [Cause] A POP server error occurred.
Support Center.
027-502 [Cause] Failed to log into the POP3 server when using the POP3 protocol.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the user name and password used in the POP3 server are correct on
552
Error Code

027-503 [Cause] A POP server error occurred.
Support Center.
027-504 [Cause] An SMTP server error occurred.
Support Center.
027-513 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because access
to the SMB server was not permitted.
When the server is Macintosh, a folder with the same name as the specified file name
may exist on the server.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator for settings.
027-514 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because an
error has been occurred between the SMB server and the DNS server.
[Remedy] Check the following conditions:
 The SMB server is connected to the DNS server.
 The SMB server name is registered on the DNS server.
error has been occurred.
[Remedy] Take the following measures:
 Set the DNS server address.
 Set the target SMB server address using IP address.

1)The SMB server of the destination computer cannot be found while transferring data
using SMB of the Scan to PC service (TCP/IP session establishment failed).
2)The SMB server specified as the destination does not respond to the machine while
3)Failed to name resolution of the SMB server specified as destination to transfer data
1)Confirm the connection of the network cable.
- For communications over subnet, confirm the WINS server settings, and check
whether the server address can be resolved correctly.
Problem Solving
- File Sharing service (communicating via port 137 (UDP), port 138 (UDP), and port
139 (TCP)) is authorized for the Firewall settings of the destination SMB server.
2)Check whether the file sharing service is enabled on the destination SMB server.
- File Sharing service for Microsoft Network is activated.
If the error still is not resolved, check the following setting.
- NetBIOS over TCP/IP for TCP/IP is activated.
3)Take one of the following measures:
- When the destination SMB server name is specified using the FQDN (example: 15
mypc01.fuji0.co.jp), confirm that the DNS server address is set correctly in the
Connectivity & Network Setup of the machine.
- If the connection with the DNS server has any problem, check whether the
destination server name set in the machine is registered on the DNS server.
553
15 Problem Solving

specified password was incorrect.
When the server is Macintosh, the specified user may not have been registered as a user
who is permitted to use File Sharing.
[Remedy] Confirm the password for the shared folder.
When the server is Macintosh, specify a user who is permitted to use File Sharing.
save location or file name specified for the scanned image had a problem.
 The save location or the file name has a problem.
 The specified save location does not exist on the server.

Invalid characters are used in the save location or the file name.

Because the specified save location has the Distributed File System (DFS) settings, it
is linked to another shared folder.
 Check whether the save location is correct

Check whether the specified file name can be used on the SMB server.

Confirm the Distributed File System (DFS) settings with your system administrator.
To confirm the settings, execute the following procedures:
1)Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] > [Distributed File System] on the
SMB server.
2)Select the specified save location from the left side frame of the [Distributed File
System] window, and then confirm the target information displayed on the right side
frame of the window.
3)Specify the SMB server, shared name, and save location based on the information you
confirmed in step 2.
027-520 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because the file
name or folder name could not be retrieved.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege to the SMB server.
suffix of the name of the file or folder exceeded the limit value.
[Remedy] Change the file name or forwarding destination folder of the scan server. Or, try moving
or deleting the files within the forwarding destination folder.
027-522 [Cause] During forwarding using SMB of the Scan to PC service, the scanned image file could not
Problem Solving
be created on the SMB server because of one of the following reasons:

 The specified file name already exists.

The specified file name has already been used.

The specified file name exists as a directory.
 Invalid characters are used in the file name.
15  Check whether the specified file name can be used in the save location.

Check whether the specified file name has been used by another user.
 Check whether the specified file name has been used for another file or folder.
027-523 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because a
folder could not be created on the SMB server. The specified folder already exists.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified name is being used for another file or folder on the SMB
server.
554
Error Code

027-524 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because a
folder could not be created on the SMB server. The specified folder already exists.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified name is being used for another file or folder on the SMB
server.
027-525 [Cause] During forwarding using SMB of the Scan to PC service, a file could not be deleted from
the SMB server because of one of the following reasons:
 The file does not exist.
 The file is opened.

The specified file name is being used as a directory.
[Remedy] Check whether the file is not being used by another user at the specified save location.
027-526 [Cause] The machine failed to delete the lock directory on the SMB server while transferring
data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it manually, and then
027-527 [Cause] During forwarding using SMB of the Scan to PC service, a folder could not be deleted
from the SMB server because of one of the following reasons:

The file does not exist.
 The directory is not empty.

The specified directory name does not exist.
[Remedy] Check whether the file is not being used by another user at the specified save location.
027-528 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC service because no
space is available at the save location on the SMB server.
[Remedy] Check whether the save location has free space.
unexpected error has been received from the SMB server, or an unexpected internal
error has occurred on the machine.
[Remedy] Log into the server from another computer using the same user name, to confirm
whether a file can be written into the same save location on the server. If the error still
is not resolved, it may be an internal error. Contact our Customer Support Center.
027-530 [Cause] There are duplicate file names.
[Do Not Save] is set as a handling method when names are duplicated for scanned files.
[Remedy] Set the process to be executed in case of a file name duplication to other than [Do Not
Save]. Problem Solving
027-531 [Cause] Detected an incorrect filing policy (when add was selected) after connecting to the
server.
duplication, confirm that the file format is not multi-page.
027-532 [Cause] Failed to access the NEXTNAME.DAT file.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed in case of a file name 15
Support Center.
027-543 [Cause] The SMB server (NetBIOS) name is invalid.
[Remedy] Check whether the server name of the SMB server is correct.
555
15 Problem Solving

027-547 [Cause] SMB protocol error. An invalid character was detected in the specified domain name.
[Remedy] If the error occurred during SMB authentication:
Consult your network administrator for the domain name, and then set it correctly.
Also, check whether the domain name set on the machine is correct.
To confirm the settings, execute the following procedures:
1)Enter the System Administration mode, and select [Tools] > [Connectivity & Network
Setup] > [Remote Authentication/Directory Service] > [SMB Server Settings].
2)Select the SMB server to confirm the domain name.
If the error occurred during transferring using SMB of the Scan to PC service:
Consult your network administrator whether the domain name specified when entering
login name is correct.
To confirm the domain name on the server, execute the following procedures:
1)Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] > [Active Directory Domains and
Trusts] on the Active Directory domain controller.
2)From the left side frame of the [Active Directory Domains and Trusts] window, select
[Active Directory Domains and Trusts] > [Domains]. Right-click [Domains] to select
[Properties].
3)Select [General] tab in the domain properties window, and confirm the domain name
(prior to Windows 2000).
027-548 [Cause] SMB protocol error. An invalid character has been detected in the specified user name.
[Remedy] Ask your network administrator to set the user name with valid characters.
To confirm the user name on the server, execute the following procedures:
1)Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] > [Active Directory Users and
Computers] on the Active Directory domain controller where the user information is
set.
2)Select [Active Directory Users and Computers] > [Server] > [Domains] > [Users] from
the left side frame of the [Active Directory Users and Computers] window, to display
the user information.
3)Right-click the target user from the right side frame of the [Active Directory Domains
and Trusts] window to select [Properties].
4)Select the [Account] tab in the [User Properties] window, and confirm the user name
of [User Log On Name (Prior to Windows 2000)].
027-549 [Cause] SMB protocol error
Problem Solving
Support Center.
027-564 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The SMB server was not found.
[Remedy] Check whether the connection between the authentication server and the machine has
been established via a network.
For example, confirm the following conditions:
 Network cable connection
15  TCP/IP settings

Connection via Port 137 (UDP), Port 138 (UDP), and Port 139 (TCP)
Support Center.
027-566 [Cause] SMB protocol error. SMB (TCP/IP) is not active.
[Remedy] Enter the System Administration mode, and select [Tools] > [Connectivity & Network
Setup] > [Port Settings]. On this screen, confirm the SMB client is set to [Enabled].
556
Error Code

027-569 [Cause] The SMB (TCP/IP) port is not activated.
[Remedy] Enter the System Administration mode, and select [Tools] > [Connectivity & Network
Setup] > [Port Settings]. On this screen, confirm the SMB client is set to [Enabled].
027-576
027-578
027-584 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The SMB server is in shared security mode.
[Remedy] The SMB server may be set on Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me OS. Set the
SMB server on an OS other than Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me OS.
027-585 [Cause] SMB protocol error. Login is disabled at this time.
[Remedy] Confirm the period login permitted with your system administrator.
027-586 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The password has expired.
[Remedy] Obtain a valid password from your system administrator.
027-587 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The password must be changed.
[Remedy] Log into Windows, and change the password. Ask your system administrator to change
the setting so that you do not need to change the login password next time.
027-588 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The user is invalid.
[Remedy] Ask your system administrator to validate the user.
027-589 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The user was locked out.
[Remedy] Ask your system administrator to cancel the lockout status.
027-590 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The user account has expired.
[Remedy] Obtain a valid user account from your system administrator. Or, ask your system
administrator to extend the account expiration date.
027-591 [Cause] SMB protocol error. Users are restricted. A blank password is invalid.
[Remedy] Set the password for the user.
027-700 [Cause] The domain section of the recipient’s e-mail address is a prohibited domain.
[Remedy] Specify a domain that is not prohibited for the domain section of the recipient’s e-mail Problem Solving
address.
027-701 [Cause] The network cable is disconnected from the machine.
[Remedy] Connect the network cable securely if the cable is disconnected.
027-702 [Cause] The specified recipient's certificate does not exist.
[Remedy] Register the certificate for the recipient on the machine.
027-703 [Cause] The specified recipient's certificate has expired. 15
[Remedy] Register a valid certificate for the recipient on the machine.
027-704 [Cause] The CA certificate of the specified recipient's certificate does not exist.
[Remedy] Confirm the path to the recipient's certificate, and register the required CA certificate
on the machine.
027-705 [Cause] The specified recipient's certificate has been revoked.
[Remedy] Specify a valid certificate for the recipient.
557
15 Problem Solving

027-706 [Cause] Unable to find the S/MIME certificate associated with the machine's e-mail address
when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Import the S/MIME certificate corresponding to the mail address to the machine.
027-707 [Cause] The S/MIME certificate associated with the machine's e-mail address has expired when
sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to issue a new S/MIME certificate, and then import the certificate to the
machine.
027-708 [Cause] The S/MIME certificate associated with the machine's e-mail address is not reliable
when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Import a reliable S/MIME certificate to the machine.
027-709 [Cause] The S/MIME certificate associated with the machine's e-mail address has been
discarded when sending e-mail.
[Remedy] Import a new S/MIME certificate to the machine.
027-710 [Cause] No S/MIME certificate is attached to the received e-mail.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the e-mail with an S/MIME certificate attached.
027-711 [Cause] No S/MIME certificate can be obtained from the received e-mail.
[Remedy] Import the sender's S/MIME certificate to the machine, or ask the sender to send S/
MIME signature mail with an S/MIME certificate attached.
027-712 [Cause] The received S/MIME certificate has expired, or is an unreliable certificate.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the e-mail with a valid S/MIME certificate attached.
027-713 [Cause] The received e-mail has been discarded because it may have been altered on its
transmission route.
[Remedy] Inform this error to the sender, and ask the sender to send the e-mail again.
027-714 [Cause] The received e-mail has been discarded because the address in its From field is different
from the mail address in the S/MIME signature mail.
[Remedy] Inform the sender that the mail addresses differ, and ask the sender to send the e-mail
again.
027-715 [Cause] The received S/MIME certificate has not been registered on the machine, or has not
been set for use on the machine.
[Remedy] Import the sender's S/MIME certificate to the machine, or change settings to use the S/
MIME certificate on the machine if the S/MIME certificate has already been registered.
Problem Solving
027-716 [Cause] The received S/MIME certificate has been discarded because the certificate was
unreliable.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the e-mail with a reliable S/MIME certificate attached.
027-717 [Cause] Unable to obtain SMTP server address for e-mail transmissions from the DNS server.
[Remedy] Check whether the DNS server is set correctly.
15 027-720 [Cause] Unable to find the server of an application interface destination.
[Remedy] Confirm the DNS server address. Or, check whether the computer on which the
application (ApeosWare Flow Service) is installed has been registered on the DNS server.
027-721 [Cause] An application interface destination does not exist.
[Remedy] Check whether the application linked (ApeosWare Flow Service) is operating correctly.
027-722 [Cause] The jobs timed out during connection with an application interface destination.
[Remedy] Try processing the job flow again.
558
Error Code

027-723 [Cause] Authentication at the application interface destination (ApeosWare Flow Service)
failed.
[Remedy] Confirm the user name and password that is used when creating a job flow.
027-724 [Cause] An application interface destination (ApeosWare Flow Service) could not be accessed.
[Remedy] Check whether ApeosWare Flow Service is operating correctly. If it is operating correctly,
confirm the log.
027-725 [Cause] A job operation failed using an application interface.
[Remedy] Check whether the application linked (ApeosWare Flow Service) is operating correctly.
If it is operating correctly, confirm the log. If it is not operating, confirm the network
environment.
027-726 [Cause] The status of the application interface destination (ApeosWare Flow Service) is
unknown.
[Remedy] Check whether ApeosWare Flow Service is operating correctly. If it is operating correctly,
confirm the log.
027-727 [Cause] A parameter is illegal during an application interface.
[Remedy] Try processing the job flow again.
027-728 [Cause] The number of files that are to be sent to external services exceeded the maximum
number.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of files, and send them again.
027-730 [Cause] The number of the document pages attached to the SMTP mail exceeds the maximum
number of pages allowed for the Split Send feature.
[Remedy] Increase the number of pages allowed for the Split Send feature, or reduce the number
of the document pages.
[Remedy] After the scanning for Network Scanning completes, execute the operation again.
027-732 [Cause] The Network Scanning server is full, or a server disk error occurred.
[Remedy] Check the amount of available disk space. If the disk space is sufficient and the error still
is not resolved, check the status of the disk of the server.
027-733 [Cause] The SSL setting on the Network Scanning server is disabled.
[Remedy] Enable the SSL setting of the Network Scanning server.
Problem Solving
027-734 [Cause] The certificate of the server used for Network Scanning is not set correctly.

The Network Scanning server is accessible from your computer using HTTPS protocol.
 The SSL server certificate of the Network Scanning server is registered on the machine.
 The SSL server certificate of the Network Scanning server is correct.

When the certificate is not registered on the Network Scanning server, disable the
server certificate validation feature of the machine. 15
027-735 [Cause] The data transfer using SSL is specified, but the SSL setting of the machine is disabled.
[Remedy] Enable the SSL setting, or specify HTTP for the transfer protocol.
027-736 [Cause] The server certificate verification feature of the machine is disabled when the server
certificate verification is required.
[Remedy] Enable the server certificate validation. Or, disable the server certificate validation for
data transfer.
559
15 Problem Solving

027-737 [Cause] An error occurred while reading data from the pool server for job templates.
[Remedy] Check on the directory where the job templates are stored, and confirm whether the
settings including the access privilege are correct.
027-739 [Cause] A specified pool server for job templates cannot be found.
[Remedy] Confirm the path name of the pool server for job templates.
027-740 [Cause] Login to the pool server for job templates failed.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the login user name and the login password are correct.
027-741 [Cause] Unable to connect to the pool server for job templates.
[Remedy] Consult your network administrator for the network environment and the server
configuration.
027-742 [Cause] The capacity of the hard disk is insufficient and job templates cannot be stored.
027-743 [Cause] The settings of the pool server for job templates are not correct.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the settings of the pool server for job templates are correct.
027-744 [Cause] Problem with the domain name of the pool server for job templates.
[Remedy] Confirm the DNS server connection and check whether the domain name is registered
on the DNS server.
027-745 [Cause] DNS server address is not registered on the machine.
[Remedy] Register the DNS server address on the machine or set the address of the pool server for
job templates as IP address.
027-746 [Cause] The protocol setting of the pool server for job templates is not correct.
[Remedy] Enable a proper port.
027-750 [Cause] Attempted to execute a fax, a print, or an Internet fax transmission to the scanned
document.
[Remedy] The Fax, Print, or Internet Fax features are unavailable for scanned documents. Set the
job flow correctly.
027-751 [Cause] An error occurred during job flow processing.
[Remedy] Confirm the settings of the job flow.
027-752 [Cause] A mandatory entry field is blank in the job flow.
Problem Solving

 Do not link folders to job flows that have mandatory entry fields.
 Set the default values to the mandatory fields of the job flow.
027-753 [Cause] 1)Attempted to execute the service while the port necessary for the job flow is either
deactivated or disabled.
2)Attempted to execute a job flow to send e-mail using the Encryption or Digital
15 Signature feature while S/MIME communication is disabled.
[Remedy] For 1), have your system administrator confirm the port status.
For 2), enable S/MIME communication, or modify the job flow so that e-mail is sent by
not using the Encryption or Digital Signature feature.
027-754 [Cause] [DocuWorks Signature] or [PDF Signature] is set inconsistency in the job flow.
[Remedy] Check the DocuWorks and PDF signatures for both the system data settings (machine's
current settings) and the executed job flow settings. If these settings differ, coordinate
them.
560
Error Code

1)An error occurred while connecting the server.
2)The reliable certificate has not been registered on the machine.
3)The server addresses of the SSL server and the destination server are not same.
4)The machine tries to communicate with the server using the encryption method which
is not supported on the machine.
5)The SSL client certificate has not been registered on the machine.
6)The server certificate has been expired or will be expired soon.
[Remedy] For 1), Check connection between the machine and the server, or the machine and the
DNS server using ping or trace route.
For 2), Import the CA certificate and intermediate certificate reliable to the SSL server
to the machine.
For 3), Check whether or not the machine communicates via the SSL proxy server which
enables you to confirm the SSL communication. When the machine uses the server, set
the machine not to use the SSL proxy server.
For 4), Check the encryption method supported on the machine. Set the available
encryption method to the SSL server setting.
For 5), Import the SSL client certificate and configure the setting to use the certificate.
For 6), Check the date and time registered on the machine is precise. If they are not,
adjust the gap.
027-760 [Cause] An invalid parameter is specified by XJT command.
[Remedy] Confirm the specified parameter.
027-761 [Cause] An on-demand print job was sent to the machine using the Web Applications feature,
but the time interval from receiving the print job until starting the print processing
exceeded the time limit specified on the machine.
[Remedy] When multiple documents are to be printed, reduce the number of documents, and then
execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, enter the System
Administration mode, and then select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] >
[Machine Clock/Timers] > [Print-On-Demand Duration], and specify a larger value or "0".
When on-demand printing is executed using the Web Application feature, the print
processing time is limited. Consequently if many documents are to be printed or if print
processing takes time, a timeout may occur before all the data are received. To resolve
this problem, change the time limit value according to the document volume and type.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. Problem Solving
027-762 [Cause] An on-demand print job is sent to the machine using the Web Applications feature,
however, the specified job ticket is invalid because of one of the following causes:

Abnormal change to the job ticket because of the machine software failure
 Abnormal change to the job ticket because of a bug on the sender's remote server

Abnormal change to the job ticket because of network trouble
 Intentional alteration to the job ticket
[Remedy] Execute the print job again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
15
Support Center.
027-763 [Cause] The machine failed to verify the user information against the remote accounting server.
 Check whether the remote accounting server is operating properly.
 Check whether there is no network failure.
 Connect the network cable securely.
 Confirm the settings on the machine.
561
15 Problem Solving

027-770 [Cause] The print job has a problem.
[Remedy] Submit the print job again.
027-771 [Cause] The hard disk of the server connected to the machine is full.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the server.
027-772 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Use ASCII characters to modify the host name that has been specified under [Tools] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name]. If the error
still is not resolved, confirm with your network administrator whether the SMTP server
supports the HELO command.
027-774 [Cause] The specified e-mail address contains unsupported characters.
[Remedy] Specify the e-mail address using only ASCII characters.
027-775 [Cause] Too many destination addresses have been specified.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of destination addresses. If the error still is not resolved, confirm
with your network administrator whether the SMTP server supports the EHLO command.
[Remedy] Use ASCII characters to modify the host name that has been specified under [Tools] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name]. If the error
still is not resolved, confirm with your network administrator whether the SMTP server
supports the EHLO command.
027-777 [Cause] The destination SMTP server does not support SMTP-AUTH.
[Remedy] Set [E-mail Send Authentication] to [Off] under [Tools] > [Connectivity & Network
Setup] > [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings] > [SMTP Server Settings].
027-778 [Cause] The destination SMTP server does not support the SMTP-AUTH system set on the
machine.
[Remedy] Confirm the authentication type supported by the SMTP server with your network
administrator. The machine supports the following authentication types: AUTH GSSAPI
(only for Kerberos), AUTH NTLMv2, AUTH NTLMv1, AUTH PLAIN, AUTH LOGIN, AUTH
CRAM-MD5.
027-779 [Cause] Failed to authenticate the SMTP server.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Confirm the login name and password set to SMTP-AUTH.

027-796 [Cause] The received e-mail was discarded because no documents were attached to it. (The
machine is set to print attached documents only.)
[Remedy] To print the mail body or header information also, change settings in the [Properties]
screen of CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer to "12 Computer Operations" > "E-mail Printing" in the User Guide.
15 027-797 [Cause] The output destination of the received e-mail is invalid.
[Remedy] Specify a correct output destination, and send the e-mail again.
027-798 [Cause] The specified document did not exist.
[Remedy] Check the job flow setting.
562
Error Code

033-313 [Cause] A communication error occurred between the machine and the fax controller.
Support Center.
033-318
033-319
033-320 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.

Support Center.
Support Center.
Support Center.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch Problem Solving
Support Center.
033-334 15
033-335
033-336
033-338
033-339
033-340
033-501 [Remedy] Confirm the recipient, and then execute the operation again. If receiving, ask the sender
to send again.
563
15 Problem Solving

033-502 [Cause] A response is not received for the fax.
[Remedy] Confirm the recipient, and then execute the operation again. Also, confirm the
recipient's machine (memory is full, machine is being maintained, or other conditions),
and execute the operation again.
033-504 [Remedy] Execute the operation again.
[Remedy] Confirm the recipient, and then execute the operation again. If receiving, ask the sender
to send again.
033-506 [Cause] Communication was terminated at the recipient's machine.
[Remedy] The job may have been canceled at the recipient. If the job was not canceled, check
whether the other machine has a problem, and execute the operation again.
033-507 [Cause] The recipient's machine cannot receive.
[Remedy] Confirm the recipient's machine (memory is full, machine is being maintained, or other
conditions), and execute the operation again.
033-508 [Cause] No spooling documents exist at the other machine.
[Remedy] Ask the other party to prepare polling documents, and execute the operation again.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, confirm the condition of the
other machine.
[Remedy] Confirm the condition of the line and the other machine, and execute the operation
again.
[Remedy] Confirm the following conditions:
 Whether a polling document exists at the other machine

Whether a document is jammed at the other machine

Whether the passwords match
033-512 [Cause] The other party cannot execute Relay Broadcast.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the other party can execute Relay Broadcast.
Problem Solving
033-513 [Cause] The other machine does not have the Folder feature.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the other machine has the Folder feature.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send again.
15 [Remedy] Confirm the recipient, and then execute the operation again. If receiving, ask the sender
to send again.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved, confirm the condition of the
other machine.
033-518 [Cause] The other machine cannot correspond to reception of SUB.
[Remedy] Check whether the other machine can correspond to reception of SUB, and execute the
operation again.
564
Error Code

033-519 [Cause] The other machine cannot correspond to reception of SEP.
[Remedy] Check whether the other machine can correspond to reception of SEP, and execute the
operation again.
033-520 [Cause] The other machine cannot correspond to reception of PWD/SID.
[Remedy] Check whether the other machine can correspond to reception of PWD/SID, and
[Remedy] Confirm the condition of the machine (memory is full, paper has run out, or other
[Remedy] Ask the sender to execute the operation again.
033-523 [Cause] The line (Channel 1) is not connected correctly.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection of the line (Channel 1) and connect it correctly, and then
execute the operation again. When the machine is connected to other device such as a
home gateway and a terminal adapter, confirm whether the device works properly.
[Remedy] Confirm the model of the sender's machine, and then execute the operation again. If
receiving, ask the sender to send again.
[Remedy] Confirm the other machine has a problem, and then execute the operation again.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Confirm the other machine has a problem, and then execute the operation again.
033-530 [Cause] Received a procedure disabled signal.
[Remedy] Confirm the procedure for DTMF in the User Guide, and then execute the operation
again.
033-531 [Cause] Received a command rejection signal.
15
[Remedy] Confirm the condition of the other machine (memory is full, paper has run out, or other
033-533 [Remedy] Execute the operation again. If receiving, ask the sender to send again.
033-534 [Cause] The other machine does not offer a feature to print the number of document sets sent.
[Remedy] Do not specify multiple sets.
565
15 Problem Solving

[Remedy] Confirm information such as the recipient and folder information, and execute the
operation again.
033-537 [Remedy] Execute the operation again.
033-541 [Cause] The recipient is not specified.
[Remedy] Specify the recipient correctly.
033-542 [Cause] A line was specified that is not connected.
[Remedy] Specify a connected line.
033-543 [Cause] The recipient (fax number) is incorrect.
[Remedy] Enter a correct fax number, and execute the operation again.
033-544 [Cause] The recipient's line is busy.
033-545 [Cause] There was no response from the fax recipient.
[Remedy] Confirm that you specified the correct number, and execute the operation again. If the
same message is displayed again, the recipient may not support fax, or the recipient
machine may be powered off. Ask the recipient for details.
033-546 [Cause] A dial tone was not detected.
[Remedy] Check whether the line is connected correctly.
033-547 [Cause] Communication was terminated by a cause such as pressing the <Stop> button.
033-548 [Cause] Cannot transmit manually because a line is unavailable.
[Remedy] Establish communication such as by telephone, and execute the operation again.
033-549 [Cause] Cannot use the Fax service because of causes such as memory is insufficient.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and execute the operation again.
Problem Solving
033-550 [Cause] Cannot execute another job because fax communication is in progress.
[Remedy] Wait until the job being communicated completes, and then execute the operation
again.
033-551 [Cause] You attempted to change a job immediately before fax or telephone communication
completed.
15 033-552 [Cause] The total quantity of error lines detected with G3 exceeded the set value.
[Remedy] Confirm the model of the other machine, and execute the operation again. If receiving,
ask the sender to send again.
033-553 [Cause] This machine does not have confidential or relay function. The F-code sent from the
other machine contains an instruction for a function not supported by the machine.
[Remedy] If necessary, check whether the sender entered an invalid F-code.
033-554 [Cause] The password was omitted or did not match in fax communication.
566
Error Code

033-555 [Cause] The password received from the other machine did not match the password for
receiving faxes on the machine.
[Remedy] Check whether the sender specified an incorrect machine password.
033-556 [Cause] The password sent to the other machine did not match the password for receiving faxes
on the other machine.
[Remedy] If necessary, check whether the correct machine password has been instructed to the
other machine.
033-557 [Cause] The number of services or of recipients exceeds the maximum limit.
[Remedy] Wait until the number of jobs awaiting transmission decreases, or reduce the number of
recipients, and then send again.
033-558 [Cause] The machine is set to reject faxes without a remote ID, and a remote ID was not sent
from the other machine.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to set a remote ID. If necessary, set the machine to receive even when a
remote ID is not sent.
033-559 [Cause] The authentication ID is incorrect.
[Remedy] An error occurred during operation of the maintenance system by Fuji Xerox. When the
communication line is available, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-560 [Cause] An error occurred during remote maintenance work.
033-561 [Remedy] This is an error occurring during remote maintenance work by Fuji Xerox. No measure is
033-562 required.
033-563 [Cause] Paper that can print faxed documents is not loaded in a tray.
 Specify the paper size.

Confirm whether the paper tray is set correctly.
033-564 [Cause] The machine was turned off during communication.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, confirm the fax service settings and the fax number, and then send
again if sending. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-565 [Cause] Cannot send because too many recipients are specified.
[Remedy] Wait until the number of jobs awaiting transmission decreases, or reduce the number of
recipients, and then send again.
033-566 [Cause] Cannot send because the recipient (fax number) is not specified. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Correctly specify the recipient's fax number.
[Remedy] Correctly enter the recipient's fax number, and execute the operation again.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If receiving, ask the sender to send again. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. 15
033-569 [Cause] Paper in the tray is not loaded in the direction that the received fax data can be printed.
[Remedy] Load paper in Tray 5 according to the direction displayed on the screen.
033-570 [Cause] The machine was turned off during communication.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, confirm the Fax service settings and the fax number, and then send
again if sending. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
567
15 Problem Solving

033-571 [Cause] The Fax service is not available from a reason such as insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Cancel the fax data in the queue, or wait for a while, and execute the operation again.
033-572 [Cause] The data received is not printed.
[Remedy] No measure is required. The data will be printed after a while.
033-573 [Cause] Attempted to send an IP fax (SIP) to the recipient (domain) that transmissions are not
permitted.

Confirm the recipient and re-specify a recipient.
 Check the setting for Block Domains and re-specify a recipient.
033-574 [Cause] An unavailable line is specified.

[Remedy] Specify an available line.
[Remedy] Enter a correct fax number, and execute the operation again.
033-578 [Cause] An error occurred during fax receiving.
[Remedy] Confirm the status of the line and the recipient machine, and then ask the sender to
send again.
033-580 [Cause] No VoIP gateway is registered corresponding to the fax number entered.
[Remedy] Specify the VoIP gateway address corresponding to the fax number entered.
033-581 [Cause] Unable to connect to the SIP server because of an authentication error.
[Remedy] Confirm the settings of login user name, login password, and SIP server under [SIP
Settings] > [SIP Proxy Server Setup].
033-582 [Cause] An error occurred during IP fax (SIP) transmission.
[Remedy] Check whether or not the recipient’s machine supports IP fax (SIP). If it is IP fax-enabled
device, confirm the settings on the SIP server.
Problem Solving

 Whether the address or fax number entered is correct

Whether the network cable is connected
15  Whether the SIP server is enabled
 Whether the network cable between the machine and the SIP server connected
 Whether the network cable between the machine and the recipient connected
 Whether the status of the SIP server and the recipient is available for communications

568
Error Code

[Remedy] Wait for a while, and execute the operation again. And confirm the following conditions:

Whether an IP address can be obtained
 Whether the machine can register to the registrar server

[Remedy] Wait for a while, and execute the operation again. And confirm the following conditions:

Whether the network cable is connected

Whether the recipient machine is on
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If another job is being processed, execute the operation
again.
[Remedy] Check whether or not the recipient’s machine supports IP fax (SIP). If it is IP fax-enabled
device, contact our Customer Support Center.
 Whether the network cable is connected
 Whether the recipient machine is on

[Remedy] Execute the operation again after another processing job finishes.
 Whether the network cable is connected
 Whether the recipient machine is on
033-593 [Cause] An IP fax (SIP) was cancelled at the sender.

033-700 [Cause] The connection is time out when a fax is send or the machine receives a fax from a
remote machine.
[Remedy] In sending a fax, execute the operation again. In receiving a fax, the remote machine
may cancel sending. Check the situation of the remote machine. Problem Solving
033-710 [Cause] The document to be sent by polling was deleted.
[Remedy] Store the document again.
033-712 [Cause] Unable to process because of insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. 15
033-716 [Cause] The folder specified from the sender's machine does not exist.
[Remedy] Register the folder.
Refer to "Create Folder" (P.292).
033-717 [Cause] The folder passcode specified from the sender's machine is incorrect. Or, the machine
passcode for reception is incorrect.
[Remedy] Inform the correct information to the sender's machine.
569
15 Problem Solving

033-718 [Cause] Fax or polling documents do not exist in the folder specified from the sender's machine.
[Remedy] Store fax or polling documents into the folder as necessary.
033-719 [Cause] The document may be deleted by turning the machine off and then on.
[Remedy] Retry sending.
Center.
033-724 [Cause] The reception was interrupted because the image volume exceeded the upper limit.
[Remedy] Install the Extension System Memory to increase the maximum volume of image data.
033-725 [Cause] The hard disk is full.
033-726 [Cause] The received document was printed with 1 sided printing, because 2 sided printing is not
available for mixed sized documents.
033-728 [Cause] The auto print formatting of the received fax document was interrupted by a manual
print operation.
[Remedy] No measure is required. The machine will automatically start the auto print job after
manual printing completes.
033-731 [Cause] The printing of the received fax document was interrupted.
[Remedy] The auto print processing of the received fax document was interrupted by a manual
print operation. No measure is required.
033-732 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to the EP system.
[Remedy] This is an error occurring during maintenance work by Fuji Xerox. No measure is
required.
Center.
033-734 [Cause] Because a report job was instructed while preparing to print a received fax, the printing
Problem Solving
of the received fax is temporarily suspended.

Center.
15 033-736 [Cause] The forwarding job was interrupted because the data volume exceeded the upper limit.
Support Center.
033-738 [Cause] Received abnormal JBIG data.
570
Error Code

033-740 [Cause] The printing of the received fax document was interrupted.
Support Center.
033-742 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission. This error may occur if the remaining
capacity of the machine's memory is 10% or less and Manual Send is used.
[Remedy] If this error was caused when using Manual Send, connect the line after storing the
document, and then send. If the error still is not resolved, delete unnecessary data from
the hard disk to free up disk space, and execute the operation again.
If the error persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-745 on the machine power. Try again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
033-747 [Cause] The job is temporarily suspended.

033-749 [Cause] The machine will automatically recover and print the document.
on the machine power. Try again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer
Support Center.
033-751 [Cause] An activity report output occurred during the printer lockout duration. Outputting the
activity report was suspended because the machine was in the Sleep mode.
[Remedy] No measure is required because the machine will output the report after exiting the
Sleep mode.
Support Center.
Problem Solving
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, turn the power of both
of the external controller and the machine off and on. If the same message is displayed
again, contact our Customer Support Center.
041-317 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch 15
Support Center.
571
15 Problem Solving

041-391
041-393
041-394
041-395
041-396
041-397
041-398
041-399
Problem Solving
15
572
Error Code

042-324 Center.
042-325
042-329
042-330
042-332
042-334
042-335
042-336
042-337
042-338
042-340
042-341
042-342
042-343
042-344
042-366
042-367
042-368
042-369
042-370
042-371
042-372
042-373
042-374
042-375
042-376
042-377
042-378
042-379
042-380
042-381
Problem Solving
042-382
042-383
042-384
042-385
042-386
042-387
042-388
042-389 15
042-390
042-391
042-392
042-393
042-394
042-395
042-396
042-397
573
15 Problem Solving

Center.
Center.
043-313 Center.
043-314
043-317
043-321
043-322
043-324
043-325
043-332
043-333
043-334
043-335
043-336
043-338
043-396 [Cause] A cable is not connected properly.
043-397 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the cable is connected properly, and then
Center.
044-311
Problem Solving
044-313 Center.
044-314
044-315
044-316
044-317
15 044-318
044-319
044-320
044-321
044-322
044-323
044-324
044-325
044-326
574
Error Code

044-330 Center.
044-370
044-371
044-373
044-374
044-375
044-379
044-380
044-381
044-382
044-383
044-384
044-385
044-386
044-387
044-390
044-391
044-392
044-393
044-394
044-395
Problem Solving
15
575
15 Problem Solving

045-320
045-343
045-345
045-346
045-347
045-348
045-349
045-353
045-354
045-355
045-356
045-357
045-358
045-359
045-368
045-369
045-370
045-371
045-372
045-373
045-374
045-375
045-376
045-377
045-378
045-379
047-211 [Cause] An error occurred in the Offset Stacking Unit.
Support Center.
Problem Solving
047-213 [Cause] Detected the installation of a finisher of a different type than expected.
Support Center.
047-216 [Cause] An error occurred while detecting the finisher.
15 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
Support Center.
047-217 [Cause] An error occurred while detecting Tray 6 (HCF B1) (optional).
Support Center.
576
Error Code

Support Center.
061-354
061-355
061-356
061-357
061-358
061-359
061-360
061-361
061-362
061-363
061-364
061-365
061-366
061-367
061-368
061-369
061-370
061-371
061-372
061-373
061-374
061-375
061-376
061-377
061-378
061-384
061-385
061-386
061-387
061-388
061-389
061-390
061-391
15
061-392
061-393
061-394
061-395
061-396
061-397
061-398
061-399
577
15 Problem Solving

062-277 [Cause] A communication error occurred between the document scanning unit and the
document feeder.
062-345
062-360
062-362
062-371
062-380
062-386
062-389
062-393
062-395
062-396
062-397
062-398
Support Center.
062-790 [Cause] Copying of the scanned document is prohibited.
[Remedy] Refer to "1 Before Using the Machine" > "Legal Notice" in the User Guide.
063-230
063-240
Problem Solving
Support Center.
065-222
065-223
065-224
15 065-225
071-210 [Cause] Tray 1 malfunction
[Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for the Tray, and then switch off the machine
power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center. You can use a tray
other than Tray 1.
578
Error Code

[Remedy] Confirm the paper loading condition for the Tray 2, and then switch off the machine
other than Tray 2.
072-212 [Cause] Tray 2 malfunctioned
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. You can use a tray other than Tray 2.
other than Tray 3.
other than Tray 4.
077-211 [Cause] Detected the installation of a tray of a different type than expected.
077-214 [Cause] Detected the installation of a tray of a different type than expected.
Support Center. Problem Solving
078-216 [Cause] An error occurred in Tray 6 (HCF B1) (optional).

Center.
078-250 [Cause] An error occurred in Tray 6 (HCF B1) (optional).
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch 15
Center.
Support Center.
579
15 Problem Solving

Support Center.
091-407 [Cause] An error occurred in the drum cartridge [R1].
[Remedy] Pull out the drum cartridge [R1], and then insert the cartridge again.

093-324
093-401 [Cause] The toner cartridge [Y] (yellow) is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the toner cartridge [Y] (yellow).
093-403 [Cause] The toner cartridge [M] (magenta) is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the toner cartridge [M] (magenta).
093-404 [Cause] The toner cartridge [C] (cyan) is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the toner cartridge [C] (cyan).
093-426 [Cause] An error occurred in the toner cartridge [K] (black).
[Remedy] Pull out the toner cartridge [K] (black), and then insert the cartridge again.
Problem Solving
093-427 [Cause] An error occurred in the toner cartridge [Y] (yellow).

[Remedy] Pull out the toner cartridge [Y] (yellow), and then insert the cartridge again.
093-428 [Cause] An error occurred in the toner cartridge [M] (magenta).
[Remedy] Pull out the toner cartridge [M] (magenta), and then insert the cartridge again.
093-429 [Cause] An error occurred in the toner cartridge [C] (cyan).
15 [Remedy] Pull out the toner cartridge [C] (cyan), and then insert the cartridge again.
093-430 [Cause] The toner cartridge [K] (black) is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the toner cartridge [K] (black).
Support Center.
580
Error Code

Center.
Support Center.
103-314
112-700 [Cause] The finisher's hole punch waste container is full.
[Remedy] Empty the hole punch waste container.
For more information on how to empty the hole punch waste container, refer to "Emptying the Hole Punch Waste
Container (for C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)" (P.98).
116-210 [Cause] An error occurred in the USB memory device.
Center.
116-220 [Cause] Failed to enter the Download mode.
116-314
116-315
116-316
116-317
116-319
116-321
116-322
116-323
[Remedy] If an error occurred while printing, turn off the machine once, then turn the machine on
holding down both the <Start> and <Stop> buttons simultaneously for six seconds. This 15
deletes the print data that caused the error. If the error was caused by another reason,
switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
Center.
581
15 Problem Solving

116-331
116-332
116-333
116-334
116-336
116-337
116-338
116-339 [Cause] Job Based Accounting system started with no hard disk installed.
[Remedy] To use the Job Based Accounting system, the hard disk is required. Switch off the
machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the
machine power to reset the operation.
Support Center.
Problem Solving
15
582
Error Code

116-348
116-349
116-350
116-351
116-352
116-353
116-354
116-355
116-356
116-357
116-358
116-359
116-360
116-361
116-362
116-363
116-364
116-365
116-366
116-367
116-368
116-370
116-371
116-372
116-373
116-374
116-375
116-376
116-377
116-378
Problem Solving
116-379
116-380
116-381
116-382
116-383
116-384
116-385
15
116-386 [Cause] The fax cable is not connected correctly.
[Remedy] Connect the cable securely, and then switch off the machine power, make sure that the
touch screen is blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is not
resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
Support Center.
583
15 Problem Solving

116-388 [Cause] The optional hard disk is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the hard disk. Contact our Customer Support Center.
116-389 [Cause] The Extension System Memory is not installed.
[Remedy] Install the Extension System Memory. Contact our Customer Support Center.
[Remedy] Follow the message displayed on the touch screen and initialize the memory of the
machine.
116-395
116-396
116-397
116-399
116-700 [Cause] Memory is insufficient for Image Extension Kit (optional).
[Remedy] Select Standard for the image quality.
116-701 [Cause] Unable to use the 2 Sided Printing feature because of insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Increase memory, or install the hard disk if it is not installed.
116-702 [Cause] A print job was processed using a substitute font.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
1)An error occurred during Post Script (optional) processing.
2)An error occurred because of insufficient memory.
3)An error occurred because of insufficient memory for PostScript processing.
[Remedy] For 1), check the print data.
For 2), increase memory.
For 3), increase the value for [PostScript Memory].
116-704 [Cause] An error occurred when reading data on the media.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Check whether the media is inserted correctly.

116-705 [Cause] An error occurred when reading data on the media.
116-706 [Remedy] Use a computer to confirm the content recorded on the media.
116-707
116-708
116-709
15 116-710 [Cause] The correct document size could not be judged because the receive data exceeded the
HP-GL/2 spool size.
[Remedy] Increase the size assigned to HP-GL/2 auto layout memory.
116-711 [Cause] The size and orientation of the form specified are not matched with the paper to be
printed.
[Remedy] Match the size and orientation of the paper with the form specified, and print again.
116-713 [Cause] The data has been divided into a number of jobs because of insufficient disk space.
584
Error Code

116-714 [Cause] An HP-GL/2 command error occurred.
116-716 [Cause] An error occurred when reading the data on the media.
116-717 [Remedy] On a computer, confirm the content recorded on the media.
116-720 [Cause] An error occurred during print processing because of insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Stop unnecessary ports or delete unnecessary data to free up disk space.
116-725 [Cause] Failed to write the image log because the image log storage area on the machine is
insufficient.
If this error still is not resolved, take one of the following measures:
 Delete unnecessary image logs.
 Change the [Assurance Level] setting for image logs to [Low].
In this case, selecting [Low] does not secure the contents of created image logs.
116-738 [Cause] The size and orientation of the form specified are not matched with the paper to be
printed.
[Remedy] Match the size and orientation of the paper with the form specified, and print again.
116-739 [Cause] The form or logo data cannot be registered because memory for the form and logo data
or memory capacity for the hard disk is insufficient.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data, or free up the space for the form memory.
116-740 [Cause] A numerical value operation error occurred because a value exceeding the value limit of
the machine was used in the print data.
116-741 [Cause] The form cannot be registered because the number of the form registration exceeds the
maximum number allowed.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary form. The maximum number allowed is 2048.
116-742 [Cause] The logo data cannot be registered because the number of the logo data registration
exceeds the maximum number allowed.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary logo data.
116-743 [Cause] The logo data or form cannot be registered because the memory for the form and logo
data is insufficient. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Increase memory.
116-746 [Cause] The form specified is not registered.
[Remedy] Use the form registered, or register the form.
116-747 [Cause] The paper margin value is too large for the HP-GL/2 active coordinates area.
[Remedy] Decrease the paper margin value, and then execute the operation again.
15
116-748 [Cause] There is no plot data in the HP-GL/2 print data.
116-749 [Cause] The job was cancelled because the specified font does not exist.
[Remedy] Install the font, or set the print driver to replace the font.
116-750 [Cause] Banner sheet tray malfunction
[Remedy] Restore the tray to normal condition or change the Banner sheet tray.
585
15 Problem Solving

116-751 [Cause] The process has been canceled because the hard disk is full.
[Remedy] Delete stored data in the hard disk. If the error still is not resolved, split the file and send
the job again.
116-752 [Cause] The descriptions of the PDF or XPS printing job ticket have a problem.
Support Center.
116-771 [Cause] The data was automatically modified because it included an invalid parameter.
116-772 [Remedy] The printed image may be incomplete. Confirm with the sender whether the image has
116-773 a problem, or ask the sender to send the data again. When using the Internet Fax
116-774 Forwarding feature, confirm its condition with the e-mail recipient.
116-775
116-776
116-777
116-778
116-780 [Cause] There is a problem with the document attached to the received e-mail.
[Remedy] Check the attached document.
1)If the operator cancelled printing a document that was received using the Store Fax -
Local Folder or Store Internet Fax - Local Folder feature:
The first set of the document is not stapled.
2)For causes other than 1)
No set of the document is stapled.
[Remedy] For 1), manually staple the first set of the document. Or, do not cancel printing of a
document that is received using the Store Fax - Local Folder or Store Internet Fax - Local
Folder feature.
For 2), check whether the staple position has been correctly specified, and try printing
again.
117-311 [Cause] Data Security Kit is not attached correctly.
[Remedy] Insert Data Security Kit into the correct slot.
Problem Solving

117-323
15 117-324
117-326
117-326
117-327
117-329
117-331
117-332
117-333
117-334
586
Error Code

117-343 [Cause] Probable causes are follows.
1)When [Image Log Control] on Tools is invalid and [Enabled] is set for [Transfer Image
Log] , [Transfer Per Job Basis] is set for [Logs to Transfer].
2)When [Transfer Image Log] is invalid (the hard disk is not installed), [Log Transfer] is
set to be valid.
[Remedy] For 1, set other than [Transfer Per Job Basis] for [Log to Transfer].
For 2, install the hard disk to the machine, or set [Pause] for [Logs To Transfer].
117-347 [Cause] The life of the component which cannot be replaced is expired. The machine itself needs
to be replaced.
117-348 [Cause] The unformatted SD card used in the other machine is installed.
Support Center.
Support Center.
118-311 [Cause] An error occurred during software processing.
Support Center.
Support Center.
121-311 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device connected.
[Remedy] Once IC Card Reader (optional) is connected to the machine, the machine
automatically changes the [Passcode Entry for Smart Card Login] setting to [On] under
[Tools] > [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Passcode Policy].
Change the setting as required.
121-312 [Cause] An error occurred between the machine and the device connected. Problem Solving
[Remedy] Switch on the machine power without connecting the device for EP system, and then set
[Login Type] to any option other than [Login to Remote Accounts] under [Tools] >
[Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication].
[Remedy] Switch on the machine power without connecting the device for EP system, and then set
[Login Type] to any option other than [Login to Remote Accounts] under [Tools] >
[Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication]. 15
587
15 Problem Solving

121-319
121-320
121-321
121-322
121-323
121-324
121-325 [Cause] The machine detects unacceptable combination.
The unacceptable combination are as follows:
 Both the USB IC card reader and the EP related equipment are used

[Login to Local Accounts] is set to [Login Type]
 [Smart Card or Control Panel Login] is set to [When Smart Card Reader is Connected]

 When both Smart Card and Control Panel Login are not used, the setting of [When
Smart Card Reader is Connected] will be automatically changed to [Smart Card

Login]. No measure is required.

When only the USB IC card reader is connected to the machine and both Smart Card
and Control Panel Login are used, contact our Customer Support Center.
[Remedy] Confirm that the device is switched on, and then switch off the machine power, make
sure that the touch screen is blank, and switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
121-338
Problem Solving
Support Center.
15
588
Error Code

123-326
123-333
123-343
123-344
123-350
123-352
123-353
123-354
123-355
123-356
123-357
123-358
123-362
123-368
123-369
123-371
123-374
123-377
123-379
123-380
123-381
123-382
123-383
123-384
123-389
123-390
123-392
123-393
123-395
123-396
Problem Solving
123-397
123-398
123-399
15
589
15 Problem Solving

124-314
124-315
124-316
124-317
124-318
124-319
124-320
124-321
124-322
124-323
124-324
124-325
124-326
124-327
124-328
124-331
124-332
124-333
124-334
124-335
124-337
124-338
124-339
124-340
124-341
124-342
124-343
124-344
124-345
124-346
Problem Solving
124-347
124-348
124-349
124-350
124-351
124-352
124-353
15 124-354
124-355
124-360
124-361
124-362
124-363
124-372
124-373
124-374
590
Error Code

124-390
124-391
124-392
124-393
124-701 [Cause] The output destination was changed because of the malfunction of the specified
output tray (Side Tray).
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. You can use any output trays other than the
defective output tray.
124-702 [Cause] The output destination was changed because of the malfunction of the specified
output tray (Finisher Tray).
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. You can use any output trays other than the
defective output tray.
124-705 [Cause] The punch setting was cancelled.
[Remedy] Confirm the punch position, and then execute the operation again.
124-706 [Cause] The folding setting was cancelled.
[Remedy] Confirm the folding setting, and then execute the operation again.
124-708 [Cause] The output destination has been changed to the Center Tray or the Finisher Tray.
The probable causes are as follows:
1)Paper of a different size from the specified is loaded for 2 sided copying.
2)The Punching feature of the Finisher has malfunctioned.
[Remedy] For 1), check whether the specified size paper is loaded in the tray.
For 2), confirm whether the error code 012-231, 012-232, 012-233, or 012-234 is
displayed on the touch screen, and contact our Customer Support Center.
124-709 [Cause] The document exceeded the maximum number of pages that can be stapled.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of pages, or cancel the stapling setting, then try printing again.
124-710 [Cause] The machine cannot output to the output destination specified. A paper size or a paper
type that cannot be output is specified or the output destination fails.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] No measure is required. The machine automatically selects the available output
destination. If the paper is not still output from the specified output destination even
after the correct paper size and type is selected, contact our Customer Support Center.
Support Center. 15
591
15 Problem Solving

127-314
127-315
127-320
127-337
127-342
127-353
127-354
127-396
127-398
on the machine power. If the same message is displayed again, switch off the machine
power again, and then switch on the machine power while pressing the <Start> button
and <Stop> button simultaneously, and hold this condition for 6 seconds. The print data
that caused an error will be deleted automatically, and the machine reboots. If the error
still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
127-700 [Cause] The SIP registrar server cannot be used.
[Remedy] Check if the SIP registrar server is available. Also, confirm that [SIP Registrar Server
Setup] is set correctly under [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network
Setup] > [SIP Settings] > [SIP Registrar Server Setup].
133-213 Center.
133-214
133-215
133-216
133-217
133-218
133-219
Problem Solving
133-220
133-221
133-222
133-223
133-224
133-226 [Cause] A country code not supported by the machine was specified.
15 [Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
133-283 Center.
133-700 [Cause] The staple/hole punch setting was cancelled.

[Remedy] Check whether the staple/hole punch position is correct, and then execute the operation
again.
592
Error Code

133-701 [Cause] Unavailable characters are included in Name, Company Logo, Fax Comment, or Local
Name and the characters are converted.
[Remedy] Enter available characters to Name, Company Logo, Fax Comment, or Local Name.
When the available characters are not clear, enter alphanumeric characters only.
133-710 [Cause] When printing the received fax document, the paper loaded on the bypass tray was
used for printing because the specified tray could not be used.

Load paper available for printing the received fax document:
A3 SEF , A4 LEF , B4 SEF , B5 LEF ,
A4 SEF , A5 SEF ,B5SEF , 8.5 x 11" SEF ,
8.5 x 13" SEF , 8.5 x 14" SEF , 11 x 17" SEF ,
8.5 x 11" LEF , 5.5 x 8.5" SEF .

Use a paper type available for printing the received fax document:
plain paper, bond paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, user-defined custom paper.

Confirm the settings by selecting [Tools] > [Fax Service Settings] > [Fax Control] >
[Receiving Paper Size].
1)Select [Receiving Paper Size] > [Tray Mode] to add a tray to be used for printing the
received fax documents.
2)Set up paper so that the tray specified for [Tray Mode] can be used for printing the
received fax documents.
Note • If you cannot resolve an error despite following the instructions described in the table, contact our
Customer Support Center. The contact number is printed on the label or card attached on the
machine.
Other Errors
This section describes the remedies when the following messages are displayed.
Error
Cause and Remedy
Message
A fault has occurred. [Cause] An error occurred.
Switch off the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and Problem Solving
(xxx-yyy)
then switch the machine power on again.
If the message persists, record the content displayed for [(xxx-yyy)]. Then
immediately switch the main power and power off, make sure that the touch
screen is blank, and then contact our Customer Support Center.
Completed with an [Cause] An error occurred, and the operation terminated abnormally.
error.
(xxx-yyy)
A fault has occurred. [Cause] An auto-recoverable internal error occurred, and the machine restarted
15
The machine has automatically.
rebooted. Select
[Remedy] Select [Close] to use the machine normally. If the error still is not resolved,
[Close]. If the problem
persists, call for service.
(xxx-yyy)
593
15 Problem Solving
Paper Jams
When a paper jam occurred, the machine stops and an alarm beeps. A message is also
displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed
paper.
Gently remove the paper to avoid it to be torn. If the paper is torn, remove all the torn pieces,
making sure that none remain inside the machine.
If a paper jam message appears again after you have cleared the paper jam, another paper
jam may be occurred in some other parts of the machine. Clear this by following the
message.
When the paper jam is cleared, printing is automatically resumed from the point when the
paper jam occurred.
If you were during copying, press the <Start> button to resume the copying from the point
when the paper jam occurred.
WARNING
If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative. Do not pull out a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove a paper deeply jammed inside the product, particularly
a paper wrapped around the fusing unit or the heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause
injuries or burns. Switch off the product immediately and contact Fuji Xerox
This section describes how to clear a paper jam occurring in the following locations.
The following shows the reference section for the procedures to clear a paper jam in each
location.
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover A................................................................................................................................................ 595
Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover C ......................................................................................................................................... 596
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover D................................................................................................................................................ 596
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4......................................................................................................................................................... 597
Paper Jams in Tray 3 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed) ..................................................................................... 598
Paper Jams in Tray 4 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed) ..................................................................................... 598
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) ........................................................................................................................................ 599
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (HCF B1) (Optional)............................................................................................................................. 600

Paper Jams in Duplex Module B............................................................................................................................................... 602
Paper Jams in Finisher-A1.......................................................................................................................................................... 602
Paper Jams in Finisher-B1.......................................................................................................................................................... 603
Paper Jams in C3 Finisher / C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker............................................................................................. 604
15 Paper Jams in the Folder Unit CD1.......................................................................................................................................... 611

Important • When a paper jam occurred, if you pull out a paper tray without checking the paper jam location, the
jammed paper may be torn and the pieces may remain inside the machine. This may cause machine
malfunctions; therefore, always check where the paper jam occurred first.
• If any piece of jammed paper remains inside the machine, the paper jam message will not
disappear from the touch screen.
• Clear the paper jams while the machine is powered on. If you turn off the machine, all data stored
on the memory of the machine will be erased.
• Do not touch components inside the machine. This may cause print defects.
594
Paper Jams
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover A

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the top left cover.
Important • Do not touch the black film like Transfer Belt inside the top left cover when you remove the jammed
paper because images might be shifted on the Transfer Belt. If you touch the belt, the image quality
might be deteriorated or the belt may be damaged and need replacement.
1 Open Tray 5 (1), and then while lifting up the

release lever (2) gently open the top left cover
(3).
 When the Side Tray (optional) is installed

Remove paper from the Side Tray, and then
open the top left cover.
2 If you can see the edge of the jammed paper

on the output tray, pull the paper straight from
the exit area.
Note • Toner may adhere on the transfer roller, but
the image quality will not be affected.
3
Problem Solving
Remove the jammed paper.
Note • If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of
paper remains inside the machine.
15
595
15 Problem Solving
4 If paper is jammed in the fusing unit, move the

lever A1 towards you to open the chute of the
fusing unit.
5 Remove the jammed paper.

Important • The fusing unit is extremely hot. Do not touch
the fusing unit as it may result in burn injury.
6 Return the lever A1 to the original position, and close the chute of the fusing unit.
7 Push the center of the top left cover and close the cover gently, and then close Tray 5.
Paper Jams in Bottom Left Cover C

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the bottom left cover.
1 Gently open the bottom left cover while pulling

the release lever.
Problem Solving

Note • Paper may be jammed in the hidden area on
the upper position. Check inside thoroughly.
• If the paper is torn, make sure no piece of
15
3 Close the bottom left cover gently.
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover D

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the top left cover.
596
Paper Jams
Important • Do not touch the black film like Transfer Belt inside the top left cover when you remove the jammed
paper because images might be shifted on the Transfer Belt. If you touch the belt, the image quality
might be deteriorated or the belt may be damaged and need replacement.
1 Open Tray 5 (1), and then while lifting up the

release lever (2) gently open the top left cover
(3).
 When the Side Tray (optional) is installed

Remove paper from the Side Tray, and then
open the top left cover.
2 Lift up the lever to open the top left cover.

paper remains inside the machine. Problem Solving
4 Close the top left cover gently. 15

5 Push the center of the top left cover and close the cover gently, and then close Tray 5.
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Trays 1 to 4.
597
15 Problem Solving
1 Pull out the tray where the paper jam occurred.

Important • If you pull out a paper tray without checking
the paper jam location, the jammed paper
may be torn and the pieces may remain
inside the machine. This may cause machine
malfunctions; therefore, always check where
the paper jam occurred first.

Paper Jams in Tray 3 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed)

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Tray 3 when the Tandem Tray
1 Pull out Tray 3.


Problem Solving

15
Paper Jams in Tray 4 (When Tandem Tray Module is Installed)

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Tray 4 when the Tandem Tray
598
Paper Jams
1 Pull out Tray 4.


3 If paper is jammed in the paper feed section,

open the inner cover and gently remove the
paper.
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Tray 5.
1 Check the back of Tray 5 (around the paper

feed entrance) and remove the jammed paper. Problem Solving
Important • When two or more sheets of paper are
loaded, remove all of the sheets from the
tray.
15
2 When two or more sheets of paper were loaded, jog the paper you removed making sure
that all four corners are neatly aligned.
599
15 Problem Solving
3 Insert the paper into the tray with the printing

side facing down until its edge lightly touches
against the paper feed entrance.
Paper Jams in Tray 6 (HCF B1) (Optional)

This section describes how to clear paper jams occurring in Tray 6 (HCF B1) (optional).
Paper Jams in Tray 6 Exit........................................................................................................................................................... 600
Paper Jams in Tray 6 Top Cover ............................................................................................................................................... 601
Paper Jams in Tray 6................................................................................................................................................................... 601
Note • Remedy differs depending on where the paper jam occurs. Follow the instructions displayed and
remove the jammed paper.
Paper Jams in Tray 6 Exit
1 Gently move Tray 6 to the left until it stops by

gripping the handle on the top left side of Tray
6.

Note • If the paper is torn, make sure no pieces of
paper remain inside Tray 6.
Problem Solving
3 Gently put Tray 6 back into position.

15
600
Paper Jams
Paper Jams in Tray 6 Top Cover
1 Gently move Tray 6 to the left until it stops by

gripping the handle on the top left side of Tray
6.
2 Open the Tray 6 top cover.

4 Close the top cover.

5 Gently put Tray 6 back into position.
Paper Jams in Tray 6

Problem Solving
CAUTION
When pulling out the paper
tray, do it slowly. If pulled out
with too much force, the tray
might hit and injure your knees.

15
601
15 Problem Solving
3 Push Tray 6 in gently until it stops.
Paper Jams in Duplex Module B

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the Duplex Module B if the
machine supports the 2 Sided Printing feature.
1 Open Tray 5 (1), lift up the release lever (2),

and then gently open the cover of the Duplex
Module B (3).

3 Close the cover (1), and then close Tray 5 (2).

Problem Solving
Paper Jams in Finisher-A1

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the Finisher-A1 (optional).
The following shows the reference section for the procedures to clear a paper jam in each
location.
15
602
Paper Jams
Paper Jams under the Finisher Top Cover
1 Open the finisher top cover (1), turn the knob

(2), and then remove the jammed paper.
2 Close the finisher top cover.
Paper Jams in Finisher-B1

The following describes how to clear paper jams occurring in the Finisher-B1 (optional).
Paper Jams under the Finisher Top Cover..............................................................................................................................603
Paper Jams in the Center Unit ..................................................................................................................................................604
Paper Jams under the Finisher Top Cover
1 Push up the lever on the finisher top cover.
2 The finisher top cover opens.
Problem Solving

15
603
15 Problem Solving
Paper Jams in the Center Unit
1 Lift the top cover and open.

Note • The top cover cannot be detached from the
machine.

Paper Jams in C3 Finisher / C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker

The following describes how to clear staple jams inside the finisher when the C3 Finisher
(optional) or the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.
Paper Jams in the Center Tray.................................................................................................................................................. 604
Paper Jams in the Finisher Transport ..................................................................................................................................... 605
Paper Jams at the Handle [3a]................................................................................................................................................. 606
Paper Jams at the Handle [3a] (Using the Knob [3b])....................................................................................................... 606
Paper Jams at the Handle [3c] ................................................................................................................................................. 607
Paper Jams at the Handle [3d]................................................................................................................................................. 608
Paper Jams at the Handle [3d] (when the paper is ejected at the output area) ......................................................... 609
Paper Jams in the Booklet Unit [4] (For C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)..................................................................... 609
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in the Booklet Tray [4a] (For C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker) .................................................................. 610
Note • Remedy differs depending on where the paper jam occurs. Follow the instructions displayed and
Paper Jams in the Center Tray

15 on the center tray, gently pull the paper to the
right.
604
Paper Jams
2 Open the top cover of the finisher transport,

and then close it.
Paper Jams in the Finisher Transport
1 Open the top cover of the finisher transport.
2 Remove the jammed paper if there is.
3 Turn the knob [1] to the left and gently pull out
the paper to remove.
Problem Solving
4 Close the top cover of the finisher transport.
15
605
15 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at the Handle [3a]
1 Open the finisher front door.
2 Move the handle [3a] upwards (1), and remove

the jammed paper (2).
Note • If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of
paper inside the machine.
3 Return the handle [3a] to its original position.

Note • If the finisher front door is not completely closed, a message will appear and the machine remains
paused.
Paper Jams at the Handle [3a] (Using the Knob [3b])

Problem Solving

appear inside the machine.
15
606
Paper Jams
3 Turn the knob [3b] to the left (1), and eject the
jammed paper (2).
4 Gently pull the paper to remove.


paused.
Paper Jams at the Handle [3c]

on the output tray, gently pull the paper
straight from the exit area to remove.
2 Open the finisher front cover. Problem Solving
15
607
15 Problem Solving
3 Move the handle [3c] to the left.

5 Return the handle [3c] to its original position.

paused.
Paper Jams at the Handle [3d]
2 Move the handle [3d] to the right.

Problem Solving
15
608
Paper Jams

4 Return the handle [3d] to its original position.

paused.
Paper Jams at the Handle [3d] (when the paper is ejected at the output area)
1 Gently pull the jammed paper to the right to

remove.
Paper Jams in the Booklet Unit [4] (For C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)
Problem Solving
2 Pull out the booklet unit [4].
15
609
15 Problem Solving
3 Turn the knob [4a] to the left (1), and remove

all the jammed paper (2).
4 Return the booklet unit [4] to its original position.

paused.
Paper Jams in the Booklet Tray [4a] (For C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)
2 Turn the knob [4a] to the right to eject the

jammed paper onto the booklet tray.

Problem Solving

15
paused.
610
Paper Jams
Paper Jams in the Folder Unit CD1

The following describes how to clear paper jams inside the folder unit when the Folder Unit
CD1 (optional) is installed.
Paper Jams at the Handle [2a] .................................................................................................................................................611
Paper Jams at the Handle [2b] .................................................................................................................................................612
Paper Jams at the Knob [2c], the Handle [2e]/[2f], and the Tri-fold Output Tray [2d]..............................................612
Paper Jams at the Tri-fold Output Tray [2d] and the Handle [2g] ..................................................................................613
Note • A remedy differs depending on where the paper jam occurs. Follow the instructions displayed and
Paper Jams at the Handle [2a]
1 Make sure that the machine has stopped, and

open the folder unit door of the Folder Unit
CD1.

Problem Solving
4 Close the folder unit door of the Folder Unit CD1.

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the folder unit door of the Folder
Unit CD1 is even slightly open. 15
611
15 Problem Solving
Paper Jams at the Handle [2b]

CD1.
2 Move the handle [2b] to the left (1), and

remove the jammed paper (2).
3 Return the handle [2b] to its original position.

Unit CD1 is even slightly open.
Paper Jams at the Knob [2c], the Handle [2e]/[2f], and the Tri-fold Output Tray [2d]

Problem Solving

CD1.
15
612
Paper Jams
2 Pull out the Tri-fold output tray [2d] (1), and

move the handle [2e] to the right (2). Remove
3 If you cannot remove the paper in step 2,

return the handle [2e] to its original position
(1), and move the handle [2f] (2). Turn the
knob [2c] to the left (3), and then remove the
jammed paper (4).
4 Return the handle opened ([2f] or [2e]) to its

original position (1), and push the Tri-fold
output tray [2d] in (2).

Paper Jams at the Tri-fold Output Tray [2d] and the Handle [2g]

CD1. Problem Solving
2 Pull out the Tri-fold output tray [2d] (1), and 15

move the handle [2g] to the right (2). Remove
613
15 Problem Solving
3 Return the handle [2g] (1), and push the Tri-

fold output tray [2d] in (2).

Problem Solving
15
614
Document Jams
Document Jams
When a document jam occurred in the document feeder, the machine stops and a message
is displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed to clear the document
jam and then load the document in the document feeder again.
Note • The instructions differ depending on which of the following two document feeders is attached.
- Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C
- Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC (optional)
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C
1 Pull up the handle of the top cover of the

document feeder, and then open the top cover
until it stops.
2 If the document is not caught in the entry of

the document feeder, pull out the document.
3 If the massage on the screen instructs you to Knob

turn the knob, turn the knob to eject the
document upwards.
Important • If the document is caught, do not pull it out
forcibly. The document could be damaged. Problem Solving
4 If the message on the display instructs you to

open the inner cover, lift up the handle, and Handle
open the inner cover. 15
615
15 Problem Solving
5 Turn the knob to eject the document upwards Knob

to remove.
forcibly. The document could be damaged.
6 Close the inner cover of the document feeder.

8 If you cannot find the document, lift the document feeder gently, and remove the
document if it is there, and then close the document feeder.
9 If you still cannot find the document in step 8,
lift the document feeder tray and remove the
document.
10 Return the document feeder tray gently.

11 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and then load the document
again following the instructions displayed on the touch screen.
Note • After removing the jammed document, reload the entire document including the pages already
scanned. The machine will automatically skip the scanned pages and start scanning unscanned
pages.
• Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such
documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC (optional)

Problem Solving
1 Pull up the handle of the top cover of the

document feeder, and then open the top cover
until it stops.
15
616
Document Jams
2 If the document is not caught in the entry of

the document feeder, pull out the document.
3 If the massage on the screen instructs you to Knob

turn the knob, turn the knob to eject the
document upwards.
forcibly. The document could be damaged.
5 If you cannot find the document, lift the

document feeder gently, open the Side 2
scanner and remove the document if it is there.
6 Return the Side 2 scanner first, and then close

the document feeder gently.
Problem Solving
7 If you could not find the document in step 5,

lift the document feeder tray and remove the
document.
15
8 Return the document feeder tray gently.

9 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and then load the document
again following the instructions displayed on the touch screen.
617
15 Problem Solving
Note • After removing the jammed document, reload the entire document including the pages already
scanned. The machine will automatically skip the scanned pages and start scanning unscanned
pages.
• Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such
documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.
Problem Solving
15
618
Stapler Faults
Stapler Faults
This section describes how to clear stapler troubles when the optional finisher is installed.
Perform the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or staples are
bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have tried the
following solutions.
Unstapled Bent staple
If copies are stapled as shown in the figures below, contact our Customer Support Center.
One side of staple rising up Staple bent in reverse direction
Flattened staple Entire staple rising up
Problem Solving
Staple rising up with center

pressed in
15
619
15 Problem Solving
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-A1)

This section describes how to clear staple jam occurred in the staple cartridge of the Finisher-
A1 (optional).

and open the finisher front cover.
2 Take the staple cartridge out of the machine.

the finisher.
3 After you take out the staple cartridge, check

4 Pull up the metal part of the staple cartridge as

shown in the illustration.
Problem Solving
5 Remove the jammed staples (1), and then

return the metal part pulled up in step 4 to the
15 original position (2).
CAUTION
Be careful in removing jammed staples.
620
Stapler Faults
6 Push the staple cartridge into the machine until

7 Close the finisher front cover.
Note • If the finisher front cover is not completely
closed, a message will appear and the
machine remains paused.
If you cannot remove jammed staples even after you perform the above procedure, contact
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge (for Finisher-B1)

This section describes how to clear staple jam occurred in the staple cartridge of the Finisher-
B1 (optional).

2 Grasp the handle as shown in the illustration to

pull out the staple cartridge to the right,
towards you.
3 Move up the staple cartridge, and then take it Problem Solving

out of the machine.
15
621
15 Problem Solving
4 After you take out the staple cartridge, check



original position (2).
CAUTION
7 Push the staple cartridge into the machine until

Problem Solving

paused.
15
622
Stapler Faults
Staple Jams in Staple Cartridge

(for C3 Finisher and C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)
This section describes how to clear staple jam occurred in the staple cartridge of the C3
Finisher (optional) and the C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional).

2 With grasping the lever [R1] of the staple

cartridge holder, pull out the holder to the right,
towards you.
3 With grasping the orange lever, pull out the

staple cartridge.
the finisher.
• When the C3 Finisher Staple Unit 65 Sheets is

installed, pull down the orange lever, and pull
out the staple cartridge.
Problem Solving
4 After removing the staple cartridge, check

15
623
15 Problem Solving


original position (2).
CAUTION
7 With grasping the orange lever of the staple

cartridge, push the staple cartridge into its
original position until it clicks into place.

paused.
Booklet Staple Jams in Booklet Staple Cartridge

Problem Solving
(for C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker)

This section describes how to clear staple jam occurred in the booklet staple cartridge of the
C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional).

15
624
Stapler Faults
2 Pull out the booklet unit.
3 With grasping the lever of the booklet staple

cartridge, push the booklet staple cartridge
downward. Then, pull out the booklet staple
cartridge upwards.
4 Push down the metal part of the staple

cartridge.
5 Remove the jammed staples (1), and return the

metal part pushed down in step 4 to its original
position (2).
CAUTION
Problem Solving
6 Return the booklet staple cartridge to its
original position.
15
625
15 Problem Solving
7 Slightly push the booklet staple cartridge

upwards, and make sure that it clicks into place.
Note • Return the booklet staple cartridge until ( )
of the booklet staple cartridge is fitted in
( ) of the booklet unit.
8 Return the booklet unit to its original position.

Note • If the door is not closed completely, a message appears and the machine will remain paused.
Problem Solving
15
626
16 Appendix
This chapter describes the machine specifications, notes and restrictions, optional
components, and printer emulation languages.
 Specifications ...............................................................................................................................628

Printable Area ..............................................................................................................................653
 Internal Fonts...............................................................................................................................654
 Optional Components ..............................................................................................................656

Fold Position Adjustment ........................................................................................................659
 Adjust Image Transfer .............................................................................................................667

ESC/P-K Emulation .....................................................................................................................670

PDF Direct Print ...........................................................................................................................685
 DocuWorks Direct Print ............................................................................................................687
 PCL Emulation..............................................................................................................................689
 HP-GL/2 Emulation ....................................................................................................................697

Notes and Restrictions..............................................................................................................715
 Using the Telephone.................................................................................................................752

Activity Report .............................................................................................................................754
 EP System ......................................................................................................................................758
 Glossary ..........................................................................................................................................759
16 Appendix
Specifications
This section lists the main specifications of the machine. Note that the specifications and
the appearance of the product may change without prior notice.
 Basic Specifications / Copy Function
Type Console
Memory 4 GB
Important • Optional memory may be required for some features.
HDD Optional: 160 GB or more
Important • Not all the HDD space described above can be used.
Color Capability Full color
Scanning Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Printing Resolution 1,200 x 2,400 dpi (multicolored photo), 600 x 600 dpi (text/text-photo/
photo/map)
Halftone/Printable Colors 256 halftones for each color (16,700,000 colors)
Warm-up Time 30 seconds or less (at 20 °C room temperature)
When the main power is switched on: 24 seconds or less.
Document Size The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17") for both sheets and
books.
Paper Size [Paper Trays 1 to 4]
Maximum : SRA3 12.6 x 17.7" (320 x 450 mm),
: 12 x 18" (305 x 457 mm)
Minimum : A5 (148 x 210 mm)
[Paper Tray 5]
Maximum : 12 x 19" (305 x 483 mm)
Minimum : Postcard (100 x 148 mm),
: Envelope (120 x 235 mm)
Image loss width: Top edge, 4 mm or less; bottom edge, 2 mm or less;

left and right edges, 2 mm or less
Important • If the X direction of non-standard size paper is less than 140 mm,
copying may not be performed correctly.
Paper Weight Paper Tray 1 to 4 : 52 - 300 gsm
Paper Tray 5 (bypass tray) : 52 - 300 gsm
Important • Use paper recommended by Fuji Xerox. Copying may not be
performed correctly depending on the conditions.
Appendix
• Some types of paper may be jammed or wrinkled.
16
628
Specifications
First Copy Output Time <When the document glass is used>

Important ApeosPort-V C7775, DocuCentre-V C7775

The values may vary For A4 /monochrome priority mode
depending on the (the default for the [Output Color] is [Black & White] or [No Default])
machine configuration. Monochrome : 3.3 seconds
Color : 5.4 seconds
For A4 /color priority mode
(the default for the [Output Color] is [Color], [Auto Detect], [Dual Color] or
[Single Color])
Monochrome : 4.6 seconds
Color : 4.1 seconds
*
Same magnification/Paper Tray 1/1-sided/Center Tray
ApeosPort-V C6675, DocuCentre-V C6675

For A4 /monochrome priority mode
(the default for the [Output Color] is [Black & White] or [No Default])
Color : 5.4 seconds
[Single Color])
Color : 4.1 seconds
*

Color : 6.5 seconds
[Single Color])
Color : 5.2 seconds
*Same magnification/Paper Tray 1/1-sided/Center Tray

Color : 7.0 seconds
[Single Color])
Appendix

Color : 5.7 seconds
*
16
629
16 Appendix
First Copy Output Time ApeosPort-V C3375, DocuCentre-V C3375,


The values may vary  For A4 /monochrome priority mode
Color : 7.7 seconds
(the default for the [Output Color] is [Color], [Auto Detect], [Dual Color]
or [Single Color])
Color : 6.4 seconds
*

Color : 10.0 seconds
or [Single Color])
Color : 8.7 seconds
*
Appendix
16
630
Specifications
First Copy Output Time <When the document feeder is used>


The values may vary For A4 /monochrome priority mode
Color : 7.2 seconds
[Single Color])
Color : 6.5 seconds
*

Color : 7.2 seconds
[Single Color])
Color : 6.5 seconds
*

Color : 9.4 seconds
[Single Color])
Color : 8.1 seconds

[Single Color])
Appendix

Color : 8.1 seconds
*
16
631
16 Appendix
First Copy Output Time ApeosPort-V C3375, DocuCentre-V C3375,


The values may vary 
With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C:
depending on the For A4 /monochrome priority mode
machine configuration. (the default for the [Output Color] is [Black & White] or [No Default])
Color : 7.9 seconds
or [Single Color])
Color : 7.9 seconds
*

With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC:
Color : 8.2 seconds
or [Single Color])
Color : 8.2 seconds
*


With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C:
or [Single Color])

With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC:
or [Single Color])
Appendix

*
16 Reduction/Enlargement Size-for-Size :
Preset % :
1±0.7%
1:0.50, 1:0.70, 1:0.81, 1:0.86, 1:1.15, 1:1.22, 1:1.41,
1:2.00
Variable % : 1:0.25-1:4.00 (1% increments)
632
Specifications
Continuous Copy Speed <ApeosPort-V C7775, DocuCentre-V C7775>

Important  Paper Tray 1 - 4, 6 : Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification

The speed may be [Monochrome] [Color]
reduced due to image B5 , A4 : 70 sheets/minute 70 sheets/minute
quality adjustment. A4, B5 : 50 sheets/minute 50 sheets/minute
 The performance may
B4 : 40 sheets/minute 40 sheets/minute
be reduced depending A3 : 35 sheets/minute 35 sheets/minute
on the paper type and/  Paper Tray 1 - 4, 6 : Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification
or the paper tray. [Monochrome] [Color]
 When paper in width
B5 , A4 : 70 pages/minute 70 pages/minute
narrower than B5, such
A4, B5 : 50 pages/minute 50 pages/minute
as postcards, is output
B4 : 26 pages/minute 26 pages/minute
continuously,
A3 : 24 pages/minute 24 pages/minute
temperature on the  Paper Tray 5 : Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
fusing unit becomes
[Monochrome] [Color]
high. As a result, the
machine may suspend B5 , A4 : 52 sheets/minute 52 sheets/minute
the output, appearing a A4, B5 : 42 sheets/minute 42 sheets/minute
message "Please wait", B4 : 36 sheets/minute 36 sheets/minute
and resumes in 1 A3 : 32 sheets/minute 32 sheets/minute
 Paper Tray 5 : Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification
minute. Also, for paper
A5 or smaller, even after [Monochrome] [Color]
1 sheet of paper is B5 , A4 : 52 pages/minute 52 pages/minute
output, the machine A4, B5 : 42 pages/minute 42 pages/minute
may suspend with a B4 : 25 pages/minute 25 pages/minute
"Please wait" message A3 : 23 pages/minute 23 pages/minute
and may resume in 30 Important • When paper is fed from Tray 5 and the paper size is set to [Auto
seconds. Detect], the printing speed for the first page will be slower.
 It may result in low
productivity when using <ApeosPort-V C6675, DocuCentre-V C6675>

the center tray - upper 
Paper Tray 1 - 4, 6 : Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
for 2-sided copying. [Monochrome] [Color]
B5 , A4 : 65 sheets/minute 65 sheets/minute
A4, B5 : 46 sheets/minute 46 sheets/minute
A3 : 32 sheets/minute 32 sheets/minute
 Paper Tray 1 - 4, 6 : Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification
Appendix
B5 , A4
A4, B5
: 52 pages/minute 52 pages/minute
16
Important • When paper is fed from Tray 5 and the paper size is set to [Auto
Detect], the printing speed for the first page will be slower.
633
16 Appendix


on the paper type and/ 
continuously,
fusing unit becomes

Appendix
16 B5 , A4
A4, B5
634
Specifications


on the paper type and/  Paper Tray 1 - 4, 6 : Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification
continuously,
fusing unit becomes

Appendix
B5 , A4
A4, B5
16
635
16 Appendix


on the paper type and/ 
B4 : 9.9 pages/minute 9.9 pages/minute
continuously,
A3 : 9.0 pages/minute 9.0 pages/minute
fusing unit becomes
may suspend with a B4 : 9.8 pages/minute 9.8 pages/minute
"Please wait" message A3 : 8.9 pages/minute 8.9 pages/minute
productivity when using

the center tray - upper
for 2-sided copying.
Paper Tray Capacity [3 Tray Module Model (the total of 4 trays)]
 Standard :
2,090 sheets (500 sheets x 4 trays + 90 sheets (Bypass tray))
 Optional :
HCF B1 2,030 sheets

 Maximum paper capacity :
4,120 sheets (500 sheets + 3 Tray Module + Bypass tray + HCF B1)
[Tandem Tray Module Model]

 Standard :
3,075 sheets (500 sheets x 2 trays (Tray 1 and 2) + 860 sheets (Tray 3) +
1,125 sheets (Tray 4) + 90 sheets (Bypass tray))
 Optional :
HCF B1 2,030 sheets

Appendix
 Maximum paper capacity :
5,105 sheets (500 sheets + Tandem Tray Module + Bypass tray + HCF
B1)
Important • When using 80 gsm paper
16 Continuous Copy 999 sheets

Note • The machine may pause temporarily to perform image stabilization.
Output Tray Capacity Exit 2 Tray : approximately 250 sheets (A4),
approximately 125 sheets (A3)
Center tray : approximately 250 sheets (A4),
approximately 125 sheets (A3)
Side tray (optional) : approximately 100 sheets (A4, A3)
Important • When using P paper
636
Specifications
Power Supply <ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675, DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675>

AC 220 - 240 V ±10%, 10 A, 50/60 Hz / 110 V ±10%, 12.5 A + 7.5 A, 60 Hz
(2 power supplies)
<ApeosPort-V C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275, DocuCentre-V C5575/
C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275>
AC 220 - 240 V ±10%, 10 A, 50/60 Hz / 110 V ±10%, 15 A, 60 Hz (1 power
supply)
Power Consumption <ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675, DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675>
Maximum power consumption : 2.2 kW (AC 220 V ±10%)
2.4 kW (AC 240 V ±10%)
2.2 kW (AC 110 V ±10%)
Standby mode : 119 W or less
Sleep mode : 1.3 W or less (AC 220 - 240 V ±10%)
1.1 W or less (AC 110 V ±10%)
2.4 kW (AC 240 V ±10%)
1.65 kW (AC 110 V ±10%)
1.1 W or less (AC 110 V ±10%)
<ApeosPort-V C3375/C3373/C2275, DocuCentre-V C3375/C3373/
C2275>
2.4 kW (AC 240 V ±10%)
1.65 kW (AC 110 V ±10%)
1.1 W or less (AC 110 V ±10%)
Dimensions Width 640 x Depth 699 x Height 1,128 mm
(with Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C)
Width 640 x Depth 699 x Height 1,143 mm
(with Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC)
Weight <ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675, DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675>
The machines with Copy/Print/Fax/Scan features: 148 kg (with Duplex
Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC)
Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC)
<ApeosPort-V C3375/C3373/C2275, DocuCentre-V C3375/C3373/
C2275>
Automatic Document Feeder B1-C)
Important • The weight is without the power cord, a toner cartridge or any paper.
Space Requirement Width 1,064 x Depth 699 mm *1,*2
Appendix
(With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C)

Width 1,108 x Depth 699 mm *1,*2
(With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC)
*1 : When the bypass tray is fully extended.
*2 : When the stopper of the document output tray is pulled out. 16
 Print Function
Type Built-in
637
16 Appendix
Paper Size* Maximum:

SRA3 (320 x 450 mm), 12.6 x 17.7" (320 x 450 mm),
12 x 18" (305 x 457 mm), A3
[Bypass Tray: 12 x 19" (305 x 483mm), 320 x 1,200 mm*]
Minimum:
A5
[Bypass Tray: Postcard, Envelope (120 x 235 mm)]
Image Loss Width:
Top edge: 4 mm or less, Bottom edge: 2 mm or less,
Left and Right edges: 2 mm or less
* : Printing long document (106 - 256 gsm) is supported. However, when any finisher is installed,
the long document print is not supported.
Continuous Print Speed Same as the continuous copy speed

Important • This speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment.
• The performance may be reduced depending on the paper type and/
or the paper tray.
Printing Resolution Output resolution: 1,200 x 2,400 dpi, 1,200 x 1,200 dpi
256 halftones for each color (16,700,000 colors)
Data processing resolution:
Standard: 600 x 600 dpi, Fine: 600 x 600 dpi, Superfine: 1,200 x 1,200 dpi*
* : When printing in high quality or high resolution mode, printing speed may be reduced.
PDL Standard : PCL6, PCL5

Optional : PostScript® 3TM
Protocol Ethernet (standard):
TCP/IP (lpd, IPP, Port9100, SMB, WSD, ThinPrint®)
Parallel (optional):
Compatible, Nibble, ECP
Appendix
16
638
Specifications
Operating System Standard : PCL6

Microsoft® Windows® XP,
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003,
Microsoft® Windows Vista®,
Microsoft® Windows® 7,
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1,
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional x64,
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 x64,
Microsoft® Windows Vista® x64,
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 x64,
Microsoft® Windows® 7 x64,
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 x64,
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion,
OS X 10.9 Mavericks
Optional : PostScript® 3TM

Appendix
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion,

OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks
Note • For information about the latest supported OS, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Fonts PCL :
European 83 type faces, symbol 42 sets, Korean font 6 type faces, Chinese
16
font 1 type face, Chinese font 4 type faces (optional)
PostScript (optional) :
European 136 type faces
639
16 Appendix
Emulation ESC/P-K (LQ1900K II), TIFF, PDF, HP-GL (HP7586B), HP-GL/2 /RTL (HP
Design Jet 750C Plus), DocuWorks, PCL5/PCL6 (HP Color Laser Jet 5500),
KSSM, KS5843, KS5895
Connectivity Standard:
Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T), USB 2.0*
Optional:
Ethernet (1000BASE-T)
Bi-directional parallel (IEEE1284-B)
* : USB 2.0 is supported by Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2008,
Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1, Windows® XP Professional x64,
Windows Server® 2003 x64, Windows Server® 2008 x64, Windows Vista® x64, Windows
Server® 2008 R2 x64, Windows® 7 x64, Windows Server® 2012 x64, Windows Server® 2012
R2, Windows® 8 x 64, Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and
OS X 10.9 Mavericks.
 Scan Function
Type Color scanner

Document Size Same as the Copy Function
Scanning Resolution 600 x 600 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
Scanning Speed With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C
Monochrome : 70 sheets/minute
Color : 70 sheets/minute
With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC
(2 sided: Monochrome: 150 pages/min., Color: 150 pages/min.)*
* : When Quiet mode is disabled, Monochrome: 160 pages/min, Color: 160 pages/min.
(For ITU-T No.1 Chart A4 , 200 dpi, Store to Folder)
Important • The scanning speed varies depending on documents.
Connectivity Standard : Ethernet 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Optional : Ethernet 1000BASE-T
Appendix
16
640
Specifications
Store to Folder Protocol : TCP/IP (WebDAV, HTTP)

File Format:
Monochrome binary : TIFF, PDF*, DocuWorks*, XPS*
Gray scale : TIFF, JPEG, PDF*, DocuWorks*, XPS*
Full color : TIFF, JPEG, PDF*, DocuWorks*, XPS*,
high-compressed DocuWorks*,
high-compressed PDF*,
high-compressed XPS*
* : Supported only when documents are received using CentreWare Internet Services.
Driver: TWAIN
Operating System:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 x64
Note • For information about the latest supported OS, refer to the Fuji Xerox
Web site.
Appendix
16
641
16 Appendix
Scan to PC Protocol : TCP/IP (SMB, FTP)

Operating System :
Mac OS X 10.4.11/10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion,
OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion
Web site.
File Format:
Monochrome binary :
TIFF (Compression type: MH, MMR),
DocuWorks (Compression type: MH, MMR),
PDF (Compression type: MH, MMR, JBIG2),
XPS (Compression type: MH, MMR)
Gray scale/Full color:
TIFF (Compression type: JPEG), JPEG,
DocuWorks (Compression type: JPEG),
PDF (Compression type: JPEG, Flate),
XPS (Compression type: JPEG),
Microsoft® Word*, Microsoft® Excel® *
* : The Advanced Scan Kit (optional) is required.
Scan to E-mail Protocol : TCP/IP (SMTP)
File Format :
Monochrome binary:
TIFF (Compression type: MH, MMR),
DocuWorks (Compression type: MH, MMR),
PDF (Compression type: MH, MMR, JBIG2),
XPS (Compression type: MH, MMR)
Appendix
Gray scale/full color:

TIFF (Compression type: JPEG), JPEG,
DocuWorks (Compression type: JPEG),
PDF (Compression type: JPEG, Flate),
XPS (Compression type: JPEG),
16 Microsoft® Word*, Microsoft® Excel® *
* : The Advanced Scan Kit (optional) is required.
 Fax Function
Sending Document Size Maximum : A3, 11 x 17", Long document (Maximum: 600 mm)
642
Specifications
Recording Paper Size Maximum : A3, 11 x 17"

Minimum : A5
Transmission Time 2 seconds or more but below 3 seconds
Important • When transmitting an A4 size 700-character document in the
standard quality (8 x 3.85 lines/mm) and high speed mode (28.8 kbps
or above: JBIG). This is only the transmission speed for image
information and does not include the controlling time for the
communication. Note that the actual transmission time depends on
the content of documents, the machine that the recipient uses, and
the status of the communication line.
Transmission Mode ITU-T G3
Scanning Resolution Standard :
8 x 3.85 lines/mm
200 x 100 dpi (7.9 x 3.9 dots/mm)
Fine : 8 x 7.70 lines/mm
200 x 200 dpi (7.9 x 7.9 dots/mm)
Superfine (400dpi) : 400 x 400 dpi (15.7 x 15.7 dots/mm)
Superfine (600dpi) : 600 x 600 dpi (23.6 x 23.6 dots/mm)
Coding Method MH / MR / MMR / JBIG
Transmission Speed G3 :33.6/31.2/28.8/26.4/24.0/21.6/19.2/16.8/14.4/12.0/9.6/7.2/4.8/
2.4kbps
No. of Fax Lines PSTN, PBX (G3 maximum 3 lines)
 Direct Fax Function
Sending Document Size A3, B4, A4

Fax Resolution Same as the Scanning Resolution for Fax Function
Transmission Speed Same as the Fax Function
Applicable Lines Same as the Fax Function
Operating System Microsoft® Windows® XP,
Appendix

Microsoft® Windows® 8 x64, 16
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion,
OS X 10.9 Mavericks
Web site.
643
16 Appendix
 Internet Fax Function
Sending Document Size A3, B4, A4, Long document (Maximum: 600 mm)
Scanning Resolution Same as the Fax Function
Output Format Format : TIFF-FX
Compression method : MH, MMR, JBIG
Profile TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J
Protocol Transmission : SMTP, Reception: SMTP, POP3
 IP Fax (SIP) Function
Sending Document Size A3, B4, A4, Long document (Maximum 600 mm)
Scanning Resolution Same as the Fax Function
Protocol SIP, JT-T.38
Output Format Format : TIFF-FX
Compression method : MH, MMR, JBIG
 Duplex Output Unit
Paper Size Maximum: SRA3, 12.6 x 17.7" (320 x 449.6mm),

12 x 18" (304.8 x 457.2mm), A3
Minimum : A5
Paper Weight 60 - 220 gsm
 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-C
Type Duplex Automatic Document Feeder

Document Size/Document Maximum : A3, 11 x 17" (279 x 432 mm)
Weight Minimum : A5*, 38 - 128 gsm (2 sided: 50 - 128 gsm)
* : For non-standard size paper: 125 x 85 mm
Document Tray Capacity 110 sheets (A4 1 sided)

Appendix
16
644
Specifications
Feeding Speed A4 1 sided:

<ApeosPort-V C3375, DocuCentre-V C3375>
A4 2 sided:
Note • The number of sheets may vary depending on the scanning speed.
Dimensions Width 560 x Depth 492 x Height 105 mm
Weight 8 kg
 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder B1-PC (optional)
Type 1 Pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder

Document Size/Document Maximum : A3, 11 x 17" (279 x 432 mm)
Weight Minimum : A5*, 38 - 128 gsm (2 sided: 50 - 128 gsm)
* : For non-standard size paper: 125 x 85 mm
Document Tray Capacity 130 sheets (A4 1 sided)

Appendix
16
645
16 Appendix
Feeding Speed A4 1 sided:

A4 2 sided:
Note • The number of sheets may vary depending on the scanning speed.
Appendix

Weight 11 kg
 Finisher-A1 (optional)*
16
Type Finisher tray x 1 : Sorting (Offset available),
Stacking (Offset available)
Paper Size Maximum: A3, 11 x 17", Minimum: Postcard (100 x 148 mm)
Paper Weight 52 - 220 gsm*
* : 52 - 55 gsm output paper may not be aligned properly depending on the paper type.
646
Specifications
Stacker Capacity Unstapled sheets

A4 : 500 sheets
B4 : 250 sheets
A3 or larger : 200 sheets
Mixed size* : 250 sheets
Stapled sheets
30 sets
* : With paper of a larger size delivered on paper of a smaller size.
Staple Capability : A4 : 50 sheets (90 gsm or less)
B4 or larger : 30 sheets (90 gsm or less)
Paper size : Maximum: A3, 11 x 17", Minimum: B5
Position : 1 position (front: angled)
Weight 12 kg
Space Requirement (with Width 1,129 x Depth 699 mm (main unit + Finisher-A1, when the
the main unit) extension tray and the bypass tray are fully extended)
* : Finisher-A1 cannot be installed to ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475 or DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475.
 Finisher-B1 (optional)*1
Type Finisher tray x 1 : Sorting (Offset available),

Paper Size Maximum : A3, 11 x 17"
Minimum : B5
Paper Weight 52 - 220 gsm*
Stacker Capacity Unstapled sheets

A4 : 2,000 sheets
B4 or larger : 1,000 sheets
Mixed size*2 : 300 sheets
Stapled sheets
A4 : 100 sets or 1,000 sheets
B4 or larger : 75 sets or 750 sheets
Creased + Stapled*3 : 50 sets or 600 sheets
Creased*3 : 500 sheets
Staple Capability : 50 sheets (90 gsm or less)
Appendix
Paper size : Maximum: A3, 11 x 17", Minimum: B5

Position : 1 position (front: angled, back: straight)
2 positions (parallel)
Punch*4 Number of holes : 2/4 holes, US 2/3 holes 16

Paper size : A3, 11 x 17", B4, Legal (8.5 x 14"), A4, A4 ,
Letter (8.5 x 11"), Letter (8.5 x 11") , B5
Paper weight : 52 - 200 gsm
647
16 Appendix
Booklet Finishing*3 Sheets per subset : 2-15 sheets (Crease + Staple), 1-5 sheets (Crease)
Paper size : Maximum: A3, 11 x 17",
Minimum : A4, Letter (8.5 x 11")
Paper weight : 60 - 80 gsm (Crease + Staple)
60 - 105 gsm (Crease)
Width 620 x Depth 597 x Height 1,057 mm (with the Booklet Maker Unit)
Weight 28 kg
37 kg (with the Booklet Maker Unit)
Space Requirement (with Width 1,666 x Depth 699 mm (Main unit + Finisher-B1, when the
the main unit) extension tray and the bypass tray are fully extended)
Width 1,666 x Depth 709 mm (Main unit + Finisher-B1 + Booklet Maker
Unit, when the extension tray and the bypass tray are fully extended)
*1 : Finisher-B1 cannot be installed to ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675 or DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675.

*2 : With paper of a larger size delivered on paper of a smaller size.
*3 : For Crease + Staple, the Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1 (optional) is required. Note that the next job will not be output
until the creased and stapled booklet is removed from the finisher tray, and that the creased and stapled booklet will not be
output when the output paper remaining on the finisher tray is of a smaller size.
*4 : For punching, 2/4 Hole Punch Kit for Finisher-B1 (optional) or US 2/3 Hole Punch Kit for Finisher-B1 (optional) is required.
 C3 Finisher (optional)
Type Output tray x 1 : Sorting/Stacking

Finisher tray x 1 : Sorting (Offset available),
Paper Size Output tray
Maximum : 12 x 19" (305 x 483 mm)
Minimum : Postcard
Finisher tray
Maximum : 12 x 19" (305 x 483 mm)
Minimum : B5
Paper Weight Output tray : 52 - 300 gsm*
Finisher tray : 52 - 300 gsm*
Stacker Capacity Output tray 500 sheets (A4)

Finisher tray - Unstapled sheets
A4 : 3,000 sheets
Mixed size* : 300 sheets
Finisher tray - Stapled sheets
B4 or larger : 100 sets or 1,500 sheets
Appendix
Mixed size* : 70 sets or 200 sheets

* : With paper of a larger size delivered on paper of a smaller size.
16
648
Specifications

Note • When the C3 Finisher Staple Unit 65 Sheets (optional) is installed, at
the maximum of 65 sheets can be stapled. Depending on the paper
type, copies may not be aligned or stapled properly.
• When using with Folder Unit CD1, Z-fold sheets can be stapled;
however, since one Z-fold sheet of A3 or 11 x 17" paper becomes the
same in thickness as 10 sheets of unfold paper, the maximum number
of Z-fold sheets of A3 or 11 x 17" paper that can be stapled is reduced.
When converted into unfold sheets of paper that can be stapled, one
Z-fold sheet of A3 or 11 x 17" paper is equivalent to 10 sheets of
unfold paper and one Z-fold sheet of other size of paper is equivalent
to 20 sheets of unfold paper.
If the curl in the paper is very strong, the output paper may not be
stapled properly.
Paper size : Maximum: A3, 11 x 17"
Minimum: B5 , 8 x 10" (203 x 254 mm)
Position : 1 position (front/back: angled),
Punch*1, *2 Number of holes : 2, 3, or 4

Paper size : A3, 11 x 17", B4, A4*, A4 , 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" ,
B5 , 7.25 x 10.5" , 8 x 10", 8 x 10" , 16K ,
Cover A4 , 9 x 11" , 215 x 315 mm, 8.5 x 13",
Legal (8.5 x 14"), 11 x 15", 8K
* : The 3 holes (optional) are not available.
Folding*3 Z-Fold
Paper size: A3, B4, 11 x 17"
Paper weight: 90 gsm or less
C-Fold
Paper size: A4, Letter (8.5 x 11")
Power Supply AC 220 - 240 V ±10% / 110 V ±10%, 0.5 A/0.9 A / for both 50/60 Hz
Maximum Power 100 W
Consumption*4
Width 965 x Depth 726 x Height 1,056 mm (with the Fold Unit CD1 and a
punch unit)
Weight*5 44 kg
98 kg (with the Fold Unit CD1 and a punch unit)
Space Requirement (with Width 1,777 x Depth 699 mm (Main unit + C3 Finisher)
Appendix
the main unit) Width 2,012 x Depth 727 mm (Main unit + C3 Finisher + Fold Unit CD1)
*1 : For punching, Punch Unit 2/4H CD1 (optional) or Punch Unit US 2/3H CD1 (optional) is required.
*2 : You can switch the number of punch holes between 2 holes and 4 holes with the Punch Unit 2/4H CD1 (optional), and US 2
holes and US 3 holes with the Punch Unit US 2/3H CD1 (optional).
*3 : The Fold Unit CD1 (optional) is required.
*4 : This is for the Folder Unit CD1 (optional). The another power source is required when the Folder Unit CD1 is installed.
16
*5 : When the Transport Unit H1 (optional) is installed and the extension tray is fully extended.
649
16 Appendix
 C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional)
Type Output tray x 1 : Sorting/Stacking

Finisher tray x 1 : Sorting (Offset available)
Booklet tray x 1 : Sorting/Stacking
Paper Size Output tray
Maximum : 12 x 19" (305 x 483 mm)
Minimum : Postcard
Finisher tray
Maximum : 12 x 19" (305 x 483 mm)
Minimum : B5
Booklet tray
Maximum : 12 x 18" (305 x 457 mm)
Minimum : B5
Paper Weight Output tray : 52 - 300 gsm*1
Finisher tray : 52 - 300 gsm*1
Booklet tray : 60 to 105 gsm*2
*1 : 52 - 55 gsm output paper may not be aligned properly.
*2 : Cover sheets can be up to 256 gsm.
Stacker Capacity Output tray : 500 sheets (A4)

Finisher tray - Unstapled sheets
A4 : 1,500 sheets
Mixed size*1 : 300 sheets
Finisher tray - Stapled sheets
B4 or larger : 100 sets or 1,500 sheets
Mixed size*1 : 70 sets or 200 sheets
Booklet tray : 20 sets*2
*1 : With paper of a larger size delivered on paper of a smaller size.
*2 : This number may vary depending on the conditions.
Important • When using P paper.
Note • When the C3 Finisher Staple Unit 65 Sheets (optional) is installed, at
the maximum of 65 sheets can be stapled. Depending on the paper
type, copies may not be aligned or stapled properly.
• When using with Folder Unit CD1, Z-fold sheets can be stapled;
however, since one Z-fold sheet of A3 or 11 x 17" paper becomes the
same in thickness as 10 sheets of unfold paper, the maximum number
of Z-fold sheets of A3 or 11 x 17" paper that can be stapled is reduced.
When converted into unfold sheets of paper that can be stapled, one
Z-fold sheet of A3 or 11 x 17" paper is equivalent to 10 sheets of
unfold paper and one Z-fold sheet of other size of paper is equivalent
Appendix
to 20 sheets of unfold paper.

If the curl in the paper is very strong, the output paper may not be
stapled properly.
Paper size : Maximum: A3, 11 x 17", Minimum: B5 , 8 x 10"
16 Position : 1 position (front/back; angled),
650
Specifications
Punch*1, *2 Number of holes : 2-hole/4-hole punch or 2-hole/3-hole punch (US

Specifications)
Paper size : A3, 11 x 17", B4, A4*, A4 , 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" , B5 ,
7.25 x 10.5" , 8 x 10", 8 x 10" , 16K ,
Cover A4 , 9 x 11" , 215 x 315 mm, 8.5 x 13",
Legal (8.5 x 14"), 11 x 15", 8K
* : The 3 holes (optional) are not available.
Booklet Finishing Sheets per subset : 16 sheets (Fold + Staple)*1,
(Maximum) 5 sheets (Fold + Unstaple),
1 sheet (Single Fold)
Paper size
Maximum : SRA3 (320 x 450 mm), 12 x 18" (305 x 457 mm)
Minimum : B5
Paper weight : 60 - 105 gsm (Fold + Staple)*2*3,
60 - 105 gsm (Fold + Unstaple)*3,
60 - 105 gsm (Single Fold)
*1 : The capacity varies depending on how heavy the cover is. Booklets may not be tightly
closed depending on the size or type of the paper.
*2 : Covers can be up to 256 gsm (Extra-HW) for saddle staple during printing.
*3 : Printed covers can be up to 169 gsm (Heavyweight) for middle-fold or saddle staple during
copying, while blank covers can be up to 256 gsm (Extra-HW).
Folding *3 Z-Fold
Paper size: A3, B4, 11 x 17"
C-Fold
Paper size: A4, Letter (8.5 x 11")
Power Supply AC 220 - 240 V ±10% / 110 V ±10%, 0.5 A/0.9 A / for both 50/60 Hz
Maximum Power 100 W
Consumption*4
Width 1,025 x Depth 726 x Height 1,056 mm (with the Fold Unit CD1 and
a punch unit)
Weight*5 61kg
115 kg (with the Fold Unit CD1 and a punch unit)
Space Requirement (with Width 1,836 x Depth 699 mm (Main unit + C3 Finisher with Booklet
the main unit) Maker)
Width 2,071 x Depth 727 mm (Main unit + C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker
+ Fold Unit CD1)
Appendix
*1 : For punching, Punch Unit 2/4H CD1 (optional) or Punch Unit US 2/3H CD1 (optional) is required.
*2 : You can switch the number of punch holes between 2 holes and 4 holes with the Punch Unit 2/4H CD1 (optional), and US 2
holes and US 3 holes with the Punch Unit US 2/3H CD1 (optional).
*3 : The Folder Unit CD1 (optional) is required.
*4 : This is for the Folder Unit CD1 (optional). The another power source is required when the Folder Unit CD1 is installed.
*5 : When the Transport Unit H1 (optional) is installed and the extension tray is fully extended. 16
 Folder Unit CD1 (optional)
Paper Size Z Fold Half Sheet : A3, 11 x 17", B4

Tri-fold : A4, Letter
651
16 Appendix
Paper Weight Z Fold Half Sheet : 60 - 90 gsm

Tri-fold : 60 - 90 gsm
Paper Capacity Tri-fold: 40 sheets
Power / Maximum power AC100V ± 10%, 1.0A, 50/60Hz common, 100W or less
consumption Important • When using Folder Unit CD1, power supply separate from the main
unit is required.
Dimensions / Weight Width 232 x Length 726 x Height 991 mm, 50 kg or less
 Side Tray (optional)
Paper Size Same as the Copy Function

Tray Capacity 100 sheets
Weight 1 kg
Space Requirement (when Width 1,064 x Depth 699 mm*1,2
connected to the main *1 : When the bypass tray is fully extended.
unit) *2 : When the stopper of the document output tray is pulled out.
 HCF B1 (optional)
Paper Size A4 , 8.5 x 11" , B5

Paper Weight 55 - 216 gsm
Tray Capacity 2,030 sheets
Weight 29 kg
Space Requirement (with Width 1,064 x Depth 699 mm*1,2
the main unit) *1 : When the bypass tray is fully extended.
*2 : When the stopper of the document output tray is pulled out.
Appendix
16
652
Printable Area
Printable Area
This section describes the area on paper that can be printed.
Standard Printable Area

The standard printable area is the area of a sheet of paper excluding the 4.0 mm margins
on all four edges of paper. For SRA3 paper (width of 320 mm), the printable area of the
paper is the area excluding the 11.5 mm left and right margins. The actual printable area,
however, may vary depending on the printer (plotter) control language.
Extended Printable Area

When you select the extended printable area setting for printing, you can expand the width
and length of the printable area to 305.0 x 1,194 mm and the print assured area to 297.0 x
476.6 mm. For copying, the printable area and the print assured area can be extended up to
297.0 x 432.0 mm. The area of paper you can print to, however, may vary depending on the
size of paper.
Note • To extend the printable area, change the PCL print driver setting, or the [Print Area] setting on the
touch screen.
For more information on the setting method on the print driver, refer to the help provided for the print driver. For more
information on the setting on the control panel, refer to "Print Area" (P.246).
When the paper width is When the paper width is

When the paper width is
12 inches 12.6 inches
less than 12 inches (A3)
(12 x 19") (SRA3 (320 mm width))
Unprintable area Unprintable area Unprintable area

4mm 4mm 4mm
Print
11.5mm 11.5mm
Printable area/ Printable area/ Guaranteed
2mm Guaranteed 2mm 3.9mm Guaranteed 3.9mm 7.5mm print area 7.5mm
print area print area
2mm 2mm 2mm Printable area

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
Unprintable area Unprintable area Unprintable area

Appendix
4mm 25.3mm 9mm

Copy
Printable area/ Printable area/ Printable area/

2mm Guaranteed 2mm 3.9mm Guaranteed 3.9mm 11.5mm Guaranteed 11.5mm
print area print area print area
16
25.3mm 9mm
2mm
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
653
16 Appendix
Internal Fonts
This section lists the fonts pre-installed on the machine.

For more information on the optional PostScript fonts, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM provided with the
Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional). For more information on the optional HP-GL/2 and PCL fonts, refer to "PCL Emulation"
(P.689) and "HP-GL/2 Emulation" (P.697).
Stroke fonts  European Stroke fonts

(for PCL5 and HP-GL/2)
Outline Euro- ESC/P-K Arial Sans Serif
fonts pean Arial Italic Symbol
Arial Bold Times New Roman
Arial Bold Italic Times New Roman Bold
Courier Times New Roman Italic
Courier Italic Times New Roman Bold Italic
Courier Bold ITC Zapf Dingbats
Courier Bold Italic GoldSEMM
Roman GoldSAMM
PDF Arial Symbol
Arial Italic Times New Roman
Arial Bold Times New Roman Bold
Arial Bold Italic Times New Roman Italic
Courier Times New Roman Bold Italic
Courier Italic ITC Zapf Dingbats
Courier Bold GoldSEMM
Courier Bold Italic GoldSAMM
Appendix
16
654
Internal Fonts
Outline Euro- PCL CG Times Times New Bold

fonts pean CG Times Italic Times New Bold Italic
CG Times Bold Symbol
CG Times Bold Italic Wingdings
Univers Medium Line Printer
Univers Medium Italic Times Roman
Univers Bold Times Italic
Univers Bold Italic Times Bold
Univers Medium Condensed Times Bold Italic
Univers Medium Condensed Helvetica
Italic Helvetica Oblique
Univers Bold Condensed Helvetica Bold
Univers Bold Condensed Italic Helvetica Bold Oblique
Antique Olive CourierPS
Antique Olive Italic CourierPS Oblique
Antique Olive Bold CourierPS Bold
CG Omega CourierPS Bold Oblique
CG Omega Italic SymbolPS
CG Omega Bold Palatino Roman
CG Omega Bold Italic Palatino Italic
Garamond Antiqua Palatino Bold
Garamond Kursiv Palatino Bold Italic
Garamond Halbfett ITC Bookman Light
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett ITC Bookman Light Italic
(Default): Courier ITC Bookman Demi
Courier Italic ITC Bookman Demi Italic
Courier Bold Helvetica Narrow
Courier Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Letter Gothic Helvetica Narrow Bold
Letter Gothic Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Letter Gothic Bold New Century Schoolbook Roman
Albertus Medium New Century Schoolbook Italic
Albertus Extra Bold New Century Schoolbook Bold
Clarendon Condensed New Century Schoolbook Bold
Coronet Italic
Marigold ITC Avant Garde Book
Arial ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
Arial Italic ITC Avant Garde Demi
Arial Bold ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
Arial Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium
Times New Italic
Times New Italic ITC Zapf Dingbats
OCR-B
KO PCL5 Myungio Graphic
Gothic Kungso
R- Gothic Saemmul
Appendix
KS Myungio T-Myungio
Gothic T-Gothic
R- Gothic TR-Gothic
Graphic T-Graphic
Kungso T-Kungso
Saemmul T-Saemmul 16
TC PCL5 ShuSong
SC PCL5 ShuSong
ESC/P-K
Note • The fonts provided will vary depending on the region of use.
655
16 Appendix
Optional Components
The following table shows the optional components available. To purchase these options,
Product Name Description

Duplex Automatic Document Scans multi-page duplex documents internally capturing both
Feeder B1-PC sides at once.
Large Size UI Kit A control panel with 10.4 inch SVGA color touch screen.
HDD Extension Kit *1 Provides the extended copy features and adds the spool and scan
features.
Side Tray Delivers output face up.
Finisher-A1 Staples output sheets.
Finisher-B1 Staples output sheets.
Booklet Maker Unit for Staples output sheets. Also folds output sheets in half or staples
Finisher-B1 them.
2/4 Hole Punch Kit for 2/4 hole-punches output sheets.
Finisher-B1
US 2/3 Hole Punch Kit for 2/3 hole-punches output sheets.
Finisher-B1
C3 Finisher Staples and hole-punches output sheets.
C3 Finisher with Booklet Staples or hole-punches output sheets. Also folds output sheets in
Maker half or staples them.
Transport Unit H1 Transfers paper output from the center tray to the C3 Finisher or
C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker.
Punch Unit 2/4H CD1 2/4 hole-punches output sheets.
Note • C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker is required.
• Punch Unit 2/4H CD1 is included when you purchase the C3
Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker.
Punch Unit US 2/3H CD1 2/3 hole-punches output sheets.
Note • C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker is required.
• Punch Unit US 2/3H CD1 is included when you purchase the
C3 Finisher or C3 Finisher with Booklet Maker.
Folder Unit CD1 Folds output sheets in bi-folded or tri-folded.
C3 Finisher Staple Unit 65 Staples output sheets. Up to 65 sheets can be stapled depending
Sheets on the type of paper.
Appendix
HCF B1 A tray that can load 2,030 sheets of paper (When using 80 gsm
paper).
Wing Table A kit to load related products such as IC Card Reader, or to secure
work space. The table can be placed either right or left side of the
16 document cover.
Attention Light II Tells you the status of the machine such as malfunction, printing,
or faxing status.
Assist Handle A tool to aid you in opening the document glass cover.
Accessory Table A A kit to load related products.
656
Optional Components

IC Card Gate Installation Kit A kit of a table to load IC Card Reader. This is installed on the right
front of the machine.
Full Stack Sensor Detects and tells you whether the stack is full.
English Kit Allows the machine to support English.
Anti Earthquake Kit Prevents the machine from being moved by an earthquake.
Manual Holder A holder to keep the machine’s guides.
Smart WelcomEyes Advance Detects human presence using two motion sensors and
automatically exits the Power Saver mode. The simple
authentication system by face detection is also available using a
camera.
Parallel Port Kit Allows you to use the parallel port.
Gigabit Ethernet Kit Allows you to connect 1000 BASE-T Ethernet.
Secondary Ethernet Kit (Type Allows you to use two lines on the Ethernet interface.
2 (T2) model only)
Adobe PostScript 3 Kit Allows you to use the machine as a PostScript printer. Also enables
printing from Macintosh.
TC/SC Additional Fonts Kit Supports Chinese fonts.
Multi-language Font Kit A UnicodeTM font kit which supports the PCL language for
principal systems like SAP.
Note • UnicodeTM is a character code advocated by Xerox to handle
multiple languages such as Chinese, Korean, Japanese, and
English in one character code.
Scanner Kit *1 Adds the Scan feature (except Store to USB) to the machine.
Advanced Scan Kit Allows you to select the Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel
formats when using E-mail, Scan to PC, and Store to USB feature.
Also, allows you to use optical character recognition (OCR) when
scanning.
External Access Kit *2 Allows you to link to a remote application through the control
panel.
USB Hub Adds a USB port to equip the Memory Card Reader to the
machine.
USB Memory Kit Directly stores data in a USB memory device when scanning.
Also, allows you to print image data taken with a digital camera
as well as data stored with the text format, using the control
panel.
Fax Kit 2 Adds the Fax and Internet Fax feature to the machine.
Appendix
Fax Extension Board 2 Adds extra facsimile lines to the machine.

Note • The Fax Kit 2 is required to use this feature.
Additional G3 Port 2 Adds an additional G3 port to the machine that offers the Fax
feature. 16
Stamp Kit Stamps on a document scanned with Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder B1-C to send as a fax.
Stamp Kit SP Stamps on a document scanned with Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder B1-PC to send as a fax.
IP FAX[SIP] Kit Adds the IP Fax (SIP) feature to the machine.
Server Fax Kit Adds the Server Fax feature to the machine.
657
16 Appendix

Copy Management Prints dates or serial numbers on all the pages of confidential
Expansion Kit documents to restrict duplication.
Network Accounting Kit Allows you to keep track of user accounts via an external
authentication server.
Secure Watermark Kit Allows you to manage security by embedding information in
documents to restrict duplication (for Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder B1-C).
Secure Watermark Kit SP Allows you to manage security by embedding information in
documents to restrict duplication (for Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder B1-PC).
Extensible Customization Kit Allows you to customize login type.
Image Log Kit *2 Allows you to attach job logs, which include information on a user,
time, and the number of sets output, to the copies/prints that
have been output with the machine.
Image Log Kit (for Allows you to attach job logs, which include information on a user,
PostScript® 3TM) *2 time, and the number of sets output, to the copies/prints that
have been output with the machine.
Embedded IC Card Reader A built-in IC Card Reader, which can read data in a smart card.
Embedded IC Card Reader A built-in IC Card Reader, which can read data stored in a
(for HID) Proximity Card (125KHz) manufactured by HID.
Note • This option cannot be installed simultaneously with the one-
touch buttons.
Embedded IC Card Reader for An external IC Card Reader for Wing Table, which can read data
Wing Table in a smart card.
Note • An optional Wing Table is required to install the IC Card
Reader.
Embedded IC Card Reader for An external IC Card Reader for Wing Table, which can read data
Wing Table (for HID) stored in a Proximity Card (125KHz) manufactured by HID.
Note • An optional Wing Table is required to install the IC Card
Reader.
Voice Guidance 2*2 (Type 2 Allows you to operate the machine using the numeric keypad,
(T2) model only) following the the voice guidance.
*1 : DocuCentre series models only

*2 : ApeosPort series models only
Note • The optional components are subject to change without notice.
• For the latest information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Appendix
16
658
Fold Position Adjustment
This section describes how to adjust the fold position.

You can adjust the fold position for each paper type, and save 10 types of adjusted values.
You can assign a set type to each tray.
You can adjust the fold position for single fold, booklet, C fold, Z fold, Z fold half sheet.
1 Load the paper to adjust the fold position in the tray.

2 Press the <Log In/Out> button, and then enter the System Administration mode.
For more information on how to enter the System Administration mode, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.140).
4 Select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Maintenance].
5 Select [Finisher Adjustment].
Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or
[ ] to move to the next screen.
6 Select [Adjust Fold Position].
7 Select [Fold Position Type Setup], and then

select [Change Settings].
Appendix
8 Select a type, and select [Change Settings].
16
659
16 Appendix
9 Select [Name], and select [Change Settings].
10 Enter the type name, and then select [Save].

Note • We recommend you to use a name such as "Single Fold Plain" that allows you to know what the
content is.
11 Select the fold type, and then select [Change Settings].
For details on making each fold adjustment, refer to the following sections.
- For single fold, refer to "Single Fold Position Adjustment" (P.660).
- For booklet, refer to "Booklet Position Adjustment" (P.661).
- For C fold, refer to "C Fold Position Adjustment" (P.663).
- For Z fold, refer to "Z Fold Position Adjustment" (P.664).
- For Z fold half sheet, refer to "Z Fold Half Sheet Position Adjustment" (P.665).
Single Fold Position Adjustment

Adjust the single fold position.
1 Select [Single Fold], and then select [Change

Settings].
2 Specify [Sheets to be folded], and then select

[Sample Printout].
3 Select the tray in which you loaded paper, and

Appendix
press the <Start> button.

The sample is printed.
16
4 Select [Close].
5 Check the sample printout, measuring the misaligned amounts.
660
6 Select [Long at Left] or [Long at Right], and

enter the value you measured in the step 5 in
[Value A Before Adjustment].
7 Select [Adjust].
8 Select [Sample Printout] again.
9 Select the tray in which you loaded paper and press the <Start> button.
10 Select [Close].
11 Confirm the result of sample printout.
12 Adjust the alignment again if necessary. (Steps 5 to 11)
13 Select [Save].
14 Select [Close] until the Services Home screen is displayed.
Booklet Position Adjustment

Adjust the booklet position.
1 Select [Booklet], and then select [Change

Settings].
2 Select [Sample Printout]. Appendix
3 Select the tray in which you loaded paper,

select [2-Sheet Stack], and press the <Start> 16
button.
661
16 Appendix
4 Select the tray in which you loaded paper, select [16-Sheet Stack], and press the <Start>
button.
5 Select [Close].
6 Check the sample printout, measuring the position misaligned amount for 2-sheet stack
and 16-sheet stack.
7 Select [Booklet Fold State (2 Sheets)].
8 Select the state of the fold and staple position

of the printout, and enter the 2-sheet stack
misalignment amount you measured in step 6
in [Values A & B Before Adjustment].
9 Select [Save].
10 Select [Booklet Fold State (16 Sheets)] in the
same way as [Booklet Fold State (2 Sheets)].
Note • Alignment is adjusted automatically when
loading stacks of 2 to 16 sheets.
Set [Variable-Sheet Booklet].

Appendix
11 Select [Adjust].
16 13 Select [Save].
15 Adjust the alignment again if necessary. (Step 6 to 14).
16 Select [Save].
662
C Fold Position Adjustment

Adjust the C fold position.
1 Select [C Fold - A4 ] or [C Fold - 8.5x11" ],

2 Select [Sample Printout].

4 Select [Close].
5 Check the sample printout, measuring the A
and B fold position movement amounts.
6 Enter the values you measured in step 5 in

[Values A & B Before Adjustment], and the
value to which to adjust in [Desired Values A &
B].
Appendix
Important • Set value A and value B so that an edge of

the paper does not extend beyond a fold
position of the paper. Extending an edge of
paper beyond a fold position of the paper
7
may cause a paper jam.
Select [Adjust].
16
10 Select [Save].
663
16 Appendix

12 Adjust the alignment again if necessary. (Steps 5 to 11)
13 Select [Save].
Z Fold Position Adjustment

Adjust the Z fold position.
1 Select [Z Fold - A4 ] or [Z Fold - 8.5x11" ],


4 Select [Close].
5 Check the sample printout, measuring the A
and B fold position movement amounts.
Appendix
6 Enter the values you measured in step 5 in

16 value to which to adjust in [Desired Values A &
B].
Important • Set value A and value B so that an edge of
the paper does not extend beyond a fold
position of the paper. Extending an edge of
paper beyond a fold position of the paper
may cause a paper jam.
7 Select [Adjust].
664

9 Select the tray in which you loaded paper, and press the <Start> button.
10 Select [Close].
12 Adjust the alignment again if necessary. (Step 5 to 11)
13 Select [Save].
Z Fold Half Sheet Position Adjustment

Adjust the Z Fold Half Sheet position.
1 Select [Z Fold Half Sheet - A3 ], [Z Fold Half

Sheet - B4 ], [Z Fold Half Sheet -11x17" ],
or [Z Fold Half Sheet - 8K ], and then select
[Change Settings].

Appendix
4 Select [Close].
5 Check the printed sample printout, and
measure the A and B fold position movement
amounts. 16
665
16 Appendix
6 Enter the value you measured in step 5 in

value to which to adjust in [Desired Values A &
B].
Important • Set value B so that an edge of the paper does
not extend beyond a fold position of the
paper. Extending an edge of paper beyond a
fold position of the paper may cause a paper
jam.
7 Select [Adjust].
9 Select the tray in which you loaded paper, and press the <Start> button.
10 Select [Close].
12 Adjust the alignment again if necessary. (Step 5 to 11)
13 Select [Save].
Appendix
16
666
This section describes how to adjust the transfer output value.

You can specify the transfer output value. This is useful when the toner image does not
transfer to the paper properly.
Adjusting the Transfer Output Value

You can specify the image transfer output value for each paper type.
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button and enter the

For how to enter the System Administration mode, refer to
"System Settings Procedure" (P.140).
<Log In/Out> button

Settings] > [Maintenance].
4 Select [Adjust Image Transfer].
5 Select [Paper Type].

Appendix
16
667
16 Appendix
6 Select the paper type, and then select [Close].
7 Select [Print Sample].
8 Select the paper size, load paper of that size in

Tray 5 (Bypass), and then select [1 Sided] or [2
Sided].
9 Press the <Start> button. -5

Side1
The print sample will be printed. -4
Note • “Side 1” will be printed on the top right of the Side 1 -3

sample, and “Side 2” will be printed on the top right -2
of the Side 2 sample.
-1
• When the paper size is A4, B4, or 8.5 × 11", the
0
sample will be printed on two sheets.
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
Appendix
10 Check the print sample, and take a note of the value (-5 to +10) printed on the left side of
the most-successfully printed row.
Note • When [2 Sided] is selected, do the same for both the Side 1 sample and the Side 2 sample.
16
668
11 Enter the [Side 1] and the [Side 2] values you

selected in step 10.
12 Select [Adjust].
The specified transfer output values will be applied when the paper type of the job is the
same as the paper type selected in step 7.
13 Select [Close].
Appendix
16
669
16 Appendix
ESC/P-K Emulation
This section describes how to use ESC/P-K emulation.
Emulation
This section describes the printer language emulations available on the machine.
Print data conforms to certain rules (grammars). These rules (grammars) are called printer
languages.
The machine supports two types of printer languages: a page description language, which
is used to create images on a page-by-page basis, and an emulation, which is used to
achieve the print results similar to those of other printers. To "emulate" means to imitate the
print results of other printers.
Emulation Mode
When printing data written in a language other than a page description language
supported by the machine, switch the machine to the emulation mode. The relationships
between the emulation mode and the printer to be emulated are as follows:
Emulation Mode Printer to be Emulated

ESC/P-K emulation mode (ESC/P-K mode) LQ1900K II+
Host Interfaces and Emulation

Different host interfaces support different printer languages. The host interfaces that
support printer languages are as follows:

Parallel port

USB port

LPD port
 IPP port

Port9100 port

WSD port
Switching between Printer Languages

The machine provides the Multi-emulation feature that allows switching between different
printer languages.
Appendix
The methods of switching between printer languages are as follows:
 Switching by Commands
Commands for switching between printer languages are provided. Upon receipt of a
16 command, the machine switches to the relevant printer language.
 Automatic Switching
The machine analyzes the data received by a host interface, and automatically identifies
the printer language to be used. It then switches to the identified printer language.
670
ESC/P-K Emulation
 Interface-dependent
You can set a printer language for each host interface by using CentreWare Internet
Services. The machine switches to a printer language corresponding to the host interface
that received data.
Fonts
This section explains the fonts used for emulation.
Available fonts
The following fonts can be used for ESC/P-K emulation:
 ESC/P-K Emulation
Available outline fonts are as follows:

Roman
 Sans serif
 ShuSong

OCR-B
User-defined Characters
On the machine, you can use user-defined characters.
The total capacity of memory for storing user-defined characters and other user-defined
data can be set on the control panel. This value is retained after the machine is turned off.
User-defined characters are registered as bitmap fonts, and cannot be shared among
different printer languages.
Font Caching
To ensure hi-speed printing, outline fonts of up to a certain size are cached. Outline fonts are
converted into bitmap data temporarily and then printed. To minimize this processing time,
the processed bitmap data is saved in the memory. This process is called font caching.
The saved bitmap data is deleted when you turn the machine off or reset it.
Output Feature
This section describes the machine's output feature.
Outputting a Pending Print Job

Appendix
The printing of jobs already received by the machine can be prioritized over other jobs.
For information on prioritizing the printing of jobs already received by the machine, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing
Pending Jobs" in the User Guide.
16
ESC/P-K Emulation Print Features
Pages per Side

The Pages per Side feature reduces the size of multiple-sheet documents and prints them on
a single sheet of paper.
671
16 Appendix
The Pages per Side feature can be used in the ESC/P-K emulation mode. In the ESC/P-K
mode, 2 Up can be used.
Form Overlay
In the ESC/P-K mode, you can register an original form on the machine, and overprint the
form on a printout.
The form to be used for overlaying can be specified on the control panel.
For more information on registering forms, contact our Customer Support Center.
Barcodes
In the ESC/P-K mode, you can use barcodes. The barcodes that can be used are as follows:
 EAN-13
 EAN-8
 Interleaved 2 of 5
 UPC-A
 UPC-E

CODE39
 CODE128
 POSTNET
Forms
You can use ESC/P-K to register forms on the machine. Up to 64 forms can be registered.
For more information on registering forms, contact our Customer Support Center.
ESC/P-K Emulation Settings

The following tables show the basic and extended settings that can be configured on the
ESC/P-K emulation mode menu.
Basic Settings
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Output color 5 Sets the output color.
[0] (Default) : Color
[1] : Monochrome
Appendix
16
672
ESC/P-K Emulation
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Paper tray 3 Sets the paper tray to be used for printing.
[0] : Auto
[1] (Default) : Tray 1
[2] : Tray 2
[3] : Tray 3
[4] : Tray 4
[5] : Tray 5
[6] : Tray 6 (HCF B1)
If printing from Tray 5, instruct printing and then operate the machine to
start printing. To cancel the setting, change the setting for "Tray 5
Confirmation".
Important • When Trays 1 to 4 and 6 is selected, the paper size is determined by the
size of paper loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper Size] cannot be set.
Note • When [Auto] is selected and paper of the same size in the same orientation
in multiple trays is loaded, paper will be fed in the order of Tray 1  Tray 2
 Tray 3  Tray 4  Tray 6. If paper of the same size is loaded in multiple
trays but in different orientations, feeding of the paper loaded in the
landscape orientation is prioritized.
Document size 1 Sets the client-created document size.
[99] (Default) : Paper
[100] : Continuous form paper (10 x 12)
[3] : A3
[4] : A4
[5] : A5
[14] : B4
[15] : B5
[21] : 8.5 x 14
[22] : 8.5 x 13
[23] : 8.5 x 11
[24] : 11 x 17
[0] : Postcard
The number of characters printed is: 80 characters/72 rows for continuous
form paper (10 x 12), 80 characters/66 rows for continuous form paper (10 x
11), 136 characters/72 rows for continuous form paper (15 x 12), and 136
characters/66 rows for continuous form paper (15 x 11).
Note • When a continuous form paper is selected for [Original Size], [Paper
Position] cannot be set.
• When [Preset%] or [Fit to Cut Sheet] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], the
machine automatically calculates the magnification based on a
combination of [Original Size] and [Paper Size]. If the ratio, however, is
Appendix
outside the range of 45-210%, the document will not be reduced/

enlarged, and will be printed at a scale of 100%. When [2 Up] is selected,
the machine automatically calculates the magnification based on a
combination of [Original Size] and 1/2 of [Paper Size].
• The orientation set here is that of the document. It is not affected by the
orientation of paper loaded in the paper trays. 16
Orientation 19 Sets the orientation of paper.
[0] (Default) : Portrait
[1] : Landscape
673
16 Appendix
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Paper size 2 Sets the size of paper to be printed. This setting can be made only when
[Paper Tray] is set to [Auto] or [Tray 5]. This setting can be configured only for
cut sheets.
[3] : A3
[4] : A4
[5] : A5
[14] : B4
[15] : B5
[21] : 8.5 x 14
[22] : 8.5 x 13
[23] : 8.5 x 11
[24] : 11 x 17
[0] : Postcard
Important • If [Paper Tray] is set to Trays 1 to 4 or Tray 6, [Paper Size] cannot be set.
Note • When [Preset%] or [Fit to Cut Sheet] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], the
machine automatically calculates the magnification based on a
combination of [Original Size] and [Paper Size]. If the magnification,
however, is outside the range of 45-210%, the document will not be
reduced/enlarged, and will be printed at a scale of 100%.
When [2 Up] is selected, the machine automatically calculates the
magnification based on a combination of [Original Size] and 1/2 of [Paper
Size].
Extended Settings
Setting Item Item Number Value

Paper position 20 Sets the paper position.
[0] (Default) : Without cut sheet feeder (left)
[1] : With cut sheet feeder (center)
Note • When [Without cut sheet feeder (left)] is specified and FF (line feed
command) is received, the machine skips the number of lines specified in
VFU. When [With cut sheet feeder (center)] is specified, the machine
inserts a page break.
• When a continuous form paper is selected for [Original Size], [Paper
Position] cannot be set.
Output quantity 8 Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1 to 250] (Default: 1): 1-250 copies
Important • When the output quantity is specified by a client, that number of copies is
printed. After printing, the number set on the control panel is overwritten
with the number newly specified. However, the number of copies specified
from the LPD port will not overwrite the number set on the control panel.
Appendix
16
674
ESC/P-K Emulation

Reduce/Enlarge 54 Sets the print magnification.
(Reduce/ [0] (Default) : Preset %
Enlarge mode) [1] : Variable %
[2] : Fit to Cut Sheet
[Preset %] is a magnification automatically calculated based on [Original

Size] and [Paper Size], and reduces/enlarges the printable area of the
document to fit in the printable area of the output paper. Therefore, when
the size of the document and the output paper are the same, the ratio will be
100%. Also, if [2 Up] is selected, the document will be reduced to the size at
which two pages fit onto one sheet of paper.
[Variable %] is a magnification set in [Variable %] under [Reduce/Enlarge]. A
reference point for scaling (reducing/enlarging) is the upper left corner of the
printable area. This reference point applies to all text, images, and graphics.
[Fit to Cut Sheet] prints the entire cut sheet area onto the printable area of
the output paper. It is a magnification automatically calculated based on
[Original Size] and [Paper Size], and reduces/enlarges the entire document
(including the area outside of the printable area) to fit onto the printable
area of the output paper.
17 Sets the magnification for the vertical or horizontal direction.
(Variable %/ [45 to 210] (Default:100): 45-210%
vertical Note • When a continuous form paper is selected for [Original Size], print result is
magnification) identical for [Preset %] and [Fit to Cut Sheet].
18
(Variable %/
horizontal
magnification)
2 Up mode 21 Sets whether to print with the 2 Up or page by page. 2 Up is a feature that
prints two pages onto one sheet of paper. Depending on the paper
orientation, the two pages are printed side by side, or one above the other.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : Forward
[2] : Reverse
Important • When [Landscape] is selected for [Original Size], print result is identical for
[Forward] and [Reverse].
Output 9 Sets the output tray for the printouts.
destination [0] (Default) : Center Tray - Lower
[1] : Side Tray (optional)
[2] : Center Tray - Upper (optional)
[80] : Right Middle Tray (optional)
[81] : Right Top Tray (optional)
Tray 5 67 Prints from Tray 5, after you instruct to print and then operate the machine
Appendix
confirmation to start printing.

[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : On
Grid lines 22 Sets the method for printing double-byte grid lines. The options are as
follows.
[0] (Default) : Image 16
[1] : Font
675
16 Appendix

2 Sided printing 12 Sets the 2 sided printing.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : Head to Head
[2] : Head to Toe
Important • When [Postcard] is selected for [Paper Size], [Head to Head] and [Head to
Toe] cannot be selected.
Font 14 Sets the font for single-byte characters.
(Alphanumeric [0] (Default) : Roman
fonts) [1] : Sanserif
Important • Since this feature selects the default value, its setting will not be affected
when an extended command is received.
Print control 51 Sets whether to print blank pages if included in the document.
(Blank sheet [0] (Default) : Off
output) [1] : On
Note • Even when [Off] is selected, blank pages are printed if they are spaces
created with user-defined characters or images in white color.
• When [Off] is selected for this feature and 2 Up or 2 sided printing is
specified, blank pages are not printed.
52 Extends the position of the right margin.
(Character [0] (Default) : Standard
print area) [1] : Extended
Important • Changing the character print area from [Extended] to [Standard] restores
the left and right margins to the default values.
• When the position of the right margin is set here, that position becomes
the right edge of the character print area.
53 Sets whether or not to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
(Image Image Enhancement smoothens the border between black and white,
enhancement) reducing rough edges, and thus seemingly increasing the resolution.
[0] : Off
[1] (Default) : On
ESCP switch 55 Sets the Text Quality mode to high quality or draft.
(Text quality) [0] (Default) : High Quality
[1] : Draft
Important • Since the default value is selected for the [Text Quality], [Reduced
Characters], [Character Code Table], [Page Length], and [1-inch
Perforation Skip] features, their settings will not be affected when an
extended command is received.
Note • Changing settings does not change actual printing quality.
• This setting affect the Text Quality selection commands. For more
information on the Text Quality selection commands, contact our
Appendix

56 Reduces the size of single-byte alphanumeric characters when printing. Sets
(Reduced whether to reduce their sizes or to print them at a scale of 100%.
characters) [0] (Default) : Off
[1] : On
16 58 Sets the length of a page (printable area) to 11 inches or 12 inches.
(Page length) [0] (Default) : 11 inches
[1] : 12 inches
59 Sets whether or not to leave a 1-inch space between pages.
(1-Inch [0] (Default) : Off
perforation [1] : On
skip) Important • This is effective only when CSF under [Paper Position] is set to [Off].
676
ESC/P-K Emulation

ESCP switch 60 Sets the position to start printing at 8.5 mm or 22 mm below the top edge of
(Paper feed paper.
position) [0] (Default) : 8.5 mm
[1] : 22 mm
61 Sets the action to be executed when a CR command is received.
(CR feature) [0] (Default) : Carriage return
[1] : Carriage return and linefeed
Position 15 Adjusts the printing position vertically or horizontally, and changes the
adjustment (Vertical positions of the margins.
position [0] (Default) : Off
adjustment) [1-500] : -250 to +250 mm
16 Important • Data outside the printable area is not printed regardless of the
(Horizontal adjustment of the print position. In addition, data moved outside the
position printable area as a result of adjusting the print position is not printed.
adjustment)
Escape sequence 62 A normal extended command is specified starting with hexadecimal 1BH ESC
(Escape as the escape sequence identifying the command, followed by ; (3BH).
sequence) When you cannot use a semicolon or ESC code with the host computer, you
can use a special string instead as an escape sequence. This setting specifies
whether or not to enable the escape sequence replacement feature. When
enabling, specify the escape sequence with item 63.
[0] (Default) : Disabled
[1] : Enabled
For more information on extended commands, contact our Customer
Support Center.
63 To control an extended command with a text code, you must specify an
(Escape escape sequence (the first two bytes) of the extended command.
sequence Enter two characters using the keyboard displayed on the screen.
character) [&%] (Default) : 0x21 - 0x7e
Form overlay 64 Constantly performs Form Overlay by selecting a form name (No. 01-64)
registered on the machine.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1-64] : No. 1 - No. 64
Important • Since the default value is selected for this feature, this setting is not
affected when an extended commend is received.
• Once a form name is selected, it continues to be displayed even if the
form is deleted. When a form name is selected using the up and down
arrow keys, it is not displayed. In this case, the setting is set to "Off".
Stapling 66 Sets the stapling position.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : Top left
Appendix
[2] : Top Double

[3] : Top Right
[4] : Left Double
[5] : Right Double
[6] : Bottom Left
[7] : Bottom Double 16
[8] : Bottom Right
Bypass Tray - 67 Sets whether to suspend the print processing when feeding paper from the
Wait User bypass tray. Processing is resumed by a user operation on the machine.
[0] : Off
[1] (Default) : On
677
16 Appendix

Form Type 68 Sets the form type.
[0] (Default) : ESC/P-K
Punching 69 Select the position for punching holes.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : Top
[2] : Bottom
[3] : Left
[4] : Right
Number of holes 70 Select the number of punch holes.
[0] (Default) : 2 holes
[1] : 3 holes
[2] : 4 holes
Binary character 72 Sets the character strings to be specified when entering commands in
strings hexadecimal format.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : &$%$
[2] : $?!#
0 Style 73 Sets the typeface for "0".
[0] (Default) : 0
[1] :
Number of sets 74 Sets the method of specifying the number of print sets.
[0] : Protocol
[1] : Panel
[2] (Default) : Command
Magnification Table
Preset %
Document Paper Size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 17" 8.5 x 14" 8.5 x 13" 8.5 x 11" Postcard
Size
A3 Long edge 100 70 49 86 60 103 84 78 66 100
Short edge 100 70 48 86 60 94 72 72 72 100
A4 Long edge 143 100 70 123 86 147 120 112 94 48
Short edge 143 100 69 123 86 135 103 103 103 45
A5 Long edge 204 143 100 177 123 210 172 160 135 69
Short edge 207 145 100 178 124 195 149 149 149 65
Appendix
B4 Long edge 116 81 57 100 70 119 98 90 76 100

Short edge 116 81 56 100 70 109 83 83 83 100
B5 Long edge 164 116 81 143 100 171 140 130 109 56
16 Short edge 164 116 81 143 100 156 120 120 120 53
11 x 17" Long edge 97 68 48 84 59 100 82 76 64 100
Short edge 106 74 51 92 64 100 77 77 77 100
8.5 x 14" Long edge 119 83 58 102 72 122 100 93 78 100
Short edge 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100
678
ESC/P-K Emulation
8.5 x 13" Long edge 128 90 63 111 77 132 108 100 84 100
Short edge 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100
8.5 x 11" Long edge 152 106 74 131 92 156 128 119 100 100
Short edge 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100
Postcard Long edge 100 100 145 100 178 100 100 100 100 100
Short edge 100 100 153 100 190 100 100 100 100 100
15 x 11" Long edge 119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100
Short edge 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
15 x 12" Long edge 119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100
Short edge 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100
10 x 11" Long edge 147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 50
Short edge 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
10 x 12" Long edge 135 95 66 117 81 139 114 105 89 46
Short edge 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
Unit: %
Note • If the magnification for either the long edge or short edge is outside the range of 45 - 210%, the
magnifications for both the long edge and short edge becomes 100%.
Appendix
16
679
16 Appendix
Preset % (2-Up Printing)
Document Paper Size A3/2 A4/2 A5/2 B4/2 B5/2 11 x 17" 8.5 x 14" 8.5 x 13" 8.5 x 11" Postcard
Size /2 /2 /2 /2 /2
A3 Long edge 70 49 100 60 100 66 50 50 50 100
Short edge 70 48 100 60 100 72 59 54 45 100
A4 Long edge 100 70 48 86 60 94 72 72 72 100
Short edge 100 69 48 86 59 103 84 78 65 100
A5 Long edge 143 100 69 123 86 135 103 103 103 45
Short edge 145 100 69 124 86 149 121 112 94 47
B4 Long edge 81 57 100 70 49 76 58 58 58 100
Short edge 81 56 100 70 48 83 68 63 53 100
B5 Long edge 116 81 56 100 70 109 83 83 83 100
Short edge 116 80 55 100 69 120 98 90 76 100
11 x 17" Long edge 68 48 100 59 100 64 49 49 49 100
Short edge 74 51 100 64 100 77 62 58 48 100
8.5 x 14" Long edge 83 58 100 72 50 78 60 60 60 100
Short edge 97 67 100 84 57 100 82 75 63 100
8.5 x 13" Long edge 90 63 100 77 54 84 64 64 64 100
Short edge 97 67 100 84 57 100 82 75 63 100
8.5 x 11" Long edge 106 74 51 92 64 100 77 77 77 100
Short edge 97 67 46 84 57 100 82 75 63 100
Short edge 100 153 105 190 131 100 185 172 144 71
15 x 11" Long edge 83 58 100 72 100 78 60 60 60 100
Short edge 72 50 100 62 100 74 60 56 47 100
15 x 12" Long edge 83 58 100 72 100 78 60 60 100 100
Short edge 66 46 100 57 100 68 55 51 100 100
10 x 11" Long edge 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
Short edge 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
10 x 12" Long edge 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100
Short edge 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
Unit: %
Appendix
16
680
ESC/P-K Emulation
Fit to Cut Sheet
Document Paper Size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 17" 8.5 x 14" 8.5 x 13" 8.5 x 11" Postcard
Size
A3 Long edge 98 69 48 85 59 101 83 77 64 100
Short edge 97 68 47 84 58 91 70 70 70 100
A4 Long edge 138 97 68 120 84 142 117 108 91 100
Short edge 137 96 66 118 82 129 99 99 99 100
A5 Long edge 196 137 96 169 118 201 165 153 129 66
Short edge 195 136 94 168 117 183 140 140 140 62
B4 Long edge 113 79 55 98 68 116 95 88 74 100
Short edge 112 78 54 97 67 105 81 81 81 100
B5 Long edge 160 112 78 138 97 165 135 125 105 54
Short edge 158 110 76 136 95 149 114 114 114 50
11 x 17" Long edge 95 67 47 82 57 98 80 74 63 100
Short edge 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
8.5 x 14" Long edge 116 81 57 100 70 119 98 90 76 100
Short edge 133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100
8.5 x 13" Long edge 125 87 61 108 75 128 105 97 82 100
Short edge 133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100
8.5 x 11" Long edge 147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 100
Short edge 133 93 64 115 80 125 96 96 96 100
Short edge 100 201 139 100 173 100 100 100 207 91
15 x 11" Long edge 135 95 66 117 81 139 105 114 89 46
Short edge 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
15 x 12" Long edge 135 95 66 117 81 139 105 114 89 46
Short edge 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
10 x 11" Long edge 147 103 72 127 89 151 115 124 97 50
Short edge 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
10 x 12" Long edge 147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 50
Short edge 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
Unit: %
Appendix
16
681
16 Appendix
Fit to Cut Sheet (When 2 Up is specified)
Document Paper Size A3/2 A4/2 A5/2 B4/2 B5/2 11 x 17" 8.5 x 14" 8.5 x 13" 8.5 x 11" Postcard/
Size /2 /2 /2 /2 2
A3 Long edge 69 48 100 59 100 64 49 49 100 100
Short edge 68 47 100 58 100 70 57 53 100 100
A4 Long edge 97 68 47 84 58 91 70 70 70 100
Short edge 96 66 46 82 57 99 80 74 62 100
A5 Long edge 137 96 66 118 82 129 99 99 99 100
Short edge 136 84 65 117 80 140 114 106 88 100
B4 Long edge 79 55 100 68 48 74 57 57 57 100
Short edge 78 54 100 67 46 81 66 61 51 100
B5 Long edge 112 78 54 97 67 105 81 81 81 100
Short edge 110 76 53 95 65 114 93 86 72 100
11 x 17" Long edge 67 47 100 57 100 63 48 48 48 100
Short edge 72 50 100 62 100 74 60 56 47 100
8.5 x 14" Long edge 81 47 100 70 49 76 58 58 58 100
Short edge 93 50 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100
8.5 x 13" Long edge 87 61 100 75 52 82 63 63 63 100
Short edge 93 64 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100
8.5 x 11" Long edge 103 89 100 89 72 97 74 74 74 100
Short edge 93 80 100 80 55 96 78 72 61 100
Short edge 201 139 96 173 119 207 169 156 131 65
15 x 11" Long edge 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100
Short edge 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
15 x 12" Long edge 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100
Short edge 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
10 x 11" Long edge 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
Short edge 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
10 x 12" Long edge 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
Short edge 99 68 47 85 59 102 83 77 64 100
Unit: %
Appendix
16
682
ESC/P-K Emulation
Paper Size and Number of Printable Characters
When the paper feed position is 22 mm
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
Characters Lines Characters Lines
A3 113 92 161 63
B4 97 78 139 53
A4 79 63 113 42
B5 68 53 97 35
A5 54 42 79 27
Postcard 35 30 54 19
11 x 17" 106 94 166 58
8.5 x 14" 81 76 136 43
8.5 x 13" 81 70 126 43
8.5 x 11" 81 58 106 43
When the paper feed position is 8.5 mm
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
A3 113 95 161 66
B4 97 82 139 56
A4 79 66 113 45
B5 68 56 97 39
A5 54 45 79 31
11 x 17" 106 98 166 62
8.5 x 14" 81 80 136 47
8.5 x 13" 81 74 126 47
8.5 x 11" 81 62 106 47
Appendix
Note • The values are based on 10-cpi character pitch and 6-lpi line pitch.
• The magnification for both the long edge and short edge is 100%.
• Some paper sizes may not be available depending on your hardware configuration.
16
683
16 Appendix
Fit to Cut Sheet
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
A3 116 99 165 70
B4 101 85 143 60
A4 82 70 116 49
B5 71 60 101 42
A5 58 49 82 34
11 x 17" 110 102 170 66
8.5 x 14" 85 84 140 51
8.5 x 13" 85 78 130 51
8.5 x 11" 85 66 110 51
• Some paper sizes may not be available depending on your hardware configuration.
15-inch Continuous Form Mode (When Aligned at Left in Landscape Orientation)
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
All supported
136 66 136 72
paper sizes
10-inch Continuous Form Mode
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
All supported
80 66 80 72
paper sizes
Appendix
16
684
PDF Direct Print
PDF Direct Print
PDF Direct Print is a feature that prints PDF files by directly using the lpr command instead
of a print driver. When this feature is used, the following items will be printed based on the
settings of [PDF] under [Print Mode].
 Output Quantity  Layout

2 Sided Printing 
Paper Size

Print Mode 
Output Color

Collate 
Print Processing Mode
Important • You cannot print DocuWorks files with Japanese fonts used.
Note • Two types of the PDF Direct Printing methods are available: the genuine Adobe PDF Direct Print and
the non-PostScript PDF Direct Print (PDF Bridge). You can select which method to prioritize in the
• When you use the lpr command to print, specify the number of copies to be printed in the lpr
command. The copy quantity setting made on [Output Quantity] under [PDF] becomes invalid. If
the copy quantity is not specified in the lpr command, only one copy is printed.
• Before you print PDF file using the lpr command, the LPD protocol of the machine must be started
with the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.
• PDF Direct Print supports PDF version 1.6.
PDF Direct Print Settings

This section describes the available settings with the PDF Direct Print feature.
The settings configured here are valid when printing PDF files without using
"ContentsBridge" provided by Fuji Xerox.
Note • For information on printing PDF files using ContentsBridge Utility, refer to the manual provided on
the Driver CD Kit.
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
[1-999] (Default: 1): 1-999 sheets
2 sided printing 402 Sets the 2 sided printing option.
[0] (Default) : 1 Sided
[1] : 2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge
[2] : 2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge
[2 Sided Print, Flip on Long Edge] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that
pages can be bound along the long edge.
Appendix
[2 Sided Print, Flip on Short Edge] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that
pages can be bound along the short edge.
Print mode 403 Selects which you prioritize: image quality or print speed.
[0] (Default) : Standard
[1]
[2]
: High Speed
: Fine
16
The [Standard] setting prints in a standard speed and quality.
The [High Speed] setting prioritize the print speed.
The [Fine] quality setting prints in high quality but in a slower speed.
685
16 Appendix
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Collate 404 Selects whether to print multiple-sheet documents as collated sets (1, 2, 3...1,
2, 3...).
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : On
Layout 405 Sets the layout for printing.
Note • This item can be set when [PDF Bridge] is selected for [Process Mode].
[0] (Default) : Auto %
[1] : Booklet
[2] : 2-up
[3] : 4-up
[4] : 100% (size-by-size)
The [Auto %] setting automatically calculates the largest magnification

possible to fit to the output paper size.
The [Booklet] setting prints the images side by side, on both sides of each
page, in the correct order to make a booklet based on the layout of the
original PDF file. Some documents may not be printed in a booklet fashion
depending on the structure of their pages. In this case, they will be printed
with the [Auto %] setting.
Note • When [A4] is selected for [Paper Size], documents will be printed on A4 size
paper.
• When [Paper Size] is set to [Auto], documents will be printed on A3 or A4
size paper.
The [2-up] setting prints two pages onto one sheet of paper. When [2-Up] is
selected, the paper size is fixed at A4.
The [4-up] setting prints four pages on each sheet of paper. When [4-Up] is
Paper size 406 Sets the size of the paper to be printed.
[0] (Default) : Auto
[1] : A4
The [Auto] setting automatically determines the paper size, based on the size
and settings of a PDF file to be printed.
Output color 407 Sets whether to print in color or monochrome.
[1] : Black
The [Auto] setting automatically determines the output color: color or
monochrome for each page. If colors other than black and white are used on
the original, the machine prints the document in color, and if only black and
white are used on the original, the machine prints in monochrome.
Process mode 408 Sets the print processing mode when you use the PDF Direct Print feature.
[0] (Default) : PDF Bridge
Appendix
[1] : PS
[PDF Bridge] processes PDF files using the PDF Direct Print feature provided
by Fuji Xerox.
[PS] processes PDF files using the PostScript feature provided by Adobe.
16 Note • This item is displayed when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is
installed.
• The print results may differ between the [PDF Bridge] and [PS] selections.
• When [PS] is selected, the [Layout] setting becomes invalid.
686
DocuWorks Direct Print
DocuWorks Direct Print
DocuWorks Direct Print is a feature that prints DocuWorks files by using the lpr command
directly instead of a print driver. When this feature is used, the following items will be printed
based on the settings of [DocuWorks] under [Print Mode].
 Output Quantity  Layout

2 Sided Printing 
Paper Size

Print Mode 
Output Color

Collate
Important • You cannot print DocuWorks files with Japanese fonts used.
Note • When you use the lpr command to print, specify the number of copies to be printed in the lpr
command. The copy quantity setting made on [Output Quantity] under [DocuWorks] becomes
invalid. If the copy quantity is not specified in the lpr command, only one copy is printed.
• Before you print DocuWorks file using the lpr command, the LPD protocol of the machine must be
started with the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.
DocuWorks Direct Print Settings

This section describes the available settings with the DocuWorks Direct Print feature.
The settings configured here are valid when printing DocuWorks files without using
"ContentsBridge" provided by Fuji Xerox.
Note • For information on printing DocuWorks files using ContentsBridge Utility, refer to the manual
provided on the Driver CD Kit.
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
[1-999] (Default: 1): 1-999 sheets
2 sided printing 502 Sets the 2 sided printing option.
[0] (Default) : 1 Sided
[1] : 2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge
[2] : 2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge
[2 Sided Print, Flip on Long Edge] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that
pages can be bound along the long edge.
[2 Sided Print, Flip on Short Edge] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that
pages can be bound along the short edge.
Print mode 503 Selects which you prioritize: image quality or print speed.
[0] (Default) : Standard
Appendix
[1] : High Speed

[2] : Fine
The [Standard] setting prints in a standard speed and quality.
The [High Speed] setting prioritize the print speed.
The [Fine] quality setting prints in high quality but in a slower speed.
16
Collate 504 Selects whether to print multiple-sheet documents as collated sets (1, 2, 3...1,
2, 3...).
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : On
687
16 Appendix
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Layout 505 Sets the layout for printing.
[0] (Default) : Auto %
[2] : 2-up
[3] : 4-up
[4] : 100% (size-by-size)
The [Auto %] setting automatically calculates the largest magnification

possible to fit to the output paper size.
The [2-up] setting prints two pages onto one sheet of paper. When [2-Up] is
The [4-up] setting prints four pages on each sheet of paper. When [4-Up] is
Paper size 506 Sets the size of the paper to be printed.
[1] : A4
The [Auto] setting automatically determines the paper size, based on the size
and settings of a DocuWorks file to be printed.
Output color 507 Sets whether to print in color or monochrome.
[1] : Black
The [Auto] setting automatically determines the output color: color or
monochrome for each page. If colors other than black and white are used on
the original, the machine prints the document in color, and if only black and
white are used on the original, the machine prints in monochrome.
Appendix
16
688
PCL Emulation
PCL Emulation
Emulation
languages.
Emulation Mode

PCL emulation mode (PCL mode) CLJ5500

printer languages.
command, the machine switches to the relevant printer language.
that received data.
Appendix
16
689
16 Appendix
Fonts
Available fonts
The following fonts can be used for PCL emulation:
 Alphanumeric fonts

CG Times 
Univers Bold Condensed

CG Times Italic 
Univers Bold Condensed Italic
 CG Times Bold  Antique Olive
 CG Times Bold Italic  Antique Olive Italic
 Univers Medium  Antique Olive Bold
 Univers Medium Italic  CG Omega

Univers Bold 
CG Omega Italic

Univers Bold Italic 
CG Omega Bold
 Univers Medium Condensed  CG Omega Bold Italic
 Univers Medium Condensed Italic  Garamond Antiqua

Garamond Kursiv 
Helvetica Oblique

Garamond Halbfett 
Helvetica Bold

Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 
Helvetica Bold Oblique

Courier 
CourierPS

Courier Italic 
CourierPS Oblique

Courier Bold 
CourierPS Bold

Courier Bold Italic 
CourierPS Bold Oblique

Letter Gothic 
SymbolPS
 Letter Gothic Italic  Palatino Roman
 Letter Gothic Bold  Palatino Italic
 Albertus Medium  Palatino Bold
 Albertus Extra Bold  Palatino Bold Italic

Clarendon Condensed 
ITC Bookman Light
 Coronet  ITC Bookman Light Italic
 Marigold  ITC Bookman Demi
 Arial  ITC Bookman Demi Italic
Appendix
 Arial Italic  Helvetica Narrow


Arial Bold 
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
 Arial Bold Italic  Helvetica Narrow Bold
16  Times New  Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
 Times New Italic  New Century Schoolbook Roman
 Times New Bold  New Century Schoolbook Italic
 Times New Bold Italic  New Century Schoolbook Bold
 Symbol  New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic

Wingdings 
ITC Avant Garde Book
690
PCL Emulation

Line Printer 
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
 Times Roman  ITC Avant Garde Demi
 Times Italic  ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique

Times Bold 
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic

Times Bold Italic 
ITC Zapf Dingbats
 Helvetica  OCR-B
Font Caching
The saved bitmap data is deleted when you turn the machine off or reset it. For the PCL
emulation mode, data other than that being processed is not saved.
Output Feature
This section describes the machine's output features. The following two output features are
available:


Forcible Output in Emulation Mode


In emulation mode, data is not output until one complete page of data is prepared. For a
Parallel interface or a USB interface, if printing ends in the middle of a page, the next data
set waits until the time set with [Auto Eject Time] elapses.
In this case, the Forcible Printing feature does not wait for the auto eject time; however,
forcibly prints the data within the machine.
For more information on forcible printing, refer to "11 Job Status" in the User Guide.
For more information on the auto eject time, refer to "Auto Eject Time" (P.216).
PCL Emulation Settings

Appendix
The following table shows the emulation parameters and their values for PCL emulation.
16
691
16 Appendix
PCL Settings List

The following table describes the parameters that can be set with the mode menu.
Parameter Item No. Value

[1] : Tray 1
[2] : Tray 2
[3] : Tray 3
[4] : Tray 4
[5] : Tray 5
[6] : Tray 6 (HCF B1)
Important • When Trays 1 to 4, Tray 6 is selected, the paper size is determined by the size
of paper loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper Size] cannot be set.
Note • When [Auto] is selected and paper of the same size in the same orientation in
multiple trays is loaded, paper will be fed in the order of Tray 1  Tray 2 
Tray 3  Tray 4  Tray 6. If paper of the same size is loaded in multiple trays
but in different orientations, feeding of the paper loaded in the landscape
orientation is prioritized.
Auto size 202 Sets the default paper size. Only available when [Paper Tray] is set to [Auto].
Only cut sheet can be set.
[3] : A3
[4] (Default) : A4
[5] : A5
[14] : B4
[15] : B5
[21] : 8.5 × 14"
[22] : 8.5 × 13"
[23] (Default) : 8.5 × 11"
[24] : 11 × 17"
[25] : Custom Size
[30] : 8K
Important • When Trays 1 to 4, Tray 6 is selected, [Paper Size] cannot be set. The paper
size loaded in the specified tray is displayed.
Note • When Trays 1 to 4, Tray 6 is selected, the paper size is determined by the size
of paper loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper Size] cannot be set.
• Depending on the combination of [Original Size] and [Paper Size], [?] may be
displayed for the magnification. In this case, the document is printed at a
scale of 100%.
Bypass size 203 Sets the default paper size. Only available when [Paper Tray] is set to [Auto].
Only cut sheet can be set.
[3] : A3
[4] (Default) : A4
[5] : A5
Appendix
[14] : B4
[15] : B5
[21] : 8.5 × 14"
[22] : 8.5 × 13"
[23] (Default) : 8.5 × 11"
16 [24] : 11 × 17"
[25] : Custom Size
692
PCL Emulation

Orientation 205 Set the orientation of paper.
[0] (Default) : Portrait
[1] : Landscape
2 Sided printing 206 Sets the 2 sided printing.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : On
Appendix
16
693
16 Appendix

Default font 207 [0] : CG Times [43] : Symbol
[1] : CG Times Italic [44] : Wingdings
[2] : CG Times Bold [45] : Line Printer
[3] : CG Times Bold Italic [46] : Times Roman
[4] : Univers Medium [47] : Times Italic
[5] : Univers Medium Italic [48] : Times Bold
[6] : Univers Bold [49] : Times Bold Italic
[7] : Univers Bold Italic [50] : Helvetica
[8] : Univers Medium [51] : Helvetica Oblique
Condensed [52] : Helvetica Bold
[9] : Univers Medium [53] : Helvetica Bold
Condensed Italic Oblique
[10] : Univers Bold [54] : CourierPS
Condensed [55] : CourierPS Oblique
[11] : Univers Bold [56] : CourierPS Bold
Condensed Italic [57] : CourierPS Bold
[12] : Antique Olive Oblique
[13] : Antique Olive Italic [58] : SymbolPS
[14] : Antique Olive Bold [59] : Palatino Roman
[15] : CG Omega [60] : Palatino Italic
[16] : CG Omega Italic [61] : Palatino Bold
[17] : CG Omega Bold [62] : Palatino Bold Italic
[18] : CG Omega Bold Italic [63] : ITC Bookman Light
[19] : Garamond Antiqua [64] : ITC Bookman Light
[20] : Garamond Kursiv Italic
[21] : Garamond Halbfett [65] : ITC Bookman
[22] : Garamond Kursiv Demi
Halbfett [66] : ITC Bookman
[23] (Default) : Courier Demi Italic
[24] : Courier Italic [67] : Helvetica Narrow
[25] : Courier Bold [68] : Helvetica Narrow
[26] : Courier Bold Italic Oblique
[27] : Letter Gothic [69] : Helvetica Narrow
[28] : Letter Gothic Italic Bold
[29] : Letter Gothic Bold [70] : Helvetica Narrow
[30] : Albertus Medium Bold Oblique
[31] : Albertus Extra Bold [71] : New Century
[32] : Clarendon Condensed Schoolbook Roman
[33] : Coronet [72] : New Century
[34] : Marigold Schoolbook Italic
[35] : Arial [73] : New Century
[36] : Arial Italic Schoolbook Bold
[37] : Arial Bold [74] : New Century
[38] : Arial Bold Italic Schoolbook Bold
[39] : Times New Italic
Appendix
[40] : Times New Italic [75] : ITC Avant Garde

[41] : Times New Bold Book
[42] : Times New Bold Italic [76] : ITC Avant Garde
Book Oblique
[77] : ITC Avant Garde
16 Demi
[78] : ITC Avant Garde
Demi Oblique
[79] : ITC Zapf Chancery
Medium Italic
[80] : ITC Zapf Dingbats
694
PCL Emulation

Symbol set 208 [0] (Default) : Roman 8 [18] : Microsoft
[1] : ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 Publishing
[2] : ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 [19] : Math 8
[3] : ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 [20] : PS Math
[4] : ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 [21] : Pi Font
[5] : PC-8 [22] : Legal
[6] : PC-8 DN [23] : ISO 4 United
[7] : PC-775 Kingdom
[8] : PC-850 [24] : ISO 6 ASCII
[9] : PC-852 [25] : ISO 11
[10] : PC-1004 (OS/2) Swedish:names
[11] : PC Turkish [26] : ISO 15 Italian
[12] : Windows 3.1 Latin 1 [27] : ISO 17 Spanish
[13] : Windows 3.1 Latin 2 [28] : ISO 21 German
[14] : Windows 3.1 Latin 5 [29] : ISO 60 Norwegian
[15] : DeskTop v1
[16] : PS Text [30] : ISO 69 French
[17] : MC Text [31] : Windows 3.0 Latin
1
[32] : Windows Baltic
[33] : Symbol
[34] : Wingdings
[35] : UCS-2
Font size 209 Specifies the point size of a font in 25 increments. The value of 100 represents 1
point.
[400] - [5000] (Default: [1200]) : 4.00 to 50.00 point
Font pitch 210 Specifies the pitch size of a font. The value of 100 represents the pitch size of 1
point.
[600] - [2400] (Default: [1000]) : 6.00 to 24.00 point
Form line 211 Specifies the number of lines on a page.
[5] - [128] (Default: [64]) : 6.00 to 24.00 point
Quantity 212 Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1] - [999] (Default: [1]) : 1 to 999 sets
Important • When the output quantity is specified by a client, that number of copies is
printed. After printing, the number set on the control panel is overwritten with
the number newly specified. However, the number of copies specified from
the LPD port will not overwrite the number set on the control panel.
Image enhance 213 Sets whether or not to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
Image Enhancement smoothens the border between black and white, reducing
rough edges, and thus seemingly increasing the resolution.
[0] : Off
[1] (Default) : On
Appendix
HexDump 214 Sets whether to enable a hex dump.

[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : On
Draft mode 215 When printing in black and white, prints the portion printed in black by using the
draft mode. This feature is enabled for the entire document.
[0] (Default) : Off
16
[1] : On
Color mode 216 Sets the color mode.
[1] : Color
[2] : Mono
695
16 Appendix

Binding 217 Sets binding when printing 2 sided.
You can select [LEF] or [SEF] for 2 sided printing. Select according to the edge to
be bound. Unifies the leading direction of the image on the front and rear sides
of the paper at the long edge of the paper for LEF and at the short edge of the
paper for SEF.
[0] (Default) : LEF
[1] : SEF
Line termination 218 Sets line termination processing.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : Add-LF (Appends an LF to CR)
[2] : Add-CR (Appends a CR to LF and FF)
[3] : CR-XX (Appends a CR to LF and FF, and LF to CR)
Default custom 219 Specifies the default custom paper size.
paper size (Short [2100] (Default short-edge value) : 210.0 mm
edge) [2970] (Default long-edge value) : 297.0 mm
[0] - [9999] : 0 to 999.9 mm
220
(Long
edge)
Print Quantity 221 Sets the method for specifying the number of copies to print.
Setup [0] : Protocol
[1] : Panel
Appendix
16
696
HP-GL/2 Emulation
HP-GL/2 Emulation
Emulation
languages.
Emulation Mode

HP-GL/2 emulation mode (HP-GL/2 mode) DJ750C Plus

printer languages.
command, the machine switches to the relevant printer language.
that received data.
Appendix
Fonts
Available fonts
The following fonts can be used for HP-GL/2 emulation:
16
 Alphanumeric fonts
Roman
Sans serif
697
16 Appendix
Font Caching
The saved bitmap data is deleted when you turn the machine off or reset it. For the PCL
emulation mode, data other than that being processed is not saved.
Output Feature
This section describes the machine's output features. The following two output features are
available:




In emulation mode, data is not output until one complete page of data is prepared a Parallel
interface or a USB interface, if printing ends in the middle of a page, the next data set waits
until the time set with [Auto Eject Time] elapses.
In this case, the Forcible Printing feature does not wait for the auto eject time; however,
forcibly prints the data within the machine.
For more information on forcible printing, refer to "11 Job Status" in the User Guide.
For more information on the auto eject time, refer to "Auto Eject Time" (P.216).
Factory Default Settings

In HP-GL or HP-GL/2 emulation mode factory default setting, the document is reduced or
enlarged to print according to the paper size (Auto Layout).
 Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size, Scaling: On
Print Area
Appendix
16
Document Size Paper Size
Note • Change the factory default setting if required. For more information on changing procedures, refer
to "HP-GL/2 Emulation" (P.697).
698
HP-GL/2 Emulation
Restriction on Auto Layout
 When the extra Hard Disk is installed on the printer

When Auto Layout is enabled, the print data is stored to the hard disk.
 When the extra Hard Disk is not installed on the printer

When Auto Layout is enabled, the print data is stored to auto layout memory area.
The default size of auto layout memory is set to 100kbyte and an error will occur on the
printer when the print data exceeds 100kbyte. In this case, change the size of auto layout
memory using the control panel. Auto layout memory size can be set up to 5120kbyte. The
printer cannot receive the print data exceeding 5120kbyte.
We recommend you to install hard disk on the printer when using Auto Layout feature.
Paper Margin
The paper size is set to A series paper by factory default. If the print data is larger than the
active coordinates area, the machine prints the data on the next larger A series paper (for
example, the next larger size of A4 is A3).
When you set the paper margins, however, the active coordinates area is determined by
subtracting the area set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained in the
area determination mode. Therefore, set the paper margins if the data is printed on larger
paper than specified. Set the range from 0 to 99 mm. The default value is 0 mm.
HP-GL/2 Emulation Settings

The following table shows the emulation parameters and their values for HP-GL/2
emulation.
HP-GL/2 Settings List

Items that can be set using the HP-GL/2 mode menu are explained in two groups: basic
settings and extended settings.
Appendix
16
699
16 Appendix
Basic Settings

Document size 101 Sets the document size created by a computer.
[0] : A0
[1] : A1
[2] : A2
[3] : A3
[4] : A4
[5] : A5
[10] : B0
[11] : B1
[12] : B2
[13] : B3
[14] : B4
[15] : B5
[100] : Paper
When [Auto] is selected, the settings of the Scaling mode, the Area
Determination mode, and the Paper Margin settings of Print Control become
enabled.
Note • If the document size other than [Auto] is selected, the settings under [Auto
layout] become [ON].
• Depending on the combination of [Document size] and [Paper size], the
document is printed at a scale of 100%.
Paper size 102 Sets the default paper size. Only available when [Paper tray] is set to [Auto] or
[Tray 5]. Only cut sheet can be set.
[3] : A3
[4] (Default) : A4
[5] : A5
[14] : B4
[15] : B5
[99] : Auto
[101] (Default) : A Size
Important • When Trays 1 to 4, Tray 6 is selected, [Paper size] cannot be set. The paper
size loaded in the specified tray is displayed.
Note • If [A Size] or [Auto] is selected, the settings become as follows:
- When [Document size] is set to other than [Auto], [Paper size] is set to
[A3].
- When Trays 1 to 4, Tray 6 is selected, the paper size is determined by the
size of paper loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper size] cannot be set.
- Depending on the combination of [Document size] and [Paper size], [?]
may be displayed for the magnification. In this case, the document is
printed at a scale of 100%.
Appendix
16
700
HP-GL/2 Emulation

[1] : Tray 1
[2] : Tray 2
[3] : Tray 3
[4] : Tray 4
[5] : Tray 5
[6] : Tray 6 (HCF B1)
Important • When Trays 1 to 4, Tray 6 is selected, the paper size is determined by the
size of paper loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper size] cannot be set.
Note • When [Auto] is selected and paper of the same size in the same orientation
in multiple trays is loaded, paper will be fed in the order of Tray 1  Tray 2
 Tray 3  Tray 4  Tray 6. If paper of the same size is loaded in multiple
trays but in different orientations, feeding of the paper loaded in the
landscape orientation is prioritized.
Coordinate 104 Sets the paper orientation for printing.
rotation [0] (Default) : 0 degree
[1] : 90 degree
Color mode 105 Sets the color mode.
[0] : Color
[1] (Default) : Grayscale
[2] : Black pen
Extended Settings

Auto layout 106 Selects whether to perform auto layout of the document or not.
[0] (Default) : ON
[1] : OFF
Active palette 107 Selects whether to use a pen specified by command or set on the panel.
[1] : Panel
No. of prints 108 Sets the number of copy to be printed.
[1] - [250] (Default: 1) : 1 - 250
Appendix
2 sided printing 110 Sets 2 sided printing.

[0] (Default) : None
[1] : Head to head
[2] : Head to toe
Alphanumeric
fonts
112 Sets the font for single-byte characters. 16
For more information on fonts, refer to "Internal Fonts" (P.654).
[0] (Default) : Stroke
[1] : Roman
[2] : Sans serif
701
16 Appendix

Position 113 Adjusts the hard clip area vertically or horizontally. You can set from -250 mm
adjustment (Vertical to +250 mm in 1 mm increments.
position [0] (Default) : Does not move the hard clip area.
adjustment) [1] - [250] : -250 to -1 mm
[251] - [500] : +1 to +250 mm
114
(Horizontal
position Important • Data outside the printable area is not printed regardless of the adjustment
adjustment) of the print position. In addition, data moved outside the printable area as
a result of adjusting the print position is not printed.
Number of sets 115 Sets the method for specifying the print sets.
[0] (Default) : Protocol
[1] : Panel
[2] : Command
Print control 150 Selects a graphics language. This setting affects to IW, OW, and UC of HP-GL/
(HP-GL mode) 2 commands.
[0] (Default) : HP-GL
[1] : HP-GL/2
Note • To print HP-GL/2 command that does not include BP command, select [HP-
GL/2].
151 Sets the size of hard clip area.
(Hard clip) In HP-GL mode, the plottable area is determined in line with the paper size,
apart from the printable area. This area is called the "hard clip area", and
determines the maximum range of pen movement. Accordingly, images
cannot be drawn outside the boundary of the hard clip area.
[0] : Standard
[2] (Default) : Paper
For more information on hard clip area, refer to "Hard Clip Area" (P.705).
152 (Eject Sets the command that indicates the end of plotting. When the command
command SP) specified here is received, plotting is terminated and the paper is output.
[0] (Default) : OFF
153 (Eject
[1] : ON
command
The default value is [ON] for SPO, and [OFF] for the others.
SPO)
Note • If multiple commands are specified, when one of the commands is
154 (Eject received, plotting is terminated and the paper is output.
command NR)
155 (Eject
command FR)
156 (Eject
command PG)
157 (Eject
command AF)
Appendix
158 (Eject
command AH)
16
702
HP-GL/2 Emulation

Print control 159 (Scaling) Sets whether the original size is enlarged or reduced so that the document size
fits the paper size.
[0] : OFF
[1] (Default) : ON
160 Selects the document size for auto scaling: A series paper (A0, A1, A2, A3, A4,
(Scaling mode) and A6) or the active coordinate area which is determined accordance with
the setting selected in [Area Determination Mode].
[0] (Default) : Paper Size
[1] : Active Coordinate Area
Note • [Active Coordinate Area] can be selected only when [Auto layout] is set to
[ON]. When [OFF] is selected, [Scaling mode] becomes [Paper Size].
• The setting of the scaling mode is valid when [Document size] is set to
[Auto].
161 Sets the method to obtain the active coordinate area when auto scaling is
(Active area being used.
determination [0] (Default) : Auto
command) [1] : PS
[2] : IW
[3] : IP
[4] : Adapted
Note • The setting of the active area determination command is valid when
[Document size] is set to [Auto].
162 Sets the paper margin when auto scaling is being used.
(Paper margin) [0] - [99] (Default: 0) : 0 to 99 mm
Note • The setting of the paper margin is valid when [Document size] is set to
[Auto].
163 Sets whether to perform image enhancement, which artificially increases the
(Image resolution of an image and smooth its edges.
enhancement) [0] : OFF
[1] (Default) : ON
Stapling 164 Sets the stapling position.
[1] : Top Left
[2] : Top Double
[3] : Top Right
[4] : Left Double
[5] : Right Double
[6] : Bottom Left
[7] : Bottom Double
[8] : Bottom Right
[9] : Center
Appendix
Manual feed tray 165 [0] : None

check indicator [1] (Default) : Yes
Punching 166 Select the position for punching holes.
[0] : None
[1] (Default) : Top
[2] : Bottom
16
[3] : Left
[4] : Right
Number of holes 167 Select the number of punch holes.
[0] (Default) : 2 holes
[1] : 3 holes
[2] : 4 holes
703
16 Appendix

Folding/180 168 Specify the Z fold half sheet and whether to rotate landscape documents in
degree rotation 180 degrees.
[1] : Z fold half sheet (Right bind/Top bind)
[2] : Z fold half sheet (Left bind/Bottom bind)
[3] : None (180 degrees rotation)
[4] : Z fold half sheet (Right bind/Top bind, 180 degrees rotation)
[5] : Z fold half sheet (Left bind/Bottom bind, 180 degrees rotation)
Emulation target 169 Select the machine to emulate.
printer [0] (Default) : HP750
[1] : FX4036
Pen attributes 800-815 Set the width (thickness of the line) of the 16 pens (No. 00 to 15). You can set
(Pen width) the width from 0.0 to 25.5 mm in 0.1 mm increments. No. 00 denotes Item
(No. 0-No.15) No. 800.
[0] - [255] (Default: 3) : 0 to 25.5 mm
Note • If the image is reduced by concern with the relationship between
[Document size] and [Paper size] settings, the pen width is reduced
accordingly to 0.1 mm at the smallest.
• The width of the line gets thick symmetrically with respect to the center of
the line.
• If the width is set to 0.0 mm, nothing is plotted.
850-865 Set the line end shape of the 16 pens (No. 00 to 15). No. 00 denotes Item No.
(Line end 850.
shape) [0] (Default) : Cut
(No. 0-No.15) [1] : Round
[2] : Rectangular
[Cut]
: specified coordinate
[Round]
[Rectangular]
Appendix
16
704
HP-GL/2 Emulation

Pen attributes 900-915 Set the process for when pens' lines intersect for 16 pens (No. 00 to 15). No.
(Pen 00 denotes Item No. 900.
intersects) [0] (Default) : None
(No. 0-No.15) [1] : Intersect
[2] : Round
[3] : Cut
[None]
[Intersect]
[Round]
[Cut]
Note • [None] is suitable for drafts because it takes shortest processing time.
• If a symbol is set by symbol command, the link process is not executed.
The symbol command is an HP-GL/2 command for specifying a symbol.
950-965 Sets the density of the 16 pens (No. 00 to 15). You can set the density from 0
(Pen density) to 250% in 1% increments. The default value is [0] for No. 0, and [100] for
(No. 0-No.15) the others. No. 00 denotes Item No. 950.
[0] - [255] : 0 to 250 (density)
Note • The relationship between the pen attributes and fonts are as follows:
Fonts
/ Roman,
Stroke
Pen Sans-Serif
attributes
Pen width Valid Invalid

Line end Valid Invalid
shape
Link Invalid Invalid
process
Pen density Valid Valid
Appendix
Hard Clip Area

In the HP-GL mode, the plottable area is determined in line with the paper size, apart from
16
the printable area. This area is called the "hard clip area", and determines the maximum
range of pen movement. Accordingly, images cannot be drawn outside the boundary of the
hard clip area. This machine allows you to select a hard clip area from the following:
 Standard
Defines the printable area of the machine as the hard clip area.
705
16 Appendix
 Paper
Defines a size same as the paper size as the hard clip area. However, the area that allows
actual printing is within the printable area.
The hard clip area can be set either with HP-GL emulation mode settings or by the specified
hard clip command "&I".
The following coordinate values present an example of when the origin is set at the lower
left (Auto Layout in HP-GL/2) of A3 sheet.
+Y (16798, 11876)
(16442, 11520)
Standard Hard Clip Area
Paper Hard Clip Area
Paper Size
(0, 0) Standard origin
(0, 0) Paper origin +X
Printable Area
The printable area in the HP-GL mode is as follows:
 Paper Size and Printable Area
Paper Paper Length Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)

size (1/7200 inch)
X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top-right Edge Margin
Appendix
Width Height Bottom Bottom Long Short Top- Top- XR YU

-left X -left Y Side Side right X right Y
A3 119052 84168 1260 1260 116532 81648 117792 82908 1260 1260
A4 84168 59508 1260 1260 81648 56988 82908 58248 1260 1260
16 A5 59508 41940 1260 1260 56988 39420 58248 40680 1260 1260
B4 103176 72828 1260 1260 100656 70308 101916 71568 1260 1260
B5 72828 51588 1260 1260 70308 49068 71568 50328 1260 1260
Note • The HP-GL emulation supports five paper sizes: A3, A5, A4, B4, and B5.
706
HP-GL/2 Emulation
Width
YU Top-right X, Top-right Y
Short-side
Height
Long-side
Physical paper size

XR
Printable Area Bottom-left X, Bottom-left Y
(0, 0)
Paper Paper Length Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)

size (1/7200 inch)
X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top-right Edge Margin
Width Height Bottom Bottom Long Short Top- Top- XR YU
- - Side Side right X right Y
left X left Y
A3 84168 119052 1260 1260 81648 116532 82908 117792 1260 1260
A4 59508 84168 1260 1260 56988 81648 58248 82908 1260 1260
A5 41940 59508 1260 1260 39420 56988 40680 58248 1260 1260
B4 72828 103176 1260 1260 70308 100656 71568 101916 1260 1260
B5 51588 72828 1260 1260 49068 70308 50328 71568 1260 1260
Note • The HP-GL emulation supports five paper sizes: A3, A5, A4, B4, and B5.
Width
YU Top-right X, Top-right Y
Long side
Short side
Appendix
Height
XR
Physical paper
16
size
Printable Area
Bottom-left X, Bottom-left Y
(0, 0)
707
16 Appendix
Auto Layout
This section explains Auto Layout.
What is Auto Layout?

Auto Layout is a function that evaluates document size using the HP-GL data entered from
a host system and enlarges or reduces the document size corresponding to the paper size so
that data plotted is placed in the center of the paper. Using the Auto Scaling/Auto Layout
function enables you to print a document in the HP-GL mode without concern for document
size and origin position.
All Auto Layout settings can be made in the [HP-GL/2 - Programming] screen (Select the
<Machine Status> button > [Print Mode] > [HP-GL/2 Emulation] > [Programming]). The
settings cannot be made with advanced commands.
Enabling Auto Layout

To enable Auto Layout, enter Item Numbers and Values on the [HP-GL/2 - Programming]
screen as follows:

Set [Document size ([101])] to [Auto ([99])]. The default value is [Auto ([99])].
 Set [Auto layout ([106])] to [ON ([0])] to set the origin position. The default value is [ON
([0])].
 Set [Scaling ([159])] to [ON ([1])]. The default value is [ON ([1])].

Select a method for obtaining the active coordinate area using the area determination
mode. The default value is [Auto ([0])].
 Set the paper margin using [Paper margin ([162])]. The default value is 0 mm ([0]).

Set the scaling mode. The default value is [Paper Size ([0])].
Setting Item Details

The following describes the details for each setting. You can change the settings on the [HP-
GL/2 - Programming] screen.
 Document Size
To set Document size to Auto, enter [101] to the [Item Number] box and select [Change
Value], and then enter [99] to the [New Value] box and select [Save]. Once you set
Document size to Auto, you can set Auto layout to ON.
 Auto Layout
To set Auto layout to ON, enter [106] to the [Item Number] box and select [Change Value],
and then enter [0] to the [New Value] box and select [Save]. Enabling Auto layout activates
the settings for scaling, area determination mode, paper margins, and scaling mode.
Appendix
 Scaling
Set whether the original size is enlarged or reduced so that the document size fits the paper
size.
16  Area Determination Mode

The following methods are available to obtain an active coordinates area using HP-GL data.
 Auto
Automatically selects the method of determining the active coordinates area from PS,
IW, IP, and Adapted in that order of priority.
708
HP-GL/2 Emulation
 IW
The area specified by the last IW command in the data becomes the active coordinates
area.
If there are no IW commands in the data, the active coordinates area is determined by
Adapted.

IP
The coordinates encompassing all areas specified by IP commands in the data becomes
the active coordinates area.
If there are no IP commands in the data, the active coordinates area is determined by
Adapted.

Adapted
The active coordinates area is determined by the following conditions:
- Minimum/Maximum position coordinates plotted by drawing commands
- Maximum font size specified within the page
- Maximum line width

PS
The coordinates encompassing all areas specified by PS commands in the data becomes
the active coordinates area.
If there are no PS commands in the data, the active coordinate area is determined by
Adapted.
 Paper Margin
Set the range from 0 to 99 mm. The default value is 0 mm. To get the active coordinates
area, subtract the area set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained in
the area determination mode.
Paper Margins
Cannot plot because active

Area obtained by area determination mode coordinates area exceeds
hard clip is exceeded
Area remaining when paper margin subtracted from
area obtained by area determination mode
Appendix
 Scaling Mode
Select the mode for determining the document size from the obtained active coordinates
area. Use active coordinates area to determine whether the paper orientation will be
portrait or landscape.
16
 If it is an Active Coordinates Area
To obtain the document size, subtract the area specified in paper margins from the active
coordinates area obtained in the area determination mode.
709
16 Appendix
 If it is a Paper Size
Set the document size from the obtained active coordinates area and the origin point
setting. The document size can be selected from six sizes of A series paper (A0, A1, A2, A3,
A4, or A5).
How to Determine Document Size

The document size is determined by comparing with the hard clip area of each paper size
based on the active coordinates area obtained in the scaling mode, paper margin, and area
determination mode.
 If the Scaling Mode is a Paper Size

1) Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP-GL data entered, in accordance
with the area determination mode.
2) As a margin, add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page, the
default size or one half the specified pen width, to the active coordinates area obtained
in step 1.
3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained in
step 2.
4) The minimum size that includes the active coordinates area obtained in step 3 will be
the document size.
 If the Scaling Mode is the ACA

1) Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP-GL data entered, in accord with the
area determination mode.
2) As a margin, add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page, the
default size or one half the specified pen width, to the active coordinates area obtained
in step 1.
3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained in
step 2.
4) The ACA obtained in the process up to step 3 will be the document size.
 For Example:
If the following data is entered when the scaling mode is paper size, origin position is
Auto, paper margin is 10mm, and area determination mode is IP:
All pen width settings are 0.1 mm.
The following data does not contain a character size specification command and the A3
physical size of the area specified by IP/IW.
IN;
IP-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;
Appendix
IW-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;

PU;
SP1;
16 :
:
SP0;
1) As the area determination mode is IP, the active coordinates area is specified as the
area -8399,-5938,8399,5938 by an IP command.
710
HP-GL/2 Emulation
2) Because there are no font size specification commands and all pen widths are 0.1 mm in
the above example, add the height/2 of the default font size for A3 size paper (75
plotter units) to the active coordinates area obtained in step 1.
The active coordinates area obtained in step 2 is -8474,-6013,8474,6013.
3) The value set in paper margins (10 mm = 400 plotter units) is subtracted from the active
coordinates area obtained in step 2.
The active coordinates area obtained in step 3 is -8074,-5613,8074,5613.
4) As the active coordinates area obtained in step 3 exceeds the A4 size and is A3 size, the
document size is determined to be A3.
In addition, when the paper margin setting is 0 mm and the active coordinates area is -
8474,-6013,8474,6013, and this exceeds A3, but is A2 or smaller, the document size is
determined to be A2.
How to Determine Paper Size

If the operation panel settings are as follows, the paper size is determined as below.
Document size: Auto
Paper Tray: Auto
The method for determining the paper size differs according to the paper size and scaling
mode settings on the operation panel.
 If the Paper Size Setting is A Sizes

The paper sizes among the three sizes (A3, A4, and A5) that are actually loaded in the trays
become the possible paper size.
If A series paper (A3, A4, A5) is not loaded in the trays, all three sizes, A3, A4, and A5 become
possible sizes; a message is displayed on the touch screen prompting the user to load A series
paper.
 If the Paper Size Setting is Auto

The paper sizes among the five sizes (A3, B4, A4, B5, and A5) that are actually loaded in the
trays become the possible paper size.
If A3, B4, A4, B5, or A5 paper is not loaded in the trays, all five sizes become possible sizes;
a message is displayed on the touch screen prompting the user to load paper.
 If the Scaling Mode Setting is Paper Size

If the paper size and the document size are the same, select paper that is the same size as
the document.
If the document size is larger than any possible paper sizes, select the largest paper.
If the document size is smaller than any possible paper sizes, select the smallest paper.
Appendix
 If the Scaling Mode Setting is ACA

Select the smallest paper size that can contain the ACA.
If the active coordinates area is larger than any possible paper sizes, select the largest paper.
If the active coordinates area is smaller than any possible paper sizes, select the smallest
paper.
16
Note • If the document size is set to anything other than Auto, the paper size is the one set on the control
panel.
• If the paper tray is set to Auto, the paper size is the one loaded in each tray. However, If paper
whose size is not supported is loaded, an error message will be displayed prompting the user to load
a supported paper.
711
16 Appendix
How to Determine the Scaling Ratio

When auto scaling is being used, although the scaling ratio is determined by document size
and paper size, it differs according to the scale mode setting.
Note • To activate scaling, set the scaling to ON on the [HP-GL/2 - Programming] screen. If it is set to OFF, it
is plotted at the same scale (100%).
 If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is Paper Size
The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the paper's hard clip area.
 If the document size = paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).
 If the document size > paper size, it plots at a reduced scale.
 If the document size < paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).
Paper Size
Document A3 A4 A5 B4 B5
Size
A0 35 25 100 31 100
A1 50 35 25 43 31
A2 71 50 35 61 43
A3 100 71 50 87 61
A4 100 100 71 100 87
A5 100 100 100 100 100
Unit: Percent (%)
If the origin position of the plotting position is Layout, the document is placed and drawn in
the center. If the origin position is bottom left or center, the origin of the document and the
paper are aligned and drawn.
 If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is ACA

The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the advanced hard clip area.
The scaling factor is determined according to the ACA and the paper size. The range for the
ACA for each paper size is as follows:
0 Degrees 90 Degrees
Paper
Min Value Max Value Min Value Max Value
Size
P2x - P1x P2y - P1y P2x - P1x P2y - P1y P2x - P1x P2y - P1y P2x - P1x P2y - P1y
Appendix
A3 7829 5485 73075 51200 5485 7829 51200 73075

A4 5485 3828 51200 35733 3828 5485 35733 51200
A5 3828 2648 35733 24720 2648 3828 44088 35733
16 B4 6762 4723 63120 44088 4723 6762 44088 63120
B5 4723 3297 44088 30773 3297 4723 30773 44088
Unit: Plotter Unit
The maximum scaling factor is 210% of the advanced hard clip area for each paper size and
the minimum scaling factor is 22.5%.
712
HP-GL/2 Emulation
Restriction on Auto Layout
 When the extra Hard Disk is installed on the printer

When Auto Layout is enabled, the print data is stored to the hard disk.
 When the extra Hard Disk is not installed on the printer

When Auto Layout is enabled, the print data is stored to auto layout memory area.
The default size of auto layout memory is set to 100kbyte and an error will occur on the
printer when the print data exceed 100kbyte. In this case, change the size of auto layout
memory using the control panel. Auto layout memory size can be set up to 5120kbyte. The
printer cannot receive the print data exceed 5120kbyte.
We recommend you to install hard disk on the printer when using Auto Layout feature
Examples of Combinations of Each Function

The following are examples showing the print results that can be achieved by combining
various functions.
 Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size, Scaling: ON
Print Area
 Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size, Scaling: OFF
Print Area
Appendix

16
713
16 Appendix
 Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Active Coordinate Area,
Scaling: ON
Print Area
Active Coordinate Area determined by Paper Size

entered data
 Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Active Coordinate Area,
Scaling: OFF
Print Area
Active Coordinate Area determined by Paper Size

entered data
Appendix
16
714
Notes and Restrictions
This section describes the notes and restrictions to observe when using the machine.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine
 Notes on Switching Off the Main Power and Power

Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for a while after the power is
switched off. Therefore, do not switch the main power off immediately after switching the
power off. Do not switch the main power off while the touch screen displays a screen or the
<Power Saver> button blinks. Switching off the main power may damage the hard disk and
the memory or cause a machine malfunction. In addition, the machine will not be activated
soon if you switch on the power before the touch screen gets blank. Confirm that the touch
screen is blank before switching on the power.
 Options

To use the Secure Print, Sample Print, and Delay Print features, the optional hard disk is
required for some models.
 To use the Print Stored File feature, the Scanner Kit (optional) is required.

To use the machine as a PostScript printer, the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is
required.
 About the <Main Power> indicator

 For 110 V:
The power indicator will not be turned off immediately after the power is switched off.
The machine takes approximately 40 seconds before the light goes out.

For 220 - 240 V:
The power indicator will not be turned off immediately after the power is switched off.
The machine takes approximately 170 seconds before the light goes out.
 Switching the Power Off from Remote Location

Using CentreWare Internet Services, you can turn the machine off, but not on. To do this
operation, you are required to enter CentreWare Internet Services as system administrator.
Note • If there are any jobs in process, the request for powering off the machine will not be processed.
 Installing and Moving the Machine

 When moving the machine to another location, contact our Customer Support Center.
Appendix

When the machine is operating, do not subject it to shock.
 When closing the document cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers.
 Do not place any objects near the ventilation openings of the machine's exhaust fan.
16
 Character Code
In data transmission from a computer or read processing of data in a medium such as a USB
memory device, if characters that the machine does not support are included in folder and
file names, these characters may not be displayed correctly.
When the Media Print - Photos service is used, only ASCII characters can be used.
715
16 Appendix
 Output Destination
When you change the finisher to install, reconfigure the output destination under [Tools] >
[System Settings] > [Copy Service Settings] > [Copy Defaults] > [Output Destination].
You can also change the output destination for Print E-mail, Private Folder Printed Files, and
Fax Received as required.
 Compatibility of Machines
ApeosPort series models are incompatible with DocuCentre series models. Once you
purchased one of the series models, you cannot upgrade or downgrade to the other series
model afterward.
 Restrictions on Method of Recipient Specification

 The [New Recipients] and [Redial List] buttons may not be displayed when you specify a
recipient for fax/Internet fax/e-mail transmission if the method of recipient specification
is restricted in the System Administration mode. In this case, you cannot use the numeric
keypad either. Consequently, the recipients you can specify are limited to those who are
registered on the Address Book.
You must add an address book entry using CentreWare Internet Services or Device Setup
Tool (free software). The system administrator, however, can register new recipients from
the control panel of the machine even when the method of recipient specification is
limited.

The users who belong to an authorization group for which [Restrict Recipient Selection
Method] is set to [No Restriction] can directly specify a recipient for fax/Internet fax or an
e-mail transmission.
 One-Touch Buttons
The one-touch buttons (only for fax models) are used to specify an address when sending
faxes, IP faxes, internet faxes, Scan to PC, or E-mail. The buttons cannot be used when you
specify an e-mail address, a shared folder of SMB/FTP, or a server address.
The following two methods are available to assign the address numbers to the one-touch
buttons.
 [Type 1]: Assigns the one-touch buttons 1 to 70 to the address numbers 0001 to
0070, and buttons M01 and M02 to the stored programming jobs 1 and
2.
 [Type 2]: Assigns the one-touch buttons 1 to 60 to the address numbers 0001 to
0060, and buttons 61 to 70, M01, and M02 to the stored programming
jobs 1 and 12.
Note • [Type 1] is selected by factory default.
For more information on how to change the number of address numbers assigned, refer to "One-touch Buttons" (P.166).
 Assigning to the One-Touch Buttons

Appendix
You can change the way how address numbers and stored programs are assigned to the
one-touch buttons. When you have changed the assignment, some one-touch buttons that
were used for address numbers before may be used for stored programs while other one-
touch buttons that were used for stored programs before may be used for address numbers.
16 Be sure that you perform the correct operation.
 USB Interface Connector on the Machine


To use the USB memory slot on the control panel, the USB Memory Kit (optional) is
required.
 Insert a USB memory device directly into the USB memory slot on the control panel. If you
connect a USB memory device via a USB cable, the operation is not guaranteed.
716
 To connect a USB memory device via a USB cable, use the USB Hub (optional).
 When the machine is equipped with the USB Hub (optional), up to two USB devices can
be connected to the machine at the same time, although the total of USB connectors are
three, one USB memory slot on the control panel and two USB ports with the USB Hub
(optional) on the back of the machine.

A memory card reader and a USB memory device cannot be connected to the machine at
the same time. The machine will recognize the one that is connected first.
 IC Card Reader (optional)


There are two types of IC Card Reader you can choose: the Embedded IC Card Reader
(optional) and the IC Card Reader for Wing Table (optional).
Installing the IC Card Reader to the machine enhances the authentication function of the
machine. Also, you can restrict the usage of the machine and improve the security
management feature and availability of documents.

The following EP accessories can be simultaneously installed on the machine with the IC
Card Reader for Wing Table (optional).
- EPnet-BOX type L
- EPnet-BOX type W2
- Foot Switch
- Dispenser 2
- IC Card Cashier
- e-MoneyCashier 2
- Connection BOX 1 for EM
- Coinkit 8
- Coinkit 9
Note • When you want to install IC Card Cashier, Connection BOX 1 for EM, or e-MoneyCashier 2, contact
our Customer Support Center. Our service representative performs the installation and configures
the settings.

The table below shows the available combinations of EP accessories that can be
simultaneously installed on the machine with the IC Card Reader for Wing Table
(optional). Our service representative performs the installation. For more information,
IC Card Reader Available Combinations of EP Accessories

IC Card Reader for EPnet-BOX type L  Foot Switch
Wing Table (optional) EPnet-BOX type W2 
Dispenser 2
 IC Card Cashier

e-MoneyCashier 2
 Connection BOX 1 for EM
Appendix
 Coinkit 8
 Coinkit 9
Foot Switch 
EPnet-BOX type L
 EPnet-BOX type W2


Dispenser 2
IC Card Cashier
16

e-MoneyCashier 2

Connection BOX 1 for EM
 Coinkit 8
 Coinkit 9
717
16 Appendix
 Printed Time in Force Annotation

The time you specified to print a job, the time at which the print job is started inside the
machine, and the time at which the job is actually printed may not be coincident with one
another depending on the machine status and settings or the content of the print job. The
time printed in Force Annotation is the time at which the print job is started inside the
machine.
 Stored Programming
 The following features and operations cannot be registered on a stored program.
- Registration and call of a stored program
- EP Diagnostic Request
- System Settings
- The [Media Print -Text] and [Media Print - Photos] buttons on the Services Home screen
- The [Store to USB] button on the Services Home screen
- The [Network Scanning], [Job Flow Sheets], and [Web Applications] buttons on the
Services Home screen (ApeosPort Series Models only)
- A custom button to which the Network Scanning or Job Flow feature is assigned
(ApeosPort Series Models only)
- Address Book for the Fax/Internet Fax, E-mail, and Scan to PC services
- Buttons that cannot be selected
- The [Language] button on the Services Home screen
- The [Screen Brightness] button on the Services Home screen
- The [Browse] button of the Scan to PC service
- Address editing operation of the E-mail service ([Remove], [Edit], and [Close Menu] on
the pop-up menu)
- The <Power Saver> button

After registering a program, you may not be able to retrieve the stored program correctly
if you execute the following operations:
- If a Watermark is registered on the program, and you change the default value of the
Watermark after registering the program
- If a passcode of a folder that is subject to operation by a stored program is changed
after the program is registered
- If the settings of the control panel are changed
- If the features registered on the custom buttons are changed
- If the setting is changed with [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Copy Service Settings] >
[Preset Buttons]
- If the program is selected from a list of a job flow or the Address Book
- If a button no longer functions as a result of a change of optional components such as
Finisher
Appendix
- If the measurement unit such as mm or inch is changed

- If a file is selected from a file list with Job Status
- The use of a scrolling bar when you select an item
16  Output Color
When you select [Auto Detect] in [Output Color] for a copy job or select [Color] in [Output
Color] for a print job, the machine may consume yellow, magenta, and cyan toner cartridges
and drum cartridges even when your document is black and white.
In addition, when [Background Suppression (Color Copy)] is set to [High Speed] under
[Tools] > [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] > [Image Quality Adjustment],
yellow, magenta, and cyan toner cartridges and drum cartridges are always used. Thus these
718
color toner cartridges and drum cartridges are consumed even when your document is black
and white.
 Large Size UI Kit (optional)

 By factory default, the date and time are displayed on the lower side of the touch screen
of the Large Size UI Kit. If you want to hid this date and time, contact our Customer
Support Center.

The display format for the date and time can be changed in the System Administration
mode.
 The time is displayed by minutes and may differ from the actual time by seconds.

On the [Job Status] screen, jobs listed in [Active Jobs] or [Completed Jobs] fill the entire
screen. Therefore, the date and time are not displayed on the [Job Status] screen.
 Operations during the Power Saver mode

 It takes a few seconds before you can operate the system settings under [Tools] after the
machine exits the Sleep mode.
 The <Power Saver> button still lights up when you perform the operations which do not
light up the touch screen such as printing command from a computer.

A message does not appear on the touch screen if you open and close the top cover of the
document feeder when the document feeder is deactivated (such as when the service to
use a scanner is not selected). However, the confirmation message appears on the touch
screen and the <Error> indicator lights up when the document feeder is activated (exits
the Power Saver mode) while the top cover is open.

The confirmation indicator does not light up if the document is loaded while the
document feeder is in the Power Saver mode (such as when the service to use a scanner
is not selected). However, the confirmation indicator lights up and the document is
detected when you load the document and then make the machine exit the Power Saver
mode.

The machine exits the Power Saver mode when you open the document cover to copy or
scan.
 After the machine exits the Power Saver mode, the document feeder and scanner device
are activated after the document cover is opened while the scanner device is deactivated.
However, to make the document detected on the document glass, make sure that the
scanner device in the document glass moves to the detect position for the document size,
and then close the document cover.

After the machine is activated from the Power Saver mode, a message does not appear
on the touch screen if you perform the following operations while the service to be used
for the output device, such as copying and secure printing, is not selected.
- Opening and closing the top cover of the document feeder
Appendix
- Opening and closing the front cover

- Opening and closing the bottom left cover
- Opening the paper tray
- All the operations including opening and closing the front cover of the finisher, and
pressing the buttons
16
However, the confirmation message appears and the <Error> indicator lights up when the
machine is activated (exits the Power Saver mode) while each cover or a paper tray is
open.
 After the machine exits the Power Saver mode, the value detected before the machine
enters the Power Saver mode is displayed or informed as paper tray status and the
719
16 Appendix
information on the consumables such as the toner remaining amount, status of the drum
cartridge, and paper, if the service used for the output device is not activated.

After the machine exits the Power Saver mode, be careful for the following if you use the
copy feature before you activate the service used for the output device.
The information displayed such as a paper size specified for the paper tray or the
remaining amount is detected before the Power Saver mode. If you change the paper size
or remaining amount during the Power Saver mode, it takes a few seconds for the change
to be updated on the screen.
 Exiting the Power Saver mode activates the entire machine when Copy, Simple Copy, or
Stored Programming is set as the default screen on the touch screen.

Exiting the Power Saver mode activates the entire machine when [Paper Tray Attributes
During Loading] is set to [On].
 The entire machine exits the Power Saver mode when you press the <Machine Status>
button, enter the System Administration mode, or select the Stored Programming service.
 The machine does not exit the Sleep mode when you use the EP service by EP-BB.
 When [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Port Settings] >
[USB] > [USB - Print Mode] is set to any option other than [Auto], exiting the Power Saver
mode activates the entire machine.
 The output device is activated when Secure Print is executed using job tickets of
ContentsBridge Utility.
 Opening and Closing of the Document Cover during the Power Saver Mode
If you open the document cover during the Power Saver mode, and then start scanning a
document immediately after the machine exits the mode, the detection error of a document
size may occur. In this case, enter the document size manually. It takes a few seconds before
the machine can detect a document size automatically. This detection error will not occur if
you load a document, close the document cover, and wait for a few seconds before start
scanning a document.
Note • When you approach the machine from undetectable area, the power saver will not be deactivated
even when Smart WelcomEyes is enabled.
 About View Image Generation

It may take time for generating view images depending on the type of document. If you
want to speed up the printing process or there is no need for displaying view images, you
can disable the image generation setting of the print driver.
Note • The print driver settings have priority over the machine settings.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature

Appendix
 Copy Feature
The machine does not offer the Improves Fit feature.
16  Meter Count for Dual Color and Single Color Copies

Dual color and single color copies are counted as color copies.
 Color Effect for Dual Color Copy

To extract colors for dual color copy, adjusting the colors of the document is required in
advance.
Our service representative performs the adjustment. Contact our Customer Support Center.
720
 Auto Contrast
The machine does not offer the [Auto Contrast] feature for [Color Effects].
 Pages per Side for Black & White and Color Mixed Documents and Meter Count
If you copy a document that contains black & white and color pages by specifying [Pages
per Side], an output sheet that has both black & white and color pages will be counted as a
color page.
 Copy and Simple Copy

You cannot switch the screen between the Copy and Simple Copy services. Return to the
Services Home screen, and then select a service. In that case, the settings specified in either
service are cleared.
 ID Card Copy
 The machine does not shift the ID card image to the center of the output in any
magnification ratio and image size you specified.
 When the reduced size is specified to copy an ID card, the machine may copy the ID card
in a different orientation from the original orientation depending on the magnification
ratio specified.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Print Feature
 PostScript Driver
Some options such as Poster (Photo Enlargement) are not supported by the PostScript driver.
With the Pages per Sheet (N-Up) feature, you can specify 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages up, and with
or without frame borders.
 Printing from Macintosh via USB Connection

When you send a print job from the PostScript driver of Macintosh connected via USB and
the job includes application data with graphic data (EPS file including binary data) pasted,
the machine may misidentify the binary data as protocol data; therefore, the output of text
data may extend for multiple pages.
In this case, select [RAW] for [Adobe Communication Protocol] under [Tools] > [System
Settings] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Port Settings] >[Parallel] or [USB] to properly
print data which includes EPS files with binary data.
 ContentsBridge
With ContentsBridge, you can print PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS data by drag and drop. To print
DocuWorks documents, however, DocuWorks Viewer Light (free distribution) or DocuWorks
6.0 or later (sold separately) is required. PDF and TIFF print data will be transferred to the
Appendix
machine directly, whereas DocuWorks document data will be first processed by the client
computer, and then transferred to the machine and printed.
 Text and Photos for Media Print

You can use a commercially available single-slot memory card reader, but the operation is
16
not guaranteed.
When you use a multi-slot memory card reader, only one of those slots can be recognized.
The slot to be used differs depending on the card readers. Some of the media and slots of
memory card readers may not be used on the machine, and the operation is not guaranteed.
721
16 Appendix
 Thumbnail for Media Print

The Media Print - Photos feature supports Thumbnail view but not Preview. The Media Print
- Text feature supports neither Thumbnail view nor Preview.
 Gigabit Ethernet Kit (Optional)

Installing the Gigabit Ethernet Kit achieves high-network communication speed, but it does
not shorten the entire printing time.
 Direct Print via USB Host (a USB memory device)

When the machine is in the Sleep mode, your computer does not detect the machine if you
connect a USB memory device to the machine. Exit the Sleep mode, and then connect the
USB memory device and send a print job.
 Print Jobs while the Control Panel is being Operated

The processing and output speeds of print jobs may slow in the following conditions:

The control panel is being operated while the machine processes a print job.
 The status of a print job is being viewed in the [Job Status] screen.
 When the Print Results Differ from the Settings

As in the following cases, insufficient memory for the print page buffer may cause print
result in not printing as specified. In this case, we recommend that you increase the memory.

Printed only on 1 side when 2 sided printing is specified.

A job was terminated (If data cannot be written to the print page buffer, the job including
that page is terminated).
 Printing from a USB Memory Device


To print from a USB memory device, the USB Memory Kit (optional) is required.

You can use a USB host adapter to print from your USB memory device or via your USB
cable (as necessary), but the operation is not guaranteed.
 Use USB 2.0 compliant memory devices only.
The following USB memory devices are not supported:
- A USB memory device with multiple media partitions that require other utilities to
access to the contents therein.
- A USB memory device connected via an external hub.
 Multiple USB memory devices cannot be used simultaneously.

The machine does not display a menu to prevent you from removing a USB memory
device while it is being accessed.
 Meter Counts for 2 Sided Printing

Appendix
When printing 2 sided, depending on the application being used, blank sheets can be
inserted automatically to adjust pages. These blank sheets inserted by the application will
also be counted by the meter.
16  Meter Count for Watermark
When the Copy Management Expansion Kit (optional) is installed and a document is printed
using the Watermark feature (such as Annotation and Force Annotation), the meters count
with the following method:
 Color documents are counted as color copies regardless of whether the Watermark
feature is used or not.
722
 Black & white documents are counted as color copies if [Font Color] is set to other than
[Black], or counted as black & white if [Font Color] is set to [Black].
 Print Job Speed at Control Panel Operation

When you use an ApeosPort series model or a DocuCentre series model with the Large Size
UI Kit (optional), the process or output speed of print jobs may reduce if you operate the
control panel or check print job status on the [Job Status] screen while performing a print
job.
 PDF Direct Print

PDF Direct Print supports Adobe PDF 1.6. However, note the followings:
- It may take long to output a PDF file, for the rendering processing is complicated.
- This feature does not support the "Embed OpenType Fonts" setting of Adobe®
Acrobat® 7 (PDF 1.6).
- This feature supports the features of PDF 1.6 created by Adobe Acrobat 7 or later.
However, it does not support the features of PDF 1.7 (Adobe Acrobat 8 and 9).
- PDF Bridge, that is provided by Fuji Xerox, of the machine supports the features of PDF
1.6 such as transparent object.
- Set the PostScript Memory to its maximum value (128MB) to print PDF files properly.
 ThinPrint
 To install "ThinPrint .print" to Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008, a ".print
Application Server Engine" license is required.

ThinPrint can operate in an IPv4 environment, but not in an IPv6 environment.
 Up to three can be connected simultaneously. The fourth or above connection requests
are stored in the queue. Up to 10 connection requests can be stored in the queue. If
exceeding 10, another connection request is no longer received. After preceding
connections are terminated, the connection requests in the queue will be processed
subsequently when the total number of the connections becomes less than four.

Functions to control jobs, such as canceling or suspending jobs, are not provided. Instead,
you can cancel a job on the [Job Status] screen from the control panel, or from
 The machine prints jobs in the order in which they are spooled. The jobs may not be
printed in the order in which the job requests are received by the machine.

If the power is switched off, this feature can store the order of jobs spooled and their data.
If the power switched off while a job is being received, the job is deleted.
 Paper Orientation when Printing Mixed Size Originals

 The combinations available for printing mixed size originals from the print driver are the
followings: A4 and A3, B5 and B4, 8.5 x 11" (Letter) and 11 x 17" (Tabloid), 16K and 8K.
Appendix
 The document orientation (portrait or landscape) may not be determined correctly

depending on the application being used. In this case, the output may have a different
orientation from the document orientation, depending on the combination of the mixed
size originals.
 The output may have a different orientation from the original orientation when a
16
document stored in a folder is printed.
 Direct Fax Driver

The direct fax driver does not support Envelope (90 x 205 mm), Envelope (162 × 229 mm),
Envelope (229 × 324 mm), and Envelope (235 × 120 mm).
723
16 Appendix
 Printing via lpr Port

When a print job is sent via the lpr port, the characters of user name, file name, or host name
may be garbled and displayed incorrectly on the screen during printing, the job confirmation
screen, or the Job History Report.
To prevent character garbling, use a port other than lpr.
 When Using the Authentication Feature on the machine

When you set the authentication information on the print driver, set the User ID up to 32
single-byte characters (16 double-byte characters). If you set the User ID using 17 double-
byte characters or more, an authentication error occurs so that you cannot start printing.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Scan Features

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using the Scan features.
For the notes and restrictions on Network Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3, refer to the Readme contained in the Driver
CD Kit.
 Retrieving Files from Folder


When [Delete Files After Retrieval] is set to [No], the same file can be accessed by multiple
clients.
When [Delete Files After Retrieval] is set to [Yes], only one client can access any given file.
The file that is being imported by a client cannot be seen by other clients.

When files are retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services, the files are not deleted
regardless of the setting of [Delete Files After Retrieval].
 Using Network Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3 Simultaneously

You cannot use both the Network Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3 on a single
computer to connect to the machine.
A maximum of three computers using either the Network Scan Driver or Stored File Manager
3 may retrieve files simultaneously from one machine.
 Secure Polling from Other Faxes

When the machine is instructed secure polling from other faxes, a scan document cannot be
transmitted.
 Using TIFF Files

The TIFF files created by Stored File Manager 3 are compressed into the MMR, MH, JBIG, or
JPEG format. To open a TIFF file, use application software that supports the format.
 Saving scanned data in Microsoft® Office format

Appendix
This feature provides convenience for users who want to directly edit texts or images on the
document scanned and converted into the Microsoft® Office format. Note that the strict
reproducibility of the texts, tables, images, and pictures of the original document may not
be ensured due to the scope of this feature.
16  Restriction on Scanning Capacity
The maximum scanning capacity for one page is 297 x 432 mm. For standard sizes, A3 or
11 x 17 inches.
 Number of Sheets for Scanning (for Folder)

A maximum of 999 pages can be scanned for folders at one time. The number of pages may
differ depending on the file size and resolution.
724
 Store to USB
 The Scanner Kit (optional) and the USB Memory Kit (optional) are required to use this
service.

You cannot use this service on job flows (whose Target is Scan Jobs or Folder).
 The USB 2.0 compliant memory device is supported.
 Neither file nor directory names in a USB memory device are displayed on the touch
screen.
 You cannot delete the files or folders in a USB memory device using the machine.
 To prevent you from removing a USB memory device while it is being accessed, an icon
showing that the removal of a USB memory device is prohibited appears on the touch
screen. Be sure to remove a USB memory device from the machine after the message
"Data has been transferred." is displayed on the touch screen.

When the data size exceeds the capacity of the USB memory device while the machine is
performing the Store to USB service, the job in progress is cancelled.

Neither the Media Print - Text nor Media Print - Photos feature can be used while the Store
to USB service is in progress. The Store to USB service cannot be used as well while the
Media Print - Text or Media Print - Photos feature is in progress.
 You can enable or disable the Store to USB service from CentreWare Internet Services in
the System Administration mode. You cannot set it from the touch screen. (The default
setting is [Enabled].)

You can set not to display the [Store to USB] service on the Services Home screen from
the touch screen.
 The machine may not be able to recognize a USB memory device that was formatted by
a digital camera or a tool other than the Windows standard format tool.
 Screen Switching After Inserting a USB Memory Device

 If a USB memory device is inserted when the machine is switched off, and then you switch
on, the Services Home screen is displayed.

When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory slot during the Power Saver
mode, the touch screen does not light up. After exiting the Power Saver mode by pressing
the <Power Saver> button, insert the USB memory device again or select the feature to
be used on the Services Home screen.

The screen does not switch when removing a USB memory device.

The screen switches even when a USB memory device whose format is not supported is
inserted. However, an error occurs when selecting the menu.
 If no media is in the Memory Card Reader (commercially available), the screen switches
Appendix
when you insert the Reader.


If the Memory Card Reader (commercially available) is used and it is left inserted all the
time, the screen does not switch even when a media is inserted into the slot of the Reader.
 Network Reference on SMB Environment 16

 If you configure more than 256 shared resources other than shared folders (such as
shared printers) when using Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows
Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, or
Windows 8.1, shared resources other than shared folders may be displayed in the shared
folder list.
 Names such as workgroup names, server names, and shared names on the network may
not be displayed alphabetically on the list.
725
16 Appendix
 Scan High Compression Feature

 To use the Image Compression feature, the Scan features are required.
 You can select 200 dpi or 300 dpi for the resolution.
 To view or print High-compression DocuWorks documents that are output by using the
Image Compression feature (on your computer), one of the following software is
required:
- DocuWorks 6.0 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light 5.1 or later
- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 5.1 or later
Note • You cannot use DocuWorks Trial edition. Use DocuWorks Viewer Light 7.0 (free distribution)
contained in the Driver CD Kit.

You can open High-compression PDF files with Adobe Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) or later.

The Image Compression feature may not be able to scan the colors of the documents
precisely due to the image processing to improve the compression ratio.
 PKI Encryption and PKI Signature of Scan Files


Signature using the electronic stamp of DocuWorks is not supported.

Acrobat Approval is not supported.
 PKI Encryption and PKI Signature of PDF and DocuWorks Documents

 PKI (Public Key Infrastructure) encryption of PDF is not available. A certificate is not used
for password encryption.

If a message stating that a certificate revocation could not be checked is displayed and
a signature verification error occurs in the viewer of DocuWorks and PDF, confirm the
certificate revocation setting in the viewer.
 Digital Signature of PDF


The security handler (XERX.FX.PPKMS) of Xerox is not provided.
 When a PDF document signed by the machine is displayed with Adobe Acrobat (Reader),
a message stating that no handler is found for signature confirmation may be displayed.
In this case, select [Windows Digital Certificate] or [Adobe Default Security].
 A certificate to be used for PDF digital signature must meet the conditions described in
the "S/MIME" section.
 S/MIME Communication
The E-mail and Internet Fax services support S/MIME.
 Searchable PDF
Appendix
 We recommend that you set [300 dpi] for [Resolution] when you use the optical character
recognition (OCR) feature.

For Store to Folder, you cannot select [Searchable] for [Searchable Text].
16  When you use CentreWare Internet Services to retrieve a file from a folder, you can set
[Searchable Text] if all scanned images of the file in the folder are set as follows:
- Image Size: 15 x 15 mm to 309 x 432 mm
- Color Scanning: Auto Detect, Color, Grayscale, Black & White (Black & White only for
some models)
- Original Type: Photo & Text, Text (for faxes, all types)
- Color Space: sRGB
726
- Resolution: 200dpi, 300dpi (for faxes, all resolutions)

- Reduce/Enlarge: 100% (for faxes, all ratios)
 Compression Format of Scanned Images


You cannot retrieve grayscale or color images in uncompressed (Raw) format.

JBIG2 compression of PDF is supported.
 Preview of Scan File


The output is not rotated even when the previewed image is rotated on the screen in the
following cases:
- The document is output in TIFF or JPEG
- The document is scanned to a folder
- The document is scanned using a job flow sheet
 If a preview image is not what you expected, cancel the job, configure the settings, and
then scan the document again.

If you cancel the scanning of a document by pressing the <Stop> button on the control
panel or the [Delete] button in the touch screen, selecting [Preview] may not display all
the scanned files.
 Scanning Documents with a Small Number of Colors (the Specific Color Feature)

This feature is installed as standard. However, it takes longer to compress the document
than the compression with the optional Advanced Scanner Kit. We recommend Advanced
Scanner Kit for customers who want to improve the productivity and speed.
 This feature may not achieve the same result as the data compressed by the optional
Advanced Scanner Kit.

Specific Color (for PDF or DocuWorks) and MRC High Compression (for PDF or
DocuWorks) cannot be used simultaneously.

You cannot use this feature when retrieving data via Network Scanner Utility 3.

Select [Color] for [Color Scanning].
 This feature is available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color], when [Resolution] is set
to [200 dpi] or [300 dpi], and when [File Format] is set to [PDF] or [DocuWorks].
 You cannot change the number of colors. (The maximum is 16 colors.)

You can attach thumbnails to files when [Specific Color] is selected, but the thumbnails
are displayed in full color.
 Monochrome images scanned with the Specific Color feature may be different from the
ordinary monochrome images in the image quality.
Appendix
 The Specific Color feature is not suitable for documents with graphs and photographs, or
with multiple colors. For those documents, use MRC High Compression.
 Obtaining Addresses from LDAP Server

 Recipients' addresses that can be obtained from the LDAP server for the E-mail service are
e-mail addresses, Internet fax addresses, and fax numbers.
16
 The Address Book that can be used for the E-mail service in Job Flows is the Address Book
stored in the machine.
727
16 Appendix
 Restrictions on Internet Explorer

 When you access a URL that is sent by e-mail using Internet Explorer, a File Download
pop-up window is displayed. Start the download within three minutes after the pop-up
window appears, otherwise an incomplete file will be left in your computer.

When you use the Store & Send Link service by selecting [DocuWorks] and [Single File for
Each Page] for [File Format], you may not properly obtain files from the destination URL
if [Automatic prompting for file downloads] is set to [Disable] under [Tools] > [Internet
Options] > [Security] > [Custom Level] > [Automatic prompting for file downloads] with
your Internet Explorer.
 When you use Internet Explorer, even if you click "To delete file, click here." in the
[Document Acquisition] screen of the Store & Send Link service, file deletion may not be
performed. In this case, use another browser than Internet Explorer to delete the file.
 Split Files
You cannot select [Single File for Each Page] when using the Store to Folder or Job Flow
feature.
 Thumbnail View
Files in a folder may not be displayed in thumbnail view in the following cases. In those
cases, display them in list view.
- Some file is not displayed in thumbnail view even though it is stored in the folder.
- Characters and images are not correctly displayed because they are scaled down from
the actual sizes.
 The orientation of an image displayed in thumbnail view depends on which orientation
the document was stored in.

If the power is cut off immediately after a scanned file is stored in a folder, or if the hard
disk space is insufficient to display thumbnails, files in the folder may not be displayed in
thumbnail view. In that case, display them in list view.
 2 Sided Simultaneous Scan

When [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] and [Color Space] is set to [Device Color Space], 2
sided simultaneous scan is not available.
 FTP Transmission for Scan to PC

 By factory default, [Passive Mode] is selected as a transfer mode to send scanned data
via FTP from the machine.

You can switch the FTP transfer mode using CentreWare Internet Services, but cannot
switch the mode per job or per destination FTP server.
 Depending on your network environment, operations may not be performed properly
Appendix
unless the FTP transfer mode is switched from [Passive Mode] to [Active Mode].
 When [IP Filtering] is enabled, make sure to switch the FTP transfer mode to [Active
Mode].
In [Passive Mode], the server permits a client to connect to the port for the data transfer
16 so that the client starts the connection. [Passive Mode] is commonly used and also has
lower security risk than [Active Mode].
In [Active Mode], a client notifies the server of the port number for the data transfer so
that the server starts the connection. [Active Mode] may incur a security risk such as
impersonation by third parties. In addition, the proper connection may not be available
in a firewall environment. In such a case, select [Passive Mode].
728
 SMB Transfer for Scan to PC

 If you use Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, or OS X 10.9 Mavericks, contact
our Customer Support Center and ask if your operating system is supported.
 Store to WSD
 When the WSD scan port is not activated, the [Store to WSD] button is not displayed in
the Services Home screen. Enable the WSD scan port to use the Store to WSD feature on
the machine.
 Store to WSD feature requires the scanner driver included as standard in Windows Vista
Service Pack 2 or later. When an appropriate operation system is installed, you can
operate scan using [Windows Fax and Scan] or [From scanner or camera] in [Microsoft
Paint].
 [Next Original] is not displayed when using WSD scan.
 You cannot execute multiple jobs simultaneously. If you execute a job during the scan
job, the latter job is not accepted.

When using WSD scan, you cannot change layout settings by the machine. Configure the
settings on the computer using the scanner driver included as standard in Windows.
 Press [Operate From Computer] to display the standby screen. If the standby screen is not
displayed, a scan job will not be started even when the network computer recognizes the
machine. While the standby screen is displayed, the machine does not execute Auto Clear
or enter the Power Saver mode.
 After being scanned, remove the originals and then select [OK] on the [Remove Your
Originals] screen. You cannot execute any operation without selecting [OK].

Store to WSD feature requires the default scanner driver included as standard in Windows
Vista or later. Setting items are different from those for the dedicated scanner driver.
 Microsoft® Office Format

 This feature supports Microsoft® Word format (doc) and Microsoft® Excel® format (xls).
 An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our

This feature provides convenience for users who want to directly edit texts or images in
the document scanned and converted into the Microsoft® Office format. Note that the
strict reproducibility of the texts, tables, images, and pictures in the original document
may not be ensured due to the scope of this feature.
 This feature is not available when using job flows (whose Target is Scan Jobs or Folder),
when importing files stored in a folder using CentreWare Internet Services, or when
retrieving data via Network Scanner Utility 3.
Appendix
 Microsoft® Office Format is available when the following conditions are satisfied:
- Color Scanning: Auto Detect, Color, Grayscale
Note • This feature cannot be selected when [Color Scanning] is set to [Black & White].
• [Photographs] is not available for this feature even if you select [Color] in [Color Scanning]. 16
- Original Size: 50 × 50 mm to 297 × 432 mm
- Resolution: 300dpi
- Reduce/Enlarge: 100%
Note • This feature is not available when [Auto %] is selected.
 This feature supports neither Microsoft® Office for Mac OS nor Microsoft® Word/Excel®
2000.
729
16 Appendix
 The machine cannot convert document into Microsoft® PowerPoint, Microsoft® Office
XML, Text, HTML, or CSV format.

BMLinkS® is not supported.

It is recommended that you save a copy file in PDF format or XDW format to check if
images are converted correctly.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Fax Feature
 Settings on Manual Fax Transmissions

Manual fax transmissions are performed in accordance with the settings in [Fax Defaults].
If you change settings on the fax screen before the calling screen appears, the settings
become effective.
 Relay Broadcast
The machine has the function of an initiating station but does not have the function of a
relay station.
The machine does not support G4 communications, but if a relay station supports G4
communications, the machine can select a G4 communication function that a relay station
performs as an instruction for relay broadcast.
 Features Supported by F Code Communication

F Code communication supports the following features: the Send Fax - Remote Folder,
Secure Polling, Store File - Local Folder, Relay Broadcast, and Remote Relay Broadcast
features.
 Fax Immediate Reception

If the machine's memory capacity becomes insufficient to receive fax data, the machine
automatically switches into immediate reception mode. In this mode, the machine outputs
received documents on a page-by-page basis; each document page is output immediately
after the machine finishes receiving it. However, if the machine receives large data, such as
an A3 size photo with many halftone levels, the machine may not print it even after the
machine finishes receiving it. In that case, press the <Stop> button, or turn the machine off
and then on again, to have the machine print the document.
 Skip Blank Pages Feature

The accuracy of detecting blank pages depends on the status of the page. For example, if a
blank page has background shadows, the machine may not determine the page as a blank
page.
 Address Type Settings When Registering on the Address Book

Appendix
The following address types can be selected when you add an address to Address Book:
Fax, IP Fax (SIP), Internet Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/SMB)
When you register an address on the Address Book, select an address type in accordance
with the service. The address book entry registered with the wrong address type cannot be
16 selected from the original service.
 Simple Fax
 While you are making the settings for [Fax/Internet Fax], you cannot switch to the
[Simple Fax] screen. To switch to the [Simple Fax] screen, you must return to the Services
Home screen. Once you return to the Services Home screen, the settings you have made
will be cleared.
730
 You can re-enter a recipient after entering the recipient to prevent sending a fax to a
wrong address.

You cannot use address numbers to specify recipients for Broadcast Send, group dial
numbers, the Address Book, and wildcards.
 Printer Lockout
If the power is switched off when both [Set Lockout Duration] and [Allow User to Lock Out]
are selected in [Printer Lockout], the manually configured [Lock Out Printer] setting is
cleared. If the power is switched on again, [Set Lockout Duration] will be effective regardless
of the [Lock Out Printer] setting.
 Activity Report
 The number of a smart card cannot be displayed.
 Prevention of Wrong Transmissions for Direct Fax


After specifying a recipient using an address number (Speed Dial) or the Address Book,
the [Settings of Reentering Fax Address] dialog box will not be displayed even when
[Settings of Reentering Fax Address:] is set to [On] on the [Configuration] tab on the
[Properties] screen.
 You cannot enter a fax number when [Restriction of Specifying Fax Address] is set to
[Speed Dial Only] or [Phonebook Only] on the [Configuration] tab on the [Properties]
screen. Specify a recipient using an address number (Speed Dial) or the Address Book
under this setting.

You cannot specify multiple recipients when [On] is set for [Restrict Multi-Address Fax
Transmission:] to prevent faxes from being sent to undesired destinations.
 Direct Fax
When sending a fax using the Direct Fax feature, the recipient name is printed on the
Activity Report, Confirmation Options, Transmission Report - Job Undelivered, Broadcast
Report, and Job History Report. If you want to print the telephone number or SIP URL
instead, leave the text box of [Name] on the print driver screen blank. Note that the column
of [To] on the Fax Cover Page is also left blank under this setting.
When a recipient’s name of Direct Fax exceeds 18 single and double-byte characters, the
19th character and after will be truncated on the Job History Report.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the E-mail/Internet Fax Feature
 Notes on E-mail Transmissions

"The job has been sent." that is displayed on the confirmation screen, Activity Report, or
Appendix
Confirmation Options indicates that an e-mail has been sent to the SMTP server configured
on the machine for transmitting e-mail. The e-mail, however, may not reach its destination
for some problem on the transmission path of the Internet. In this case, the machine is not
notified of such transmission error. After sending an important e-mail, we recommend that
you confirm its reception, such as by calling the recipient.
 Feature Combinations when Transmitting an Internet Fax

16
 [Resolution] on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen
When [TIFF-S] is selected for [Internet Fax Profile] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options]
screen, [Superfine (400 dpi)] or [Superfine (600 dpi)] cannot be selected.
For information on Internet fax profiles, refer to "4 Fax > "Fax/Internet Fax Options" > "Internet Fax Profile (Specifying
Internet Fax Profiles)" in the User Guide.
731
16 Appendix
 [Starting Rate] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen

The communication mode can be specified only when sending e-mail using the Fax
Gateway feature. For other cases, e-mail is sent via G3 Auto.
For more information on the Fax Gateway feature, refer to "4 Fax" > "About Internet Fax" > "Useful Features" > "Sending
Internet Fax to regular fax machines via a relay station" in the User Guide.

[Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen
When [TIFF-S] is selected for [Internet Fax Profile] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options]
screen, an Internet fax is sent in A4 even if a size larger than A4 is specified.
For information on Internet fax profiles, refer to "4 Fax > "Fax/Internet Fax Options" > "Internet Fax Profile (Specifying
Internet Fax Profiles)" in the User Guide.
 Internet Fax and Direct Internet Fax

 You can switch between the Internet Fax and Internet Fax Direct features in the System
Administration mode, however, you cannot use both features simultaneously. For
switching between the features, contact your system administrator.
 Both the Internet Fax and E-mail services can be used at the same time. The Internet Fax
Direct and E-mail services can also be used simultaneously.
 The following recipient machines (models with the Fax feature) can establish a peer-to-
peer communication with the machine for the Internet Fax Direct feature:
- ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275
- DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275
- ApeosPort-IV C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275
- DocuCentre-IV C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373
- ApeosPort-IV C7780/C6680/C5580
- DocuCentre-IV C7780/C6680/C5580
- ApeosPort-IV C4430
- DocuCentre-IV C4430
Appendix
- ApeosPort-III C4405
- DocuCentre-III C4405
- ApeosPort-III C3305/C2205
16 - DocuCentre-III C3305/C2205
- ApeosPort-III 4000/3000
- DocuCentre-III 4000/3000
- ApeosPort-III 7000/6000/5000
- DocuCentre-III 7000/6000/5000
- ApeosPort-III C4400
- DocuCentre-III C4400
732
- ApeosPort-III C3300/C2200
- DocuCentre-III C3300/C2200
- DocuCentre-III 4000/3000
- ApeosPort-II 7000/6000/5000
- DocuCentre-II 7000/6000/5000
- ApeosPort-II C7500/C6500/C5400
- DocuCentre-II C7500/C6500/C5400
- DocuCentre-II 4000/3000
- Papered-II 4000/3000
- DocuCentre-II C4300/C3300/C2200
- ApeosPort-II C4300/C3300/C2200
- ApeosPort C7550 I/C6550 I/C5540 I
- ApeosPort 750 I/650 I/550 I
- ApeosPort C4535 I/C3626 I/C2521 I
- ApeosPort 450 I/350 I
- DocuCentre Color f450/f360/f250
- DocuCentre f285/f235

When [Resend Attempts] is set to [On] and the status of the Internet Fax Direct feature
enters Resend Required, the subsequent jobs will not be executed until the jobs in Standby
status finish.
 Transmission results of Internet faxes cannot be listed on Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered or Transmission Report by recipients. Transmission results of Internet Direct
faxes can be listed on the reports.
 Internet Fax Profiles

 When specifying an Internet fax profile
The Internet fax profile that can be processed varies depending on the machine that the
recipient uses. When specifying an Internet fax profile, confirm whether it can be
processed by the recipient's machine.
 When an Internet fax profile not supported by the recipient's machine is specified
If the Internet fax profile you specified is not supported by the recipient's machine, the
image you sent cannot be displayed or printed on the recipient's machine. Before using
an Internet fax profile, confirm if it can be processed by both your machine and the
recipient's machine.
 TIFF files and Internet fax profiles that can be processed upon Internet fax reception
- TIFF file format: TIFF-FX (RFC2301)
- Internet fax profile: TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J, TIFF-C
Appendix
When the machine receives unsupported internet fax profile, the file may not be printed.
When the machine receives TIFF-C, the file will be printed in B&W.
Note • Communications and Information network Association of Japan (CIAJ) confirms the use of image-/
tiff-fx.
 Transmission conditions for broadcast transmission 16
- When sending a document via a broadcast transmission, it can be sent to both Internet
fax and regular fax addresses at the same time. To Internet fax addresses, the
document will be sent by e-mail, and to regular fax addresses, the document will be
sent by fax.
733
16 Appendix
- When the transmission conditions are different for each address, set all addresses to
the following settings.
- Transmission mode:G3 Auto
- Internet fax profile: TIFF-S
- Read/delivery receipt:None
 E-mail Forwarding
If the fax you received is a JBIG-compressed image, and if the Internet fax profile of the
forwarding destination is set to TIFF-F, the machine converts the image into MH format
when forwarding. When the Internet fax profile is TIFF-S, the data is forwarded with its size
and resolution unchanged.
 S/MIME Communication for Internet Fax (ApeosPort Series Models only)

S/MIME Encryption cannot be used for the features that use special e-mail addresses, such
as the reception of Internet fax with a folder specified and a fax transfer for e-mails received
by Internet Fax.
 S/MIME Untrusted E-mail Reception Settings

When [Receive Untrusted E-mail] or [Receive Untrusted Internet Fax] under [Connectivity &
Network Setup] > [Security Settings] > [S/MIME Settings] is set to [No] in the System
Administration mode, you cannot receive the confirmation result even if [Read Receipts] is
set to [On].
 Fax Gateway Feature

This feature can only be used when the e-mail receiving protocol is SMTP on the Internet
Fax-enabled machine that faxes are sent to.
If an e-mail was sent by converting it into fax, and if it was not delivered successfully to the
recipient, the e-mail that was received originally will be deleted.
For more information on the Fax Gateway feature, refer to "4 Fax" > "About Internet Fax" > "Useful Features" > "Sending
Internet Fax to regular fax machines via a relay station" in the User Guide.
 Restrictions on Paper Selections upon Internet Fax Reception

The machine determines whether a TIFF file attached to an e-mail complies with the
content type defined in RFC2301 and RFC3250. If the content type is compliant with
RFC2301 and RFC3250, the machine selects appropriate paper to render the file image as
a fax-received image.
Even when the file was received via Internet Fax, if its content type is not compliant with
FRC2301 or RFC3250, the machine will not properly select paper for it. For example, an
incoming fax that is A4 size may be printed on B4 paper instead.
Such problems may improve depending on the usage. Contact our Customer Support Center
for further information.
Appendix
 Resolution when group is specified

When you specify a group using Internet Fax, [Resolution] for the address numbers
registered as a group is not applied.
16 The resolution set by [Resolution] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen is transmitted to the
machine.
 Restrictions on the E-mail Server

Depending on the system environment (such as the restrictions on your e-mail server), large
e-mail may not be delivered successfully. When sending a large e-mail by splitting it, check
the capacity of your system environment and of the recipient's environment.
734
If the data size is still too large to send, reduce their size by lowering the image resolution or
transmission resolution.
 Network Security
We do not guarantee the security of any information disclosed over the network.
 Setting the System Environment for E-mail Service

To send or receive e-mail, the system environment of the machine must be set for the E-mail
service. Set up the system environment such as SMTP, POP3, and DNS servers, as required.
 Notes on Security
E-mail uses the Internet, which is a network connecting computers worldwide, as its
transmission path. Thus, since other signals also are sent over the Internet, you must pay
attention to security to prevent third parties from reading or tampering of your e-mail.
Consequently, to transmit important information, we recommend that you use other
transmission methods that guarantee security. In addition, to avoid the reception of
unwanted e-mail, we recommend that you do not disclose your e-mail address to third
parties unless necessary.
 Preventing Receipt of Unwanted E-mail

The machine provides a feature that prevents the reception of unwanted e-mail sent from
third parties.
By specifying the domains from which e-mail can be received, you automatically can reject
e-mail sent from other addresses.
For information on restricting domains from which e-mail can be received, refer to "Domain Filtering" (P.243).
 Notes on E-mail Receptions

A large volume of e-mail may not be printed if the memory capacity is insufficient. In this
case, increase the memory size or ask the sender to lower the resolution.
 Notes on E-mail Reception when [Split by Data Size] is specified

When [Split by Data Size] is specified as the e-mail splitting method, even if you receive the
split e-mail, you cannot reconstruct and print it.
 Notes on E-mail Transmission when [Split by Data Size] is specified

When [Split by Data Size] is specified as the e-mail splitting method, split the data so as to
enable e-mail reception with e-mail software corresponding to the Message/Partial content
type.
 Job Counter Report

If you specify multiple different [Pages per Side] settings using the Build Job feature, the
numbers of pages displayed for [2 Pages] and [Greater than 2 Pages Up] displayed on the
Appendix
Job Counter Report are calculated according to the latest N-up setting you specify.
Example 1:
When you select [2 Pages] for Document 1 (4 pages) and [Off] for Document 2 (2 pages),
both Documents 1 and 2 are set to [Off] and the number of printed pages is calculated as
follows: 16
 Total pages: 4
 2 up: 0
Example 2:
When you select [Off] for Document 1 (4 pages) and [2 Pages] for Document 2 (2 pages),
both Documents 1 and 2 are set to [2 Pages] and the number of printed pages is calculated
as follows:
735
16 Appendix
 Total pages: 5
 2 up: 5
On ApeosWare Log Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Accounting Service (sold
separately), the numbers of pages for 2in1, 4in1, and 8in1 are also calculated in the same
way as described above.
The meter on the [Billing Information] screen calculates the number of printed pages
correctly regardless of the [Pages per Side] setting.
 Folder Passcode
 You do not need to specify the passcode of a recipient when sending an IP Fax (SIP) to a
remote folder. Thus, the passcode enclosed in "\" or "/" is not replaced by "*" as with that
of regular faxes. If you select an IP Fax (SIP) by mistake and specify the passcode of a
recipient when you send a fax or an Internet fax, the passcode is displayed on the touch
panel screen, the Job Status screen, and a report. Be sure to check the type of fax before
sending a fax to a remote folder.
 Communications and Information network Association of Japan (CIAJ) confirms the use
of image-/tiff-fx.
Notes and Restrictions for IP Fax (SIP)

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using IP Fax (SIP).
IP Fax (SIP) Feature


In IP Fax (SIP) transmissions, protocols used for call connection are SIP and for data
communication is T.38. Other IP Fax transmissions protocols, such as H.323 standard and
deemed voice communication method, are not supported.
 IP Fax (SIP) cannot be performed on SSL/TLS communication.
 In IP Fax (SIP) transmissions, authentication is performed between the machine and a
SIP server. The authentication supports the digest authentication only. NTLM and the
other authentication methods are not supported.

The number of simultaneous connections for IP fax (SIP) is one. The machine cannot
perform sending and receiving an IP fax (SIP) at the same time.
 Up to two SIP servers are available for a registrar server and a proxy server, respectively.
 The IP address of a SIP server can be resolved using DHCP or DHCPv6 (The IP address of
the SIP server must be set to the option number "120" of a DHCP or a DHCPv6 server).
However, observe the following considerations:
- If an IP address is automatically resolved using DHCP in an IPv4 environment, set [IPv4
- IP Address Resolution] to [DHCP] or [DHCP/AutoIP].
Appendix
- Even when an IP address can be resolved automatically using DHCP or DHCPv6, port
number, login user name, login password, and server type cannot be resolved
automatically. Configure these items manually.
- If an IP address is resolved automatically, the same IP address is assigned to a proxy
16 server and a registrar server. If you use different IP addresses for a proxy server and a
registrar server, configure the IP addresses manually.
- If multiple IP addresses are resolved automatically, assign the first IP address to a
primary proxy/registrar server and the second to a secondary proxy/registrar server.
The third and subsequent addresses are not used.
736
 Only ToS (IP Precedence/DSCP) is supported as a QoS control method, and other QoS
controls including CoS are not supported. Set the priority of IP packet transmission in
[Prioritize IP Packets] to perform QoS control for the machine.
Recipients
 The communication between IP Fax (SIP) devices is available for our compatible
machines in a corporate intranet. (Able 1407 λ is not available.) For information on the
compatible machines, contact our Customer Support Center.
SIP Server
The following e-mail applications can transmit e-mails between the machine and a
computer:

Cisco MCS 7800 series (Cisco Unified Communications Manager 6.0/6.1/7.1/8.0 is
installed) is validated as a SIP server available for the machine.
 If you use a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., only UDP can be used as T.38
protocol.

SIP servers do not work on IPsec communications.

SIP servers do not work in an IPv6 environment.

SRST that works on routers such as CISCO2801 manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc. is
not supported.
 Cisco Call Manager Express that works on routers such as CISCO2801 by Cisco Systems,
Inc. is not supported
 If you use a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., you can specify only IPv4
address character strings of the SIP server on the right side of @ in [SIP User ID (Sign-in
Name)]. If you specify IPv6 address character strings, FQDN character strings, and SIP
domain name character strings, the SIP server does not work.
 When a SIP server is configured as a SIP terminal of the machine on the server, if settings
other than specified are configured, the SIP server does not work as the SIP terminal.
 For a SIP server manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., an address retention period is fixed
to 120 seconds. This value cannot be changed even if Timer Register Expires value is
changed.
VoIP Gateway
 Cisco ISR 2800 series (with IOS 12.4) is validated as a VoIP gateway available for the
machine.

The gateway may not work properly over an analog line depending on your environment.
 If you use a VoIP gateway manufactured by Cisco Systems, Inc., only UDP can be used as
Appendix
T.38 protocol.
 VoIP gateways do not work on IPsec communication.
 VoIP gateways do not work in an IPv6 environment.
 If settings other than specified by Fuji Xerox are configured for a dial peer or a voice port 16
on a VoIP gateway, the VoIP gateway does not work.
 If a part of transferred data is lost on a network, a part of image may be missing or be
getting stacked. To avoid these, the ECM mode is effective. The machine can always use
the ECM mode, however, you cannot use the mode depending on the VoIP gateway
settings. Consult your network administrator whether the ECM mode is available.
737
16 Appendix
NAT/NAPT
 Communication protocols that transmit UPnP, TURN, STUN, ICE, and UDP hole punching
in SIP communications are not supported. IP Fax (SIP) does not work in an environment
that uses NAT/NAPT devices including ALG.
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting with Internet Service Provider

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using features that transmit e-
mails or Internet faxes using an Internet service provider (ISP).
The features related to e-mail are as follows:
 E-mail
 E-mail Notification Service
 Print E-mail
 Internet Fax
 Notes and Restrictions on Accessing ISP

Observe the following notes and restrictions when connecting the machine to ISP:
 Dial-up connection is not supported. Continuous connection is required.
 Connect the machine in an environment using IP masquerade. Assigning a global IP
address to the machine is not supported.
 Be sure to assign an exclusive e-mail account to the machine for POP reception. Sharing
an e-mail account with other users may cause troubles.

Be sure to set size limitation for sending e-mail. Although the applicable e-mail size may
vary depending on the ISP used, we recommend that you set a small value.

Although continuous connection other than ADSL or cable connection is also supported,
the reception of image data significantly burdens the machine.
 SMTP reception is not supported. This machine supports only POP reception.
 When installing the machine in an environment that is operating a mail transfer agent
(MTA) in a private segment, set the machine to adapt to the operation system being used.

For information about supported ISPs, contact our Customer Support Center.
 When received via POP, the fax cannot be sent using the Fax Gateway feature. This is
because POP receiving does not forward an Internet fax document received by e-mail to
the fax machine.
 Feature Specifications
Appendix
Details of the features related to e-mail are as follows:

 Transmission specifications
Supported protocol : SMTP

16 Port number : 25 (default)
 Authentication for transmission
SMTP authentication : AUTH GSSAPI (only for Kerberos), AUTH

NTLMv2, AUTH NTLMv1, AUTH
PLAIN,AUTH LOGIN, and AUTH CRAM-
MD5
738
POP before SMTP : Plain and APOP

Waiting time for POP authentication : cannot be changed
Encryption communication (SSL) : supported

Receiving specifications
Supported protocol : POP3

POP3 port number : 110 (default)
Authentication method for POP3 : Plain and APOP
E-mail processing after POP3 reception : deletes e-mail received from a server after
reception. Settings to store e-mail on the
server is not supported.
Encryption communication (SSL) : not supported
Note • IMAP4 is not supported.
 IP Address Settings
The machine does not support a global IP address. Be sure to use the machine in an
environment using IP masquerade.
 Operating with fixed address
Register the machine's IP address on a router or a server managing IP addresses for
domain control servers.

Operating with DHCP
Setting is not required. Depending on settings of the router and the DHCP server,
registration may be required. Confirm operation rules for the router and DHCP server you
are using. When access is restricted by MAC address, registration on the DHCP server may
be required.
 Settings from the Control Panel

Before you use the E-mail service, set the maximum data size for sending e-mail on the
control panel. For more information on the maximum limit, refer to the ISP guidelines. The
recommended value is 1 to 2 MB.
In the System Administration mode, select [Tools] > [System Settings] > [E-mail/Internet
Fax Service Settings] > [E-mail Control] > [Maximum Total Data Size] to configure the
setting.
For more information on setting, refer to "Maximum Total Data Size" (P.276).
Suitable image sizes are as follows:

Appendix
 A4 full-color 200 dpi with standard compression : around 700 KB


A4 full-color 200 dpi with high compression : around 400 KB

A4 black and white 200 dpi (text document) : around 25 KB

A4 black and white 200 dpi (text & photo document) : around 200 KB 16
Note • The sizes described above are applicable when sending e-mail. The actual size may be different.
 Settings from CentreWare Internet Services

For more information on settings to be configured on CentreWare Internet Services, click [Help] at the upper right corner of
the CentreWare Internet Services screen to see help.
739
16 Appendix
• Set [Polling Interval] to at least 10 minutes when connecting to ISP.
Notes and Restrictions on the Interrupt Mode

If you press the <Interrupt> button while printing, the machine temporarily stops printing
and enters the Interrupt mode.
Important • When [Resume by User] in "Resume Job After Print Error" (P.247) is selected, the machine will not
temporarily stop printing even when the <Interrupt> button is pressed.
Note • However, if the machine is scanning a document while printing, the print job cannot be interrupted.
Appendix
16
740
Jobs can/cannot be executed during interruption are as follows:
Job Instruction from Job

Job
the Control Panel*1 Execution
Copy Required O
Print Printing of a document*2 instructed from a Required*3 O
client computer
Printing of a document*4 instructed from the Required O

<Job Status> button > [Secure Print Jobs &
More]
Fax Fax transmission, Broadcast Send Required O
Store for Poling Required O
Incoming Fax Print Required*3 O
Printing of a document in the Public Folder Required O

([Job Status] > [Secure Print Jobs & More] on
the control panel)
Direct Fax Direct Fax transmission Not required Δ
Internet Fax Internet fax Transmission Required O
Internet fax reception/printing Required*3 O
Internet fax reception/Store Internet fax - Not required Δ

Local Folder
Forwarding an incoming Internet fax to a Not required Δ
regular fax machine
Forwarding an incoming fax to an Internet fax Not required X
Scan Store to Folder, Scan to PC, E-mail, Network Required O
Scanning, Store & Send Link, and Store to USB
Report/List Automatic printing of a report/list other than a Not required X
Job History Report
Automatic printing of a Job History Report Not required O
Printing of a report/list instructed from the Required O
<Machine Status> button > [Machine
Information] > [Print Reports]
Folder Automatic forwarding of a stored file, Not required X
automatic fax/Internet fax transmission
Printing of a stored file (Fax for Secure Polling/ Required O
Store Fax - Local Folder/Store Internet Fax -
Appendix
Local Folder) instructed from the control panel

Printing of a stored file (scanned file/print file) Required X
instructed from the control panel
Automatic printing of a stored file Required*3 O
Job Flow Sheet Execution of a job flow sheet instructed in Required O

16
[Send from Folder] or [Job Flow Sheets] on the
touch screen
741
16 Appendix
O : The job can be executed during the Interrupt mode.

X : The job cannot be executed during the Interrupt mode
Δ : The job can be accepted from a client or another machine, but the job cannot be executed during the
Interrupt mode.
*1 : The job instruction from the control panel is required/not required to execute the job.
*2 : Normal printing, first set of Sample Set, Delayed Print (auto print)
*3 : During interruption, any document displayed as a pending job on the [Job Status] screen can be printed by selecting
[Promote Job]. When priority printing is instructed during interruption, the next priority printing is disabled until the instructed
print job is completed.
*4 : Secure Print, Private Charge Print, Sample Set, Delayed Print, or Charge Print
Note • The followings jobs are executed regardless of the Interrupt mode.
- Automatic fax transmission (Send Fax - Remote Folder)
- Fax reception
Notes and Restrictions on Folders
 Printing Scan Files

When you print files in a folder such as the following, it may take long to output the first
page:
- Files with multiple pages
- Files with colors or saved in high resolution
 Retrieving Files in Folder from CentreWare Internet Services

 Files in a folder can be retrieved in DocuWorks or PDF format from CentreWare Internet
Services, but DocuWorks and PDF files that are encrypted or with signature attached
cannot be retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services.

When you retrieve a file in PDF format from CentreWare Internet Services, the PDF file
cannot be optimized for Web view.
 About Drag and Drop Operation Using Stored File Manager 3


When drag and drop a document from the folder, the document is copied and still
remains in the folder. To delete the document in the folder, select [Delete] from the
toolbar.

When you drag and drop a document that temporary file name exceeds 107 characters,
you cannot retrieve the document. Temporary file name consists of the following:
If the user name exceeds 39 characters, it may exceed 107 characters.
- Windows 7
<system drive>\Users\<user name>\Documents\Fuji Xerox\Network Scan3
You can change the directory of the temporary file by: [File] > [Details] > [Other settings]
> [Temporary Save in]
Appendix
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting to Internet or Intranet

16 Internet/Intranet Connection
Depending on the web server, server application, proxy server, and firewall, you may not be
able to connect to the Internet or intranet.
To connect to the Internet or intranet using a third party server application, proxy, or
firewall, the following requirements must be met:
742
 Supporting Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows
Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows 8.1
 Comply with the following conditions:
- RFC2616: Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP/1.1
(Standard connection/SSL connection/Proxy authentication)
- RFC2617: HTTP Authentication: Basic and Digest Access Authentication
(only Basic authentication is supported, the other authentications are not supported)
- RFC2817: Upgrading to TLS Within HTTP/1.1
- RFC2818: HTTP Over TLS

Supporting the HTTP/HTTPS schemata

Supporting the GET/CONNECT/POST methods
Notes and Restrictions when Operating from Computers
 Supported OS
There are notes and restrictions on Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions, Microsoft Windows Vista x64 Edition,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64 Editions, Microsoft Windows 7 x64 Edition, Microsoft
Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Editions, Microsoft Windows 8 x64 Edition, Microsoft Windows
8.1 x64 Edition, Microsoft Windows Server 2012 x64 Editions, and Microsoft Windows Server
2012 R2 x64 Edition Drivers. For notes and restrictions on the supported operating systems,
refer to our Web site before using the operating systems.
 Restrictions on Macintosh (standard)

 In Macintosh environment, the Scan features using the Direct Fax feature and a TWAIN
scanner driver cannot be used.

The print driver for Max OS X adopts the Plugin driver, which enables you to make the
settings for the authentication information and to use the Secure Print feature.

In Macintosh environment, the Scan features using a TWAIN scanner driver cannot be
used.
 Restrictions on Macintosh (the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional))

To print using PostScript, the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is required.

Because the print drivers for Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain
Lion , and OS X 10.9 Mavericks adopt Plug-ins, the User Details Setup, Secure Print, Sample
Set, Delayed Print, and Print Stored File features are available.
Appendix
 Print Driver for Mac OS X


Mac OS X 10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, and OS X 10.9
Mavericks is supported.
 The Direct Fax feature cannot be used.
 There is neither the feature to adjust image quality nor to save toner. There are also some
16
limitations, for example, in paper size settings and paper types. To fully utilize the Print
feature, install the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional).
 Direct Fax for Mac OS


Documents in various size are not supported.
743
16 Appendix
 When sending a document of different orientations using this feature, the machine may
divide the document into multiple jobs in each size. (It depends on the application you
use.)
 This feature does not support documents with covers.

If you attach covers to a document on Mac OS, only the cover page is sent to the recipient.
Even if you set to output multiple sets, the setting is changed to 1 set automatically.
 The Collate feature is not available.
 CentreWare Internet Services

 When [CSRF Protection] feature is enabled, CentreWare Internet Services may become
inaccessible depending on your browser type, web browser usage situation, and the
network environment. In such a case, try to access CentreWare Internet Services from
other computer. Be sure to consult your system administrator before disabling the
feature. If you have no other computer that can access CentreWare Internet Services,
CSRF is a type of attack that forces a user to execute unwanted action on a web site in
which the user is currently authenticated, via the malicious web site. The [CSRF
Protection] feature prevents unwanted actions from being executed on CentreWare
Internet Services and changing the machine settings in case the user unknowingly
accesses a malicious website.

The optional hard disk is required to obtain a Job History Report in a CSV format using
CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
 Do not edit or change the CSV file (address book data) exported by CentreWare Internet
Services using software such as Microsoft® Excel®. Some models do not display any
warning message when registering the altered data. Since the altered data may be
damaged, fax may be sent to undesired recipients.

The recipient data is added to the Address Book in the machine without deleting
registered recipients when you import the data from [Data Import] on [Address Book] tab
of CentreWare Internet Services. If you want to change the setting to overwrite mode,
 Only the Address Book data exported from [Data Export] on the [Address Book] tab of
CentreWare Internet Services is available for importing with [Data Import] on [Address
Book] tab.

When the Authentication feature is used and the characters other than alphanumeric
characters are used for the User ID, CentreWare Internet Services is not available.
Notes and Restrictions on Job Flows

Appendix
 Job Flows (ApeosPort Series Models Only)


If you transfer fax or Internet fax documents via SMB, FTP, or E-mail, the documents will
16 be converted into the standard size (such as A4 and A3) and printed.
 If a Job Flow is performed with the following settings, an interference pattern may be
created:
- Original Type: [Photo & Text] or [Photo]
- Resolution: [400 dpi] or [600 dpi]
- Internet fax profile for sending Internet faxes: [TIFF-S]
 If an interference pattern is created, change the settings as follows:
744

- Internet fax profile for sending Internet faxes: [TIFF-F] or [TIFF-J]
 Web Application feature (ApeosPort Series Models Only)


The following conditions and restrictions are applied when you print files stored in a
remote server.
- [Output Destination] can be specified, but the staple and hole punch cannot be
specified.
- The [Pages per Side] feature can be specified only when you print PDF files.
- HTTP or HTTPS can be used for the communications between the machine and a
remote server.
- Printable file formats are [TIFF], [PDF], and [XPS].
- Print data is spooled to the hard disk of the machine, and then printed as a job.
Therefore, the print data is recognized as a job while the data is being spooled to the
hard disk.
- The Secure Print feature cannot be used.
- Printing is available even when [Auto Print] is set to [On] under [Machine Clock /
Timers].
- "Web Applications - Print" is displayed on the [Job Status] screen.
- The <Online> indicator is unlit while the print data is being spooled to the hard disk.
 Job Flow Settings for High Compression Format

When [MRC High Compression] is set to [On] under [File Format] for the Scan features,
select one of the alternatives for each setting item:
- Color Scanning: [Auto Detect], [Color], or [Grayscale]
- Reduce / Enlarge: [100%]
- File Format (without thumbnail specification): [PDF], [DocuWorks], or [XPS]
- File Format (with thumbnail specification): [DocuWorks] or [XPS]
Important • If settings other than the above are used, you can register a Job Flow sheet on the machine, but an
error occurs when the machine executes the Job Flow and the Job Flow cannot be carried out.
 Addresses Registered on Job Flows

If you specify a speed dial or an address registered on the Address Book when creating a job
flow on the machine, any subsequent change of the number or address on the Address Book
is not reflected on the job flow created. To transmit to the changed address, you must
directly correct the address registered on the job flow.
Appendix
Notes and Restrictions on the Security Features
 Encrypted Communication
Encrypting HTTP communication enables you to encrypt communication data for IPP 16
printing (SSL encrypted communication). The data is encrypted only on the network, but
send data itself is not encrypted.
 Secure Watermark Kit (Optional)

 When the Secure Watermark Kit (optional) is installed and [Secure Watermark Detection]
is set to [On], document scanning speed becomes slow if the following scanning settings
are selected:
745
16 Appendix
- Color Scanning: [Black & White]

- Resolution: [200 dpi]
- 2 Sided Scanning: [2 Sided (Head to Head)] or [2 Sided (Head to Toe)]
 Allow User to Disable Active Settings (for Forcible Printing Features)

This feature cannot apply to the ordinary print jobs. This feature is applicable to the jobs
stored in the machine and then printed by the instruction from the touch screen, such as
Copy, Secure Print, Private Charge Print, Print Stored File, Media Print - Text, and Media Print
- Photos.
Notes and Restrictions on the Authentication and Accounting Features
 Login to Remote Accounts (ApeosPort Series Models Only)


When the authentication server performs print or direct fax using Kerberos Server, trying
to authenticate with the user information authenticated by the machine will be failed.

When you change Login Type to or from [Login to Remote Accounts], user information,
private folders, and Job Flow sheets registered on the machine will be deleted.
 ApeosWare Authentication Management and ApeosWare Authentication Agent do not
support the feature to automatically obtain the certificate of the authenticated users
from a remote server.
 Remote Authentication and ApeosWare Authentication Management and ApeosWare

Authentication Agent (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
 The remote authentication server that ApeosWare Authentication Management (sold
separately) and ApeosWare Authentication Agent (sold separately) can use is Active
Directory only.

Color Access is available but the limit for the maximum number of pages is not available.
 Remote Authentication using the Smart Card

 Remote Authentication can be performed in an environment where Active Directory of
ApeosWare Authentication Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Authentication
Agent (sold separately), or the combination of Active Directory, and ApeosWare
Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent is used.
 Change the default realm name only when you want to use a different realm name.
Notes and Restrictions for Using SMB

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using SMB.
Appendix

 IP addresses are managed for the entire system. Configure the settings only after
consulting your network administrator.
16  The setting of subnet mask and gateway addresses may be required depending on the
network environment. Consult your network administrator and configure the required
settings.


IP addresses are managed for the entire system. Configure the settings only after
746
 When setting the network such as IP addresses with a host used under the Network
Information Service (NIS), consult your NIS administrator.
 SMB Authentication
When an IP address or a host name is used to designate the authentication server for SMB
authentication, even if the domain name is incorrect, the authentication succeeds if the
correct user name and passcode are entered.
Notes and Restrictions for Using TCP/IP

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using TCP/IP (LPD).



The setting of subnet mask and gateway addresses may be required depending on the
network environment. Consult your network administrator and configure the required
settings.
 When the port status is set to [Enabled], it may automatically switch to [Disabled] if the
machine has insufficient memory. In this case, either set an unused port to [Disabled] or
adjust the assigned memory size.

Adjust the receiving buffer size for LPD in [Receiving Buffer - LPD] according to usage. If
the receiving buffer size is smaller than the transmitted data, the machine may not be
able to receive the data.


 When setting the network such as IP addresses with a host used under the Network
Information Service (NIS), consult your NIS administrator.
 Turning Off the Machine

Check the following points when turning off the machine:

When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [Spool to Memory]
All print data spooled within the machine memory, including the data which is being
printed, is erased. The print data does not remain when the machine is turned on again.
However, if the machine was turned off immediately after a computer instructed a print
job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, when the machine is turned on, the
data stored on the computer is printed before any jobs instructed subsequently.
Appendix
 When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [Spool to Hard Disk]

All print data spooled in the machine hard disk, including the data which is being printed,
is saved. In this case, when the machine is turned on, the data stored on the machine hard
disk is printed before any jobs instructed subsequently. 16
 When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [No Spooling]
All print data spooled in the machine receiving buffer, including the data which is being
printed, is erased. The print data does not remain when the machine is turned on again.
However, if the machine was turned off immediately after a computer instructed a print
job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, when the machine is turned on, the
data stored on the computer is printed before any jobs instructed subsequently.
747
16 Appendix
 While Printing
 When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to either [Spool to Hard Disk] or [Spool to Memory]
If the transmitted print data size exceeds the available capacity of either hard disk or
memory, the print data is not received.
Note • When the print data exceeds the receivable size, some computers may immediately re-transmit the
print data. In this case, the computer appears to be not operating. Remedy this problem by
canceling the print data transmission from the computer.
 When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [No Spooling]
When the machine receives a print request from a computer, the machine cannot accept
print requests from any other computers.
 When a computer's IP address or a computer name is changed
When you change a computer's IP address or a computer name, queries and cancel
processes submitted from the machine are no longer executed correctly. Thus, turn the
machine off and on when there is no print data in the receiving buffer.
Note • From the control panel on the machine, you can cancel print jobs or force the machine to print the
jobs remaining in the receiving buffer. For more information on the operation, refer to "11 Job
Status" in the User Guide.
Notes and Restriction for Using Secondary Ethernet (Optional) (Type 2 (T2)
Model Only)
This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using Secondary Ethernet
(optional).
 The exceptions setting dialog box may be displayed when you access CentreWare
Internet Services using FQDN by Ethernet 2 while enabling [HTTP - SSL/TLS
Communication].
 The job log does not record Ethernet1 and Ethernet2 separately. You cannot identify
which network has transmitted a job.

The remaining level of consumables and the meter value information transmitted from
the machine are identical between Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2. When you use the software
which is not supplied by Fuji Xerox to check the machine usage status, please do not set
IP address to avoid the duplication of machine information. Instead of IP address, set the
machine-specific information such as UUID depending on the software you use.

When [LPD Print Queue] is set to [Job Submission Order], no priority of print order occurs
between Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2.
 The submission, status confirmation (lpq), and cancellation (lprm) of print jobs from
different hosts which have the same IP address are processed as the same host’s request.
Appendix

Port 9100 receives a print job from single line at one time even when two Ethernet
interface lines are used.

[Get IP Address from DHCP] of [IPv6 - DNS Server Setup] is available only for [TCP/ IP -
Network Settings (Ethernet 1)]. For [TCP/IP - Network Settings (Ethernet 2)], set the DNS
16 server address manually.
 On the [Properties] tab > [Connectivity] > [Protocols] > [TCP/IP] of CentreWare Internet
Services, selecting [Enabled] for [Dynamic DNS Registration] of both Ethernet 1 and
Ethernet 2 may cause the Dynamic DNS registration to fail. Select [Enabled] only for
either Ethernet 1 or Ethernet 2 to use the Dynamic DNS registration feature.
748
Notes and Restrictions for Using Bonjour

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using Bonjour.
 Supported Environment for Bonjour

Bonjour is available on Printer Setup Tool (Print Center, Printer Setup Utility) of Mac OS X
10.5/10.6, Mac OS X 10.7 Lion, OS X 10.8 Mountain Lion, OS X 10.9 Mavericks, or Macintosh
computers that use Safari. The Discovery feature of Bonjour is available only within the
same subnet.
 Printer Name
 If you change a printer name or a host name that is already assigned, documents may be
printed by a printer that is not selected.

If a printer name or a host name is duplicated on the same network, one of the duplicated
names is automatically changed by adding a number to avoid duplication.

If you change a printer name or a host name, because of the limitation on the number or
type of characters used, a name differing from the designated name may be assigned.
We recommend that you not change printer names or host names.
Notes and Restrictions for IPv6 Connection

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using IPv6 connection.

Printing via IPv6 supports the following versions of the operating systems.
- Windows Vista
- Windows 7
- Windows 8
- Windows 8.1
- Windows Server 2008
- Windows Server 2008 R2
- Windows Server 2012
- Windows Server 2012 R2
- Linux distribution that Common Unix Printing System supports IPv6 and is printable

IPv6 does not support the following protocols:
- UPnP Discovery
 Some features of SMB are not supported (If you attempt to use services with a NetBIOS
name, communication may not be available in some environment).
 IPv6-in-IPv4-tunneling in the machine itself is not supported.
Appendix
Important • If [IP Mode] is set to [IPv6 Mode], the IPv6-inIPv4-tunneling cannot be performed.
 If more than one router exist in the same subnet, a communication error may occur.
 In a dual stack environment, some services may cause performance problems depending
on the network settings (for example, when you attempt to set the machine to prioritize
IPv6 in an environment where the Web server is started with IPv4). 16

In a multi-prefix environment (where multiple IPv6 global addresses are used), data
transmission from the machine to a device installed on another network may fail.
 In a multi-prefix environment (where multiple IPv6 global addresses are used), an address
that is not assigned to the machine may be used for communication.
749
16 Appendix
 The machine may be assigned an unavailable address, such as site local addresses (fec0::)
or the documentation prefix (2001:db8::/32), as an autoconfigured IPv6 address or as an
IPv6 DNS server address.
 The machine may use the DNS information for IPv4 rather than that for IPv6 if: the
machine is in Dual Stack mode, the DNS information for both IPv4 and IPv6 is configured,
the machine is to be communicate with a device that is specified using the FQDN, and the
machine has just been turned on.

The machine may display an incorrect machine address.
Example:
Either the IPv4 or IPv6 address is not displayed in Dual Stack mode.
A different IPv6 address is displayed.
 When a document is printed via an IPv6 network, the Secure Watermark feature is not
available.
 A time synchronization server cannot be specified in IPv6 format. Use the IPv4 format to
specify a time synchronization server directly.
 WINS does not support IPv6 communication.

When a self-signed certificate is used for SSL communication, observe the following
restrictions when specifying the printer URL:
- When specifying the machine by using the domain name (for IPv4 or IPv6):
Set the host name and domain name for the machine before creating a self-signed
certificate.
Example:
When the FQDN is "csw.ipv6.domain.local", specify csw for the host name, and
ipv6.domain.local for the domain name.
- When specifying the machine by using the IPv4 address:
Import a self-signed certificate that is created in IPv4 or Dual-Stack mode.
- When specifying the machine by using the IPv6 address:
Secure IPP (IPP-S) communication is not available.

When IPv6 is enabled and IPv4 is disabled on the machine, you cannot specify a storage
location for the Browse function of the Scan to PC (SMB) service.
 When the Scan to PC (FTP) service is used, only ASCII characters can be used for file
names.

In the following cases, since the addresses may not be recognized as those of the same
machine, the lpq command (for status check) and the lprm command (for canceling) may
not be available for LPD print jobs.
- When simultaneously operating IPv4 and IPv6 addresses with the same host
- When simultaneously operating multiple IPv6 addresses with the same host
 IPv6 addresses may not be correctly recorded on job logs. Use an IPv4 network for correct
Appendix
logging.

When searching a device outside the router via SMB, directly specify the address.
Multicasting is supported only within a local link (FF02::1).
16 
In an IPv6 environment without a DNS server, if a computer name is specified in the SMB
server settings for SMB authentication, the authentication fails. Specify the IPv6 address
directly for a computer name of the authentication server.
 If you specify an IPv6 address as a destination URL using a remote access service, such as
DocuShare, the address does not operate correctly. In an IPv6 environment, use a DNS
server and specify a remote service's destination URL by using the FQDN.
750
Notes and Restrictions for Print E-mail
 Print E-mail
The machine cancels receiving e-mails but does not display error codes when disk space is
insufficient.
Appendix
16
751
16 Appendix
Using the Telephone
This section describes how to use an external telephone connected to the machine with the
Fax feature.
Placing a Call
The following describes how to place a call using the external telephone.
To place a call, the following two methods can be used:
 Dialing with the receiver lifted (off-hook dialing)
 Dialing with the receiver resting in the cradle (on-hook dialing)
Off-hook Dialing
The following describes how to place a call with off-hook dialing.
1 Pick up the receiver of the external telephone.

Note • While the machine is in the Power Saver
mode, you cannot place a call using the
external telephone. To place a call, press the
<Power Saver> button to exit the Power Saver
mode.
2 Specify the call destination.


The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad, address numbers, or one-
touch buttons. The Address Book cannot be used.
 The call destination can be specified also
with the keyboard displayed on the screen.
Note • To disconnect the call, select [Close].
• If your telephone line is set to touch-tone,
[Tone (:)] does not appear.
• If you want to send tones (or to use the
touch-tone services) while using a pulse line,
select [Tone (:)].
• Some touch-tone services may not be
available even if you set your telephone to send tones.
3 When the call is connected, start speaking.
Appendix
4 When the call is finished, place the receiver back in the cradle.
Important • Be sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line remains "busy".
5 Select [Close].
16 On-hook Dialing
The following describes how to place a call with on-hook dialing. Adjust the line monitor
volume so that you can hear the sound clearly.
The volume of the line monitor can be changed in the System Administration mode. For more information on how to change
the volume, refer to "Line Monitor Volume" (P.165). By factory default, the volume is set to [Soft].
752
Using the Telephone
1 On the Services Home screen, select [Fax/

Internet Fax].
2 Select the [More Options] tab, and then select

[On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)].
3 Specify the call destination.

 The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad, address numbers, or one-
touch buttons. The Address Book cannot be used.
 The call destination can be specified also
with the keyboard displayed on the screen.
Note • To disconnect the call, select [Line Cut].
• If your telephone line is set to touch-tone,
[Tone (:)] does not appear.
• If you want to send tones (or to use the
touch-tone services) while using a pulse line,
select [Tone (:)].
• Some touch-tone services may not be
available even if you set your telephone to send tones.
4 When the call is connected, lift the receiver and
start speaking.
5 After the call is finished, place the receiver back in the cradle.
Appendix
Important • Make sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line remains "busy".
16
753
16 Appendix
Activity Report
You can print activity reports to check whether a transmission is successfully completed or
not. In the report, a remote terminal name and a result or a status of each operation are
recorded by outgoing and incoming transmission.
Note • The use of ApeosWare Log Management (sold separately) or ApeosWare Accounting Service (sold
separately) allows you to import the contents of an Activity Report to a computer. For information
on ApeosWare Log Management and ApeosWare Accounting Service, refer to the manuals provided
with the software.
For information on how to print the activity report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.120).
Item Description
No. The serial numbers for transmissions is shown.
Doc. Job numbers that the machine automatically assigned to
documents when the documents were received.
Appendix
16
754
Activity Report
Item Description
Remote Station Information on recipient to which transmission is made is recorded
in the following order of priority.
 Transmitting (speed dialing)

1. Recipient
2. Remote terminal name
3. G3 ID (including spaces)
4. Tel. No.
5. Communication mode EC (or G3, SG3)
When IP Fax (SIP) is used:

1. Recipient
4. SIP address
5. Communication mode IP Fax or IP Fax-ECM
 Transmitting (when all digits are dialed)

3. Tel. No.

3. Tel. No.
4. SIP address
 Receiving

Note • You can set the number of character digits displayed for the
recipient whether the first 40 digits or the last 40 digits. For
Appendix
details on setting up, see "Activity Report - Recipient" (P.178).

The factory default displays the first 40 digits.
Start Time The date and time that the communication began are shown.
In Batch Send, the start time of the transmission for each
document is recorded. 16
Duration The duration of the transmission is displayed. In Batch Send, it is
the length of time taken to transmit each document is recorded.
755
16 Appendix
Item Description
Pages "-" is shown when the number of pages is 0.
 Transmitting
The number printed on the left side of the slash "/" indicates the
number of pages that were successfully transmitted. The number
printed on the right side of the slash "/" indicates the number of
total pages. In Batch Send, the number of total pages is not shown.
 Receiving/Polling
The number of pages that the machine successfully received is
shown.
Note • Depending on the transmission status on the recipient's
machine or the setting of the machine, the value in [Pages]
may differ from the actual number of pages printed.
Mode The mode used for the communication is shown.
There are three modes: G3, EC, and SG3 (Super G3). (This field is
blank if a mode other than above these was used.)
IP Fax or IP Fax-ECM
Contents The information about the communication is indicated.
See the Note field at the bottom of the report for a list of
abbreviations and their definitions.
 Transmitting
1. Remote service
2. Redial
3. Folder XXX
4. Broadcast/Multi-Poll
5. Polling
6. Relay Broadcast Assignment
7. Fax forwarding box XXX

1. Redial
2. Folder XXX
3. Broadcast/Multi-Poll
4. Polling
 Receiving
1. Folder XXX
2. Polling
3. Receiving line box XXX
Appendix

1. Folder XXX
2. Polling
16 3. Receiving line box XXX
Note • XXX indicates the Folder number.
756
Activity Report
Item Description
Status The result of the operation is indicated.
Completed : The operation ended normally.
Busy : The recipient is busy or did not answer.
Auto Send : The document is being re-sent and the set re-
send times has not been exceeded.
Canceled : The communication was terminated.
Check Remote : An error caused by the recipient or the line
Station during communication.
Send Again : The document must be re-sent because the re-
send times have reached the maximum due to
a transmission error.
Receive Again : A polling request must be re-sent due to a
polling reception error. Or, you must ask a
sender to resend the document due to a
reception error.
Disconnected : Check that the line is properly connected.
When IP Fax (SIP) is used, check that the
network cable is properly connected.
XXX-XXX : Error code
For more information on lines, refer to "2 Product Overview > "Machine
Components" > "Telephone line connectors" in the User Guide and for more
information on XXX-XXX (error code), refer to "Error Code" (P.494).
For more information on how to connect network cables, refer to "Using the
Ethernet Interface" (P.25).
Total All pages received or sent are recorded.
Appendix
16
757
16 Appendix
EP System
Electronic Partnership (EP) is a system to automatically control or maintain the machine by

connecting the machine and the EP center of Fuji Xerox.
You can use the EP system via the Internet.
The following describes how to use the EP system on the machine.
Note • The services provided by the EP system are available only when the machine is switched on.
• The EP system may not be available in your region. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Customer
Proxy server
EP-BB
the Internet
Customer’s Fuji Xerox
intranet EP Center
The following services are available for EP system:
 Automated Meter Reading

The machine automatically reports the meter readings at a scheduled date and time every
month. You can check the previous meter readings by selecting [Billing Information].
Note • [Billing Information] can be displayed when the EP system is used. For more information, refer to
"Billing Information" (P.136).
 Check or Maintenance Request of the Machine

When a check or maintenance is required, the machine sends a check or maintenance
request to our Customer Support Center. A service representative visits you as required. This
operation should be performed by a system administrator.
 Automated Alert Notification

When a problem occurs, the machine performs a self-diagnosis and automatically notifies
the problem to our Customer Support Center.
A service representative visits you in response to the notification.
 Timely Delivery of Consumables

Appendix
The machine notifies us of the used amount of consumables such as toner cartridges. We
send you consumables based on usage track records.
 Remote Modification of the Settings

16 We can remotely change the machine settings as you request. For more information on
each setting, contact our Customer Support Center.
 Software Upgrade
When the software requires an upgrade, you can download a newer version of the software
and upgrade it.
For information on software upgrade, refer to "Software Upgrade" (P.180).
758
Glossary
Glossary
Term Description
Border Limit One more sheet is used when the length of the transmitted
(Page split threshold value) document exceeds the length of paper installed on the receiving
terminal. A margin at the bottom of a received document can be
eliminated so that the data can be printed on one page.
The amount of space that can be removed from the bottom of a
document is the border limit. When the border limit value is small,
the data is printed on the next page. But when it is large, a larger
space can be cut so that data can be printed on one page.
Communication(s) A communications network that can offer voice data (telephone),
image data (fax), video data (videotex) and PC data (PC
communication service) over the same channel.
In this guide, it is mostly referred to as transmitting/receiving
images as well as speaking with a remote user.
Dial In this guide, it refers to entering a recipient's fax number.
The method of dialing provided by the machine include: manual
dialing using the numeric keypad, speed dialing, one-touch
dialing, and using the Address Book, etc.
Dial Tone A tone generated from the telephone line. It indicates that you
are connected to the line.
ECM Error Correction Mode.
A type of G3 transmission. ECM transmission sends the document
image data in segments and retransmits segments that the
remote machine receives incorrectly.
"ECM" described on the [Activity Report] shows that the
communication was processed using ECM.
Fax Gateway Connects the Internet network to regular telephone lines, enabling
e-mail documents to be sent as fax documents to regular fax
machines.
Fax Server A feature that transfers image data received by the machine to a
Server Fax server and transfers image data received by a Server
Fax server to the machine via a network based on the settings you
made.
Using this feature enables you to manage multiple machines.
F Code A transmission method defined by Communications and
Information Network Association of Japan (CIAJ) for use of T.30*
sub-addresses standardized by ITU-T. Between the machines with
the F Code feature, including those manufactured by other
Appendix
companies, various features making use of F Code can be used. (*:

Communication standard)
With the Internet Fax feature of the machine, you can use F Code
to forward fax documents received in folders by e-mail.
F4800 This refers to communicating with a remote terminal outside the
country.
16
It is also one of the Transmission Mode selections that reduces
transmission speed to enable reliable communications even under
poor line conditions.
G3 A facsimile communication system standardized by the advisory
committee for International Telecommunications (CCITT, now
the ITU-T).
759
16 Appendix
Term Description
Header A record of the sender. It is printed on the top edge of a received
document.
ICM Image Color Matching.
A color management software used with Windows 2000, Windows
XP, and Windows Server 2003. It corrects device-dependent color
differences to match the colors printed on your output with the
colors displayed on your screen.
Internet Fax Unlike a regular fax machine, Internet Fax uses corporate
networks or the Internet to send or receive e-mail (TIFF
attachments).
Line Monitor Allows you to audibly monitor a transmission through the speaker
after dialing and until you are connected.
Local Device This term refers to this machine. This is a general term for
terminals such as telephones, facsimile machines, personal and
computers.
Off-hook Dialing Dialing with the handset off the hook.
On-hook Dialing Dialing with the handset on the cradle.
Polling A feature that allows you to retrieve a document from a remote
machine.
Profile A protocol controlling image resolution, paper size, and other
attributes when sending or receiving faxes using Internet Fax. The
profiles that can be used vary with the Internet fax of the remote
terminal. When specifying a profile, check that it can be handled
by the other party's Internet Fax-enabled machine.
Recipient The person or terminal you send a document to. "Dialing"
indicates the operation of entering a recipient's telephone
number.
For Internet Fax, this refers to the recipient's e-mail address.
Remote Terminal A terminal with which you want to communicate. This is a general
term for terminals such as telephones, facsimile machines and
personal computers.
Receiving Paper Size A feature that specifies the output paper size for received fax
documents. The specified paper size will be declared to recipients
from the sender.
Send Password This feature requires to enter an "S" and the ID of a remote
terminal after entering its fax number. This prevents transmission
errors.
Super G3 (SG3) A G3 communication system conforming to ITU V.34.
This system offers higher transmission speed (33.6 kbps) than the
Appendix
normal G3 mode.
Transmission Interval The period between transmissions.
16
760
Index
Index
Numerics auditron reports ........................................................... 127, 128
authentication......................................... 140, 324, 440, 746
2 pages up on receipt ........................................................... 265 authentication feature is disabled .................................. 438
2 sided color scanning calibration........................ 112, 176 authentication system setup............................................. 233
2 sided copying (default value)........................................ 208 authentication/security settings ...................................... 323
2 sided printing .......................................................................266 authorization groups............................................................. 427
2 sided report ........................................................................... 178 auto clear........................................................................... 32, 161
auto clear alert tone.............................................................. 165
A auto display of login screen ............................................... 166
auto job promotion ............................................................... 191
access control........................................................................... 325 auto job release ...................................................................... 161
according to print auditron ................................................ 330 auto paper off.......................................................................... 212
account administration........................................................ 447 auto paper select.................................................................... 171
accounting ..................................................................... 313, 746 auto print................................................................................... 161
accounting login screen settings...................................... 319 auto receive .............................................................................. 133
accounting type ...................................................................... 318 auto reduce on receipt ......................................................... 265
accounting/billing device .................................................... 321 auto tray switching control ................................................ 173
accounting/billing device settings ................................... 320 auto validation of speed dial entry................................. 204
activity report......................................................121, 177, 754 automatic tray selection ........................................................62
add address book entry ....................................................... 303 automatically configured IPv6 address ........................ 224
add domain name to user name...................................... 243 automatically printed reports ........................................... 129
add fax comment................................................................... 312
add me to "cc" field................................................................277 B
add me to "to" field................................................................277
address book ................................................................. 125, 126 background pattern (secure watermark)...................... 185
address book settings ........................................................... 278 background pattern (watermark) .................................... 182
address type ............................................................................. 305 background suppression........................................... 175, 213
addresses to bypass proxy server..................................... 226 background suppression (default value)............ 208, 253
adjust image transfer ................................................ 180, 667 background suppression level ........................................... 257
adjust paper registration..................................................... 180 banner sheet ............................................................................ 248
alert tone ................................................................................... 165 banner sheet offset ............................................................... 248
allocate memory..................................................................... 244 banner sheet tray ................................................................... 248
allow casual users to edit from field............................... 277 base tone ................................................................................... 164
allow guest users to edit from field................................. 277 batch send................................................................................. 264
allow to edit from if search failed....................................277 bates stamp.............................................................................. 211
allow to edit from if search found ................................... 277 billing........................................................................................... 310
allow user to disable active settings ............................... 332 billing data list ......................................................................... 126
alternative name for account ID ..................................... 319 billing information ................................................................. 136
Index
alternative name for user ID .................................. 319, 327 Block Inbound Faxes............................................................. 267
annotations ..............................................................................210 block unknown fax numbers .............................................. 267
annotations - comment density ....................................... 213 Bonjour ............................................................................ 218, 345
annotations - create comments ....................................... 214 booklet finishing .......................................................... 648, 651
applicable lines........................................................................ 643 Booklet Maker Unit for Finisher-B1....................................94
audio tones ............................................................................... 164 booklet staple cartridge....................................... 94, 95, 624
auditron mode......................................................................... 318 BOOTP......................................................................................... 222
761
border limit................................................................................ 265 connectivity .............................................................................. 640
bottom left cover.................................................................... 596 connectivity & network setup............................................ 215
broadcast and multi-poll report........................................ 177 constant velocity transport glass..................................... 106
broadcast checkbox on 1st tab......................................... 263 consumables..................................................................... 78, 168
broadcast report ..................................................................... 129 consumables status notice (by e-mail).......................... 358
broadcast starting rate ........................................................ 272 continuous copy...................................................................... 636
bypass tray................................................................................ 599 continuous copy speed ...................................633, 634, 635
continuous print speed......................................................... 638
C contrast ............................................................................208, 252
control panel ...............................................................................31
C3 Finisher.......................................................92, 98, 604, 623 control panel alert tone ....................................................... 164
C3 Finisher with booklet maker control panel select tone..................................................... 164
.......................................................... 92, 95, 98, 604, 609, 623 convert custom size to standard size ............................. 279
calibration ................................................................................. 176 copy ............................................................................................. 205
center erase and binding edge erase............................. 209 copy control.............................................................................. 212
center tray................................................................................. 604 copy defaults............................................................................ 206
center unit ................................................................................. 604 copy output .............................................................................. 210
CentreWare Internet Services ........... 347, 350, 363, 744 copy reports.............................................................................. 122
certificate revocation retrieval settings ........................ 242 copy service settings ............................................................. 205
chain dial ................................................................................... 263 copying a job flow sheet ..................................................... 303
change account limit ............................................................ 315 cover page................................................................................. 308
changing the paper size..........................................................68 cover tray................................................................................... 211
changing the paper type........................................................74 covers .......................................................................................... 211
charge print jobs..................................................................... 321 create authorization groups .............................................. 326
charge rate per unit............................................................... 320 create fax group recipients ................................................ 311
charge/private print settings ............................................. 330 create folder ............................................................................. 292
check document guides position...................................... 204 create job flow sheet ............................................................ 294
check EP connection.............................................................. 178 create job flow sheet keyword .......................................... 303
check folder passcode .......................................................... 293 create new job flow sheet................................................... 296
check smart card details...................................................... 179 create text string .................................................................... 186
cleaning the machine ........................................................... 102 create/view user accounts .................................................. 313
client print ................................................................................. 184 Creating Fax Group Recipients ......................................... 311
coding method ........................................................................ 643 creating job flow sheet ........................................................ 438
color balance............................................................................ 208 current system software...................................................... 119
color capability........................................................................ 628 custom button ............................................................................37
color scanning.......................................................................... 252 custom buttons ....................................................................... 166
color shift................................................................................... 208 custom colors ........................................................................... 214
color space ..................................................................... 253, 257 custom digital watermark................................................... 184
Index
comment position.................................................................. 213 custom secure watermarks................................................. 185

common service settings..................................................... 160 customize paper supply screen......................................... 171
company logo.......................................................................... 271 customize user prompts....................................................... 318
configuration report.............................. 122, 123, 124, 125
configuring the SNMP port...................................... 375, 383 D
confirmation options ............................................................ 262
connect with accounting/billing device......................... 320 data encryption....................................................................... 201
connection interval................................................................ 161 data indicator .......................................................................... 204
762
Index
date stamp................................................................................ 211 drum cartridge conservation mode................................. 204

daylight savings ...................................................................... 162 dual color - non-target area color .................................... 207
decoding passcode ................................................................183 dual color - source color ....................................................... 207
default language.................................................................... 167 dual color - target area color ............................................. 207
default print paper size........................................................ 191 duplex module......................................................................... 602
default programming ........................................................... 132 duplex output unit ................................................................. 644
default secure watermark................................................... 185
default watermark ................................................................. 181 E
default watermark effect.................................................... 181
delay start.................................................................................. 309 edge erase ................................................................................. 208
delay start - specific time .................................................... 262 edge erase - left & right edges.......................................... 266
delete all certificates and initialize settings ................ 181 edge erase - top & bottom edges ......................... 253, 266
delete all data.......................................................................... 179 edge erase (default value).................................................. 253
delete expired files................................................................. 293 edit e-mail recipients............................................................. 277
delete files after retrieval.................................................... 293 editing a job flow sheet ....................................................... 303
delete folder ............................................................................. 294 e-mail................................................................................ 358, 366
delete form................................................................................ 245 e-mail address............................................................... 305, 314
delete remote accounts ....................................................... 329 e-mail control ........................................................................... 275
deleting a job flow sheet..................................................... 303 e-mail encryption.................................................................... 417
delivery confirmation method .......................................... 273 e-mail notification.................................................................. 358
delivery receipts/read receipts .......................................... 262 e-mail notification service................................................... 219
device access ............................................................................ 325 e-mail sending when search failed.................................. 277
DHCP ...........................................................................................222 e-mail subject........................................................................... 254
DHCP/AutoIP............................................................................ 223 e-mail/internet fax service settings................................. 275
digital signature........................................................... 410, 417 emulation .................................................. 640, 670, 689, 697
dimensions ......637, 645, 646, 647, 648, 649, 651, 652 enable file print (web applications) ................................ 291
direct fax....................................................................................267 encryption ................................................................................. 410
DNS server................................................................................. 359 encryption key for confidential data.............................. 202
document cover ........................................................... 104, 105 energy saver timers ............................................................... 163
document feeder ...............................................615, 616, 644 entering text................................................................................43
document feeder quiet mode ...........................................204 EP diagnostic request and repair request..................... 178
document feeder rollers....................................................... 108 EP proxy server ........................................................................ 227
document glass ............................................................ 104, 105 EP registration ......................................................................... 179
document jams .......................................................................615 EP system................................................................................... 758
document size............................................................... 628, 640 error code................................................................................... 494
document size/document weight ......................... 644, 645 error history report...................................................... 121, 134
document size/weight .......................................................... 645 ESC/P form memory .............................................................. 244
document tray capacity............................................ 644, 645 ESCP logical printers list....................................................... 123
Index
DocuWorks printer settings list ......................................... 124 ESCP settings list..................................................................... 123
DocuWorks signature............................................................ 421 Ethernet interface .....................................................................25
domain filter list........................................................... 124, 126 Ethernet rated speed ............................................................ 221
domain filtering ...................................................................... 243 Ethernet settings .................................................................... 221
domain name........................................................................... 226 expiration date for files in folder ..................................... 283
drum cartridge............................................................................78 extension tray .............................................................................65
763
F FTP Client .................................................................................. 375
FTP port...................................................................................... 371
F code.......................................................................................... 309
failed access log...................................................................... 327 G
fault tone................................................................................... 164
fax billing data ........................................................................ 320 G3 ................................................................................................. 270
fax comments list................................................................... 126 G3 line 1 to 3 - dial type ...................................................... 271
fax control ................................................................................. 262 G3 line 1 to 3 - fax ID ........................................................... 271
fax data in folder priority.................................................... 267 G3 line 1 to 3 - line type ...................................................... 271
fax defaults............................................................................... 261 G3 sender ID ............................................................................ 264
fax number................................................................................ 308 generation of URL link.......................................................... 258
fax received options.............................................................. 268 given name ............................................................................... 306
fax receiving mode ..................................................... 133, 265 guest user .................................................................................. 328
fax reports ................................................................................. 125
fax resolution ........................................................................... 643 H
fax screen default .................................................................. 260
fax service.................................................................................. 190 halftone/printable colors..................................................... 628
fax service settings ................................................................ 260 handling paper ...........................................................................61
fax transfer from address book ........................................ 273 hard clip area ........................................................................... 705
fax transfer maximum data size...................................... 274 HCF.....................................................................................600, 652
feature access.......................................................................... 315 HDD ............................................................................................. 628
feeding speed ............................................................... 645, 646 hole punch waste container..........................................97, 98
file format ................................................................................. 252 host name ................................................................................. 226
file transfer report - fax server ............................... 130, 178 HP-GL/2 auto layout memory ........................................... 244
filename format...................................................................... 257 HP-GL2 logical printers list.................................................. 123
files retrieved by client ......................................................... 279 HP-GL2 palette list ................................................................. 123
fine-tune 100% ...................................................................... 212 HP-GL2 settings list................................................................ 123
finisher adjustment ............................................................... 179 HTTP ............................................................................................ 336
finisher top cover.................................................................... 603 HTTP proxy server name ..................................................... 226
finisher transport.................................................................... 605 HTTPS.......................................................................................... 412
Finisher-A1 ..............................................................89, 602, 620 HTTPS proxy server name................................................... 227
Finisher-B1 ......................................................91, 97, 603, 621
folder list .................................................................................... 127 I
folder name .............................................................................. 293
folder report.............................................................................. 177 IC card reader .......................................................................... 445
folder selector list ................................................................... 126 ID card copy ............................................................................. 212
folder selector setup................................................... 266, 269 IEEE 802.1X settings............................................................. 242
folder service settings........................................................... 279 image enhancement............................................................. 176
image log control ................................................................... 187
Index
folding.............................................................................. 649, 651

font color (watermark)......................................................... 182 image quality........................................................................... 173
font list........................................................................................ 124 image quality trouble ........................................................... 458
font size (watermark)............................................................ 181 image rotation......................................................................... 210
fonts............................................................................................. 639 image shift................................................................................ 209
force annotation..................................................................... 185 image transfer screen........................................................... 257
force secure watermark ....................................................... 184 incoming e-mail print options ........................................... 275
FTP..................................................................................... 218, 370 incoming internet fax print options................................ 273
764
Index
index ............................................................................................308 JPEG logical printers list ....................................................... 123

inhibited paper ...........................................................................60 JPEG settings list..................................................................... 123
initialize hard disk................................................................... 179
internal fonts............................................................................ 654 K
internet fax control................................................................272
internet fax output destination........................................ 273 Kerberos server settings ....................................................... 233
internet fax path..................................................................... 272 keyboard input restriction................................................... 168
internet fax profile...................................................... 262, 310
internet fax subject ............................................................... 262 L
internet fax to e-mail............................................................ 279
internet fax to internet fax................................................. 279 language of the original...................................................... 254
internet printing protocol.................................................... 354 layout template ...................................................................... 186
internet service port .............................................................. 382 LDAP server and directory service settings .................. 234
internet services ...................................................................... 220 LED printhead .......................................................................... 102
interrupt mode ........................................................................ 321 lighten and darken................................................................. 208
IP Address.................................................................................. 119 lighten/darken ......................................................................... 261
IP Fax (SIP) ............... 218, 228, 271, 298, 305, 390, 736 lighten/darken (default value).......................................... 252
IPP ..................................................................................... 217, 354 limited paper ...............................................................................57
IPv4 - DNS server setup........................................................ 223 line 1 to 3 - company logo .................................................. 271
IPv4 - gateway address........................................................ 223 line monitor volume .............................................................. 165
IPv4 - IP address ..................................................................... 223 link job flow sheet to folder................................................ 294
IPv4 - IP address resolution................................................ 222 loading paper..............................................................................62
IPv4 - IP filter ........................................................................... 223 local accounting........................................................... 318, 429
IPv4 - subnet mask................................................................. 223 local name................................................................................. 270
IPv6 - address manual configuration.............................224 local terminal information.................................................. 270
IPv6 - DNS server setup........................................................ 224 login ............................................................................................. 140
Ipv6 - IP filter ........................................................................... 224 login credential to access destination ........................... 255
login to local accounts............................................... 428, 440
J login to remote accounts ......................................... 428, 440
login type................................................................................... 324
job complete tone.................................................................. 164 login user.................................................................................... 426
job completion notice........................................................... 358 logout confirmation screen ................................................ 327
job counter report .................................................................. 127 low toner alert tone ............................................................... 165
job flow error report ................................................... 130, 178 LPD .................................................................................... 217, 351
Job Flow Scanning ................................................................. 366 LPD print queue....................................................................... 249
job flow service settings....................................................... 281
Job Flow Sheets....................................................................... 382 M
Job Flows....................................................................................744
Index
job history report ......................................................... 121, 177 machine clock .......................................................................... 160
job status ................................................................................... 121 machine configuration.............................................. 120, 339
job status default ................................................................... 332 machine information ............................................................ 119
job template list...................................................................... 125 machine name......................................................................... 225
job template scanning ......................................................... 366 machine password ................................................................. 271
job ticket memory .................................................................. 244 machine ready tone .............................................................. 164
job with insufficient credit..................................................321 machine serial number......................................................... 119
765
machine status........................................................................ 118 O
machine timers........................................................................ 160
machine trouble...................................................................... 453 odd page 2 sided.................................................................... 192
machine’s e-mail address...............................225, 362, 401 off-hook dialing....................................................................... 752
manual receive ........................................................................ 133 one touch button.................................................................... 166
manual redial list - dial mode............................................ 263 on-hook dialing ....................................................................... 752
manual redial list - saved entries ..................................... 263 operating system..........................................................639, 643
manual send/receive default............................................. 265 operation of up and down buttons................................. 168
manually configured IPv6 address ................................. 224 optimize PDF for quick web view ..................................... 252
manually configured IPv6 address prefix..................... 224 optional components............................................................ 656
manually configured IPv6 gateway ............................... 224 original orientation......................................................210, 253
mask account ID..................................................................... 319 original size defaults ........................................214, 255, 270
mask user ID.................................................................. 319, 327 original type ........................................................207, 252, 261
maximum address entries .................................................. 275 original type - auto (black & white) ................................ 207
maximum data size per e-mail ......................................... 276 original type - auto (non-black & white) ....................... 207
maximum fill line....................... 63, 64, 65, 67, 70, 71, 72 original type - see-though paper...................................... 213
maximum image size............................................................ 309 out of paper warning tone ................................................. 165
maximum login attempts by system administrator outgoing and incoming e-mail settings ........................ 231
....................................................................................................... 329 output color .............................................................................. 207
maximum number of sets................................................... 214 output color (simple copy).................................................. 207
maximum power consumption.............................. 649, 651 output destination................................................................. 210
maximum split count............................................................ 277 output destination for e-mail............................................ 243
maximum stored pages..................................212, 256, 267 output size defaults............................................................... 256
maximum total data size .................................................... 276 output tray capacity ............................................................. 636
media print photos trouble ................................................ 493 overwrite hard disk ......................................................130, 333
media print service settings ............................................... 282
media print text trouble ...................................................... 492 P
memory ...................................................................................... 628
memory full procedure....................................212, 256, 267 pages per side.......................................................................... 210
Microsoft Office format settings ..................................... 254 paper color ................................................................................ 171
minimum passcode length ................................................. 330 paper guides................................................................................66
minimum passcode length for stored jobs .................. 284 paper jams ................................................................................ 594
mixed size originals...........................................208, 253, 261 paper size
mixed sized originals - 2 sided copy................................ 212 .................. 171, 628, 638, 646, 647, 648, 650, 651, 652
mixed sized originals scan mode ..................................... 267 paper size settings ................................................................. 192
multi-poll report ...................................................................... 130 paper supply............................................................................. 206
paper tray attributes............................................................. 170
N paper tray capacity ............................................................... 636
Index
paper tray priority .................................................................. 172

NAT/NAPT................................................................................. 738 paper tray status .................................................................... 120
network accounting.................................................... 318, 430 paper type ................................................................................. 171
network printer........................................................................ 344 paper type mismatch............................................................ 247
Network Scanning....................................................... 366, 374 paper type priority ................................................................. 172
notes and restrictions ........................................................... 715 paper types ..................................................................................46
NTP time synchronization................................................... 161 paper weight ............ 628, 644, 646, 647, 648, 650, 652
number of fax lines................................................................ 643 parallel ........................................................................................ 216
766
Index
parallel interface............................................................. 24, 346 print service settings ............................................................. 244

parallel port............................................................................... 346 print stored file ........................................................................ 184
passcode ....................................................................................140 print this sample list (secure watermark) ..................... 185
passcode entry for control panel login .......................... 329 print universal unique ID..................................................... 186
passcode entry for smart card login ............................... 329 print user ID.............................................................................. 248
passcode policy .......................................................................329 printable area ............................................................... 653, 706
password ....................................................................................307 printer lockout.......................................................................... 162
PCL font list............................................................................... 124 printer reports .......................................................................... 122
PCL macro list........................................................................... 123 printing a report/list .............................................................. 114
PCL settings list .......................................................................123 printing resolution....................................................... 628, 638
PDF direct print........................................................................ 685 print-on-demand duration.................................................. 163
PDF Settings List ..................................................................... 123 private charge print job ....................................................... 115
PDF settings list.......................................................................123 problem solving....................................................................... 451
PDF signature........................................................................... 421 profile for broadcast job...................................................... 272
PDF/DocuWorks/XPS signature settings ....................... 240 protection code ....................................................................... 184
PDL ............................................................................................... 638 protocol ...................................................................................... 638
photo & text and printed original....................................213 protocol settings ..................................................................... 221
photos - paper supply - button 1 to 5.............................282 protocol to receive e-mail.................................................... 243
polled documents - auto delete........................................ 264 proxy server............................................................................... 226
POP3 ................................................................................. 362, 401 pseudo-photo gradation mode......................................... 266
POP3 server settings.............................................................. 231 punch......................................................................647, 649, 651
port number..............................................................................308
port settings..............................................................................215 Q
Port9100 ......................................................................... 218, 351
postscript default color ........................................................ 248 quality/file size ........................................................................ 253
postscript font absence........................................................ 249 quality/file size for retrieval................................................ 280
postscript font list................................................................... 124 quantity display ...................................................................... 214
postscript font substitution ................................................ 249
postscript logical printers list ............................................. 123 R
postscript memory ................................................................. 244
postscript paper supply........................................................ 249 RARP ............................................................................................ 223
power consumption............................................................... 637 read receipts............................................................................. 276
power on self test ................................................................... 179 receive control ......................................................................... 330
power saver mode.....................................................................27 receive e-mail ................................................................ 219, 400
power supply .......................................................637, 649, 651 receiving buffer - IPP............................................................. 245
print & delete confirmation screen ................................. 279 receiving buffer - LPD ........................................................... 245
print area ................................................................................... 246 receiving buffer - parallel .................................................... 245
print delivery confirmation mail....................................... 276 receiving buffer - Port9100 ................................................ 245
Index
print e-mail................................................................................ 358 receiving buffer - USB........................................................... 245

print error notification e-mail............................................ 275 receiving e-mails ..................................................................... 401
print job confirmation screen............................................ 284 receiving paper size ............................................................... 265
print login name on PDF files ............................................ 259 receiving protocol................................................................... 362
print mode................................................................................. 131 reconfirm e-mail recipient................................................... 167
print order for all selected files ......................................... 284 reconfirm fax and internet fax recipient ...................... 167
print reports ................................................................... 120, 176 recording paper size .............................................................. 643
767
reduce 8.5 x 11" original to A4.......................................... 266 screen default .......................................................................... 166
reduce and enlarge................................................................ 206 screen defaults ........................................................................ 251
reduce/enlarge presets.............................................. 256, 270 screen type................................................................................ 176
re-enter broadcast recipients............................................. 262 searchable - page orientation ........................................... 258
re-enter group recipients ..................................................... 263 searchable - text compression........................................... 254
re-enter recipients .................................................................. 262 searchable text........................................................................ 254
re-enter speed dial recipients ............................................ 263 secure watermark................................................................... 183
registering a server to setup .............................................. 288 secure watermark and background contrast .............. 185
relay broadcast........................................................................ 309 secure watermark defaults ................................................. 184
remote authentication server............................................ 430 secure watermark detection .............................................. 183
remote folder ........................................................................... 309 security settings ...................................................................... 238
reset total impressions ......................................................... 316 semi standard paper ................................................................51
reset user account.................................................................. 316 send e-mail......................................................................219, 400
reset user accounts ................................................................ 317 sending document size ...................................642, 643, 644
resolution..............................................................253, 261, 308 separators.................................................................................. 211
response to read receipts .................................................... 275 separators tray ........................................................................ 210
restrict recipient selection method.................................. 204 server certificate verification settings............................ 286
restrict user to edit address book..................................... 204 server fax ................................................................................... 403
resume job after print error................................................ 247 server name/IP address ....................................................... 307
retrieve programming .......................................................... 131 service access .................................................................314, 325
ringing volume......................................................................... 165 service rep. restricted operation ....................................... 203
rotate 90 degrees................................................................... 264 Setting Restore Tool.............................................................. 116
setup............................................................................................ 292
S shadow suppression .............................................................. 253
shadow suppression level.................................................... 257
S/MIME............................................................................ 363, 402 shared name ............................................................................ 307
S/MIME certificate................................................................. 306 sharpness................................................................................... 208
sample job................................................................................. 210 sharpness (default value).................................................... 253
saturation ....................................................................... 208, 257 sheet filtering........................................................................... 296
save as charge print job....................................................... 332 side tray.................................................................595, 597, 652
save as private charge print job ....................................... 331 single color ................................................................................ 207
save deleted faxes ................................................................. 264 skip blank pages............................................................261, 267
save undelivered faxes......................................................... 264 smart card certificate verification ................................... 328
saved faxes - auto delete .................................................... 264 smart card link mode ............................................................ 328
scan ahead for copy job ...................................................... 321 Smart WelcomEyes................................................................ 164
scan defaults ............................................................................ 252 SMB....................................................................................217, 370
scan file transfer report ....................................................... 177 SMB port .................................................................................... 371
scan reports .............................................................................. 124 SMB server settings ............................................................... 237
Index
Scan to E-mail.......................................................................... 642 SMTP .................................................................................362, 401

Scan to My Folder ....................................................... 367, 377 SMTP server settings............................................................. 232
Scan to PC ............................................................366, 370, 642 SMTP-SSL and TLS communication................................ 239
scanning resolution ............................... 628, 640, 643, 644 SNMP........................................................................................... 218
scanning speed........................................................................ 640 SNMP port .......................................................................374, 382
screen after auto clear ......................................................... 166 SOAP............................................................................................ 220
screen and button settings................................................. 165 SOAP port .................................................................................. 382
screen brightness............................................................ 39, 167 software download................................................................ 203
768
Index
software options..................................................................... 179 TCP/IP .............................................................................. 351, 391

software upgrade ................................................................... 180 text - paper supply - button 2 to 5................................... 282
software version...................................................................... 120 ThinPrint..................................................................................... 221
space requirement ...................... 637, 647, 649, 651, 652 thumbnail - output e-mail................................................... 252
special media ..............................................................................56 thumbnail - Scan to PC......................................................... 252
split send method................................................................... 276 TIFF format .............................................................................. 257
SSL and TLS settings ............................................................. 238 TIFF logical printers list........................................................ 123
stacker capacity .................................................647, 648, 650 TIFF settings list...................................................................... 123
stamp ....................................................................... 99, 101, 261 time server address................................................................ 161
stamp replacement kit ............................................................78 time zone ................................................................................... 162
standard paper...........................................................................50 toner cartridge....................................................................78, 80
standard size threshold value............................................ 279 tools menu ................................................................................ 144
staple................................................................................ 647, 650 top left cover ................................................................. 595, 596
staple cartridge ..................78, 89, 91, 92, 620, 621, 623 touch screen ............................................................................. 104
staple jams................................................................................ 619 track print jobs......................................................................... 321
staple types..................................................................................78 track scan /fax jobs................................................................ 321
starting rate................................................................... 262, 308 track with cumulative device ............................................. 321
STATIC........................................................................................ 223 transfer protocol .......................................................... 255, 307
Store & Send Link ........................................................ 367, 384 transmission header text..................................................... 262
store & send link - e-mail subject...................................... 254 transmission header text - fax transfer ......................... 273
store & send link - maximum file size .............................259 transmission header text - polling ................................... 264
Store to Folder .............................................................. 366, 641 transmission interval............................................................. 264
Store to USB .................................................................. 366, 373 transmission mode ................................................................ 643
Store to WSD............................................................................ 386 transmission report................................................................ 129
stored file list............................................................................ 122 transmission report - job deleted ..................................... 177
stored file settings.................................................................. 283 transmission report - job undelivered.................. 129, 177
stored job expiration date ..................................................283 transmission screen ............................................................... 261
stored programming tone................................................... 165 transmission speed ................................................................ 643
storing paper ...............................................................................61 transmission time................................................................... 643
subnet mask..............................................................................359 tray capacity............................................................................. 652
substitute tray.......................................................................... 246 trouble during copying......................................................... 464
supplies....................................................................................... 135 trouble during printing ......................................................... 468
supported operating systems............................................ 345 trouble during scanning....................................................... 479
system administration mode.................................. 140, 143 troubleshooting....................................................................... 452
system administrator settings...........................................323 types of authentication ....................................................... 428
system administrator’s login ID ....................................... 323
system administrator’s meter (copy jobs).................... 318 U
system administrator’s passcode..................................... 323
Index
unable to copy......................................................................... 464

T unable to print ......................................................................... 468
unable to receive a fax......................................................... 475
T.38 .............................................................................................. 390 unable to send a fax ............................................................. 471
T.38 settings ............................................................................. 231 uncollated with separators................................................. 210
tandem tray module ............................................................. 598 unit (millimeters or inches)................................................. 201
TCP and IP - IP mode............................................................ 222 unregistered forms................................................................. 247
769
unregistered user.................................................................... 426 VoIP gateway .....................................................390, 394, 737
unusable paper...........................................................................61 VoIP gateway setup.............................................................. 230
UPnP discovery........................................................................ 219
URL file expiration ................................................................. 258 W
usable paper................................................................................52
USB.................................................................................... 216, 349 warm-up time .......................................................................... 628
USB interface..............................................................................23 waste toner container .............................................................78
USB memory device .............................................................. 168 web applications service setup ......................................... 286
use of smart card.................................................................... 328 web applications version..................................................... 290
user account billing information...................................... 137 web browser setup ................................................................. 290
user authentication operations ........................................ 449 WebDAV..................................................................................... 220
user details setup.................................................................... 327 website........................................................................................ 119
user ID......................................................................................... 140 weight ...............637, 645, 646, 647, 648, 649, 651, 652
user ID for login ...................................................................... 328 when smart card reader is connected............................ 328
user name....................................................................... 307, 314 white chute ............................................................................... 106
user name for FTP scan........................................................ 255 WSD ...................................................................................219, 345
user role...................................................................................... 315
X
V
xerox standard accounting ................................................ 318
verify user details ................................................................... 318 XPS print ticket processing ................................................. 249
view accounts........................................................................... 316 XPS signature ........................................................................... 421
Index
770
ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275
DocuCentre-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/C2275
Administrator Guide
ME6949E2-1 (Edition 1)
April 2014
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2014 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

Apeosportv c5575

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apeosportv c5575

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apeosportv c5575

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main features of the Type 2 model?

What are the main features of the Type 2 model?

What are some of the main components and parts of the machine?

What are some of the main components and parts of the machine?

ApeosPort-V C7775 DocuCentre-V C7775

ApeosPort-V C6675 DocuCentre-V C6675

About the Machine

The machine is the Type 2 (T2) model of ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/

Change Overview of the Type 2 (T2) Model

About the Machine .............................................................................................................................................. 3

1 Before Using the Machine .................................................................................................................. 17

2 Paper and Other Media........................................................................................................................ 45

4 Machine Status..................................................................................................................................... 117

Create/View User Accounts...................................................................................................................313

6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings........................................................................................335

7 Printer Environment Settings ..........................................................................................................343

8 E-mail Environment Settings ...........................................................................................................357

9 Scanner Environment Settings........................................................................................................365

10 Using IP Fax (SIP)................................................................................................................................ 389

Settings by System Configuration .....................................................................................................390

11 Using the Internet Fax Service........................................................................................................397

12 Using the Server Fax Service............................................................................................................403

13 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings .................................................................................409

14 Authentication and Accounting Features...................................................................................425

15 Problem Solving.................................................................................................................................... 451

Unable to Send a Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB)..................................481

Notes and Restrictions on Job Flows.................................................................................................744

Thank you for selecting the ApeosPort-V C7775/C6675/C5575/C4475/C3375/C3373/

referred to as "the machine").

The following guides are provided with the machine.

Before Using the Machine

 User Guide (Document CD-ROM)

 Administrator Guide (this guide) (Document CD-ROM)

 Quick Reference Guide (Booklet) 1

 Security Function Supplementary Guide (Document CD-ROM)

 Print Driver Help

 CentreWare Internet Services Help

Guides for Optional Components

Using This Guide

Organization of This Guide

 1 Before Using the Machine

1  2 Paper and Other Media

 6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings

 7 Printer Environment Settings

 8 E-mail Environment Settings

 9 Scanner Environment Settings

 10 Using IP Fax (SIP)

 11 Using the Internet Fax Service

 12 Using the Server Fax Service

 13 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings

 14 Authentication and Accounting Features

Before Using the Machine

> :  Path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel.

LEF Orientation SEF Orientation

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Before Using the Machine

Using the USB Interface

1 Press the push-button power switch to switch off the power.

6 Connect the USB cable to the USB 2.0 interface